+
Go to previous line history buffer
+
Rewrites or pastes the line
+
Go to next line in history buffer
+
Print last deleted character
+
Enables serial flow
+
Disables serial flow
+
Return to root command prompt
Command-line completion
end
Return to the root command prompt
exit
Go to next lower command prompt
List choices
Operating on Multiple Objects (Range)
The CLI allows the user to operate on the set of objects at the same time.
The guidelines are as follows for range operation:
•
Operations on objects with four or more instances support the range
operation.
Using the CLI
171
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 172 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
The range key word is used to identify the range of objects on which to
operate.
•
The range may be specified in the following manner:
(#-#) — a range from a particular instance to another instance
(inclusive). For example, 1/0/1-10 indicates that the operation applies to
the gigabit Ethernet ports 1 to 10 on unit 1.
(#, #, #) — a list of non-consecutive instances. For example, (1/0/1,
1/0/1,1/0/3, 1/0/5) indicates that the operation applies to the gigabit
Ethernet ports 1, 3, and 5 on unit 1.
(#, #-#, #) — ranges and non-consecutive instances listed together. For
example, (1/0/1, 1/0/3-5, 1/0/7) indicates that the operation applies to the
gigabit Ethernet ports 1, 3, 4, 5, and 7 on unit 1.
NOTE: Each port must be a fully qualified port identifier in the format
unit/slot/port. See Interface Naming Conventions on page 173.
•
To specify a range of LAGs, use the following command:
interface range port-channel 1-48
172
•
No spaces are allowed anywhere in a range parameter, e.g. gi1/0/1 -2 is not
accepted, nor is gi1/0/2, gi1/0/4. Use gi1/0/1-2 and gi/1/0/2,gi1/0/4
respectively.
•
When operating on a range of objects, the CLI implementation hides the
parameters that may not be configured in a range (for example, parameters
that must be uniquely configured for each instance).
•
The CLI uses best effort when operating on a list of objects. If the user
requests an operation on a list of objects, the CLI attempts to execute the
operation on as many objects in the list as possible even if failure occurs for
some of the items in the list. The CLI provides the user with a detailed list
of all failures, listing the objects and the reasons for the failures.
•
Some parameters must be configured individually for each port or
interface.
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 173 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Scripting
The CLI can be used as a programmable management interface. To facilitate
this function, any characters entered after the character are treated as a
comment and ignored by the CLI. Also, the CLI allows the user to disable
session timeouts.
CLI Command Notation Conventions
When entering commands there are certain command-entry notations which
apply to all commands. Table 2-3 describes these conventions as they are used
in syntax definitions.
Table 2-3.
CLI Command Notation Conventions
Convention
Description
[]
In a command line, square brackets indicate an optional entry.
{}
In a command line inclusive brackets indicate a selection of
compulsory parameters separated by the | character. One option
must be selected. For example: flowcontrol {auto | on | off}
means that for the flowcontrol command either auto, on or off
must be selected.
Italic
Indicates a variable.
Any individual key on the keyboard.
+
Any combination of keys pressed simultaneously on the keyboard.
Screen Display
Indicates system messages and prompts appearing on the
console.
all
Indicates a literal parameter, entered into the command as it is.
Interface Naming Conventions
The conventions for naming interfaces in CLI commands are as follows:
Ethernet Interfaces
The gigabit Ethernet and ten-gigabit Ethernet ports are identified in the CLI
by the variable unit/slot/port, where:
Using the CLI
173
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 174 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
Unit#/Slot#/Port# — Identifies a specific interface by
the interface type tag followed by the Unit# followed by a / symbol, then
the Slot# followed by a / symbol, and then the Port#. For example,
gi2/0/10 identifies the gigabit port 10 in slot 0 within the second unit on
a non-blade switch. Table 2-4 below lists the supported interface type
tags.
•
Unit # — The unit number is greater than 1 only in a stacking solution
where a number of switches are stacked to form a virtual switch. In this
case, the Unit# indicates the logical position of the switch in a stack. The
range is 1–12. The unit value is 1 for standalone switches.
•
Slot# — on page 1663
•
Port # — The port number is an integer number assigned to the physical
port on the switch and corresponds to the lexan printed next to the port on
the front or back panel. Ports are numbered from 1 to the maximum
number of ports available on the switch, typically 24 or 48.
Within this document, the tag interface–id refers to an interface identifier
that follows the naming convention above.
Table 2-4. Interface Identifiers
Interface Type
Long Form
Short Form
Identifier
Fast Ethernet
fastethernet
fa
unit/slot/port
Gigabit Ethernet
gigabitethernet
gi
unit/slot/port
10-Gigabit
Ethernet
tengigabitethernet te
unit/slot/port
Loopback
loopback
lo
loopback-id (0-7)
Port Channel
port-channel
po
port-channel-number
Tunnel
tunnel
tu
tunnel-id (0-7)
Vlan
vlan
vl
vlan-id (1-4093)
When listed in command line output, gigabit Ethernet interfaces are
preceded by the characters Gi, and ten-gigabit Ethernet interfaces are
preceded by Te, as shown in the examples below.
174
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 175 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Port Channel Interfaces
Port-channel (or LAG) interfaces are represented in the CLI by the variable
port-channel-number., which can can assume values from 1-48.
When listed in command line output, port channel interfaces are preceded by
the characters Po.
Loopback Interfaces
Loopback interfaces are represented in the CLI by the variable loopback-id,
which can assume values from 0–7.
VLAN Interfaces
VLAN interfaces are represented in the CLI by the variable vlan-id , which
can can assume values from 1-4093.
Tunnel Interfaces
Tunnel interfaces are represented in the CLI by the variable tunnel-id , which
can can assume values from 0–7.
Examples
Example #1
gigabitethernet 1/0/1
gigabitethernet1/0/1
(there is no space)
gi 1/0/1
gi1/0/1
(there is no space)
port-channel 1
vl 5
Example #2
console#show vlan
VLAN
Name
Ports
Type
-----
---------------
-------------
--------------
Using the CLI
175
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 176 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1
default
Po1-48,
Default
Gi1/0/1-24
Example #3
CLI Command Modes
Since the set of CLI commands is very large, the CLI is structured as a
command-tree hierarchy, where related command sets are assigned to
command modes for easier access. At each level, only the commands related
to that level are available to the user and only those commands are shown in
the context sensitive help for that level.
In this guide, commands are organized into three categories:
•
Layer 2 (Data Link Layer) commands
•
Layer 3 (Network Layer) commands
•
Utility Commands
Layer 2 (Data Link Layer) describes the logical organization of data bits
transmitted on a particular medium. This layer defines the framing,
addressing and checksumming of Ethernet packets.
Layer 3 (Network Layer) describes how a series of exchanges over various data
links can deliver data between any two nodes in a network. This layer defines
the addressing and routing structure of the Internet.
Utility describes commands used to manage the switch.
Commands that cause specific actions to be taken immediately by the system
and do not directly affect the system configurations are defined at the top of
the command tree. For example, commands for rebooting the system or for
downloading or backing up the system configuration files are placed at the
top of the hierarchy tree.
Commands that result in configuration changes to the switch are grouped in
a Configuration sub tree.
There are levels beneath the Configuration mode for further grouping of
commands. The system prompt reflects these sub-Configuration modes.
All the parameters are provided with reasonable defaults where possible.
176
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 177 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
When starting a session, the initial mode is the User EXEC mode. Only a
limited subset of commands is available in this mode. This level is reserved
for tasks that do not change the configuration. To enter the next level, the
Privileged EXEC mode, a password is required.
The Privileged EXEC mode provides access to commands that can not be
executed in the User EXEC mode and permits access to the switch
Configuration mode.
The Global Configuration mode manages switch configuration on a global
level. For specific interface configurations, command modes exist at a sublevel.
Entering a at the system prompt displays a list of commands available
for that particular command mode. A specific command is used to navigate
from one command mode to another. The standard order to access the modes
is as follows: User EXEC mode, Privileged EXEC mode, Global
Configuration mode, and Interface Configuration and other specific
configuration modes.
User EXEC Mode
After logging into the switch, the user is automatically in the User EXEC
command mode unless the user is defined as a privileged user. In general, the
User EXEC commands allow the user to perform basic tests, and list system
information.
The user-level prompt consists of the switch host name followed by the angle
bracket (>).
console>
The default host name is Console unless it has been changed using the
hostname command in the Global Configuration mode.
Privileged EXEC Mode
Because many of the privileged commands set operating parameters,
privileged access is password-protected to prevent unauthorized use. The
password is not displayed on the screen and is case sensitive.
Privileged users enter into the Privileged EXEC mode from User EXEC
mode, where the following prompt is displayed.
console#
Using the CLI
177
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 178 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Global Configuration Mode
Global Configuration commands apply to features that affect the system as a
whole, rather than just a specific interface. The Privileged EXEC mode
command configure is used to enter the Global Configuration mode.
console(config)#
The following are the Global Configuration modes:
•
SNMP v3 Host Configuration — Configures the parameters for the
SNMP v3 server host.
•
SNMP Community Configuration — Configures the parameters for the
SNMP server community.
Interface and Other Specific Configuration Modes
Interface configuration modes are used to modify specific interface
operations. The following are the Interface Configuration and other specific
configuration modes:
178
•
MST — The Global Configuration mode command spanning-tree mst
configuration is used to enter into the Multiple Spanning Tree
configuration mode.
•
Line Interface — Contains commands to configure the management
connections. These include commands such as line speed and timeout
settings. The Global Configuration mode command line is used to enter
the Line Interface mode.
•
VLAN Database — Contains commands to create a VLAN as a whole.
The Global Configuration mode command vlan database is used to enter
the VLAN Database mode.
•
Router OSPF Configuration — Global configuration mode command
router ospf is used to enter into the Router OSPF Configuration mode.
•
Router RIP Configuration — Global configuration mode command
router rip is used to enter into the Router RIP Configuration mode.
•
Router OSPFv3 Configuration — Global configuration mode command
ipv6 router ospf is used to enter into the Router OSPFv3 Configuration
mode.
•
IPv6 DHCP Pool Mode — Global configuration mode command ipv6
dhcp pool is used to enter into the IPv6 DHCP Pool mode.
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 179 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
Management Access List — Contains commands to define management
access administration lists. The Global Configuration mode command
management access-list is used to enter the Management Access List
configuration mode.
•
Policy-map — Use the policy-map command to access the QoS policy
map configuration mode to configure the QoS policy map.
•
Policy Class — Use the class command to access the QoS Policy-class
mode to attach or remove a diffserv class from a policy and to configure
the QoS policy class.
•
Class-Map — This mode consists of class creation/deletion and matching
commands. The class matching commands specify layer 2, layer 3 and
general match criteria. Use the class-map class-map-name commands to
access the QoS Class Map Configuration mode to configure QoS class
maps.
•
Stack — Use the stack command to access the Stack Configuration Mode.
•
Ethernet — Contains commands to manage Ethernet port configuration.
The Global Configuration mode command interface enters the Interface
Configuration mode to configure an Ethernet interface.
•
Port Channel — Contains commands to configure port-channels, i.e.,
assigning ports to a port-channel. Most of these commands are the same as
the commands in the Ethernet interface mode and are used to manage the
member ports as a single entity. The Global Configuration mode
command interface port-channel port-channel-number is used to enter
the Port Channel mode.
•
Tunnel — Contains commands to manage tunnel interfaces. The Global
Configuration mode command interface tunnel enters the Tunnel
Configuration mode to configure an tunnel type interface.
•
Loopback — Contains commands to manage loopback interfaces. The
Global Configuration mode command interface loopback enters the
Loopback Configuration mode to configure an loopback type interface.
•
SSH Public Key-chain — Contains commands to manually specify other
switch SSH public keys. The Global Configuration mode command crypto
key pub-key chain ssh is used to enter the SSH Public Key-chain
configuration mode.
Using the CLI
179
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 180 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
SSH Public Key-string — Contains commands to manually specify the
SSH Public-key of a remote SSH Client. The SSH Public-Key Chain
Configuration mode command user-key command is used to enter the
SSH Public-Key Configuration mode.
•
MAC Access-List — Configures conditions required to allow traffic based
on MAC addresses. The Global Configuration mode command macaccess-list is used to enter the MAC Access-List configuration mode.
•
TACACS — Configures the parameters for the TACACS server.
•
Radius — Configures the parameters for the RADIUS server.
•
SNMP Host Configuration — Configures the parameters for the SNMP
server host.
•
Crypto Certificate Request — Configures the parameters for crypto
certificate request.
•
Crypto Certificate Generation — Configures the parameters for crypto
certificate generate.
•
Logging — Configures the parameters for syslog log server.
•
Datacenter-Bridging — Contains priority-flow-control commands. The
datacenter-bridging command for an ethernt or port-channel interface is
used to enter the DataCenterBridging mode.
Identifying the Switch and Command Mode from the System Prompt
The system prompt provides the user with the name of the switch
(hostname) and identifies the command mode. The following is a formal
description of the system command prompt:
[device name][([command mode-[object]])][# | >]
[device name] — is the name of the managed switch, which is typically the
user-configured hostname established by the hostname command.
[command mode] — is the current configuration mode and is omitted for the
top configuration levels.
[object] — indicates specific object or range of objects within the
configuration mode.
For example, if the current configuration mode is config-if and the object
being operated on is gigabit ethernet 1 on unit 1, the prompt displays the
object type and unit (for example, 1/0/1).
180
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 181 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
[# | >] — The # sign is used to indicate that the system is in the Privileged
EXEC mode. The > symbol indicates that the system is in the User EXEC
mode, which is a read-only mode in which the system does not allow
configuration.
Navigating CLI Command Modes
Table 2-5 describes how to navigate through the CLI Command Mode
hierarchy.
Using the CLI
181
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 182 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Table 2-5. Navigating CLI Command Modes
Command Mode Access Method
Command Prompt
User EXEC
The user is
automatically in
User EXEC mode
unless the user is
defined as a
privileged user.
console>
Exit or Access
Previous Mode
logout
console#
Privileged EXEC Use the enable
command to enter
into this mode. This
mode is password
protected.
Use the exit
command, or
press
+
to return to the
User EXEC
mode.
Global
Configuration
From Privileged
EXEC mode, use
the configure
command.
console(config)#
Use the exit
command, or
press
+
to return to the
Privileged EXEC
mode.
Line Interface
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the line
command.
console(config-line)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Management
Access-List
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
management
access-list
command.
console(config-macal)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
182
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 183 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Access Method
Policy-Class-Map From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
policy-map class
command.
Class-Map
Command Prompt
Exit or Access
Previous Mode
console(config-policyclassmap)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
console(config-classmap)#
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the classmap command.
MAC Access List From Global
Configuration
mode, use the mac
access-list
command.
console(config-mac-accesslist)#
console(config-pubkeySSH Public Key- From Global
chain)#
Chain
Configuration
mode, use the
crypto key pubkeychain ssh
command.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Using the CLI
183
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 184 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Access Method
SSH Public Key
String
console(config-pubkey-key)# To return to the
From the SSH
Public Key- Chain
SSH Public keymode, use the userchain mode, use
key
the exit
command, or
{rsa | dsa}
press
command.
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
TACACS
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
tacacs-server host
command.
console(tacacs)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Radius
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
radius-server host
command.
console(config-radius)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
SNMP Host
Configuration
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
snmp-server
command.
console(config-snmp)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
184
Using the CLI
Command Prompt
Exit or Access
Previous Mode
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 185 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Access Method
Command Prompt
Exit or Access
Previous Mode
SNMP v3 Host
Configuration
console(config-snmp)#
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
snmp-server v3-host
command.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
SNMP
Community
Configuration
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
snmp-server
community
command.
console(config-snmp)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode
Crypto
Certificate
Generation
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
crypto certificate
number generate
command.
console(config-crypto-cert)# To exit to Global
Crypto
Certificate
Request
From Privileged
EXEC mode, use
the crypto
certificate number
request command.
console(config-crypto-cert)# To exit to
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Privileged EXEC
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+.
Using the CLI
185
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 186 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Access Method
Stack
console(config-stack)#
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the stack
command.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Logging
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
logging command.
console(config-logging)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
MST
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
spanning-tree mst
configuration
command.
console(config-mst)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
VLAN Config
console(config-vlan)#
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the vlan
database command.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
186
Using the CLI
Command Prompt
Exit or Access
Previous Mode
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 187 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Access Method
Command Prompt
Exit or Access
Previous Mode
Router OSPF
Conf
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
router ospf
command.
console(config-router)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode
Router RIP
Config
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
router rip
command.
console(config-router)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode
Router OSPFv3
Config
console(config-rtr)#
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the ipv6
router ospf
command.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode
console(config-dhcp6sIPv6 DHCP Pool From Global
pool)#
Mode
Configuration
mode, use the ipv6
dhcp pool
command.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode
Interface Configuration Modes
Using the CLI
187
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 188 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Command Prompt
Exit or Access
Previous Mode
Gigabit Ethernet From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
interface
gigabitethernet
command. Or, use
the abbreviation
interface gi.
console (config-ifGiunit/slot/port#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
10 Gigabit
Ethernet
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
interface
tengigabitethernet
command. Or, use
the abbreviation
interface te.
console (config-ifTeunit/slot/port#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Port Channel
console (config-if-poportFrom Global
channel-number)#
Configuration
mode, use the
interface portchannel command.
Or, use the
abbreviation
interface po.
VLAN
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
interface vlan
command.
188
Access Method
Using the CLI
console(config-if-vlanvlan-
id)#
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 189 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Access Method
Command Prompt
Tunnel
From Global
Configuration
mode, use the
interface tunnel
command. Or, use
the abbreviation
interface tu.
console(config-tunneltunnel- To exit to Global
id)#
Configuration
Loopback
Exit or Access
Previous Mode
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
console(configFrom Global
configuration mode, loopbackloopback-id)#
use the interface
loopback
command. Or, use
the abbreviation
interface lo.
To exit to Global
Configuration
mode, use the
exit command,
or press
+
to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Starting the CLI
To begin running the CLI, perform the following steps:
NOTE: This procedure is for use on the console line only.
NOTE: The Easy Setup Wizard is available only when the system is in default state
with no user configuration saved previously.
1 Start the switch and wait until the startup procedure is complete and the
User EXEC mode is entered. The prompt console> is displayed.
2 Configure the switch using the Easy Setup Wizard and enter the necessary
commands to complete the required tasks.
3 When finished, exit the session with the quit or exit command.
The switch can be managed over a direct connection to the switch console
port or through a Telnet connection. If access is through a Telnet connection,
the switch must have a defined IP address, corresponding management access
granted, and a connection to the network.
Using the CLI
189
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 190 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Easy Setup Wizard
The Easy Setup Wizard guides the user in the basic initial configuration of a
newly installed switch so that it can be immediately deployed and functional
in its basic operation and be completely manageable through the Web, CLI
and the remote Dell Network Manager. After initial setup, the user may enter
to the system to set up more advanced configurations.
By default the switch is shipped from the factory with an IP address of
192.168.2.1 but the Easy Setup Wizard provides the opportunity to
customize the IP address. The initial activation must be done using the serial
interface since, without a unique IP address, the user can not access the other
management interfaces.
The wizard sets up the following configuration on the switch:
190
•
Establishes the initial privileged user account with a valid password. The
wizard configures one privileged user account during the setup. The user
may return to add users later. The initial account is given the highest
privilege level (level 15).
•
Enables CLI login and HTTP access to use the local authentication setting
only, which allows user account access via these management interfaces.
The user may return later to configure Radius or TACACS+.
•
Sets the IP address for VLAN 1 or enables support for DHCP to configure
the IP address dynamically.
•
Sets up the SNMP community string to be used by the SNMP manager.
The user may choose to skip this step if SNMP management is not used. If
it is configured, the default access level is set to the highest available
access for the SNMP management interface. The user may return later to
add to the community string or reconfigure the access level of the
community string. Initially only SNMPv1/2c will be activated. SNMPv3 is
disabled until the user returns to configure security access for SNMPv3
(for example, engine ID, view, and so on). The SNMP community string
may include spaces. The wizard requires the use of quotation marks when
the user wants to enter spaces in the community string. Although spaces
are allowed in the community string, their use is discouraged. The default
community string contains no spaces.
•
Allows the user to specify the management server IP or permit SNMP
access from all IP addresses.
•
Sets up the default gateway IP address.
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 191 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
If the user chooses not to use the wizard initially, the session defaults to the
CLI mode with a warning to refer the documentation. During a subsequent
login, the user may again elect not to run the setup wizard. Once the wizard
has established configuration, however, the wizard is presented only if the
user resets the switch to the factory default settings. While the wizard is
running, the system does not display any unsolicited or unrelated status
messages. For example, the system does not display event notification or
system status messages.
After completing the wizard, the user is given a chance to save his
configuration and continue to the CLI. If the user chooses to discard his
configuration, any restart of the wizard must be from the beginning. When
the user chooses to restart the wizard, any configuration the user saved
previously automatically is offered for the user to accept. The user may elect
to correct only a few items instead of re-entering all the data.
Since a switch may be powered on in the field without a serial connection, the
switch waits 60 seconds for the user to respond to the setup wizard question
in instances where no configuration files exist. If there is no response, the
switch continues normal operation using the default factory configuration.
While waiting for the response from the user, normal switch operation will
continue, including but not limited to:
•
If BOOTP/DHCP is supported and enabled by default, the switch
attempts to get its address.
•
The switch continues to switch traffic.
•
The switch continues do MAC learning. If spanning-tree is on by default,
the switch participates in the spanning-tree protocol.
Functional Flow
The functional flow diagram in Figure 2-1 illustrates the procedures for the
Easy Setup Wizard.
Using the CLI
191
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 192 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Figure 2-1. Easy Setup Wizard
Did the user
previously save a startup
configuration?
Yes
Transfer to CLI mode
No
Transfer to CLI mode
No
Does the user want
to use setup wizard?
Yes
Is SNMP Management
Required?
Request SNMP
Community String &
Server IP Address
Yes
No
Request user name,
password
DHCP?
No
Request IP Address, Network
Mask, Default Gateway IP
No
Discard Changes and Restart Wizard
Yes
Save Setup?
Yes
Copy to Config
192
Using the CLI
Transfer to CLI mode
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 193 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example Session
This section describes an Easy Setup Wizard session. Refer to the state
diagram in the previous section for general flow. The following values used by
the example session are not the only possible ones:
•
IP address for the VLAN 1 is 192.168.1.2:255.255.255.0. This address is on
a different subnet than the OOB interface and in the same subnet as the
default gateway.
•
The user name is admin, and the password should be 8-64 characters in
length (admin123).
•
The network management system IP address is 192.168.2.1.
•
The default gateway is 0.0.0.0.
•
The SNMP community string to be used is public.
The setup wizard configures the initial values as defined above. After the user
completes the wizard, the system is configured as follows:
•
SNMPv1/2c is enabled and the community string is set up as defined
above. SNMPv3 is disabled.
•
The admin user account is set up as defined.
•
The address of the network management station is configured. From this
management station, the user can access the SNMP, HTTP, and CLI
interfaces. The user may also choose to allow all IP addresses to access
switch management by choosing the (0.0.0.0) IP address.
•
An IP address is configured for the default VLAN (1).
•
A default gateway address is configured.
The following example contains the sequence of prompts and responses
associated with running an example Dell Easy Setup Wizard session, using
the input values listed above. Note in this case a static IP address for the
management interface is being set up. However it may be requested that the
system automatically retrieve an IP address via DHCP. If DHCP is used, the
system does not request a network mask or default gateway. In this example,
the user employs the setup wizard to configure the initial values as defined
above.
Using the CLI
193
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 194 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
NOTE: In the following Easy Setup Wizard example, the possible user options are
enclosed in [ ]. Also, where possible, default values are enclosed in []. If the user
enters with no options defined, the default value is accepted. Help text is
in parentheses.
After the switch completes the POST and is booted, the following dialog
appears:
Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch
configuration, and gets you up and running as quickly
as possible. You can skip the setup wizard, and enter
CLI mode to manually configure the switch. You must
respond to the next question to run the setup wizard
within 60 seconds, otherwise the system will continue
with normal operation using the default system
configuration.Note: You can exit the setup wizard at
any point by entering [ctrl+z].
Would you like to run the setup wizard (you must
answer this question within 60 seconds)? [Y/N] y
Step 1:
The system is not setup for SNMP management by
default. To manage the switch using SNMP (required for
Dell Network Manager) you can:
o Set up the initial SNMP version 2 account now.
o Return later and setup other SNMP accounts. (For
more information on setting up an SNMP version 1 or 3
account, see the user documentation).
Would you like to setup the SNMP management interface
now? [Y/N] y
To setup the SNMP management account you must specify
the management system IP address and the "community
string" or password that the particular management
system uses to access the switch. The wizard
automatically assigns the highest access level
[Privilege Level 15] to this account. You can use Dell
194
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 195 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Network Manager or other management interfaces to
change this setting, and to add additional management
system later. For more information on adding
management systems, see the user documentation.
To add a management station:
Please enter the SNMP community string to be used.
{public}:
public
Please enter the IP address of the Management System
(A.B.C.D) or wildcard (0.0.0.0) to manage from any
Management Station.
{0.0.0.0}:
192.168.2.1
Step 2:
Now we need to setup your initial privilege (Level 15)
user account. This account is used to login to the CLI
and Web interface. You may setup other accounts and
change privilege levels later. For more information on
setting up user accounts and changing privilege
levels, see the user documentation.
To setup a user account:
Please enter the user name: admin
Please enter the user password: ********
Please reenter the user password: ********
Step 3:
Next, an IP address is setup. The
defined on the default VLAN (VLAN
ports are members. This is the IP
access the CLI, Web interface, or
the switch.
IP address is
#1), of which all
address you use to
SNMP interface for
Using the CLI
195
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 196 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Optionally you may request that the system
automatically retrieve an IP address from the network
via DHCP (this requires that you have a DHCP server
running on the network).
To setup an IP address:
Please enter the IP address of the device (A.B.C.D) or
enter "DHCP" (without the quotes) to automatically
request an IP address from the network DHCP server.
192.168.1.2
Please enter the IP subnet mask (A.B.C.D or /nn):
255.255.255.0
Step 4:
Finally, set up the gateway. Please enter the IP
address of the gateway from which this network is
reachable
192.168.1.1
This is the configuration information that has been
collected:
SNMP Interface = "public"@192.168.2.1
User Account setup = admin
Password = **********
Management IP address = 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0
Gateway = 0.0.0.0
Step 5:
If the information is correct, please select (Y) to
save the configuration, and copy to the start-up
configuration file. If the information is incorrect,
select (N) to discard configuration and restart the
wizard: [Y/N]
y
196
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 197 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Thank you for using the Dell Easy Setup Wizard. You
will now enter CLI mode.
.....
console>
Using CLI Functions and Tools
The CLI has been designed to manage the switch’s configuration file system
and to manage switch security. A number of resident tools exist to support
these and other functions.
Configuration Management
All managed systems have software images and databases that must be
configured, backed up and restored. Two software images may be stored on
the system, but only one of them is active. The other one is a backup image.
The same is true for configuration images, which store the configuration
parameters for the switch. The system has three configuration images. One
image is a memory-only image and is the current configuration image for the
switch. The second image is the one that is loaded by the system when it
reboots. There is one backup configuration image. The system also provides
methods to back up these images to a remote system.
File System Commands
All files are stored in a flat file system. The commands shown in Table 2-6 are
used to perform operations on these files.
Using the CLI
197
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 198 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Table 2-6. File System Commands
Command
Description
delete file
Deletes file.
filedescr file description
Adds a description to a file (up to 20
characters can be used).
copy source destination
Copies a file from source file to destination
file.
Copying Files
The copy command not only provides a method for copying files within the
file system, but also to and from remote servers. With the copy command and
URLs to identify files, the user can back up images to local or remote systems
or restore images from local or remote systems.
To use the copy command, the user specifies the source file and the
destination file. For example, copy tftp://remotehost/pub/backupfile backupconfig copies a file from the remote TFTP server to a local backup
configuration file. In this case, if the local configuration file does not exist,
then it is created by the command. If it does exist, it is overwritten. If there is
not enough space on the local file system to accommodate the file, an error is
flagged.
Refer to the copy command description on page 1443 in the Layer 2
commands section of the guide for command details.
Referencing External/Internal File systems
Configuration or software images are copied to or retrieved from remote file
systems using TFTP and XMODEM protocols.
198
•
tftp://server-name/path/filename — identifies a file on a remote file
system accessible through the server-name. Trivial file transfer protocol is
a simplified FTP and uses a UDP port instead of TCP and does not have
password protection.
•
xmodem: filename — identifies the file available on the XMODEM
connection.
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 199 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Special System Files
The following special filenames are used to refer to special virtual system files,
which are under control of the system and may not be removed or added.
These file names are reserved and may not be used as user-defined files.
When the user copies a local source file into one of these special files and the
source file has an attached file description, it also is copied as the file
description for the special file.
•
backup-config — This file refers to the backup configuration file.
•
running-config — This file refers to the configuration file currently active
in the system. It is possible to copy the running-config image to a backupconfig file or to the startup-config file.
•
startup-config — This file refers to the special configuration image stored
in flash memory which is loaded when the system next reboots. The user
may copy a particular configuration file (remote or local) to this special file
name and reboot the system to force it to use a particular configuration.
•
image1 & image2 — These files refer to software images. One of these will
be loaded when the system next reboots. Either image1 or image2 can be
chosen for the next reboot using the command boot system.
CLI prevents the user from accidentally copying a configuration image onto a
software image and vice versa.
Management Interface Security
This section describes the minimum set of management interface security
measures implemented by the CLI. Management interface security consists
of user account management, user access control and remote network/host
access controls.
CLI through Telnet, SSH, Serial Interfaces
The CLI is accessible through a local serial interface, the service port (out-ofband interface), or in-band interfaces. Since the serial interface requires a
physical connection for access, it is used if all else fails. The serial interface is
the only interface from which the user may access the Easy Setup Wizard. It
is the only interface that the user can access if the remote authentication
servers are down and the user has not configured the system to revert to local
managed accounts.
The following rules and specifications apply to these interfaces:
Using the CLI
199
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 200 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
The CLI is accessible from remote telnet through the IP address for the
switch. IP addresses are assigned separately for the service port and the inband ports.
•
The CLI is accessible from a secure shell interface.
•
The CLI generates keys for SSH locally.
•
The serial session defaults to 9600 baud rate, eight data bits, non-parity
and one stop bit.
User Accounts Management
The CLI provides authentication for users either through remote
authentication servers supporting TACACS+ or Radius or through a set of
locally managed user accounts. The setup wizard asks the user to create the
initial administrator account and password at the time the system is booted.
The following rules and specifications apply:
200
•
The user may create five local user accounts.
•
User accounts have an access level, a user name, and a user password.
•
The user is able to delete the user accounts but the user will not be able to
delete the last level 15 account.
•
The user password is saved internally in encrypted format and never
appears in clear text anywhere on the CLI.
•
The CLI supports TACACS+ and Radius authentication servers.
•
The CLI allows the user to configure primary and secondary
authentication servers. If the primary authentication server fails to respond
within a configurable period, the CLI automatically tries the secondary
authentication server.
•
The user can specify whether the CLI should revert to using local user
accounts when the remote authentication servers do not respond or if the
CLI simply fails the login attempt because the authentication servers are
down. This requirement applies only when the user is logged in through a
telnet or an SSH session.
•
The CLI always allows the user to log in to a local serial port even if the
remote authentication server(s) are down. In this case, CLI reverts to using
the locally configured accounts to allow the user to log in.
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 201 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Access Control
In addition to authenticating a user, the CLI also assigns the user access to
one of two security levels. Level 1 has read-only access. This level allow the
user to read information but not configure the switch. The access to this level
cannot be modified. Level 15 is the special access level assigned to the
superuser of the switch. This level has full access to all functions within the
switch and can not be modified.
If the user account is created and maintained locally, each user is given an
access level at the time of account creation. If the user is authenticated
through remote authentication servers, the authentication server is
configured to pass the user access level to the CLI when the user is
authenticated. When Radius is used, the Vendor-Specific Option field
returns the access level for the user. Two vendor specific options are
supported. These are CISCO-AV-Pairs(Shell:priv-lvl=x) and Dell Radius VSA
(user-group=x). TACACS+ provides the appropriate level of access.
The following rules and specifications apply:
•
The user determines whether remote authentication servers or locally
defined user authentication accounts are used.
•
If authentication servers are used, the user can identify at least two remote
servers (the user may choose to configure only one server) and what
protocol to use with the server, TACACS+ or Radius. One of the servers is
primary and the other is the secondary server (the user is not required to
specify a secondary server). If the primary server fails to respond in a
configurable time period, the CLI automatically attempts to authenticate
the user with the secondary server.
•
The user is able to specify what happens when both primary and secondary
servers fail to respond. In this case, the user is able to indicate that the CLI
should either use the local user accounts or reject all requests.
•
Even if the user configures the CLI to fail login when the remote
authentication servers are down, the CLI allows the user to log in to the
serial interface authenticated by locally managed account data.
Using the CLI
201
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 202 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syslogs
The CLI uses syslog support to send logging messages to a remote syslog
server. The user configures the switch to generate all logging messages to a
remote log server. If no remote log server exists, then the CLI maintains a
rolling log of at most the last 1000 critical system events.
The following rules and specifications apply:
•
The CLI permits the user to configure a remote syslog server to which all
system logging messages are sent.
•
Log messages are implementation-dependent but may contain debug
messages, security or fault events.
•
If a log server is not specified by the user, the CLI maintains at most the
last 1000 critical system events. In this case, less important events are not
recorded.
Security Logs
Security logs are maintained to record all security events including the
following:
•
User login.
•
User logout.
•
Denied login attempts.
•
User attempt to exceed security access level.
•
Denied attempts by external management system to access the system.
The security log record contains the following information:
•
The user name, if available, or the protocol being accessed if the event is
related to a remote management system.
•
The IP address from which the user is connecting or the IP address of the
remote management system.
•
A description of the security event.
•
A timestamp of the event
If syslog is available, the CLI sends the security log records to the syslog
server. If syslog is not available, the CLI records the last 1000 security log
records in a log separate from the system log records itemized above. Also in
202
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 203 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
this case, the CLI suppresses repeated events from the same source and
instead the CLI records one event within a period of time and includes that
count as part of the log.
Management ACL
In addition to user access control, the system also manages access for in-band
interfaces. The system allows individual hosts or subnets to access only
specific management protocols.
The user defines a management profile, which identifies management
protocols such as the following:
•
Telnet.
•
SSH and the keying information to use for SSH.
•
HTTP.
•
HTTPS and the security certificate to be used.
•
SNMPv1/v2c and the read and read/write community strings to be used.
•
SNMPv3 and the security information for used this protocol.
For each of these management profiles, the user defines the list of hosts or
subnets from which the management profiles may be used.
Other CLI Tools and Capabilities
The CLI has several other capabilities associated with its primary functions.
Terminal Paging
The terminal width and length for CLI displays is 79 characters and 25 lines,
respectively. The length setting is used to control the number of lines the CLI
will display before it pauses. For example, the CLI pauses at 24 lines and
prompts the user with the -more- prompt on the 25th line. The CLI waits for
the user to press either or any other key. If the user presses any key
except , the CLI shows the next page. A key stops the display and
returns to the CLI prompt.
Boot Message
The boot message is a system message that is not user-configurable and is
displayed when the system is booting. Displayed information includes the
following:
Using the CLI
203
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 204 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
Operational code date
•
The board type
•
The CPU
•
Memory size
To start the normal booting process, select item 1 in the Boot Menu. The
following is a sample log for booting information.
Boot Menu 4.1.0.6
CPU Card ID: 0x508548
CFI Probe: Found 2x16 devices in x16 mode
/DskVol// - disk check in progress ...
/DskVol// - Volume is OK
volume descriptor ptr (pVolDesc):
0x814cf10
XBD device block I/O handle: 0x10001
auto disk check on mount:
volume write mode:
DOS_CHK_REPAIR |DOS_CHK_VERB_2
copyback (DOS_WRITE)
volume options:
max # of simultaneously open files:
file descriptors in use:
0
# of different files in use:
0
# of descriptors for deleted files:
# of obsolete descriptors:
204
Using the CLI
0
0
52
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 205 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
current volume configuration:
- volume label:
- volume Id:
NO LABEL ; (in boot sector:
)
0xbb
- total number of sectors: 124,408
- bytes per sector:
512
- # of sectors per cluster: 4
- # of reserved sectors:
- FAT entry size:
1
FAT16
- # of sectors per FAT copy:
122
- # of FAT table copies: 2
- # of hidden sectors:
8
- first cluster is in sector # 260
- Update last access date for open-read-close = FALSE
Boot Menu 4.1.0.6
Select an option. If no selection in 10 seconds then
operational code will start.
1 - Start operational code.
2 - Start Boot Menu.
Select (1, 2):
Operational Code Date: Mon Feb 28 16:43:14 2011
Uncompressing.....
Using the CLI
205
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 206 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Bulk Class Driver Successfully Initialized
Adding 0 symbols for standalone.
CFI Probe: Found 2x16 devices in x16 mode
volume descriptor ptr (pVolDesc):
0x5157150
XBD device block I/O handle: 0x10001
auto disk check on mount:
volume write mode:
DOS_CHK_REPAIR |DOS_CHK_VERB_2
copyback (DOS_WRITE)
volume options:
max # of simultaneously open files:
file descriptors in use:
52
0
# of different files in use:
0
# of descriptors for deleted files:
# of obsolete descriptors:
0
0
current volume configuration:
- volume label:
- volume Id:
NO LABEL ; (in boot sector:
)
0xbb
- total number of sectors: 124,408
- bytes per sector:
512
- # of sectors per cluster: 4
- # of reserved sectors:
- FAT entry size:
1
FAT16
- # of sectors per FAT copy:
122
- # of FAT table copies: 2
- # of hidden sectors:
8
- first cluster is in sector # 260
- Update last access date for open-read-close = FALSE
206
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 207 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
PCI unit 0: Dev 0xb634, Rev 0x11, Chip BCM56634_B0, Driver
BCM56634_B0
SOC unit 0 attached to PCI device BCM56634_B0
soc_reset_bcm56634_a0: TCAM PLL not locked.
Adding BCM transport pointers
Configuring CPUTRANS TX
Configuring CPUTRANS RX
hpc - No stack ports. Starting in stand-alone mode.
Instantiating /download as rawFs, device = 0x20001
Formatting /download for DOSFS
Instantiating /download as rawFs, device = 0x20001
Formatting...OK.
<186> NOV 15 09:34:53 0.0.0.0-1 General[1073741072]: bootos.c(220) 1
%% Event(0xaaaaaaaa)Instantiating RamCP: as rawFs, device = 0x30001
Formatting RamCP: for DOSFS
Instantiating RamCP: as rawFs, device = 0x30001
Formatting...OK.
(Unit 1 - Waiting to select management unit)>Applying Global
configuration, please wait ...Applying Interface configuration, please wait ...
console>
Boot Utility Menu
If a user is connected through the serial interface during the boot sequence,
pressing the key interrupts the boot process and displays a Boot Utility
Menu. Selecting item 2 displays the menu and may be typed only during the
initial boot up sequence. When the system boot up is complete, typing the
escape sequence does not display the menu.
Boot Menu 4.1.0.6
Using the CLI
207
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 208 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Options available
1
- Start operational code
2
- Change baud rate
3
- Retrieve event log using XMODEM
4
- Load new operational code using XMODEM
5
- Display operational code vital product data
6
- Abort boot code update
7
- Update boot code
8
- Delete backup image
9
- Reset the system
10 - Restore configuration to factory defaults (delete
config files)
11 - Activate Backup Image
12 - Password Recovery Procedure
13 - Reformat and restore file system
[Boot Menu] 2
Select baud rate:
1 - 1200
2 - 2400
3 - 4800
4 - 9600
5 - 19200
208
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 209 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
6 - 38400
7 - 57600
8 - 115200
0 - no change
Baud rate is not changed
[Boot Menu] 3
Sending event log, start XMODEM receive.....
File asciilog.bin Ready to SEND in binary mode
Estimated File Size 0K, 12 Sectors, 89 Bytes
Estimated transmission time 14 seconds
Send several Control-X characters to cancel before
transfer starts.
[Boot Menu] 4
Ready to receive the file with XMODEM/CRC....
Ready to RECEIVE File xcode.bin in binary mode
Send several Control-X characters to cancel before
transfer starts.
CKCK
[Boot Menu] 5
Using the CLI
209
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 210 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The following image is in the Flash File System:
File Name......................................image2
CRC............................................0x3431
(13361)
Target
Device..................................0x00508548
Size...........................................0xc178
dc (12679388)
Number of Components...........................3
Operational Code
Size..........................0xa73af4 (10959604)
Operational Code Offset........................0x74
(116)
Operational Code FLASH flag....................1
Operational Code CRC...........................0x20E7
Operational Compression flag...................2
(lzma)
Boot Code Version..............................1
Boot Code
Size.................................0x100000
(1048576)
Boot Code
Offset...............................0xa73b68
(10959720)
Boot Code FLASH flag...........................0
210
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 211 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Boot Code CRC..................................0x578
VPD - rel 4 ver 1 maint_lvl 0 build_num 6
Timestamp - Mon Feb 28 16:43:14 2011
File - PC7000_M6348v4.1.0.6.opr
[Boot Menu] 6
[Boot Menu] 7
Do you wish to update Boot Code and reset? (y/n) y
Validating image2....OK
Extracting boot code from image...CRC valid
Erasing Boot Flash.....Done.
Wrote 0x10000 bytes.
Wrote 0x20000 bytes.
Wrote 0x30000 bytes.
Wrote 0x40000 bytes.
Wrote 0x50000 bytes.
Wrote 0x60000 bytes.
Wrote 0x70000 bytes.
Wrote 0x80000 bytes.
Wrote 0x90000 bytes.
Using the CLI
211
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 212 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Wrote 0xa0000 bytes.
Wrote 0xb0000 bytes.
Wrote 0xc0000 bytes.
Wrote 0xd0000 bytes.
Wrote 0xe0000 bytes.
Wrote 0xf0000 bytes.
Wrote 0x100000 bytes.
Validating Flash.....Passed
Flash update completed.
Rebooting...
CPU Card ID:
0x508548
CFI Probe: Found 2x16 devices in x16 mode
/DskVol//
- disk check in progress ...
/DskVol//
- Volume is OK
Change volume Id from 0x0 to 0x79
volume descriptor ptr (pVolDesc):
0x814cf10
XBD device block I/O handle: 0x10001
auto disk check on mount:
|DOS_CHK_VERB_2
volume write mode:
DOS_CHK_REPAIR
copyback (DOS_WRITE)
volume options:
max # of simultaneously open files:
file descriptors in use:
212
Using the CLI
0
52
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 213 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
# of different files in use:
0
# of descriptors for deleted files:
# of
obsolete descriptors:
0
0
current volume configuration:
- volume label:
)
NO LABEL ; (in boot sector:
- volume Id:
0x79
- total number of sectors:
- bytes per sector:
124,408
512
- # of sectors per cluster: 4
- # of reserved sectors:
- FAT entry size:
1
FAT16
- # of sectors per FAT copy:
- # of FAT table copies:
122
2
- # of hidden sectors:
8
- first cluster is in sector #
260
- Update last access date for open-read-close = FALSE
Boot Menu 4.1.0.6
Select an option. If no selection in 10 seconds then
operational code will start.
1 - Start operational code.
Using the CLI
213
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 214 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
2 - Start Boot Menu.
Select (1, 2):2
Boot Menu 4.1.0.6
Options available
1
- Start operational code
2
- Change baud rate
3
- Retrieve event log using XMODEM
4
- Load new operational code using XMODEM
5
- Display operational code vital product data
6
- Abort boot code update
7
- Update boot code
8
- Delete backup image
9
- Reset the system
10 - Restore configuration to factory defaults (delete
config files)
11 - Activate Backup Image
12 - Password Recovery Procedure
13 - Reformat and restore file system
[Boot Menu] 8
Are you SURE you want to delete: image1 ? (y/n):y
image1 deleted...
214
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 215 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
[Boot Menu] 10
Are you SURE you want to delete the configuration?
(y/n):y
[Boot Menu] 11
Backup image - image1 activated.
[Boot Menu] 12
Operational Code Date: Mon Feb 28 16:43:14 2011
Uncompressing.....
Bulk Class Driver Successfully Initialized
Adding 0 symbols for standalone.
CFI Probe: Found 2x16 devices in x16 mode
volume descriptor ptr (pVolDesc):
0x5157150
XBD device block I/O handle: 0x10001
Using the CLI
215
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 216 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
auto disk check on mount:
|DOS_CHK_VERB_2
DOS_CHK_REPAIR
volume write mode:
copyback (DOS_WRITE)
volume options:
max # of simultaneously open files:
file descriptors in use:
52
0
# of different files in use:
0
# of descriptors for deleted files:
# of
obsolete descriptors:
0
0
current volume configuration:
- volume label:
NO LABEL ; (in boot sector: )
- volume Id:
0x79
- total number of sectors:
- bytes per sector:
124,408
512
- # of sectors per cluster: 4
- # of reserved sectors:
- FAT entry size:
1
FAT16
- # of sectors per FAT copy:
- # of FAT table copies:
- # of hidden sectors:
122
2
8
- first cluster is in sector #
260
- Update last access date for open-read-close = FALSE
216
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 217 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
PCI unit 0: Dev 0xb634, Rev 0x11, Chip BCM56634_B0,
Driver BCM56634_B0
SOC unit 0 attached to PCI device BCM56634_B0
soc_reset_bcm56634_a0: TCAM PLL not locked.
Adding BCM transport pointers
Configuring CPUTRANS TX
Configuring CPUTRANS RX
Instantiating /download as rawFs,
device = 0x20001
Formatting /download for DOSFS
Instantiating /download as rawFs, device = 0x20001
Formatting...OK.
<186> NOV 15 10:03:48 0.0.0.0-1 General[1073741072]:
bootos.c(220) 1 %% Event(0xaaaaaaaa)
Instantiating RamCP: as rawFs,
device = 0x30001
Formatting RamCP: for DOSFS
Instantiating RamCP: as rawFs, device = 0x30001
Formatting...OK.
(Unit 1 - Waiting to select management unit)>USB Auto
Configuration process is completed!
Applying Global configuration, please wait ...
Using the CLI
217
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 218 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard
The setup wizard guides you through the initial switch
configuration, and gets you up and running as quickly
as possible. You can skip the setup wizard, and enter
CLI mode to manually configure the switch. You must
respond to the next question to run the setup wizard
within 60 seconds, otherwise the system will continue
with normal operation using the default system
configuration. Note: You can exit the setup wizard at
any point by entering [ctrl+z].
Would you like to run the setup wizard (you must
answer this question within 60 seconds)? [Y/N] n
Thank you for using the Dell Easy Setup Wizard. You
will now enter CLI mode.
Applying Interface configuration, please wait ...
console>en
218
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 219 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#reload
Management switch has unsaved changes.
Are you sure you want to continue? (y/n) y
Configuration Not Saved!
Are you sure you want to reload the stack? (y/n) y
Reloading all switches.
Boot Menu 4.1.0.6
CPU Card ID:
0x508548
CFI Probe: Found 2x16 devices in x16 mode
/DskVol//
- disk check in progress ...
/DskVol//files
/DskVol//files/image2
/DskVol//files/boot.dim
/DskVol//files/crashdump.ctl
/DskVol//files/dh512.pem
/DskVol//files/dh1024.pem
/DskVol//files/sslt_cert1.pem
/DskVol//files/sslt_key1.pem
Using the CLI
219
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 220 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
/DskVol//files/ssh_host_key
/DskVol//files/ssh_host_dsa_key
/DskVol//files/ssh_host_rsa_key
/DskVol//files/log2.bin
/DskVol//files/hpc_broad.cfg
/DskVol//files/slog0.txt
/DskVol//files/olog0.txt
/DskVol//files/sslt.rnd
/DskVol//
- Volume is OK
volume descriptor ptr (pVolDesc):
0x814cf10
XBD device block I/O handle: 0x10001
auto disk check on mount:
|DOS_CHK_VERB_2
volume write mode:
DOS_CHK_REPAIR
copyback (DOS_WRITE)
volume options:
max # of simultaneously open files:
file descriptors in use:
52
0
# of different files in use:
0
# of descriptors for deleted files:
# of
obsolete descriptors:
0
0
current volume configuration:
- volume label:
)
220
Using the CLI
NO LABEL ; (in boot sector:
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 221 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
- volume Id:
0x79
- total number of sectors:
- bytes per sector:
124,408
512
- # of sectors per cluster: 4
- # of reserved sectors:
- FAT entry size:
1
FAT16
- # of sectors per FAT copy:
- # of FAT table copies:
122
2
- # of hidden sectors:
8
- first cluster is in sector #
260
- Update last access date for open-read-close = FALSE
Boot Menu 4.1.0.6
Select an option. If no selection in 10 seconds then
operational code will start.
1 - Start operational code.
2 - Start Boot Menu.
Select (1, 2):2
Boot Menu 4.1.0.6
Options available
1
- Start operational code
2
- Change baud rate
Using the CLI
221
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 222 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
3
- Retrieve event log using XMODEM
4
- Load new operational code using XMODEM
5
- Display operational code vital product data
6
- Abort boot code update
7
- Update boot code
8
- Delete backup image
9
- Reset the system
10 - Restore configuration to factory defaults (delete
config files)
11 - Activate Backup Image
12 - Password Recovery Procedure
13 - Reformat and restore file system
[Boot Menu] 13
Instantiating /RamDisk/ as rawFs,
device = 0x20001
Formatting /RamDisk/ for DOSFS
Instantiating /RamDisk/ as rawFs, device = 0x20001
Formatting.../RamDisk/: file system is marked clean,
skipping check
OK.
copying file /DskVol/files/image1 -> /RamDisk/image1
copying file /DskVol/files/image2 -> /RamDisk/image2
copying file /DskVol/files/startup-config ->
/RamDisk/startup-config
copying file /DskVol/files/vpd.bin ->
/RamDisk/vpd.bin
copying file /DskVol/files/hpc_broad.cfg ->
/RamDisk/hpc_broad.cfg
222
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 223 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
copying file /DskVol/files/boot.dim ->
/RamDisk/boot.dim
copying file /DskVol/files/dh512.pem ->
/RamDisk/dh512.pem
copying file /DskVol/files/dh1024.pem ->
/RamDisk/dh1024.pem
copying file /DskVol/files/sslt_cert1.pem ->
/RamDisk/sslt_cert1.pem
copying file /DskVol/files/sslt_key1.pem ->
/RamDisk/sslt_key1.pem
copying file /DskVol/files/ssh_host_key ->
/RamDisk/ssh_host_key
copying file /DskVol/files/ssh_host_dsa_key ->
/RamDisk/ssh_host_dsa_key
copying file /DskVol/files/ssh_host_rsa_key ->
/RamDisk/ssh_host_rsa_key
image2
9:30:36
12679504
11/15/113
hpc_broad.cfg
10:04:30
148
11/15/113
boot.dim
8:00:02
77
4/22/105
dh512.pem
0:20:24
156
5/30/113
dh1024.pem
0:20:24
245
5/30/113
sslt_cert1.pem
5:09:30
863
6/2/113
sslt_key1.pem
5:09:30
887
6/2/113
Using the CLI
223
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 224 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ssh_host_key
0:20:24
517
5/30/113
ssh_host_dsa_key
0:20:24
672
5/30/113
ssh_host_rsa_key
0:20:24
887
5/30/113
Filesystem size 25484288
Bytes used
12683956
Bytes free
12800332
Erasing FFS: CFI Probe: Found 2x16 devices in x16 mode
Formatted 1 of 251 units = 0.3 %
Formatted 2 of 251 units = 0.7 %
Formatted 3 of 251 units = 1.1 %
Formatted 4 of 251 units = 1.5 %
Formatted 5 of 251 units = 1.9 %
Formatted 6 of 251 units = 2.3 %
Formatted 7 of 251 units = 2.7 %
Formatted 8 of 251 units = 3.1 %
Formatted 9 of 251 units = 3.5 %
Formatted 10 of 251 units = 3.9 %
Formatted 11 of 251 units = 4.3 %
Formatted 12 of 251 units = 4.7 %
Formatted 13 of 251 units = 5.1 %
Formatted 14 of 251 units = 5.5 %
Formatted 15 of 251 units = 5.9 %
Formatted 16 of 251 units = 6.3 %
224
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 225 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 17 of 251 units = 6.7 %
Formatted 18 of 251 units = 7.1 %
Formatted 19 of 251 units = 7.5 %
Formatted 20 of 251 units = 7.9 %
Formatted 21 of 251 units = 8.3 %
Formatted 22 of 251 units = 8.7 %
Formatted 23 of 251 units = 9.1 %
Formatted 24 of 251 units = 9.5 %
Formatted 25 of 251 units = 9.9 %
Formatted 26 of 251 units = 10.3 %
Formatted 27 of 251 units = 10.7 %
Formatted 28 of 251 units = 11.1 %
Formatted 29 of 251 units = 11.5 %
Formatted 30 of 251 units = 11.9 %
Formatted 31 of 251 units = 12.3 %
Formatted 32 of 251 units = 12.7 %
Formatted 33 of 251 units = 13.1 %
Formatted 34 of 251 units = 13.5 %
Formatted 35 of 251 units = 13.9 %
Formatted 36 of 251 units = 14.3 %
Formatted 37 of 251 units = 14.7 %
Formatted 38 of 251 units = 15.1 %
Formatted 39 of 251 units = 15.5 %
Formatted 40 of 251 units = 15.9 %
Formatted 41 of 251 units = 16.3 %
Formatted 42 of 251 units = 16.7 %
Using the CLI
225
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 226 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 43 of 251 units = 17.1 %
Formatted 44 of 251 units = 17.5 %
Formatted 45 of 251 units = 17.9 %
Formatted 46 of 251 units = 18.3 %
Formatted 47 of 251 units = 18.7 %
Formatted 48 of 251 units = 19.1 %
Formatted 49 of 251 units = 19.5 %
Formatted 50 of 251 units = 19.9 %
Formatted 51 of 251 units = 20.3 %
Formatted 52 of 251 units = 20.7 %
Formatted 53 of 251 units = 21.1 %
Formatted 54 of 251 units = 21.5 %
Formatted 55 of 251 units = 21.9 %
Formatted 56 of 251 units = 22.3 %
Formatted 57 of 251 units = 22.7 %
Formatted 58 of 251 units = 23.1 %
Formatted 59 of 251 units = 23.5 %
Formatted 60 of 251 units = 23.9 %
Formatted 61 of 251 units = 24.3 %
Formatted 62 of 251 units = 24.7 %
Formatted 63 of 251 units = 25.0 %
Formatted 64 of 251 units = 25.4 %
Formatted 65 of 251 units = 25.8 %
Formatted 66 of 251 units = 26.2 %
Formatted 67 of 251 units = 26.6 %
Formatted 68 of 251 units = 27.0 %
226
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 227 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 69 of 251 units = 27.4 %
Formatted 70 of 251 units = 27.8 %
Formatted 71 of 251 units = 28.2 %
Formatted 72 of 251 units = 28.6 %
Formatted 73 of 251 units = 29.0 %
Formatted 74 of 251 units = 29.4 %
Formatted 75 of 251 units = 29.8 %
Formatted 76 of 251 units = 30.2 %
Formatted 77 of 251 units = 30.6 %
Formatted 78 of 251 units = 31.0 %
Formatted 79 of 251 units = 31.4 %
Formatted 80 of 251 units = 31.8 %
Formatted 81 of 251 units = 32.2 %
Formatted 82 of 251 units = 32.6 %
Formatted 83 of 251 units = 33.0 %
Formatted 84 of 251 units = 33.4 %
Formatted 85 of 251 units = 33.8 %
Formatted 86 of 251 units = 34.2 %
Formatted 87 of 251 units = 34.6 %
Formatted 88 of 251 units = 35.0 %
Formatted 89 of 251 units = 35.4 %
Formatted 90 of 251 units = 35.8 %
Formatted 91 of 251 units = 36.2 %
Formatted 92 of 251 units = 36.6 %
Formatted 93 of 251 units = 37.0 %
Formatted 94 of 251 units = 37.4 %
Using the CLI
227
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 228 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 95 of 251 units = 37.8 %
Formatted 96 of 251 units = 38.2 %
Formatted 97 of 251 units = 38.6 %
Formatted 98 of 251 units = 39.0 %
Formatted 99 of 251 units = 39.4 %
Formatted 100 of 251 units = 39.8 %
Formatted 101 of 251 units = 40.2 %
Formatted 102 of 251 units = 40.6 %
Formatted 103 of 251 units = 41.0 %
Formatted 104 of 251 units = 41.4 %
Formatted 105 of 251 units = 41.8 %
Formatted 106 of 251 units = 42.2 %
Formatted 107 of 251 units = 42.6 %
Formatted 108 of 251 units = 43.0 %
Formatted 109 of 251 units = 43.4 %
Formatted 110 of 251 units = 43.8 %
Formatted 111 of 251 units = 44.2 %
Formatted 112 of 251 units = 44.6 %
Formatted 113 of 251 units = 45.0 %
Formatted 114 of 251 units = 45.4 %
Formatted 115 of 251 units = 45.8 %
Formatted 116 of 251 units = 46.2 %
Formatted 117 of 251 units = 46.6 %
Formatted 118 of 251 units = 47.0 %
Formatted 119 of 251 units = 47.4 %
Formatted 120 of 251 units = 47.8 %
228
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 229 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 121 of 251 units = 48.2 %
Formatted 122 of 251 units = 48.6 %
Formatted 123 of 251 units = 49.0 %
Formatted 124 of 251 units = 49.4 %
Formatted 125 of 251 units = 49.8 %
Formatted 126 of 251 units = 50.1 %
Formatted 127 of 251 units = 50.5 %
Formatted 128 of 251 units = 50.9 %
Formatted 129 of 251 units = 51.3 %
Formatted 130 of 251 units = 51.7 %
Formatted 131 of 251 units = 52.1 %
Formatted 132 of 251 units = 52.5 %
Formatted 133 of 251 units = 52.9 %
Formatted 134 of 251 units = 53.3 %
Formatted 135 of 251 units = 53.7 %
Formatted 136 of 251 units = 54.1 %
Formatted 137 of 251 units = 54.5 %
Formatted 138 of 251 units = 54.9 %
Formatted 139 of 251 units = 55.3 %
Formatted 140 of 251 units = 55.7 %
Formatted 141 of 251 units = 56.1 %
Formatted 142 of 251 units = 56.5 %
Formatted 143 of 251 units = 56.9 %
Formatted 144 of 251 units = 57.3 %
Formatted 145 of 251 units = 57.7 %
Formatted 146 of 251 units = 58.1 %
Using the CLI
229
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 230 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 147 of 251 units = 58.5 %
Formatted 148 of 251 units = 58.9 %
Formatted 149 of 251 units = 59.3 %
Formatted 150 of 251 units = 59.7 %
Formatted 151 of 251 units = 60.1 %
Formatted 152 of 251 units = 60.5 %
Formatted 153 of 251 units = 60.9 %
Formatted 154 of 251 units = 61.3 %
Formatted 155 of 251 units = 61.7 %
Formatted 156 of 251 units = 62.1 %
Formatted 157 of 251 units = 62.5 %
Formatted 158 of 251 units = 62.9 %
Formatted 159 of 251 units = 63.3 %
Formatted 160 of 251 units = 63.7 %
Formatted 161 of 251 units = 64.1 %
Formatted 162 of 251 units = 64.5 %
Formatted 163 of 251 units = 64.9 %
Formatted 164 of 251 units = 65.3 %
Formatted 165 of 251 units = 65.7 %
Formatted 166 of 251 units = 66.1 %
Formatted 167 of 251 units = 66.5 %
Formatted 168 of 251 units = 66.9 %
Formatted 169 of 251 units = 67.3 %
Formatted 170 of 251 units = 67.7 %
Formatted 171 of 251 units = 68.1 %
Formatted 172 of 251 units = 68.5 %
230
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 231 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 173 of 251 units = 68.9 %
Formatted 174 of 251 units = 69.3 %
Formatted 175 of 251 units = 69.7 %
Formatted 176 of 251 units = 70.1 %
Formatted 177 of 251 units = 70.5 %
Formatted 178 of 251 units = 70.9 %
Formatted 179 of 251 units = 71.3 %
Formatted 180 of 251 units = 71.7 %
Formatted 181 of 251 units = 72.1 %
Formatted 182 of 251 units = 72.5 %
Formatted 183 of 251 units = 72.9 %
Formatted 184 of 251 units = 73.3 %
Formatted 185 of 251 units = 73.7 %
Formatted 186 of 251 units = 74.1 %
Formatted 187 of 251 units = 74.5 %
Formatted 188 of 251 units = 74.9 %
Formatted 189 of 251 units = 75.2 %
Formatted 190 of 251 units = 75.6 %
Formatted 191 of 251 units = 76.0 %
Formatted 192 of 251 units = 76.4 %
Formatted 193 of 251 units = 76.8 %
Formatted 194 of 251 units = 77.2 %
Formatted 195 of 251 units = 77.6 %
Formatted 196 of 251 units = 78.0 %
Formatted 197 of 251 units = 78.4 %
Formatted 198 of 251 units = 78.8 %
Using the CLI
231
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 232 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 199 of 251 units = 79.2 %
Formatted 200 of 251 units = 79.6 %
Formatted 201 of 251 units = 80.0 %
Formatted 202 of 251 units = 80.4 %
Formatted 203 of 251 units = 80.8 %
Formatted 204 of 251 units = 81.2 %
Formatted 205 of 251 units = 81.6 %
Formatted 206 of 251 units = 82.0 %
Formatted 207 of 251 units = 82.4 %
Formatted 208 of 251 units = 82.8 %
Formatted 209 of 251 units = 83.2 %
Formatted 210 of 251 units = 83.6 %
Formatted 211 of 251 units = 84.0 %
Formatted 212 of 251 units = 84.4 %
Formatted 213 of 251 units = 84.8 %
Formatted 214 of 251 units = 85.2 %
Formatted 215 of 251 units = 85.6 %
Formatted 216 of 251 units = 86.0 %
Formatted 217 of 251 units = 86.4 %
Formatted 218 of 251 units = 86.8 %
Formatted 219 of 251 units = 87.2 %
Formatted 220 of 251 units = 87.6 %
Formatted 221 of 251 units = 88.0 %
Formatted 222 of 251 units = 88.4 %
Formatted 223 of 251 units = 88.8 %
Formatted 224 of 251 units = 89.2 %
232
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 233 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 225 of 251 units = 89.6 %
Formatted 226 of 251 units = 90.0 %
Formatted 227 of 251 units = 90.4 %
Formatted 228 of 251 units = 90.8 %
Formatted 229 of 251 units = 91.2 %
Formatted 230 of 251 units = 91.6 %
Formatted 231 of 251 units = 92.0 %
Formatted 232 of 251 units = 92.4 %
Formatted 233 of 251 units = 92.8 %
Formatted 234 of 251 units = 93.2 %
Formatted 235 of 251 units = 93.6 %
Formatted 236 of 251 units = 94.0 %
Formatted 237 of 251 units = 94.4 %
Formatted 238 of 251 units = 94.8 %
Formatted 239 of 251 units = 95.2 %
Formatted 240 of 251 units = 95.6 %
Formatted 241 of 251 units = 96.0 %
Formatted 242 of 251 units = 96.4 %
Formatted 243 of 251 units = 96.8 %
Formatted 244 of 251 units = 97.2 %
Formatted 245 of 251 units = 97.6 %
Formatted 246 of 251 units = 98.0 %
Formatted 247 of 251 units = 98.4 %
Formatted 248 of 251 units = 98.8 %
Formatted 249 of 251 units = 99.2 %
Formatted 250 of 251 units = 99.6 %
Using the CLI
233
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 234 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Formatted 251 of 251 units = 100.0 %
CFI Probe: Found 2x16 devices in x16 mode
Recreating FFS: CFI Probe: Found 2x16 devices in x16
mode
/DskVol/: file system is marked clean, skipping check
volume descriptor ptr (pVolDesc):
0x9a67710
XBD device block I/O handle: 0x40001
auto disk check on mount:
|DOS_CHK_VERB_2
DOS_CHK_REPAIR
volume write mode:
copyback (DOS_WRITE)
volume options:
max # of simultaneously open files:
file descriptors in use:
52
0
# of different files in use:
0
# of descriptors for deleted files:
# of
obsolete descriptors:
0
0
current volume configuration:
- volume label:
)
NO LABEL ; (in boot sector:
- volume Id:
0x0
- total number of sectors:
- bytes per sector:
512
- # of sectors per cluster: 4
234
Using the CLI
124,408
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 235 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
- # of reserved sectors:
- FAT entry size:
1
FAT16
- # of sectors per FAT copy:
- # of FAT table copies:
- # of hidden sectors:
122
2
8
- first cluster is in sector #
260
- Update last access date for open-read-close = FALSE
done
.
..
Filesystem size 63567872
Bytes used
0
Bytes free
63567872
copying file /RamDisk/image1 -> /DskVol/files/image1
copying file /RamDisk/image2 -> /DskVol/files/image2
copying file /RamDisk/startup-config ->
/DskVol/files/startup-config
copying file /RamDisk/vpd.bin ->
/DskVol/files/vpd.bin
copying file /RamDisk/hpc_broad.cfg ->
/DskVol/files/hpc_broad.cfg
Using the CLI
235
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 236 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
copying file /RamDisk/boot.dim ->
/DskVol/files/boot.dim
copying file /RamDisk/dh512.pem ->
/DskVol/files/dh512.pem
copying file /RamDisk/dh1024.pem ->
/DskVol/files/dh1024.pem
copying file /RamDisk/sslt_cert1.pem ->
/DskVol/files/sslt_cert1.pem
copying file /RamDisk/sslt_key1.pem ->
/DskVol/files/sslt_key1.pem
copying file /RamDisk/ssh_host_key ->
/DskVol/files/ssh_host_key
copying file /RamDisk/ssh_host_dsa_key ->
/DskVol/files/ssh_host_dsa_key
copying file /RamDisk/ssh_host_rsa_key ->
/DskVol/files/ssh_host_rsa_key
.
..
image2
9:30:36
12679504
11/15/113
hpc_broad.cfg
10:04:30
148
11/15/113
boot.dim
8:00:02
77
4/22/105
dh512.pem
0:20:24
156
5/30/113
dh1024.pem
0:20:24
245
5/30/113
sslt_cert1.pem
5:09:30
863
6/2/113
236
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 237 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
sslt_key1.pem
5:09:30
887
6/2/113
ssh_host_key
0:20:24
517
5/30/113
ssh_host_dsa_key
0:20:24
672
5/30/113
ssh_host_rsa_key
0:20:24
887
5/30/113
Filesystem size 63567872
Bytes used
12683956
Bytes free
50883916
[Boot Menu]
Monitoring Traps from CLI
It is possible to connect to the CLI session and monitor the events or faults
that are being sent as traps from the system. This feature is equivalent to the
alarm-monitoring window in a typical network management system. The user
enables events or monitor traps from the CLI by entering the command
logging console. Traps generated by the system are dumped to all CLI
sessions that have requested monitoring mode to be enabled. The no logging
console command disables trap monitoring for the session. By default,
console logging is enabled.
Using the CLI
237
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 238 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
238
Using the CLI
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 239 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Layer 2 Switching Commands
3
The chapters that follow describe commands that conform to the OSI model
data link layer (Layer 2). Layer 2 commands provide a logical organization for
transmitting data bits on a particular medium. This layer defines the framing,
addressing, and checksum functions for Ethernet packets.
This section of the document contains the following Layer 2 topics:
AAA Commands
Email Alerting
Commands
IPv6 MLD
Snooping
Commands
Port Monitor
Commands
ACL Commands
Ethernet
Configuration
Commands
IPv6 MLD
Snooping Querier
Commands
QoS Commands
Address Table
Commands
Ethernet CFM
Commands
IP Source Guard
Commands
RADIUS Commands
Auto-VoIP
Commands
–
iSCSI
Optimization
Commands
Spanning Tree
Commands
CDP
Interoperability
Commands
GVRP Commands Link Dependency
Commands
DHCP Layer 2
Relay Commands
IGMP Snooping
Commands
LLDP Commands VLAN Commands
DHCP
Management
Interface
Commands
IGMP Snooping
Querier
Commands
Multicast VLAN
Registration
Commands
Voice VLAN
Commands
DHCP Snooping
Commands
IP Addressing
Commands
Port Aggregator
Commands
802.1x Commands
Dynamic ARP
Inspection
Commands
IPv6 Access List
Commands
Port Channel
Commands
–
TACACS+
Commands
Layer 2 Switching Commands
239
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 240 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
240
Layer 2 Switching Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 241 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
4
AAA Commands
Management access to the switch is via telnet, HTTP, SSH, or the serial
console (SNMP access is discussed in SNMP Commands). To ensure that
only authorized users can access and change the configuration of the switch,
users must be authenticated.
Users can be authenticated based on:
•
Login mode
•
Switch access method
•
Access to Privileged EXEC mode
•
Two levels of access:
–
1 = Read-only
–
15 = Write-only
The supported authentication methods for management access are:
•
Local: The user's locally stored ID and password are used for
authentication.
•
RADIUS: The user's ID and password are authenticated using the
RADIUS server.
•
TACACS+: The user's ID and password are authenticated using the
TACACS+ server.
•
None: No authentication is used.
•
Enable: Uses the enable password for authentication.
•
Line: Uses the line password for authentication.
•
Authentication Preference Lists (APLs): An Authentication Preference List
is an ordered list of authentication methods.
To authenticate a user, the authentication methods in the APL for the access
line are attempted in order until an authentication attempt returns a success
or failure return code. If a method times out, the next method in the list is
attempted. The component requesting authentication is unaware of the
ultimate authentication source. If a method in the preference list does not
AAA Commands
241
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 242 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
support the concept of timeout, subsequent entries in the list are never
attempted. For example, the local authentication method implementation
does not supply a time-out value. If a list contains the local method, followed
by the radius authentication method, the radius method is not attempted.
Once an APL is created, a reference to that APL can be stored in the access
line configuration to determine how specific components should
authenticate users. The APL and associated component ID are stored
together. A single APL can be referenced by multiple users and components.
The administrator can enable/disable/reorder authentication methods on a
per method basis (see above).
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
aaa authentication dot1x
default
enable authentication
password (User EXEC)
aaa authentication enable
enable password
show aaa ias-users
aaa authentication login
ip http authentication
show authentication
methods
aaa authorization network
default radius
ip https authentication
show users accounts
aaa ias-user username
login authentication
show users login-history
aaa new-model
password (aaa IAS User
Configuration)
username
clear (IAS)
password (Line
Configuration)
–
aaa authentication dot1x default
Use the aaa authentication dot1x default command in Global Configuration
mode to specify an authentication method for 802.1x clients. Use the no form
of the command to return the authentication method to its default settings.
242
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 243 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
aaa authentication dot1x default {radius| ias|local|none}
no aaa authentication dot1x default
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
radius
Uses the list of all authentication servers for authentication.
ias
Uses the internal authentication server.
local
Use the local authentication method.
none
Uses no authentication.
Default Configuration
No default authentication method is defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Only one authentication method may be specified in the command. For the
RADIUS authentication method, if the RADIUS server cannot be contacted,
the supplicant fails authentication. The none method always allows access.
the ias method utililizes the internal authentication server.
Example
The following example configures 802.1x authentication to use no
authentication. Absent any other configuration, this command allows all
802.1x users to pass traffic through the switch.
console(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default
none
The following example configures 802.1x authentication to use a RADIUS
server. A RADIUS server must be configured using the radius-server host auth
command for the radius method to succeed.
AAA Commands
243
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 244 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#aaa authentication dot1x default
radius
aaa authentication enable
Use the aaa authentication enable command in Global Configuration mode
to set authentication for accessing higher privilege levels. To return to the
default configuration, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
aaa authentication enable {default | list-name} method1 [method2...]
no aaa authentication enable {default | list-name}
•
default — Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this
argument as the default list of methods, when using higher privilege levels.
•
list-name — Character string used to name the list of authentication
methods activated, when using access higher privilege levels. (Range: 1-15
characters)
•
method1 [method2...] — Specify at least one from the following table:
Keyword
Source or destination
enable
Uses the enable password for authentication.
line
Uses the line password for authentication.
none
Uses no authentication.
radius
Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication.
tacacs
Uses the list of all TACACS+ servers for authentication.
Default Configuration
The default enable list is enableList. It is used by console, telnet, and SSH
and only contains the method none.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
244
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 245 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The default and optional list names created with the aaa authentication
enable command are used with the enable authentication command.
Create a list by entering the aaa authentication enable list-name method
command where list-name is any character string used to name this list. The
method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication
algorithm tries in the given sequence.
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous
method returns an error, not if it fails to authenticate the user. Only the
RADIUS or TACACS methods can return an error. To ensure that the
authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as
the final method in the command line. Note that enable will not succeed for
a level one user if no authentication method is defined. A level one user must
authenticate to get to privileged EXEC mode. For example, if none is
specified as an authentication method after radius, no authentication is used
if the RADIUS server is down.
NOTE: Requests sent by the switch to a RADIUS server include the username
"$enabx$", where x is the requested privilege level. For enable to be authenticated
on Radius servers, add "$enabx$" users to them. The login user ID is also sent to
TACACS+ servers for enable authentication.
Example
The following example sets authentication when accessing higher privilege
levels.
console(config)# aaa authentication enable default
enable
aaa authentication login
Use the aaa authentication login command in Global Configuration mode to
set the authentication method required for user at login. To return to the
default configuration, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
aaa authentication login {default | list-name} method1 [method2...]
AAA Commands
245
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 246 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no aaa authentication login {default | list-name}
•
default — Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this
argument as the default list of methods when a user logs in.
•
list-name — Character string used to name the list of authentication
methods activated when a user logs in. (Range: 1-15 characters)
•
method1 [method2...] — Specify at least one from the following table:
Keyword
Source or destination
enable
Uses the enable password for authentication.
line
Uses the line password for authentication.
local
Uses the local username database for authentication.
none
Uses no authentication.
radius
Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication.
tacacs
Uses the list of all TACACS+ servers for authentication.
Default Configuration
The default login lists are defaultList and networkList. defaultList is used by
the console and only contains the method none. networkList is used by telnet
and SSH and only contains the method local.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The default and optional list names created with the aaa authentication
login command are used with the login authentication command. Create a
list by entering the aaa authentication login list-name method command for
a particular protocol, where list-name is any character string used to name
this list. The method argument identifies the list of methods that the
authentication algorithm tries, in the given sequence.
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous
method returns an error, not if there is an authentication failure. Only the
RADIUS or TACACS+ methods can return an error. To ensure that the
authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as
246
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 247 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
the final method in the command line. For example, if none is specified as an
authentication method after radius, no authentication is used if the RADIUS
server is down.
Example
The following example configures authentication login.
console(config)# aaa authentication login default
radius local enable none
aaa authorization network default radius
Use the aaa authorization network default radius command in Global
Configuration mode to enable the switch to accept VLAN assignment by the
RADIUS server.
Syntax
aaa authorization network default radius
no aaa authorization network default radius
Default Configuration
By default, the switch does not accept VLAN assignments by the RADIUS
server.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The RADIUS server can place a port in a particular VLAN based on the result
of the authentication. VLAN assignment must be configured on the external
RADIUS server.
Example
The following example enables RADIUS-assigned VLANs.
console(config)#aaa authorization network default
radius
AAA Commands
247
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 248 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
aaa ias-user username
Use the aaa ias-user username command in Global Configuration mode to
configure IAS users and their attributes. Username and password attributes
are supported. The ias-user name is composed of up to 64 alphanumeric
characters. This command also changes the mode to a user config mode. Use
the no form of this command to remove the user from the internal user
database.
Syntax
aaa ias-user username user
no aaa ias-user username user
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
console#configure
console(config)#aaa ias-user username client-1
console(Config-IAS-User)#exit
console(config)#no aaa ias-user username client-1
248
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 249 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
aaa new-model
The aaa new-model command in Global Configuration mode is a no-op
command. It is present only for compatibility purposes. PowerConnect
switches only support the new model command set.
Syntax
aaa new-model
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the switch to use the new model command
set.
(config)# aaa new-model
clear (IAS)
Use the clear aaa ias-users command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete all
IAS users.
Syntax
clear aaa ias-users
AAA Commands
249
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 250 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#clear aaa ias-users
enable authentication
Use the enable authentication command in Line Configuration mode to
specify the authentication method list when accessing a higher privilege level
from a remote telnet or console. To return to the default specified by the
enable authentication command, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
enable authentication {default | list-name}
no enable authentication
•
default — Uses the default list created with the aaa authentication enable
command.
•
list-name — Uses the indicated list created with the aaa authentication
enable command. (Range: 1-12 characters)
Default Configuration
Uses the default set with the command aaa authentication enable.
250
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 251 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use of the no form of the command does not disable authentication. Instead,
it sets the authentication list to the default list (same as enable
authentication default).
Example
The following example specifies the default authentication method when
accessing a higher privilege level console.
console(config)# line console
console(config-line)# enable authentication default
enable password
Use the enable password command in Global Configuration mode to set a
local password to control access to the privileged EXEC mode. To remove the
password requirement, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
enable password password [encrypted]
no enable password
•
password — Password for this level (Range: 8- 64 characters).
•
encrypted — Encrypted password entered, copied from another switch
configuration.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
AAA Commands
251
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 252 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The 4.x firmware emulates industry standard behavior for enable mode
authentication over SSH and telnet. In 4.x, the default enable authentication
method for telnet and SSH uses the enableNetList method, which requires an
enable password. If users are unable to enter privileged mode when accessing
the switch via telnet or SSH, the administrator will need to either change the
enable authentication method, e.g. to enableList, or set an enable password.
Example
The following example defines password "xxxyyyzzz" to control access to user
and privilege levels.
console(config)# enable password xxxyyyzzz
ip http authentication
Use the ip http authentication command in Global Configuration mode to
specify authentication methods for http server users. To return to the default,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip http authentication method1 [method2...]
no ip http authentication
•
method1 [method2...] — Specify at least one from the following table:
Keyword
Source or destination
local
Uses the local username database for authentication.
none
Uses no authentication.
radius
Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication.
tacacs
Uses the list of all TACACS+ servers for authentication.
Default Configuration
The local user database is checked. This action has the same effect as the
command ip http authentication local.
252
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 253 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous
method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication
succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method
in the command line. For example, if none is specified as an authentication
method after radius, no authentication is used if the RADIUS server is down.
Example
The following example configures the http authentication.
console(config)# ip http authentication radius local
ip https authentication
Use the ip https authentication command in Global Configuration mode to
specify authentication methods for https server users. To return to the default
configuration, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip https authentication method1 [method2...]
no ip https authentication
Parameter Description
method1 [method2...] — Specify at least one from the following table:
Keyword
Source or destination
local
Uses the local username database for authentication.
none
Uses no authentication.
radius
Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication.
tacacs
Uses the list of all TACACS+ servers for authentication.
AAA Commands
253
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 254 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The local user database is checked. This action has the same effect as the
command ip https authentication local.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous
method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication
succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method
in the command line. If none is specified as an authentication method after
radius, no authentication is used if the RADIUS server is down.
Example
The following example configures https authentication.
console(config)# ip https authentication radius local
login authentication
Use the login authentication command in Line Configuration mode to
specify the login authentication method list for a line (console, telnet, or
SSH). To return to the default specified by the authentication login
command, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
login authentication {default | list-name}
no login authentication
•
default — Uses the default list created with the aaa authentication login
command.
•
list-name — Uses the indicated list created with the aaa authentication
login command.
Default Configuration
Uses the default set with the command aaa authentication login.
254
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 255 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example specifies the default authentication method for a
console.
console(config)# line console
console(config-line)# login authentication default
password (aaa IAS User Configuration)
Use the password command in aaa IAS User Configuration mode to configure
a password for a user. The password is composed of up to 64 alphanumeric
characters. An optional parameter [encrypted] is provided to indicate that the
password given to the command is already pre-encrypted. To clear the user’s
password, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
password password [encrypted]
no password
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
aaa IAS User Configuration
AAA Commands
255
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 256 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#configure
console(config)#aaa ias-user username client-1
console(Config-IAS-User)#password client123
console(Config-IAS-User)#no password
Example of a adding a MAB Client to the Internal user database:
console#configure
console(config)#aaa ias-user username 1f3ccb1157
console(Config-IAS-User)#password 1f3ccb1157
console(Config-IAS-User)#exit
console(config)#
password (Line Configuration)
Use the password command in Line Configuration mode to specify a
password on a line. To remove the password, use the no form of this
command.
NOTE: For commands that configure password properties, see Password
Management Commands on page 1491.
Syntax
password password [encrypted]
no password
256
•
password — Password for this level. (Range: 8- 64 characters)
•
encrypted — Encrypted password to be entered, copied from another
switch configuration.
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 257 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
No password is specified.
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example specifies a password "mcmxxyyy" on a line.
console(config-line)# password mcmxxyyy
password (User EXEC)
Use the password command in User EXEC mode to allow a currently logged
in user to change the password for only that user without having read/write
privileges. This command should be used after the password has aged. The
user is prompted to enter the old password and the new password.
NOTE: For commands that configure password properties, see Password
Management Commands.
Syntax
password
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
AAA Commands
257
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 258 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows the prompt sequence for executing the
password command.
console>password
Enter old password:********
Enter new password:********
Confirm new password:********
show aaa ias-users
Use the show aaa ias-users command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
configured IAS users and their attributes. Passwords configured are not
shown in the show command output.
Syntax
show aaa ias-users [username]
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Behavior
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
258
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 259 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#show aaa ias-users
UserName
------------------Client-1
Client-2
Following are the IAS configuration commands shown in the output of the
show running-config command. Passwords shown in the command output
are always encrypted.
aaa ias-user username client-1
password
a45c74fdf50a558a2b5cf05573cd633bac2c6c598d54497ad4c46
104918f2c encrypted
exit
show authentication methods
Use the show authentication methods command in Privileged EXEC mode
to display information about the authentication methods.
Syntax
show authentication methods
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
AAA Commands
259
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 260 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the authentication configuration.
console#show authentication methods
Login Authentication Method Lists
--------------------------------defaultList
: none
networkList
:
local
Enable Authentication Method Lists
---------------------------------enableList
: enable
enableNetList
:
none
enable
Line
Login Method List
Enable Method List
-------
-----------------
------------------
Console
defaultList
enableList
Telnet
networkList
enableNetList
SSH
networkList
enableNetList
HTTPS
:local
HTTP
:local
DOT1X
:
show users accounts
Use the show users accounts command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the local user status with respect to user account lockout and password aging.
260
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 261 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show users accounts
Parameter Description
The following fields are displayed by this command.
Parameter
Description
User Name
Local user account’s user name.
Privilege
User’s access level (read only or
read/write).
Lockout Status
Indicates whether the user account is
locked out or not.
Password Expiration Date
Current password expiration date in date
format.
Lockout
Displays the user’s lockout status (True or
False).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information about the local user database.
console#show users accounts
UserName
Privilege Password
Aging
Password
Lockout
Expiry date
----------- --------- --------- ----------- -------
AAA Commands
261
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 262 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
admin
15
---
---
False
guest
15
---
---
False
brcm1
1
---
---
False
console#show users accounts long
User Name
-----------asd
thisisaverylongusernameitisquitelong
show users login-history
Use the show users login-history command in Global Configuration mode to
display information about the login history of users.
Syntax
show users login-history [long]
•
name — name of user. (Range: 1-20 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example show user login history outputs.
262
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 263 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show users login-history
Login Time
Username
Protocol
Location
--------------------
--------- --------- -----------
Jan 19 2005 08:23:48
Bob
Serial
Jan 19 2005 08:29:29
Robert
HTTP
172.16.0.8
Jan 19 2005 08:42:31
John
SSH
172.16.0.1
Jan 19 2005 08:49:52
Betty
Telnet
172.16.1.7
username
Use the username command in Global Configuration mode to add a new user
to the local user database. The default privilege level is 1. This command can
be used to unlock a locked user account for an already existing user. Use the
no form of this command to remove the username from the local user
database.
Syntax
username name password password [privilege level] [encrypted]
no username name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
name
The name of the user. Range: 1-32 printable characters. The
special characters allowed in the password include ! # $ % &
‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~. User
names can contain blanks if the name is surrounded by double
quotes.
password
The authentication password for the user. Range: 8-64 characters.
This value can be 0 [zero] if the no passwords min-length
command has been executed. The special characters allowed in
the password include ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = >
@ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~.
AAA Commands
263
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 264 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
level
The user level. Level 0 can be assigned by a level 15 user to
another user to suspend that user’s access. Range: 0-15. Enter
access level 1 for Read Access or 15 for Read/Write Access.
encrypted
Encrypted password entered, copied from another switch
configuration.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
To use the ! character as part of the username or password string, it should be
enclosed within quotation marks. For example, username “test!xyz” password
“test!xyz” includes an exclamation point in both the username and password.
Up to 8 users may be created.
Example
The following example configures user bob with password xxxyymmmm and
user level 15.
console(config)# username bob password ?
Enter the password. The special characters
allowed in the password include ~ ` ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + = [ ] { } \ | : ; ' < > . , /.
console(config)# username bob password xxxyyymmm privilege
15
username password encrypted
The Administrator uses the username password encrypted command in
Global Configuration mode to transfer local user passwords between devices
without having to know the passwords. The password parameter must be
264
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 265 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
exactly 128 hexadecimal characters. The user represented by the username
parameter must be a pre-existing local user. If the password strength feature is
enabled, it checks for password strength and returns an appropriate error if it
fails to meet the password strength criteria.
Syntax
username name password password [level level] [encrypted]
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Behavior
This command has no default configuration.
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
Message
Error Completion Message
Could not set user password!
AAA Commands
265
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 266 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Message Type
Reason behind the failure
Message Description
1 Exceeds Minimum Length of a Password.
Password should be in the range of 8-64
characters in length. Set minimum password
length to 0 by using the passwords min-length
0 command.
2 Password should contain Minimum
uppercase-letters,
lowercase-letters,
numeric numbers,
special characters and
character classes and
Maximum limit of consecutive
alphabetic and numeric
characters.
Maximum repetition of
alphabetic and number characters.
3 Password should not contain the
keywords ,
and in any form(reversed,
substring or case-insensitive).
Examples
console(config)#username test password xxxxPassword
level 1 encrypted
console(config)#username test password xxxxPassword
level 1
console(config)#username test password testPassword
encrypted
console(config)#username test password testPassword
username unlock
Use the username unlock command in Global Configuration mode to unlock
a locked user account. Only a user with read/write access can re-activate a
locked user account.
266
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 267 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
username username unlock
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
AAA Commands
267
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 268 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
268
AAA Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 269 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
5
ACL Commands
Access to a switch or router can be made more secure through the use of
Access Control Lists (ACLs) to control the type of traffic allowed into or out
of specific ports. An ACL consists of a series of rules, each of which describes
the type of traffic to be processed and the actions to take for packets that
meet the classification criteria. Rules within an ACL are evaluated
sequentially until a match is found, if any. Every ACL is terminated by an
implicit deny all rule, which covers any packet not matching a preceding
explicit rule. ACLs can help to ensure that only authorized users have access
to specific resources while blocking out any unwarranted attempts to reach
network resources.
ACLs may be used to restrict contents of routing updates, decide which types
of traffic are forwarded or blocked and, above all, provide security for the
network. ACLs are normally used in firewall routers that are positioned
between the internal network and an external network, such as the Internet.
They can also be used on a router positioned between two parts of the
network to control the traffic entering or exiting a specific part of the internal
network.
The PowerConnect ACL feature allows classification of packets based upon
Layer 2 through Layer 4 header information. An Ethernet IPv6 packet is
distinguished from an IPv4 packet by its unique Ethertype value; thus, all
IPv4 and IPv6 classifiers include the Ethertype field.
Multiple ACLs per interface are supported. The ACLs can be a combination
of Layer 2 and/or Layer 3/4 ACLs. ACL assignment is appropriate for both
physical ports and LAGs. ACLs can also be time based.
ACL Logging
Access list rules are monitored in hardware to either permit or deny traffic
matching a particular classification pattern, but the network administrator
currently has no insight as to which rules are being hit. Some hardware
platforms have the ability to count the number of hits for a particular
ACL Commands
269
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 270 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
classifier rule. The ACL logging feature allows these hardware hit counts to be
collected on a per-rule basis and reported periodically to the network
administrator using the system logging facility and an SNMP trap.
The PowerConnect ACL permit/deny rule specification supports a log
parameter that enables hardware hit count collection and reporting.
Depending on platform capabilities, logging can be specified for deny rules,
permit rules, or both. A five minute logging interval is used, at which time
trap log entries are written for each ACL logging rule that accumulated a
nonzero hit count during that interval. The logging interval is not user
configurable.
How to Build ACLs
This section describes how to build ACLs that are less likely to exhibit false
matches.
Administrators are cautioned to specify ACL access-list, permit and deny rule
criteria as fully as is possible in order to avoid false matches. This is especially
true in networks with protocols such as FCoE that have newly introduced
Ether type values. As an example, rules that specify a TCP or UDP port value
should also specify the TCP or UDP protocol and the IPv4 or IPv6 Ether type.
Rules that specify an IP protocol should also specify the Ether type value for
the frame. In general, any rule that specifies matching on an upper layer
protocol field should also include matching constraints for each of the lower
layer protocols. For example, a rule to match packets directed to the wellknown UDP port number 22 (SSH) should also include matching constraints
on the IP protocol field (protocol = 0x11 or UDP) and the Ether type field
(Ether type = 0x0800 or IPv4). In Table 5-1 is a list of commonly used Ether
types and, in Table 5-2 commonly used IP protocol numbers.
270
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 271 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Table 5-1.
Common Ethertypes
EtherType
Protocol
0x0800
Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4)
0x0806
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
0x0842
Wake-on LAN Packet
0x8035
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP)
0x8100
VLAN tagged frame (IEEE 802.1Q)
0x86DD
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
0x8808
MAC Control
0x8809
Slow Protocols (IEEE 802.3)
0x8870
Jumbo frames
0x888E
EAP over LAN (EAPOL – 802.1x)
0x88CC
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
0x8906
Fibre Channel over Ethernet
0x8914
FCoE Initialization Protocol
0x9100
Q in Q
Table 5-2.
Common IP Protocol Numbers
IP Protocol Numbers
Protocol
0x00
IPv6 Hop-by-hop option
0x01
ICMP
0x02
IGMP
0x06
TCP
0x08
EGP
0x09
IGP
0x11
UDP
ACL Commands
271
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 272 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
access-list
mac access-list extended rename
deny | permit (IP ACL)
service-acl input
deny | permit (Mac-Access-ListConfiguration)
show service-acl interface
ip access-group
show ip access-lists
mac access-group
show mac access-list
mac access-list extended
access-list
Use the access-list command in Global Configuration mode to create an
Access Control List (ACL) that is identified by the parameter list-name.
The command specifies the queue identifier to which packets matching this
rule are assigned. The command may also specify the mirror or redirect
interface (unit/slot/port) to which packets matching this rule are copied or
forwarded, respectively.
The time-range parameter allows imposing time limitation on the ACL rule
as defined by the parameter time-range-name. If a time range with the
specified name does not exist, and the ACL containing this ACL rule is
applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then the ACL rule is applied
immediately. If a time range with specified name exists and the ACL
containing this ACL rule is applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then
the ACL rule is applied when the time-range with specified name becomes
active. The ACL rule is removed when the time-range with specified name
becomes inactive.
access-list list-name {deny | permit} {every | {{icmp | igmp | ip | tcp |
udp | number} any| srcip srcmask[{eq {portkey | 0-65535}] dstip dstmask
[{eq {portkey | 0-65535}] [precedence precedence | tos tos tosmask | dscp
dscp] }[log] [time-range time-range-name] [assign-queue queue-id]
[{mirror | redirect} interface-id]
no access-list list-name
272
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 273 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
list-name
Access-list name up to 31 characters in length.
deny | permit
Specifies whether the IP ACL rule permits or denies an action.
every
Allows all protocols.
eq
Equal. Refers to the Layer 4 port number being used as match
criteria. The first reference is source match criteria, the second
is destination match criteria.
number
Standard protocol number. Protocol keywords
icmp,igmp,ip,tcp,udp.
srcip
Source IP address.
srcmask
Source IP mask.
dstip
Destination IP address.
dstmask
Destination IP mask.
portvalue
The source layer 4 port match condition for the ACL rule is
specified by the port value parameter (Range: 0–65535).
portkey
Or you can specify the portkey, which can be one of the
following keywords: domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, http, smtp,
snmp, telnet, tftp, and www.
log
Specifies that this rule is to be logged.
time-range-name
Displays the name of the time-range if the ACL rule has
referenced a time range.
assign-queue queue- Specifies the particular hardware queue for handling traffic that
matches the rule. (Range: 0-6)
id
mirror interface
Allows the traffic matching this rule to be copied to the
specified interface.
redirect interface
This parameter allows the traffic matching this rule to be
forwarded to the specified unit/slot/port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
ACL Commands
273
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 274 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Access list names can consist of any printable character. Names can be up to
31 characters in length.
Examples
The following examples create an ACL to discard any HTTP traffic from
192.168.77.171, but allow all other traffic from 192.168.77.171:
console(config)#access-list alpha deny ip
192.168.77.171 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 eq
http
console(config)#access-list alpha permit ip
192.168.77.171 0.0.0.0 any
deny | permit (IP ACL)
Use this command in Ipv4-Access-List Configuration mode to create a new
rule for the current IP access list. Each rule is appended to the list of
configured rules for the list.
The command is enhanced to accept the optional time-range parameter. The
time-range parameter allows imposing a time limitation on the IP ACL rule
as defined by the parameter time-range-name. If a time range with the
specified name does not exist, and the IP ACL containing this ACL rule is
applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then the ACL rule is applied
immediately. If a time range with the specified name exists, and the IP ACL
containing this ACL rule is applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then
the ACL rule is applied when the time-range with a specified name becomes
active. The ACL rule is removed when the time-range with a specified name
becomes inactive.
Syntax
{deny | permit} {every | any} {dstmac | any} [ethertypekey | 0x06000xFFFF] vlan {eq 0-4095}] [cos 0-7] [[log] [time-range time-range-name]
[assign-queue queue-id] [{mirror | redirect} interface-id]
274
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 275 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
{deny | permit} {every | {{icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | number} srcip
srcmask [{eq {portkey | 0-65535} dstip dstmask [{eq {portkey| 0-65535}]
[precedence precedence | tos tos tosmask | dscp dscp] [log] [time-range
time-range-name] [assign-queue queue-id] [{mirror | redirect} interface-id]
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Ipv4-Access-List Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Administrators are cautioned to specify permit and deny rule matches as fully
as is possible in order to avoid false matches. Rules that specify a port value
should also specify the protocol and ethertype. Rules that specify a protocol
should also specify the ethertype value for the frame. In general, any rule that
specifies matching on an upper layer protocol field should also include
matching constraints for lower layer protocol fields. For example, a rule to
match packets directed to the well-known UDP port number 22 (SSH)
should also include constraints on the IP protocol field (UDP) and the
ethertype field (0x800 – IPv4). Below is a list of commonly used ethertypes:
Ethertype
Protocol
0x0800
Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4)
0x0806
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
0x0842
Wake-on LAN Packet
0x8035
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP)
0x8100
VLAN tagged frame (IEEE 802.1Q)
0x86DD
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
0x8808
MAC Control
ACL Commands
275
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 276 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Ethertype
Protocol
0x8809
Slow Protocols (IEEE 802.3)
0x8870
Jumbo frames
0x888E
EAP over LAN (EAPOL – 802.1x)
0x88CC
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
0x8906
Fibre Channel over Ethernet
0x8914
FCoE Initialization Protocol
0x9100
Q in Q
deny | permit (Mac-Access-List-Configuration)
Use the deny command in Mac-Access-List Configuration mode to deny
traffic if the conditions defined in the deny statement are matched. Use the
permit command in Mac-Access-List Configuration mode to allow traffic if
the conditions defined in the permit statement are matched.
Use this command in Mac-Access-List Configuration mode to create a new
rule for the current MAC access list. Each rule is appended to the list of
configured rules for the list.
The command is enhanced to accept the optional time-range parameter. The
time-range parameter allows imposing a time limitation on the MAC ACL
rule as defined by the parameter time-range-name. If a time range with the
specified name does not exist, and the MAC ACL containing this ACL rule is
applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then the ACL rule is applied
immediately. If a time range with the specified name exists, and the MAC
ACL containing this ACL rule is applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN,
then the ACL rule is applied when the time-range with a specified name
becomes active. The ACL rule is removed when the time-range with a
specified name becomes inactive.
Syntax
{deny | permit} {{any | srcmac srcmacmask} {any | bpdu |dstmac
dstmacmask}} [ethertypekey | 0x0600-0xFFFF] vlan {eq 0-4095}] [cos 0-7]
[[log] [time-range time-range-name] [assign-queue queue-id] [{mirror |
redirect} interface-id]
276
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 277 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
srcmac
Valid source MAC address in format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
srcmacmask
Valid MAC address bitmask for the source MAC address in
format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
any
Packets sent to or received from any MAC address
dstmac
Valid destination MAC address in format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
destmacmask
Valid MAC address bitmask for the destination MAC address in
format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
bpdu
Bridge protocol data unit
ethertypekey
Either a keyword or valid four-digit hexadecimal number.
(Range: Supported values are appletalk, arp, ibmsna, ipv4, ipv6,
ipx, mplsmcast, mplsucast, Netbios, novell, pppoe, rarp.)
0x0600-0xFFFF
Specify custom ethertype value (hexadecimal range 0x06000xFFFF).
vlan eq
VLAN number. (Range 0-4095)
cos
Class of service. (Range 0-7)
log
Specifies that this rule is to be logged.
time-range-name
Use the time-range parameter to impose a time limitation on
the MAC ACL rule as defined by the parameter time-rangename.
assign-queue
Specifies particular hardware queue for handling traffic that
matches the rule.
queue-id
0-6, where n is number of user configurable queues available for
that hardware platform.
mirror
Copies the traffic matching this rule to the specified interface.
redirect
Forwards traffic matching this rule to the specified physical
interface.
interface
Valid physical interface in unit/slot/port format, for example
1/0/12.
ACL Commands
277
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 278 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Mac-Access-List Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The no form of this command is not supported, as the rules within an ACL
cannot be deleted individually. Rather the entire ACL must be deleted and
respecified.
The assign-queue and redirect parameters are only valid for permit
commands.
Example
The following example configures a MAC ACL to deny traffic from MAC
address 0806.c200.0000.
console(config)#mac access-list extended DELL123
console(config-mac-access-list)#deny 0806.c200.0000
ffff.ffff.ffff any
ip access-group
Use the ip access-group command in Global and Interface Configuration
modes to apply an IP based ACL on an Ethernet interface or a group of
interfaces. An IP based ACL should have been created by the access-list name
… command with the same name specified in this command.
Use the no ip access-group command to disable an IP based ACL on an
Ethernet interface or a group of interfaces.
Syntax
ip access-group name [direction] [seqnum]
no ip access-group name direction seqnum
•
278
name — Access list name. (Range: Valid IP access-list name up to 31
characters in length)
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 279 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
direction — Direction of the ACL. (Range: in or out. Default is in.)
•
seqnum — Precedence for this interface and direction. A lower sequence
number has higher precedence. Range: 1 – 4294967295. Default is1.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration and Interface Configuration (Ethernet, VLAN, or Port
Channel) modes
User Guidelines
Global mode command configures the ACL on all the interfaces, whereas the
interface mode command does so for the interface.
Examples
console(config)#ip access-group aclname in
console(config)#no ip access-group aclname in
console(config)#ip access-group aclname1 out
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip access-group aclname out
2
console(config-if-1/0/1)#no ip access-group aclname
out
mac access-group
Use the mac access-group command in Global Configuration or Interface
Configuration mode to attach a specific MAC Access Control List (ACL) to
an interface in the in-bound direction.
Syntax
mac access-group name [direction] [sequence]
no mac access-group name
•
name — Name of the existing MAC access list. (Range: 1-31 characters)
ACL Commands
279
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 280 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
direction — Only the in-bound direction is supported.
•
sequence — Order of access list relative to other access lists already
assigned to this interface and direction. (Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Configuration
The default direction is in (in-bound).
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode or Interface Configuration (Ethernet, VLAN or
Port Channel) mode
User Guidelines
An optional sequence number may be specified to indicate the order of this
access-list relative to the other access-lists already assigned to this interface
and direction. A lower number indicates higher precedence order. If a
sequence number already is in use for this interface and direction, the
specified access-list replaces the currently attached access list using that
sequence number. If the sequence number is not specified for this command,
a sequence number is selected that is one greater than the highest sequence
number currently in use for this interface and direction.
This command specified in Interface Configuration mode only affects a
single interface.
Example
The following example assigns a MAC access group to port 1/0/1 with the
name DELL123.
console(config)#interface 1/0/1
console(config-if-1/0/1)#mac access-group DELL123
mac access-list extended
Use the mac access-list extended command in Global Configuration mode to
create the MAC Access Control List (ACL) identified by the name parameter.
280
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 281 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
mac access-list extended name
no mac access-list extended name
•
name — Name of the access list. (Range: 1-31 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use this command to create a mac access control list. The CLI mode is
changed to Mac-Access-List Configuration when this command is
successfully executed.
Example
The following example creates MAC ACL and enters MAC-Access-ListConfiguration mode.
console(config)#mac access-list extended LVL7DELL
console(config-mac-access-list)#
mac access-list extended rename
Use the mac access-list extended rename command in Global Configuration
mode to rename the existing MAC Access Control List (ACL).
Syntax
mac access-list extended rename name newname
•
name — Existing name of the access list. (Range: 1-31 characters)
•
newname — New name of the access list. (Range: 1-31 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
ACL Commands
281
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 282 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Command fails if the new name is the same as the old one.
Example
The following example shows the mac access-list extended rename
command.
console(config)#mac access-list extended rename DELL1
DELL2
service-acl input
Use the service-acl input command in Interface Configuration mode to block
Link Local Protocol Filtering (LLPF) protocol(s) on a given port. Use the no
form of this command to unblock link-local protocol(s) on a given port.
Syntax
service-acl input {blockcdp | blockvtp | blockdtp | blockudld | blockpagp |
blocksstp | blockall}
no service-acl input
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
blockcdp
To block CDP PDU’s from being forwarded.
blockvtp
To block VTP PDU’s from being forwarded.
blockdtp
To block DTP PDU’s from being forwarded.
blockudld
To block UDLD PDU’s from being forwarded.
blockpagp
To block PAgP PDU’s from being forwarded.
blocksstp
To block SSTP PDU’s from being forwarded.
blockall
To block all the PDU’s with MAC of 01:00:00:0c:cc:cx (x-don’t
care) from being forwarded.
282
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 283 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-channel)
User Guidelines
To specify multiple protocols, enter the protocol parameters together on the
command line, separated by spaces. This command can only be entered once
per interface if no intervening no service-acl input command has been
entered.
show service-acl interface
This command displays the status of LLPF rules configured on a particular
port or on all the ports.
Syntax
show service-acl interface {interface-id | all}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Any physical or logical interface. See Interface Naming
Conventions for interface representation.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
ACL Commands
283
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 284 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#show service-acl interface gi1/0/1
Block CDP................................ Enable
Block VTP.................................Enable
Block DTP..................................Enable
Block UDLD................................ Enable
Block PAGP.................................Enable
Block SSTP................................ Enable
Block All................................. Enable
show ip access-lists
Use the show ip access-lists command in Privileged EXEC mode to display an
IP ACL and time-range parameters.
Syntax
show ip access-lists [accesslistnumber]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
accesslistnumber
The number used to identify the IP ACL.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
284
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 285 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
The following example displays IP ACLs configured on a device.
console#show ip access-lists
Current number of ACLs: 2
ACL Name
Vlan(s)
Maximum number of ACLs: 100
Rules
Interface(s)
----------------------------------------------------ACL40
1
ACL41
1
show mac access-list
Use the show mac access-list command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a
MAC access list and all of the rules that are defined for the MAC ACL. Use
the [name] parameter to identify a specific MAC ACL to display.
Syntax
show mac access-list name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Name
Use the name parameter to identify a specific MAC ACL to
display.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
ACL Commands
285
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 286 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays a MAC access list and all associated rules.
console#show mac access-list DELL123
The command output provides the following information:
Fields
Description
MAC ACL Name
The name of the MAC access list.
Rules
The number of user-configured rules defined for the MAC
ACL.
The implicit 'deny all' rule defined at the end of every MAC
ACL is not included.
Interfaces
286
Displays the list of interfaces (unit/slot/port) to which the
MAC ACL is attached in a given direction.
ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 287 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Address Table Commands
6
Static MAC Filtering allows the administrator to add a number of unicast or
multicast MAC addresses directly to the forwarding database. This is typically
a small number relative to the total size of the database. Associated with each
static MAC address is a set of source ports, a set of destination ports and
VLAN information.
Any packet with a particular static MAC address in a particular VLAN is
admitted only if the ingress port is in the set of source ports; otherwise, the
packet is dropped. On the egress side, the packet, if admitted, is sent out of all
the ports that are in the set of destination ports.
Upon ingress, each packet's destination MAC address is compared against the
forwarding database. If the address is not in the table, the packet is flooded to
all other ports in the VLAN. If the address is in the table, then it is checked to
see if it has been defined as a filter. If the MAC address is not defined as a
filter, then the packet is forwarded.
If the specific destination MAC address is defined as a filter, then the ingress
port number is compared to the set of source ports listed for the address. If
the port of ingress is not in the set of source ports, then the packet is
immediately discarded. If the ingress port is a member of the set of source
ports, then the packet is admitted.
For packets admitted because of a MAC filter match only, the following
additional steps are performed. Note that all other egress processing remains
unchanged. At the egress port, if the destination port number is in the set of
destination ports, the packet is forwarded. If the destination port is not in the
set of destination ports, then the packet is discarded.
Static entries are never aged and can only be removed by user command.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear mac address-table
mac address-table static
show mac address-table
count
Address Table Commands
287
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 288 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
mac address-table agingtime
port security
show mac address-table
dynamic
mac address-table
multicast filtering
port security max
show mac address-table
interface
mac address-table
multicast forbidden
address
show mac address-table
multicast
show mac address-table
static
mac address-table
multicast forbidden
forward-unregistered
show mac address-table
filtering
show mac address-table
vlan
mac address-table
multicast forward-all
show mac address-table
show ports security
mac address-table
multicast forwardunregistered
show mac address-table
address
show ports security
addresses
mac address-table
multicast static
show mac address-table
count
clear mac address-table
Use the clear mac address-table command in Privileged EXEC mode to
remove learned entries from the forwarding database.
Syntax
clear mac address-table dynamic [address mac-addr | interface interface-id |
vlan vlan-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
mac-addr
Delete the specified MAC address.
interface-id
Delete all dynamic MAC addresses on the specified physical
port or port channel.
vlan-id
Delete all dynamic MAC addresses for the specified VLAN. The
range is 1 to 4093.
288
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 289 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In this example, the mac address-table tables are cleared.
console#clear mac address-table dynamic
mac address-table aging-time
Use the mac address-table aging-time command in Global Configuration
mode to set the aging time of the address. To restore the default, use the no
form of the mac address table aging-time command.
Syntax
mac address-table aging-time {0 | 10-1000000}
no mac address-table aging-time
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
0
Disable aging time for the MAC Address Table
10-1000000
Set the number of seconds aging time for the MAC Address
Table
Default Configuration
300 seconds
Address Table Commands
289
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 290 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In this example the MAC Address Table aging time is set to 400.
console(config)#mac address-table aging-time 400
mac address-table multicast filtering
Use the mac address-table multicast filtering command in Global
Configuration mode to enable filtering of Multicast addresses. To disable
filtering of Multicast addresses, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
mac address-table multicast filtering
no mac address-table multicast filtering
Parameter Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Multicast filtering is disabled by default. The switch will flood multicast
packets to all ports belonging to the received VLAN and ignores the settings
of the mac address-table multicast forbidden and mac address-table
multicast forward-unregistered commands.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
290
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 291 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
If switches exist on the VLAN, and IGMP snooping is not enabled, use the
mac address-table multicast forward-all command to enable forwarding all
Multicast packets to the Multicast routers.
Example
In this example, multicast filtering is enabled and multicast frames will
behave according to the setting of the mac address-table multicast forwardunregistered and mac address-table multicast forbidden forwardunregistereed command settings.
console(config)#mac address-table multicast filtering
mac address-table multicast forbidden address
Use the mac address-table multicast forbidden address command in Global
Configuration mode to forbid adding a specific Multicast address to specific
ports. To return to the system default, use the no form of this command. If
routers exist on the VLAN, do not change the unregistered multicast
addresses state to drop on the routers ports.
Syntax
mac address-table multicast forbidden address vlan vlan-id {mac-multicastaddress | ip-multicast-address} {add | remove} interface {gigabitethernet |
port-channel | tengigabitethernet} interface-list
no mac address-table multicast forbidden address vlan vlan-id {mac-
multicast-address | ip-multicast-address}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
add
Adds ports to the group. If no option is specified, this is the
default option.
remove
Removes ports from the group.
vlan vlan-id
A valid vlan-id. (Range 1-4093)
Address Table Commands
291
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 292 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
mac-multicastaddress
MAC Multicast address in the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
ip-multicast-address IP Multicast address.
interface-list
Specify a comma separated list of interfaces, a range of
interfaces, or a combination of both. Interfaces can be portchannel numbers or physical ports in unit/slot/port format.
Default Configuration
No forbidden addresses are defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Before defining forbidden ports, ensure that the Multicast group is registered.
Examples
In this example the MAC address 0100.5e02.0203 is forbidden on port 2/0/9
within VLAN 8.
console(config)#mac address-table multicast forbidden
address vlan 8 0100.5e02.0203 add gigabitethernet
2/0/9
mac address-table multicast forbidden forwardunregistered
Use the mac address-table multicast forbidden forward-unregistered
command in Global Configuration mode to forbid forwarding unregistered–
multicast–addresses. Use the no form of this command to return to the
default.
Syntax
mac address-table multicast forbidden forward-unregistered vlan vlan-id
292
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 293 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no mac address-table multicast forbidden forward-unregistered vlan vlan-id
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan vlan-id
Valid VLAN ID (Range 1-4093).
Default Configuration
The default for this command is not forbidden.
Command Mode
Global configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example forbids forwarding unregistered multicast addresses
on VLAN8.
console(config)#mac address-table multicast forbidden
forward-unregistered vlan 8
mac address-table multicast forward-all
Use the mac address-table multicast forward-all command in Interface
Configuration mode to enable forwarding of all Multicast packets. To restore
the default, use the no form of the mac address-table multicast forward-all
command.
Syntax
mac address-table multicast forward-all vlan vlan-id
no mac address-table multicast forward-all vlan vlan-id
Address Table Commands
293
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 294 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan vlan-id
A valid VLAN ID (Range 1-4093).
Default Configuration
Forward-unregistered.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In this example, all VLAN1 Multicast packets are forwarded.
console(config)#mac address-table multicast forwardall vlan 1
mac address-table multicast forwardunregistered
Use the mac address-table multicast forward-unregistered command in
Global Configuration mode to enable the forwarding of unregistered
multicast addresses.
Syntax
mac address-table multicast forward-unregistered vlan vlan-id
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan vlan-id
A valid VLAN ID (Range 1-4093).
294
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 295 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Forward-unregistered
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If routers exist on the VLAN, do not change the unregistered multicast
addresses state to drop on the routers ports.
NOTE: Do not use the mac address-table multicast forbidden forward-unregistered
command with the mac address-table multicast forward-unregistered command on
the same interface.
Example
The following example displays how to enable forwarding of unregistered
multicast addresses.
console(config)#bridge multicast forward-unregistered
vlan 1
mac address-table multicast static
Use the mac address-table multicast static command in Global
Configuration mode to register MAC layer Multicast addresses to the bridge
table and to add ports to the group statically. To deregister the MAC address,
use the no form of the mac address-table multicast static command.
Syntax
mac address-table multicast static vlan vlan-id {mac-multicast-address | ipmulticast-address} [add | remove] [interface {gigabitethernet | portchannel | tengigabitethernet} interface-list]
no mac address-table multicast static vlan
Address Table Commands
295
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 296 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
add
Adds ports to the group. If no option is specified, this is the
default option.
remove
Removes ports from the group.
vlan vlan-id
Valid vlan ID (1-4093).
mac-multicastaddress
MAC multicast address in the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
ip-multicast-address IP multicast address.
interface interface-
list
Specify a comma separated list of interfaces, a range of
interfaces, or a combination of both. Interfaces can be portchannel numbers or physical ports in unit/slot/port format.
Default Configuration
No Multicast addresses are defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If the command is executed without add or remove, the command registers
only the group in the bridge database.
Static Multicast addresses can be defined only on static VLANs.
Examples
The following example registers the MAC address.
console(config)#mac address-table vlan 8 multicast
static 0100.5e02.0203
The following example registers the MAC address and adds ports statically.
console(config)#interface vlan 8
296
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 297 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)# mac address-table vlan 8 multicast
static 0100.5e02.0203 add interface gigabitethernet
1/0/1-9, 1/0/2
mac address-table static
Use the mac address-table static command in Global Configuration mode to
add a static MAC-layer station source address to the bridge table. To delete
the MAC address, use the no form of the mac address-table static command.
Syntax
mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface {gigabitethernet |
port-channel | tengigabitethernet} interface-id
no mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id [interface
{gigabitethernet | port-channel | tengigabitethernet} interface-id]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
mac-address
A valid MAC address in the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
vlan-id
Valid VLAN ID (1-4093)
interface-id
A valid physical unit/slot/port or port-channel number.
Default Configuration
No static addresses are defined. The default mode for an added address is
permanent.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Address Table Commands
297
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 298 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example adds a permanent static MAC-layer station source
address 3aa2.64b3.a245 to the MAC address table.
console(config)# mac address-table static
3AA2.64B3.A245 vlan 1 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
port security
Use the port security command in Interface Configuration mode to disable
the learning of new addresses on an interface. To enable new address learning,
use the no form of the port security command.
Syntax
port security [discard]
no port security
•
discard — Discards frames with unlearned source addresses. This is the
default if no option is indicated.
Default Configuration
Disabled —No port security
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
When port security is enabled on an interface, all dynamic entries learned up
to that point are flushed, and new entries can be learned only to the limit set
by the port security max command. The default limit is 100 dynamic MAC
addresses.
Example
In this example, frame forwarding is enabled without learning, and with traps
sent every 100 seconds on port gi1/0/1.
298
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 299 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
console(config-if-1/0/1)#port security trap 100
port security max
Use the port security max command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the maximum addresses that can be learned on the port while the
port is in port security mode. To return to the system default, use the no form
of this command.
Syntax
port security max max-addr
no port security max
•
max-addr — The maximum number of addresses that can be learning on
the port. (Range: 0-600)
Default Configuration
The default value for this command is 100.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows using this command in Ethernet Interface
Configuration mode.
console(config-if-1/0/3)# port security max 80
show mac address-table multicast
Use the show mac address-table multicast command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display Multicast MAC address table information.
Address Table Commands
299
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 300 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show mac address-table multicast [vlan vlan-id] [address {mac-multicastaddress | ip-multicast-address}] [format {ip | mac}]
•
vlan_id — A valid VLAN ID value.
•
mac-multicast-address — A valid MAC Multicast address.
•
ip- multicast-address — A valid IP Multicast address.
•
format — Multicast address format. Can be ip or mac.
Default Configuration
If format is unspecified, the default is mac.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
A MAC address can be displayed in IP format only if it is in the range
01:00:5e:00:00:00 through 01:00:5e:7f:ff:ff.
300
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 301 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
In this example, Multicast MAC address table information is displayed.
console#show mac address-table multicast
Vlan
MAC Address
----1
-------------------
Type
-------
0100.5E05.0505
Ports
------------------
Static
Forbidden ports for multicast addresses:
Vlan
MAC Address
----
-----------------------
1
Ports
---------------------------
0100.5E05.0505
NOTE: A multicast MAC address maps to multiple IP addresses, as shown above.
show mac address-table filtering
Use the show mac address-table filtering command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display the Multicast filtering configuration.
Syntax
show mac address-table filtering vlan-id
•
vlan_id — A valid VLAN ID value.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Address Table Commands
301
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 302 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In this example, the Multicast configuration for VLAN 1 is displayed.
console#show mac address-table filtering 1
Filtering: Enabled
VLAN: 1
Mode:
Forward-Unregistered
show mac address-table
Use the show mac address-table command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display all entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
Syntax
show mac address-table
Parameter Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
302
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 303 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
In this example, all classes of entries in the mac address-table are displayed.
console#show mac address-table
Aging time is 300 Sec
Vlan
Mac Address
Type
Port
---- ---------------- ---------- ----------0
001E.C9AA.AE19 Management
CPU Interface:
1
001E.C9AA.AC19 Dynamic
Gi1/0/21
1
001E.C9AA.AE1B Management
Vl1
10
001E.C9AA.AE1B Management
Vl10
10
001E.C9AA.AE1C FIP Dynamic Vl10
90
001E.C9AA.AE1B Management
0/5/
Vl90
show mac address-table address
Use the show mac address-table address command in User EXEC or
Privileged EXEC mode to display all entries in the bridge-forwarding database
for the specified MAC address.
Syntax
show mac address-table address mac-address [interface interface-id] [vlan
vlan-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
mac-address
A MAC address with the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
Address Table Commands
303
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 304 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Display information for a specific interface. Valid interfaces
include physical ports and port channels.
vlan-id
Display entries for the specific VLAN only. The range is 1 to
4093.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In this example, the mac address table entry for 0000.E26D.2C2A is
displayed.
console#show mac address-table address 0000.E26D.2C2A
Vlan Mac Address
Type
Port
---- -------------- -------- ------------1
0000.E26D.2C2A Dynamic
1/0/1
show mac address-table count
Use the show mac address-table count command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display the number of addresses present in the Forwarding
Database.
Syntax
show mac address-table count [vlan vlan-id | interface interface-id]
304
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 305 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Specify an interface type; valid interfaces include physical ports
and port channels.
vlan-id
Specify a valid VLAN, the range is 1 to 4093.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the addresses in the Forwarding Database:
console#show mac address-table count
Capacity: 8192
Used: 109
Static addresses: 2
Secure addresses: 1
Dynamic addresses: 97
Internal addresses: 9
show mac address-table dynamic
Use the show mac address-table command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display all dynamic entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
Address Table Commands
305
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 306 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show mac address-table dynamic [address mac-address] [interface interfaceid] [vlan vlan-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
mac-address
A MAC address with the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
interface-id
Display information for a specific interface. Valid interfaces
include physical ports and port channels.
vlan-id
Display entries for the specific VLAN only. The range is 1 to
4093.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In this example, all dynamic entries in the mac address-table are displayed.
console#show mac address-table dynamic
Aging time is 300 Sec
Vlan Mac Address
Type
Port
---- -------------- ------- ------------1
0000.0001.0000 Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.8420.5010 Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.E26D.2C2A Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.E89A.596E Dynamic gi1/0/1
306
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 307 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1
0001.02F1.0B33 Dynamic gi1/0/1
show mac address-table interface
Use the show mac address-table command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display all entries in the mac address-table.
Syntax
show mac address-table interface interface-id [vlan vlan-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Specify an interface type.Valid interfaces include physical ports
and port channels.
vlan-id
Specify a valid VLAN. The range is 1 to 4093.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In this example, all classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database for
gigabit Ethernet interface 1/0/1 are displayed.
console#show mac address-table interface
gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Aging time is 300 Sec
Vlan Mac Address
Type
Port
Address Table Commands
307
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 308 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
---- -------------- ----
-------------
1
0000.0001.0000 Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.8420.5010 Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.E26D.2C2A Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.E89A.596E Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0001.02F1.0B33 Dynamic gi1/0/1
show mac address-table static
Use the show mac address-table static command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display static entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
Syntax
show mac address-table static [address mac-address] [interface interface-id]
[vlan vlan-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
mac-address
A MAC address with the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
interface-id
Specify an interface type; valid interfaces include physical ports
and port channels.
vlan-id
Specify a valid VLAN; the range is 1 to 4093.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
308
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 309 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
In this example, all static entries in the bridge-forwarding database are
displayed.
console#show mac address-table static
Vlan Mac Address
Type
Port
---- -------------- -----
-----
1
gi1/0/1
0001.0001.0001 Static
show mac address-table vlan
Use the show mac address-table vlan command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display all entries in the bridge-forwarding database for the
specified VLAN.
Syntax
show mac address-table [vlan vlan-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
Specify a valid VLAN; the range is 1 to 4093.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Address Table Commands
309
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 310 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
In this example, all classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database are
displayed.
console#show mac address-table vlan 1
Mac Address Table
------------------------------------Vlan
Mac Address
Type
Ports
----
--------------- ------- -------
1
0000.0001.0000
Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.8420.5010
Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.E26D.2C2A
Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0000.E89A.596E
Dynamic gi1/0/1
1
0001.02F1.0B33
Dynamic gi1/0/1
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 5
show ports security
Use the show ports security command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the port-lock status.
Syntax
show ports security [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
310
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 311 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In this example, all classes of entries in the port-lock status are displayed.
console#show ports security
Port
Status
----
------
1/0/1 Locked
Action
---------Discard
1/0/2 Unlocked 1/0/3
Locked
Maximum
Trap
Frequency
--------- ------- ------3
Enable
100
28
-
-
Disable
-
Discard, Shutdown 8
The following table describes the fields in this example.
Field
Description
Port
The port number.
Status
The status can be one of the following: Locked
or Unlocked.
Actions
Action on violations.
Maximum
The maximum addresses that can be associated
on this port in Static Learning mode or in
Dynamic Learning mode.
Trap
Indicates if traps would be sent in case of
violation.
Frequency
The minimum time between consecutive traps.
show ports security addresses
Use the show ports security addresses command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display current dynamic addresses in locked ports.
Address Table Commands
311
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 312 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ports security addresses {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel
port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following example displays dynamic addresses for port channel number
1/0/1.
console#show ports security addresses gigabitethernet
1/0/1
Dynamic addresses: 83
Maximum addresses: 100
Learned addresses
------- ---------
312
Address Table Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 313 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
7
Auto-VoIP Commands
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) allows network users to make telephone
calls using a computer network over a data network like the Internet. With
the increased prominence of delay-sensitive applications (voice, video, and
other multimedia applications) deployed in networks today, proper QoS
configuration ensures high-quality application performance. The Auto-VoIP
feature is intended to provide an easy classification mechanism for voice
packets so that they can be prioritized above data packets in order to provide
better QoS.
The Auto-VoIP feature explicitly matches VoIP streams in Ethernet switches
and provides them with a better class of service than ordinary traffic. The
Auto VoIP module provides the capability to assign the highest priority for
the following VoIP packets:
•
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
•
H.323
•
Skinny Client Control Protocol (SCCP)
Auto-VoIP borrows ACL lists from the global system pool. ACL lists allocated
by Auto-VoIP reduce the total number of ACLs available for use by the
network operator. Enabling Auto-VoIP uses one ACL list to monitor for VoIP
sessions. Each monitored VoIP session utilizes two rules from an additional
ACL list. This means that the maximum number of ACL lists allocated by
Auto-VoIP is two. The Auto-VoIP feature limits the maximum number of
simultaneous users to 16. Administrators should utilize the Voice VLAN
feature for deployment of IP voice service in an enterprise network because
Voice VLAN scales to significantly higher numbers of users.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
show switchport voice
switchport voice detect auto
Auto-VoIP Commands
313
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 314 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show switchport voice
Use the show switchport voice command to show the status of Auto-VoIP on
an interface or all interfaces.
Syntax
show switchport voice [gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port]
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example shows command output when a port is specified:
console#show switchport voice
Interface
Auto VoIP Mode Traffic Class
---------
-------------- -------------
Gi1/0/1
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/2
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/3
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/4
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/5
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/6
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/7
Disabled
6
314
Auto-VoIP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 315 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Gi1/0/8
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/9
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/10
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/11
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/12
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/13
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/14
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/15
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/16
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/17
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/18
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/19
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/20
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/21
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/22
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/23
Disabled
6
Gi1/0/24
Disabled
6
Po1
Disabled
6
Po2
Disabled
6
Po3
Disabled
6
Po4
Disabled
6
Po5
Disabled
6
Po6
Disabled
6
Po7
Disabled
6
Po8
Disabled
6
Po9
Disabled
6
Auto-VoIP Commands
315
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 316 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Po10
Disabled
6
Po11
Disabled
6
Po12
Disabled
6
Po13
Disabled
6
Po14
Disabled
6
Po15
Disabled
6
--More-- or (q)uit
The following example shows command output when a port is specified:
console#show switchport voice gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Interface
Auto VoIP Mode Traffic Class
---------
-------------- -------------
Gi1/0/1
Disabled
6
The command output provides the following information:
•
AutoVoIP Mode—The Auto VoIP mode on the interface.
•
Traffic Class—The Cos Queue or Traffic Class to which all VoIP traffic is
mapped. This is not configurable and defaults to the highest COS queue
available in the system for data traffic.
switchport voice detect auto
The switchport voice detect auto command is used to enable the VoIP Profile
on all the interfaces of the switch (global configuration mode) or for a specific
interface (interface configuration mode).Use the no form of the command to
disable the VoIP Profile.
316
Auto-VoIP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 317 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
switchport voice detect auto
no switchport voice detect auto
Default Configuration
This feature is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Interface (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) Configuration
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines
Example
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#switchport voice detect auto
Auto-VoIP Commands
317
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 318 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
318
Auto-VoIP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 319 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
CDP Interoperability Commands
8
Industry Standard Discovery Protocol (ISDP) is a proprietary Layer 2 network
protocol which inter-operates with Cisco network equipment and is used to
share information between neighboring devices. PowerConnect switches
participate in the ISDP protocol and are able to both discover and be
discovered by devices that support the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP).
ISDP is based on CDP, which is a precursor to LLDP.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear isdp counters
show isdp
clear isdp table
show isdp entry
isdp advertise-v2
show isdp interface
isdp enable
show isdp neighbors
isdp holdtime
show isdp traffic
isdp timer
clear isdp counters
The clear isdp counters command clears the ISDP counters.
Syntax
clear isdp counters
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
CDP Interoperability Commands
319
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 320 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#clear isdp counters
clear isdp table
The clear isdp table command clears entries in the ISDP table.
Syntax
clear isdp table
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#clear isdp table
isdp advertise-v2
The isdp advertise-v2 command enables the sending of ISDP version 2
packets from the device. Use the “no” form of this command to disable
sending ISDP version 2 packets.
Syntax
isdp advertise-v2
no isdp advertise-v2
320
CDP Interoperability Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 321 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
ISDP sends version 2 packets by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#isdp advertise-v2
isdp enable
The isdp enable command enables ISDP on the switch. User the “no” form
of this command to disable ISDP. Use this command in global configuration
mode to enable the ISDP function on the switch. Use this command in
interface mode to enable sending ISDP packets on a specific interface.
Syntax
isdp enable
no isdp enable
Default Configuration
ISDP is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
Interface (Ethernet) configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
CDP Interoperability Commands
321
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 322 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example enables isdp on interface 1/0/1.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
console(config-if-1/0/1)#isdp enable
isdp holdtime
The isdp holdtime command configures the hold time for ISDP packets that
the switch transmits. The hold time specifies how long a receiving device
should store information sent in the ISDP packet before discarding it. The
range is given in seconds. Use the “no” form of this command to reset the
holdtime to the default.
Syntax
isdp holdtime time
no isdp holdtime
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
time
The time in seconds (range 10–255 seconds).
Default Configuration
The default holdtime is 180 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets isdp holdtime to 40 seconds.
console(config)#isdp holdtime 40
322
CDP Interoperability Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 323 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
isdp timer
The isdp timer command sets period of time between sending new ISDP
packets. The range is given in seconds. Use the “no” form of this command to
reset the timer to the default.
Syntax
isdp timer time
no isdp timer
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
time
The time in seconds (range: 5–254 seconds).
Default Configuration
The default timer is 30 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets the isdp timer value to 40 seconds.
console(config)#isdp timer 40
show isdp
The show isdp command displays global ISDP settings.
Syntax
show isdp
CDP Interoperability Commands
323
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 324 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show isdp
Timer................................ 30
Hold Time............................ 180
Version 2 Advertisements............. Enabled
Neighbors table last time changed.... 0 days 00:06:01
Device ID............................ QTFMPW82400020
Device ID format capability.......... Serial Number
Device ID format..................... Serial Number
show isdp entry
The show isdp entry command displays ISDP entries. If a device id specified,
then only the entry about that device is displayed.
Syntax
show isdp entry { all | deviceid }
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
all
Show ISDP settings for all devices.
deviceid
The device ID associated with a neighbor.
324
CDP Interoperability Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 325 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show isdp entry Switch
Device ID
Switch
Address(es):
IP Address:
172.20.1.18
IP Address:
172.20.1.18
Capability
Router IGMP
Platform
cisco WS-C4948
Interface
1/0/1
Port ID
GigabitEthernet1/1
Holdtime
64
Advertisement Version
2
Entry last changed time
0 days 00:13:50
Version :
Cisco IOS Software, Catalyst 4000 L3 Switch Software
(cat4000 I9K91S-M), Version 12.2(25)EWA9, RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc3)
Technical Support: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport
Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
CDP Interoperability Commands
325
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 326 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Compiled Wed 21-Mar-07 12:20 by tinhuang
show isdp interface
The show isdp interface command displays ISDP settings for the specified
interface.
Syntax
show isdp interface { all | gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet
unit/slot/port }
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show isdp interface all
Interface
Mode
---------------
----------
1/0/1
Enabled
1/0/2
Enabled
1/0/3
Enabled
1/0/4
Enabled
1/0/5
Enabled
1/0/6
Enabled
1/0/7
Enabled
326
CDP Interoperability Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 327 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1/0/8
Enabled
1/0/9
Enabled
1/0/10
Enabled
1/0/11
Enabled
1/0/12
Enabled
1/0/13
Enabled
1/0/14
Enabled
1/0/15
Enabled
1/0/16
Enabled
1/0/17
Enabled
1/0/18
Enabled
1/0/19
Enabled
1/0/20
Enabled
1/0/21
Enabled
1/0/22
Enabled
1/0/23
Enabled
1/0/24
Enabled
console#show isdp interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Interface
Mode
---------------
----------
1/0/1
Enabled
show isdp neighbors
The show isdp neighbors command displays the list of neighboring devices.
CDP Interoperability Commands
327
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 328 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show isdp neighbors {[ gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet
unit/slot/port | detail] }
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show isdp neighbors
Capability Codes: R - Router, T - Trans Bridge, B - Source
Route, S - Switch, H - Host, I - IGMP, r - Repeater
Device ID
Intf
Hold Cap. Platform
Port ID
---------
---- ----- ---- --------
-------
Switch
1/0/1
165
RI cisco WS-C4948 GigabitEthernet1/1
console#show isdp neighbors detail
Device ID
Switch
Address(es):
IP Address:
172.20.1.18
IP Address:
172.20.1.18
Capability
Router IGMP
Platform
cisco WS-C4948
328
CDP Interoperability Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 329 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interface
1/0/1
Port ID
GigabitEthernet1/1
Holdtime
162
Advertisement Version
2
Entry last changed time
0 days 00:55:20
Version :
Cisco IOS Software, Catalyst 4000 L3 Switch Software
(cat4000-I9K91S-M), Version 12.2(25)EWA9, RELEASE SOFTWARE
(fc3)
Technical Support: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport
Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Wed 21-Mar-07 12:20 by tinhuang
show isdp traffic
The show isdp traffic command displays ISDP statistics.
Syntax
show isdp traffic
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show isdp traffic
ISDP Packets Received.......................... 4253
CDP Interoperability Commands
329
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 330 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ISDP Packets Transmitted....................... 127
ISDPv1 Packets Received........................ 0
ISDPv1 Packets Transmitted..................... 0
ISDPv2 Packets Received........................ 4253
ISDPv2 Packets Transmitted..................... 4351
ISDP Bad Header................................ 0
ISDP Checksum Error............................ 0
ISDP Transmission Failure...................... 0
ISDP Invalid Format............................ 0
ISDP Table Full................................ 392
ISDP Ip Address Table Full..................... 737
330
CDP Interoperability Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 331 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
9
In the majority of network configurations, DHCP clients and their associated
servers do not reside on the same IP network or subnet. Therefore, some kind
of third-party agent is required to transfer DHCP messages between clients
and servers. Such an agent is known as a DHCP Relay agent.
The DHCP Relay agent accepts DHCP requests from any routed interface,
including VLANs. The agent relays requests from a subnet without a DHCP
server to a server or next-hop agent on another subnet. Unlike a router which
switches IP packets transparently, a DHCP Relay agent processes DHCP
messages and generates new DHCP messages as a result.
The PowerConnect DHCP Relay supports DHCP Relay Option 82 circuit-id
and remote-id for a VLAN.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
dhcp l2relay (Global Configuration)
show dhcp l2relay stats interface
dhcp l2relay (Interface Configuration)
show dhcp l2relay subscription interface
dhcp l2relay circuit-id
show dhcp l2relay agent-option vlan
dhcp l2relay remote-id
show dhcp l2relay vlan
dhcp l2relay trust
show dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan
dhcp l2relay vlan
show dhcp l2relay remote-id vlan
show dhcp l2relay all
clear dhcp l2relay statistics interface
show dhcp l2relay interface
–
dhcp l2relay (Global Configuration)
Use the dhcp l2relay command to enable Layer 2 DHCP Relay functionality.
The subsequent commands mentioned in this section can only be used when
the L2-DHCP Relay is enabled. Use the no form of this command to disable
L2-DHCP Relay.
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
331
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 332 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
dhcp l2relay
no dhcp l2relay
Default Configuration
DHCP L2 Relay is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#dhcp l2relay
dhcp l2relay (Interface Configuration)
Use the dhcp l2relay command to enable DHCP L2 Relay for an interface.
Use the "no" form of this command to disable DHCP L2 Relay for an
interface.
Syntax
dhcp l2relay
no dhcp l2relay
Default Configuration
DHCP L2Relay is disabled on all interfaces by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-channel).
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
332
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 333 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#dhcp l2relay
dhcp l2relay circuit-id
Use the dhcp l2relay circuit-id command to enable setting the DHCP
Option 82 Circuit ID for a VLAN. When enabled, the interface number is
added as the Circuit ID in DHCP option 82. Use the "no" form of this
command to disable setting the DHCP Option 82 Circuit ID.
Syntax
dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan vlan-range
no dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan vlan-range
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-range
The list of VLAN IDs.
Default Configuration
Setting the DHCP Option 82 Circuit ID is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan 340-350
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
333
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 334 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
dhcp l2relay remote-id
Use the dhcp l2relay remote-id command to enable setting the DHCP
Option 82 Remote ID for a VLAN. When enabled, the supplied string is used
for the Remote ID in DHCP Option 82. Use the "no" form of this command
to disable setting the DHCP Option 82 Remote ID.
Syntax
dhcp l2relay remote-id remoteId vlan vlan-range
no dhcp l2relay remote-id remoteId vlan vlan-range
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
remoteId
The string to be used as the remote ID in the Option 82
(Range: 1 - 128 characters).
Default Configuration
Setting the DHCP Option 82 Remote ID is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#dhcp l2relay remote-id dslforum vlan
10,20-30
dhcp l2relay trust
Use the dhcp l2relay trust command to configure an interface to mandate
Option-82 on receiving DHCP packets.
334
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 335 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
dhcp l2relay trust
no dhcp l2relay trust
Default Configuration
DHCP Option 82 is discarded by default.
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-channel).
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#dhcp l2relay trust
dhcp l2relay vlan
Use the dhcp l2relay vlan command to enable the L2 DHCP Relay agent for
a set of VLANs. All DHCP packets which arrive on interfaces in the
configured VLAN are subject to L2 Relay processing. Use the "no" form of
this command to disable L2 DHCP Relay for a set of VLANs.
Syntax
dhcp l2relay vlan vlan-range
no dhcp l2relay vlan vlan-range
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-range
The list of VLAN IDs.
Default Configuration
DHCP L2 Relay is disabled on all VLANs by default.
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
335
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 336 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#dhcp l2relay vlan 10,340-345
show dhcp l2relay all
Use the show dhcp l2relay all command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the summary of DHCP L2 Relay configuration.
Syntax
show dhcp l2relay all
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console #show dhcp l2relay all
DHCP L2 Relay is Enabled.
Interface
L2RelayMode
TrustMode
----------
-----------
--------------
336
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 337 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Gi1/0/2
Enabled
untrusted
Gi1/0/4
Disabled
trusted
VLAN Id
L2 Relay
--------- ----------
CircuitId
RemoteId
----------- ------------
3
Disabled
Enabled
--NULL--
5
Enabled
Enabled
--NULL--
6
Enabled
Enabled
broadcom
7
Enabled
Disabled
--NULL--
8
Enabled
Disabled
--NULL--
9
Enabled
Disabled
--NULL--
10
Enabled
Disabled
--NULL--
show dhcp l2relay interface
Use the show dhcp l2relay interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display DHCP L2 Relay configuration specific to interfaces.
Syntax
show dhcp l2relay interface {all | interface-id}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
all
Show all interfaces.
interface-id
A physical interface.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
337
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 338 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show dhcp l2relay interface all
DHCP L2 Relay is
Interface
----------
Enabled.
L2RelayMode
TrustMode
-----------
--------------
0/2
Enabled
untrusted
0/4
Disabled
trusted
show dhcp l2relay stats interface
Use the show dhcp l2relay stats interface command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display DHCP L2 Relay statistics specific to interfaces.
Syntax
show dhcp l2relay stats interface {all | interface-id}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
all
Show all interfaces.
interface-id
A physical interface.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
338
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 339 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show dhcp l2relay stats interface all
DHCP L2 Relay is
Enabled.
Interface UntrustedServer
TrustedClient
UntrustedClient
TrustedServer
MsgsWithOpt82
MsgsWithoutOpt82
MsgsWithOpt82
MsgsWithoutOpt82
--------- --------------- ---------------------------
----------------- ---
Gi1/0/1
0
0
0
0
Gi1/0/2
0
0
3
7
Gi1/0/3
0
0
0
0
show dhcp l2relay subscription interface
Use the show dhcp l2relay subscription interface command in Privileged
EXEC mode to display DHCP L2 Relay Option-82 configuration specific to
interfaces.
Syntax
show dhcp l2relay subscription interface {all | interface-id}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
all
Show all interfaces.
interface-id
A physical interface.
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
339
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 340 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
show dhcp l2relay agent-option vlan
Use the show dhcp l2relay agent-option vlan command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display DHCP L2 Relay Option-82 configuration specific to VLANs.
Syntax
show dhcp l2relay agent-option vlan vlan-range
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-range
Show information for the specified VLAN range. A range may
be a single VLAN ID or two VLAN IDs separated by a single
dash with no embedded spaces.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console# show dhcp l2relay agent-option vlan 5-10
340
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 341 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCP L2 Relay is
VLAN Id
Enabled.
L2 Relay
--------- ----------
CircuitId
RemoteId
----------- ------------
5
Enabled
Enabled
--NULL--
6
Enabled
Enabled
broadcom
7
Enabled
Disabled
--NULL--
8
Enabled
Disabled
--NULL--
9
Enabled
Disabled
--NULL--
10
Enabled
Disabled
--NULL—
show dhcp l2relay vlan
Use the show dhcp l2relay vlan command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display whether DHCP L2 Relay is globally enabled on the specified VLAN or
VLAN range.
Syntax
show dhcp l2relay vlan vlan-range
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-range
Show information for the specified VLAN range. A range may
be a single VLAN ID or two VLAN IDs separated by a single
dash with no embedded spaces.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
341
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 342 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show dhcp l2relay vlan 100
DHCP L2 Relay is
Enabled.
DHCP L2 Relay is enabled on the following VLANs:
100
show dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan
Use the show dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display whether DHCP L2 Relay is globally enabled and whether the
DHCP Circuit-ID option is enabled on the specified VLAN or VLAN range.
Syntax
show dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan vlan-range
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-range
Show information for the specified VLAN range. A range may
be a single VLAN ID or two VLAN IDs separated by a single
dash with no embedded spaces.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
342
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 343 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan 300
DHCP L2 Relay is
Enabled.
DHCP Circuit-Id option is enabled on the following
VLANs:
300
show dhcp l2relay remote-id vlan
Use the show dhcp l2relay remote-id vlan command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display whether DHCP L2 Relay is globally enabled and shows the
remote ID configured on the specified VLAN or VLAN range.
Syntax
show dhcp l2relay remote-id vlan vlan-range
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-range
Show information for the specified VLAN range. A range may
be a single VLAN ID or two VLAN IDs separated by a single
dash with no embedded spaces.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
343
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 344 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#show dhcp l2relay remote-id vlan 200
DHCP L2 Relay is
Enabled.
VLAN ID
Remote Id
--------
-------------
200
remote_22
clear dhcp l2relay statistics interface
Use the show dhcp l2relay statistics interface command in Privileged EXEC
mode to reset the DHCP L2 Relay counters to zero. Specify the port with the
counters to clear, or use the all keyword to clear the counters on all ports.
Syntax
clear dhcp l2relay statistics interface {all | interface-id}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
all
Show all interfaces.
interface-id
A physical interface.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
344
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 345 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#clear dhcp l2relay statistics interface
gi1/0/1
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
345
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 346 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
346
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 347 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCP Management Interface
Commands
10
PowerConnect switches support an embedded DHCP client. Any IP interface
can use DHCP to obtain an IP address. The DHCP client can run on
multiple interfaces simultaneously.
For IPv4, an IP interface can either use manually configured addresses or be
enabled for DHCP. The options are mutually exclusive. When the operator
enables DHCPv4 on an IP interface, all manually configured IP addresses on
that interface are removed from the running configuration. When the
operator configures an IP address, the system automatically releases any IPv4
address assigned by a DHCP server and disables DHCPv4 on the interface.
For IPv6, DHCP can coexist with configured addresses. The operator may
enable DHCPv6 and configure IPv6 addresses on the same interface. Only a
single in-band interface can be configured as a DHCPv6 client.
DHCP is disabled by default on all in-band interfaces.
The DHCP client retains an IP address even if the IP interface goes down.
The client does not attempt to renew its IP address until the lease expires,
regardless of changes in link state.
The operator may renew or release an IP address at any time using the new
release dhcp and renew dhcp CLI commands (or web or SNMP equivalents).
When an IPv6 address is leased from a DHCP server, the address has a mask
length of 128. A local route for the network is only installed if the router
receives and accepts IPv6 router advertisements on the interface. Because
router advertisements are not accepted on a routing interface, a leased IPv6
address on a routing interface is not necessarily useful.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
release dhcp
debug dhcp packet
DHCP Management Interface Commands
347
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 348 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
renew dhcp
show dhcp lease
release dhcp
Use the release dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to force the
DHCPv4 client to release a leased address.
Syntax
release dhcp interface-id
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Any valid VLAN interface. See Interface Naming Conventions
for interface representation.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The DHCP client sends a DHCP RELEASE message telling the DHCP
server that it no longer needs the IP address, and that the IP address can be
reassigned to another client. The interface method does not change and will
still be DHCP even after issuing this command. To lease an IP address again,
issue either the renew dhcp interface-id command below or ip address dhcp
(Interface Config) command on page 494 in interface mode. If the IPv4
address on the interface was not assigned by DHCP, then the command fails
and displays the following error message:
Interface does not have a DHCP-originated address.
The release dhcp option is applicable only for routing interfaces and not for
Out-of-Band port. Use the ip address (Out-of-Band) none command on the
Out-of-Band interface to clear a DHCP-acquired address.
348
DHCP Management Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 349 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#release dhcp vlan2
renew dhcp
Use the renew dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to force the DHCP
client to immediately renew an IPv4 address lease.
Syntax
renew dhcp {interface-id | out-of-band}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Any valid routing interface. See Interface Naming Conventions
for interface representation.
out-of-band
Keyword to identify the out-of-band interface. The DHCP
client renews the leased address on this interface.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
If the interface has a leased IPv4 address when this command is issued, the
DHCP client sends a DHCP REQUEST message telling the DHCP server
that it wants to continue using the IP address. If DHCP is enabled on the
interface, but the interface does not currently have an IPv4 address (for
example, if the address was previously released), then the DHCP client sends
a DISCOVER to acquire a new address. If DHCP is not enabled on the
interface, then the command fails and displays the following error message:
DHCP is not enabled on this interface
DHCP Management Interface Commands
349
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 350 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
The first example is for routing interfaces.
console#renew dhcp vlan 2
The second example is for out-of-band port.
console#renew dhcp out-of-band
debug dhcp packet
Use the debug dhcp packet command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
debug information about DHCPv4 client activities and to trace DHCPv4
packets to and from the local DHCPv4 client. To disable debugging, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
debug dhcp packet [transmit | receive]
no debug dhcp packet [transmit | receive]
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
DHCP client already has packet tracing. This command turns the packet
tracing on.
Example
The first example is for transmit and receive flows.
console#debug dhcp packet
The second example is for transmit flow.
350
DHCP Management Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 351 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#debug dhcp packet transmit
The third example is for receive flow.
console#debug dhcp packet receive
show dhcp lease
Use the show dhcp lease command in Privileged EXEC mode to display IPv4
addresses leased from a DHCP server.
Syntax
show dhcp lease [interface interface-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Any valid IP interface (VLAN only). See Interface Naming
Conventions for interface representation.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command lists all IPv4 addresses currently leased from a DHCP server
on a routing interface. This command only applies to routing interfaces. To
see the IPv4 address leased on the out-of-band interface, use the command
"show ip interface out-of-band" on page 1656.
This command output provides the following information.
Term
Description
IP address, Subnet
mask
The IP address and network mask leased from the DHCP server.
DHCP Management Interface Commands
351
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 352 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Term
Description
DHCP Lease server The IPv4 address of the DHCP server that leased the address.
State
State of the DHCPv4 Client on this interface.
DHCP transaction
id
The transaction ID of the DHCPv4 Client.
Lease
The time (in seconds) that the IP address was leased by the
server.
Renewal
The time (in seconds) when the next DHCP renew Request is
sent by DHCPv4 Client to renew the leased IP address.
Rebind
The time (in seconds) when the DHCP Rebind process starts.
Retry count
Number of times the DHCPv4 client sends a DHCP
REQUEST message before the server responds.
Examples
The following example shows the output from this command when the
device has leased two IPv4 addresses from the DHCP server.
console#show dhcp lease
IP address: 10.1.20.1
on interface VLAN10
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
DHCP Lease server: 10.1.20.3, state: 5 Bound
DHCP transaction id: 0x7AD
Lease: 86400 secs,
Renewal: 43200 secs,
Rebind: 75600 secs
Retry count: 0
IP address: 10.1.1.2
on interface VLAN20
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
DHCP Lease server: 10.1.1.1, state: 5 Bound
DHCP transaction id: 0x11EB
Lease: 86400 secs,
Renewal: 43200 secs,
Retry count: 0
console#show dhcp lease interface vl10
IP address: 10.1.20.1
352
on interface VLAN10
DHCP Management Interface Commands
Rebind: 75600 secs
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 353 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
DHCP Lease server: 10.1.20.3, state: 5 Bound
DHCP transaction id: 0x7AD
Lease: 86400 secs,
Renewal: 43200 secs,
Rebind: 75600 secs
Retry count: 0
DHCP Management Interface Commands
353
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 354 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
354
DHCP Management Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 355 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCP Snooping Commands
11
DHCP Snooping is a security feature that monitors DHCP messages between
DHCP clients and DHCP server to filter harmful DHCP messages and build
a bindings database of {MAC address, IP address, VLAN ID, interface} tuples
that are considered authorized.
The DHCP snooping application processes incoming DHCP messages. For
DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE messages, the application compares
the receive interface and VLAN with the client's interface and VLAN in the
bindings database. If the interfaces do not match, the application logs the
event and drops the message. For valid client messages, DHCP snooping
compares the source MAC address to the DHCP client hardware address.
When there is a mismatch, DHCP snooping logs and drops the packet.
DHCP Snooping forwards valid client messages on trusted members within
the VLAN. If DHCP Relay and/or DHCP Server coexist with DHCP
Snooping, the DHCP client message is sent to the DHCP Relay or/and
DHCP Server for further processing.
The DHCP Snooping application uses DHCP messages to build and
maintain the binding's database. The binding's database only includes data
for clients on untrusted ports. DHCP Snooping creates a tentative binding
from DHCP DISCOVER and REQUEST messages. Tentative bindings tie a
client to a port (the port where the DHCP client message was received).
Tentative bindings are completed when DHCP Snooping learns the client's IP
address from a DHCP ACK message on a trusted port. DHCP Snooping
removes bindings in response to DECLINE, RELEASE, and NACK messages.
The DHCP Snooping application ignores the ACK messages as a reply to the
DHCP Inform messages received on trusted ports. The network administrator
can enter static bindings into the binding database.
IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection use the DHCP Snooping
bindings database for the validation of IP and ARP packets.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
DHCP Snooping Commands
355
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 356 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clear ip dhcp snooping binding
ip dhcp snooping trust
clear ip dhcp snooping statistics
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
ip dhcp snooping
show ip dhcp snooping
ip dhcp snooping binding
show ip dhcp snooping binding
ip dhcp snooping database
show ip dhcp snooping database
ip dhcp snooping database write-delay
show ip dhcp snooping interfaces
ip dhcp snooping limit
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
ip dhcp snooping log-invalid
clear ip dhcp snooping binding
Use the clear ip dhcp snooping binding command to clear all DHCP
Snooping bindings on a specific interface or on all interfaces.
Syntax
clear ip dhcp snooping binding {* | interface interface-id}
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
*
Clear all DHCP Snooping entries.
interface-id
Clear all DHCP Snooping entries on the specified interface.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
356
DHCP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 357 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clear ip dhcp snooping statistics
Use the clear ip dhcp snooping statistics command to clear all DHCP
Snooping statistics.
Syntax
clear ip dhcp snooping statistics
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#clear ip dhcp snooping statistics
ip dhcp snooping
Use the ip dhcp snooping command to enable DHCP snooping globally. Use
the “no” form of this command to disable DHCP snooping.
NOTE: Effective with the October 2011 A03 release, the ip dhcp snooping command in
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode is deprecated in favor of the ip dhcp snooping
command in Global Configuration mode.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping
no ip dhcp snooping
Default Configuration
DHCP Snooping is disabled by default.
DHCP Snooping Commands
357
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 358 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip dhcp snooping
console(config-if-vlan1)#ip dhcp snooping
ip dhcp snooping binding
Use the ip dhcp snooping binding command to configure a static DHCP
Snooping binding. Use the “no” form of this command to remove a static
binding.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface
{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}
no ip dhcp snooping binding mac-address
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
mac-address
The client's MAC address.
vlan-id
The number of the VLAN the client is authorized to use.
ip-address
The IP address of the client.
interface
The interface on which the client is authorized. The form is
unit/slot/port.
Default Configuration
There are no static DHCP snooping bindings by default.
358
DHCP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 359 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip dhcp snooping binding
00:00:00:00:00:01 vlan 10 10.131.12.134 interface
1/0/1
ip dhcp snooping database
Use the ip dhcp snooping database command to configure the persistent
storage location of the DHCP snooping database. This can be local to the
switch or on a remote machine.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping database { local | tftp://hostIP/filename }
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
hostIP
The IP address of the remote host.
filename
The name of the file for the database on the remote host. The
filename may contain any printable character and is checked
only when attempting to open the file.
Default Configuration
The database is stored locally by default.
Configuration Mode
Global Configuration mode.
DHCP Snooping Commands
359
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 360 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the storage location of the snooping
database as local.
console(config)#ip dhcp snooping database local
The following example configures the storage location of the snooping
database as remote.
console(config)#ip dhcp snooping database
tftp://10.131.11.1/db.txt
ip dhcp snooping database write-delay
Use the ip dhcp snooping database write-delay command to configure the
interval in seconds at which the DHCP Snooping database will be stored in
persistent storage. Use the “no” form of this command to reset the write delay
to the default.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping database write-delay seconds
no ip dhcp snooping database write-delay
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
seconds
The write delay (Range: 15–86400 seconds).
Default Configuration
The write delay is 300 seconds by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
360
DHCP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 361 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip dhcp snooping database write-delay 500
ip dhcp snooping limit
Use the ip dhcp snooping limit command to control the maximum rate of
DHCP messages. Use the no form of this command to reset the limit to the
default.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping limit {none | rate rate [burst interval seconds ]}
no ip dhcp snooping limit
•
rate— The maximum number of packets per second allowed (Range:
0–300 pps).
•
seconds —The time allowed for a burst (Range: 1–15 seconds).
Default Configuration
DHCP snooping rate limiting is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip dhcp snooping limit none
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip dhcp snooping limit rate
100 burst interval 1
DHCP Snooping Commands
361
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 362 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip dhcp snooping log-invalid
Use the ip dhcp snooping log-invalid command to enable logging of DHCP
messages filtered by the DHCP Snooping application. Use the “no” form of
this command to disable logging.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping log-invalid
no ip dhcp snooping log-invalid
Default Configuration
Logging of filtered messages is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip dhcp snooping log-invalid
console(config-if-1/0/1)#no ip dhcp snooping loginvalid
ip dhcp snooping trust
Use the ip dhcp snooping trust command to configure a port as trusted. Use
the “no” form of this command to configure a port as untrusted.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping trust
no ip dhcp snooping trust
362
DHCP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 363 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Ports are untrusted by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip dhcp snooping trust
console(config-if-1/0/1)#no ip dhcp snooping trust
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
Use the ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address command to enable the
verification of the source MAC address with the client MAC address in the
received DHCP message. Use the “no” form of this command to disable
verification of the source MAC address.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
no ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
Default Configuration
Source MAC address verification is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
DHCP Snooping Commands
363
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 364 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)#ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
show ip dhcp snooping
Use the show ip dhcp snooping command to display the DHCP snooping
global configuration.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ip dhcp snooping
DHCP snooping is Disabled
DHCP snooping source MAC verification is enabled
DHCP snooping is enabled on the following VLANs:
11 - 30, 40
Interface
364
Trusted
Log Invalid Pkts
DHCP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 365 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
---------
--------
----------------
1/0/1
Yes
No
1/0/2
No
Yes
1/0/3
No
Yes
1/0/4
No
No
1/0/6
No
No
show ip dhcp snooping binding
Use the show ip dhcp snooping binding command to display the DHCP
snooping binding entries.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping binding [{ static | dynamic } ] [ interface interfaceid ] [ vlan vlan-id ]
•
static | dynamic— Use these keywords to filter by static or dynamic
bindings.
•
interface-id—The interface for which to show bindings.
•
vlan-id— The number of the VLAN for which to show bindings.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ip dhcp snooping binding
Total number of bindings: 2
DHCP Snooping Commands
365
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 366 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
MAC Address
IP Address
VLAN
Interface
Lease time(Secs)
------------------
------------
----
---------
-------------
00:02:B3:06:60:80
210.1.1.3
10
1/0/1
86400
00:0F:FE:00:13:04
210.1.1.4
10
1/0/1
86400
show ip dhcp snooping database
Use the show ip dhcp snooping database command to display the DHCP
snooping configuration related to the database persistence.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping database
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ip dhcp snooping database
agent url:
write-delay:
366
/10.131.13.79:/sai1.txt
5000
DHCP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 367 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip dhcp snooping interfaces
Use the show ip dhcp snooping interfaces command to show the DHCP
Snooping status of the interfaces.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping interfaces [interface]
•
interface—A valid physical interface.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ip dhcp snooping interfaces
Interface
Trust State
Rate Limit
Burst Interval
(pps)
----------
-------------
(seconds)
-------------
---------------
1/0/1
No
15
1
1/0/2
No
15
1
1/0/3
No
15
1
console#show ip dhcp snooping interfaces gigabitethernet 1/0/15
Interface
Trust State
Rate Limit
(pps)
----------
-------------
-------------
Burst Interval
(seconds)
---------------
DHCP Snooping Commands
367
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 368 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1/0/15
Yes
15
1
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
Use the show ip dhcp snooping statistics command to display the DHCP
snooping filtration statistics.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping statistics
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed by this command:
Fields
Description
MAC Verify
Failures
The number of DHCP messages that were filtered on an
untrusted interface because of source MAC address and client
MAC address mismatch.
Client Ifc
Mismatch
The number of DHCP release and Deny messages received on
the different ports than previously learned.
DHCP Server Msgs The number of DHCP server messages received on untrusted
ports.
Example
console#show ip dhcp snooping statistics
368
DHCP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 369 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interface
-----------
MAC Verify
Client Ifc
Failures
Mismatch
----------
----------
DHCP Server
Msgs Rec'd
-----------
1/0/2
0
0
0
1/0/3
0
0
0
1/0/4
0
0
0
1/0/5
0
0
0
1/0/6
0
0
0
1/0/7
0
0
0
1/0/8
0
0
0
1/0/9
0
0
0
1/0/10
0
0
0
1/0/11
0
0
0
1/0/12
0
0
0
1/0/13
0
0
0
1/0/14
0
0
0
1/0/15
0
0
0
1/0/16
0
0
0
1/0/17
0
0
0
1/0/18
0
0
0
1/0/19
0
0
0
1/0/20
0
0
0
DHCP Snooping Commands
369
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 370 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
370
DHCP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 371 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Dynamic ARP Inspection
Commands
12
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) is a security feature that rejects invalid and
malicious ARP packets. The feature prevents a class of man-in-the-middle
attacks, where an unfriendly station intercepts traffic for other stations by
poisoning the ARP caches of its neighbors. The miscreant sends ARP requests
or responses mapping another station IP address to its own MAC address.
DAI drops ARP packets whose sender MAC address and sender IP address do
not match an entry in the DHCP Snooping bindings database.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
arp access-list
ip arp inspection vlan
clear ip arp inspection statistics
permit ip host mac host
ip arp inspection filter
show arp access-list
ip arp inspection limit
show ip arp inspection
ip arp inspection trust
show ip arp inspection vlan
ip arp inspection validate
arp access-list
Use the arp access-list command to create an ARP ACL. It will place the user
in ARP ACL Configuration mode. Use the “no” form of this command to
delete an ARP ACL.
Syntax
arp access-list acl-name
no arp access-list acl-name
•
acl-name — A valid ARP ACL name (Range: 1–31 characters).
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
371
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 372 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There are no ARP ACLs created by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#arp access-list tier1
clear ip arp inspection statistics
Use the clear ip arp inspection statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode
to reset the statistics for Dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
inspection on all VLANs.
Syntax
clear ip arp inspection statistics
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
372
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 373 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#clear ip arp inspection statistics
ip arp inspection filter
Use the ip arp inspection filter command to configure the ARP ACL to be
used for a single VLAN or a range of VLANs to filter invalid ARP packets. If
the static keyword is given, packets that do not match a permit statement are
dropped without consulting the DHCP snooping bindings. Use the “no” form
of this command to unconfigure the ARP ACL.
Syntax
ip arp inspection filter acl-name vlan vlan-range [static]
no ip arp inspection filter acl-name vlan vlan-range [static]
•
acl-name —The name of a valid ARP ACL. (Range: 1–31 characters)
•
vlan-range —A valid VLAN range.
Default Configuration
No ARP ACL is configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip arp inspection filter tier1 vlan 2-10 static
console(config)#ip arp inspection filter tier1 vlan 20-30
ip arp inspection limit
Use the ip arp inspection limit command to configure the rate limit and
burst interval values for an interface.
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
373
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 374 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Configuring none for the limit means the interface is not rate limited for
Dynamic ARP Inspection.
Syntax
ip arp inspection limit { none | rate pps [ burst interval seconds ] }
no ip arp inspection limit
•
none — To set no rate limit.
•
pps — The number of packets per second (Range: 0–300).
•
seconds — The number of seconds (Range: 1–15).
Default Configuration
The default rate limit is 15 packets per second.
The default burst interval is 1 second.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip arp inspection limit none
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip arp inspection limit rate 100
burst interval 2
ip arp inspection trust
The ip arp inspection trust command configures an interface as trusted for
Dynamic ARP Inspection. Use the “no” form of this command to configure
an interface as untrusted.
Syntax
ip arp inspection trust
374
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 375 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no ip arp inspection trust
Default Configuration
Interfaces are configured as untrusted by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/3)#ip arp inspection trust
ip arp inspection validate
Use the ip arp inspection validate command to enable additional validation
checks like source MAC address validation, destination MAC address
validation or IP address validation on the received ARP packets. Each
command overrides the configuration of the previous command. For
example, if a command enables source MAC address and destination MAC
address validations and a second command enables IP address validation only,
the source MAC address and destination MAC address validations are
disabled as a result of the second command. Use the “no” form of this
command to disable additional validation checks.
Syntax
ip arp inspection validate {[src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]}
no ip arp inspection validate {[src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]}
•
src-mac —For validating the source MAC address of an ARP packet.
•
dst-mac —For validating the destination MAC address of an ARP packet.
•
ip —For validating the IP address of an ARP packet.
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
375
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 376 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There is no additional validation enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command
Example
console(config)#ip arp inspection validate src-mac
dst-mac ip
console(config)#ip arp inspection validate src-mac ip
console(config)#ip arp inspection validate dst-mac ip
console(config)#ip arp inspection validate ip
ip arp inspection vlan
Use the ip arp inspection vlan command to enable Dynamic ARP Inspection
on a single VLAN or a range of VLANs. Use the no form of this command to
disable Dynamic ARP Inspection on a single VLAN or a range of VLANs.
Syntax
ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range [ logging ]
no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range [ logging ]
•
vlan-range — A valid range of VLAN IDs.
•
logging — Use this parameter to enable logging of invalid packets.
Default Configuration
Dynamic ARP Inspection is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
376
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 377 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 200-300
console(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 200-300 logging
permit ip host mac host
Use the permit ip host mac host command to configure a rule for a valid IP
address and MAC address combination used in ARP packet validation. Use
the “no” form of this command to delete an ARP ACL rule.
Syntax
permit ip host sender-ip mac host sender-mac
no permit ip host sender-ip mac host sender-mac
•
sender-ip — Valid IP address used by a host.
•
sender-mac —Valid MAC address in combination with the above sender-ip
used by a host.
Default Configuration
There are no ARP ACL rules created by default.
Command Mode
ARP Access-list Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(Config-arp-access-list)#permit ip host
1.1.1.1 mac host 00:01:02:03:04:05
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
377
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 378 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show arp access-list
Use the show arp access-list command to display the configured ARP ACLs
with the rules. Giving an ARP ACL name as the argument would display only
the rules in that ARP ACL.
Syntax
show arp access-list [ acl-name ]
acl-name — A valid ARP ACL name (Range: 1–31 characters).
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show arp access-list
ARP access list H2
permit ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 00:01:02:03:04:05
permit ip host 1.1.1.2 mac host 00:03:04:05:06:07
ARP access list H3
ARP access list H4
permit ip host 2.1.1.2 mac host 00:03:04:05:06:08
show ip arp inspection
Use the show ip arp inspection command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the Dynamic ARP Inspection and status.
378
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 379 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ip arp inspection [interfaces [interface-id] | statistics [vlan vlan-range]
| vlan vlan-range]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interfaces
[interface-id]
Display the Dynamic ARP Inspection configuration on all the
DAI enabled interfaces. Giving an interface argument, it
displays the values for that interface.
statistics [vlan vlan- Display the statistics of the ARP packets processed by Dynamic
range]
ARP Inspection. Given vlan-range argument, it displays the
statistics on all DAI-enabled VLANs in that range. In the case
of no argument, it lists the summary of the forwarded and
dropped ARP packets.
vlan vlan-range
Display the Dynamic ARP Inspection configuration on all the
VLANs in the given VLAN range. It also displays the global
configuration values for source MAC validation, destination
MAC validation and invalid IP validation.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The following information is displayed for each VLAN when a VLAN range is
supplied:
Field
Description
VLAN
The VLAN-ID for each displayed row.
Forwarded
The total number of valid ARP packets forwarded in this VLAN.
Dropped
The total number of invalid ARP packets dropped in this VLAN.
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
379
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 380 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCP Drops
The number of packets dropped due to DHCP Snooping binding
database match failure.
ACL Drops
The number of packets dropped due to ARP ACL rule match failure.
DHCP Permits The number of packets permitted due to DHCP snooping binding
database match.
ACL Permits
The number of packets permitted due to ARP ACL rule match.
Bad Src MAC The number of packets dropped due to Source MAC validation
failure.
Bad Dest
MAC
The number of packets dropped due to Destination MAC validation
failure.
Invalid IP
The number of packets dropped due to invalid IP checks.
Example
Following is an example of the show ip arp inspection command.
console#show ip arp inspection
Source MAC Validation................. Disabled
Destination MAC Validation............ Disabled
IP Address Validation................. Disabled
VLAN Configuration Log Invalid ACL Name
Static flag
---- ------------- ----------- --------
-----------
1
Disabled
Enabled
console#
Following is an example of the show ip arp inspection interfaces command.
console#show ip arp inspection interfaces
Interface
380
Trust State
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
Rate Limit
Burst Interval
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 381 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
(pps)
--------------- -----------
(seconds)
---------- ---------------
1/0/1
Untrusted
15
1
1/0/2
Untrusted
10
10
Following is an example of the show ip arp inspection statistics command.
console#show ip arp inspection statistics
VLAN
Forwarded
Dropped
----
---------
-------
10
90
14
20
10
3
console#show ip arp inspection statistics vlan 10,20
VLAN
DHCP
ACL
DHCP
ACL
Drops
Drops
Permits
Permits
Bad Src
Bad Dest
MAC
MAC
Invalid
IP
---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- -----10
11
1
65
25
1
1
0
20
1
0
8
2
0
1
1
show ip arp inspection vlan
Use the show ip arp inspection vlan command to display the Dynamic ARP
Inspection configuration on all the VLANs in the given VLAN range. It also
displays the global configuration values for source MAC validation,
destination MAC validation and invalid IP validation.
Syntax
show ip arp inspection vlan [ vlan-range ]
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
381
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 382 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-range
A valid VLAN range.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The following global parameters are displayed:
Parameter
Description
Source Mac Validation
If Source Mac validation of ARP frame is enabled.
Destination Mac
Validation
If Destination Mac validation of ARP Response frame is
enabled.
IP Address Validation
If IP address validation of ARP frame is enabled.
The following fields are displayed for each VLAN:
Field
Description
VLAN
The VLAN-ID for each displayed row.
Configuration
Whether DAI is enabled on the VLAN.
Log Invalid
Whether logging of invalid ARP packets is enabled on the
VLAN.
ACL Name
ARP ACL Name if configured on the VLAN.
Static flag
If the ARP ACL is configured static on the VLAN.
Example
console#show ip arp inspection vlan 10-12
382
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 383 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Source Mac Validation
: Disabled
Destination Mac Validation : Disabled
IP Address Validation
: Disabled
Vlan
Configuration
----
Log Invalid
ACL Name
Static flag
-------------
-----------
---------
----------
10
Enabled
Enabled
H2
Enabled
11
Disabled
Enabled
12
Enabled
Disabled
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
383
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 384 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
384
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 385 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Email Alerting Commands
13
Email Alerting is an extension of the logging system. The PowerConnect
logging system allows the user to configure a variety of destinations for log
messages. This feature adds email configuration capabilities, by which the
log messages are sent to a configured SMTP server such that an operator may
receive the log in an e-mail account of their choice.
Figure 1: Log Messages Severity Level
Urgent severity level
Non-urgent severity level
emergency (0)
alert (1)
critical (2)
error (3)
warning (4)
notice (5)
info (6)
debug (7)
email immediately
email in batch
never email
The network operator can adjust the urgent and non-urgent severity levels.
These levels are global and apply to all destination email addresses. Log
messages in the urgent group are sent immediately to SMTP server with each
log message in a separate mail. Log messages in the non-urgent group are
batched into a single email message and after a configurable delay.
Only the minimum part (MUA functionality of RFC 4409) required by the
switch or router to send the messages to the SMTP server is supported. Some
SMTP servers insist on authentication before the messages may be received
by them. The minimum part (MUA functionality of RFC 4954) required by
the switch or router to become authenticated by the SMTP server is
supported. Only plain text authentication is supported.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
Email Alerting Commands
385
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 386 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
logging email
show logging email statistics
logging email urgent
clear logging email statistics
logging traps
security
logging email message-type to-addr
mail-server ip-address | hostname
logging email from-addr
port (Mail Server Configuration Mode)
logging email message-type subject
username (Mail Server Configuration
Mode)
logging email logtime
password (Mail Server Configuration
Mode)
logging email test message-type
show mail-server
logging email
Use the logging email command in Global Configuration mode to enable
email alerting and set the lowest severity level for which log messages are
emailed. Use the no form of the command to disable email alerting.
Syntax
logging email [severity]
no logging email
386
Email Alerting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 387 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
severity
If you specify a severity level, log messages at or above the
severity level are emailed. The severity level may either be
specified by keyword or as an integer from 0 to 7. The accepted
keywords, and the numeric severity level each represents, are as
follows.
• emergency (0)
• alert (1)
• critical (2)
• error (3)
• warning (4)
• notice (5)
• info (6)
• debug (7)
Default Configuration
Email alerting is disabled by default. When email alerting is enabled, log
messages at or above severity Warning are emailed.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The logging email command with no arguments enables email alerting.
Specify a severity to set the severity level of log messages that are emailed in a
non-urgent manner. Log messages at or above this severity level, but below
the urgent severity level, are collected together until the log time expires (the
time specified in the logging email logtime command) and then emailed in a
single email message. If you set the non-urgent severity level to the same
value as the urgent severity level, then no log messages are emailed nonurgently. See the logging email urgent command to specify the urgent severity
level. The command no logging email disables all email alerting.
Email Alerting Commands
387
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 388 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
logging email urgent
Use the logging email urgent command in Global Configuration mode to set
the lowest severity level at which log messages are emailed in an urgent
manner. To revert the urgent severity level to its default value, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
logging email urgent {severity | none}
no logging email urgent
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
severity
Log messages at or above this severity level are emailed
immediately. The severity level may either be specified by
keyword or as an integer from 0 to 7. The accepted keywords,
and the numeric severity level each represents, are as follows.
• emergency (0)
• alert (1)
• critical (2)
• error (3)
• warning (4)
• notice (5)
• info (6)
• debug (7)
none
If you specify this keyword, no log messages are emailed
urgently. All log messages at or above the non-urgent level
(configured with the logging email command) are emailed in
batch.
Default Configuration
The default severity level is alert.
388
Email Alerting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 389 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Log messages at or above this severity level are considered urgent. By default,
Emergency and Alert log messages are considered urgent. Urgent log
messages are emailed immediately, one log message per email message, and
do not wait for the log time to expire. Urgent log messages are not emailed
unless you enable email alerting with the logging email command.
logging traps
Use the logging traps command in Global Configuration mode to set the
lowest severity level at which SNMP traps are logged. To revert the urgent
severity level to its default value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging traps severity
no logging traps
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
severity
The severity level at which SNMP traps are logged. The severity
level may either be specified by keyword or as an integer from 0
to 7. The accepted keywords, and the numeric severity level
each represents, are as follows:
• emergency (0)
• alert (1)
• critical (2)
• error (3)
• warning (4)
• notice (5)
• info (6)
• debug (7)
Email Alerting Commands
389
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 390 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default severity level is info(6).
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
You can filter log messages that appear in the buffered log by severity level.
You can specify the severity level of log messages that are emailed. You can
use this command to specify the severity level at which SNMP traps are
logged, and thus control whether traps appear in the buffered log or are
emailed and, if they are emailed, whether traps are considered urgent or nonurgent.
logging email message-type to-addr
Use the logging email message-type to-addr command in Global
Configuration mode to configure the To address field of the email. The
message types supported now are urgent, non-urgent, and both. For each
supported severity level, multiple email addresses can be configured. For
example, for urgent type of messages, there could be multiple addresses
configured.
Syntax
logging email message-type {urgent | non-urgent | both} to-addr to-email-
addr
no logging email to-addr to-addr message-type
no logging email message-type {urgent | non-urgent | both} to-addr to-
email-addr
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
390
Email Alerting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 391 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command removes the configured to-addr field of email.
logging email from-addr
Use the logging email from-addr command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the From address of the email. Use the no form of this command to
remove the email source address.
Syntax
logging email from-addr from-email-addr
no logging email from-addr
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
logging email message-type subject
Use the logging email message-type subject command in Global
Configuration mode to configures subject of the email. Use the no form of
this command to remove the existing subject and return to the default
subject.
Email Alerting Commands
391
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 392 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
logging email message-type message-type subject subject
no logging email message-type message-type subject
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
The user must enter the message-type parameter manually as tab and space
bar completion do not work for this parameter.
logging email logtime
Use the logging email logtime command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the value of how frequently the queued messages are sent.
Syntax
logging email logtime time duration
no logging email logtime
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Time Duration
Time in minutes. Range: 30 – 1440.
Default Configuration
The default value is 30 minutes.
392
Email Alerting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 393 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
logging email test message-type
Use the logging email test message-type command in Global Configuration
mode to test whether or not an e-mail is being sent to an SMTP server.
Syntax
logging email test message-type message-type message-body message-body
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
message-type
Urgent, non-urgent, or both
message-body
The message to log. Enclose the message in double quotes if it
contains any spaces.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Email Alerting Commands
393
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 394 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show logging email statistics
Use the show logging email statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to
show the statistics about the emails. The command displays information on
how many emails are sent, how many emails failed, when the last email was
sent, how long it has been since the last email was sent, how long it has been
since the email changed to disabled mode.
Syntax
show logging email statistics
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
clear logging email statistics
Use the clear logging email statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to
clear the email alerting statistics.
Syntax
clear logging email statistics
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
394
Email Alerting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 395 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
security
Use the security command in Mail Server Configuration mode to set the
email alerting security protocol. This enables and disables the switch to use
TLS authentication with the SMTP Server. If the administrator sets the TLS
mode and, if the SMTP sever does not support TLS mode, then no email goes
to the SMTP server.
Syntax
security {tls | none}
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is disabled.
Command Mode
Mail Server Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Email Alerting Commands
395
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 396 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
mail-server ip-address | hostname
Use the mail-server ip-address | hostname command in Global
Configuration mode to configure the SMTP server IP address and change the
mode to Mail Server Configuration mode. The server address can be in the
IPv4, IPv6, or DNS name format. Use the no form of this command to
remove the configured SMTP server address.
Syntax
mail-server {ip-address ip-address | hostname hostname}
no mail-server {ip-address | hostname}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
An IPv4 or IPv6 address.
hostname
The DNS name of an SMTP server.
Default Configuration
The default configuration for a mail server is shown in the table below.
Field
Default
Email Alert Mail Server Port
25
Email Alert Security Protocol
none
Email Alert Username
admin
Email Alert Password
admin
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
396
Email Alerting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 397 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
port (Mail Server Configuration Mode)
Use the port command in Mail Server Configuration mode to configure the
TCP port to use for communication with the SMTP server. Port can be set to
465 or 25. Use the no form of the command to revert the SMTP port to the
default port.
Syntax
port port
no port
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is 25.
Command Mode
Mail Server Configuration
User Guidelines
Port 25 is the standard SMTP port for cleartext messages. Port 465 is the
standard port for messages sent using TLSv1. Messages are always sent in
plain text mode.
username (Mail Server Configuration Mode)
Use the username command in Mail Server Configuration mode to configure
the username required by the authentication. Use the no form of the
command to revert the username to the default value.
Syntax
username username
no username
Email Alerting Commands
397
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 398 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value for username is admin.
Command Mode
Mail Server Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
password (Mail Server Configuration Mode)
Use the password command in Mail Server Configuration mode to configure
the password required to authenticate to the email server. Use the no form of
the command to revert the password to the default value.
Syntax
password password
no password
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value for password is admin.
Command Mode
Mail Server Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
398
Email Alerting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 399 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show mail-server
Use the show mail-server command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
configuration of all the mail servers or a particular mail server.
Syntax
show mail-server {ip-address | hostname | all}
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show mail-server all
Mail Servers configuration:
No of mail servers configured:2
Mail Serqy ver1 configuration:
SMTP server IP Address:
10.131.1.11
SMTP server Port:
465
SMTP server security protocol:
tls
Email Alerting Commands
399
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 400 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
SMTP server authentication details:
Username:
admin
Mail server2 configuration:
SMTP server IP Address:
10.131.1.31
SMTP server Port:
465
SMTP server security protocol:
tls
SMTP server authentication details:
Username:
admin
console#show mail-server ip-address 10.131.1.11
SMTP server IP Address:
10.131.1.11
SMTP server Port:
465
SMTP server security protocol:
tls
SMTP server authentication details:
Username:
400
Email Alerting Commands
admin
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 401 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
14
Ethernet Configuration Commands
PowerConnect switches support a variety of configuration options to
optimize network operations. Features such as flow-control and jumbo frames
are supported along with a variety of commands to display traffic statistics as
well as limit the effects of network loops or other network issues.
Jumbo frame technology is employed in certain situations to reduce the task
load on a server CPU and to transmit large amounts of data efficiently.
Jumbo frames technology predominantly appears where certain applications
would benefit from using a larger frame size, e.g. Network File System (NFS).
The larger frame size eliminates some of the need for fragmentation, leading
to greater throughput. The increase in throughput is particularly valuable on
data center servers where the larger frame size increases efficiency of the
system and allows processing of more requests. The PowerConnect jumbo
frames feature extends the standard ethernet MTU (Max Frame Size) from
1518 (1522 with VLAN header) bytes to 9216 bytes. However, any device
connecting to the same broadcast domain should support the same or larger
MTU.
Flow control is a mechanism or protocol used to temporarily suspend
transmission of data to a device to avoid overloading the device receive path.
PowerConnect switching implements the flow control mechanism defined in
IEEE 802.3 Annexes 31A and 31B (formerly IEEE 802.3x). PowerConnect
switching is able to transmit a MAC Control frame containing the PAUSE
opcode to halt transmission by the device receiving the PAUSE frame
whenever internal congestion is detected by the switching fabric. Flow
control is enabled by default for all ports.
Storm control allows for rate limiting of specific types of packets through the
forwarding plane. The administrator can configure the absolute rate in
packets-per-second for the Storm control threshold. Each classified packet
type (broadcast, multicast, or unicast) can be enabled/disabled per port, and
the threshold level at which Storm-Control is active is also configurable perport and per-type (as a percentage of interface speed).
Ethernet Configuration Commands
401
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 402 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
On a storm control enabled interface, if the ingress rate of that type of packet
(L2 broadcast, multicast, or unicast) is greater than the configured threshold
level (as a percentage of port speed or as an absolute packets-per-second rate),
the switch forwarding-plane discards the excess traffic.
The speed and duplex commands control interface link speeds and autonegotiation. If either speed or duplex is set to something other than auto,
auto-negotiation is disabled on the interface. Auto-negotiation will link at the
highest possible speed supported on the interface and prefers full duplex over
half duplex.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear counters
show interfaces
configuration
speed
description
show interfaces counters
storm-control broadcast
duplex
show interfaces description storm-control multicast
flowcontrol
show interfaces detail
storm-control unicast
interface
show statistics
switchport protected
interface range
show statistics switchport
switchport protected name
mtu
show storm-control
show switchport protected
show interfaces advertise
shutdown
clear counters
Use the clear counters command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear statistics
on an interface.
Syntax
clear counters [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel port-channelnumber | switchport | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
402
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 403 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In the following example, the counters for port 1/0/1 are cleared.
console#clear counters gigabitethernet 1/0/1
description
Use the description command in Interface Configuration mode to add a
description to an interface. To remove the description use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
description string
no description
•
string — Comment or a description of the port attached to this interface.
(Range: 1 to 64 characters)
Default Configuration
By default, the interface does not have a description.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example adds a description to the Ethernet port 5.
Ethernet Configuration Commands
403
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 404 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if-1/0/5)# description RD_SW#3
duplex
Use the duplex command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the
duplex operation of a given Ethernet interface. To restore the default, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
duplex {auto | half | full}
no duplex
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
auto
Auto negotiation is enabled for the port.
half
Force half-duplex operation.
full
Force full-duplex operation.
Default Configuration
Auto is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
When duplex is configured to auto, auto negotiation is enabled for the port.
This configuration cannot be done on SFP module ports as they operate only
in full duplex mode.
404
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 405 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example configures the duplex operation of gigabit Ethernet
port 1/0/5 to force full duplex operation.
console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if)# duplex full
flowcontrol
Use the flowcontrol command in Global Configuration mode to configure
the flow control. To disable flow control, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
flowcontrol
no flowcontrol
Default Configuration
Flow Control is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In the following example, flow control is enabled.
console(config)# flowcontrol
interface
Use this command to configure parameters for the gigabit Ethernet and tengigabit Ethernet ports, and for port-channels. While in Global Configuration
mode, enter the interface command (with a specific interface). To exit to
Global Configuration mode, enter exit. To return to Privileged EXEC mode,
press Ctrl-Z or enter end.
Ethernet Configuration Commands
405
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 406 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
NOTE: Additional forms of the interface command enable configuring VLANs,
tunnels, the loopback interface, the out-of-band interface, and ranges of interfaces.
See interface vlan, interface tunnel, interface loopback, and interface range.
Syntax
interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel port-channel-number
| tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Interface Configuration
User Guidelines
It is possible to enter interface configuration mode from global configuration
mode or from interface configuration mode.
Example
The following example enables gigabit port 2 on stack member 1 for
configuration.
console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
console (config-if)#
interface range
Use the interface range command in Global Configuration mode to execute a
command on multiple ports at the same time.
NOTE: An additional form of this command enables configuring a range of VLANs.
See interface range vlan.
Syntax
interface range {port-range | port-type all}
406
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 407 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
port-range
A list of valid ports to configure. Separate non-consecutive
ports with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a
range of ports. For more detailed information, see Operating on
Multiple Objects (Range).
port-type
Shows all interfaces of the specified type.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration, Interface Range and Interface modes
User Guidelines
Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on
each active interface in the range. If the command returns an error on one of
the active interfaces, it does not stop executing commands on other active
interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how gigabitethernet ports 5/0/18 to 5/0/20 and
3/0/1 to 3/0/24 are ranged to receive the same command.
console(config)# interface range gigabitethernet
5/0/18-20,3/0/1-24
console(config-if-range)#
The following example shows how all gigabitethernet ports can be configured
at once.
console(config)# interface range gigabitethernet all
console(config-if-range)#
The following examples demonstrate various valid interface ranges:
console(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-20
Ethernet Configuration Commands
407
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 408 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface range gi1/0/20-48
console(config)#interface range gi1/0/1,gi1/0/48
console(config)#interface range gi2/0/1-10,gi1/0/30
console(config)#interface range gi1/0/1-10,gi1/0/30-48
console(config)#interface range gi1/0/1,te1/1/1
console(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet
1/0/10,tengigabitEthernet1/1/2
mtu
Use the mtu command in Interface Configuration mode to enable jumbo
frames on an interface by adjusting the maximum size of a packet. To return
to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
mtu bytes
no mtu
•
bytes — Number of bytes (Range: 1518-9216)
Default Configuration
The default number of bytes is 1518 (1522 bytes of VLAN-tagged frames).
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
The value set allows an additional four bytes for the VLAN tag. The mtu
command is not supported in Interface Range mode.
Example
The following example of the mtu command increases maximum packet size
to 9216 bytes.
console(config-if-1/0/5)#mtu 9216
408
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 409 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show interfaces advertise
Use the show interfaces advertise command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display information about auto-negotiation advertisement.
Syntax
show interfaces advertise [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following examples display information about auto negotiation
advertisement.
console#show interfaces advertise
Port
Type
Neg
Operational Link Advertisement
----
----
---
------------------------------
1/0/2
1G-Copper
Enable
1000f, 100f, 100h, 10f, 10h
1/0/2
1G-Copper
Enable
1000f
console# show interfaces advertise gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Port: Gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Type: 1G-Copper
Link state: Up
Auto negotiation: enabled
10h 10f 100h 100f 1000f
Ethernet Configuration Commands
409
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 410 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Admin Local Link ------ ------ ------ ------ -----Advertisement yes
yes
yes
yes
no
show interfaces configuration
Use the show interfaces configuration command in User EXEC mode to
display the configuration for all configured interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces configuration [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel
port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no use guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the configuration for all configured
interfaces:
console>show interfaces configuration
Port
Type
Duplex
Speed
Neg
-----
------------------------------
------
-------
----
Admin
State
-----
1/0/1
Gigabit - Level
Full
100
Auto
Up
1/0/2
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/3
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/4
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/5
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
410
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 411 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1/0/6
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/7
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/8
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/9
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/10
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/11
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/12
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/13
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/14
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/15
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/16
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/17
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/18
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
1/0/19
Gigabit - Level
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Up
--More-- or (q)uit
The displayed port configuration information includes the following:
Field
Description
Port
The port number.
Port Type
The port designated IEEE shorthand identifier. For example
1000Base-T refers to 1000 Mbps baseband signaling including both
Tx and Rx transmissions.
Duplex
Displays the port Duplex status.
Speed
Refers to the port speed.
Neg
Describes the Auto-negotiation status.
Admin State
Displays whether the port is enabled or disabled.
Ethernet Configuration Commands
411
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 412 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show interfaces counters
Use the show interfaces counters command in User EXEC mode to display
traffic seen by the interface. Use the command in either User EXEC mode or
Privileged EXEC mode to display Priority Flow Control (PFC) traffic seen by
the interface, including Received PFC Frames and Transmitted PFC Frames
for a given ethernet or port-channel interface.
Syntax
show interfaces counters [gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port ]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode and Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays traffic seen by the physical interface:
console>show interfaces counters
Port
InOctets
InUcastPkts
----
----------
---------
1/0/1
183892
1289
3/0/1
123899
1788
Port
OutOctets
OutUcastPkts
----
----------
---------
1/0/1
412
9188
9
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 413 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
2/0/1
0
0
3/0/1
8789
27
Ch
InOctets
InUcastPkts
----
----------
---------
1
27889
928
Ch
OutOctets
OutUcastPkts
----
----------
---------
1
23739
882
The following example displays counters for Ethernet port 1/0/1.
console#show interfaces counters gigabitethernet
1/0/1
Port
InOctets
InUcastPkts
----
----------
---------
1/0/1
183892
1289
Port
OutOctets
OutUcastPkts
----
----------
---------
1/0/1
9188
9
Alignment Errors: 17
FCS Errors: 8
Single Collision Frames: 0
Multiple Collision Frames: 0
Ethernet Configuration Commands
413
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 414 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Deferred Transmissions: 0
Late Collisions: 0
Excessive Collisions: 0
Oversize Packets: 0
Internal MAC Rx Errors: 0
Received Pause Frames: 0
Transmitted Pause Frames: 0
The following table describes the fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
InOctets
Counted received octets.
InUcastPkts
Counted received Unicast packets.
InMcastPkts
Counted received Multicast packets.
InBcastPkts
Counted received Broadcast packets.
OutOctets
Counted transmitted octets.
OutUcastPkts
Counted transmitted Unicast packets.
OutMcastPkts
Counted transmitted Multicast packets.
OutBcastPkts
Counted transmitted Broadcast packets.
Alignment Errors
A count of frames received that are not an integral number
of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check.
FCS Errors
Counted frames received that are an integral number of
octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.
Single Collision Frames Counted frames that are involved in a single collision, and
are subsequently transmitted successfully.
Multiple Collision
Frames
A count of frames that are involved in a multiple collision,
and are subsequently transmitted successfully
Deferred
A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt
is delayed because the medium is busy
Transmissions
414
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 415 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Late Collisions
Counted times that a collision is detected later than one
slot time into the transmission of a packet.
Excessive Collisions
Counted frames for which transmission fails due to
excessive collisions.
Oversize Packets
Counted frames received that exceed the maximum
permitted frame size.
Internal MAC Rx Errors A count of frames for which reception fails due to an
internal MAC sublayer receive error.
Received Pause Frames A count of MAC Control frames received with an opcode
indicating the PAUSE operation.
Transmitted Pause
Frames
Counted MAC Control frames transmitted on this
interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
show interfaces description
Use the show interfaces description command in User EXEC mode to
display the description for all configured interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces description [gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel
port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port ]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the description for all interfaces.
Ethernet Configuration Commands
415
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 416 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console>show interfaces description
Port Description
---- ----------------------------------------------------1/0/1 Port that should be used for management only
2/0/1
2/0/2
Ch
Description
----
-----------
1
Output
show interfaces detail
Use the show interfaces detail command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
detailed status and configuration of the specified interface.
Syntax
show interfaces detail
Field
Description
interface-id
A physical interface or port channel identifier.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays detailed status and configuration of the
specified interface.
416
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 417 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show interfaces detail gi1/0/1
Port
Neg
Type
Admin
State
Duplex
State
----- ------------------------------ ---- ----- ----Gi1/0/1Gigabit - Level
Auto Up
Down
Port
Speed
Link
-----N/A
------
Unknown
Description
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------Gi1/0/1
Flow Control:Enabled
Port: Gi1/0/1
VLAN Membership mode:Access Mode
Operating parameters:
PVID: 1
Ingress Filtering: Enabled
Acceptable Frame Type: Untagged
Default Priority: 0
GVRP status:Disabled
Protected:Disabled
Ethernet Configuration Commands
417
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 418 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Port Gi1/0/1 is member in:
VLAN
Type
Name
Egress rule
------------------------------------ -----------------1
default
Default
Untagged
Static configuration:
PVID: 1
Ingress Filtering: Enabled
Acceptable Frame Type: Untagged
Port Gi1/0/1 is statically configured to:
VLAN
Name
Egress rule
----
--------------------------------- -----------
Forbidden VLANS:
VLAN
Name
----
---------------------------------
Port Gi1/0/1 Enabled
State: Disabled
Disabled
418
Ethernet Configuration Commands
Role:
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 419 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Port id: 128.1
Cost: 0
Port
Port Fast: No (Configured: no )
Protection: No
Root
Designated bridge Priority: 32768
Address: 001E.C9AA.AF51
Designated port id: 128.1
Designated path cost: 40000
CST Regional Root: 80:00:00:1E:C9:AA:AF:51
Port Cost: 0
CST
BPDU: sent 121, received 316356
show interfaces status
Use the show interfaces status command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the status for all configured interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces status
The displayed port status information includes the following:
Field
Description
Port
The port or port channel number. Oob means Out-of-Band
Management Interface.
Name
The port name.
Duplex
Displays the port Duplex status.
Speed
Refers to the port speed.
Neg
Describes the Auto-negotiation status.
Link State
Displays the Link Aggregation status, either Up or Down.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Ethernet Configuration Commands
419
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 420 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the status for all configured interfaces.
console#show interfaces status
Port
Name
-------
Duplex
--------------
Speed
Neg
Link
Flow Control
State
Status
------
-------
----
-----
------------
Gi1/0/1
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Down
Inactive
Gi1/0/2
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Down
Inactive
N/A
Unknown
Auto
Down
Inactive
Gi1/0/3
ADM-10.0.12.13
show statistics
Use the show statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
detailed statistics for a specific port or for the entire switch.
Syntax
show statistics {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |switchport | port-channel
port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
unit/slot/port
A valid interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for
interface representation.
switchport
Displays statistics for the entire switch.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
420
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 421 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following example shows statistics for port 1/0/1.
console#show statistics gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Total Packets Received (Octets)............... 779533115
Packets Received 64 Octets..................... 48950
Packets Received 65-127 Octets................. 482426
Packets Received 128-255 Octets................ 101084
Packets Received 256-511 Octets................ 163671
Packets Received 512-1023 Octets............... 4824
Packets Received 1024-1518 Octets.............. 479543
Packets Received > 1522 Octets................. 0
Packets RX and TX 64 Octets.................... 94516
Packets RX and TX 65-127 Octets................ 483312
Packets RX and TX 128-255 Octets............... 101329
Packets RX and TX 256-511 Octets............... 163696
Packets RX and TX 512-1023 Octets.............. 4982
Packets RX and TX 1024-1518 Octets............. 479845
Packets RX and TX 1519-1522 Octets............. 0
Packets RX and TX 1523-2047 Octets............. 0
Packets RX and TX 2048-4095 Octets............. 0
Packets RX and TX 4096-9216 Octets............. 0
Total Packets Received Without Errors.......... 1280498
Unicast Packets Received....................... 1155457
Ethernet Configuration Commands
421
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 422 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Multicast Packets Received..................... 48339
--More-- or (q)uit
Broadcast Packets Received..................... 76702
Total Packets Received with MAC Errors......... 0
Jabbers Received............................... 0
Fragments/Undersize Received................... 0
Alignment Errors............................... 0
FCS Errors..................................... 0
Overruns....................................... 0
Total Received Packets Not Forwarded........... 91
Local Traffic Frames........................... 0
802.3x Pause Frames Received................... 0
Unacceptable Frame Type........................ 91
Multicast Tree Viable Discards................. 0
Reserved Address Discards...................... 0
Broadcast Storm Recovery....................... 0
CFI Discards................................... 0
Upstream Threshold............................. 0
Total Packets Transmitted (Octets)............. 3604988
Packets Transmitted 64 Octets.................. 45566
Packets Transmitted 65-127 Octets.............. 886
Packets Transmitted 128-255 Octets............. 245
--More-- or (q)uit
Packets Transmitted 256-511 Octets............. 25
Packets Transmitted 512-1023 Octets............ 158
Packets Transmitted 1024-1518 Octets........... 302
Max Frame Size................................. 1518
Total Packets Transmitted Successfully......... 47182
Unicast Packets Transmitted.................... 2746
422
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 423 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Multicast Packets Transmitted.................. 44432
Broadcast Packets Transmitted.................. 4
Total Transmit Errors.......................... 0
FCS Errors..................................... 0
Tx Oversized................................... 0
Underrun Errors................................ 0
Total Transmit Packets Discarded............... 0
Single Collision Frames........................ 0
Multiple Collision Frames...................... 0
Excessive Collision Frames..................... 0
Port Membership Discards....................... 0
802.3x Pause Frames Transmitted................ 0
GVRP PDUs received............................. 0
--More-- or (q)uit
GVRP PDUs Transmitted.......................... 0
GVRP Failed Registrations...................... 0
BPDU: sent 44432, received 0
EAPOL Frames Transmitted....................... 0
EAPOL Start Frames Received.................... 0
Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 1 day 0 hr
41 min 44 sec
The following example shows statistics for the entire switch.
console#show statistics gigabitethernet switchport
Total Packets Received (Octets)................ 16877295
Unicast Packets Received....................... 1608
Multicast Packets Received..................... 48339
Broadcast Packets Received..................... 69535
Ethernet Configuration Commands
423
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 424 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Receive Packets Discarded...................... 0
Octets Transmitted............................. 6451988
Packets Transmitted Without Errors............. 91652
Unicast Packets Transmitted.................... 2746
Multicast Packets Transmitted.................. 88892
Broadcast Packets Transmitted.................. 14
Transmit Packets Discarded..................... 0
--More-- or (q)uit
Most Address Entries Ever Used................. 141
Address Entries Currently in Use............... 124
Maximum VLAN Entries........................... 1024
Most VLAN Entries Ever Used.................... 6
Static VLAN Entries............................ 6
Dynamic VLAN Entries........................... 0
VLAN Deletes................................... 0
Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 1 day 0 hr
42 min 13 sec
console#
The following example shows statistics for the entire switch.
console#show statistics switchport
Total Packets Received (Octets)................ 0
Packets Received Without Error................. 0
Unicast Packets Received....................... 0
Multicast Packets Received..................... 0
Broadcast Packets Received..................... 0
Receive Packets Discarded...................... 0
424
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 425 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Octets Transmitted............................. 0
Packets Transmitted Without Errors............. 0
Unicast Packets Transmitted.................... 0
Multicast Packets Transmitted.................. 0
Broadcast Packets Transmitted.................. 0
Transmit Packets Discarded..................... 0
Most Address Entries Ever Used................. 3
Address Entries Currently in Use............... 3
Maximum VLAN Entries........................... 1024
Most VLAN Entries Ever Used.................... 2
Static VLAN Entries............................ 2
Dynamic VLAN Entries........................... 0
VLAN Deletes................................... 0
Time Since Counters Last Cleared... 0 day 18 hr 1 min 59 sec
show statistics switchport
Use the show statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
detailed statistics for a specific port or for the entire switch.
Syntax
show statistics {interface-id |switchport}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Interface id. See Interface Naming Conventions for interface
representation.
switchport
Displays statistics for the entire switch.
Ethernet Configuration Commands
425
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 426 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
It is possible to enter interface configuration mode from global configuration
mode or from interface configuration mode.
Example
The following example shows statistics for the entire switch.
console#show statistics switchport
Total Packets Received (Octets)................ 0
Packets Received Without Error................. 0
Unicast Packets Received....................... 0
Multicast Packets Received..................... 0
Broadcast Packets Received..................... 0
Receive Packets Discarded...................... 0
Octets Transmitted............................. 0
Packets Transmitted Without Errors............. 0
Unicast Packets Transmitted.................... 0
Multicast Packets Transmitted.................. 0
Broadcast Packets Transmitted.................. 0
Transmit Packets Discarded..................... 0
426
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 427 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Most Address Entries Ever Used................. 3
Address Entries Currently in Use............... 3
Maximum VLAN Entries........................... 1024
Most VLAN Entries Ever Used.................... 2
Static VLAN Entries............................ 2
Dynamic VLAN Entries........................... 0
VLAN Deletes................................... 0
Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 0 day
18 hr 1 min 59 sec
show storm-control
Use the show storm-control command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the configuration of storm control.
Syntax
show storm-control [all | {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Ethernet Configuration Commands
427
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 428 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
The following example shows storm control configurations for all valid
Ethernet ports. The second example shows flow control mode status.
console#show storm-control all
Intf
Bcast
Bcast
Mcast
Mcast
Ucast
Ucast
Mode
Level
Mode
Level
Mode
Level
------ ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------1/0/1
Disable 5
Disable 5
Disable 5
1/0/2
Disable 5
Disable 5
Disable 5
1/0/3
Disable 5
Disable 5
Disable 5
1/0/4
Disable 5
Disable 5
Disable 5
console#show storm-control
802.3x Flow Control Mode.................... Disable
shutdown
Use the shutdown command in Interface Configuration mode to disable an
interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
shutdown
no shutdown
Default Configuration
The interface is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-Channel, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
428
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 429 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
The following example disables gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if-1/0/5)# shutdown
The following example re-enables gigabit ethernet port 1/0/5.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if-1/0/5)# no shutdown
speed
Use the speed command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the
speed of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto-negotiation. To
restore the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 | auto [10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000]}
no speed
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
10
Configures the port to 10 Mbps operation.
100
Configures the port to 100 Mbps operation.
1000
Configures the port to 1000 Mbps operation.
10000
Configures the port to 10 Gbps operation.
auto
The port automatically detects the speed it should run based on
the port at the other end of the link. If you use the 10, 100, or
1000 keywords with the auto keyword, the port only negotiates
at the specified speeds.
Default Configuration
Auto is enabled by default.
Ethernet Configuration Commands
429
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 430 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
When auto is used with a set of speeds, only those speeds are used by the port
for the negotiation capabilities. Alternatively, if no speed arguments are
configured, then all the speed capabilities are considered. SFP transceivers
support auto-negotiation mode only.
Example
The following example configures the speed operation of Ethernet port 1/0/5
to force 100-Mbps operation.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if)#speed 100
storm-control broadcast
Use the storm-control broadcast command in Interface Configuration mode
to enable broadcast storm recovery mode for a specific interface. If the mode
is enabled, broadcast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast
traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold,
the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of broadcast traffic will be
limited to the configured threshold.
Syntax
storm-control broadcast [level | rate]
no storm-control broadcast
•
level— The configured rate as a percentage of link-speed.
•
rate — The configured rate in kilobits per second (kbps). (Range: 0-100)
Default Configuration
The default value is 5.
430
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 431 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#storm-control broadcast
level 5
storm-control multicast
Use the storm-control multicast command in Interface Configuration mode
to enable multicast storm recovery mode for an interface. If the mode is
enabled, multicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 multicast
traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold,
the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of multicast traffic will be
limited to the configured threshold.
When you use the no storm-control multicast command to "disable" stormcontrol after having set the level or rate to a non-default value, that value is
still set but is not active until you re-enable storm-control.
Syntax
storm-control multicast [level | rate]
no storm-control multicast
•
level— The configured rate as a percentage of link-speed.
•
rate — The configured rate in kilobits per second (kbps). (Range: 0-100)
Default Configuration
The default value is 5.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
Ethernet Configuration Commands
431
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 432 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#storm-control multicast
level 5
storm-control unicast
Use the storm-control unicast command in Interface Configuration mode to
enable unknown unicast storm control for an interface. If the mode is
enabled, unicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of unknown L2
unicast (destination lookup failure) traffic ingressing on an interface increases
beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the
rate of unknown unicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.
When you use the no storm-control multicast command to "disable" stormcontrol after having set the level or rate to a non-default value, that value is
still set but is not active until you re-enable storm-control.
Syntax
storm-control unicast [level | rate]
no storm-control unicast
•
level— The configured rate as a percentage of link-speed.
•
rate — The configured rate in kilobits per second (kbps). (Range: 0-100)
Default Configuration
The default value is 5.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
432
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 433 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#storm-control unicast level
5
switchport protected
Use the switchport protected command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure a protected port. The groupid parameter identifies the set of
protected ports to which this interface is assigned. You can only configure an
interface as protected in one group. You are required to remove an interface
from one group before adding it to another group.
Port protection occurs within a single switch. Protected port configuration
does not affect traffic between ports on two different switches. No traffic
forwarding is possible between two protected ports. Ports in a protected group
will not forward traffic to other ports in the group.
Syntax
switchport protected groupid
no switchport protected
•
groupid--Identifies which group this port will be protected in. (Range: 0-2)
Default Configuration
No protected switchports are defined.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures Ethernet port 1/0/1 as a member of
protected group 1.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Ethernet Configuration Commands
433
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 434 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if-1/0/1)#switchport protected 1
switchport protected name
Use the switchport protected name command in Global Configuration mode
to adds the port to the protected group 1 and also sets the group name to
"protected".
Syntax
switchport protected groupid name name
no switchport protected groupid name
•
groupid — Identifies which group the port is to be protected in.
(Range: 0–2)
•
name — Name of the group. (Range: 0-32 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example assigns the name "protected" to group 1.
console(config-if-1/0/1)#switchport protected 1 name
protected
show switchport protected
Use the show switchport protected command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the status of all the interfaces, including protected and unprotected
interfaces.
434
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 435 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show switchport protected groupid
•
groupid — Identifies which group the port is to be protected in.
(Range: 0–2)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example identifies test as the protected group.
console#show switchport protected 0
Name......................................... test
Ethernet Configuration Commands
435
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 436 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
436
Ethernet Configuration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 437 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Ethernet CFM Commands
15
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is the OAM Protocol provision for
end-to-end service layer OAM in carrier Ethernet networks. CFM provides
mechanisms to support the operator in performing connectivity checks, fault
detection, fault verification and isolation, and fault notification per service in
the network domain of interest. Unlike Ethernet OAM defined in IEEE
802.3ah, where the faults are detected and notified on a single point-to-point
IEEE Std. 802.3 LAN, this specification deals with the fault diagnosis at
service layer across networks comprising multiple LANs, including LANs
other than 802.3 media.
PowerConnect CFM supports the following functionality:
•
Path discovery (linktrace message)
•
Fault detection (continuity check message)
•
Fault verification and isolation (loopback and linktrace messages)
•
Fault notification (alarm indication signal or SNMP trap)
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ethernet cfm domain
ping ethernet cfm
service
traceroute ethernet cfm
ethernet cfm cc level
show ethernet cfm errors
ethernet cfm mep level
show ethernet cfm domain
ethernet cfm mep enable
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points
local
ethernet cfm mep active
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points
remote
Ethernet CFM Commands
437
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 438 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time
show ethernet cfm statistics
ethernet cfm mip level
debug cfm
ethernet cfm domain
Use the ethernet cfm domain command in Global Configuration mode to
enter into maintenance domain config mode for an existing domain. Use the
optional level parameter to create a domain and enter into maintenance
domain config mode. In maintenance domain config mode, maintenance
associations are created and per-maintenance domain services can be
configured. Use the no form of the command to delete a maintenance
domain.
Syntax
ethernet cfm domain domain-name [level 0-7]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Range
Default
Access
Maintenance
domain ID
Unique
identifier
maintenance
domain
0-7 for id
None
Read-write
Maintenance
domain name
Name of the
maintenance
domain
Alphanumeric
None
string of up to 43
characters
Read-write
Default Configuration
No CFM domains are pre-configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
438
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 439 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Each domain must have a unique name and level, for example, one cannot
create a domain qwerty at level 2 if domain qwerty already exists at level 1.
Likewise, one cannot create a domain dvorak at level 2 if a domain of any
name exists at level 2.
Example
In this example, a domain vin is created at level 1.
console(config)#ethernet cfm domain vin level 1
console(config-cfm-mdomain)#
service
Use the service command in maintenance domain config mode to associate a
VLAN with a maintenance domain. Use the no form of the command to
remove the association.
Syntax
service service-name vlan vlanid
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
service
Maintenance
association
VLAN ID
Range
Default
Access
Unique service alphanumeric
identifier
string
None
Read-write
VLAN ID
1-4093
representing a
service instance
that is
monitored by
this
maintenance
association.
0
Read-write
Default Configuration
No VLANs are associated with a maintenance domain by default.
Ethernet CFM Commands
439
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 440 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Maintenance domain config mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-cfm-mdomain)#service serv1 vlan 10
ethernet cfm cc level
Use the ethernet cfm cc level command in Global Configuration mode to
initiate sending continuity checks (CCMs) at the specified interval and level
on a VLAN monitored by an existing domain. Use the no form of the
command to cease send CCMs.
Syntax
ethernet cfm cc level 0-7 vlan vlan-list interval secs
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Maintenance
association
VLAN ID
VLAN ID
1-4093
representing a
service instance
that is
monitored by
this
maintenance
association.
CCM Interval
Time interval
between
successive
transmissions
of CCM.
440
Range
Default
Access
0
Read-write
1, 10, 60, and 600 1 second
seconds
Ethernet CFM Commands
Read-write
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 441 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
CCMs are not sent by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#ethernet cfm cc level 1 vlan 15 interval 10
ethernet cfm mep level
Use the ethernet cfm mep level command in Interface Configuration mode
to create a Maintenance End Point (MEP) on an interface at the specified
level and direction. MEPs are configured per Maintenance Association per
Maintenance Domain. Use the no form of the command to delete a MEP.
Syntax
ethernet cfm mep level 0-7 direction up|down mpid 1-8191 vlan 1-4093
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
level
Maintenance association level
direction
Up indicates the MEP is facing towards Bridge Relay Entity.
Down indicates the MEP is facing towards the LAN.
mpid
Maintenance entity identifier
vlan
VLAN on which the MEP operates.
Default Configuration
No MEPs are preconfigured.
Ethernet CFM Commands
441
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 442 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example creates a maintenance endpoint at level 1 with mpid
1010 on vlan 10.
console(config-if-Gi1/0/3)#ethernet cfm mep level 1
direction up mpid 1010 vlan 10
ethernet cfm mep enable
Use the ethernet cfm mep enable command in Interface Configuration mode
to enable a MEP at the specified level and direction. Use the no form of the
command to disable the MEP.
Syntax
ethernet cfm mep enable level 0-7 vlan 1-4093 mpid 1-8191
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
level
Maintenance association level
mpid
Maintenance entity identifier
vlan
VLAN on which the MEP operates
Default Configuration
No MEPs are preconfigured.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
442
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 443 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The maintenance domain must exist for it to be enabled.
Example
The following example enables a maintenance endpoint at level 1 with mpid
1010 on vlan 10.
console(config-if-Gi1/0/3)#ethernet cfm mep enable
level 1 vlan 10 mpid 1010
ethernet cfm mep active
Use the ethernet cfm mep active command in Interface Configuration mode
to activate a MEP at the specified level and direction. Use the no form of the
command to deactivate the MEP.
Syntax
ethernet cfm mep active level 0-7 vlan 1-4093 mpid 1-8191
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
level
Maintenance association level
mpid
Maintenance entity identifier
vlan
VLAN on which the MEP operates
Default Configuration
No MEPs are preconfigured.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Ethernet CFM Commands
443
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 444 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time
Use the ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time command in Interface
Configuration mode to maintain internal information on a missing MEP. Use
the no form of the command to return the interval to the default value.
Syntax
ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time hold-time
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
hold-time
The time in seconds to maintain the data for a missing MEP
before removing the data. The default value is 600 seconds.
Default Configuration
No MEPs are preconfigured.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
User Guidelines
The hold time should generally be less than the CCM message interval.
Example
The following example sets the hold time for maintaining internal
information regarding a missing MEP.
console(config)#ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time
1200
ethernet cfm mip level
Use the ethernet cfm mip level command in Interface Configuration mode
to create a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP) at the specified level. The
MEPs are configured per Maintenance Domain per interface. Use the no
form of the command to delete a MIP.
444
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 445 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ethernet cfm mip level 0-7
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
level
Maintenance association level
Default Configuration
No MIPs are preconfigured.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-gi1/0/1)# ethernet cfm mip level <7>
ping ethernet cfm
Use the ping ethernet cfm command in Privileged EXEC mode to generate a
loopback message (LBM) from the configured MEP.
Syntax
ping ethernet cfm {mac mac-addr| remote-mpid 1-8191} {domain domain
name | level 0-7 } vlan vlan-id mpid 1-8191 [count 1-255]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
level
Maintenance association level
Ethernet CFM Commands
445
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 446 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
mac-addr
The destination MAC address for which the connectivity needs
to be verified. Either MEP ID or the MAC address option can
be used.
remote-mpid
The MEP ID for which connectivity is to be verified; i.e. the
destination MEP ID.
domain
Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of
up to 43 characters in length).
vlan-id
A VLAN associated with the maintenance domain. Range: 14094.
mpid
The MEP ID from which the loopback message needs to be
transmitted.
count
The number of LBMs to be transmitted. The default number is
1.
Default Configuration
By default, this command will transmit one loopback message with a timeout
of five seconds.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console #ping ethernet cfm mac 00:11:22:33:44:55 level
1 vlan 10 mpid 1 count 10
traceroute ethernet cfm
Use the traceroute ethernet command in Privileged EXEC mode to generate
a link trace message (LTM) from the configured MEP.
446
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 447 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
traceroute ethernet cfm {mac mac-addr| remote-mpid 1-8191} {domain
domain name | level 0-7 } vlan vlan-id mpid 1-8191 [ttl 1-255]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
level
Maintenance association level
mac-addr
The destination MAC address for which the route needs to be
traced. Either MEP ID or the MAC address option can be used.
remote-mpid
The MEP ID for which connectivity needs to be verified; i.e.
the destination MEP ID.
domain
Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of
up to 43 characters in length).
vlan-id
A VLAN associated with the maintenance domain. Range: 14094.
mpid
The MEP ID from which the link trace message is to be
transmitted.
ttl
Number of hops over which the LTM is expected to be
transmitted. The default is 64.
Default Configuration
By default, the traceroute command will send loopback trace messages with a
TTL of 64.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console # linktrace src-mep 200 target-mep 400 ttl 64
Ethernet CFM Commands
447
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 448 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ethernet cfm errors
Use the show ethernet cfm errors command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the cfm errors.
Syntax
show ethernet cfm errors {domain domain-id | level 0-7}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
domain
Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of
up to 43 characters in length).
level
Maintenance association level
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ethernet cfm errors
----- ---- ---- --------- ------------ ------------ ----------- ---------Level SVID MPID DefRDICcm DefMACStatus DefRemoteCCM DefErrorCCM DefXconCCM
----- ---- ---- --------- ------------ ------------ ----------- ----------
show ethernet cfm domain
Use the show ethernet cfm domain command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the configured parameters in a maintenance domain.
448
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 449 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ethernet cfm domain {brief |domain-id}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
domain
Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of
up to 43 characters in length).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console # show Ethernet cfm domain domain1
Domain Name
: domain1
Level
: 1
Total Services : 1
---- ----------------------------------- -----------------VLAN ServiceName
CC-Interval (secs)
---- ----------------------------------- -----------------10
serv1
1
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local
Use the show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local command in Privileged
EXEC mode to display the configured local maintenance points.
Ethernet CFM Commands
449
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 450 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local {level 0-7 | interface interfaceid | domain domain-name}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
domain
Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of
up to 43 characters in length).
level
Maintenance association level
interface-id
Show all MPs associated with the interface.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local level 1
---- ----- ---- ---- ------ ----- -------- ------ ----------- --------MPID Level Type VLAN
Port
Dire-
CC
MEP-
ction Transmit Active
Operational
MAC
Status
---- ----- ---- ---- ------ ----- -------- ------ ----------- --------1
1
MEP
10
1/0/1
UP
Enabled
True
00:02:bc:02:02:02
----- ---- ------ ----------------Level Type
Port
MAC
----- ---- ------ -----------------
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote
Use the show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote command in
Privileged EXEC mode to display the configured remote maintenance points.
450
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 451 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote {level 0-7 | domain domainname | detail [ mac mac-address | mep MEPId] [domain domain-name |
level 0-7] [vlan vlan-id]}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
domain
Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of
up to 43 characters in length).
level
Maintenance association level
mac-address
The destination MAC address for which the information is
desired.
vlan-id
A VLAN associated with the maintenance domain. Range: 14094.
mpid
The MEP ID from which the link trace message is to be
transmitted.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console# show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remove level 1
------ ------- ----- ----------------- ---- ----------------- ----------MEP Id RMEP Id Level
MAC
VLAN Expiry Timer(sec) Service Id
------ ------- ----- ----------------- ---- ----------------- ----------1
2
1
00:11:22:33:44:55 10
25
serv1
Ethernet CFM Commands
451
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 452 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ethernet cfm statistics
Use the show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote command in
Privileged EXEC mode to display the CFM statistics.
Syntax
show ethernet cfm statistics [domain domain-name | level 0-7]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
domain-name
Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of
up to 43 characters in length).
level
Maintenance association level
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
show Ethernet cfm statistics [domain | level <0-7>]
Console# show ethernet cfm statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------Statistics for 'Domain: domain1, Level: 1, Vlan: 11, MEP Id: 1'
-----------------------------------------------------------------Out-of-sequence CCM's received
: 0
CCM's transmitted
: 259
In-order Loopback Replies received
: 5
452
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 453 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Out-of-order Loopback Replies received: 0
Bad MSDU Loopback Replies received
: 0
Loopback Replies transmitted
: 5
Unexpected LTR's received
: 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------Statistics for 'Domain: domain1, Level: 1, Vlan: 11, MEP Id: 2'
-----------------------------------------------------------------Out-of-sequence CCM's received
: 0
CCM's transmitted
: 1
In-order Loopback Replies received
: 5
Out-of-order Loopback Replies received: 5
Bad MSDU Loopback Replies received
: 0
Loopback Replies transmitted
: 0
Unexpected LTR's received
: 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------Statistics for 'Domain: domain1, Level: 1, Vlan: 11, MEP Id: 3'
-----------------------------------------------------------------Out-of-sequence CCM's received
: 0
CCM's transmitted
: 1
In-order Loopback Replies received
: 0
Out-of-order Loopback Replies received: 0
Bad MSDU Loopback Replies received
: 0
Loopback Replies transmitted
: 5
Unexpected LTR's received
: 0
debug cfm
Use the debug cfm command in Privileged EXEC mode to enable CFM
debugging. Use the no form of the command to disable debugging.
Syntax
debug cfm
{ event | {pdu { all | ccm | ltm | lbm | } {tx | rx} }}
Ethernet CFM Commands
453
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 454 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
event
CFM events
pdu
CFM PDUs
ccm
Continuity check messages
ltm
Link trace messages
lbm
Loopback messages
tx
Transmit only
rx
Receive only
all
Everything
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
Console# show ethernet cfm statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------Statistics for 'Domain: domain1, Level: 1, Vlan: 11, MEP Id: 1'
-----------------------------------------------------------------Out-of-sequence CCM's received
: 0
CCM's transmitted
: 259
In-order Loopback Replies received
: 5
Out-of-order Loopback Replies received: 0
Bad MSDU Loopback Replies received
: 0
Loopback Replies transmitted
: 5
454
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 455 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Unexpected LTR's received
: 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------Statistics for 'Domain: domain1, Level: 1, Vlan: 11, MEP Id: 2'
-----------------------------------------------------------------Out-of-sequence CCM's received
: 0
CCM's transmitted
: 1
In-order Loopback Replies received
: 5
Out-of-order Loopback Replies received: 5
Bad MSDU Loopback Replies received
: 0
Loopback Replies transmitted
: 0
Unexpected LTR's received
: 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------Statistics for 'Domain: domain1, Level: 1, Vlan: 11, MEP Id: 3'
-----------------------------------------------------------------Out-of-sequence CCM's received
: 0
CCM's transmitted
: 1
In-order Loopback Replies received
: 0
Out-of-order Loopback Replies received: 0
Bad MSDU Loopback Replies received
: 0
Loopback Replies transmitted
: 5
Unexpected LTR's received
: 0
Ethernet CFM Commands
455
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 456 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
456
Ethernet CFM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 457 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
16
GVRP Commands
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) is used to propagate VLAN
membership information throughout the network. GVRP is based on the
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP), which defines a method of
propagating a defined attribute (that is, VLAN membership) throughout the
network. GVRP allows both end stations and the networking device to issue
and revoke declarations relating to membership in VLANs. End stations that
participate in GVRP register VLAN membership using GARP Protocol Data
Unit (GPDU) messages. Networking devices that implement the GVRP
protocol and enable GVRP then process the GPDUs. The VLAN registration
is made in the context of the port that receives the GPDU. The networking
device propagates this VLAN membership on all of its other ports in the
active topology. Thus, the end station VLAN ID is propagated throughout the
network. GVRP is an application defined in the IEEE 802.1p standard that
allows for the control of 802.1Q VLANs.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear gvrp statistics
gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
garp timer
show gvrp configuration
gvrp enable (global)
show gvrp error-statistics
gvrp enable (interface)
show gvrp statistics
gvrp registration-forbid
clear gvrp statistics
Use the clear gvrp statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear all
the GVRP statistics information.
GVRP Commands
457
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 458 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
clear gvrp statistics [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example clears all the GVRP statistics information on port
1/0/8.
console# clear gvrp statistics gigabitethernet 1/0/8
garp timer
Use the garp timer command in Interface Configuration mode to adjust the
GARP application join, leave, and leaveall GARP timer values. To reset the
timer to default values, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value
no garp timer
458
•
join — Indicates the time in centiseconds that PDUs are transmitted.
•
leave — Indicates the time in centiseconds that the device waits before
leaving its GARP state.
•
leaveall — Used to confirm the port within the VLAN. The time is the
interval between messages sent, measured in centiseconds.
•
timer_value — Timer values in centiseconds. The range is 10-100 for join,
20-600 for leave, and 200-6000 for leaveall.
GVRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 459 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default timer values are as follows:
•
Join timer — 20 centiseconds
•
Leave timer — 60 centiseconds
•
Leaveall timer — 1000 centiseconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
The following relationships for the various timer values must be maintained:
•
Leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time.
•
Leaveall time must be greater than the leave time.
Set the same GARP timer values on all Layer 2-connected devices. If the
GARP timers are set differently on Layer 2-connected devices, the GARP
application will not operate successfully.
The timer_value setting must be a multiple of 10.
Example
The following example sets the leave timer for port 1/0/8 to 90 centiseconds.
console (config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console (config-if-1/0/8)# garp timer leave 90
gvrp enable (global)
Use the gvrp enable (global) command in Global Configuration mode to
enable GVRP globally on the switch. To disable GVRP globally on the switch,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
gvrp enable
no gvrp enable
GVRP Commands
459
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 460 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
GVRP is globally disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example globally enables GVRP on the device.
console(config)#gvrp enable
gvrp enable (interface)
Use the gvrp enable command in Interface Configuration mode to enable
GVRP on an interface. To disable GVRP on an interface, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
gvrp enable
no gvrp enable
Default Configuration
GVRP is disabled on all interfaces by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
An Access port cannot join dynamically to a VLAN because it is always a
member of only one VLAN.
460
GVRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 461 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Membership in untagged VLAN would be propagated in a same way as a
tagged VLAN. In such cases it is the administrator’s responsibility to set the
PVID to be the untagged VLAN VID.
Example
The following example enables GVRP on gigabit ethernet 1/0/8.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console(config-if-1/0/8)#gvrp enable
gvrp registration-forbid
Use the gvrp registration-forbid command in Interface Configuration mode
to deregister all VLANs on a port and prevent any dynamic registration on the
port. To allow dynamic registering for VLANs on a port, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
gvrp registration-forbid
no gvrp registration-forbid
Default Configuration
Dynamic registering and deregistering for each VLAN on the port is not
forbidden.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how default dynamic registering and
deregistering is forbidden for each VLAN on port 1/0/8.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
GVRP Commands
461
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 462 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if-1/0/8)#gvrp registration-forbid
gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
Use the gvrp vlan-creation-forbid command in Interface Configuration mode
to disable dynamic VLAN creation. To disable dynamic VLAN creation, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
no gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
Default Configuration
By default, dynamic VLAN creation is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example disables dynamic VLAN creation on port 1/0/8.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console(config-if-1/0/8)#gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
show gvrp configuration
Use the show gvrp configuration command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display GVRP configuration information. Timer values are displayed. Other
data shows whether GVRP is enabled and which ports are running GVRP.
462
GVRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 463 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show gvrp configuration [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port } ]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to display GVRP configuration
information:
console# show gvrp configuration
Global GVRP Mode: Disabled
Join
Interface
-----------
Leave
Timer
LeaveAll
Timer
Port
VLAN
Timer
GVRP Mode
Create Register
(centisecs)
(centisecs)
(centisecs)
Forbid Forbid
-----------
-----------
-----------
----------- ------ ------
1/0/1
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/2
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/3
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/4
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/5
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/6
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/7
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/8
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/9
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/10
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/11
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/12
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/13
20
60
1000
Disabled
1/0/14
20
60
1000
Disabled
GVRP Commands
463
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 464 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show gvrp error-statistics
Use the show gvrp error-statistics command in User EXEC mode to display
GVRP error statistics.
Syntax
show gvrp error-statistics [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays GVRP error statistics information.
console>show gvrp error-statistics
GVRP error statistics:
---------------Legend:
INVPROT: Invalid Protocol Id
INVATYP: Invalid Attribute Type
INVALEN: Invalid Attribute Length INVAVAL: Invalid Attribute Value
INVEVENT: Invalid Event
Port INVPROT
INVATYP
INVAVAL
INVALEN
INVEVENT
---- -------
-------
-------
-------
--------
1/0/1
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/2
0
0
0
0
0
464
GVRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 465 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1/0/3
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/4
0
0
0
0
0
show gvrp statistics
Use the show gvrp statistics command in User EXEC mode to display GVRP
statistics.
Syntax
show gvrp statistics [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
This example shows output of the show gvrp statistics command.
console>show gvrp statistics
GVRP statistics:
-----------------------------Legend:
rJE
: Join Empty Received
rJIn : Join In Received
rEmp : Empty Received
rLIn : Leave In Received
rLE
: Leave Empty Received
rLA
: Leave All Received
sJE
: Join Empty Sent
JIn
: Join In Sent
sEmp : Empty Sent
sLIn : Leave In Sent
sLE
sLA
: Leave Empty Sent
: Leave All Sent
GVRP Commands
465
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 466 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Port
rJE
rJIn
rEmp
rLIn
rLE
rLA
sJE
sJIn
sEmp
sLIn
sLE
----
---
----
----
----
---
---
---
---
---
----
---- ---
sLA
1/0/1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1/0/8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
466
GVRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 467 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IGMP Snooping Commands
17
Snooping of Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) messages is a
feature that allows PowerConnect switches to forward multicast traffic
intelligently on the switch. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a
host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range
from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report
messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request the
multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all
ports and possibly affecting network performance.
IGMP snooping switches build forwarding lists by monitoring for, and in
some cases intercepting, IGMP messages. Although the software processing
the IGMP messages could maintain state information based on the full IP
group addresses, the forwarding tables in PowerConnect are mapped to link
layer addresses.
The Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) manages the forwarding
address table for Layer 2 multicast protocols, such as IGMP Snooping.
The IGMP Snooping code in the CPU ages out IGMP entries in the MFDB.
If a report for a particular group on a particular interface is not received
within a certain time interval (query interval), the IGMP Snooping code
deletes that interface from the group. The value for query interval time is
configurable using management.
If an IGMP Leave Group message is received on an interface, the IGMP
Snooping code sends a query on that interface and waits a specified length of
time (maximum response time). If no response is received within that time,
that interface is removed from the group. The value for maximum response
time is configurable using management.
In addition to building and maintaining lists of multicast group
memberships, the snooping switch also maintains a list of multicast routers.
When forwarding multicast packets, they should be forwarded on ports that
have joined using IGMP and also on ports on which multicast routers are
attached. The reason for this is that in IGMP there is only one active query
mechanism. This means that all other routers on the network are suppressed
and thus not detectable by the switch. If a query is not received on an
IGMP Snooping Commands
467
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 468 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
interface within a specified length of time (multicast router present
expiration time), that interface is removed from the list of interfaces with
multicast routers attached. The multicast router present expiration time is
configurable using management. The default value for the multicast router
expiration time is zero, which indicates an infinite timeout (that is, no
expiration).
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip igmp snooping (global)
show ip igmp snooping interface
ip igmp snooping (interface)
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
ip igmp snooping host-time-out
ip igmp snooping (VLAN)
ip igmp snooping leave-time-out
ip igmp snooping fast-leave
ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out
ip igmp snooping groupmembershipinterval
show ip igmp snooping
ip igmp snooping maxresponse
show ip igmp snooping groups
ip igmp snooping mcrtrexpiretime
ip igmp snooping (global)
Use the ip igmp snooping command in Global Configuration mode to
globally enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping. Use
the no form of this command to disable IGMP snooping globally.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
Default Configuration
IGMP snooping is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
468
IGMP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 469 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
IGMP snooping is enabled on static VLANs only and is not enabled on
Private VLANs or their community VLANs.
Example
The following example globally enables IGMP snooping.
console(config)# ip igmp snooping
ip igmp snooping (interface)
Use the ip igmp snooping command in Interface Configuration mode to
enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on a specific
interface. To disable IGMP snooping on an Ethernet interface, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
Default Configuration
IGMP snooping is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
IGMP snooping can be enabled on Ethernet interfaces.
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping.
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip igmp snooping
IGMP Snooping Commands
469
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 470 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip igmp snooping host-time-out
Use the ip igmp snooping host-time-out command in Interface
Configuration mode to configure the host-time-out. If an IGMP report for a
Multicast group is not received for a host time-out period from a specific port,
this port is deleted from the member list of that Multicast group. To reset to
the default host time-out, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping host-time-out time-out
no ip igmp snooping host-time-out
•
time-out — Host timeout in seconds. (Range: 2- 3600)
Default Configuration
The default host-time-out is 260 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
The timeout should be more than sum of response time and twice the query
interval.
Example
The following example configures the host timeout to 300 seconds.
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip igmp snooping host-timeout 300
ip igmp snooping leave-time-out
Use the ip igmp snooping leave-time-out command in Interface
Configuration mode to configure the leave-time-out. If an IGMP report for a
Multicast group is not received within the leave-time-out period after an
470
IGMP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 471 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IGMP leave was received from a specific port, the current port is deleted from
the member list of that Multicast group. To configure the default leave-timeout, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping leave-time-out [time-out | immediate-leave]
no ip igmp snooping leave-time-out
•
time-out — Specifies the leave-time-out in seconds. (Range: 1-25)
•
immediate-leave — Specifies that the port should be removed
immediately from the members list after receiving IGMP Leave.
Default Configuration
The default leave-time-out configuration is 10 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
The leave timeout should be set greater than the maximum time that a host
is allowed to respond to an IGMP Query.
Use immediate leave only where there is only one host connected to a port.
Example
The following example configures the host leave-time-out to 15 seconds.
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip igmp snooping leave-timeout 15
ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out
Use the ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out command in Interface
Configuration mode to configure the mrouter-time-out. This command is
used for setting the aging-out time after Multicast router ports are
automatically learned. To reset to the default mrouter-time-out, use the no
form of this command.
IGMP Snooping Commands
471
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 472 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out time-out
no ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out
•
time-out — mrouter timeout in seconds for IGMP. (Range: 1–3600)
Default Configuration
The default value is 300 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the mrouter timeout to 200 seconds.
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip igmp snooping mroutertime-out 200
show ip igmp snooping
Use the show ip igmp snooping command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the IGMP snooping configuration.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
Specifies a VLAN ID value (available only in Privileged EXEC
mode).
472
IGMP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 473 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
show ip igmp snooping groups
Use the show ip igmp snooping groups command in User EXEC mode to
display the Multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping groups [vlan vlan-id] [address ip-multicast-address]
•
vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value.
•
ip-multicast-address — Specifies an IP Multicast address.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
To see the full Multicast address table (including static addresses) use the
show bridge address-table command.
Example
The example shows Multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping for all
VLANs.
console>show ip igmp snooping groups
Vlan
IP Address
Ports
IGMP Snooping Commands
473
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 474 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
----
-----------
-------
1
224-239.130 | 2.2.3
1/0/1, 2/0/2
19
224-239.130 | 2.2.8
1/0/9-1/0/11
IGMP Reporters that are forbidden statically:
--------------------------------------------Vlan
IP Address
----
------------------
1
224-239.130 | 2.2.3
Ports
------------------1/0/19
show ip igmp snooping interface
Use the show ip igmp snooping interface command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display the IGMP snooping configuration.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping interface interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
port-channel port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The example displays IGMP snooping information.
console#show ip igmp snooping interface 1/0/1
Slot/Port................................... 1/0/1
474
IGMP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 475 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IGMP Snooping Admin Mode.................... Disabled
Fast Leave Mode............................. Disabled
Group Membership Interval................... 260
Max Response Time........................... 10
Multicast Router Present Expiration Time.... 300
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Use the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command in Privileged EXEC mode
to display information on dynamically learned Multicast router interfaces.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows IGMP snooping mrouter information.
console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Port........................................1/0/1
ip igmp snooping (VLAN)
Use the ip igmp snooping command in VLAN Configuration mode to enable
IGMP snooping on a particular interface or on all interfaces participating in a
VLAN. To disable IGMP snooping use the no form of this command.
IGMP Snooping Commands
475
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 476 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-id
no ip igmp snooping
Default Configuration
IGMP snooping is disabled on VLAN interfaces by default.
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping on VLAN 2.
console#vlan database
console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping 2
ip igmp snooping fast-leave
This command enables or disables IGMP Snooping fast-leave mode on a
selected VLAN. Enabling fast-leave allows the switch to immediately remove
the layer 2 LAN interface from its forwarding table entry upon receiving an
IGMP leave message for that multicast group without first sending out MACbased general queries to the interface. The no form of this command disables
IGMP Snooping fast-leave mode on a VLAN.
You should enable fast-leave admin mode only on VLANs where only one host
is connected to each layer 2 LAN port. This setting prevents the inadvertent
dropping of the other hosts that were connected to the same layer 2 LAN port
but were still interested in receiving multicast traffic directed to that group.
Also, fast-leave processing is supported only with IGMP version 2 hosts.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping fast-leave vlan-id
476
IGMP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 477 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no ip igmp snooping fast-leave
•
vlan id — Number assigned to the VLAN.
Default Configuration
IGMP snooping fast-leave mode is disabled on VLANs by default.
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping fast-leave mode on VLAN 2.
console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave 2
ip igmp snooping groupmembership-interval
This command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on a VLAN.
The Group Membership Interval time is the amount of time in seconds that a
switch waits for a report from a particular group on a particular interface
before deleting the interface from the entry. This value must be greater than
the IGMPv3 Maximum Response time value. The range is 2 to 3600 seconds.
The no form of this command sets the IGMPv3 Group Membership Interval
time to the default value.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping groupmembership-interval vlan-id seconds
no ip igmp snooping groupmembership-interval
•
vlan-id — Number assigned to the VLAN
•
seconds — IGMP group membership interval time in seconds. (Range:
2–3600)
IGMP Snooping Commands
477
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 478 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default group membership interval time is 260 seconds.
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures an IGMP snooping group membership
interval of 520 seconds.
console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping
groupmembership-interval 2 520
ip igmp snooping maxresponse
This command sets the IGMP Maximum Response time on a particular
VLAN. The Maximum Response time is the amount of time in seconds that a
switch will wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not
receive a report for a particular group in that interface. This value must be less
than the IGMP Query Interval time value. The range is 1 to 3174 seconds.
The no form of this command sets the maximum response time on the VLAN
to the default value.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping maxresponse vlan-id seconds
no ip igmp snooping maxresponse vlan-id
•
vlan-id — Number assigned to the VLAN.
•
seconds — IGMP Maximum response time in seconds. (Range: 1-3174)
Default Configuration
The default maximum response time is 10 seconds.
478
IGMP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 479 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration mode
User Guidelines
When using IGMP Snooping Querier, this parameter should be less than the
value for the IGMP Snooping Querier query interval.
Example
The following example sets the maximum response time to 60 seconds on
VLAN 2.
console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping maxresponse 2
60
ip igmp snooping mcrtrexpiretime
This command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time. The time
is set on a particular VLAN. This is the amount of time in seconds that a
switch waits for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is
removed from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached. The range
is 1–2147483647 seconds. A value of 0 indicates an infinite time-out (no
expiration). The no form of this command sets the Multicast Router Present
Expiration time to 0. The time is set for a particular VLAN.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping mcrtexpiretime vlan-id seconds
no ip igmp mcrtexpiretime vlan-id
•
vlan id — Number assigned to the VLAN
•
seconds — Multicast router present expiration time. (Range: 1–3600)
Default Configuration
The default multicast router present expiration time is 300 seconds.
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration mode
IGMP Snooping Commands
479
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 480 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The mcrexpiretime should be less than the group membership interval.
Example
The following example sets the multicast router present expiration time on
VLAN 2 to 60 seconds.
console(config-vlan)#ip igmp mcrtexpiretime 2 60
480
IGMP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 481 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
18
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
The IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier is an extension to the IGMP/MLD
Snooping feature. IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier allows the switch to
simulate an IGMP/MLD router in a Layer 2-only network, thus removing the
need to have an IGMP/MLD Router to collect and refresh the multicast
group membership information. The querier function simulates a small
subset of the IGMP/MLD router functionality.
In a network with IP multicast routing, an IP multicast router acts as the
IGMP/MLD querier. However, if it is required that the IP-multicast traffic in
a VLAN be switched, the PowerConnect can be configured as an IGMP/MLD
querier. When IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier is enabled, the Querier sends
out periodic IGMP/MLD General Queries that trigger the Multicast
listeners/member to send their joins so as to receive the Multicast data traffic.
IGMP/MLD Snooping listens to these reports to establish the appropriate L2
forwarding table entries.
The PowerConnect supports version IGMP V1 and 2 for snooping IGMP
queries.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip igmp snooping querier
ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry
ip igmp snooping querier election
participate
ip igmp snooping querier version
ip igmp snooping querier query-interval
show ip igmp snooping querier
ip igmp snooping querier
This command enables or disables IGMP Snooping Querier on the system
(Global Configuration mode) or on a VLAN. Using this command, you can
specify the IP address that the snooping querier switch should use as the
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
481
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 482 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
source address when generating periodic queries. The no form of this
command disables IGMP Snooping Querier on the system. Use the optional
address parameter to set or reset the querier address.
If a VLAN has IGMP Snooping Querier enabled, and IGMP Snooping is
operationally disabled on it, IGMP Snooping Querier functionality is disabled
on that VLAN. IGMP Snooping Querier functionality is re-enabled if IGMP
Snooping is operational on the VLAN.
The IGMP Snooping Querier application sends periodic general queries on
the VLAN to solicit membership reports.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping querier [vlan vlan-id] [address ip-address]
no ip igmp snooping querier [vlan vlan-id ][address]
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN number.
•
ip-address — An IPv4 address used for the source address.
Default Configuration
The IGMP snooping querier feature is globally disabled on the switch. When
enabled, the IGMP snooping querier disables itself if it detects IGMP traffic
from a multicast-enabled router.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
When using the command in Global Configuration mode to configure a
snooping querier source address, the IPv4 address is the global querier
address. When using the command in VLAN Configuration mode to
configure a snooping querier source address, the IPv4 address is the querier
address for the VLAN. If there are no global or VLAN querier addresses
configured, then use the management IP address as the IGMP snooping
querier source address. Using all zeros for the querier IP address removes it.
The VLAN IP address takes precedence over the global IP address.
482
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 483 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping querier in VLAN
Configuration mode.
console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping querier 1
address 10.19.67.1
ip igmp snooping querier election participate
This command enables the Snooping Querier to participate in the Querier
Election process when it discovers the presence of another Querier in the
VLAN. When this mode is enabled, if the Snooping Querier finds that the
other Querier source address is more than the Snooping Querier address, it
stops sending periodic queries. If the Snooping Querier wins the election,
then it continues sending periodic queries. The no form of this command sets
the snooping querier not to participate in the querier election but to go into a
non-querier mode as soon in as it discovers the presence of another querier in
the same VLAN.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping querier election participate vlan-id
no ip igmp snooping querier election participate vlan-id
Default Configuration
The snooping querier is configured to not participate in the querier election
by default.
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the snooping querier to participate in the
querier election.
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
483
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 484 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#vlan database
console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping querier
election participate
ip igmp snooping querier query-interval
This command sets the IGMP Querier Query Interval time, which is the
amount of time in seconds that the switch waits before sending another
periodic query. The no form of this command sets the IGMP Querier Query
Interval time to its default value.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping querier query-interval interval-count
no ip igmp snooping querier query-interval
•
interval–count — Amount of time in seconds that the switch waits before
sending another general query. (Range: 1-1800)
Default Configuration
The query interval default is 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The value of this parameter should be larger than the IGMP Snooping Max
Response Time.
Example
The following example sets the query interval to 1800:
console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier
query_interval 1800
484
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 485 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry
This command sets the IGMP Querier timer expiration period which is the
time period that the switch remains in Non-Querier mode after it has
discovered that there is a Multicast Querier in the network. The no form of
this command sets the IGMP Querier timer expiration period to its default
value.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry seconds
no ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry
•
seconds — The time in seconds that the switch remains in Non-Querier
mode after it has discovered that there is a multicast querier in the
network. The range is 60–300 seconds.
Default Configuration
The query interval default is 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the querier timer expiry time to 100 seconds.
console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry
100
ip igmp snooping querier version
This command sets the IGMP version of the query that the snooping switch
is going to send periodically. The no form of this command sets the IGMP
Querier Version to its default value.
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
485
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 486 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip igmp snooping querier version version
no ip igmp snooping querier version
•
version — IGMP version. (Range: 1–2)
Default Configuration
The querier version default is 2.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the IGMP version of the querier to 1.
console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier version 1
show ip igmp snooping querier
This command displays IGMP Snooping Querier information. Configured
information is displayed whether or not IGMP Snooping Querier is enabled.
If a querier is active in the network and IGMP snooping querier is enabled,
the querier’s IP address is shown in the Last Querier Address field.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping querier [detail | vlan vlan_id]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
vlan_id
Specifies a VLAN ID value.
When the optional argument vlan_id is not used, the command shows the
following information.
486
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 487 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Admin Mode
Indicates whether or not IGMP Snooping Querier is active on
the switch.
Admin Version
Indicates the version of IGMP that will be used while sending
out the queries.
Source IP Address
Shows the IP address that is used in the IPv4 header when
sending out IGMP queries. It can be configured using the
appropriate command.
Query Interval
Shows the amount of time in seconds that a Snooping Querier
waits before sending out the periodic general query.
Querier Timeout
Displays the amount of time to wait in the Non-Querier
operational state before moving to a Querier state.
When you specify a value for vlan_id, the following information appears.
Parameter
Description
VLAN Admin Mode Indicates whether IGMP Snooping Querier is active on the
VLAN.
VLAN Operational
State
Indicates whether IGMP Snooping Querier is in the Querier or
Non-Querier state. When the switch is in Querier state it sends
out periodic general queries. When in Non-Querier state it
waits for moving to Querier state and does not send out any
queries.
VLAN Operational Indicates the time to wait before removing a Leave from a host
Max Response Time upon receiving a Leave request. This value is calculated
dynamically from the Queries received from the network. If the
Snooping Switch is in Querier state, then it is equal to the
configured value.
Querier Election
Participate
Indicates whether the IGMP Snooping Querier participates in
querier election if it discovers the presence of a querier in the
VLAN.
Last Querier
Address
Indicates the IP address of the most recent Querier from which
a Query was received.
Last Querier Version Indicates the IGMP version of the most recent Querier from
which a Query was received on this VLAN.
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
487
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 488 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Elected Querier
Indicates the IP address of the Querier that has been
designated as the Querier based on its source IP address. This
field will be 0.0.0.0 when Querier Election Participate mode is
disabled.
When the optional argument detail is used, the command shows the global
information and the information for all Querier enabled VLANs.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged Exec modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows querier information for VLAN 2.
console#show ip igmp snooping querier vlan 2
Vlan 2 :
IGMP Snooping querier status
---------------------------------------------IGMP Snooping Querier Vlan Mode.......... Enable
Querier Election Participate Mode........ Disable
Querier Vlan Address..................... 0.0.0.0
Operational State........................ Non-Querier
Last Querier Address..................... 2.2.2.2
Operational version.................... 3
Operational Max Resp Time.............. 11
488
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 489 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IP Addressing Commands
19
Interfaces on the PowerConnect switches support a variety of capabilities to
support management of the switch. In addition to performing switching and
routing of network traffic, PowerConnect switches act as a host for
management of the switch. Commands in this category allow the network
operator to configure the local host address, utilize the embedded DHCP
client to obtain an address, resolve names to addresses using DNS servers, and
detect address conflicts on the local subnet.
There are two management interface types on PowerConnect switches. Inband interfaces allow management of the switch through the network
switching/routing interfaces. Out-of-band management is always through the
dedicated service port. In-band management interfaces can employ a variety
of protection mechanisms including VLAN assignment and Management
ACLs. The out-of-band port does not support such protection mechanisms
and, therefore, it is recommended that the service port only be connected to a
physically segregated management network.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear host
ip host
clear ip address-conflict-detect
ip name-server
interface out-of-band
ipv6 address (Interface Config)
ip address (Out-of-Band)
ipv6 address dhcp
ip address-conflict-detect run
ipv6 enable (Interface Config)
ip address dhcp (Interface Config)
show hosts
ip default-gateway
show ip address-conflict
ip domain-lookup
show ip helper-address
ip domain-name
–
IP Addressing Commands
489
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 490 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clear host
Use the clear host command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete entries from
the host name-to-address cache.
Syntax
clear host {name | *}
•
name — Host name to be deleted from the host name-to-address cache.
(Range: 1-255 characters)
•
* — Deletes all entries in the host name-to-address cache.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example deletes all entries from the host name-to-address
cache.
console#clear host *
clear ip address-conflict-detect
Use the clear ip address-conflict-detect command in Privileged EXEC mode
to clear the address conflict detection status in the switch.
Syntax
clear ip address-conflict-detect
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
490
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 491 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#
console#configure
console(config)#clear ip address-conflict-detect
interface out-of-band
Use the interface out-of-band command to bring up the OOB port
configuration menu.
Syntax Description
interface out-of-band
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console(config)#interface out-of-band
IP Addressing Commands
491
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 492 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if)#
ip address (Out-of-Band)
Use the ip address command in Interface Configuration mode to set an IP
address for the service port. Use the no form of this command to return the ip
address configuration to its default value.
Syntax
ip address {ip-address {mask | prefix-length} | dhcp}
no ip address
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
Specifies a valid IP address.
mask
Specifies a valid subnet (network) mask IP address.
prefix-length
The number of bits that comprise the IP address prefix. The
prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash (/). (Range: 130 bits)
dhcp
Obtain the service port address via DHCPv4.
Default Configuration
The out-of-band interface (service port) obtains an IP address via DHCP by
default.
Command Mode
Interface (Out-of-Band) Configuration mode
492
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 493 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
When setting the netmask/prefix length on an IPv4 address, a space is
required between the address and the mask or prefix length. Setting an IP
address on the out-of-band port enables switch management over the service
port.
Example
The following examples configure the service port with IP address
131.108.1.27 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and the same IP address with
prefix length of 24 bits.
console(config)#interface out-of-band
console(config-if)#ip address 131.108.1.27
255.255.255.0
console(config-if)#ip address 131.108.1.27 /24
ip address-conflict-detect run
Use the ip address-conflict-detect run command in Global Configuration
mode to trigger the switch to run active address conflict detection by sending
gratuitous ARP packets for IPv4 addresses on the switch.
Syntax
ip address–conflict–detect run
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
IP Addressing Commands
493
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 494 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#
console#configure
console(config)#ip address-conflict-detect run
ip address dhcp (Interface Config)
Use the ip address dhcp command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
to enable the DHCPv4 client on an interface.
Syntax
ip address dhcp
no ip address dhcp
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
DHCPv4 is disabled by default on routing interfaces.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command only applies to routing interfaces. When DHCP is enabled on
a routing interface, the system automatically deletes all manually configured
IPv4 addresses on the interface.
•
494
The command no ip address dhcp removes the interface’s primary address
(Manual/DHCP) including the secondary addresses, if configured, and sets
the Interface method to None.
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 495 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
The command no ip address removes the interface’s primary address only
if configured through DHCP and sets the interface method to None. It
does not remove a manually configured address.
In addition to leasing an IP address and subnet mask, the DHCP client may
learn the following parameters from a DHCP server:
•
The IPv4 address of a default gateway. If the device learns different default
gateways on different interfaces, the system uses the first default gateway
learned. The system installs a default route in the routing table, with the
default gateway’s address as the next hop address. This default route has a
preference of 254.
•
The IPv4 address of a DNS server. The DNS client stores each DNS server
address in its server list.
•
A domain name. The DNS client stores each domain name in its domain
name list.
Examples
To enable DHCPv4 on vlan 2:
console#config
console(config)#interface vlan 2
console(config-if-vlan2)#ip address dhcp
ip default-gateway
Use the ip default-gateway command in Global Configuration mode to
configure a default gateway (router).
Syntax
ip default-gateway ip-address
no ip default-gateway ip-address
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
Valid IPv4 address of an attached router.
IP Addressing Commands
495
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 496 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
No default gateway is defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
When the system does not have a more specific route to a packet’s
destination, it sends the packet to the default gateway. The system installs a
default IPv4 route with the gateway address as the next hop address. The
route preference is 253. A default gateway configured with this command is
more preferred than a default gateway learned from a DHCP server, which has
a route preference of 254. It is less preferred than a static route configured via
the ip route command, which has a route preference of 1. Use the show ip
route command to display the active default gateway.
Only one default gateway can be configured. If you invoke this command
multiple times, each command replaces the previous value.
Example
The following example sets the default-gateway to 10.1.1.1.
console#config
console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.1.1.
ip domain-lookup
Use the ip domain-lookup command in Global Configuration mode to
enable IP Domain Naming System (DNS)-based host name-to-address
translation. To disable the DNS, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip domain-lookup
no ip domain-lookup
Default Configuration
DNS name resolution is enabled by default.
496
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 497 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables the IP Domain Naming System (DNS)-based
host name-to-address translation.
console(config)#ip domain-lookup
ip domain-name
Use the ip domain-name command in Global Configuration mode to define
a default domain name used to complete unqualified host names. To delete
the default domain name, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip domain-name name
no ip domain-name
•
name — Default domain name used to complete an unqualified host
name. Do not include the initial period that separates the unqualified host
name from the domain name (Range: 1-255 characters).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
IP Addressing Commands
497
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 498 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example defines a default domain name of dell.com.
console(config)#ip domain-name dell.com
ip host
Use the ip host command in Global Configuration mode to define static host
name-to-address mapping in the host cache. To delete the name-to-address
mapping, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip host name address
no ip host name
•
name — Host name.
•
address — IP address of the host.
Default Configuration
No host is defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines a static host name-to-address mapping in the
host cache.
console(config)#ip host accounting.dell.com
176.10.23.1
498
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 499 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip name-server
Use the ip name-server command in Global Configuration mode to define
available IPv4 or IPv6 name servers. To delete a name server, use the no form
of this command.
Syntax
ip name-server server-address1 [server-address2 … server-address8]
no ip name-server [server-address1 … server-address8]
•
server-address — Valid IPv4 or IPv6 addresses of the name server. (Range:
1–255 characters)
Default Configuration
No name server IP addresses are specified.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Server preference is determined by entry order.
Up to eight servers can be defined in one command or by using multiple
commands. Use the show hosts command on page 505 to display the
configured name servers.
Example
The following example sets the available name server.
console(config)#ip name-server 176.16.1.18
ipv6 address (Interface Config)
Use the ipv6 address command to set the IPv6 address of the management
interface. Use the no form of this command to reset the IPv6 address to the
default.
IP Addressing Commands
499
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 500 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 address { prefix/prefix-length [eui64] | autoconfig | dhcp }
no ipv6 address
•
prefix —Consists of the bits of the address to be configured.
•
prefix-length —Designates how many of the high-order contiguous bits of
the address make up the prefix.
•
eui64— The optional eui-64 field designates that IPv6 processing on the
interfaces is enabled using an EUI-64 interface ID in the low order 64 bits
of the address. If this option is used, the value of prefix_length must be 64
bits.
•
autoconfig—Use this keyword to set the IPv6 address auto configuration
mode.
•
dhcp—Use this keyword to obtain an IPv6 address via DHCP.
Default Configuration
There is no IPv6 address configured by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode (VLAN, loopback, port-channel)
User Guidelines
When setting the prefix length on an IPv6 address, no space can be present
between the address and the mask.
Example
Configure ipv6 routing on vlan 10 and obtain an address via DHCP. Assumes
vlan 10 already exists.
console(config)#ip routing
console(config)#interface vlan 10
console(config-if-vlan10)#ipv6 enable
console(config-if-vlan10)#ipv6 address dhcp
500
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 501 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Configure a default gateway on vlan 10
console(config)#no ipv6 address autoconfig
console(config)#no ipv6 address 2003::6/64
console(config)#no ipv6 address 2001::/64 eui64
console(config)#no ipv6 address
ipv6 address (OOB Port)
Use the ipv6 address command in Interface (out-of-band) Config mode to set
the IPv6 prefix on the out-of-band port. If the prefix is specified, the address
will be configured using the prefix and length A link local address in EUI-64
format may also be assigned.
The autoconfig parameter specifies that a link local address in the EUI-64
format is assigned to the interface.
The DHCP parameter indicates that the port should obtain its address va
DHCP.
Use the no form of the command to remove a specific address or to return the
address assignment to its default value. Using the no form of the command
with no parameters removes all IPv6 prefixes from the interface.
Syntax
ipv6 address { prefix/prefix-length [eui64] | autoconfig | dhcp }
no ipv6 address { prefix/prefix-length [eui64] | autoconfig | dhcp }
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
prefix
An IPv6 prefix in global format address format.
IP Addressing Commands
501
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 502 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
eui64
Formulate the prefix in EUI-64 format.
autoconfig
Perform IPv6 auto-configuration.
dhcp
Obtain the prefix via DHCP.
Default Configuration
No address is assigned to the out-of-band interface by default.
Command Mode
Interface (out-of-band) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
When DHCPv6 is enabled on the Out-of-Band interface, the system
automatically deletes all manually configured IPv6 addresses on the interface.
DHCPv6 can be enabled on the Out-of-Band interface only when IPv6 auto
configuration or DHCPv6 is not enabled on any of the in-band management
interfaces.
IPv6 auto configuration mode can be enabled in the Out-of-Band interface
only when IPv6 auto configuration or DHCPv6 is not enabled on any of the
in-band management interfaces.
ipv6 address dhcp
Use the ipv6 address dhcp command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration
mode to enable the DHCPv6 client on an IPv6 interface.
Syntax
ipv6 address dhcp
no ipv6 address dhcp
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
502
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 503 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
DHCPv6 is disabled by default on routing interfaces.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command only applies to VLAN routing interfaces. When DHCPv6 is
enabled on a VLAN routing interface, the system automatically deletes all
manually configured IPv6 addresses on the interface.
Use the no ipv6 address dhcp command to release a leased address and to
disable DHCPv6 on an interface. The command no ipv6 address does not
disable the DHCPv6 client on the interface.
This command will fail if DHCPv6 server has been configured on the
interface.
Examples
In the following example, DHCPv6 is enabled on interface vlan2.
console#config
console(config)#interface vlan2
console(config-if-vlan2)#ipv6 address dhcp
ipv6 enable (Interface Config)
Use the ipv6 enable command to enable IPv6 on a routing interface. Use the
"no" form of this command to reset the IPv6 configuration to the defaults.
Syntax
ipv6 enable
no ipv6 enable
IP Addressing Commands
503
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 504 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
IPv6 is not enabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode (VLAN, loopback)
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#no ipv6 enable
ipv6 enable (OOB Config)
Use the ipv6 enable command in Interface (out-of-band) Config mode to
enable IPv6 operation on the out-of-band interface. Prefixes configured by
the ipv6 adddress command are not configured until the interface is enabled.
Syntax
ipv6 enable
no ipv6 enable
Default Configuration
By default, IPv6 is not enabled on the out-of-band port.
Command Mode
Interface (out-of-band) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
504
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 505 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 gateway (OOB Config)
Use the ipv6 gateway command in Interface (out-of-band) Config mode to
configure the address of the IPv6 gateway. The gateway is used as a default
route for packets addressed to network devices not present on the local
subnet. Use the no form of the command to remove the gateway
configuration.
Syntax
ipv6 gateway ipv6-address
no ipv6 gateway
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ipv6-address
An IPv6 address (not a prefix).
Default Configuration
By default, no IPv6 gateway is configured.
Command Mode
Interface (out-of-band) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
show hosts
Use the show hosts command in User EXEC mode to display the default
domain name, a list of name server hosts, and the static and cached list of
host names and addresses. The command itself shows hosts [hostname].
•
Host name. (Range: 1–255 characters). The command allows spaces in the
host name when specified in double quotes. For example,
console(config)#snmp-server host "host name"
IP Addressing Commands
505
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 506 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information about IP hosts.
console>show hosts
Host name:
Default domain: gm.com, sales.gm.com, usa.sales.gm.com
Name/address lookup is enabled
Name servers (Preference order): 176.16.1.18 176.16.1.19
Configured host name-to-address mapping:
Host
Addresses
--------------------------
----------------------------
accounting.gm.com
176.16.8.8
Cache:
TTL (Hours)
Host
Total
Elapsed
Type
Addresses
----------------
-----
-------
-------
-------------
www.stanford.edu
72
3
IP
171.64.14.203
show ip address-conflict
Use the show ip address-conflict command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display the status information corresponding to the last
detected address conflict.
Syntax
show ip address-conflict
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
506
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 507 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
The command provides the following information.
Term
Description
Address Conflict
Detection Status
Whether the switch has detected an address conflict on any IP
address. Set to Conflict Detected if detected, No Conflict
Detected otherwise.
Last Conflicting IP
Address
The IP address that was last detected as conflicting on any
interface.
Last Conflicting
MAC Address
The MAC Address of the conflicting host that was last detected
on any interface.
Time Since Conflict The time in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the last
Detected
address conflict was detected.
Example
console#show ip address-conflict
Address Conflict Detection Status...Conflict Detected
Last Conflicting IP Address.........10.131.12.56
Last Conflicting MAC Address........00:01:02:04:5A:BC
Time Since Conflict Detected........5 days 2 hrs 6 mins 46 secs
console#show ip address-conflict
Address Conflict Detection Status..No Conflict Detected
IP Addressing Commands
507
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 508 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip helper-address
Use the show ip helper-address command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display IP helper addresses configuration.
Syntax
show ip helper-address [intf-address]
•
intf-address — IP address of a routing interface. (Range: Any valid IP
address)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ip helper-address
IP helper is enabled
Interface
Address
UDP Port
Discard
Hit Count
Server
-------------------- ----------- ---------- ---------- ----------------vlan 25
domain
No
0 192.168.40.2
vlan 25
dhcp
No
0 192.168.40.2
vlan 30
dhcp
Yes
vlan 30
162
No
0 192.168.23.1
dhcp
No
0 192.168.40.1
Any
508
IP Addressing Commands
0
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 509 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ipv6 dhcp interface out-of-band statistics
Use the show ipv6 dhcp interface out-of-band statistics command in
Privileged EXEC mode to display IPv6 DHCP statistics for the out-of-band
interface.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp interface out-of-band statistics
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ipv6 dhcp interface out-of-band
statistics
DHCPv6 Client Statistics
------------------------DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Received.......... 0
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Received.................. 0
Received DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Discard.. 0
Received DHCPv6 Reply Packets Discarded........ 0
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received.............. 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received.................. 0
DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Transmitted............. 8
IP Addressing Commands
509
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 510 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCPv6 Request Packets Transmitted............. 0
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Transmitted............... 0
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Transmitted.............. 0
DHCPv6 Release Packets Transmitted............. 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted............... 8
show ipv6 interface out-of-band
Use the show ipv6 interface out-of-band command in Privileged EXEC mode
to show the ipv6 out-of-band port configuration.
Syntax
show ipv6 interface out-of-band
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ipv6-address
An IPv6 address (not a prefix).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if)#do show ipv6 interface out-of-band
IPv6 Administrative Mode....................... Enabled
IPv6 Prefix is................................. FE80::21E:C9FF:FEAA:AD79/64
::/128
510
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 511 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IPv6 Default Router............................ FE80::A912:FEC2:A145:FEAD
Configured IPv6 Protocol....................... None
IPv6 AutoConfig Mode........................... Enabled
Burned In MAC Address.......................... 001E.C9AA.AD79
IP Addressing Commands
511
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 512 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
512
IP Addressing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 513 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IPv6 Access List Commands
20
Access to a switch or router can be made more secure through the use of
Access Control Lists (ACLs) to control the type of traffic allowed into or out
of specific ports. An ACL consists of a series of rules, each of which describes
the type of traffic to be processed and the actions to take for packets that
meet the classification criteria. Rules within an ACL are evaluated
sequentially until a match is found, if any. Every ACL is terminated by an
implicit deny all rule, which covers any packet not matching a preceding
explicit rule. ACLs can help to ensure that only authorized users have access
to specific resources while blocking out any unwarranted attempts to reach
network resources.
ACLs may be used to restrict contents of routing updates, decide which types
of traffic are forwarded or blocked and, above all, provide security for the
network. ACLs are normally used in firewall routers that are positioned
between the internal network and an external network, such as the Internet.
They can also be used on a router positioned between two parts of the
network to control the traffic entering or exiting a specific part of the internal
network.
The PowerConnect ACL feature allows classification of packets based upon
Layer 2 through Layer 4 header information. An Ethernet IPv6 packet is
distinguished from an IPv4 packet by its unique Ethertype value; thus all IPv6
classifiers include the Ethertype field.
Multiple ACLs per interface are supported. The ACLs can be combination of
Layer 2 and/or Layer 3/4 ACLs. ACL assignment is appropriate for both
physical ports and LAGs. ACLs can also be time based.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
{deny | permit} (IPv6 ACL)
ipv6 traffic-filter
ipv6 access-list
show ipv6 access-lists
ipv6 access-list rename
IPv6 Access List Commands
513
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 514 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
{
deny | permit} (IPv6 ACL)
This command creates a new rule for the current IPv6 access list. Each rule is
appended to the list of configured rules for the list.
A rule may either deny or permit traffic according to the specified
classification fields. At a minimum, either the every keyword or the protocol,
source address, and destination address values must be specified. The source
and destination IPv6 address fields may be specified using the keyword any to
indicate a match on any value in that field. The remaining command
parameters are all optional, but the most frequently used parameters appear
in the same relative order as shown in the command format.
The assign-queue parameter allows specification of a particular hardware
queue for handling traffic that matches this rule. The assign-queue parameter
is valid only for a permit rule.
The command is enhanced to accept the optional time-range parameter. The
time-range parameter allows imposing a time limitation on the IPv6 ACL rule
as defined by the parameter time-range-name. If a time range with the
specified name does not exist, and the IPv6 ACL containing this ACL rule is
applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then the ACL rule is applied
immediately. If a time range with the specified name exists, and the IPv6
ACL containing this ACL rule is applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN,
then the ACL rule is applied when the time-range with a specified name
becomes active. The ACL rule is removed when the time-range with a
specified name becomes inactive.
Syntax
{deny | permit} {every | {{icmpv6 | ipv6 | tcp | udp | protocolnumber}
{any | sourceipv6prefix/prefixlength} [eq {portnumber | portkey}] {any |
destinationipv6prefix/prefixlength}] [eq {portnumber | portkey}] [flowlabel flow-label-value] [dscp dscp-value]} [assign-queue queue-id] [log]
[{mirror | redirect} interface-id] [time-range time-range-name]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
deny | permit
Specifies whether the IP ACL rule permits or denies an action.
514
IPv6 Access List Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 515 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
every
Allows all protocols.
icmpv6 | ipv6 | tcp Protocol to match, specified as keywords icmp, igmp, ipv6, tcp,
| udp |
udp or as a standard protocol number from 1–255.
protocolnumber
any | sourceipv6
prefix/
prefixlength
any matches any source IP address. Or, you can specify a source
IPv6 addressed expressed as a prefix/prefixlength.
eq {portnumber |
portkey}
eq matches a port number being used as a match criteria. The
first reference provides the source match criteria and the
second provides destination match criteria.
The portnumber variable must be in the range 0–65535.
Or you can specify one of the values as the portkey: domain,
echo, efts, ftpdata, http, smtp, snmp, telnet, tftp, and www.
any |
destinationipv6
prefix/
prefixlength
any matches any source IP address. Or, you can specify a source
IPv6 addressed expressed as a prefix/prefixlength.
flow label flow-label- The value to match in the Flow Label field of the IPv6 header
value
(Range 0–1048575).
dscp dscp-value
Specifies the TOS for an IPv6 ACL rule depending on a match
of DSCP values using the parameter dscp.
assign-queue queue- Specifies particular hardware queue for handling traffic that
id
matches the rule. (Range: 0-6)
log
Specifies that this rule is to be logged.
mirror interface
Allows the traffic matching this rule to be copied to the
specified interface.
redirect interface
This parameter allows the traffic matching this rule to be
forwarded to the specified interface.
time-range-name
Use the time-range parameter to impose a time limitation on
the IPv6 ACL rule as defined by the parameter time-rangename.
IPv6 Access List Commands
515
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 516 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
IPv6-Access-List Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Users are permitted to add rules, but if a packet does not match any userspecified rules, the packet is dropped by the implicit “deny all” rule.
The 'no' form of this command is not supported, since the rules within an
IPv6 ACL cannot be deleted individually. Rather, the entire IPv6 ACL must
be deleted and re specified.
Example
The following example creates rules in an IPv6 ACL named "STOP_HTTP"
to discard any HTTP traffic from the 2001:DB8::/32 network, but allow all
other traffic from that network:
console(config)#ipv6 access-list STOP_HTTP
console(Config-ipv6-acl)#deny ipv6 2001:DB8::/32 any
eq http
console(Config-ipv6-acl)#permit ipv6 2001:DB8::/32
any
console(Config-ipv6-acl)#
ipv6 access-list
The ipv6 access-list command creates an IPv6 Access Control List (ACL)
consisting of classification fields defined for the IP header of an IPv6 frame.
The name parameter is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31
characters uniquely identifying the IPv6 access list.
If an IPv6 ACL with this name already exists, this command enters Ipv6Access-List config mode to update the existing IPv6 ACL.
Use the no form of the command to delete an IPv6 ACL from the system.
516
IPv6 Access List Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 517 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 access-list name
no ipv6 access-list name
•
name — Alphanumeric string of 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying
the IPv6 access list.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command
Example
The following example creates an IPv6 ACL named "DELL_IP6" and enters
the IPv6-Access-List Config mode:
console(config)#ipv6 access-list DELL_IP6
console(Config-ipv6-acl)#
ipv6 access-list rename
The ipv6 access-list rename command changes the name of an IPv6 Access
Control List (ACL). This command fails if an IPv6 ACL with the new name
already exists.
Syntax
ipv6 access-list rename name newname
•
name — the name of an existing IPv6 ACL.
•
newname — alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely
identifying the IPv6 access list.
IPv6 Access List Commands
517
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 518 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(Config)#ipv6 access-list rename DELL_IP6
DELL_IP6_NEW_NAME
ipv6 traffic-filter
The ipv6 traffic-filter command either attaches a specific IPv6 Access
Control List (ACL) to an interface or associates it with a VLAN ID in a given
direction.
An optional sequence number may be specified to indicate the order of this
access list relative to other IPv6 access lists already assigned to this interface
and direction. A lower number indicates higher precedence order. If a
sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction, the
specified IPv6 access list replaces the currently attached IPv6 access list using
that sequence number. If the sequence number is not specified for this
command, a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence
number currently in use for this interface and direction is used.
Use the “no” form of the command to remove an IPv6 ACL from the
interface(s) in a given direction.
Syntax
ipv6 traffic-filter name direction [sequence seq-num]
no ipv6 traffic-filter name direction
518
•
name — Alphanumeric string of 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying
the IPv6 access list.
•
direction — Direction of the ACL. (Range: in or out)
IPv6 Access List Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 519 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
sequence seq-num — Order of access list relative to other access lists
already assigned to this interface and direction. (Range: 1–4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Modes
Global Configuration mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-channel, VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command specified in 'Interface Config' mode only affects a single
interface, whereas the 'Global Config' mode setting is applied to all interfaces.
Example
The following example attaches an IPv6 access control list to an interface.
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ipv6 traffic-filter DELL_IP6
in
show ipv6 access-lists
Use the show ipv6 access-lists command in User EXEC and Privileged EXEC
mode to display an IPv6 access list and all of the rules that are defined for the
IPv6 ACL. Use the [name] parameter to identify a specific IPv6 ACL to
display.
Syntax
show ipv6 access-lists [name]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
name
The name used to identify the IPv6 ACL.
Time Range Name
Displays the name of the time-range if the IPv6 ACL rule has
referenced a time range.
IPv6 Access List Commands
519
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 520 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Rule Status
Status (Active/Inactive) of the IPv6 ACL rule.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays configuration information for the IPv6 ACLs.
console#show ipv6 access-lists
Current number of all ACLs: 1
IPv6 ACL Name
VLAN(s)
Maximum number of all ACLs: 100
Rules Direction
Interface(s)
------------------------------- ----- --------- -------------------- -----------STOP_HTTP
2
inbound
1/0/1
console#show ipv6 access-lists STOP_HTTP
ACL Name: STOP_HTTP
Inbound Interface(s): 1/0/1
Rule Number: 1
Action......................................... deny
Protocol....................................... 255(ipv6)
Source IP Address.............................. 2001:DB8::/32
Destination L4 Port Keyword.................... 80(www/http)
Rule Number: 2
520
IPv6 Access List Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 521 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Action......................................... permit
Protocol....................................... 255(ipv6)
Source IP Address.............................. 2001:DB8::/32
The command output provides the following information:
Field
Description
Rule Number The ordered rule number identifier defined within the IPv6 ACL.
Action
Displays the action associated with each rule. The possible values are
Permit or Deny.
Match All
Indicates whether this access list applies to every packet. Possible
values are True or False.
Protocol
This displays the protocol to filter for this rule.
Source IP
Address
This displays the source IP address for this rule.
Source L4
This field displays the source port for this rule.
Port Keyword
Destination
IP Address
This displays the destination IP address for this rule.
Destination
L4 Port
Keyword
This field displays the destination port for this rule.
IP DSCP
This field indicates the value specified for IP DSCP.
Flow Label
This field indicates the value specified for IPv6 Flow Label.
Log
Displays when you enable logging for the rule.
Assign Queue Displays the queue identifier to which packets matching this rule are
assigned.
Mirror
Interface
Displays the interface to which packets matching this rule are copied.
Redirect
Interface
Displays the interface to which packets matching this rule are
forwarded.
IPv6 Access List Commands
521
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 522 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
522
IPv6 Access List Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 523 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
21
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
In IPv6, Multicast Listener Discover (MLD) snooping performs functions
similar to IGMP snooping in IPv4. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data
is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead
of being flooded to all ports in a VLAN. This list is constructed by snooping
IPv6 multicast control packets.
MLD is a protocol used by IPv6 multicast routers to discover the presence of
multicast listeners (nodes wishing to receive IPv6 multicast packets) on its
directly-attached links and to discover which multicast packets are of interest
to neighboring nodes. MLD is derived from IGMP. MLD version 1 (MLDv1)
is equivalent to IGMPv2. MLD version 2 (MLDv2) is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD is a subprotocol of Internet Control Message Protocol version 6
(ICMPv6), and MLD messages are a subset of ICMPv6 messages, identified
in IPv6 packets by a preceding Next Header value of 58.
PowerConnect switches can snoop on both MLDv1 and MLDv2 protocol
packets and bridge IPv6 multicast data based on destination IPv6 Multicast
MAC Addresses. The switch can be configured to perform MLD Snooping
and IGMP Snooping simultaneously. The PowerConnect implementation is
compliant to RFC 4541.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
ipv6 mld snooping (Interface)
ipv6 mld snooping groupmembershipinterval
ipv6 mld snooping (VLAN)
ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse
show ipv6 mld snooping
ipv6 mld snooping mcrtexpiretime
show ipv6 mld snooping groups
ipv6 mld snooping (Global)
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
523
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 524 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
The ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command enables or disables MLD
Snooping snooping immediate-leave admin mode on a selected interface or
VLAN. Enabling fast-leave allows the switch to immediately remove the layer
2 LAN interface from its forwarding table entry upon receiving an MLD done
message for that multicast group without first sending out MAC-based
general queries to the interface. You should enable fast-leave admin mode
only on VLANs where only one host is connected to each layer 2 LAN port.
This prevents the inadvertent dropping of the other hosts that were
connected to the same layer 2 LAN port but were still interested in receiving
multicast traffic directed to that group. Also, fast-leave processing is
supported only with MLD version 1 hosts.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave [vlan-id]
no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave [vlan-id]
•
vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value in VLAN Database mode.
Default Configuration
MLD Snooping fast-leave mode is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode.
VLAN Database Mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-vlan)#ipv6 mld snooping immediateleave 4
524
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 525 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 mld snooping groupmembership-interval
The ipv6 mld snooping groupmembership-interval command sets the MLD
Group Membership Interval time on a VLAN or interface. The Group
Membership Interval time is the amount of time in seconds that a switch
waits for a report from a particular group on a particular interface before
deleting the interface from the entry. This value must be greater than the
MLDv2 Maximum Response time value. The range is 2 to 3600 seconds.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping groupmembership-interval [vlan-id] [seconds]
no ipv6 mld snooping groupmembership-interval [vlan-id]
•
vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value in VLAN Database mode.
•
seconds — MLD group membership interval time in seconds. (Range: 23600)
Default Configuration
The default group membership interval time is 260 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode.
VLAN Database mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-4/0/1)#ipv6 mld snooping
groupmembership-interval 300
ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse
The ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse command sets the MLD Maximum
Response time for an interface or VLAN. The Maximum Response time is the
amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait after sending a query on an
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
525
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 526 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group in that
interface. This value must be less than the MLD Query Interval time value.
The range is 1 to 3599 seconds.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse [vlan-id] [seconds]
no ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse [vlan-id]
•
vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value in VLAN Database mode.
•
seconds — MLD maximum response time in seconds. (Range: 1–3599)
Default Configuration
The default maximum response time is 10 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode.
VLAN Database mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-4/0/1)#ipv6 mld snooping
maxresponse 33
ipv6 mld snooping mcrtexpiretime
The ipv6 mld snooping mcrtexpiretime command sets the Multicast Router
Present Expiration time. The time is set for a particular interface or VLAN.
This is the amount of time in seconds that a switch waits for a query to be
received on an interface before the interface is removed from the list of
interfaces with multicast routers attached. The range is 1 to 3600 seconds.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping mcrtexpiretime [vlan-id] [seconds]
526
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 527 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no ipv6 mld snooping mcrtexpiretime [vlan-id]
•
•
vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value in VLAN Database mode.
seconds — multicast router present expiration time in seconds. (Range:
1–3600)
Default Configuration
The default multicast router present expiration time is 300 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode.
VLAN Database mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines
Example
console(config-if-4/0/1)#ipv6 mld snooping
mcrtrexpiretime 60
ipv6 mld snooping (Global)
The ipv6 mld snooping (Global) command enables MLD Snooping on the
system (Global Config Mode).
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping
no ipv6 mld snooping
Default Configuration
MLD Snooping is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
527
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 528 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping
ipv6 mld snooping (Interface)
The ipv6 mld snooping (Interface) command enables MLD Snooping on an
interface. If an interface has MLD Snooping enabled and it becomes a
member of a port-channel (LAG), MLD Snooping functionality is disabled
on that interface. MLD Snooping functionality is re-enabled if the interface is
removed from a port-channel (LAG).
528
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 529 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping
no ipv6 mld snooping
Default Configuration
MLD Snooping is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-4/0/1)#ipv6 mld snooping
ipv6 mld snooping (VLAN)
The ipv6 mld snooping (VLAN) command enables MLD Snooping on a
particular VLAN and enables MLD snooping on all interfaces participating in
a VLAN.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-id
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-id
•
vlan-id — Specifies a VLAN ID value.
Default Configuration
MLD Snooping is disabled.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode.
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
529
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 530 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-vlan)#ipv6 mld snooping 1
show ipv6 mld snooping
The show ipv6 mld snooping command displays MLD Snooping
information. Configured information is displayed whether or not MLD
Snooping is enabled.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping [interface {{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | portchannel port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}} | vlan
vlan-id}]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
With no optional arguments, the command displays the following
information:
530
•
Admin Mode — Indicates whether or not MLD Snooping is active on the
switch.
•
Interfaces Enabled for MLD Snooping — Interfaces on which MLD
Snooping is enabled.
•
MLD Control Frame Count — This displays the number of MLD control
frames that are processed by the CPU.
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 531 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
VLANs Enabled for MLD Snooping — VLANs on which MLD Snooping is
enabled.
When you specify an interface or VLAN, the following information displays:
•
MLD Snooping Admin Mode — Indicates whether MLD Snooping is
active on the interface or VLAN.
•
Fast Leave Mode — Indicates whether MLD Snooping Fast-leave is active
on the VLAN.
•
Group Membership Interval — Shows the amount of time in seconds that
a switch will wait for a report from a particular group on a particular
interface, which is participating in the VLAN, before deleting the interface
from the entry. This value may be configured.
•
Max Response Time — Displays the amount of time the switch waits after
it sends a query on an interface, participating in the VLAN, because it did
not receive a report for a particular group on that interface. This value may
be configured.
•
Multicast Router Present Expiration Time — Displays the amount of time
to wait before removing an interface that is participating in the VLAN
from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached. The interface is
removed if a query is not received. This value may be configured.
show ipv6 mld snooping groups
The show ipv6 mld snooping groups command displays the MLD Snooping
entries in the MFDB table.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping groups [{vlan vlan-id | address ipv6-multicast-
address}]
•
vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value.
•
ipv6-multicast-address — Specifies an IPv6 Multicast address.
Default configuration
This command has no default configuration.
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
531
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 532 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
To see the full Multicast address table (including static addresses) use the
show bridge address-table command.
Example
console#show ipv6 mld snooping groups
Vlan
Ipv6 Address
Type
Ports
----
-----------------------
-------
---------------------------
1
3333.0000.0003
Dynamic
1/0/1,1/0/3
2
3333.0000.0004
Dynamic
1/0/1,1/0/3
2
3333.0000.0005
Dynamic
1/0/1,1/0/3
MLD Reporters that are forbidden statically:
---------------------------------------------
Vlan
----
Ipv6 Address
-----------------------
Ports
------------------------------------
console#show ipv6 mld snooping groups vlan 2
Vlan
Ipv6 Address
Type
Ports
----
-----------------------
-------
---------------------------
2
3333.0000.0004
Dynamic
1/0/1,1/0/3
2
3333.0000.0005
Dynamic
1/0/1,1/0/3
532
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 533 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
MLD Reporters that are forbidden statically:
---------------------------------------------
Vlan
----
Ipv6 Address
-----------------------
Ports
------------------------------------
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
533
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 534 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
534
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 535 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier
Commands
22
IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier is an extension of the IGMP/MLD Snooping
feature. IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier allows the switch to simulate an
IGMP/MLD router in a Layer 2-only network, thus removing the need to have
an IGMP/MLD Router to collect the multicast group membership
information. The querier function simulates a small subset of the
IGMP/MLD router functionality.
In a network with IP multicast routing, the IP multicast router acts as the
IGMP/MLD querier. However, if it is required that the IP-multicast traffic in
a VLAN be switched, the switch can be configured as an IGMP/MLD querier.
When IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier is enabled, the Querier sends out
periodic IGMP/MLD General Queries that trigger the Multicast
listeners/member to send their joins so as to receive the Multicast data traffic.
IGMP/MLD Snooping listens to these reports to establish the appropriate
forwarding table entries.
PowerConnect switches support IGMP V1 and 2 for snooping IGMP queries.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ipv6 mld snooping querier
ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval
ipv6 mld snooping querier (VLAN mode) ipv6 mld snooping querier timer expiry
ipv6 mld snooping querier address
show ipv6 mld snooping querier
ipv6 mld snooping querier election
participate
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands
535
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 536 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 mld snooping querier
Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier command to enable MLD Snooping
Querier on the system. Use the "no" form of this command to disable MLD
Snooping Querier.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping querier
no ipv6 mld snooping querier
Default Configuration
MLD Snooping Querier is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier
ipv6 mld snooping querier (VLAN mode)
Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier command in VLAN mode to enable MLD
Snooping Querier on a VLAN. Use the "no" form of this command to disable
MLD Snooping Querier on a VLAN.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan-id
no ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan-id
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID. (Range: 1–4093)
Default Configuration
MLD Snooping Querier is disabled by default on all VLANs.
536
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 537 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-vlan)#ipv6 mld snooping querier 10
ipv6 mld snooping querier address
Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier address command to set the global MLD
Snooping Querier address. Use the "no" form of this command to reset the
global MLD Snooping Querier address to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping querier address prefix[/prefix-length]
no ipv6 mld snooping querier address
•
prefix — The bits of the address to be configured.
•
prefix-length — Designates how many of the high-order contiguous bits of
the address make up the prefix.
Default Configuration
There is no global MLD Snooping Querier address configured by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier address
Fe80::5
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands
537
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 538 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 mld snooping querier election participate
Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier election participate command to enable
the Snooping Querier to participate in the Querier Election process when it
discovers the presence of another Querier in the VLAN. When this mode is
enabled, if the Snooping Querier finds that the other Querier's source address
is higher than the Snooping Querier's address, it stops sending periodic
queries. If the Snooping Querier wins the election then it will continue
sending periodic queries. Use the "no" form of this command to disable
election participation on a VLAN.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping querier election participate vlan-id
no ipv6 mld snooping querier election participate vlan-id
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID. (Range: 1 - 4093)
Default Configuration
Election participation is disabled by default.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-vlan)#ipv6 mld snooping querier
election participate 10
ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval
Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval command to set the MLD
Querier Query Interval time. It is the amount of time in seconds that the
switch waits before sending another general query. Use the "no" form of this
command to reset the Query Interval to the default.
538
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 539 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval interval
ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval
•
interval — Amount of time that the switch waits before sending another
general query. (Range: 1–1800 seconds)
Default Configuration
The default query interval is 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command
Example
console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier 120
ipv6 mld snooping querier timer expiry
Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier timer expiry command to set the MLD
Querier timer expiration period. It is the time period that the switch remains
in Non-Querier mode once it has discovered that there is a Multicast Querier
in the network. Use the "no" form of this command to reset the timer
expiration period to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping querier timer expiry timer
ipv6 mld snooping querier timer expiry
•
timer — The time that the switch remains in Non-Querier mode after it
has discovered that there is a multicast querier in the network. (Range:
60–300 seconds)
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands
539
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 540 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default timer expiration period is 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier timer
expiry 222
show ipv6 mld snooping querier
Use the show ipv6 mld snooping querier command to display MLD
Snooping Querier information. Configured information is displayed whether
or not MLD Snooping Querier is enabled.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping querier [detail | vlan vlan-id ]
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID. (Range: 1 - 4093)
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
When the optional argument vlan vlan-id is not used, the command shows
the following information:
Parameter
540
Description
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 541 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
MLD Snooping Querier
Mode
Indicates whether or not MLD Snooping Querier is
active on the switch.
Querier Address
Shows the IP Address which will be used in the IPv6
header while sending out MLD queries.
MLD Version
Indicates the version of MLD that will be used while
sending out the queries. This is defaulted to MLD v1
and it can not be changed.
Querier Query Interval
Shows the amount of time that a Snooping Querier
waits before sending out a periodic general query.
Querier Expiry Interval
Displays the amount of time to wait in the Non-Querier
operational state before moving to a Querier state.
When the optional argument vlan vlan-id is used, the following additional
information appears:
Parameter
Description
MLD Snooping Querier
VLAN Mode
Indicates whether MLD Snooping Querier is active on
the VLAN.
Querier Election
Participate Mode
Indicates whether the MLD Snooping Querier
participates in querier election if it discovers the
presence of a querier in the VLAN.
Querier VLAN Address
Shows the IP Address which will be used in the IPv6
header while sending out MLD queries.
Operational State
Indicates whether MLD Snooping Querier is in
"Querier" or "Non-Querier" state. When the switch is in
Querier state it will send out periodic general queries.
When in Non-Querier state it will wait for moving to
Querier state and does not send out any queries.
Operational Version
Indicates the version of MLD that will be used while
sending out the queries. This is defaulted to MLD v1
and it can not be changed.
When the optional argument detail is used, the command shows the global
information and the information for all Querier enabled VLANs as well as the
following information:
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands
541
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 542 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Last Querier Address
Indicates the IP address of the most recent Querier from
which a Query was received.
MLD Version
Indicates the version of MLD.
542
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 543 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IP Source Guard Commands
23
IP Source Guard (IPSG) is a security feature that filters IP packets based on
source ID. The source ID may either be source IP address or a {source IP
address, source MAC address} pair. The network administrator configures
whether enforcement includes the source MAC address. The network
administrator can configure static authorized source IDs. The DHCP
Snooping binding database and static IPSG entries identify authorized source
IDs. IPSG may be enabled on physical and LAG ports. IPSG is disabled by
default.
If the network administrator enables IPSG on a port where DHCP snooping is
disabled or where DHCP snooping is enabled but the port is trusted, all IP
traffic received on that port is dropped depending upon the adminconfigured IPSG entries. IPSG cannot be enabled on a port-based routing
interface.
IPSG uses two enforcement mechanisms: the L2FDB to enforce the source
MAC address and ingress VLAN and an ingress classifier to enforce the source
IP address or {source IP, source MAC} pair.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip verify source
show ip verify interface
ip verify source port-security
show ip verify source interface
ip verify binding
show ip source binding
ip verify source
Use the ip verify source command in Interface Configuration mode to enable
filtering of IP packets matching the source IP address.
IP Source Guard Commands
543
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 544 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip verify source
Default Configuration
By default, IPSG is disabled on all interfaces.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#ip verify source
ip verify source port-security
Use the ip verify source port-security command in Interface Configuration
mode to enable filtering of IP packets matching the source IP address and the
source MAC address.
Syntax
ip verify source port-security
Default Configuration
By default, IPSG is disabled on all interfaces.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
544
IP Source Guard Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 545 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip verify source portsecurity
ip verify binding
Use the ip verify binding command in Global Configuration mode to
configure static bindings. Use the no form of the command to remove the
IPSG entry.
Syntax
ip verify binding macaddr vlan ipaddr interface
Default Configuration
By default, there will not be any static bindings configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#ip verify binding 00:11:22:33:44:55
vlan 1 1.2.3.4 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
show ip verify interface
Use the show ip verify interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the IPSG interface configuration.
Syntax
show ip verify interface
IP Source Guard Commands
545
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 546 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ip verify interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
show ip verify source interface
Use the show ip verify source interface command in Privileged EXEC mode
to display the bindings configured on a particular interface.
Syntax
show ip verify source interface
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ip verify source interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
show ip source binding
Use the show ip source binding command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display all bindings (static and dynamic).
546
IP Source Guard Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 547 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ip source binding
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ip source binding
IP Source Guard Commands
547
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 548 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
548
IP Source Guard Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 549 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
24
iSCSI Optimization Commands
NOTE: The iSCSI commands are only supported on the PCM6348, PCM8024, and
PCM8024-k switches. The commands will have different capabilties depending on
the switch. CLI commands and Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator pages are
not available for other switch models.
iSCSI Optimization provides a means of performing configuration specific to
storage traffic and optionally giving traffic between iSCSI initiator and target
systems special Quality of Service (QoS) treatment.
iSCSI Optimization is best applied to mixed-traffic networks where iSCSI
packets constitutes a portion of overall traffic. In these cases, the assignment
of iSCSI packets to non-default CoS queues can provide flows with lower
latency and avoid queue resource contention.
If iSCSI frames comprise most of the traffic passing through the switch, the
system provides optimal throughput when all traffic is assigned to the default
queue. An example of this situation is a Storage Area Network (SAN) where
the switch is dedicated to interconnecting iSCSI Targets with Initiators.
Using the default queue for this homogenous traffic provides the best
performance in traffic burst handling and the most accurate 802.3x Flow
Control Pause Frame generation. In these cases, the application of QoS
treatment other than the default policy may result in less overall throughput
or more packet loss.
By default, iSCSI optimization is enabled and iSCSI QoS treatment is
disabled.
LLDP is used to detect the presence of EqualLogic storage arrays. When
iSCSI optimization is enabled, and LLDP detects an EQL array on a port,
that port configuration is changed to enable portfast and disable unicast
storm control. Configuration changes appear in the running config and are
not removed by disabling the feature or disconnecting the EQl array.
iSCSI Optimization Commands
549
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 550 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
QoS treatment is accomplished by monitoring traffic to detect packets used
by iSCSI stations to establish iSCSI sessions and connections. Data from
these exchanges is used to create classification rules that assign the traffic
between the stations to a configured traffic class. Packets in the flow are
queued and scheduled for egress on the destination port based on these rules.
In addition, if configured, the packets can be updated with IEEE 802.1p or
IP-DSCP values. This is done by enabling remark. Remarking packets with
priority data provides special QoS treatment as the packets continue through
the network.
iSCSI Optimization borrows ACL lists from the global system pool. ACL lists
allocated by iSCSI Optimization reduce the total number of ACLs available
for use by the network operator. Enabling iSCSI Optimization uses one ACL
list to monitor for iSCSI sessions. Each monitored iSCSI session utilizes two
rules from additional ACL lists up to a maximum of two ACL lists. This
means that the maximum number of ACL lists allocated by iSCSI is three.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
iscsi aging time
iscsi target port
iscsi cos
show iscsi
iscsi enable
show iscsi sessions
iscsi aging time
The iscsi aging time command sets the time out value for iSCSI sessions. To
reset the aging time to the default value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
iscsi aging time time
no iscsi aging time
•
550
time — The number of minutes a session must not be active prior to it's
removal. (Range: 1 43,200)
iSCSI Optimization Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 551 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default aging time is 10 minutes.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
Changing the aging time has the following behavior:
•
When aging time is increased, current sessions will be timed out according
to the new value.
•
When aging time is decreased, any sessions that have been dormant for a
time exceeding the new setting will be immediately deleted from the table.
All other sessions will continue to be monitored against the new time out
value.
Example
The following example sets the aging time for iSCSI sessions to 100 minutes.
console(config)#iscsi aging time 100
iscsi cos
The iscsi cos vpt command is supported on the PCM8024-k. The iscsi cost
vpt command is not supported on the PCM6348.
Use the iscsi cos command in Global Configuration mode to set the quality
of service profile that will be applied to iSCSI flows. To return the VPT/DSCP
setting to the default value, use the no form of this command. VPT/DSCP
values can be configured independently from the application of QoS
treatment.
Syntax
iscsi cos {enable | disable | vpt vpt | dscp dscp} [remark]
no iscsi cos
iSCSI Optimization Commands
551
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 552 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
enable
Enables application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI
frames.
disable
Disables application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI
frames.
vpt/dscp
The VLAN Priority Tag or DSCP value to assign received iSCSI
session packets.
remark
Mark the iSCSI frames with the configured DSCP when
egressing the switch.
Default Configuration
By default, frames are not remarked. The default vpt setting for iSCSI is 4,
which the default classofservice dot1p mapping assigns to queue 2.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
The remark option only applies to DSCP values. Remarking is not available
for vpt values.
By default, iSCSI flows are assigned to the highest VPT/DSCP value that is
mapped to the highest queue not used for stack management or the voice
VLAN. Make sure you configure the relevant Class of Service parameters for
the queue in order to complete the setting.
Configuring the VPT/DSCP value sets the QoS profile which selects the
egress queue to which the frame is mapped. The default setting for egress
queues scheduling is Weighted Round Robin (WRR).
You may alter the QoS setting by configuring the relevant ports to work in
other scheduling and queue management modes via the Class of Service
settings. These choices may include strict priority for the queue used for
iSCSI traffic. The downside of strict priority is that, in certain circumstances
552
iSCSI Optimization Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 553 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
(under heavy high priority traffic), other lower priority traffic may get starved.
In WRR the queue to which the flow is assigned to can be set to get the
required percentage.
If an EqualLogic array is detected when QoS is enabled, two additional TCP
ports receive preferential QoS treatment (TCP ports 25555 and 9876). This
QoS policy is applied globally.
Example
The following example configures iSCSI packets to receive CoS treatment
using DiffServ Code Point AF 41 and configures remarking of transmitted
iSCSI packets.
console(config)#iscsi cos dscp 10 remark
iscsi enable
The iscsi enable command globally enables iSCSI optimization. To disable
iSCSI optimization, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
iscsi enable
no iscsi enable
Default Configuration
iSCSI is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command modifies the running config to enable flow control on all
interfaces.
Monitoring for EqualLogic Storage arrays via LLDP is also enabled by this
command. Upon detection of an EQL array, the specific interface involved
will have spanning-tree portfast enabled and unicast storm control disabled.
iSCSI Optimization Commands
553
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 554 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
These changes appear in the running config. Disabling iSCSI Optimization
does not disable flow control, portfast or storm control configuration applied
as a result of enabling iSCSI Optimization.
Enabling iSCSI will enable the sending of the DCBX Application Priority
TLV to a port with the following parameters when the following conditions
are met:
•
DCBX is enabled
•
CoS Queuing is enabled on the port using VPT
The Application Priority TLV sent will contain the following information in
addition to any other information contained in the TLV:
AE Selector = 1
AE Protocol = 3260
AE Priority = priority configured for iSCSI PFC (the VPT value above)
Example
In the following example, iSCSI is globally enabled.
console(config)#iscsi enable
iscsi target port
Use the iscsi target port command in Global Configuration mode to
configure iSCSI port(s), target addresses and names. To delete iSCSI port(s)
or target ports, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2.… tcp-port-16 [address ip-address]
[name targetname]
no iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2.… tcp-port-16 [address ip-address]
554
iSCSI Optimization Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 555 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
tcp-port
TCP port number or list of TCP port numbers on which iSCSI
target(s) listen to requests. Up to 16 TCP ports can be defined
in the system in one command or by using multiple commands.
ip-address
IP address of the iSCSI target. When the no form is used, and
the tcp port to be deleted is one bound to a specific IP address,
the address field must be present.
targetname
iSCSI name of the iSCSI target. The name can be statically
configured; however, it can be obtained from iSNS or from
sendTargets response. The initiator MUST present both its
iSCSI Initiator Name and the iSCSI Target Name to which it
wishes to connect in the first login request of a new session or
connection. The target name can consist of any printable
character except for an exclamation point or a double quote as
the first character. A question mark may not appear anywhere in
the target name. The name can contain embedded blanks if
enclosed in double quotes.
Default Configuration
iSCSI well-known ports 3260 and 860 are configured by default but can be
removed as any other configured target.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
•
When working with private iSCSI ports (not IANA assigned iSCSI ports
3260/860), it is recommended to specify the target IP address as well, so
the switch will only snoop frames with which the TCP destination port is
one of the configured TCP ports, AND their destination IP is the target's
IP address. This way the CPU is not be falsely loaded by non-iSCSI flows
(if by chance other applications also choose to use these {un-reserved}
ports).
iSCSI Optimization Commands
555
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 556 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
When a port is already defined and not bound to an IP address, and you
want to bind the port to an IP address, first remove the port by using the
no form of the command and then add it again, this time together with
the relevant IP address.
•
Target names are only for display when using the show iscsi command.
These names are not used to match (or for doing any sanity check) with
the iSCSI session information acquired by snooping.
•
A maximum of 16 TCP ports can be configured either bound to IP or not.
Example
The following example configures TCP Port 49154 to target IP address
172.16.1.20.
console(config)#iscsi target port 49154 address
172.16.1.20
show iscsi
Use the show iscsi command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the iSCSI
configuration.
Syntax
show iscsi
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the iSCSI configuration.
console#show iscsi
556
iSCSI Optimization Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 557 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
iSCSI enabled
iSCSI CoS enabled
iSCSI vpt is 5
Session aging time: 10 min
Maximum number of sessions is 192
-----------------------------------------------iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports:
-----------------------------------------------TCP Port
860
3260
Target IP Address
-
Name
-
30001
172.16.1.1
iqn.1993-11.com.diskvendor:diskarrays.sn.45678.tape:sys1.xyz
30033
172.16.1.10
-----------------------------------------------iSCSI Static Rule Table
-----------------------------------------------Index TCP Port IP Address IP Address Mask
TCP Port
Target IP Address
Name
show iscsi sessions
Use the show iscsi sessions command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
iSCSI status.
Syntax
show iscsi sessions [detailed]
•
detailed — Displayed list has additional data when this option is used.
Default Configuration
If not specified, sessions are displayed in short mode (not detailed).
iSCSI Optimization Commands
557
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 558 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following examples show summary and detailed information about the
iSCSI sessions.
console#show iscsi sessions
Target: iqn.1993-11.com.diskvendor:diskarrays.sn.45678
----------------------------------------------------Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12
ISID: 11
Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10
ISID: 222
----------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.103-1.com.storage-vendor:sn.43338.
storage.tape:sys1.xyz
Session 3:
Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12
Session 4:
Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10
Console# show iscsi sessions detailed
Target: iqn.1993-11.com.diskvendor:diskarrays.sn.45678
----------------------------------------------------558
iSCSI Optimization Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 559 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Session 1:
Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os
vendor.plan9:cdrom.12.storage:sys1.xyz
----------------------------------------------------Time started: 17-Jul-2008 10:04:50
Time for aging out: 10 min
ISID: 11
Initiator Initiator Target Target
IP address TCP port IP address IP port
172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 30001
172.16.1.4 49155 172.16.1.21 30001
172.16.1.5 49156 172.16.1.22 30001
Session 2:
----------------------------------------------------Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10
Time started: 17-Aug-2008
21:04:50
Time for aging out: 2 min
ISID: 22
Initiator Initiator Target Target
IP address TCP port IP address IP port
172.16.1.30 49200 172.16.1.20 30001
172.16.1.30 49201 172.16.1.21 30001
iSCSI Optimization Commands
559
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 560 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
560
iSCSI Optimization Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 561 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Link Dependency Commands
25
Link dependency allows the link status of a group of interfaces to be made
dependent on the link status of other interfaces. The effect is that the link
status of a group that depends on another interface either mirrors or inverts
the link status of the depended-on interface.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
action
add port-channel
link-dependency group
depends-on
add gigabitethernet
show link-dependency
add tengigabitethernet
action
Use the action command in Link Dependency mode to indicate if the linkdependency group should mirror or invert the status of the depended-on
interfaces.
Syntax
action {down|up}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
down
Mirror the depended on interface(s) status.
up
Invert the depended on interface(s) status.
Link Dependency Commands
561
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 562 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default configuration for a group is down, i.e. the group members will
mirror the depended-on link status by going down when all depended-on
interfaces are down.
Command Mode
Link Dependency mode
User Guidelines
The action up command will cause the group members to be up when no
depended-on interfaces are up.
Example
console(config-depend-1)#action up
link-dependency group
Use the link-dependency group command to enter the link-dependency
mode to configure a link-dependency group
Syntax
link-dependency group GroupId
no link-dependency group GroupId
•
GroupId — Link dependency group identifier. (Range: 1–72)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The preference of a group is to remain in the up state. A group will be in the
up state if any depends-on interface is up and will be in the down state only if
all depends-on interfaces are down.
562
Link Dependency Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 563 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)#link-dependency group 1
console(config-linkDep-group-1)#
add gigabitethernet
Use this command to add member gigabit Ethernet port(s) to the
dependency list.
Syntax
add gigabitethernet intf-list
•
intf-list — List of Ethernet interfaces in unit/slot/port format. Separate
nonconsecutive ports with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to
designate the range of ports. (Range: Valid Ethernet interface list or range)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Link Dependency mode
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Example
console(config-depend-1)#add gigabitethernet 1/0/1
add tengigabitethernet
Use this command to add member ten gigabit Ethernet port(s) to the
dependency list.
Syntax
add tengigabitethernet intf-list
Link Dependency Commands
563
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 564 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
intf-list — List of Ethernet interfaces in unit/slot/port format. Separate
nonconsecutive ports with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to
designate the range of ports. (Range: Valid Ethernet interface list or range)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Link Dependency mode
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Example
console(config-depend-1)#add tengigabitethernet 1/0/1
add port-channel
Use this command to add member port channels to the dependency list.
Syntax
add port-channel intf-list
no add port-channel port channel list
•
intf-list — List of port-channel numbers. Separate nonconsecutive portchannels with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to designate the
range of port-channels. (Range: Valid port-channel list or range)
•
port-channel-list — List of port-channel interfaces. Separate
nonconsecutive ports with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to
designate the range of ports. (Range: Valid port-channel interface list or
range)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
564
Link Dependency Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 565 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Link Dependency mode
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Example
console(config-depend-1)#add port-channel 10-12
depends-on
Use this command command to add the dependent Ethernet ports or port
channels list. Use the no depends-on command to remove the dependent
Ethernet ports or port-channels list.
Syntax
depends-on {gigabitethernet | port-channel | tengigabitethernet}intf-list
no depends-on {gigabitethernet | port-channel | tengigabitethernet}intf-
list
•
intf-list — List of ports in unit/slot/port format or port-channel numbers.
Separate nonconsecutive items with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen
to designate the range of ports or port-channel numbers. (Range: Valid
Ethernet interface or port-channel list or range)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Link Dependency mode
User Guidelines
Circular dependencies are not allowed, i.e. interfaces added to the group may
not also appear in the depends-on list.
Link Dependency Commands
565
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 566 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
console(config-linkDep-group-1)#depends-on
gigabitethernet 1/0/10
console(config-linkDep-group-1)#depends-on portchannel 6
show link-dependency
Use the show link-dependency command to show the link dependencies
configured for a particular group. If no group is specified, then all the
configured link-dependency groups are displayed.
Syntax
show link-dependency [group GroupId] [detail]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
GroupID
Link dependency group identifier. (Range: Valid Group Id,
1–16)
detail
Show detailed information about the state of members and the
dependent ports.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Example
The following command shows link dependencies for all groups.
566
Link Dependency Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 567 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show link-dependency
GroupId
Member Ports
------- --------------1
Ports Depended On Link Action Group State
------------------ ---------- ----------
Gi4/0/2-3,Gi4/0/5 Gi4/0/10-12
Link Up
Up/Down
The following command shows link dependencies for group 1 only.
console#show link-dependency group 1
GroupId
Member Ports
------- --------------1
Ports Depended On Link Action Group State
------------------ ---------- ----------
Gi4/0/2-3,Gi4/0/5 Gi4/0/10-12
Link Up
Up/Down
The following command shows detailed information for group 1.
console#show link-dependency group 1 detail
GroupId: 1
Link Action: Link UpGroup
State: Up
Ports Depended On State:
Link Up:
Gi4/0/10
Link Down: Gi4/0/11-12
Member Ports State:
Link Up:
Gi4/0/2-3
Link Down: Gi4/0/5
Link Dependency Commands
567
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 568 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
568
Link Dependency Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 569 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
LLDP Commands
26
The IEEE 802.1AB standard defines the Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP). This protocol allows stations residing on an 802 LAN to advertise
major capabilities, physical descriptions, and management information to
physically adjacent devices, allowing a network management system (NMS)
to access and display this information.
The standard is designed to be extensible, providing for the optional
exchange of organizational specific information and data related to other
IEEE standards. The base implementation supports only the required basic
management set of type length values (TLVs).
LLDP is a one-way protocol; there are no request/response sequences.
Information is advertised by stations implementing the transmit function.
The information is received and processed by stations implementing the
receive function. Devices are not required to implement both transmit and
receive functions and each function can be enabled or disabled separately by
the network manager. PowerConnect supports both the transmit and receive
functions in order to support device discovery.
The LLDP component transmit and receive functions can be
enabled/disabled separately per physical port. By default, both transmit and
receive functions are disabled on all ports. The application starts each
transmit and receive state machine appropriately based on the configured
status and operational state of the port.
The transmit function is configurable with respect to packet construction and
timing parameters. The required Chassis ID, Port ID, and Time to Live
(TTL) TLVs are always included in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data
Unit (LLDPDU). However, inclusion of the optional TLVs in the
management set is configurable by the administrator. By default, they are not
included. The transmit function extracts the local system information and
builds the LLDPDU based on the specified configuration for the port. In
addition, the administrator has control over timing parameters affecting the
TTL of LLDPDUs and the interval in which they are transmitted.
LLDP Commands
569
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 570 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The receive function accepts incoming LLDPDU frames and stores
information about the remote stations. Both local and remote data may be
displayed by the user interface and retrieved using SNMP as defined in the
LLDP MIB definitions. The component maintains one remote entry per
physical network connection.
The LLDP component manages a number of statistical parameters
representing the operation of each transmit and receive function on a per-port
basis. These statistics may be displayed by the user interface and retrieved
using SNMP as defined in the MIB definitions.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear lldp remote-data
lldp receive
–
clear lldp statistics
lldp timers
–
–
lldp transmit
–
–
lldp transmit-mgmt
–
–
lldp transmit-tlv
show lldp remote-device
–
show lldp
show lldp statistics
lldp notification
show lldp interface
–
lldp notification-interval
show lldp local-device
–
clear lldp remote-data
Use the clear lldp remote-data command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete
all LLDP information from the remote data table.
Syntax
clear lldp remote-data
Default Configuration
By default, data is removed only on system reset.
570
LLDP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 571 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to clear the LLDP remote data.
console#clear lldp remote-data
clear lldp statistics
Use the clear lldp statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to reset all
LLDP statistics.
Syntax
clear lldp statistics
Default Configuration
By default, the statistics are only cleared on a system reset.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to reset all LLDP statistics.
console#clear lldp statistics
LLDP Commands
571
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 572 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
lldp notification
Use the lldp notification command in Interface Configuration mode to
enable remote data change notifications. To disable notifications, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
lldp notification
no lldp notification
Default Configuration
By default, notifications are disabled on all supported interfaces.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to enable remote data change
notifications.
console(config-if-1/0/3)#lldp notification
lldp notification-interval
Use the lldp notification-interval command in Global Configuration mode
to limit how frequently remote data change notifications are sent. To return
the notification interval to the factory default, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
lldp notification-interval interval
no lldp notification-interval
572
LLDP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 573 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
interval — The smallest interval in seconds at which to send remote data
change notifications. (Range: 5–3600 seconds)
Default Configuration
The default value is 5 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to set the interval value to 10 seconds.
console(config)#lldp notification-interval 10
lldp receive
Use the lldp receive command in Interface Configuration mode to enable the
LLDP receive capability. To disable reception of LLDPDUs, use the no form
of this command.
Syntax
lldp receive
no lldp receive
Default Configuration
The default lldp receive mode is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
LLDP Commands
573
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 574 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays how to enable the LLDP receive capability.
console(config-if-1/0/3)#lldp receive
lldp timers
Use the lldp timers command in Global Configuration mode to set the
timing parameters for local data transmission on ports enabled for LLDP. To
return any or all parameters to factory default, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
lldp timers [interval transmit-interval] [hold hold-multiplier] [reinit reinitdelay]
no lldp timers [interval] [hold] [reinit]
•
transmit-interval — The interval in seconds at which to transmit local data
LLDPDUs. (Range: 5–32768 seconds)
•
hold-multiplier — Multiplier on the transmit interval used to set the TTL
in local data LLDPDUs. (Range: 2–10)
•
reinit-delay — The delay in seconds before re-initialization. (Range: 1–10
seconds)
Default Configuration
The default transmit interval is 30 seconds.
The default hold-multiplier is 4.
The default delay before re-initialization is 2 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
574
LLDP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 575 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
The following example displays how to configure LLDP to transmit local
information every 1000 seconds.
console(config)#lldp timers interval 1000
The following example displays how to set the timing parameter at 1000
seconds with a hold multiplier of 8 and a 5 second delay before reinitialization.
console(config)#lldp timers interval 1000 hold 8
reinit 5
lldp transmit
Use the lldp transmit command in Interface Configuration mode to enable
the LLDP advertise (transmit) capability. To disable local data transmission,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
lldp transmit
no lldp transmit
Default Configuration
LLDP is enabled on all supported interfaces.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how enable the transmission of local data.
console(config-if-1/0/3)#lldp transmit
LLDP Commands
575
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 576 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
lldp transmit-mgmt
Use the lldp transmit-mgmt command in Interface Configuration mode to
include transmission of the local system management address information in
the LLDPDUs. To cancel inclusion of the management information, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
lldp transmit-mgmt
no lldp transmit-mgmt
Default Configuration
By default, management address information is not included.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to include management information in
the LLDPDU.
console(config-if-1/0/3)#lldp transmit-mgmt
lldp transmit-tlv
Use the lldp transmit-tlv command in Interface Configuration mode to
specify which optional type-length-value settings (TLVs) in the 802.1AB basic
management set will be transmitted in the LLDPDUs. To remove an optional
TLV, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
lldp transmit-tlv [sys-desc][sys-name][sys-cap][port-desc]
no lldp transmit-tlv [sys-desc][sys-name][sys-cap][port-desc]
576
LLDP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 577 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
sys-name — Transmits the system name TLV
•
sys-desc — Transmits the system description TLV
•
sys-cap — Transmits the system capabilities TLV
•
port desc — Transmits the port description TLV
Default Configuration
By default, no optional TLVs are included.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to include the system description TLV in
local data transmit.
console(config-if-1/0/3)#lldp transmit-tlv sys-desc
show lldp
Use the show lldp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the current
LLDP configuration summary.
Syntax
show lldp
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
LLDP Commands
577
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 578 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the current LLDP configuration summary.
console# show lldp
Global Configurations:
Transmit Interval: 30 seconds
Transmit TTL Value: 120 seconds
Reinit Delay: 2 seconds
Notification Interval: limited to every 5 seconds
console#show lldp
LLDP transmit and receive disabled on all interfaces
show lldp interface
Use the show lldp interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the current LLDP interface state.
Syntax
show lldp interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet
unit/slot/port | all }
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
578
LLDP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 579 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
This example show how the information is displayed when you use the
command with the all parameter.
console#show lldp interface all
Interface Link Transmit Receive
Notify
TLVs
Mgmt
--------- ---- -------- -------- -------- ------- ---1/0/1
Up
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
0,1,2,3
1/0/2
Down Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
1/0/3
Down Disabled Disabled Disabled 1,2
Y
Y
N
TLV Codes: 0 – Port Description, 1 – System Name, 2 – System
Description, 3 –
System Capability
console# show lldp interface 1/0/1
Interface Link Transmit Receive
Notify
TLVs
Mgmt
--------- ---- -------- -------- -------- ------- ---1/0/1
Up
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
0,1,2,3
Y
TLV Codes: 0 – Port Description, 1 – System Name, 2 – System
Description, 3 – System Capability
show lldp local-device
Use the show lldp local-device command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the advertised LLDP local data. This command can display summary
information or detail for each interface.
Syntax
show lldp local-device {detail interface | interface | all}
•
detail — includes a detailed version of remote data.
•
interface — Specifies a valid physical interface on the device. Specify
either gigabitethernet unit/slot/port or tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port.
•
all — Shows lldp local device information on all interfaces.
LLDP Commands
579
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 580 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
These examples show advertised LLDP local data in two levels of detail.
console#show lldp local-device all
LLDP Local Device Summary
Interface
Port ID
Port Description
--------- -------------------- -------------------1/0/1
00:62:48:00:00:02
console# show lldp local-device detail 1/0/1
LLDP Local Device Detail
Interface: 1/0/1
Chassis ID Subtype: MAC Address
Chassis ID: 00:62:48:00:00:00
Port ID Subtype: MAC Address
Port ID: 00:62:48:00:00:02
System Name:
System Description: Routing
Port Description:
System Capabilities Supported: bridge, router
580
LLDP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 581 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
System Capabilities Enabled: bridge
Management Address:
Type: IPv4
Address: 192.168.17.25
—
— —
show lldp remote-device
Use the lldp remote-device command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the current LLDP remote data. This command can display summary
information or detail for each interface.
Syntax
show lldp remote-device {detail interface | interface | all}
•
detail — Includes detailed version of remote data.
•
interface — Specifies a valid physical interface on the device. Substitute
gigabitethernet unit/slotport or tengigabitethernet unit/slotport}
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
These examples show current LLDP remote data, including a detailed
version.
console#show lldp remote-device
LLDP Commands
581
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 582 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Local Remote
Interface Device
--------- -----------------
ID Port
-----------------
ID TTL
----------
1/0/1
01:23:45:67:89:AB
01:23:45:67:89:AC 60 seconds
1/0/2
01:23:45:67:89:CD
01:23:45:67:89:CE 120 seconds
1/0/3
01:23:45:67:89:EF
01:23:45:67:89:FG 80 seconds
console# show lldp remote-device detail 1/0/1
Ethernet1/0/1,
Remote ID: 01:23:45:67:89:AB
System Name: system-1
System Description:
System Capabilities: Bridge
Port ID: 01:23:45:67:89:AC
Port Description: 1/0/4
Management Address: 192.168.112.1
TTL: 60 seconds
show lldp statistics
Use the show lldp statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the current LLDP traffic statistics.
Syntax
show lldp statistics {unit/slot/port | all }
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
582
LLDP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 583 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples shows an example of the display of current LLDP
traffic statistics.
console#show lldp statistics all
LLDP Device Statistics
Last Update.................................. 0 days 22:58:29
Total Inserts................................ 1
Total Deletes................................ 0
Total Drops.................................. 0
Total Ageouts................................ 1
Tx
Rx
TLV
TLV
TLV
Interface Total Total Discards Errors Ageout Discards Unknowns MED
802.3
TLV
TLV
802.1
--------- ----- ----- -------- ------ ------ -------- -------- ---- ----- ---1/0/11
29395 82562 0
0
1
0
0
0
1
4
The following table explains the fields in this example.
Fields
Description
Last Update
The value of system of time the last time a remote data entry
was created, modified, or deleted.
Total Inserts
The number of times a complete set of information advertised
by a remote device has been inserted into the table.
Total Deletes
The number of times a complete set of information advertised
by a remote device has been deleted from the table.
LLDP Commands
583
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 584 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Fields
Description
Total Drops
Number of times a complete set of information advertised by a
remote device could not be inserted due to insufficient
resources.
Total Ageouts
Number of times any remote data entry has been deleted due to
time-to-live (TTL) expiration.
Transmit Total
Total number of LLDP frames transmitted on the indicated
port.
Receive Total
Total number of valid LLDP frames received on the indicated
port.
Discards
Number of LLDP frames received on the indicated port and
discarded for any reason.
Errors
Number of non-valid LLDP frames received on the indicated
port.
Ageouts
Number of times a remote data entry on the indicated port has
been deleted due to TTL expiration.
TLV Discards
Number LLDP TLVs (Type, Length, Value sets) received on the
indicated port and discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent.
TLV Unknowns
Number of LLDP TLVs received on the indicated port for a type
not recognized by the LLDP agent.
TLV MED
Number of OUI specific MED (Media Endpoint Device) TLVs
received.
TLV 802.1
Number of OUI specific 802.1 specific TLVs received.
TLV 802.3
Number of OUI specific 802.3 specific TLVs received.
584
LLDP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 585 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Multicast VLAN Registration
Commands
27
Multicast VLAN registration (MVR) is a method for consolidating multicast
traffic from multiple VLANs onto a single VLAN. A typical usage scenario
would be the distribution of a multicast group to a switch using a single
VLAN where the switch has users in different VLANs subscribing to the
multicast group. MVR enables the distribution of the multicast group from
the single consolidated VLAN onto the multiple user VLANs.
MVR, like the IGMP Snooping protocol, allows a Layer 2 switch to snoop on
the IGMP control protocol. Both protocols operate independently from each
other. Both protocols may be enabled on the switch interfaces at the same
time. In such a case, MVR is listening to the join and report messages only for
groups configured statically. All other groups are managed by IGMP
snooping.
There are two types of MVR ports: source and receiver.
•
Source port is the port to which the multicast traffic is flowing using the
multicast VLAN.
•
Receiver port is the port where a listening host is connected to the switch.
It can utilize any (or no) VLAN, except the multicast VLAN. This implies
that the MVR switch will perform VLAN tag substitution from the
multicast VLAN Source port to the VLAN tag used by the receiver port.
The Multicast VLAN is the VLAN that is configured in the specific network
for MVR purposes. It must be manually specified by the operator for all
multicast source ports in the network. It is this VLAN that is used to transfer
multicast traffic over the network to avoid duplication of multicast streams
for clients in different VLANs.
NOTE: MVR can only be enabled on physical interfaces, not on LAGs or VLANs.
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
585
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 586 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
mvr
mvr type
mvr group
mvr vlan group
mvr mode
show mvr
mvr querytime
show mvr members
mvr vlan
show mvr interface
mvr immediate
show mvr traffic
mvr
Use the mvr command in Global Config and Interface Config modes to
enable MVR. Use the no form of this command to disable MVR.
Syntax
mvr
no mvr
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is Disabled.
Command Mode
Global Config, Interface Config
User Guidelines
MVR can only be configured on physical interfaces.
586
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 587 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
mvr group
Use the mvr group command in Global Config mode to add an MVR
membership group. Use the no form of the command to remove an MVR
membership group.
Syntax
mvr group A.B.C.D [count]
no mvr group A.B.C.D [count]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
A.B.C.D
Specify a multicast group.
count
Specifies the number of multicast groups to configure. Groups
are configured contiguously by incrementing the first group
specified.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Config
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
None
Error Completion Message
• Not an IP multicast group address
• Illegal IP multicast group address
Example
console(config)#mvr
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
587
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 588 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#mvr group 239.0.1.0 100
console(config)#mvr vlan 10
mvr mode
Use the mvr mode command in Global Config mode to change the MVR
mode type. Use the no form of the command to set the mode type to the
default value.
Syntax
mvr mode {compatible | dynamic}
no mvr mode
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
compatible
Do not allow membership joins on source ports.
dynamic
Send IGMP joins to the multicast source when IGMP joins are
received on receiver ports.
Default Configuration
The default mode is compatible.
Command Mode
Global Config
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
mvr querytime
Use the mvr querytime command in Global Config mode to set the MVR
query response time. Use the no form of the command to set the MVR query
response time to the default value.
588
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 589 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
mvr querytime 1–100
no mvr querytime
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
querytime
The query time is a maximum time to wait for an IGMP
membership report on a receiver port before removing the port
from the multicast group. The query time only applies to
receiver ports. The query time is specified in tenths of a second.
Default Configuration
The default value is 5 tenths of a second.
Command Mode
Global Config
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
Defaulting MVR query response time.
Error Completion Message
None
Example
console(config)#interface Gi1/0/1
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#switchport access vlan 10
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr type receiver
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr mode dynamic
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr querytime 10
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
589
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 590 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
mvr vlan
Use the mvr vlan command in Global Config mode to set the MVR multicast
VLAN. Use the no form of the command to set the MVR multicast VLAN to
the default value.
Syntax
mvr vlan 1–4094
no mvr vlan
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan
The VLAN specifies the port on which multicast data is
expected to be received. Source ports should belong to this
VLAN.
Default Configuration
The default value is 1.
Command Mode
Global Config
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
MVR multicast VLAN ID is set to the
default value which is equal to 1.
Error Completion Message
Receiver port in mVLAN, operation failed.
mvr immediate
Use the mvr immediate command in Interface Config mode to enable MVR
Immediate Leave mode. Use the no form of this command to set the MVR
multicast VLAN to the default value.
590
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 591 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
mvr immediate
no mvr immediate
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is Disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Config
User Guidelines
Immediate leave should only be configured on ports with a single receiver.
When immediate leave is enabled, a receiver port will leave a group on receipt
of a leave message. Without immediate leave, upon receipt of a leave
message, the port sends an IGMP query and waits for an IGMP membership
report.
Example
console(config)#interface Gi1/0/1
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#switchport access vlan 10
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr type receiver
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr mode dynamic
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr immediate
mvr type
Use the mvr type command in Interface Config mode to set the MVR port
type. Use the no form of this command to set the MVR port type to None.
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
591
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 592 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
mvr type { receiver | source }
no mvr type
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
receiver
Configure the port as a receiver port. Receiver ports are ports
over which multicast data will be sent but not received.
source
Configure the port as a source port. Source ports are ports over
which multicast data is received or sent.
Default Configuration
The default value is None.
Command Mode
Interface Config
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
None
Error Completion Message
• Port is a Trunk port, operation failed.
• Receiver port in mVLAN, operation failed.
Example
console(config)#mvr
console(config)#mvr group 239.1.1.1
console(config)#exit
console(config)#interface Gi1/0/1
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#switchport access vlan 10
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#mvr type receiver
592
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 593 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#interface Gi1/0/24
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#switchport mode trunk
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#switchport trunk native vlan 99
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#switchport trunk allowed vlan add 99
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#mvr
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#mvr type source
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#exit
mvr vlan group
Use the mvr vlan group command in Interface Config mode to participate in
the specific MVR group. Use the no form of this command to remove the
port participation from the specific MVR group.
Syntax
mvr vlan mVLAN group A.B.C.D
no mvr vlan mVLAN group A.B.C.D
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
VLAN
The VLAN over which multicast data from the specified group
is to be received.
A.B.C.D.
The multicast group for which multicast data is to be received
over the specified VLAN.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Config
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
593
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 594 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command statically configures a port to receive the specified multicast
group on the specified VLAN. This command only applies to receiver ports in
compatible mode. It also applies to source ports in dynamic mode. In
dynamic mode, receiver ports can also join multicast groups using IGMP
messages.
Example
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#interface Te1/1/1
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#switchport mode trunk
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#switchport trunk native vlan
2000
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#switchport trunk allowed vlan
add 2000
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#mvr
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#mvr type source
console(config-if-Gi1/0/24)#mvr vlan 2000 group 239.1.1.1
show mvr
Use the show mvr command in Privileged EXEC mode to display global MVR
settings.
Syntax
show mvr
Parameter Description
The following table explains the output parameters.
Parameter
Description
MVR Running
MVR running state. It can be enabled or
disabled.
MVR Multicast VLAN
Current MVR multicast VLAN. It can be in
the range from 1 to 4094.
594
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 595 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
MVR Max Multicast Groups
The maximum number of multicast groups
that is supported by MVR.
MVR Current Multicast groups
The current number of MVR groups
allocated.
MVR Query Response Time
The current MVR query response time.
MVR Mode
The current MVR mode. It can be
compatible or dynamic.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
None
Error Completion Message
MVR disabled
Example
console #show mvr
MVR Running.............................. TRUE
MVR multicast VLAN....................... 1200
MVR Max Multicast Groups................. 256
MVR Current multicast groups............. 1
MVR Global query response time........... 10 (tenths of sec)
MVR Mode................................. compatible
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
595
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 596 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show mvr members
Use the show mvr members command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the MVR membership groups allocated.
Syntax
show mvr members [A.B.C.D]
Parameter Description
The parameter is a valid multicast address in IPv4 dotted notation. The
following table explains the output parameters.
Parameter
Description
MVR Group IP
MVR group multicast IP address.
Status
The status of the specific MVR group. It can
be active or inactive.
Members
The list of ports which participates in the
specific MVR group.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
None
Error Completion Message
MVR disabled
Examples
console#show mvr members
596
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 597 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
MVR Group IP
Status
Members
------------------
---------------
---------------------
224.1.1.1
INACTIVE
1/0/1, 1/0/2, 1/0/3
console#show mvr members 224.1.1.1
MVR Group IP
Status
Members
------------------
---------------
---------------------
224.1.1.1
INACTIVE
1/0/1, 1/0/2, 1/0/3
show mvr interface
Use the show mvr interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the MVR enabled interfaces configuration.
Syntax
show mvr interface [interface-id [members [vlan vid]] ]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Interface-id
Identifies a specific interface.
VID
VLAN identifier.
The following table explains the output parameters.
Parameter
Description
Port
Interface number
Type
The MVR port type. It can be None,
Receiver, or Source type.
Status
The interface status. It consists of two
characteristics:
1 active or inactive indicating if port is
forwarding.
2 inVLAN or notInVLAN indicating if the
port is part of any VLAN
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
597
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 598 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Immediate Leave
The state of immediate mode. It can be
enabled or disabled.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
None
Error Completion Message
MVR disabled
Examples
console#show mvr interface
Port
Type
--------------
---------------
Status
---------------------
Immediate Leave
--------------
1/0/9
RECEIVER
ACTIVE/inVLAN
DISABLED
console#show mvr interface 1/0/9
Type: RECEIVER Status: ACTIVE
Immediate Leave: DISABLED
console#show mvr interface Fa1/0/23 members
235.0.0.1 STATIC
ACTIVE
console#show mvr interface Fa1/0/23 members vlan 12
235.0.0.1 STATIC
ACTIVE
235.1.1.1 STATIC
ACTIVE
598
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 599 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show mvr traffic
Use the show mvr traffic command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
global MVR statistics.
Syntax
show mvr traffic
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful Completion Message
None
Error Completion Message
MVR disabled
Examples
The following table explains the output parameters.
Parameter
Description
IGMP Query Received
Number of received IGMP Queries.
IGMP Report V1 Received
Number of received IGMP Reports V1.
IGMP Report V2 Received
Number of received IGMP Reports V2.
IGMP Leave Received
Number of received IGMP Leaves.
IGMP Query Transmitted
Number of transmitted IGMP Queries.
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
599
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 600 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
IGMP Report V1 Transmitted
Number of transmitted IGMP Reports V1.
IGMP Report V2 Transmitted
Number of transmitted IGMP Reports V2.
IGMP Leave Transmitted
Number of transmitted IGMP Leaves.
IGMP Packet Receive Failures
Number of failures on receiving the IGMP
packets.
IGMP Packet Transmit Failures
Number of failures on transmitting the
IGMP packets.
console#show mvr traffic
IGMP Query Received............................ 2
IGMP Report V1 Received........................ 0
IGMP Report V2 Received........................ 3
IGMP Leave Received............................ 0
IGMP Query Transmitted......................... 2
IGMP Report V1 Transmitted..................... 0
IGMP Report V2 Transmitted..................... 3
IGMP Leave Transmitted......................... 1
IGMP Packet Receive Failures................... 0
IGMP Packet Transmit Failures.................. 0
600
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 601 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Port Aggregator Commands
28
This chapter explains the following commands:
add ethernet
negotiation
duplex
port-aggregator group
minimum active uplinks
show bridge address-table
mtu disable
speed
add ethernet
Use the add ethernet command to add member Ethernet ports to the
Aggregator Group. To remove member Ethernet ports from the Aggregator
Group/Zone, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
add ethernet intf-list
no add ethernet intf-list
•
intf-list — List of Ethernet interfaces. Separate nonconsecutive ports with
a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to designate a range of ports.
(Range: valid Ethernet interface list or range)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Port Aggregator mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Port Aggregator Commands
601
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 602 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)#port-aggregator group 1
console(config-aggregator-1)#add ethernet 1/g1
console(config-aggregator-1)#
duplex
Use the duplex command in port aggregator configuration mode to configure
the full/half duplex operation of all member ports in the aggregator
group/zone. To restore the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
duplex [half | full]
no duplex
•
half — Force half-duplex operation.
•
full — Force full-duplex operation.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Port Aggregator mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#port-aggregator group 1
console(config-aggregator-1)#speed 1000
console(config-aggregator-1)#
602
Port Aggregator Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 603 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
minimum active uplinks
Use the minimum active uplinks command to set the minimum number of
uplinks to be active for the Group. For example, if the number of uplink ports
in the group is 2 and the number of internal ports is 4. If the user sets the
minimum active uplink ports to be 2, then both the uplink ports should be
active; otherwise, all the internal ports in the Group will be brought down. By
default, the minimum active uplinks for a Group is 1, which means at least
one uplink port should be active for the Aggregator Group to be active.
Syntax
minimum active uplinks
•
number of uplinks — Minimum number of uplinks to be active for the
Aggregator Group to be active. (Range: 1-4)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Port Aggregator mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#port-aggregator group 2
console(config-aggregator-2)#minimum active uplinks 2
console(config-aggregator-2)#
mtu disable
Use the mtu disable command to set the mtu size to default (1518) on all the
member ports in the aggregator group/zone. To set the mtu size to the
maximum value (9216), use the no form of this command.
Port Aggregator Commands
603
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 604 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
mtu disable
no mtu disable
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Port Aggregator mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#port-aggregator group 1
console(config-aggregator-1)#mtu disable
console(config-aggregator-1)#
negotiation
Use the negotiation command in port aggregator mode to enable autonegotiation of all member ports in the aggregator group/zone. To disable
negotiation, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
negotiation
no negotiation
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Port Aggregator mode
604
Port Aggregator Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 605 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#port-aggregator group 1
console(config-aggregator-1)#negotiation
console(config-aggregator-1)#
port-aggregator group
Use the port-aggregator group command to enter the Port
Aggregator mode to configure aggregator group attributes. To remove all the
attributes on the specified group, use the no form of this command. The no
form of this command deletes all the member ports from the group and also
sets other attributes (mtu/VLAN) to its default values for that group.
Syntax
port-aggregator group
•
GroupId — Port Aggregator group identifier. (Range: 1-8 or 1-72) On a
standalone switch, it is up to 8. On a stack, it is 1 to (6 x < number of units
in stack). For a stack of 12 units it is 1-72.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#port-aggregator group 1
console(config-aggregator-1)#
Port Aggregator Commands
605
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 606 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show bridge address-table
Use the show bridge address-table command to show the MAC address table
for a particular aggregator group. [port-aggregator group is an
optional parameter in the command, and if not specified, it shows all the
MAC entries in all the Groups.
Syntax
show bridge address-table [port-aggregator group < GroupId >]
•
GroupId — Port Aggregator group identifier. (Range: 1-8 or 1-72) On a
standalone switch, it is up to 8. On a stack, it is 1 to (6 x 1522 Octets................. 0
Packets RX and TX 64 Octets.................... 1064
Packets RX and TX 65-127 Octets................ 140
Packets RX and TX 128-255 Octets............... 201
Packets RX and TX 256-511 Octets............... 418
Packets RX and TX 512-1023 Octets.............. 1
Packets RX and TX 1024-1518 Octets............. 0
Packets RX and TX 1519-1522 Octets............. 0
Packets RX and TX 1523-2047 Octets............. 0
Packets RX and TX 2048-4095 Octets............. 0
Packets RX and TX 4096-9216 Octets............. 0
Total Packets Received Without Errors.......... 0
Unicast Packets Received....................... 0
Multicast Packets Received..................... 0
Broadcast Packets Received..................... 0
Total Packets Received with MAC Errors......... 0
Jabbers Received............................... 0
Fragments/Undersize Received................... 0
Alignment Errors............................... 0
--More-- or (q)uit
FCS Errors..................................... 0
Overruns....................................... 0
Total Received Packets Not Forwarded........... 0
Local Traffic Frames........................... 0
802.3x Pause Frames Received................... 0
Port Channel Commands
627
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 628 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Unacceptable Frame Type........................ 0
Multicast Tree Viable Discards................. 0
Reserved Address Discards...................... 0
Broadcast Storm Recovery....................... 0
CFI Discards................................... 0
Upstream Threshold............................. 0
Total Packets Transmitted (Octets).............
263567
Max Frame Size................................. 1518
Total Packets Transmitted Successfully......... 1824
Unicast Packets Transmitted.................... 330
Multicast Packets Transmitted.................. 737
Broadcast Packets Transmitted.................. 757
Total Transmit Errors.......................... 0
FCS Errors..................................... 0
--More-- or (q)uit
Tx Oversized................................... 0
Underrun Errors................................ 0
Total Transmit Packets Discarded............... 0
Single Collision Frames........................ 0
Multiple Collision Frames...................... 0
Excessive Collision Frames..................... 0
Port Membership Discards....................... 0
802.3x Pause Frames Transmitted................ 0
GVRP PDUs received............................. 0
GVRP PDUs Transmitted.......................... 0
628
Port Channel Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 629 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
GVRP Failed Registrations...................... 0
Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 0 day
0 hr 17 min 52 sec
console#
Port Channel Commands
629
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 630 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
630
Port Channel Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 631 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Port Monitor Commands
30
PowerConnect switches allow the user to monitor traffic with an external
network analyzer. The external network analyzer can use any of the Ethernet
ports as a probe port. The probe port transmits a mirror copy of the traffic
being probed. Network traffic transmission is always disrupted whenever a
configuration change is made for port monitoring. Therefore, whenever port
monitoring is enabled, the probe port does not always forward traffic as a
normal port. When diagnosing problems, an operator should always check the
status of port monitoring.
The port monitoring feature allows the user to configure multiple sessions.
One session consists of one destination port and multiple source ports. When
a particular session is enabled, any traffic entering or leaving the source ports
of that session is copied (mirrored) onto the corresponding destination port.
A network traffic analyzer can be attached to destination ports to analyze the
traffic patterns of source ports.
A session is operationally active only if both a destination port and at least
one source port are configured. If neither is true, the session is inactive. A port
configured as a destination port acts as a mirroring port when the session is
operationally active. If it is not, the port acts as a normal port and participates
in all normal operation with respect to transmitting traffic.
Any Ethernet or LAG port may be configured as a source port.
Caveats:
•
Platforms may behave unpredictably if an attempt is made to mirror a port
of greater speed than the probe port.
•
Once configured, there is no network connectivity on the probe port. The
probe port does not forward any traffic and does not receive any traffic.
The probe tool attached to the probe port is generally unable to ping the
networking device or ping through the networking device, and nobody is
able to ping the probe tool.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
Port Monitor Commands
631
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 632 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
monitor session
show monitor session
monitor session
Use the monitor session command in Global Configuration mode to
configure a probe port and a monitored port for monitor session (port
monitoring). Use the src-interface parameter to specify the interface to
monitor. Use rx to monitor only ingress packets, or use tx to monitor only
egress packets. If you do not specify an {rx | tx} option, the destination port
monitors both ingress and egress packets. Use the destination interface to
specify the interface to receive the monitored traffic. Use the mode parameter
to enabled the administrative mode of the session. If enabled, the probe port
monitors all the traffic received and transmitted on the physical monitored
port.
Use the no form of the command to remove the monitoring session.
Syntax
monitor session session_number {source interface interface–id [rx | tx] |
destination interface interface–id}
no monitor session
•
session _number— Session identification number.
•
interface–id — Ethernet interface (Range: Any valid Ethernet Port), CPU
interface. CPU interface is not supported as a destination interface.
•
rx — Monitors received packets only. If no option specified, monitors both
rx and tx.
•
tx — Monitors transmitted packets only. If no option is specified, monitors
both rx and tx.
•
Use the mode keyword to enable the session monitoring.
Default Configuration
Monitor sessions are not enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
632
Port Monitor Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 633 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The source of a monitoring session must be configured before the destination
can be configured.
Example
The following examples show a simple port level configuration that mirrors
both transmitted and received packet from one port to another.
console(config)#monitor session 1 source interface
1/0/8
console(config)#monitor session 1 destination
interface 1/0/10
console(config)#monitor session 1 mode
show monitor session
Use the show monitor session command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
status of port monitoring.
Syntax
show monitor session session_number
•
session _number— Session identification number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following examples shows port monitoring status.
console#show monitor session 1
Port Monitor Commands
633
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 634 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Session ID
Admin Mode
Probe Port
Mirrored Port
Type
----------
----------
----------
-------------
-----
1
Enable
1/0/10
634
Port Monitor Commands
1/0/8
Rx,Tx
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 635 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
QoS Commands
31
Quality of Service (QoS) technologies are intended to provide guaranteed
timely delivery of specific application data to a particular destination. In
contrast, standard IP-based networks are designed to provide best effort data
delivery service. Best effort service implies that the network delivers the data
in a timely fashion, although there is no guarantee. During times of
congestion, packets may be delayed, sent sporadically, or dropped. For typical
Internet applications, such as electronic mail and file transfer, a slight
degradation in service is acceptable and, in many cases, unnoticeable.
Conversely, any degradation of service has undesirable effects on applications
with strict timing requirements, such as voice or multimedia.
QoS is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by
distinguishing between packets that have strict timing requirements from
those that are more tolerant of delay. Packets with strict timing requirements
are given special treatment in a QoS-capable network. To accomplish this, all
elements of the network must be QoS-capable. If one node is unable to meet
the necessary timing requirements, this creates a deficiency in the network
path and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised.
Access Control Lists
The PowerConnect ACL feature allows classification of packets based upon
Layer 2 through Layer 4 header information. An Ethernet IPv6 packet is
distinguished from an IPv4 packet by its unique Ether-type value; thus, all
IPv4 and IPv6 classifiers include the Ether-type field.
Multiple ACLs per interface are supported. The ACLs can be combination of
Layer 2 and/or Layer 3/4 ACLs.
ACL assignment is appropriate for both physical ports and LAGs.
QoS Commands
635
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 636 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
A user configures an ACL permit rule to force its matching traffic stream to a
specific egress interface, bypassing any forwarding decision normally
performed by the device. The interface can be a physical port or a LAG. The
redirect interface rule action is independent of, but compatible with, the
assign queue rule action.
ACLs can be configured to apply to a VLAN instead of an interface. Traffic
tagged with a VLAN ID (either receive-tagged or tagged by ingress process
such as PVID) is evaluated for a match regardless of the interface on which it
is received.
Layer 2 ACLs
The Layer 2 ACL feature provides access list capability by allowing
classification on the Layer 2 header of an Ethernet frame, including the
802.1Q VLAN tag(s). In addition, the rule action set is enhanced to designate
which (egress) CoS queue should handle the traffic, and whether the traffic
flow is to be redirected to a specific outgoing interface.
MAC access lists are identified by a user-specified name instead of a number.
Layer 3/4 IPv4 ACLs
The Layer 3/4 ACL feature supports IP access lists, both standard and
extended. These lists check the Layer 3 portion of a packet, looking
specifically at information contained in the IP header and, in certain cases,
the TCP or UDP header. An Ethertype of 0x0800 is assumed in the case of IP
access lists. Permit and deny actions are supported for each ACL rule.
Standard layer 3/4 ACLs can be classified based on the source IP address and
netmask or other extended classification criteria.
Class of Service (CoS)
The PowerConnect CoS Queueing feature allows the user to directly
configure device queueing and, therefore, provide the desired QoS behavior
without the complexities of DiffServ. The CoS feature allows the user to
determine the following queue behavior:
•
Queue Mapping
–
636
Trusted Port Queue Mapping
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 637 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
–
•
Untrusted Port Default Priority
Queue Configuration
This enables PowerConnect switches to support a wide variety of delay
sensitive video and audio multicast applications.
CoS mapping tables, port default priority, and hardware queue parameters
may be configured on LAG interfaces as well as physical port interfaces.
Queue Mapping
The priority of a packet arriving at an interface is used to steer the packet to
the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a mapping table. Network
packets arriving at an ingress port are directed to one of n queues in an egress
port(s) based on the translation of packet priority to CoS queue. The CoS
mapping tables define the queue used to handle each enumerated type of
user priority designated in either the 802.1p, IP precedence, or IP DSCP
contents of a packet. If none of these fields are trusted to contain a
meaningful COS queue designation, the ingress port can be configured to use
its default priority to specify the CoS queue.
CoS queue mappings use the concept of trusted and untrusted ports.
A trusted port is one that takes at face value a certain priority designation
within arriving packets. Specifically, a port may be configured to trust one of
the following packet fields:
•
802.1p User Priority
•
IP Precedence
•
IP DSCP
Packets arriving at the port ingress are inspected and their trusted field value
is used to designate the COS queue that the packet is placed when forwarded
to the appropriate egress port. A mapping table associates the trusted field
value with the desired COS queue.
Alternatively, a port may be configured as untrusted, whereby it does not trust
any incoming packet priority designation and uses the port default priority
value instead. All packets arriving at the ingress of an untrusted port are
directed to a specific COS queue on the appropriate egress port(s) in
accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This
QoS Commands
637
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 638 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
process is also used for cases where a trusted port mapping is unable to be
honored, such as when a nonIP packet arrives at a port configured to trust the
IP precedence or IP DSCP value.
PCM6220 Limitations
The PCM6220 switch does not support out-bound service policies or ACLs.
The following command syntax is not available:
•
service-policy servicepolicyname out
•
policy-map policymapname out
•
mac access-group name out
•
show diffserv service interface interface out
•
show diffserv service port-channel port-channel out
•
show policy-map interface interface out
The following command is not supported on VLAN interfaces on the
PCM6220:
ip access-group name out
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
assign-queue
mark cos
match ip tos
show classofservice
dot1p-mapping
class
mark ip-dscp
match protocol
show classofservice ipdscp-mapping
class-map
mark ipprecedence
match sourceaddress mac
show classofservice
trust
class-map rename
match class-map
match srcip
show diffserv
classofservice
dot1p-mapping
match cos
match srcip6
show diffserv service
interface
classofservice ipdscp-mapping
match destination- match srcl4port
address mac
638
QoS Commands
show diffserv service
interface port-channel
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 639 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
classofservice trust match dstip
match vlan
show diffserv service
brief
conform-color
match dstip6
mirror
show interfaces cosqueue
cos-queue minbandwidth
match dstl4port
police-simple
show interfaces
random-detect
cos-queue random- match ethertype
detect
policy-map
show policy-map
cos-queue strict
match ip6flowlbl
redirect
show policy-map
interface
diffserv
match ip dscp
service-policy
show service-policy
drop
match ip
precedence
show class-map
traffic-shape
assign-queue
Use the assign-queue command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to
modify the queue ID to which the associated traffic stream is assigned.
Syntax
assign-queue queueid
•
queueid — Specifies a valid queue ID. (Range: integer from 0–6.)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
QoS Commands
639
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 640 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays how to change the queue ID to 4 for the
associated traffic stream.
console(config-policy-classmap)#assign-queue 4
class
Use the class command in Policy-Map Class Configuration mode to create an
instance of a class definition within the specified policy for the purpose of
defining treatment of the traffic class through subsequent policy attribute
statements.
Syntax
class classname
no class
•
classname — Specifies the name of an existing DiffServ class. (Range:
1–31 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command causes the specified policy to create a reference to the class
definition. The command mode is changed to Policy-Class-Map
Configuration when this command is executed successfully.
Example
The following example shows how to specify the DiffServ class name of
"DELL."
console(config)#policy-map DELL1
console(config-classmap)#class DELL
640
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 641 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
class-map
Use the class-map command in Global Configuration mode to define a new
DiffServ class of type match-all. To delete the existing class, use the no form
of this command.
Syntax
class-map match-all class-map-name [{ipv4 | ipv6}]
no class-map match-all class-map-name
•
class-map-name — a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31
characters uniquely identifying an existing DiffServ class.
Default Configuration
The class-map defaults to ipv4.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example creates a class-map named "DELL" which requires all
ACE’s to be matched.
console(config)#class-map DELL
console(config-cmap)#
class-map rename
Use the class-map rename command in Global Configuration mode to
change the name of a DiffServ class.
Syntax
class-map rename classname newclassname
QoS Commands
641
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 642 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
classname — The name of an existing DiffServ class. (Range: 1–31
characters)
•
newclassname — A case-sensitive alphanumeric string. (Range: 1–31
characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to change the name of a DiffServ class
from "DELL" to "DELL1."
console(config)#class-map rename DELL DELL1
console(config)#
classofservice dot1p-mapping
Use the classofservice dot1p-mapping command in Global Configuration
mode to map an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class. In Interface
Configuration mode, the mapping is applied only to packets received on that
interface. Use the no form of the command to remove mapping between an
802.1p priority and an internal traffic class.
Syntax
classofservice dot1p-mapping 802.1ppriority trafficclass
no classofservice dot1p-mapping
642
•
802.1ppriority — Specifies the user priority mapped to the specified traffic
class for this switch. (Range: 0–7)
•
trafficclass — Specifies the traffic class for this switch. (Range: 0–6)
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 643 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration or Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-channel)
mode
User Guidelines
None
Example
The following example configures mapping for user priority 1 and traffic class
2.
console(config)#classofservice dot1p-mapping 1 2
classofservice ip-dscp-mapping
Use the classofservice ip-dscp-mapping command in Global Configuration
mode to map an IP DSCP value to an internal traffic class.
Syntax
classofservice ip-dscp-mapping ipdscp trafficclass
•
ipdscp — Specifies the IP DSCP value to which you map the specified
traffic class. (Range: 0–63 or an IP DSCP keyword – af11, af12, af13, af21,
af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5,
cs6, cs7, ef)
•
trafficclass — Specifies the traffic class for this value mapping. (Range:
0–6)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
QoS Commands
643
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 644 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays mapping for IP DSCP 1 and traffic class 2.
console(config)#classofservice ip-dscp-mapping 1 2
classofservice trust
Use the classofservice trust command in either Global Configuration mode
or Interface Configuration mode to set the class of service trust mode of an
interface. To set the interface mode to untrusted, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
classofservice trust {dot1p | untrusted | ip-dscp}
no classofservice trust
•
dot1p — Specifies that the mode be set to trust dot1p (802.1p) packet
markings.
•
untrusted — Sets the Class of Service Trust Mode for all interfaces to
Untrusted.
•
ip-dscp — Specifies that the mode be set to trust IP DSCP packet
markings.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode or Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet,
port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
644
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 645 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
The following example displays how you set the class of service trust mode of
an interface to trust dot1p (802.1p) packet markings when in Global
Configuration mode.
console(config)#classofservice trust dot1p
The following example displays how you set the class of service trust mode of
an interface to trust IP Precedence packet mark
console(config)#classofservice trust ip-precedence
conform-color
Use the conform-color command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
to specify second-level matching for traffic flow, the only possible actions are
drop, setdscp-transmit, set-prec-transmit, or transmit. In this two-rate form
of the policy command, the conform action defaults to send, the exceed
action defaults to drop, and the violate action defaults to drop. These actions
can be set with this command.
Syntax
conform-color
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to specify the conform-color command.
console(config-policy-classmap)#conform-color
test_class (test_class is
QoS Commands
645
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 646 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
cos-queue min-bandwidth
Use the cos-queue min-bandwidth command in either Global Configuration
mode or Interface Configuration mode to specify the minimum transmission
bandwidth for each interface queue. To restore the default for each queue’s
minimum bandwidth value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
cos-queue min-bandwidth bw-0 bw-1 … bw-n
no cos-queue min-bandwidth
•
bw-0 — Specifies the minimum transmission bandwidth for an interface.
You can specify as many bandwidths as there are interfaces (bw-0 through
bw-n). (Range: 0–100 in increments of 5)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode or Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet,
port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode
User Guidelines
The maximum number of queues supported per interface is seven.
Example
The following example displays how to specify the minimum transmission
bandwidth for seven interfaces.
console(config)#cos-queue min-bandwidth
10
0 0 5 5 10 10
cos-queue random-detect
Use the cos-queue random-detect command in Interface Configuration
mode to configure WRED queue management policy on an interface CoS
queue. Use the no form of the command to disable WRED policy for a CoS
queue on an interface.
646
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 647 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
cos-queue {random-detect queue-id1 [queue-id2..queue-idn]}
no cos-queue {random-detect queue-id1 [queue-id2..queue-idn]}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
queue-id
An integer indicating the queue-id which is to be enabled for
WRED. Range 0-6. Up to 7 queues may be simultaneously
specified.
Default Configuration
WRED queue management policy is disabled by default. Tail-drop queue
management policy is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (physical or port-channel)
User Guidelines
When used on a port-channel, this command will override the settings on the
individual interfaces that are part of the port channel.
This command can be used in Interface Range mode.
Use the cos-queue min-bandwidth command to configure the minimum
bandwidth percentage for the CoS queues.
Use the show interfaces random-detect command to display the WRED
configuration.
Example
Enable WRED on the default CoS queue for unmarked packets and set the
green, yellow, red and non-TCP packet thresholds to utilize WRED at 98% of
port bandwidth with a drop probability of 1%.
console(config)# cos-queue random-detect 1
console(config)# random-detect queue-parms 1 min-thresh 98
98 98 98 max-thresh 100 100 100 100 drop-prob-scale 1 1 1 1
QoS Commands
647
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 648 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
cos-queue strict
Use the cos-queue strict command in either Global Configuration mode or
Interface Configuration mode to activate the strict priority scheduler mode
for each specified queue. To restore the default weighted scheduler mode for
each specified queue, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
cos-queue strict {queue-id-1} [{queue-id-2} … {queue-id-n}]
no cos-queue strict {queue-id-1} [{queue-id-2} … {queue-id-n}]
•
queue-id-1 — Specifies the queue ID for which you are activating the
strict priority scheduler. You can specify a queue ID for as many queues as
you have (queue-id 1 through queue-id-n). (Range: 0–6)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode or Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet,
port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to activate the strict priority scheduler
mode for two queues.
console(config)#cos-queue strict 1 2
The following example displays how to activate the strict priority scheduler
mode for three queues.
console(config)#cos-queue strict 1 2 4
648
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 649 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
diffserv
Use the diffserv command in Global Configuration mode to set the DiffServ
operational mode to active. While disabled, the DiffServ configuration is
retained and can be changed, but it is not activated. When enabled, DiffServ
services are activated. To set the DiffServ operational mode to inactive, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
diffserv
no diffserv
Default Configuration
This command default is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to set the DiffServ operational mode to
active.
console(Config)#diffserv
drop
Use the drop command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to specify
that all packets for the associated traffic stream are to be dropped at ingress.
Syntax
drop
QoS Commands
649
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 650 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to specify that matching packets are to
be dropped at ingress.
console(config-policy-classmap)#drop
mark cos
Use the mark cos command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to
mark all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified class of
service value in the priority field of the 802.1p header. If the packet does not
already contain this header, one is inserted.
Syntax
mark cos cos-value
•
cos-value — Specifies the CoS value as an integer. (Range: 0–7)
Default Configuration
There is no default cos-value for this command. Packets are not remarked by
default.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
650
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 651 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays how to mark all packets with a CoS value.
console(config-policy-classmap)#mark cos 7
mark ip-dscp
Use the mark ip-dscp command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to
mark all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified IP DSCP
value.
Syntax
mark ip-dscp dscpval
•
dscpval — Specifies a DSCP value (10, 12, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 28, 30, 34, 36,
38, 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 46) or a DSCP keyword (af11, af12, af13,
af21, af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4,
cs5, cs6, cs7, ef).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to mark all packets with an IP DSCP
value of "cs4."
console(config-policy-classmap)#mark ip-dscp cs4
QoS Commands
651
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 652 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
mark ip-precedence
Use the mark ip-precedence command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration
mode to mark all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified
IP precedence value.
Syntax
mark ip-precedence prec-value
•
prec-value — Specifies the IP precedence value as an integer. (Range: 0–7)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines.
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays
console(config)#policy-map p1 in
console(config-policy-map)#class c1
console(config-policy-classmap)#mark ip-precedence 2
console(config-policy-classmap)#
match class-map
Use the match class-map command to add to the specified class definition
the set of match conditions defined for another class. Use the no form of this
command to remove from the specified class definition the set of match
conditions defined for another class.
652
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 653 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
match class-map refclassname
no match class-map refclassname
•
refclassname — The name of an existing DiffServ class whose match
conditions are being referenced by the specified class definition.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
•
The parameters refclassname and class-map-name can not be the same.
•
Only one other class may be referenced by a class.
•
Any attempts to delete the refclassname class while the class is still
referenced by any class-map-name fails.
•
The combined match criteria of class-map-name and refclassname must
be an allowed combination based on the class type.
•
Any subsequent changes to the refclassname class match criteria must
maintain this validity, or the change attempt fails.
•
The total number of class rules formed by the complete reference class
chain (including both predecessor and successor classes) must not exceed
a platform-specific maximum. In some cases, each removal of a refclass
rule reduces the maximum number of available rules in the class definition
by one.
Example
The following example adds match conditions defined for the Dell class to
the class currently being configured.
console(config-classmap)#match class-map Dell
The following example deletes the match conditions defined for the Dell
class from the class currently being configured.
QoS Commands
653
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 654 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-classmap)#no match class-map Dell
match cos
Use the match cos command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to the
specified class definition a match condition for the class of service value (the
only tag in a single-tagged packet or the first or outer 802.1Q tag of a doubleVLAN tagged packet).
Syntax
match cos
•
cos-value — Specifies the CoS value as an integer (Range: 0–7)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition to the specified
class.
console(config-classmap)#match cos 1
match destination-address mac
Use the match destination-address mac command in Class-Map
Configuration mode to add to the specified class definition a match
condition based on the destination MAC address of a packet.
Syntax
match destination-address mac macaddr macmask
654
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 655 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
macaddr — Specifies any valid layer 2 MAC address formatted as six twodigit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.
•
macmask — Specifies a valid layer 2 MAC address bit mask formatted as
six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons. This address bit
mask does not need to be contiguous.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition for the specified
MAC address and bit mask.
console(config-classmap)#match destination-address
mac AA:ED:DB:21:11:06 FF:FF:FF:EF:EE:EE
match dstip
Use the match dstip command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to
the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination IP
address of a packet.
Syntax
match dstip ipaddr ipmask
•
ipaddr — Specifies a valid IP address.
•
ipmask — Specifies a valid IP address bit mask. Note that even though this
parameter is similar to a standard subnet mask, it does not need to be
contiguous.
QoS Commands
655
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 656 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition using the specified
IP address and bit mask.
console(config-classmap)#match dstip 10.240.1.1
10.240.0.0
match dstip6
The match dstip6 command adds to the specified class definition a match
condition based on the destination IPv6 address of a packet.
Syntax
match dstip6 destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
•
destination-ipv6-prefix —IPv6 prefix in IPv6 global address format.
•
prefix-length —IPv6 prefix length value.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Ipv6-Class-Map Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
656
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 657 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-classmap)#match dstip6 2001:DB8::/32
match dstl4port
Use the match dstl4port command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add
to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination
layer 4 port of a packet using a single keyword or a numeric notation.
Syntax
match dstl4port {portkey | port-number}
•
portkey — Specifies one of the supported port name keywords. A match
condition is specified by one layer 4 port number. The currently supported
values are: domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, http, smtp, snmp, telnet, tftp, and
www.
•
port-number — Specifies a layer 4 port number (Range: 0–65535).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition based on the
destination layer 4 port of a packet using the "echo" port name keyword.
console(config-classmap)#match dstl4port echo
QoS Commands
657
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 658 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
match ethertype
Use the match ethertype command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add
to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the
ethertype.
Syntax
match ethertype {keyword | 0x0600-0xffff }
•
keyword — Specifies either a valid keyword or a valid hexadecimal number.
The supported keywords are appletalk, arp, ibmsna, ipv4, ipv6, ipx,
mplsmcast, mplsucast, netbios, novell, pppoe, rarp. (Range:
0x0600–0xFFFF)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to add a match condition based on
ethertype.
console(config-classmap)#match ethertype arp
match ip6flowlbl
The match ip6flowlbl command adds to the specified class definition a
match condition based on the IPv6 flow label of a packet.
Syntax
match ip6flowlbl label
658
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 659 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
label - The value to match in the Flow Label field of the IPv6 header
(Range 0-1048575).
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Ipv6-Class-Map Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example adds a rule to match packets whose IPv6 Flow Label
equals 32312.
console(config-classmap)#match ip6flowlbl 32312
match ip dscp
Use the match ip dscp command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to
the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the IP
DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) field in a packet. This field is defined as the
high-order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header. The low-order
two bits are not checked.
Syntax
match ip dscp dscpval
•
dscpval — Specifies an integer value or a keyword value for the DSCP
field. (Integer Range: 0–63) (Keyword Values: af11, af12, af13, af21, af22,
af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5, cs6,
cs7, ef)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
QoS Commands
659
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 660 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The ip dscp, ip precedence, and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways
to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header
but with a slightly different user notation.
To specify a match on all DSCP values, use the match ip tos tosbits tosmask
command with tosbits set to "0" (zero) and tosmask set to hex "03."
Example
The following example displays how to add a match condition based on the
DSCP field.
console(config-classmap)# match ip dscp 3
match ip precedence
Use the match ip precedence command in Class-Map Configuration mode to
add to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of
the IP precedence field.
Syntax
match ip precedence precedence
•
precedence — Specifies the precedence field in a packet. This field is the
high-order three bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header. (Integer
Range: 0–7)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
660
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 661 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The ip dscp, ip precedence, and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways
to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header
but with a slightly different user notation.
To specify a match on all precedence values, use the match ip tos tosbits
tosmask command with tosbits set to "0" (zero) and tosmask set to hex "1F."
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition based on the value
of the IP precedence field.
console(config-classmap)#match ip precedence 1
match ip tos
Use the match ip tos command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to
the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the IP
TOS field in a packet. This field is defined as all eight bits of the Service Type
octet in the IP header.
Syntax
match ip tos tosbits tosmask
•
tosbits — Specifies a two-digit hexadecimal number. (Range: 00–ff)
•
tosmask — Specifies the bit positions in the tosbits parameter that are
used for comparison against the IP TOS field in a packet. This value of this
parameter is expressed as a two-digit hexadecimal number. (Range: 00–ff)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
QoS Commands
661
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 662 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The ip dscp, ip precedence, and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways
to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header
but with a slightly different user notation.
This specification is the free form version of the IP DSCP/Precedence/TOS
match specification in that you have complete control of specifying which
bits of the IP Service Type field are checked.
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition based on the value
of the IP TOS field in a packet.
console(config-classmap)#match ip tos AA EF
match protocol
Use the match protocol command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add
to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the
IP Protocol field in a packet using a single keyword notation or a numeric
value notation.
Syntax
match protocol {protocol-name | protocol-number}
•
•
protocol-name — Specifies one of the supported protocol name keywords.
The supported values are icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, and udp.
protocol-number — Specifies the standard value assigned by IANA.
(Range 0–255)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
662
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 663 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition based on the "ip"
protocol name keyword.
console(config-classmap)#match protocol ip
match source-address mac
Use the match source-address mac command in Class-Map Configuration
mode to add to the specified class definition a match condition based on the
source MAC address of the packet.
Syntax
match source-address mac address macmask
•
macaddr — Specifies any valid layer 2 MAC address formatted as six twodigit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.
•
macmask — Specifies a layer 2 MAC address bit mask formatted as six
two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons. This bit mask does
not need to be contiguous.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example adds to the specified class definition a match
condition based on the source MAC address of the packet.
console(config-classmap)# match source-address mac
10:10:10:10:10:10 11:11:11:11:11:11
QoS Commands
663
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 664 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
match srcip
Use the match srcip command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to
the specified class definition a match condition based on the source IP
address of a packet.
Syntax
match srcip ipaddr ipmask
•
ipaddr — Specifies a valid IP address.
•
ipmask — Specifies a valid IP address bit mask. Note that although this IP
address bit mask is similar to a subnet mask, it does not need to be
contiguous.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition for the specified IP
address and address bit mask.
console(config-classmap)#match srcip 10.240.1.1
10.240.0.0
match srcip6
The match srcip6 command adds to the specified class definition a match
condition based on the source IPv6 address of a packet.
Syntax
match srcip6 source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
664
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 665 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
source-ipv6-prefix —IPv6 prefix in IPv6 global address format.
•
prefix-length —IPv6 prefix length value.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Ipv6-Class-Map Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-classmap)#match srcip6 2001:DB8::/32
match srcl4port
Use the match srcl4port command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add
to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source layer 4
port of a packet using a single keyword or a numeric notation.
Syntax
match srcl4port {portkey | port-number}
•
portkey — Specifies one of the supported port name keywords. A match
condition is specified by one layer 4 port number. The currently supported
values are: domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, http, smtp,snmp, telnet, tftp, and
www.
•
port-number — Specifies a layer 4 port number (Range: 0–65535).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
QoS Commands
665
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 666 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to add a match condition using the
"snmp" port name keyword.
console(config-classmap)#match srcl4port snmp
match vlan
Use the match vlan command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to
the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the
layer 2 VLAN Identifier field. This field is the only tag in a single tagged
packet or the first or outer tag of a double VLAN packet.
Syntax
match vlan vlan-id
•
vlan-id — Specifies a VLAN ID as an integer. (Range: 0–4095)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays adding a match condition for the VLAN ID
"2."
console(config-classmap)#match vlan 2
666
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 667 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
mirror
Use the mirror command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to mirror
all the data that matches the class defined to the destination port specified.
Syntax
mirror interface
• interface — Specifies the Ethernet port to which data needs to be copied.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The port identified in this command is identical to the destination port of the
monitor command.
Example
The following example displays how to copy all the data to port 1/0/5.
console(config-policy-classmap)#mirror 1/0/5
police-simple
Use the police-simple command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to
establish the traffic policing style for the specified class. The simple form of
the police command uses a single data rate and burst size, resulting in two
outcomes: conform and nonconform.
Syntax
police-simple {datarate burstsize conform-action {drop | set-prectransmit
cos | set-dscp-transmit dscpval | transmit} [violateaction {drop | set-costransmit cos | set-prec-transmit cos | set-dscp-transmit dscpval | transmit}]}
QoS Commands
667
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 668 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
datarate — Data rate in kilobits per second (kbps). (Range:
1–4294967295)
•
burstsize — Burst size in Kbps (Range: 1–128)
•
conform action — Indicates what happens when the packet is conforming
to the policing rule: it could be dropped, it could have its COS modified, it
could have its IP precedence modified, or it could have its DSCP
modified. The same actions are available for packets that do not conform
to the policing rule.
•
cos — Class of Service value. (Range: 0–7)
•
dscpval — DSCP value. (Range: 0–63 or a keyword from this list, af11,
af12, af13, af21, af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1,
cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5, cs6, cs7, ef)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Only one style of police command (simple) is allowed for a given class
instance in a particular policy.
Example
The following example shows how to establish the traffic policing style for the
specified class.
console(config-policy-classmap)#police-simple 33 34
conform-action transmit violate-action transmit
policy-map
Use the policy-map command in Global Configuration mode to establish a
new DiffServ policy or to enter policy map configuration mode. To remove
the policy, use the no form of this command.
668
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 669 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
policy-map policyname [in|out]
no policy-map policyname
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
policyname
Specifies the DiffServ policy name as a unique case-sensitive
alphanumeric string of characters. (Range: 1–31 alphanumeric
characters.)
in
The policy is applied on ingress. Must be specified to create
new DiffServ policies. An existing policy can be selected
without specifying "in" or "out".
out
The policy is applied on egress. Either "in" or "out" must be
specified to create a new DiffServ policy. An existing policy may
be selected without the "in" or "out" parameter.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The CLI mode is changed to Policy-Class-Map Configuration when this
command is successfully executed.
The policy type dictates which of the individual policy attribute commands
are valid within the policy definition.
Example
The following example shows how to establish a new ingress DiffServ policy
named "DELL."
console(config)#policy-map DELL in
console(config-policy-classmap)#
QoS Commands
669
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 670 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
redirect
Use the redirect command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to
specify that all incoming packets for the associated traffic stream are
redirected to a specific egress interface (physical port or port-channel).
Syntax
redirect interface
•
interface — Specifies any valid interface. Interface is Ethernet port or
port-channel (Range: po1-po32 or gi1/0/1-gi1/0/24)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to redirect incoming packets to port 1/0/1.
console(config-policy-classmap)#redirect 1/0/1
service-policy
Use the service-policy command in either Global Configuration mode (for all
system interfaces) or Interface Configuration mode (for a specific interface)
to attach a policy to an interface. To return to the system default, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
service-policy {in|out} policymapname
no service-policy {in|out} policymapname
670
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 671 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
policymapname
Specifies the DiffServ policy name as a unique case-sensitive
alphanumeric string. (Range: 1–31 alphanumeric characters.)
in
Apply the policy on ingress.
out
Apply the policy on egress.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode (for all system interfaces)
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-channel) mode (for a specific
interface)
User Guidelines
This command effectively enables DiffServ on an interface. No separate
interface administrative mode command for DiffServ is available. Use the
policy-map command to configure the DiffServ policy. The service-policy
direction must catch the direction given for the policy map.
Ensure that no attributes within the policy definition exceed the capabilities
of the interface. When a policy is attached to an interface successfully, any
attempt to change the policy definition, such that it would result in a
violation of the interface capabilities, causes the policy change attempt to
fail. ACLs and DiffServ policies may not both exist on the same interface in
the same direction.
Example
The following example shows how to attach a service policy named "DELL" to
all interfaces.
console(config)#service-policy DELL
QoS Commands
671
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 672 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show class-map
Use the show class-map command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all
configuration information for the specified class.
Syntax
show class-map [classname]
•
classname — Specifies the valid name of an existing DiffServ class.
(Range: 1–31 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays all the configuration information for the class
named "Dell".
console#show class-map
Class L3
Class Name
Type
Proto
Reference Class Name
------------------------------- ----- ----- ---------------------------ipv4
All
ipv4
ipv6
All
ipv6
stop_http_class
All
ipv6
match_icmp6
All
ipv6
console#show class-map ipv4
672
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 673 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Class Name..................................... ipv4
Class Type..................................... All
Class Layer3 Protocol.......................... ipv4
Match Criteria
Values
---------------------------- ------------------------------------Source IP Address
2.2.2.2 (255.255.255.0)
console#show class-map stop_http_class
Class Name..................................... stop_http_class
Class Type..................................... All
Class Layer3 Protocol.......................... ipv6
Match Criteria
Values
---------------------------- ------------------------------------Source IP Address
2001:DB8::/32
Source Layer 4 Port
80(http/www)
show classofservice dot1p-mapping
Use the show classofservice dot1p-mapping command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display the current Dot1p (802.1p) priority mapping to internal
traffic classes for a specific interface.
Syntax
show classofservice dot1p-mapping [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | portchannel port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
QoS Commands
673
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 674 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
If the interface is specified, the 802.1p mapping table of the interface is
displayed. If omitted, the most recent global configuration settings are
displayed.
Example
The following example displays the dot1p traffic class mapping and user
priorities.
console#show classofservice dot1p-mapping
User Priority
Traffic Class
-------------
---------------
0
1
1
1
2
6
3
4
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
The following table lists the parameters in the example and gives a
description of each.
Parameter
Description
User Priority
The 802.1p user priority value.
Traffic Class
The traffic class internal queue identifier to which
the user priority value is mapped.
674
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 675 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping
Use the show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display the current IP DSCP mapping to internal traffic classes for a
specific interface.
Syntax
show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping
•
Command is supported only globally.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
Example
console#show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping
IP DSCP
Traffic Class
-------------
-------------
0(be/cs0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
QoS Commands
675
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 676 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
8(cs1)
0
9
0
10(af11)
0
11
0
12(af12)
0
13
0
14(af13)
0
15
0
16(cs2)
0
17
0
18(af21)
0
19
0
--More-- or (q)uit
676
20(af22)
0
21
0
22(af23)
0
23
0
24(cs3)
1
25
1
26(af31)
1
27
1
28(af32)
1
29
1
30(af33)
1
31
1
32(cs4)
2
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 677 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
33
2
34(af41)
2
35
2
36(af42)
2
37
2
38(af43)
2
39
2
40(cs5)
2
41
2
42
2
--More-- or (q)uit
43
2
44
2
45
2
46(ef)
2
47
2
48(cs6)
3
49
3
50
3
51
3
52
3
53
3
54
3
55
3
56(cs7)
3
57
3
QoS Commands
677
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 678 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
58
3
59
3
60
3
61
3
62
3
63
3
console#
show classofservice trust
Use the show classofservice trust command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the current trust mode setting for a specific interface.
Syntax
show classofservice trust [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
If the interface is specified, the port trust mode of the interface is displayed.
If omitted, the port trust mode for global configuration is shown.
Example
The following example displays the current trust mode settings for the
specified port.
console#show classofservice trust 1/0/2
Class of Service Trust Mode: Dot1P
678
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 679 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show diffserv
Use the show diffserv command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
DiffServ general information, which includes the current administrative
mode setting as well as the current and maximum number of DiffServ
components.
Syntax
show diffserv
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the DiffServ information.
console#show diffserv
DiffServ Admin mode.......................... Enable
Class Table Size Current/Max................. 5 / 25
Class Rule Table Size Current/Max............ 6 / 150
Policy Table Size Current/Max................ 2 / 64
Policy Instance Table Size Current/Max....... 2 / 640
Policy Attribute Table Size Current/Max...... 2 / 1920
Service Table Size Current/Max............... 26 / 214
QoS Commands
679
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 680 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show diffserv service interface
Use this command in Privileged EXEC mode to display policy service
information for the specified interface.
Syntax
show diffserv service interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port} {in|out}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
in
Show ingress policies.
out
Show engress policies.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show diffserv service interface
gigabitethernet 1/0/1 in
DiffServ Admin Mode........................... Enable
Interface..................................... 1/0/1
Direction..................................... In
680
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 681 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
No policy is attached to this interface in this
direction.
show diffserv service interface port-channel
Syntax Description
show diffserv service interface port-channel channel-group {in|out}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
channel-group
A valid port-channel in the system. (Range: 1–18)
in
Show ingress policies.
out
Show engress policies.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
Not applicable
Example
console#show diffserv service interface port-channel 1 in
DiffServ Admin Mode........................... Enable
Interface..................................... po1
Direction..................................... In
No policy is attached to this interface in this direction
QoS Commands
681
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 682 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show diffserv service brief
Use the show diffserv service brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display all interfaces in the system to which a DiffServ policy has been
attached.
Syntax
show diffserv service brief
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to display all interfaces in the system to
which a DiffServ policy has been attached.
console# show diffserv service brief
Interface
Direction
-----------
----------- ------------ -------------------
1/0/1
in
OperStatus
Down
Policy Name
DELL
show interfaces cos-queue
Use the show interfaces cos-queue command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the class-of-service queue configuration for the specified interface.
Syntax
show interfaces cos-queue [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel
port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}]
682
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 683 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
If the interface is specified, the class-of-service queue configuration of the
interface is displayed. If omitted, the most recent global configuration
settings are displayed.
Examples
The following example displays the COS configuration with no unit/slot/port
or port-channel parameter.
console#show interfaces cos-queue
Global Configuration
Interface Shaping Rate......................... 0
Queue Id
Min. Bandwidth
Management Type
Scheduler Type
Queue
--------
--------------
--------------
--------------
0
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
1
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
2
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
3
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
4
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
5
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
6
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
This example displays the COS configuration for the specified interface 1/0/1.
QoS Commands
683
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 684 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show interfaces cos-queue gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Interface...................................... 1/0/1
Interface Shaping Rate......................... 0
Queue Id
Min. Bandwidth
Management Type
Scheduler Type
Queue
--------
--------------
--------------
--------------
0
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
1
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
2
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
3
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
4
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
5
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
6
0
Weighted
Tail Drop
The following table lists the parameters in the examples and gives a
description of each.
Parameter
Description
Interface
The port of the interface. If displaying the global
configuration, this output line is replaced with a
global configuration indication.
Intf Shaping Rate
The maximum transmission bandwidth limit for
the interface as a whole. It is independent of any
per-queue maximum bandwidth values in effect
for the interface. This value is a configured value.
Queue Mgmt Type
The queue depth management technique used for
all queues on this interface.
Queue
An interface supports n queues numbered 0 to
(n-1).The specific n value is platform-dependent.
Internal egress queue of the interface; queues 0–6
are available.
684
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 685 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Minimum Bandwidth
The minimum transmission bandwidth guarantee
for the queue, expressed as a percentage. A value of
0 means bandwidth is not guaranteed and the
queue operates using best-effort. This value is a
configured value.
Scheduler Type
Indicates whether this queue is scheduled for
transmission using a strict priority or a weighted
scheme. This value is a configured value.
show interfaces random-detect
Use the show interfaces random-detect command in Privileged EXEC mode
to display WRED policy on an interface.
Syntax
show interfaces random-detect interface-id
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Specify an interface type. Valid interfaces include physical ports
and port channels.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
Use the show interfaces cos-queue command to show the global or per
interface scheduler type and queue management types.
QoS Commands
685
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 686 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show policy-map
Use the show policy-map command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all
configuration information for the specified policy.
Syntax
show policy-map [policyname]
•
policyname — Specifies the name of a valid existing DiffServ policy.
(Range: 1-31)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the DiffServ information.
console#show policy-map
Policy Name
Policy Type
Class Members
-----------
-----------
-------------
POLY1
xxx
DELL
xxx
DellClass
DellClass
show policy-map interface
Use the show policy-map interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display policy-oriented statistics information for the specified interface.
686
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 687 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show policy-map interface {gigabithethernet | tengigabitethernet
unit/slot/port} {in|out}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
in
Show inbound service policies.
out
Show outbound service policies.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the statistics information for port 1/0/1.
console#show policy-map interface 1/0/1 in
Interface..................................... 1/0/1
Operational Status............................ Down
Policy Name................................... DELL
Interface Summary:
Class Name.................................... murali
In Discarded Packets.......................... 0
Class Name.................................... test
In Discarded Packets.......................... 0
Class Name................................... DELL1
QoS Commands
687
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 688 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
In Discarded Packets......................... 0
Class Name................................... DELL
In Discarded Packets......................... 0
show service-policy
Use the show service-policy command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a
summary of policy-oriented statistics information for all interfaces.
Syntax
show service-policy
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays a summary of policy-oriented statistics
information.
console#show service-policy
Intf
Oper
Policy
Stat
Name
------ ----- ------------------------------1/0/1
Down
DELL
1/0/2
Down
DELL
1/0/3
Down
DELL
1/0/4
Down
DELL
688
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 689 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1/0/5
Down
DELL
1/0/6
Down
DELL
1/0/7
Down
DELL
1/0/8
Down
DELL
1/0/9
Down
DELL
1/0/10
Down
DELL
traffic-shape
Use the traffic-shape command in Global Configuration mode and Interface
Configuration mode to specify the maximum transmission bandwidth limit
for the interface as a whole. This process, also known as rate shaping, has the
effect of smoothing temporary traffic bursts over time so that the transmitted
traffic rate is bounded. To restore the default interface shaping rate value, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
traffic-shape bw kbps
no traffic-shape
•
bw — Maximum transmission bandwidth value expressed in Kbps.
(Range: 64 - 4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
QoS Commands
689
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 690 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the setting of traffic-shape to a maximum
bandwidth of 1024 Kbps.
console(config-if-1/0/1)#traffic-shape 1024 kbps
690
QoS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 691 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
32
RADIUS Commands
Managing and determining the validity of users in a large network can be
significantly simplified by making use of a single database of accessible
information supplied by an Authentication Server. These servers commonly
use the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) protocol as
defined by RFC 2865.
RADIUS permits access to a user’s authentication and configuration
information contained on the server only when requests are received from a
client that shares an encrypted secret with the server. This secret is never
transmitted over the network in an attempt to maintain a secure
environment. Any requests from clients that are not appropriately configured
with the secret or access from unauthorized devices are silently discarded by
the server.
RADIUS conforms to a client/server model with secure communications
using UDP as a transport protocol. It is extremely flexible, supporting a
variety of methods to authenticate and statistically track users. It is very
extensible allowing for new methods of authentication to be added without
disrupting existing network functionality.
PowerConnect supports a RADIUS client in conformance with RFC 2865 and
accounting functions in conformance with RFC2866. The RADIUS client
will apply user policies under control of the RADIUS server, e.g. password
lockout or login time of day restrictions. The RADIUS client supports up to
32 named authentication and accounting servers.
Table 32-1below indicates the RADIUS attributes supported by various
PowerConnect switch service. Administrators may configure these attributes
on the RADIUS server(s) when utilizing the swith RADIUS service.
Table 32-1. RADIUS Attributes Supported by PowerConnect Switch Service
Type RADIUS Attribute Name
802.1X
User Manager Captive Portal
1
USER-NAME
Yes
No
No
2
USER-PASSWORD
Yes
No
No
RADIUS Commands
691
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 692 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Table 32-1. RADIUS Attributes Supported by PowerConnect Switch Service
Type RADIUS Attribute Name
802.1X
User Manager Captive Portal
4
NAS-IP-ADDRESS
Yes
No
No
5
NAS-PORT
Yes
No
No
6
SERVICE-TYPE
No
Yes
No
11
FILTER-ID
Yes
No
No
12
FRAMED-MTU
Yes
No
No
18
REPLY-MESSAGE
Yes
Yes
No
24
STATE
Yes
Yes
No
25
CLASS
Yes
No
No
26
VENDOR-SPECIFIC
No
No
Yes
27
SESSION-TIMEOUT
Yes
No
Yes
28
IDLE-TIMEOUT
No
No
Yes
29
TERMINATION-ACTION
Yes
No
No
30
CALLED-STATION-ID
Yes
No
No
31
CALLING-STATION-ID
Yes
No
No
32
NAS-IDENTIFIER
Yes
No
No
40
ACCT-STATUS-TYPE
Set by
RADIUS
client for
Accounting
No
No
42
ACCT-INPUT-OCTETS
Yes
No
No
43
ACCT-OUTPUT-OCTETS
Yes
No
No
44
ACCT-SESSION-ID
Set by
RADIUS
client for
Accounting
No
No
46
ACCT-SESSION-TIME
Yes
No
No
49
ACCT-TERMINATE-CAUSE
Yes
No
No
52
ACCT-INPUT-GIGAWORDS
Yes
No
No
53
ACCT-OUTPUT-GIGAWORDS Yes
No
No
692
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 693 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Table 32-1. RADIUS Attributes Supported by PowerConnect Switch Service
Type RADIUS Attribute Name
802.1X
User Manager Captive Portal
61
NAS-PORT-TYPE
Yes
No
No
64
TUNNEL-TYPE
Yes
No
No
65
TUNNEL-MEDIUM-TYPE
Yes
No
No
79
EAP-MESSAGE
Yes
No
No
80
MESSAGE-AUTHENTICATOR Set by
RADIUS
client for
Accounting
No
No
81
TUNNEL-PRIVATE-GROUP-ID Yes
No
No
The following attributes are processed in the RADIUS Access-Accept
message received from a RADIUS server:
•
NAS-PORT
–
•
REPLY-MESSAGE
–
•
Indication as to the action taken when the service is completed.
EAP-MESSAGE
–
•
Session timeout value for the session (in seconds). Used by both
802.1x and Captive Portal.
TERMINATION-ACTION
–
•
RADIUS server state. Transmitted in Access-Request and AccountingRequest messages.
SESSION-TIMEOUT
–
•
Trigger to respond to the Access-Accept message with an EAP
notification
STATE
–
•
ifIndex of the port to be authenticated
Contains an EAP message to be sent to the user. This is typically used
for MAB clients.
VENDOR-SPECIFIC
–
No actions configured at this time.
RADIUS Commands
693
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 694 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
FILTER-ID
–
•
TUNNEL-TYPE
–
•
Used to indicate that a VLAN is to be assigned to the user when set to
tunnel type VLAN (13).
TUNNEL-MEDIUM-TYPE
–
•
Name of the filter list for this user.
Used to indicate the tunnel medium type. Must be set to medium
type 802 (6) to enable VLAN assignment.
TUNNEL-PRIVATE-GROUP-ID
–
Used to indicate the VLAN to be assigned to the user. May be a string
which matches a preconfigured VLAN name or a VLAN id. If a VLAN
id is given, the string must only contain decimal digits.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
aaa accounting network
default start-stop group
radius
primary
radius-server timeout
acct-port
priority
retransmit
auth-port
radius-server deadtime
show aaa servers
deadtime
radius-server host
show radius statistics
key
radius-server key
source-ip
msgauth
radius-server retransmit
timeout
name (RADIUS server)
radius-server source-ip
usage
694
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 695 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
aaa accounting network default start-stop group
radius
Use the aaa accounting network default start-stop group radius command to
enable RADIUS accounting on the switch. Use the “no” form of this
command to disable RADIUS accounting.
Syntax
aaa accounting network default start-stop group radius
no aaa accounting network default start-stop group radius
Default Configuration
RADIUS accounting is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#aaa accounting network default startstop group radius
acct-port
Use the acct-port command to set the port that connects to the RADIUS
accounting server. Use the "no" form of this command to reset the port to the
default.
Syntax
acct-port port
no acct-port
•
port — The layer 4 port number of the accounting server (Range: 1 65535).
RADIUS Commands
695
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 696 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default value of the port number is 1813.
Command Mode
Radius (accounting) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets port number 56 for accounting requests.
console(config)#radius-server host acct 3.2.3.2
console(Config-acct-radius)#acct-port 56
auth-port
Use the auth-port command in Radius mode to set the port number for
authentication requests of the designated Radius server.
Syntax
auth-port auth-port-number
•
auth-port-number — Port number for authentication requests. (Range: 1 65535)
Default Configuration
The default value of the port number is 1812.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
The host is not used for authentication if set to 0.
User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before
executing this command.
696
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 697 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the port number 2412 for authentication
requests.
console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123
console(config-radius)#auth-port 2412
deadtime
Use the deadtime command in Radius mode to configure the minimum
amount of time to wait before attempting to re-contact an unresponsive
RADIUS server. If a RADIUS server is currently active and responsive, that
server will be used until it no longer responds. RADIUS servers whose
deadtime interval has not expired are skipped when searching for a new
RADIUS server to contact.
Syntax
deadtime deadtime
•
deadtime — The amount of time that the unavailable server is skipped
over. (Range: 0-2000 minutes)
Default Configuration
The default deadtime interval is 0 minutes.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
If only one RADIUS server is configured, it is recommended to use a
deadtime interval of 0.
Example
The following example specifies a deadtime interval of 60 minutes.
console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123
console(config-radius)#deadtime 60
RADIUS Commands
697
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 698 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
key
Use the key command to specify the encryption key which is shared with the
RADIUS server. Use the "no" form of this command to remove the key.
Syntax
key key-string
• key-string — A string specifying the encryption key (Range: 0 - 128
characters).
Default Configuration
There is no key configured by default.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example specifies an authentication and encryption key of
“lion-king”.
console(config)#radius-server host acct 3.2.3.2
console(Config-acct-radius)#key keyacct
msgauth
Use the msgauth command to enable the message authenticator attribute to
be used for the RADIUS Authenticating server being configured. Use the
“no” form of this command to disable the message authenticator attribute.
Syntax
msgauth
no msgauth
698
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 699 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The message authenticator attribute is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(Config-auth-radius)#msgauth
name (RADIUS server)
Use the name command to assign a name to a RADIUS server. Use the no
form of the command to return the name to the default (unspecified). The
no form of the command does not require the user to enter the configured
name.
Syntax
name servername
no name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
servername
The name for the RADIUS server (Range: 1 - 32 characters).
Default Configuration
The default RADIUS server name is Default-RADIUS-Server.
Command Mode
Radius Config mode
RADIUS Commands
699
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 700 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Names may only be set for authentication servers, not for accounting servers.
Names may consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, dash and
blanks.Embed the name in double quotes to use a name with blanks.
NOTE: When multiple radius servers are configured with different names, e.g..
ServerName is name1 and address is 1.1.1.1
ServerName is name2 and address is 1.1.1.2
The radius request is always sent to the first ordered name server list, i.e. name1 server
list would be tried before moving on to name2. Even if the priority value of servers in
name2 is lower (lower value indicates high priority) the request would be sent to the
name1 servers. If for name1 list, the configured servers fail to respond, the request
is sent to the second configured name list.
Within the same server list , the first primary server would be tried. You can have multiple
secondary servers in the same name list. From the multiple secondary servers, the
one with the lowest priority value would be tried. For a different named server list,
the server name would be based on lexicographic order. For e.g.. if name9, name1,
name6 are configured in this order, name1, then name6, then name9 would be tried.
Example
console(config)#radius-server host 44.44.44.44
console(Config-auth-radius)#name NAME
console(Config-auth-radius)#no name
primary
Use the primary command to specify that a configured server should be the
primary server in the group of authentication servers which have the same
server name. Multiple primary servers can be configured for each group of
servers which have the same name. When the RADIUS client has to perform
transactions with an authenticating RADIUS server of the specified name, it
uses the primary server that has the specified server name by default. If it fails
to communicate with the primary server for any reason, it uses the backup
servers configured with the same server name. These backup servers are
identified as the “Secondary” type.
700
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 701 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
primary
Default Configuration
There is no primary authentication server by default.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(Config-auth-radius)#primary
priority
Use the priority command in Radius mode to specify the order in which the
servers are to be used, with 0 being the highest priority.
Syntax
priority priority
•
priority — Sets server priority level. (Range 0-65535)
Default Configuration
The default priority is 0.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before
executing this command.
RADIUS Commands
701
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 702 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example specifies a priority of 10 for the designated server.
console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123
console(config-radius)#priority 10
radius-server deadtime
Use the radius-server deadtime command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the minimum amount of time to wait before attempting to
recontact an unresponsive RADIUS server. If a RADIUS server is currently
active and responsive, that server will be used until it no longer responds.
RADIUS servers whose deadtime interval has not expired are skipped when
searching for a new RADIUS server to contact. To set the deadtime to 0, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
radius-server deadtime deadtime
no radius-server deadtime
•
deadtime — Length of time in minutes, for which a Radius server is
skipped over by transaction requests. (Range: 0–2000 minutes). Deadtime
is used to mark an unavailable Radius server as dead until this userconfigured time expires. Deadtime is configurable on a Radius server basis.
Default Configuration
The default dead time is 0 minutes.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If only one RADIUS server is configured, it is recommended that the
deadtime interval be left at 0.
702
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 703 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the minimum interval for a RADIUS server will
not be contacted after becoming unresponsive.
console(config)#radius-server deadtime 10
radius-server host
Use the radius-server host command in Global Configuration mode to specify
a RADIUS server host and enter RADIUS Configuration mode. To delete the
specified Radius host, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
radius-server host [ acct | auth ] { ip–address | hostname }
no radius-server host [ acct | auth ] { ip–address | hostname }
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
acct | auth
The type of server (accounting or authentication).
ip–address
The RADIUS server host IP address.
hostname
Host name of the Radius server host. (Range: 1–255
characters).
Default Configuration
The default server type is authentication. The default server name is Default
RADIUS Server. The default port number is 1812 for an authentication
server and 1813 for an accounting server.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Radius servers are keyed by the host name, therefore it is advisable to use
unique server host names.
RADIUS Commands
703
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 704 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example specifies a Radius server host with the following
characteristics:
Server host IP address — 192.168.10.1
console(config)#radius-server host 192.168.10.1
radius-server key
Use the radius-server key command in Global Configuration mode to set the
authentication and encryption key for all Radius communications between
the switch and the Radius server. To reset to the default, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
radius-server key [key-string]
no radius-server key
•
key-string — Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all Radius
communications between the switch and the Radius server. This key must
match the encryption used on the Radius server. (Range: 1-128 characters)
Default Configuration
The default is an empty string.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the authentication and encryption key for all
Radius communications between the device and the Radius server to “dellserver.”
console(config)#radius-server key dell-server
704
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 705 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
radius-server retransmit
Use the radius-server retransmit command in Global Configuration mode to
specify the number of times the Radius client will retransmit requests to the
Radius server. To reset the default configuration, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
radius-server retransmit retries
no radius-server retransmit
•
retries — Specifies the retransmit value. (Range: 1–10)
Default Configuration
The default is 3 attempts.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the number of times the Radius client
attempts to retransmit requests to the Radius server to 5 attempts.
console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5
radius-server source-ip
Use the radius-server source-ip command in Global Configuration mode to
specify the source IP address used for communication with Radius servers. To
return to the default, use the no form of this command. 0.0.0.0 is interpreted
as a request to use the IP address of the outgoing IP interface.
Syntax
radius-server source-ip source
RADIUS Commands
705
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 706 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no radius-server source-ip
•
source — Specifies the source IP address.
Default Configuration
The default IP address is the outgoing IP interface.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the source IP address used for
communication with Radius servers to 10.1.1.1.
console(config)#radius-server source-ip 10.1.1.1
radius-server timeout
Use the radius-server timeout command in Global Configuration mode to set
the interval for which a switch waits for a server host to reply. To restore the
default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
radius-server timeout timeout
no radius-server timeout
•
timeout — Specifies the timeout value in seconds. (Range: 1–30)
Default Configuration
The default value is 3 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
706
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 707 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the interval for which a switch waits for a server
host to reply to 5 seconds.
console(config)#radius-server timeout 5
retransmit
Use the retransmit command in Radius mode to specify the number of times
the Radius client retransmits requests to the Radius server.
Syntax
retransmit retries
•
retries — Specifies the retransmit value. (Range: 1-10 attempts)
Default Configuration
The default number for attempts is 3.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before
executing this command.
Example
The following example of the retransmit command specifies five retries.
console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123
console(config-radius)#retransmit 5
RADIUS Commands
707
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 708 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show aaa servers
Use the show aaa servers command to display the list of configured RADIUS
servers and the values configured for the global parameters of the RADIUS
client.
Syntax
show aaa servers [accounting | authentication ] [name [servername ]]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
accounting
This optional parameter will cause accounting servers to be
displayed.
authentication
This optional parameter will cause authentication servers to be
displayed.
name
This optional parameter will cause the server names to be
displayed instead of the server configuration parameters.
servername
Will cause only the server(s) with server-name name to be
displayed. There are no global parameters displayed when this
parameter is specified.
Default Configuration
Authentication servers are displayed by default.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
Field
Description
Configured
Authentication Servers
The number of RADIUS Authentication servers that have
been configured.
708
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 709 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Configured Accounting
Servers
The number of RADIUS Accounting servers that have
been configured.
Named Authentication
Server Groups
The number of configured named RADIUS server groups.
Named Accounting
Server Groups
The number of configured named RADIUS server groups.
Timeout
The configured timeout value, in seconds, for request
retransmissions.
Retransmit
The configured value of the maximum number of times a
request packet is retransmitted.
Deadtime
The length of time an unavailable RADIUS server is
skipped.
RADIUS Accounting
Mode
A Global parameter to indicate whether the accounting
mode for all the servers is enabled or not.
RADIUS Attribute 4
Mode
A Global parameter to indicate whether the NAS-IPAddress attribute has been enabled to use in RADIUS
requests.
RADIUS Attribute 4
Value
A Global parameter that specifies the IP address to be
used in NAS-IP-Address attribute to be used in RADIUS
requests.
Example
console#show aaa servers
IP address
Type Port TimeOut Retran. DeadTime Source IP
Prio. Usage
---------------- ----- ----- ------- ------- -------- ---------- ----- -----6.6.6.6
5.5.5.5
4.4.4.4
3.3.3.3
2.2.2.2
1.1.1.1
Auth
Auth
Auth
Auth
Auth
Acct
1812
1812
1812
1812
1812
1813
Global
Global
Global
Global
Global
N/A
Global
Global
Global
Global
Global
N/A
Global
Global
Global
Global
Global
N/A
Global
Global
Global
Global
Global
N/A
0
0
0
0
0
N/A
all
all
all
all
all
N/A
Global values
-------------------------------------------Number of Configured Authentication Servers.... 5
Number of Configured Accounting Servers........ 1
RADIUS Commands
709
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 710 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Number of Named Authentication Server Groups...
Number of Named Accounting Server Groups.......
Number of Retransmits..........................
Timeout Duration...............................
Deadtime.......................................
Source IP......................................
RADIUS Accounting Mode.........................
RADIUS Attribute 4 Mode........................
--More-- or (q)uit
RADIUS Attribute 4 Value.......................
2
1
3
15
0
0.0.0.0
Disable
Disable
0.0.0.0
console#show aaa servers name
Server Name
Host Address
Port
Secret
Configured
-------------------------------- ------------------------ ------ ---------Default-RADIUS-Server
4.4.4.4
1812
No
test
6.6.6.6
1812
No
console#show radius-servers
IP address
Prio. Usage
Type
Port
TimeOut Retran. DeadTime
Source IP
------------- ----- ----- ------- ------- -------- ------------- ---- -----
10.27.5.157
all
Auth 1812 Global Global Global
Global values
Configured Authentication Servers : 1
Configured Accounting Servers : 0
Named Authentication Server Groups : 1
Named Accounting Server Groups : 0
Timeout : 3
Retransmit : 3
Deadtime : 0
Source IP : 0.0.0.0
RADIUS Attribute 4 Mode : Disable
RADIUS Attribute 4 Value : 0.0.0.0
710
RADIUS Commands
10.27.65.13
0
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 711 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show radius-servers accounting name
Server Name
Host Address
Port
Type
---------------------- -------------- ------ ---------Default-RADIUS-Server
2.2.2.2
1813
Secondary
console#show radius-servers name Default-RADIUS-Server
RADIUS Server Name.......................... Default-RADIUS-Server
Current Server IP Address................... 1.1.1.1
Retransmits................................. 4
Timeout..................................... 5
Deadtime.................................... 0
Port........................................ 1812
Source IP................................... 0.0.0.0
Secret Configured........................... No
Message Authenticator....................... Enable
show radius statistics
Use the show radius statistics command to show the statistics for an
authentication or accounting server.
Syntax
show radius statistics [accounting | authentication ] [{ipaddress | hostname
| name servername }]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
accounting |
authentication
The type of server (accounting or authentication).
RADIUS Commands
711
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 712 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
ipaddress
The RADIUS server host IP address.
hostname
Host name of the Radius server host. (Range: 1–158
characters). The command allows spaces in the host
name when specified in double quotes. For example,
console(config)#snmp-server host "host name"
servername
The alias used to identify the server.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed for accounting servers:
Field
Description
RADIUS
Name of the accounting server.
Accounting Server
Name
Server Host
Address
IP address of the host.
Round Trip Time
The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most
recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that
matched it from this RADIUS accounting server.
Requests
The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this
server not including the retransmissions.
Retransmissions
The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets
retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server.
Responses
The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port
from this server.
712
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 713 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Malformed
Responses
The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response
packets received from this server. Malformed packets include
packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or signature
attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed
accounting responses.
Bad
Authenticators
The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets
containing invalid authenticators received from this accounting
server.
Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets destined
for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response.
Timeouts
The number of accounting timeouts on this server.
Unknown Types
The number of packets unknown type which were received from
this server on accounting port.
Packets Dropped
The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on
accounting port and dropped for some other reason.
The following fields are displayed for authentication servers:
Field
Description
RADIUS Server
Name
Name of the authenticating server.
Server Host
Address
IP address of the host.
Access Requests
The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this
server. This number does not include retransmissions.
Access
Retransmissions
The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted
to this RADIUS authentication server.
Access Accepts
The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets, including both
valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server.
Access Rejects
The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets, including both
valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server.
Access Challenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets, including
both valid and invalid packets, that were received from this
server.
RADIUS Commands
713
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 714 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Malformed Access The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets
Responses
received from this server. Malformed packets include packets
with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or signature attributes
or unknown types are not included as malformed access
responses.
Bad
Authenticators
The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing
invalid authenticators or signature attributes received from this
server.
Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for
this server that have not yet timed out or received a response.
Timeouts
The number of authentication timeouts to this server.
Unknown Types
The number of packets unknown type which were received from
this server on the authentication port.
Packets Dropped
The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on
authentication port and dropped for some other reason.
Example
console#show radius statistics accounting 192.168.37.200
RADIUS Accounting Server Name.................
Default_RADIUS_Server
Host Address..................................
192.168.37.200
Round Trip Time............................... 0.00
Requests...................................... 0
Retransmissions............................... 0
Responses..................................... 0
Malformed Responses........................... 0
Bad Authenticators............................ 0
Pending Requests.............................. 0
Timeouts...................................... 0
Unknown Types................................. 0
714
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 715 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Packets Dropped............................... 0
console#show radius statistics name Default_RADIUS_Server
RADIUS Server Name............................
Default_RADIUS_Server
Server Host Address...........................
192.168.37.200
Access Requests............................... 0.00
Access Retransmissions........................ 0
Access Accepts................................ 0
Access Rejects................................ 0
Access Challenges............................. 0
Malformed Access Responses.................... 0
Bad Authenticators............................ 0
Pending Requests.............................. 0
Timeouts...................................... 0
Unknown Types................................. 0
Packets Dropped............................... 0
source-ip
Use the source-ip command in Radius mode to specify the source IP address
to be used for communication with Radius servers. 0.0.0.0 is interpreted as a
request to use the IP address of the outgoing IP interface.
Syntax
source-ip source
•
source — A valid source IP address.
Default Configuration
The IP address is of the outgoing IP interface.
RADIUS Commands
715
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 716 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before
executing this command.
Example
The following example specifies 10.240.1.23 as the source IP address.
console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123
console(config-radius)#source-ip 10.240.1.23
timeout
Use the timeout command in Radius mode to set the timeout value in
seconds for the designated Radius server.
Syntax
timeout timeout
•
timeout — Timeout value in seconds for the specified server. (Range: 1-30
seconds.)
Default Configuration
The default value is 3 seconds.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before
executing this command.
716
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 717 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example specifies the timeout setting for the designated
Radius Server.
console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123
console(config-radius)#timeout 20
usage
Use the usage command in Radius mode to specify the usage type of the
server.
Syntax
usage type
• type — Variable can be one of the following values: login, 802.1x or all.
Default Configuration
The default variable setting is all.
Command Mode
Radius mode
User Guidelines
User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before
executing this command.
Example
The following example specifies usage type login.
console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123
console(config-radius)#usage login
RADIUS Commands
717
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 718 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
718
RADIUS Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 719 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Spanning Tree Commands
33
The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) component complies with
IEEE 802.1s by efficiently navigating VLAN traffic over separate interfaces
for multiple instances of Spanning Tree. IEEE 802.1D, Spanning Tree and
IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree are supported through the IEEE 802.1s
implementation. The difference between the RSTP and STP (IEEE 802.1D)
is the ability to configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports
that are connected to end stations. The difference enables RSTP to rapidly
transition to the Forwarding state and to suppress the Topology Change
Notification PDUs, where possible.
A VLAN ID does not have to be pre-configured before mapping it to an MST
instance.
Management of MSTP is compliant with the requirements of RFC5060.
The following features are supported by PowerConnect MSTP:
STP Loop Guard - The Loop Guard feature is an enhancement of the
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. Loop guard protects a network from
forwarding loops induced by BPDU packet loss. It can be configured to
prevent a blocked port from transitioning to the forwarding state when the
port stops receiving BPDUs for some reason (such as a uni-directional link
failure).
STP BPDU Guard - The STP BPDU guard allows the network administrator
to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology consistent
and predictable. The switches behind the edge ports that have STP BPDU
guard enabled are not able to influence the overall STP topology. At the
reception of BPDUs, the BPDU guard operation disables the port that is
configured with this option and transitions the port into disable state. This
would lead to administrative disable of the port.
STP Root Guard - The root guard ensures that the port on which root guard
is enabled is the designated port. In a root bridge ports are all designated
ports, unless two or more ports of the root bridge are connected together. If
the bridge receives superior STP BPDUs on a root guard enabled port, root
guard moves this port to a root inconsistent STP state. This root inconsistent
state is effectively equal to a listening state. No traffic is forwarded across this
Spanning Tree Commands
719
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 720 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
port. In this way, the root guard enforces the position of the root bridge. In
MSTP scenario the port may be designated in one of the instances while
being alternate in the CIST, and so on. Root guard is a per port (not a per port
per instance command) configuration so all the MSTP instances this port
participates in should not be in root role.
STP BPDU Filtering - STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge
ports. Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected to hosts
that typically drop BPDUs. If an operational edge port receives a BPDU, it
immediately loses its operational status. In that case, if BPDU filtering is
enabled on this port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port.
STP BPDU Flooding - STP BPDU flooding feature applies to the STP
disabled switch. To enable BPDU flooding on a port, STP should be disabled
on the switch administratively. When this feature is enabled on the switch, it
floods all the ports with the BPDU flood feature enabled on it.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear spanning-tree spanning-tree
detected-protocols auto-portfast
spanning-tree max- spanning-tree portfast
age
bpdufilter default
exit (mst)
spanning-tree bpdu spanning-tree max- spanning-tree portfast
flooding
hops
default
instance (mst)
spanning-tree
bpdu-protection
name (mst)
spanning-tree cost spanning-tree mst
configuration
spanning-tree priority
revision (mst)
spanning-tree
disable
spanning-tree mst
cost
spanning-tree tcnguard
show spanning-tree spanning-tree
forward-time
spanning-tree mst
port-priority
spanning-tree transmit
hold-count
show spanning-tree spanning-tree
summary
guard
spanning-tree mst
priority
spanning-tree
spanning-tree
portfast
720
spanning-tree
loopguard
Spanning Tree Commands
spanning-tree
mode
spanning-tree portpriority
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 721 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
Use the clear spanning-tree detected-protocols command in Privileged
EXEC mode to restart the protocol migration process (force the renegotiation
with neighboring switches) on all interfaces or on the specified interface.
Syntax
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
port-channel port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}]
Default Configuration
This command has no default setting.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This feature is used only when working in RSTP or MSTP mode.
Example
The following example restarts the protocol migration process (forces the
renegotiation with neighboring switches) on 1/0/1.
console#clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
gigabitethernet 1/0/1
exit (mst)
Use the exit command in MST mode to exit the MST configuration mode
and apply all configuration changes.
Syntax
exit
Default Configuration
MST configuration.
Spanning Tree Commands
721
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 722 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
MST mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to exit the MST configuration mode and
save changes.
console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration
console(config-mst)#exit
instance (mst)
Use the instance command in MST mode to map VLANS to an MST
instance.
Syntax
instance instance-id {add | remove} vlan vlan-range
•
instance-ID — ID of the MST instance. (Range: 1-15)
•
vlan-range — VLANs to be added to the existing MST instance. To specify
a range of VLANs, use a hyphen. To specify a series of VLANs, use a
comma. (Range: 1-4093)
Default Configuration
VLANs are mapped to the common and internal spanning tree (CIST)
instance (instance 0).
Command Mode
MST mode
User Guidelines
Before mapping VLANs to an instance use the spanning-tree mst enable
command to enable the instance.
722
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 723 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
All VLANs that are not explicitly mapped to an MST instance are mapped to
the common and internal spanning tree (CIST) instance (instance 0) and
cannot be unmapped from the CIST.
For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the
same VLAN mapping, the same configuration revision number, and the same
name.
PowerConnect MSTP supports mapping of VLANs to MST instances, even
though the underlying VLAN may not be defined on the switch. Traffic
received on VLANs not defined on the port received is dropped.
Example
The following example maps the entire range of VLANs to MST instances
(MST instance 0 is mapped to VLAN 1 by default). Additionally, two 10G
ports have some, but not all, of the VLANs mapped to MST instances.
console(config)#spanning-tree mode mst
console(config)#spanning-tree mst 1 priority 8192
console(config)#spanning-tree mst 2 priority 28672
console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration
console(config-mst)#instance 1 add vlan 2-199
console(config-mst)#instance 1 add vlan 350
console(config-mst)#instance 1 add vlan 400-449
console(config-mst)#instance 1 add vlan 500-1999
console(config-mst)#instance 1 add vlan 2200-2499
console(config-mst)#instance 1 add vlan 2600-2799
console(config-mst)#instance 1 add vlan 3000-4093
console(config-mst)#instance 2 add vlan 200-349
console(config-mst)#instance 2 add vlan 351-399
console(config-mst)#instance 2 add vlan 450-499
console(config-mst)#instance 2 add vlan 2000-2199
console(config-mst)#instance 2 add vlan 2500-2599
console(config-mst)#instance 2 add vlan 2800-2999
console(config-mst)#exit
Spanning Tree Commands
723
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 724 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface te1/1/1
console(config-if-Te1/1/1)#switchport mode trunk
console(config-if-Te1/1/1)#switchport trunk allowed vlan
add 2-150
console(config-if-Te1/1/1)#spanning-tree mst 1 portpriority 16
console(config-if-Te1/1/1)#interface te1/1/2
console(config-if-Te1/1/2)#switchport mode trunk
console(config-if-Te1/1/2)#switchport trunk allowed vlan
add 200-349
console(config-if-Te1/1/2)#spanning-tree mst 2 portpriority 16
console(config-if-Te1/1/2)#exit
name (mst)
Use the name command in MST mode to define the configuration name. To
return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
name string
• string — Case sensitive MST configuration name. (Range: 1-32
characters)
Default Configuration
Bridge address.
Command Mode
MST mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
724
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 725 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the configuration name to “region1”.
console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration
console(config-mst)#name region1
revision (mst)
Use the revision command in MST mode to identify the configuration
revision number. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
revision version
no revision
•
version — Configuration revision number. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Configuration
Revision number is 0.
Command Mode
MST mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the configuration revision to 1.
console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration
console(config-mst)#revision 1
show spanning-tree
Use the show spanning-tree command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the spanning-tree configuration.
Spanning Tree Commands
725
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 726 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show spanning-tree [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}] [instance instance-id]
show spanning-tree [detail] [active | blockedports] | [instance instance-id]
show spanning-tree mst-configuration
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
detail
Displays detailed information.
active
Displays active ports only.
blockedports
Displays blocked ports only.
mst-configuration
Displays the MST configuration identifier.
instance -id
ID of the spanning -tree instance.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples display spanning-tree information.
console#show spanning-tree
Spanning tree :Enabled - BPDU Flooding :Disabled - Portfast BPDU filtering
:Disabled - mode :rstp
CST Regional Root:
80:00:00:1E:C9:AA:AD:1B
Regional Root Path Cost:
0
ROOT ID
726
Priority
32768
Address
0010.1882.1C53
Path Cost
20000
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 727 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Root Port
Gi1/0/1
Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec TxHoldCount
6 sec
Bridge ID
Priority
32768
Address
001E.C9AA.AD1B
Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Interfaces
Name
State
------
-------- --------- --------- ---- ----- ----------
Prio.Nbr
Cost
Sts
Role
Restricted
Gi1/0/1
Enabled
128.1
20000
FWD
Root
No
Gi1/0/2
Enabled
128.2
0
DIS
Disb
No
Gi1/0/3
Enabled
128.3
0
DIS
Disb
No
Gi1/0/4
Enabled
128.4
0
DIS
Disb
No
console#show spanning-tree gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Port Gi1/0/1 Enabled
State: Forwarding
Role: Root
Port id: 128.1
Port Cost: 20000
Port Fast:
No
Root Protection: No
Designated bridge Priority: 32768
Address: 0010.1882.1C53
Designated port id: 128.48
Designated path cost: 0
CST Regional Root: 80:00:00:10:18:82:1C:53
CST Port Cost: 0
Root Guard..................................... FALSE
Loop Guard..................................... FALSE
TCN Guard...................................... FALSE
Auto Portfast.................................. TRUE
Port Up Time Since Counters Last Cleared....... 0 day 0 hr 17 min 1 sec
BPDU: sent 24, received 496
console#show spanning-tree detail
Spanning tree Enabled (BPDU flooding : Disabled) Portfast BPDU filtering
Disabled mode rstp
CST Regional Root:
80:00:00:1E:C9:AA:AD:1B
Regional Root Path Cost:
0
ROOT ID
Priority
32768
Address
0010.1882.1C53
Spanning Tree Commands
727
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 728 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Path Cost
20000
Root Port
Gi1/0/1
Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Bridge ID
Priority
32768
Address
001E.C9AA.AD1B
Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Number of topology changes 1 last change occurred 0d0h17m7s ago
Times: hold 6, hello 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Port Gi1/0/1 Enabled
State: Forwarding
Role: Root
Port id: 128.1
Port Cost: 20000
Root Protection: No
Designated bridge Priority: 32768
Address: 0010.1882.1C53
Designated port id: 128.48
Designated path cost: 0
CST Regional Root: 80:00:00:10:18:82:1C:53
CST Port Cost: 0
BPDU: sent 24, received 500
console#show spanning-tree detail active
Spanning tree Enabled (BPDU flooding : Disabled) Portfast BPDU filtering
Disabled mode rstp
CST Regional Root:
80:00:00:1E:C9:AA:AD:1B
Regional Root Path Cost:
0
ROOT ID
Priority
32768
Address
0010.1882.1C53
Path Cost
20000
Root Port
Gi1/0/1
Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Bridge ID
Priority
32768
Address
001E.C9AA.AD1B
Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Number of topology changes 1 last change occurred 0d0h17m15s ago
Times: hold 6, hello 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Port Gi1/0/1 Enabled
State: Forwarding
Role: Root
Port id: 128.1
Port Cost: 20000
Root Protection: No
728
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 729 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Designated bridge Priority: 32768
Address: 0010.1882.1C53
Designated port id: 128.48
Designated path cost: 0
CST Regional Root: 80:00:00:10:18:82:1C:53
CST Port Cost: 0
BPDU: sent 24, received 504
Port Gi1/0/5 Enabled
State: Forwarding
Role: Designated
Port id: 128.5
Port Cost: 20000
Root Protection: No
Designated bridge Priority: 32768
Address: 001E.C9AA.AD1B
Designated port id: 128.5
Designated path cost: 20000
CST Regional Root: 80:00:00:1E:C9:AA:AD:1B
CST Port Cost: 0
BPDU: sent 524, received 0
console#show spanning-tree detail blockedports
Spanning tree Enabled (BPDU flooding : Disabled) Portfast BPDU filtering
Disabled mode rstp
CST Regional Root:
80:00:00:1E:C9:AA:AD:1B
Regional Root Path Cost:
0
ROOT ID
Priority
32768
Address
0010.1882.1C53
Path Cost
20000
Root Port
Gi1/0/1
Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Bridge ID
Priority
32768
Address
001E.C9AA.AD1B
Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20
show spanning-tree summary
Use the show spanning-tree summary command to display spanning tree
settings and parameters for the switch.
Syntax
show spanning-tree summary
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Spanning Tree Commands
729
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 730 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
Field
Description
Spanning Tree Admin
Mode
Enabled or disabled
Spanning Tree Version
Version of 802.1 currently supported (IEEE 802.1s,
IEEE 802.1w, or IEEE 802.1d) based upon the mode
parameter.
BPDU Protection Mode
Enabled or disabled.
BPDU Filter Mode
Enabled or disabled.
BPDU Flooding Mode
Enabled or disabled.
Configuration Name
Identifier used to identify the configuration currently
being used.
Configuration Revision
Level
Identifier used to identify the configuration currently
being used.
Configuration Digest Key
A generated Key used in the exchange of the BPDUs.
Configuration Format
Selector
Specifies the version of the configuration format being
used in the exchange of BPDUs. The default value is
zero.
MST Instances
List of all multiple spanning tree instances configured
on the switch.
Example
console#show spanning-tree summary
Spanning Tree Adminmode........... Enabled
Spanning Tree Version............. IEEE 802.1w
BPDU Guard Mode................... Disabled
BPDU Flood Mode................... Disabled
730
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 731 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
BPDU Filter Mode.................. Disabled
Configuration Name................ 00-1E-C9-AA-AC-84
Configuration Revision Level...... 0
Configuration Digest Key..........
0xac36177f50283cd4b83821d8ab26de62
Configuration Format Selector..... 0
spanning-tree
Use the spanning-tree command in Global Configuration mode to enable
spanning-tree functionality. To disable spanning-tree functionality, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree
no spanning-tree
Default Configuration
Spanning-tree is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables spanning-tree functionality.
console(config)#spanning-tree
Spanning Tree Commands
731
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 732 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
spanning-tree auto-portfast
Use the spanning-tree auto-portfast command to set the port to auto portfast
mode. This enables the port to become a portfast port if it does not see any
BPDUs for 3 seconds. Use the “no” form of this command to disable auto
portfast mode.
Syntax
spanning-tree auto-portfast
no spanning-tree auto-portfast
Default Configuration
Auto portfast mode is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) mode
Usage Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enables spanning-tree functionality on gigabit
ethernet interface 4/0/1.
console#config
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 4/0/1
console(config-if-4/0/1)#spanning-tree auto-portfast
spanning-tree bpdu flooding
The spanning-tree bpdu flooding command allows flooding of BPDUs
received on non-spanning-tree ports to all other non-spanning-tree ports. Use
the “no” form of the command to disable flooding.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpdu flooding
732
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 733 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no spanning-tree bpdu flooding
Default Configuration
This feature is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#spanning-tree bpdu flooding
spanning-tree bpdu-protection
Use the spanning-tree bpdu-protection command in Global Configuration
mode to enable BPDU protection on a switch. Use the no form of this
command to resume the default status of BPDU protection function.
For an access layer device, the access port is generally connected to the user
terminal (such as a desktop computer) or file server directly and configured as
an edge port to implement the fast transition. When the port receives a
BPDU packet, the system sets it to non-edge port and recalculates the
spanning tree, which causes network topology flapping. In normal cases, these
ports do not receive any BPDU packets. However, someone may forge BPDU
to maliciously attack the switch and cause network flapping.
RSTP provides BPDU protection function against such attack. After BPDU
protection function is enabled on a switch, the system disables an edge port
that has received BPDU and notifies the network manager about it. The
disabled port can only be enabled by the no version of the command.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpdu-protection
no spanning-tree bpdu-protection
Spanning Tree Commands
733
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 734 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
BPDU protection is not enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables BPDU protection.
console(config)#spanning-tree bpdu-protection
spanning-tree cost
Use the spanning-tree cost command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the external spanning-tree path cost for a port. To return to the
default port path cost, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree cost cost
no spanning-tree cost
•
cost — The port path cost. (Range: 0–200,000,000)
Default Configuration
The default cost is 0, which signifies that the cost is automatically calculated
based on port speed.
734
•
10G Port path cost — 2000
•
Port Channel — 20,000
•
1000 mbps (giga) — 20,000
•
100 mbps — 200,000
•
10 mbps — 2,000,000
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 735 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command configures the external cost. Since by default each switch is in
its own region, the external cost is considered in determining the spanning
tree of the network.
This command is also used to configure the rstp path cost.
Example
The following example configures the spanning-tree cost on 1/0/5 to 35000.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if-1/0/5)#spanning-tree cost 35000
spanning-tree disable
Use the spanning-tree disable command in Interface Configuration mode to
disable spanning-tree on a specific port. To enable spanning-tree on a port,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree disable
no spanning-tree disable
Default Configuration
By default, all ports are enabled for spanning-tree.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Spanning Tree Commands
735
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 736 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example disables spanning-tree on 1/0/5.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if-1/0/5)#spanning-tree disable
spanning-tree forward-time
Use the spanning-tree forward-time command in Global Configuration
mode to configure the spanning-tree bridge forward time, which is the
amount of time a port remains in the listening and learning states before
entering the forwarding state.
To reset the default forward time, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree forward-time seconds
no spanning-tree forward-time
•
seconds — Time in seconds. (Range: 4–30)
Default Configuration
The default forwarding-time for IEEE Spanning-tree Protocol (STP) is 15
seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
When configuring the Forward-Time the following relationship should be
satisfied:
2*(Forward-Time - 1) >= Max-Age.
Example
The following example configures spanning-tree bridge forward time to 25
seconds.
console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 25
736
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 737 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
spanning-tree guard
The spanning-tree guard command selects whether loop guard or root guard
is enabled on an interface. If neither is enabled, the port operates in
accordance with the multiple spanning tree protocol. Use the “no” form of
this command to disable loop guard or root guard on the interface.
Syntax
spanning-tree guard { root | loop | none }
•
root — Enables root guard.
•
loop — Enables loop guard
•
none — Disables root and loop guard.
Default Configuration
Neither root nor loop guard is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example disables spanning-tree guard functionality on gigabit
ethernet interface 4/0/1.
console#config
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 4/0/1
console(config-if-4/0/1)#spanning-tree guard none
spanning-tree loopguard
Use the spanning-tree loopguard command to enable loop guard on all ports.
Use the “no” form of this command to disable loop guard on all ports.
Spanning Tree Commands
737
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 738 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
spanning-tree loopguard default
no spanning-tree loopguard default
Default Configuration
Loop guard is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example enables spanning-tree loopguard functionality on all
ports.
console(config)#spanning-tree loopguard default
spanning-tree max-age
Use the spanning-tree max-age command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the spanning-tree bridge maximum age. To reset the default
maximum age, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-age seconds
no spanning-tree max-age
•
seconds -Time in seconds. (Range: 6–40)
Default Configuration
The default max-age for IEEE STP is 20 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
738
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 739 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
When configuring the Max-Age the following relationships should be
satisfied:
2*(Forward-Time - 1) >= Max-Age
Max-Age >= 2*(Hello-Time + 1)
Example
The following example configures the spanning-tree bridge maximum-age to
10 seconds.
console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 10
spanning-tree max-hops
Use the spanning-tree max-hops command to set the MSTP Max Hops
parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree. Use the
“no” form of this command to reset the Max Hops to the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-hops hops
no spanning-tree max-hops
•
hops — The maximum number of hops to use (Range: 1–127).
Default Configuration
The Maximum number of hops is 20 by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#spanning-tree max-hops 32
Spanning Tree Commands
739
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 740 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
spanning-tree mode
Use the spanning-tree mode command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the spanning-tree protocol. To return to the default configuration,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp | mst}
no spanning-tree mode
•
stp — Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled.
•
rstp — Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is enabled.
•
mst — Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is enabled.
Default Configuration
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is supported.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
In RSTP mode, the switch would use STP when the neighbor switch is using
STP. In MSTP mode, the switch would use RSTP when the neighbor switch is
using RSTP and would use STP when the neighbor switch is using STP.
Example
The following example configures the spanning-tree protocol to MSTP.
console(config)#spanning-tree mode mst
spanning-tree mst configuration
Use the spanning-tree mst configuration command in Global Configuration
mode to enable configuring an MST region by entering the multiple
spanning-tree (MST) mode.
740
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 741 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
spanning-tree mst configuration
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the
same VLAN mapping, the same configuration revision number and the same
name.
Example
The following example configures an MST region.
console (config)#spanning-tree mst configuration
console (config-mst)#instance 1 add vlan 10-20
console (config-mst)#name region1
console (config-mst)#revision 1
spanning-tree mst cost
Use the spanning-tree mst cost command in Interface Configuration mode
to configure the internal path cost for multiple spanning tree (MST)
calculations. If a loop occurs, the spanning tree considers path cost when
selecting an interface to put in the forwarding state. To return to the default
port path cost, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance-id cost cost
no spanning-tree mst instance-id cost
•
instance-ID — ID of the spanning -tree instance. (Range: 1-15)
Spanning Tree Commands
741
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 742 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
cost — The port path cost. (Range: 0–200,000,000)
Default Configuration
The default value is 0, which signifies that the cost will be automatically
calculated based on port speed.
The default configuration is:
•
Ethernet (10 Mbps) — 2,000,000
•
Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps) — 200,000
•
Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps) — 20,000
•
Port-Channel — 20,000
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
MST instance id 0 is the common internal spanning tree instance (CIST).
Example
The following example configures the MSTP instance 1 path cost for
interface 1/0/9 to 4.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/9
console(config-if-1/0/9)#spanning-tree mst 1 cost 4
spanning-tree mst port-priority
Use the spanning-tree mst port-priority command in Interface Configuration
mode to configure port priority. To return to the default port priority, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority priority
no spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority
742
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 743 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
instance-id
ID of the spanning-tree instance. (Range: 1-4094)
priority
The port priority. (Range: 0-240 in multiples of 16.)
Default Configuration
The default port-priority for IEEE STP is 128.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
The priority will be set to the nearest multiple of 4096 if not an exact multiple
of 4096.
Example
The following example configures the port priority of gigabit Ethernet
interface 1/0/5 to 144.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority
144
spanning-tree mst priority
Use the spanning-tree mst priority command in Global Configuration mode
to set the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance. To return to
the default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance-id priority priority
no spanning-tree mst instance-id priority
Spanning Tree Commands
743
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 744 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
instance-id
ID of the spanning-tree instance. (Range: 1-4094)
priority
Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance.
This setting affects the likelihood that the switch is selected as
the root switch. A lower value increases the probability that the
switch is selected as the root switch. (Range: 0-61440)
Default Configuration
The default bridge priority for IEEE STP is 32768.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The priority value must be a multiple of 4096. The priority will be set to the
nearest multiple of 4096 if not an exact multiple of 4096.
The switch with the lowest priority is selected as the root of the spanning tree.
Example
The following example configures the spanning tree priority of instance 1 to
4096.
console(config)#spanning-tree mst 1 priority 4096
spanning-tree portfast
Use the spanning-tree portfast command in Interface Configuration mode to
enable PortFast mode. In PortFast mode, the interface is immediately put
into the forwarding state upon linkup, without waiting for the timer to expire.
To disable PortFast mode, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree portfast
no spanning-tree portfast
744
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 745 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
PortFast mode is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command only applies to access ports. The command is to be used only
with interfaces connected to end stations. Otherwise, an accidental topology
loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt switch and network
operations.
An interface with PortFast mode enabled is moved directly to the spanning
tree forwarding state when linkup occurs without waiting the standard
forward-time delay.
Example
The following example enables PortFast on 1/0/5.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if-1/0/5)#spanning-tree portfast
spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default
The spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default command discards BPDUs
received on spanning-tree ports in portfast mode. Use the “no” form of the
command to disable discarding.
Syntax
spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default
no spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default
Default Configuration
This feature is disabled by default.
Spanning Tree Commands
745
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 746 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example discards BPDUs received on spanning-tree ports in
portfast mode.
console#spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default
spanning-tree portfast default
Use the spanning-tree portfast default command to enable Portfast mode
only on access ports. Use the no form of this command to disable Portfast
mode on all ports.
Syntax
spanning-tree portfast default
no spanning-tree portfast default
Default Configuration
Portfast mode is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Usage Guidelines
This command only applies to access ports.
NOTE: This command should be used with care. An interface with
PortFast mode enabled is moved directly to the spanning tree forwarding
state when linkup occurs without waiting for the standard forward-time delay.
Setting a port connected to another switch into PortFast mode may cause an
accidental topology loop and disrupt switch and network operations.
746
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 747 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example enables Portfast mode on all access ports.
console(config)#spanning-tree portfast default
spanning-tree port-priority
Use the spanning-tree port-priority command in Interface Configuration
mode to configure port priority. To reset the default port priority, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree port-priority priority
no spanning-tree port-priority
•
priority — The port priority. (Range: 0–240)
Default Configuration
The default port-priority for IEEE STP is 128.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
The priority value must be a multiple of 16.
Example
The following example configures the spanning priority on 1/0/5 to 96.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if-1/0/5)#spanning-tree port-priority
96
Spanning Tree Commands
747
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 748 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
spanning-tree priority
Use the spanning-tree priority command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the spanning-tree priority. The priority value is used to determine
which bridge is elected as the root bridge. To reset the default spanning-tree
priority use the no form of this command.
Syntax
spanning-tree priority priority
no spanning-tree priority
•
priority — Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0–61440)
Default Configuration
The default bridge priority for IEEE STP is 32768.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The priority value must be a multiple of 4096.
The switch with the lowest priority is the root of the spanning tree.
Example
The following example configures spanning-tree priority to 12288.
console(config)#spanning-tree priority 12288
spanning-tree tcnguard
Use the spanning-tree tcnguard command to prevent a port from propagating
topology change notifications. Use the “no” form of the command to enable
TCN propagation.
Syntax
spanning-tree tcnguard
no spanning-tree tcnguard
748
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 749 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
TCN propagation is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures spanning-tree tcnguard on 4/0/1.
console(config-if-4/0/1)#spanning-tree tcnguard
spanning-tree transmit hold-count
Use the spanning-tree transmit hold-count command to set the maximum
number of BPDUs that a bridge is allowed to send within a hello time window
(2 seconds). Use the no form of this command to reset the hold count to the
default value.
Syntax
spanning-tree transmit [hold-count] [ value ]
no spanning-tree transmit hold-count
•
value — The maximum number of BPDUs to send (Range: 1–10).
Default Configuration
The default hold count is 6 BPDUs.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Spanning Tree Commands
749
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 750 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the maximum number of BPDUs
sent to 6.
console(config)#spanning-tree transmit hold-count 6
750
Spanning Tree Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 751 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
TACACS+ Commands
34
TACACS+ provides access control for networked devices via one or more
centralized servers, similar to RADIUS this protocol simplifies authentication
by making use of a single database that can be shared by many clients on a
large network. TACACS+ is based on the TACACS protocol (described in
RFC1492) but additionally provides for separate authentication,
authorization and accounting services. The original protocol was UDP based
with messages passed in clear text over the network; TACACS+ uses TCP to
ensure reliable delivery and a shared key configured on the client and daemon
server to encrypt all messages.
PowerConnect supports authentication of a user using a TACACS+ server.
When TACACS+ is configured as the authentication method for a user login
type (CLI/HTTP/HTTPS), the NAS will prompt for the user login credentials
and request services from the FASTPATH TACACS+ client; the client will
then use the configured list of servers for authentication and provide results
back to the NAS. The TACACS+ server list is configured with one or more
hosts defined via their network IP address; each can be assigned a priority to
determine the order in which the TACACS+ client will contact them, a
server is contacted when a connection attempt fails or times out for a higher
priority server. Each server host can be separately configured with a specific
connection type, port, timeout, and shared key, or the global configuration
may be used for the key and timeout. Like RADIUS, the TACACS+ server
may do the authentication itself, or redirect the request to another back-end
device, all sensitive information is encrypted and the shared secret is never
passed over the network.
TACACS+ Commands
751
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 752 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
key
tacacs-server host
port
tacacs-server key
priority
tacacs-server timeout
show tacacs
timeout
key
Use the key command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify the
authentication and encryption key for all TACACS communications between
the device and the TACACS server. This key must match the key used on the
TACACS daemon.
Syntax
key [ key-string ]
•
key-string — To specify the key name. (Range: 1–128 characters)
Default Configuration
If left unspecified, the key-string parameter defaults to the global value.
Command Mode
TACACS Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example specifies an encryption and authentication key of 12.
console(tacacs)#key 12
752
TACACS+ Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 753 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
port
Use the port command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify a server
port number.
Syntax
port [ port-number ]
•
port-number — The server port number. If left unspecified, the default
port number is 49. (Range: 0–65535)
Default Configuration
The default port number is 49.
Command Mode
TACACS Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to specify server port number 1200.
console(tacacs)#port 1200
priority
Use the priority command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify the
order in which servers are used, where 0 (zero) is the highest priority.
Syntax
priority [ priority ]
•
priority — Specifies the priority for servers. 0 (zero) is the highest priority.
(Range: 0–65535)
Default Configuration
If left unspecified, this parameter defaults to 0 (zero).
TACACS+ Commands
753
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 754 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
TACACS Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to specify a server priority of 10000.
console(tacacs)#priority 10000
show tacacs
Use the show tacacs command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
configuration and statistics of a TACACS+ server.
Syntax
show tacacs [ip-address]
•
ip-address — The name or IP address of the host.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following example displays TACACS+ server settings.
console#show tacacs
Global Timeout: 5
754
TACACS+ Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 755 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IP address
Port
Timeout
Priority
---------------
-----
-------
--------
10.254.24.162
49
Global
0
tacacs-server host
Use the tacacs-server host command in Global Configuration mode to
configure a TACACS+ server. This command enters into the TACACS+
configuration mode. To delete the specified hostname or IP address, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
tacacs-server host {ip-address | hostname}
no tacacs-server host {ip-address | hostname}
•
ip-address — The IP address of the TACACS+ server.
•
hostname — The hostname of the TACACS+ server. (Range: 1-255
characters).
Default Configuration
No TACACS+ host is specified.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
To specify multiple hosts, multiple tacacs-server host commands can be used.
TACACS servers are keyed by the host name, therefore it is advisable to use
unique host names.
Example
The following example specifies a TACACS+ host.
TACACS+ Commands
755
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 756 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#tacacs-server host 172.16.1.1
console(tacacs)#
tacacs-server key
Use the tacacs-server key command in Global Configuration mode to set the
authentication and encryption key for all TACACS+ communications
between the switch and the TACACS+ daemon. To disable the key, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
tacacs-server key [ key-string ]
no tacacs-server key
•
key-string — Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all
TACACS communications between the switch and the TACACS+ server.
This key must match the key used on the TACACS+ daemon. (Range:
0–128 printable characters except for question marks and double quotes.)
Default Configuration
The default is an empty string.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The tacacs-server key command accepts any printable characters for the key
except a double quote or question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes
to include spaces within the key. The surrounding quotes are not used as part
of the name. The CLI does not filter illegal characters and may accept entries
up to the first illegal character or reject the entry entirely.
Example
The following example sets the authentication encryption key.
console(config)#tacacs-server key "I've got a secret"
756
TACACS+ Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 757 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#tacacs-server key @#$%^&*()_+={}][<>.,/';:|
tacacs-server timeout
Use the tacacs-server timeout command in Global Configuration mode to set
the interval during which a switch waits for a server host to reply. To restore
the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
tacacs-server timeout [ timeout ]
no tacacs-server timeout
•
timeout — The timeout value in seconds. (Range: 1–30)
Default Configuration
The default value is 5 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the timeout value as 30.
console(config)#tacacs-server timeout 30
timeout
Use the timeout command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify the
timeout value in seconds. If no timeout value is specified, the global value is
used.
Syntax
timeout [ timeout ]
TACACS+ Commands
757
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 758 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
timeout — The timeout value in seconds. (Range: 1–30)
Default Configuration
If left unspecified, the timeout defaults to the global value.
Command Mode
TACACS Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
This example shows how to specify the timeout value.
console(tacacs)#timeout 23
758
TACACS+ Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 759 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
VLAN Commands
35
PowerConnect 802.1Q VLANs are an implementation of the Virtual Local
Area Network, specification 802.1Q. Operating at Layer 2 of the OSI model,
the VLAN is a means of parsing a single network into logical user groups or
organizations as if they physically resided on a dedicated LAN segment of
their own. In reality, this virtually defined community may have individual
members scattered across a large, extended LAN. The VLAN identifier is part
of the 802.1Q tag, which is added to an Ethernet frame by an 802.1Qcompliant switch or router. Devices recognizing 802.1Q-tagged frames
maintain appropriate tables to track VLANs. The first 3 bits of the 802.1Q tag
are used by 802.1p to establish priority for the packet.
PowerConnect supports 802.1Q VLANs. As such, ports may simultaneously
belong to multiple VLANs. VLANs allow a network to be logically segmented
without regard to the physical locations of devices in the network.
PowerConnect switching supports up to 1024 VLANs for forwarding.
VLANs can be allocated by subnet and netmask pairs, thus allowing
overlapping subnets. For example, subnet 10.10.128.0 with Mask
255.255.128.0 and subnet 10.10.0.0 with Mask 255.255.0.0 can have different
VLAN associations.
Double VLAN Mode
An incoming frame is identified as tagged or untagged based on Tag Protocol
Identifier (TPID) value it contains. The 802.1Q standard specifies a TPID
value (0x8100) to recognize an incoming frame as tagged or untagged. Any
valid Ethernet frame with a value 0x8100 in the 12th and 13th bytes is
recognized as tagged frame. 802.1Q switches check the 12th and 13th bytes to
decide the tag status of incoming frame.
The PowerConnect switching component can be configured to enable the
port in double-VLAN (DVLAN) mode. In this mode switch looks for 12th,
13th, 16th, and 17th bytes for the tag status in the incoming frame. The outer
tag (S-TAG) TPID is identified with the 12th and 13th bytes values. The
inner tag (C-TAG) TPID is identified with 16th and 17th bytes values. These
VLAN Commands
759
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 760 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
two TPID values can be different or the same. VLAN normalization, source
MAC learning, and forwarding are based on the S-TAG value in a received
frame.
PowerConnect supports configuring one outer VLAN TPID value per switch.
The global default TPID is 0x88A8, which indicates a Virtual Metropolitan
Area Network (VMAN).
Independent VLAN Learning
Independent VLAN Learning (IVL) allows unicast address-to-port mappings
to be created based on a MAC Address in conjunction with a VLAN ID.
This arrangement associates the MAC Address only with the VLAN on which
the frame was received. Therefore, frames are forwarded based on their
unicast destination address as well as their VLAN membership. This
configuration affords multiple occurrences of an address in the forwarding
database. Each address associates with a unique VLAN. Care must be taken
in the administration of networks, as multiple instances of a MAC address,
each on a different VLAN, can quickly eat up address entries.
Each VLAN is associated with its own forwarding database. Hence the
number of forwarding databases equals the number of VLANs supported.
The MAC address stored is supplemented by a 2-byte VLAN ID. The first 2
bytes of a forwarding database entry contain the VLAN ID associated, and the
next 6 bytes contain the MAC address. There is a one-to-one relationship
between VLAN ID and FID (forwarding database ID).
Protocol Based VLANs
The main purpose of Protocol-based VLANs (PBVLANs) is to selectively
process packets based on their upper-layer protocol by setting up protocolbased filters. Packets are bridged through user-specified ports based on their
protocol.
In PBVLANs, the VLAN classification of a packet is based on its protocol (IP,
IPX, NetBIOS, and so on). PBVLANs help optimize network traffic because
protocol-specific broadcast messages are sent only to end stations using that
protocol. End stations do not receive unnecessary traffic, and bandwidth is
used more efficiently. It is a flexible method that provides a logical grouping
of users. An IP subnet or an IPX network, for example, can each be assigned
760
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 761 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
its own VLAN. Additionally, protocol-based classification allows an
administrator to assign nonroutable protocols, such as NetBIOS or DECnet,
to larger VLANs than routable protocols like IPX or IP. This maximizes the
efficiency gains that are possible with VLANs.
In port-based VLAN classification, the Port VLAN Identifier (PVID) is
associated with the physical ports. The VLAN ID (VID) for an untagged
packet is equal to the PVID of the port. In port-and protocol-based VLAN
classifications, multiple VIDs are associated with each of the physical ports.
Each VID is also associated with a protocol. The ingress rules used to classify
incoming packets include the use of the packet's protocol, in addition to the
PVID, to determine the VLAN to which the packet belongs. This approach
requires one VID on each port for each protocol for which the filter is desired.
IP Subnet Based VLANs
This feature allows an untagged packet to be placed in a configured VLAN
based upon its IP address.
MAC-Based VLANs
This feature allows an untagged packet to be placed in a configured VLAN
based upon its MAC address.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
dvlan-tunnel
ethertype
show dvlan-tunnel switchport general vlan database
interface
allowed vlan
interface vlan
show interfaces
switchport
interface range
vlan
show port protocol switchport general vlan protocol group
pvid
mode dvlan-tunnel show vlan
switchport general vlan makestatic
ingress-filtering
disable
switchport mode
vlan protocol group
add protocol
VLAN Commands
761
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 762 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
name (VLAN
Configuration)
show vlan
association mac
switchport trunk
protocol group
show vlan
vlan
association subnet
protocol vlan group switchport access
vlan
vlan (Global
Config)
protocol vlan group switchport
all
forbidden vlan
vlan association
mac
vlan protocol group
name
vlan protocol group
remove
vlan routing
show dvlan-tunnel switchport general vlan association
acceptable-frame- subnet
type tagged-only
dvlan-tunnel ethertype
Use the dvlan-tunnel ethertype command in Global Configuration mode to
enable the configuration of the outer VLAN tag ethertype.
To configure the EtherType to its default value, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
dvlan-tunnel ethertype {802.1Q | vman | custom 0-65535 [primary-tpid]}
no dvlan-tunnel ethertype
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
802.1Q
Configures the EtherType as 0x8100.
vman
Configures the EtherType as 0x88A8
custom
Configures a custom EtherType for the DVLAN tunnel. The
value must be 0-65535.
primary-tpid
Globally configures the tag protocol identifier on the outer
VLAN tag (S-TAG).
762
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 763 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default for this command is 802.1Q. The default S-TAG TPID, when
double-tagging is enabled, is 0x88A8. The default C-TAG TPID when double
vlan tagging is enabled is 0x8100.
Command Mode
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command configures the TPID value on the outer VLAN (S-VLAN).
The global configuration form of the command configures all physical and
port-channel interfaces to use the specified ethertype. The interface form of
the command enables/disables the use of the ethertype on the specific
interface. The ethertype used in the interface form of the command must use
the same ethertype as specified in the global configuration form of the
command. The inner vlan tag (C-TAG) is configured using the switchport
command in interface configuration mode.
Example
The following example displays configuring Double VLAN tunnel for vman
EtherType.
console(config)#dvlan-tunnel ethertype vman
interface vlan
Use the interface vlan command in Global Configuration mode to configure
a VLAN type and to enter Interface Configuration mode.
Syntax
interface vlan vlan-id
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
The ID of a valid VLAN (Range: 1–4093).
VLAN Commands
763
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 764 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the VLAN 1 IP address of 131.108.1.27 and
subnet mask 255.255.255.0.
console(config)#interface vlan 1
console(config-vlan)#ip address 131.108.1.27
255.255.255.0
interface range vlan
Use the interface range vlan command in Global Configuration mode to
execute a command on multiple VLANs at the same time.
Syntax
interface range vlan {vlan-range | all}
•
vlan-range — A list of valid VLAN IDs to add. Separate nonconsecutive
VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range
of IDs. (Range: 2–4093)
•
all — All existing static VLANs.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
764
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 765 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Commands used in the interface range context are executed independently
on each interface in the range. If the command returns an error on one of the
interfaces, an error message is displayed and execution continues on other
interfaces.
Example
The following example groups VLAN 221 till 228 and VLAN 889 to receive
the same command.
console(config)#interface range vlan 221-228,889
console(config-if)#
mode dvlan-tunnel
Use the mode dvlan-tunnel command in Interface Configuration mode to
enable Double VLAN Tunneling on the specified interface. To disable Double
VLAN Tunneling on the specified interface, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
mode dvlan-tunnel
no mode dvlan-tunnel
Default Configuration
By default, Double VLAN Tunneling is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
VLAN Commands
765
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 766 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays how to enable Double VLAN Tunneling at
gigabit ethernet port 1/0/1.
console(config-if-1/0/1)#mode dvlan-tunnel
name (VLAN Configuration)
Use the name command in VLAN Configuration mode to configure the
VLAN name. To return to the default configuration, use the no form of this
command.
NOTE: This command cannot be configured for a range of interfaces (range
context).
Syntax
name vlan–name
no name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan–name
The name of the VLAN. Must be 1–32 characters in length.
Default Configuration
The default VLAN name is default.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The VLAN name may include any alphanumeric characters including a space,
underscore, or dash. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces
within the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name.
The CLI does not filter illegal characters and may truncate entries at the first
illegal character or reject the entry entirely.
766
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 767 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example configures a VLAN name of office2 for VLAN 2.
console(config)#interface vlan 2
console(config-vlan)#name "RDU-NOC Management VLAN"
protocol group
Use the protocol group command in VLAN Database mode to attach a
VLAN ID to the protocol-based group identified by groupid. A group may
only be associated with one VLAN at a time. However, the VLAN association
can be changed. The referenced VLAN should be created prior to the creation
of the protocol-based group except when GVRP is expected to create the
VLAN.
To detach the VLAN from this protocol-based group identified by this
groupid, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
protocol group groupid vlanid
no protocol group groupid vlanid
•
groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically
generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan
protocol group command. To see the group ID associated with the name
of a protocol group, use the show port protocol all command.
•
vlanid — A valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
VLAN Commands
767
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 768 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays how to attach the VLAN ID "100" to the
protocol-based VLAN group "3."
console#vlan database
console(config-vlan)#protocol group 3 100
protocol vlan group
Use the protocol vlan group command in Interface Configuration mode to
add the physical unit/slot/port interface to the protocol-based group
identified by groupid. A group may have more than one interface associated
with it. Each interface and protocol combination can be associated with one
group only. If adding an interface to a group causes any conflicts with
protocols currently associated with the group, this command fails and the
interface(s) are not added to the group. Ensure that the referenced VLAN is
created prior to the creation of the protocol-based group except when GVRP
is expected to create the VLAN.
To remove the interface from this protocol-based VLAN group that is
identified by this groupid, use the no form of this command.
If you select all, all ports are removed from this protocol group.
Syntax
protocol vlan group groupid
no protocol vlan group groupid
•
groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically
generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan
protocol group command. To see the group ID associated with the name
of a protocol group, use the show port protocol all command.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
768
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 769 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to add a physical port interface to the
group ID of "2."
console(config-if-1/0/1)#protocol vlan group 2
protocol vlan group all
Use the protocol vlan group all command in Global Configuration mode to
add all physical interfaces to the protocol-based group identified by groupid.
A group may have more than one interface associated with it. Each interface
and protocol combination can be associated with one group only. If adding an
interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently associated
with the group, this command fails and the interface(s) are not added to the
group. Ensure that the referenced VLAN is created prior to the creation of the
protocol-based group except when GVRP is expected to create the VLAN.
To remove all interfaces from this protocol-based group that is identified by
this groupid, use the no form of the command
Syntax
protocol vlan group all groupid
no protocol vlan group all groupid
•
groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically
generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan
protocol group command. To see the group ID associated with the name
of a protocol group, use the show port protocol all command.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
VLAN Commands
769
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 770 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to add all physical interfaces to the
protocol-based group identified by group ID "2."
console(config)#protocol vlan group all 2
show dvlan-tunnel
Use the show dvlan-tunnel command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all
interfaces enabled for Double VLAN Tunneling.
Syntax
show dvlan-tunnel
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to display all interfaces for Double VLAN
Tunneling.
console#show dvlan-tunnel
Interfaces Enabled for DVLAN Tunneling......... 1/0/1
770
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 771 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show dvlan-tunnel interface
Use the show dvlan-tunnel interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display detailed information about Double VLAN Tunneling for the specified
interface or all interfaces.
Syntax
show dvlan-tunnel interface {gigabithethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port | all}
•
all — Displays information for all interfaces.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays detailed information for port 1/0/1.
console#show dvlan-tunnel interface 1/0/1
Interface
Mode
---------
------- --------------
1/0/1
Enable
EtherType
vMAN
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the example.
Field
Description
Mode
This field specifies the administrative mode through which
Double VLAN Tunneling can be enabled or disabled. The default
value for this field is disabled.
Interface
Interface Number.
VLAN Commands
771
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 772 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
EtherType
This field represents a 2-byte hex EtherType to be used as the first
16 bits of the DVLAN tunnel. The three different EtherType tags
are: (1) 802.1Q, which represents the commonly used value of
0x8100. (2) vMAN, which represents the commonly used value of
0x88A8. (3) If EtherType is not one of these two values, it is a
custom tunnel value, representing any value in the range of 0 to
65535.
show interfaces switchport
Use the show interfaces switchport command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display switchport configuration.
Syntax
show interfaces switchport {{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel
port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}}
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following example displays switchport configuration individually for
gi1/0/1.
console#show interface switchport gigabitethernet
1/0/1
Port 1/0/1:
VLAN Membership mode: General
Operating parameters:
772
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 773 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
PVID: 1 (default)
Ingress Filtering: Enabled
Acceptable Frame Type: All
GVRP status: Enabled
Protected: Enabled
Port 1/0/1 is member in:
VLAN
Name
Egress rule
Type
----
---------
-----------
-----
1
default
untagged
Default
8
VLAN008
tagged
Dynamic
11
VLAN0011
tagged
Static
19
IPv6 VLAN
untagged
Static
72
VLAN0072
untagged
Static
Static configuration:
PVID: 1 (default)
Ingress Filtering: Enabled
Acceptable Frame Type: All
Port 1/0/1 is statically configured to:
VLAN
Name
Egress rule
----
---------
-----------
11
VLAN0011
tagged
19
IPv6 VLAN
untagged
72
VLAN0072
untagged
Forbidden VLANS:
VLAN
Name
----
--------VLAN Commands
773
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 774 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
73
Out
The following example displays switchport configuration individually for
1/0/2.
console#show interface switchport gigabitethernet
1/0/2
Port 1/0/2:
VLAN Membership mode: General
Operating parameters:
PVID: 4095 (discard vlan)
Ingress Filtering: Enabled
Acceptable Frame Type: All
Port 1/0/1 is member in:
VLAN
Name
Egress rule
Type
----
---------
-----------
-----
91
IP Telephony
tagged
Static
Static configuration:
PVID: 8
Ingress Filtering: Disabled
Acceptable Frame Type: All
Port 1/0/2 is statically configured to:
VLAN
Name
Egress rule
----
---------
-----------
8
VLAN0072
untagged
91
IP Telephony
tagged
Forbidden VLANS:
VLAN
774
Name
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 775 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
----
---------
73
Out
The following example displays switchport configuration individually for
2/0/19.
console#show interfaces switchport gigabitethernet
2/0/19
Port 2/0/19:
Operating parameters:
PVID: 2922
Ingress Filtering: Enabled
Acceptable Frame Type: Untagged
GVRP status: Disabled
Port 2/0/19 is member in:
VLAN
Name
Egress rule
Type
----
---------
-----------
-----
2921
Primary A
untagged
Static
2922
Community A1
untagged
Static
Static configuration:
PVID: 2922
Ingress Filtering: Enabled
Acceptable Frame Type: Untagged
GVRP status: Disabled
Port 2/0/19 is member in:
VLAN
Name
Egress rule
Type
----
---------
-----------
-----
2921
Primary A
untagged
Static
VLAN Commands
775
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 776 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
2922
Community A1
untagged
Static
show port protocol
Use the show port protocol command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the Protocol-Based VLAN information for either the entire system or for the
indicated group.
Syntax
show port protocol {groupid | all}
•
groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically
generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan
protocol group command.
•
all — Enter all to show all interfaces.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the Protocol-Based VLAN information for
either the entire system.
console#show port protocol all
Group Name
Group
ID
Protocol(s
VLAN
Interface(s)
---------------
-----
----------
----
------------
test
1
IP
1
1/0/1
776
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 777 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show vlan
Use the show vlan command in Privileged EXEC mode to display detailed
information, including interface information and dynamic VLAN type, for a
specific VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.
Syntax
show vlan [id vlanid |name vlan-name]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlanid
VLAN identifier
vlan-name
A valid VLAN name (Range 1-32 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information for VLAN id 1, 2 and 3.
console#show vlan id 1
VLAN
Name
Ports
Type
-----
---------------
-------------
--------------
1
default
Po1-48,
Default
Gi1/0/1-10
console#show vlan id 2
VLAN
Name
Ports
Type
VLAN Commands
777
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 778 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
-----
---------------
-------------
--------------
2
VLAN0002
Gi1/0/11-20
Dynamic (DOT1X)
console#show vlan id 3
VLAN
Name
Ports
Type
-----
---------------
-------------
--------------
3
VLAN0003
Gi1/0/21-24
Dynamic (GVRP)
show vlan association mac
Use the show vlan association mac command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the VLAN associated with a specific configured MAC address. If no
MAC address is specified, the VLAN associations of all the configured MAC
addresses are displayed.
Syntax
show vlan association mac [mac-address ]
•
mac-address — Specifies the MAC address to be entered in the list.
(Range: Any valid MAC address)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows no entry in MAC address to VLAN crossreference.
console#show vlan association mac
778
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 779 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
MAC Address
VLAN ID
-----------------------
-------
0001.0001.0001.0001
1
console#
show vlan association subnet
Use the show vlan association subnet command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the VLAN associated with a specific configured IP-Address and
netmask. If no IP Address and net mask are specified, the VLAN associations
of all the configured IP-subnets are displayed.
Syntax
show vlan association subnet [ip-address ip-mask ]
•
ip-address — Specifies IP address to be shown
•
ip-mask — Specifies IP mask to be shown
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows the case if no IP Subnet to VLAN association
exists.
console#show vlan association subnet
IP Address
IP Mask
VLAN ID
---------------- ---------------- ------VLAN Commands
779
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 780 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The IP Subnet to VLAN association does not exist.
switchport access vlan
Use the switchport access vlan command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the VLAN ID when the interface is in access mode. To reconfigure
the default, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport access vlan vlan-id
no switchport access vlan
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the port is configured.
Default Configuration
The default value for the vlan-id parameter is 1.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
The command automatically removes the port from the previous VLAN and
adds it to the new VLAN.
Example
The following example configures a VLAN ID of interface 1/0/8 to become an
access member of VLAN ID 23.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console(config-if-1/0/8)#switchport access vlan 23
780
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 781 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
switchport forbidden vlan
Use the switchport forbidden vlan command in Interface Configuration
mode to forbid adding specific VLANs to a port. To revert to allowing the
addition of specific VLANs to the port, use the remove parameter of this
command.
Syntax
switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}
•
add vlan-list — List of valid VLAN IDs to add to the forbidden list.
Separate nonconsecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. Use a
hyphen to designate a range of IDs.
•
remove vlan-list — List of valid VLAN IDs to remove from the forbidden
list. Separate nonconsecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. Use
a hyphen to designate a range of IDs.
Default Configuration
All VLANs allowed.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example forbids adding VLAN numbers 234 through 256 to
port 1/0/8.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console(config-if-1/0/8)#switchport forbidden vlan
add 234-256
VLAN Commands
781
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 782 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
switchport general acceptable-frame-type
tagged-only
Use the switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only command in
Interface Configuration mode to discard untagged frames at ingress. To
enable untagged frames at ingress, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only
no switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only
Default Configuration
All frame types are accepted at ingress.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures 1/0/8 to discard untagged frames at ingress.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console(config-if-1/0/8)#switchport general
acceptable-frame-type tagged-only
switchport general allowed vlan
Use the switchport general allowed vlan command in Interface
Configuration mode to add VLANs to or remove VLANs from a general port.
Syntax
switchport general allowed vlan add vlan-list [tagged | untagged]
782
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 783 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
switchport general allowed vlan remove vlan-list
•
add vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to add. Separate nonconsecutive VLAN
IDs with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to designate a range of
IDs.
•
remove vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to remove. Separate nonconsecutive
VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to designate a range
of IDs.
•
tagged — Sets the port to transmit tagged packets for the VLANs. If the
port is added to a VLAN without specifying tagged or untagged, the
default is untagged.
•
untagged — Sets the port to transmit untagged packets for the VLANs.
Default Configuration
Untagged.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
You can use this command to change the egress rule (for example, from
tagged to untagged) without first removing the VLAN from the list.
Example
The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5, and 8 to the allowed
list.
console(config-if-1/0/8)#switchport general allowed
vlan add 1,2,5,8 tagged
switchport general ingress-filtering disable
Use the switchport general ingress-filtering disable command in Interface
Configuration mode to disable port ingress filtering. To enable ingress
filtering on a port, use the no form of this command.
VLAN Commands
783
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 784 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
switchport general ingress-filtering disable
no switchport general ingress-filtering disable
Default Configuration
Ingress filtering is enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to enables port ingress filtering on 1/0/8.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console(config-if-1/0/8)#switchport general ingressfiltering disable
switchport general pvid
Use the switchport general pvid command in Interface Configuration mode
to configure the Port VLAN ID (PVID) when the interface is in general mode.
Use the switchport mode general command to set the VLAN membership
mode of a port to "general." To configure the default value, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
switchport general pvid vlan-id
no switchport general pvid
•
784
vlan-id — PVID. The VLAN ID may belong to a non-existent VLAN.
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 785 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default value for the vlan-id parameter is 1 when the VLAN is enabled.
Otherwise, the value is 4093.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to configure the PVID for 1/0/8, when the
interface is in general mode.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console(config-if-1/0/8)#switchport general pvid 234
switchport mode
Use the switchport mode command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the VLAN membership mode of a port. To reset the mode to the
appropriate default for the switch, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
switchport mode {access | trunk | general}
no switchport mode
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
access
An access port connects to a single end station belonging to a
single VLAN. An access port is configured with ingress filtering
enabled and will accept either an untagged frame or a packet
tagged with the access port VLAN. An access port transmits
only untagged packets.
VLAN Commands
785
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 786 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
trunk
A trunk port connects two switches. A trunk port may belong
to multiple VLANs. A trunk port accepts only packets tagged
with the VLAN IDs of the VLANs to which the trunk is a
member or untagged packets if configured with a PVID. A
trunk only transmits tagged packets.
general
Full 802.1q support VLAN interface. A general mode port is a
combination of both trunk and access ports capabilities. It is
possible to fully configure all VLAN features on a general mode
port. Both tagged and untagged packets may be accepted and
transmitted.
Default Configuration
The default for this command is access.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures 1/0/5 to access mode.
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5
console(config-if-1/0/8)#switchport mode access
switchport trunk
Use the switchport trunk command in Interface Configuration mode to add
VLANs to or remove VLANs from a trunk port, or to set the PVID for an
interface in Trunk Mode.
Syntax
switchport trunk {allowed vlan vlan–list | native vlan vlan–id}
786
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 787 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan–list
Set the list of allowed VLANs that can receive and send traffic
on this interface in tagged format when in trunking mode. The
default is all. The vlan–list format is as follows:
The vlan-list format is all | [add | remove | except] vlan–atom
[, vlan–atom...] where:
all specifies all VLANs from 1 to 4093. This keyword is not
allowed on commands that do not permit all VLANs in the list
to be set at the same time.
add adds the defined list of VLANs to those currently set
instead of replacing the list.
remove removes the defined list of VLANs from those currently
set instead of replacing the list. Valid IDs are from 1 to 4093;
extended-range VLAN IDs of the form X-Y or X,Y,Z are valid in
this command.
except lists the VLANs that should be calculated by inverting
the defined list of VLANs. (VLANs are added except the ones
specified.)
vlan-atom is either a single VLAN number from 1 to 4093 or a
continuous range of VLANs described by two VLAN numbers,
the lesser one first, separated by a hyphen.
valid–id
A valid VLAN id from 1–4093.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
VLAN Commands
787
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 788 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#switchport trunk allowed
vlan 1-1024
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#switchport trunk allowed
vlan except 1,2,3,5,7,11,13
vlan
Use the vlan command in VLAN Database mode to configure a VLAN. To
delete a VLAN, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
vlan vlan-range
no vlan vlan-range
• vlan-range — A list of valid VLAN IDs to be added. List separate, nonconsecutive VLAN IDs separated by commas (without spaces); use a
hyphen to designate a range of IDs. (Range: 2–4093)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
Deleting the VLAN for an access port will cause that port to become unusable
until it is assigned a VLAN that exists.
Example
The following example shows how to create (add) VLAN of IDs 22, 23, and
56.
console(config-vlan)#vlan 22,23,56
console(config-vlan)#
788
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 789 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
vlan (Global Config)
Use the vlan command in Global Configuration mode to configure a VLAN.
To delete a VLAN, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
vlan {vlan–id | vlan–range}
no vlan {vlan–id | vlan–range}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan–id
A valid VLAN ID. (Range: 2–4093)
vlan–range
A list of valid VLAN IDs. List separate, non-consecutive VLAN
IDs separated by commas (without spaces). Use a hyphen to
designate a range of IDs. (Range: 2–4093)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration (Config)
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows how to create (add) VLAN of IDs 22, 23, and
56.
console(config)#vlan 22,23,56
console(config-vlan)#
VLAN Commands
789
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 790 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
vlan association mac
Use the vlan association mac command in VLAN Database mode to associate
a MAC address to a VLAN. The maximum number of MAC-based VLANs is
256.
Syntax
vlan association mac mac-address vlanid
no vlan association mac mac-address
mac-address — MAC address to associate. (Range: Any MAC address in the
format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx)
vlanid — VLAN to associate with subnet. (Range: 1-4093)
Default Configuration
No assigned MAC address.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example associates MAC address with VLAN ID 1.
console(config-vlan)#vlan association mac
0001.0001.0001 1
vlan association subnet
Use the vlan association subnet command in VLAN Database mode to
associate a VLAN to a specific IP-subnet.
Syntax
vlan association subnet ip-address subnet-mask vlanid
no vlan association subnet ip-address subnet-mask
790
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 791 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
ip-address — Source IP address. (Range: Any valid IP address)
•
subnet-mask — Subnet mask. (Range: Any valid subnet mask)
•
vlanid — VLAN to associated with subnet. (Range: 1-4093)
Default Configuration
No assigned ip-subnet.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example associates IP address with VLAN ID 100.
console(config-vlan)#vlan association subnet
192.245.23.45 255.255.255.0 100
vlan database
Use the vlan database command in Global Configuration mode to enter the
VLAN database configuration mode.
Syntax
vlan database
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
VLAN Commands
791
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 792 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example enters the VLAN database mode.
console(config)#vlan database
console(config-vlan)#
vlan makestatic
This command changes a dynamically created VLAN (one that is created by
GVRP registration) to a static VLAN (one that is permanently configured and
defined). The ID is a valid VLAN identification number. VLAN range is 24093.
Syntax
vlan makestatic vlan-id
•
vlan-id — Valid vlan ID. Range is 2–4093.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
VLAN Database Mode
User Guidelines
The dynamic VLAN (created via GRVP) should exist prior to executing this
command. See the Type column in output from the show vlan command to
determine that the VLAN is dynamic.
Example
The following changes vlan 3 to a static VLAN.
console(config-vlan)#vlan makestatic 3
792
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 793 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
vlan protocol group
Use the vlan protocol group command in Global Configuration mode to add
protocol-based groups to the system. When a protocol group is created, it is
assigned a unique group ID number. The group ID is used to identify the
group in subsequent commands. Use the no form of the command to remove
the specified VLAN protocol group name from the system.
In previous implementations, when multiple VLAN protocol groups when
created, and then one of the groups was deleted and the configuration was
saved, this command resulted an in incorrect application of the groupids
upon reload So, the existing command vlan protocol group groupname is
updated to vlan protocol group groupid so that groupid is used for both
configuration and script generation.
NOTE: If an attempt is made to migrate to the latest implementation with any of the
groupnames deleted prior to saving configuration on the pre 3.0.0.x code
(applicable only for platforms PC62xx, PCM622x, PCM8024), the problem on the
latest code will remain.
Syntax
vlan protocol group groupid
no vlan protocol group groupid
•
groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, to create a protocol-based
VLAN group. To see the created protocol groups, use the show port
protocol all command.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)# vlan protocol group 1
VLAN Commands
793
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 794 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
vlan protocol group add protocol
Use the vlan protocol group add protocol command in Global Configuration
mode to add a protocol to the protocol-based VLAN groups identified by
groupid. A group may have more than one protocol associated with it. Each
interface and protocol combination can be associated with one group only. If
adding a protocol to a group causes any conflicts with interfaces currently
associated with the group, this command fails and the protocol is not added
to the group.
To remove the protocol from the protocol-based VLAN group identified by
groupid, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
vlan protocol group add protocol groupid ethertype value
no vlan protocol group add protocol groupid ethertype value
•
groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically
generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan
protocol group command. To see the group ID associated with the name
of a protocol group, use the show port protocol all command.
•
ethertype value — The protocol you want to add. The ethertype value can
be any valid hexadecimal number in the range 0x0600 to 0xffff.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays how to add the "ip" protocol to the protocol
based VLAN group identified as "2."
794
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 795 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#vlan protocol group add protocol 2
ethertype 0xXXXX
vlan protocol group name
This is a new command for assigning a group name to vlan protocol group id.
Syntax
vlan protocol group name groupid groupName
no vlan protocol group name groupid
•
groupid—The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically
generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan
protocol group command. To see the group ID associated with the name
of a protocol group, use the show port protocol all command
•
groupName—The group name you want to add. The group name can be
up to 16 characters length. It can be any valid alpha numeric characters.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)# vlan protocol group name 1 usergroup
vlan protocol group remove
Use the vlan protocol group remove command in Global Configuration
mode to remove the protocol-based VLAN group identified by groupid.
VLAN Commands
795
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 796 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
vlan protocol group remove groupid
•
groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically
generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan
protocol group command. To see the group ID associated with the name
of a protocol group, use the show port protocol all command.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the removal of the protocol-based VLAN
group identified as "2."
console(config)#vlan protocol group remove 2
vlan routing
Use the vlan routing command to enable routing on a VLAN. Use the no
form of this command to disable routing on a VLAN.
Syntax
vlan routing {vlanid [ index]}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlanid
Valid VLAN ID (Range 1–4093).
796
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 797 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
index
Internal interface ID. This optional parameter is listed in the
configuration file for all VLAN routing interfaces. When a
nonstop forwarding failover occurs, this information enables
the system to correlate checkpointed state information with the
proper interfaces and their configuration.
Default Configuration
Routing is enabled on VLAN 1 by default.
Command Mode
VLAN Database mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
console(config-vlan)# vlan routing 10 1
VLAN Commands
797
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 798 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
798
VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 799 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Voice VLAN Commands
36
The Voice VLAN feature enables switch ports to carry voice traffic with an
administrator-defined priority so as to enable prioritization of voice traffic
over data traffic. Using Voice VLAN helps to ensure that the sound quality of
an IP phone is protected from deterioration when the data traffic utilization
on the port is high.
Voice VLAN is the preferred solution for applying QoS to voice traffic in an
enterprise environment. Voice VLAN scales with the number of ports and
does not make significant demands on the switch CPU for classification of
voice traffic. However ,Voice VLAN does require the administrator to perform
the additional configuration step of defining the QoS policy to be applied to
voice traffic.
The switch can be configured to support voice VLAN on a port connecting to
the VoIP phone. When a VLAN is associated with the voice VLAN port, then
the VLAN ID information is passed onto the VoIP phone using the LLDPMED mechanism. The voice data coming from the VoIP phone is tagged with
the exchanged VLAN ID; thus, regular data arriving on the switch is given the
default PVID of the port, and the voice traffic is received on a predefined
VLAN. The two types of traffic are therefore segregated so that better service
can be provided to the voice traffic.
When a dot1p priority is associated with the voice VLAN port instead of
VLAN ID, then the priority information is passed onto the VoIP phone using
the LLDP-MED mechanism. Thus, the voice data coming from the VoIP
phone is tagged with VLAN 0 and with the exchanged priority. Regular data
arriving on the switch is given the default priority of the port (default 0), and
the voice traffic is received with higher priority, thus segregating both the
traffic to provide better service to the voice traffic.
The switch can be configured to override the data traffic CoS. This feature
enables overriding the 802.1P priority of the data traffic packets arriving at
the port enabled for voice VLAN. Thus, a rogue client that is also connected
to the voice VLAN port does not deteriorate the voice traffic. Voice VLAN is
recommended for enterprise-wide deployment of voice services on the IP
network.
Voice VLAN Commands
799
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 800 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
voice vlan
voice vlan data priority
voice vlan (Interface)
show voice vlan
voice vlan
This command is used to enable the voice vlan capability on the switch.
Syntax
voice vlan
no voice vlan
Parameter Ranges
Not applicable
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Usage Guidelines
Not applicable
Default Value
This feature is disabled by default.
Example
console(config)#voice vlan
console(config)#no voice vlan
voice vlan (Interface)
This command is used to enable the voice vlan capability on the interface.
800
Voice VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 801 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
voice vlan {vlanid | dot1p priority | none | untagged | data priority { trust |
untrust } | auth { enable | disable } | dscp dscp }
no voice vlan
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
auth
Enables/disables authentication on the voice vlan port.
data
Observe the priority on received voice vlan traffic (trusted
mode).
dot1p
Configure Voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic.
dscp
Configure DSCP value for voice traffic on the voice vlan port.
(Range: 0–64).
none
Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send
untagged voice traffic.
priority
The Dot1p priority for the voice VLAN on the port.
trust
Trust the dot1p priority or DSCP values contained in packets
arriving on the voice vlan port.
untagged
Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.
untrust
Do not trust the dot1p priority or DSCP values contained in
packets arriving on the voice vlan port.
vlanid
The voice VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
The default DSCP value is 46.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Voice VLAN Commands
801
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 802 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#voice vlan 1
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#voice vlan dot1p 1
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#voice vlan none
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#voice vlan untagged
voice vlan data priority
This command is to either trust or not trust (untrust) the data traffic arriving
on the voice VLAN port.
Syntax
voice vlan data priority { trust | untrust }
•
trust —Trust the dot1p priority or DSCP values contained in packets
arriving on the voice vlan port.
•
untrust —Do not trust the dot1p priority or DSCP values contained in
packets arriving on the voice vlan port.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Default Value
trust
Example
console(config-if-1/0/1)#voice vlan data priority untrust
console(config-if-1/0/1)#voice vlan data priority trust
show voice vlan
show voice vlan [interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port | all}]
802
Voice VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 803 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
When the interface parameter is not specified, only the global mode of the
voice VLAN is displayed.
When the interface parameter is specified, the following is displayed:
When the interface parameter is specified:
Voice VLAN Mode
The admin mode of the voice VLAN on the interface.
Voice VLAN ID
The voice VLAN ID.
Voice VLAN Priority The Dot1p priority for the voice VLAN on the port.
Voice VLAN
Untagged
The tagging option for the voice VLAN traffic.
Voice VLAN COS
Override
The Override option for the voice traffic arriving on the port.
Voice VLAN Status
The operational status of voice VLAN on the port.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Example
(console) #show voice vlan interface 1/0/1
Interface....................................1/0/1
Voice VLAN Interface Mode....................Enabled
Voice VLAN ID................................1
Voice VLAN COS Override......................False
Voice VLAN Port Status.......................Disabled
Voice VLAN Commands
803
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 804 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
804
Voice VLAN Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 805 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
37
802.1x Commands
Local Area Networks (LANs) are often deployed in environments that permit
the attachment of unauthorized devices. The networks also permit
unauthorized users to attempt to access the LAN through existing
equipment. In such environments, the administrator may desire to restrict
access to the services offered by the LAN.
Port-based network access control makes use of the physical characteristics of
LAN infrastructures to provide a means of authenticating and authorizing
devices attached to a LAN port. Port-based network access control prevents
access to the port in cases in which the authentication and authorization
process fails. A port is defined as a single point of attachment to the LAN.
The PowerConnect supports an 802.1x Authenticator service with a local
authentication server or authentication using remote RADIUS or TACACS
servers.
Supported security methods for communication with remote servers include
MD5, PEAP, EAP-TTL, EAP-TTLS, and EAP-TLS.
Local 802.1X Authentication Server
The PowerConnect switch supports a dedicated database for local
authentication of users for network access through the Dot1x feature. This
functionality is distinct from management access for the switch. This feature
supports creating users for Dot1x (port) access only.
The Internal Authentication Server feature provides support for the creation
of users for Dot1x access only, i.e. without management access. This feature
maintains a separate database (henceforth called as Dot1x user database) of
users allowed for Dot1x access.
A new authentication method internal is added to the list of methods
supported by authentication list creation in order to support the IDAS user
database lookup. The internal method cannot be added in the same
authentication list that has other methods like local, radius and reject.
802.1x Commands
805
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 806 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Whenever an operator configures a port in Dot1x authentication mode and
selects the authentication method as internal, then the user credentials
received from the Dot1x supplicant is validated against the IDAS by Dot1x
component. The Dot1x application accesses the Dot1x user database to
check whether the user credentials present in the authentication message
corresponds to a valid user or not. If so then an event is generated which
triggers the Dot1x state machine to send a challenge to the supplicant.
Otherwise a failure is returned to the Dot1x state machine and the user is not
granted access to the port.
If user(s) credentials are changed, the existing user connection(s) are not
disturbed and the changed user(s) credentials are only used when a new EAP
request arises.
A CLI configuration mode is added in order to configure dot1x users and
their attributes. The Dot1x maintained user database can be exported
(uploaded) or imported (downloaded) to/from a central location using a
TFTP server.
MAC Authentication Bypass
Today, 802.1x has become the recommended port-based authentication
method at the access layer in enterprise networks. However, there may be
802.1x unaware devices such as printers, fax-machines etc that would require
access to the network without 802.1x authentication. MAC Authentication
Bypass (MAB) is a supplemental authentication mechanism to allow 802.1x
unaware clients to authenticate to the network. It uses the 802,1x
infrastructure and MAB cannot be supported independent of the Dot1x
component.
MAC Authentication Bypass (MAB) provides 802.1x unaware clients
controlled access to the network using the devices’ MAC address as an
identifier. This requires that the known and allowable MAC address and
corresponding access rights be pre-populated in the authentication server.
MAB only works when the port control mode of the port is MAC-based.
Port access by MAB clients is allowed if the Dot1x user database has
corresponding entries added for the MAB clients with user name and
password attributes set to the MAC address of MAB clients.
806
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 807 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Guest VLAN
The Guest VLAN feature allows a PowerConnect switch to provide a
distinguished service to unauthenticated users (not rogue users who fail
authentication). This feature provides a mechanism to allow visitors and
contractors to have network access to reach external network with no ability
to surf internal LAN.
When a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized
port that is 802.1X-enabled, the client does not respond to the 802.1X
requests from the switch. Therefore, the port remains in the unauthorized
state, and the client is not granted access to the network. If a guest VLAN is
configured for that port, then the port is placed in the configured guest
VLAN, and the port is moved to the authorized state, allowing access to the
client.
802.1x Monitor Mode
Monitor mode is a special mode that can be enabled in conjunction with
Dot1x authentication. It allows network access even in case where there is a
failure to authenticate but logs the results of the authentication process for
diagnostic purposes. The exact details are described in the below sections.
The main aim of the monitor mode is to provide a mechanism to the operator
to be able to identify the short-comings in the configuration of a Dot1x
authentication on the switch without affecting the network access to the
users of the switch.
There are three important aspects to this feature after activation:
1 To allow successful authentications using the returned information from
authentication server.
2 To provide a mechanism to report unsuccessful authentications without
negative repercussions to the user due to operator errors or failure cases
from the Authentication server or supplicants.
3 To accurately report the data received from the successful and
unsuccessful operations so that the operator can make the appropriate
changes or learn where the problem areas are.
The monitor mode can be configured globally on a switch. If the switch fails
to authenticate the user for any reason (say RADIUS access reject from
RADIUS server, RADIUS timeout, or the client itself is Dot1x unaware), the
802.1x Commands
807
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 808 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
client is authenticated and is undisturbed by the failure condition(s). The
reasons for failure are logged and buffered into the local logging database such
that the operator can track the failure conditions.
RADIUS-based Dynamic VLAN Assignment
If VLAN assignment is enabled in the RADIUS server then as part of the
response message, the RADIUS server sends the VLAN ID which the client is
requested to use in the 802.1x tunnel attributes. If dynamic VLAN creation is
enabled on the switch and the RADIUS assigned VLAN does not exist, then
the assigned VLAN is dynamically created. This implies that the client can
connect from any port and be assigned to the appropriate VLAN. This gives
flexibility for clients to move around the network with out requiring the
operator to perform additional provisioning for each network interface.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
dot1x dynamic-vlan enable dot1x timeout guest-vlanperiod
show dot1x clients
dot1x mac-auth-bypass
dot1x timeout quiet-period show dot1x interface
dot1x max-req
dot1x timeout reauthperiod
show dot1x statistics
dot1x max-users
dot1x timeout servertimeout
show dot1x users
dot1x port-control
dot1x timeout supptimeout
clear dot1x
authentication–history
dot1x re-authenticate
dot1x timeout tx-period
dot1x reauthentication
show dot1x
dot1x system-auth-control show dot1x authenticationmonitor
history
808
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 809 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
802.1x Advanced Features
dot1x guest-vlan
dot1x unauth-vlan
show dot1x advanced
802.1x Option 81
radius-server attribute 4
dot1x dynamic-vlan enable
Use the dot1x dynamic-vlan enable command in Global Configuration mode
to enable the capability of creating VLANs dynamically when a
RADIUS–assigned VLAN does not exist in the switch. Use the no form of the
command to disable this capability.
Syntax
dot1x dynamic-vlan enable
no dot1x dynamic-vlan enable
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is Disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
802.1x Commands
809
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 810 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
dot1x initialize
This command begins the initialization sequence on the specified port. This
command is only valid if the control mode for the specified port is auto or
mac-based. If the control mode is not auto or mac-based, an error will be
returned.
Syntax
dot1x initialize [interface interface-id]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
The port to be initialized.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
dot1x mac-auth-bypass
Use the dot1x mac-auth-bypass command to enable MAB on an interface.
Use the “no” form of this command to disable MAB on an interface.
Syntax
dot1x mac-auth-bypass
no dot1x mac-auth-bypass
Default Configuration
MAC Authentication Bypass is disabled by default.
810
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 811 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets MAC Authentication Bypass on interface 1/2:
console(config-if-1/0/2)#dot1x mac-auth-bypass
dot1x max-req
Use the dot1x max-req command in Interface Configuration mode to set the
maximum number of times that the switch sends an Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP)-request frame (assuming that no response is
received) to the client before restarting the authentication process. To return
to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
dot1x max-req count
no dot1x max-req
•
count — Number of times that the switch sends an EAP-request/identity
frame before restarting the authentication process. (Range: 1–10)
Default Configuration
The default value for the count parameter is 2.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual
circumstances, such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with
certain clients and authentication servers.
802.1x Commands
811
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 812 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the number of times that the switch sends an
EAP-request/identity frame to 6.
console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/16
console(config-if-1/0/16)# dot1x max-req 6
dot1x max-users
Use the dot1x max-users command in Interface Configuration mode to set
the maximum number of clients supported on the port when MAC-based
802.1X authentication is enabled on the port. Use the no version of the
command to reset the maximum number of clients supported on the port
when MAC-based 802.1X authentication is enabled on the port. The value
would be reset to 8.
Syntax
dot1x max-users users
no dot1x max-users
•
users — The number of users the port supports for MAC-based 802.1X
authentication (Range: 1–16)
Default Configuration
The default number of clients supported on a port with MAC-based 802.1X
authentication is 8.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following command limits the number of devices that can authenticate
on port 1/0/2 to 3.
812
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 813 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if-1/0/2)#dot1x max-users 3
dot1x port-control
Use the dot1x port-control command in Interface Configuration mode to
enable the IEEE 802.1X operation on the port.
Syntax
dot1x port-control {force-authorized | force-unauthorized | auto | macbased}
no dot1x port-control
•
auto — Enables 802.1x authentication on the interface and causes the
port to transition to the authorized or unauthorized state based on the
802.1x authentication exchange between the switch and the client.
•
force-authorized — Disables 802.1x authentication on the interface and
causes the port to transition to the authorized state without any
authentication exchange required. The port sends and receives normal
traffic without 802.1x-based authentication of the client.
•
force-unauthorized — Denies all access through this interface by forcing
the port to transition to the unauthorized state, ignoring all attempts by
the client to authenticate. The switch cannot provide authentication
services to the client through the interface.
•
mac-based — Enables 802.1x authentication on the interface and allows
multiple hosts to authenticate on a single port. The hosts are distinguished
by their MAC addresses.
Default Configuration
The default configuration is auto.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
802.1x Commands
813
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 814 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
It is recommended that you disable the spanning tree or enable spanning-tree
PortFast mode on 802.1x edge ports (ports in auto state that are connected to
end stations), in order to go immediately to the forwarding state after
successful authentication.
When configuring a port to use MAC-based authentication, the port must be
in switchport general mode.
Example
The following command enables MAC-based authentication on port 1/0/2
console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
console(config-if-1/0/2)# dot1x port-control macbased
dot1x re-authenticate
Use the dot1x re-authenticate command in Privileged EXEC mode to enable
manually initiating a re-authentication of all 802.1x-enabled ports or the
specified 802.1x-enabled port.
Syntax
dot1x re-authenticate [gigabitethernet unit/slot/port]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following command manually initiates a re-authentication of the 802.1xenabled port.
814
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 815 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console# dot1x re-authenticate gigabitethernet 1/0/16
dot1x reauthentication
Use the dot1x reauthentication command in Interface Configuration mode
to enable periodic re-authentication of the client. To return to the default
setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
dot1x reauthentication
no dot1x reauthentication
Default Configuration
Periodic re-authentication is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables periodic re-authentication of the client.
console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/16
console(config-if-1/0/16)# dot1x reauthentication
dot1x system-auth-control monitor
Use the dot1x system-auth-control monitor command in Global
Configuration mode to enable 802.1x monitor mode globally. To disable this
function, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
dot1x system-auth-control monitor
no dot1x system-auth-control monitor
802.1x Commands
815
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 816 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Dot1x monitor mode is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables 802.1x globally.
console(config)# dot1x system-auth-control monitor
dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period
Use the dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period command in Interface
Configuration mode to set the number of seconds that the switch waits
before authorizing the client if the client is a dot1x unaware client.
Syntax
dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period seconds
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch waits before authorizing the
client if the client is a dot1x unaware client.
Default Configuration
The switch remains in the quiet state for 90 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
816
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 817 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
It is recommended that the user set the dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period to at
least three times the while timer, so that at least three EAP Requests are sent,
before assuming that the client is a dot1x unaware client.
Example
The following example sets the dot1x timeout guest vlan period to 100
seconds.
console(config)# dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period 100
dot1x timeout quiet-period
Use the dot1x timeout quiet-period command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state
following a failed authentication exchange (for example, the client provided
an invalid password). To return to the default setting, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds
no dot1x timeout quiet-period
•
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state
following a failed authentication exchange with the client. (Range:
0–65535 seconds)
Default Configuration
The switch remains in the quiet state for 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
During the quiet period, the switch does not accept or initiate any
authentication requests.
802.1x Commands
817
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 818 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual
circumstances, such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with
certain clients and authentication servers.
To provide a faster response time to the user, enter a smaller number than the
default.
Example
The following example sets the number of seconds that the switch remains in
the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange to 3600.
console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/16
console(config-if-1/0/16)# dot1x timeout quiet-period
3600
dot1x timeout re-authperiod
Use the dot1x timeout re-authperiod command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts. To
return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds
no dot1x timeout re-authperiod
•
seconds — Number of seconds between re-authentication attempts.
(Range: 300–4294967295)
Default Configuration
Re-authentication period is 3600 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
818
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 819 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the number of seconds between re-authentication
attempts to 300.
console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/16
console(config-if-1/0/16)# dot1x timeout reauthperiod 300
dot1x timeout server-timeout
Use the dot1x timeout server-timeout command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the time that the switch waits for a response from the
authentication server. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
dot1x timeout server-timeout seconds
no dot1x timeout server-timeout
•
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch waits for a response from the
authentication server. (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
The period of time is set to 30 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
The actual timeout is this parameter or the product of the Radius
transmission times the Radius timeout, whichever is smaller.
Example
The following example sets the time for the retransmission to the
authentication server to 3600 seconds.
802.1x Commands
819
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 820 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if-1/0/1)# dot1x timeout servertimeout 3600
dot1x timeout supp-timeout
Use the dot1x timeout supp-timeout command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the time that the switch waits for a response before
retransmitting an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)-request frame to
the client. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
dot1x timeout supp-timeout seconds
no dot1x timeout supp-timeout
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response to an
EAP-request frame from the client before resending the request. (Range:
1–65535)
Default Configuration
The period of time is set to 30 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual
circumstances, such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with
certain clients and authentication servers.
Example
The following example sets the time for the retransmission of an EAP-request
frame to the client to 3600 seconds.
console(config-if-1/0/1)# dot1x timeout supp-timeout
3600
820
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 821 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
dot1x timeout tx-period
Use the dot1x timeout tx-period command in Interface Configuration mode
to set the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)-request/identity frame from the
client before resending the request. To return to the default setting, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
dot1x timeout tx-period seconds
no dot1x timeout tx-period
•
seconds — Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response to
an EAP-request/identity frame from the client before resending the
request.
(Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
The period of time is set to 30 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual
circumstances, such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with
certain clients and authentication servers.
Example
The following command sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for
a response to an EAP-request/identity frame to 3600 seconds.
console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/16
console(config-if-1/0/16)# dot1x timeout tx-period
3600
802.1x Commands
821
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 822 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show dot1x
Use the show dot1x command in Privileged EXEC mode to display:
•
A summary of the global dot1x configuration.
•
Summary information of the dot1x configuration for a specified port or all
ports.
•
Detailed dot1x configuration for a specified port
•
Dot1x statistics for a specified port, depending on the tokens used.
Syntax
show dot1x [interface interface-id [statistics]]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Any valid interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for
interface representation.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
If you do not use the optional parameters, the command displays the global
dot1x mode and the VLAN Assignment mode.
Field
Description
Administrative
Mode
Indicates whether authentication control on the switch is
enabled or disabled.
VLAN Assignment
Mode
Indicates whether assignment of an authorized port to a
RADIUS assigned VLAN is allowed (enabled) or not (disabled).
822
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 823 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Monitor Mode
Indicates whether the Dot1x Monitor mode on the switch is
enabled or disabled.
Example
console#show dot1x
Administrative Mode..............Enabled
VLAN Assignment Mode.............Disabled
Monitor Mode.....................Disabled
show dot1x authentication-history
Use the show dot1x authentication-history command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display the dot1x authentication events and information during
successful and unsuccessful dot1x authentication processes. The command is
available to display all events, or events per interface, or only failure
authentication events in summary or in detail.
Syntax
show dot1x authentication-history {interface-id | all} [failed-auth-only]
[detail]
Parameter Description
The following table explains the output parameters.
Parameter
Description
Time Stamp
Exact time at which the event occurs.
Interface
Physical Port on which the event occurs.
MAC-Address
Supplicant/Client MAC Address
VLAN assigned
VLAN assigned to the client/port on authentication.
VLAN assigned
Reason
Type of VLAN ID assigned i.e Guest VLAN, Unauth,
Auth Status
Authentication Status
Default, Radius Assigned or Monitor Mode VLAN ID.
802.1x Commands
823
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 824 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Reason
Actual reason behind the successful or failure authentication.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show dot1x authentication-history all detail
Time Stamp............................... Mar 22 2010 01:16:31
Interface................................ Gi1/0/2
MAC-Address.............................. 00:01:02:03:04:05
VLAN Assigned............................ 111
VLAN Assigned Reason..................... Guest VLAN
Auth Status.............................. Authorized
Reason...... ............................ Dot1x Authentication
due to Guest VLAN
Timer Expiry.
......
......
console#show dot1x authentication-history all
Time Stamp
Interface MAC-Address
VLANID Auth Status
--------------------- --------- ----------------- ------ ---------Mar 22 2010 01:16:31
gi1/0/2
00:01:02:03:04:05 111
Authorized
Mar 22 2010 01:20:33
gi1/0/7
00:00:0D:00:00:00 222
Authorized
824
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 825 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show dot1x authentication-history gi1/0/1
Time Stamp
Interface MAC-Address
VLANID Auth Status
--------------------- --------- ----------------- ------ ---------Mar 22 2010 01:16:31
gi1/0/1
00:01:02:03:04:05 111
Mar 22 2010 01:18:22
Unauthorized
gi1/0/1
00:00:00:03:04:05 0
Authorized
console#show dot1x authentication-history gi1/0/1 failed-auth-only
Time Stamp
Interface MAC-Address
VLANID Auth Status
--------------------- --------- ----------------- ------ ---------Mar 22 2010 01:18:22
Unauthorized
gi1/0/2
00:00:00:03:04:05 0
show dot1x clients
Use the show dot1x clients command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
802.1x client information. The client information is displayed in summary or
in detail. The command also displays the statistics of the number of clients
that are authenticated using Monitor Mode and using 802.1x.
Syntax
show dot1x clients {interface–id | all}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface–id
Any valid interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for
interface representation.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
802.1x Commands
825
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 826 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed by this command.
Field
Description
Clients
Indicates the number of Dot1x clients authenticated using
Authenticated using Monitor mode.
Monitor Mode
Clients
Indicates the number of Dot1x clients authenticated using
Authenticated using 802.1x authentication process.
Dot1x
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display.
Field
Description
Interface
The port number.
Username
The username representing the identity of the Supplicant.
This field shows the username when the port control is
auto or mac-based. If the port is Authorized, it shows the
username of the current user. If the port is unauthorized it
shows the last user that was authenticated successfully.
Supp MAC Address
The MAC-address of the supplicant
Session Time
The amount of time, in seconds, since the client was
authenticated on the port.
Filter ID
The Filter ID assigned to the client by the RADIUS server.
This field is not applicable when the Filter-ID feature is
disabled on the RADIUS server and client.
VLAN Assigned
The VLAN assigned to the client by the radius server.
When VLAN assignments are disabled, RADIUS server
does not assign any VLAN to the port, and this field is set
to 0.
Example
The following example displays information about the 802.1x clients.
console#show dot1x clients all
Clients Authenticated using Monitor Mode....... 1
826
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 827 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Clients Authenticated using Dot1x.............. 1
Logical Interface.............................. 16
Interface...................................... gi1/0/2
User Name...................................... 000102030405
Supp MAC Address............................... 00:01:02:03:04:05
Session Time................................... 518
Filter Id......................................
VLAN Id........................................ 1
VLAN Assigned.................................. Default
Session Timeout................................ 0
Session Termination Action..................... Default
Logical Interface.............................. 96
Interface...................................... gi1/0/7
User Name...................................... brcm
Supp MAC Address............................... 00:08:A1:7E:45:1A
Session Time................................... 67
VLAN Id........................................ 1
VLAN Assigned.................................. Monitor Mode
Session Timeout................................ 0
Session Termination Action..................... Default
show dot1x interface
This command shows the status of MAC Authentication Bypass. This feature
is an extension of Dot1x Option 81 feature added in Power Connect Release
2.1. to accept a VLAN name as an alternative to a number when RADIUS
indicates the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID for a supplicant.
Syntax
show dot1x interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernetunit/slot/port }
802.1x Commands
827
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 828 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show dot1x interface gigabitethernet 1/0/10
Administrative Mode............... Disabled
Dynamic VLAN Creation Mode........ Disabled
Monitor Mode...................... Disabled
Port
Reauth
Admin
Oper
Reauth
Mode
Mode
Control
Period
------- --------------------------
------------
--------
Gi1/0/10 auto
3600
N/A
FALSE
Quiet Period................................... 60
Transmit Period................................ 30
Maximum Requests............................... 2
Max Users...................................... 16
828
802.1x Commands
-
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 829 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
VLAN Assigned..................................
Supplicant Timeout............................. 30
Guest-vlan Timeout............................. 30
Server Timeout (secs).......................... 30
MAB mode (configured)..........................
Disabled
MAB mode (operational).........................
Disabled
Authenticator PAE State........................
Initialize
Backend Authentication State...................
Initialize
show dot1x statistics
Use the show dot1x statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
802.1x statistics for the specified interface.
Syntax
show dot1x statistics {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernetunit/slot/port }
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays 802.1x statistics for the specified interface.
802.1x Commands
829
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 830 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show dot1x statistics gigabitethernet 1/0/2
Port........................................... 1/0/2
EAPOL Frames Received.......................... 0
EAPOL Frames Transmitted....................... 0
EAPOL Start Frames Received.................... 0
EAPOL Logoff Frames Received................... 0
Last EAPOL Frame Version....................... 0
Last EAPOL Frame Source........................
0000.0000.0000
EAP Response/Id Frames Received................ 0
EAP Response Frames Received................... 0
EAP Request/Id Frames Transmitted.............. 0
EAP Request Frames Transmitted................. 0
Invalid EAPOL Frames Received.................. 0
EAPOL Length Error Frames Received............. 0
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display.
Field
Description
EapolFramesRx
The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that
have been received by this Authenticator.
EapolFramesTx
The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have
been transmitted by this Authenticator.
EapolStartFramesRx
The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been
received by this Authenticator.
EapolLogoffFramesRx
The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been
received by this Authenticator.
EapolRespIdFramesRx
The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been
received by this Authenticator.
830
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 831 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
EapolRespFramesRx
The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than
Resp/Id frames) that have been received by this
Authenticator.
EapolReqIdFramesTx
The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been
transmitted by this Authenticator.
EapolReqFramesTx
The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id
frames) that have been transmitted by this
Authenticator.
InvalidEapolFramesRx
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received
by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not
recognized.
EapLengthErrorFramesRx The number of EAPOL frames that have been received
by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length
field is invalid.
LastEapolFrameVersion
The protocol version number carried in the most recently
received EAPOL frame.
LastEapolFrameSource
The source MAC address carried in the most recently
received EAPOL frame.
show dot1x users
Use the show dot1x users command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
802.1x authenticated users for the switch.
Syntax
show dot1x users [username username]
•
username — Supplicant username (Range: 1–160 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
802.1x Commands
831
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 832 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays 802.1x users.
console#show dot1x users
Port
Username
--------- --------1/0/1
Bob
1/0/2
John
Switch# show dot1x users username Bob
Port
Username
--------- --------1/0/1
Bob
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Username
The username representing the identity of the Supplicant.
Port
The port that the user is using.
clear dot1x authentication–history
Use the clear dot1x authentication–history command in Privileged EXEC
mode to clear the authentication history table captured during successful and
unsuccessful authentication.
Syntax
show dot1x authentication–history [interface–id]
832
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 833 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface–id
Any valid interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for
interface representation.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#clear dot1x authentication-history
Purge all entries from the log.
console#clear dot1x authentication-history gi1/0/1
Purge all entries for the specified interface from the
log.
802.1x Advanced Features
dot1x guest-vlan
Use the dot1x guest-vlan command in Interface Configuration mode to set
the guest VLAN on a port. The VLAN must already have been defined. The
no form of this command sets the guest VLAN id to zero, which disables the
guest VLAN on a port.
Syntax
dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id
802.1x Commands
833
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 834 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no dot1x guest-vlan
•
vlan-id — The ID of a valid VLAN to use as the guest VLAN (Range: 04093).
Default Configuration
The guest VLAN is disabled on the interface by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
Configure the guest VLAN before using this command.
Example
The following example sets the guest VLAN on port 1/0/2 to VLAN 10.
console(config-if-1/0/2)#dot1x guest-vlan 10
dot1x unauth-vlan
Use the dot1x unauth-vlan command in Interface Configuration mode to
specify the unauthenticated VLAN on a port. The unauthenticated VLAN is
the VLAN to which supplicants that fail 802.1X authentication are assigned.
Syntax
dot1x unauth-vlan vlan-id
no dot1x unauth-vlan
•
vlan-id — The ID of a valid VLAN to use for unauthenticated clients
(Range: 0-4093).
Default Configuration
The unauthenticated VLAN is disabled on the interface by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
834
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 835 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Configure the unauthenticated VLAN before using this command.
Example
The following example set the unauthenticated VLAN on port 1/0/2 to VLAN
20.
console(config-if-1/0/2)#dot1x unauth-vlan 20
show dot1x advanced
Use the show dot1x advanced command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
802.1x advanced features for the switch or for the specified interface. The
output of this command has been updated in release 2.1 to remove the
Multiple Hosts column and add an Unauthenticated VLAN column, which
indicates whether an unauthenticated VLAN is configured on a port. The
command has also been updated to show the Guest VLAN ID (instead of the
status) since it is now configurable per port.
Syntax
show dot1x advanced [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernetunit/slot/port }]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays 802.1x advanced features for the switch.
console#show dot1x advanced
Port
Guest
Unauthenticated
802.1x Commands
835
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 836 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
VLAN
---------
---------
Vlan
---------------
1/0/1
Disabled
Disabled
1/0/2
10
20
1/0/3
Disabled
Disabled
1/0/4
Disabled
Disabled
1/0/5
Disabled
Disabled
1/0/6
Disabled
Disabled
console#show dot1x advanced gigabitethernet 1/0/2
Port
Guest
Unauthenticated
VLAN
--------1/0/2
---------
Vlan
---------------
10
20
802.1x Option 81
radius-server attribute 4
Use the radius-server attribute 4 command in Global Configuration mode to
set the network access server (NAS) IP address for the RADIUS server. Use
the no version of the command to set the value to the default.
Syntax
radius-server attribute 4 ip-address
no dot1x guest-vlan
•
836
ip-address — Specifies the IP address to be used as the RADIUS attribute
4, the NAS IP address.
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 837 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
If a RADIUS server has been configured on the switch, the default attribute 4
value is the RADIUS server IP address.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the NAS IP address in RADIUS attribute 4 to
192.168.10.22.
console(config)#radius-server attribute 4
192.168.10.22
802.1x Commands
837
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 838 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
838
802.1x Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 839 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
38
Data Center Technology Commands
NOTE: Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) commands are only supported on the
PCM8024-k switch. CLI commands and Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator
pages are not available for other switch models.
This section of the document contains the following FCoE commands:
Data Center Bridging Commands
FIP Snooping Commands
Priority Flow Control Commands
Data Center Technology Commands
839
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 840 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
840
Data Center Technology Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 841 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
39
Data Center Bridging Commands
NOTE: Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) commands are only supported on the
PCM8024-k switch. CLI commands and Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator
pages are not available for other switch models.
Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol
The Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol (DCBX) is used by DCB
devices to exchange configuration information with directly connected peers.
The protocol is also used to detect misconfiguration of the peer DCB devices
and, optionally, for configuration of peer DCB devices.
DCBX is expected to be deployed in support of lossless operation for FCoE or
iSCSI traffic. In these scenarios, all network elements are DCBX-enabled
(DCBX is enabled end-to-end).
The DCBX protocol implementation conforms to the IEEE 802.1Qaz
specification with some exceptions. To be interoperable with legacy industry
implementations of DCBX protocol, a hybrid model is used to support both
the IEEE version of DCBX and legacy DCBX versions. The hybrid version of
the DCBX conforms to all aspects of the legacy standards to the degree
necessary to support interoperability with a wide variety of FCoE capable
switches.
The main objective of DCBX is to perform the following operations:
•
Discovery of DCB capability in a peer
DCBX is used to learn about the capabilities of the peer device. It is a
means to determine if the peer device supports a particular feature such as
PFC.
•
DCB feature misconfiguration detection
DCBX can be used to detect misconfiguration of a feature between the
peers on a link. Misconfiguration detection is feature-specific because
some features may allow asymmetric configuration.
•
Peer configuration of DCB features
Data Center Bridging Commands
841
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 842 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DCBX can be used by a device to perform configuration of DCB features
in its peer device if the peer device is willing to accept configuration.
Interoperability with IEEE DCBX
The PowerConnect switch automatically detects if a peer is operating with
either of the two CEE DCBX versions or the IEEE standard DCBX version.
This is the default mode. DCBX can also be configured to manually select
one of the legacy versions or IEEE standard mode. In auto-detect mode, the
switch starts operating in IEEE DCBX mode on a port and if it detects a
legacy DCBX device based on the OUI of the organization TLV, then the
switch changes its DCBX mode on that port to support the version detected.
There is no timeout mechanism to move back to IEEE mode. Once the
DCBX peer times out, multiple peers are detected, the link is reset (link
down/up) or as commanded by the operator, DCBX resets its operational
mode to IEEE.
The interaction between DCBX component and other components remains
the same irrespective of the operational mode it is executing. For instance,
DCBX component interacts with PFC to get needed information to pack the
TLVs to be sent out on the interface. Based on the operational control mode
of the port, DCBX packs it in the proper frame format.
Port Roles
Each port’s behavior is dependent on the operational mode of that port and
of other ports in the stack. The port mode is a DCBX configuration item that
is passed to the DCBX clients to control the processing of their configuration
information. There are four port roles:
1 Manual
2 Auto-Upstream
3 Auto-Downstream
4 Configuration Source
Manual
Ports operating in the Manual role do not have their configuration affected
by peer devices or by internal propagation of configuration. These ports have
their operational mode and TC and bandwidth information specified
842
Data Center Bridging Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 843 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
explicitly by the operator. These ports will advertise their configuration to
their peer if DCBX is enabled on that port. Incompatible peer configurations
will be logged and counted with an error counter.
The default operating mode for each port is Manual for PowerConnect
releases; however, customer platforms may change the default mode for
selected ports to either Auto-Upstream or Auto-Downstream mode. An
example of this would be a blade switch that needed to support touchless
configuration and has certain ports that are upstream ports and other ports
that are downstream ports. A port that is set to manual mode sets the willing
bit for DCBX client TLVs to false. Manually configured ports never internally
propagate or accept internal or external configuration from other ports.
Manually configured ports may notify the operator of incompatible
configurations if client configuration exchange over DCBX is enabled.
Manually configured ports are always operationally enabled for DCBX clients,
regardless of whether DCBX is enabled.
Auto-Upstream
Advertises a configuration, but is also willing to accept a configuration from
the link-partner and propagate it internally to the auto-downstream ports as
well as receive configuration propagated internally by other auto-upstream
ports. Specifically, the willing parameter is enabled on the port and the
recommendation TLV is sent to the peer and processed if received locally. The
first auto-upstream port to successfully accept a compatible configuration
becomes the configuration source. The configuration source propagates its
configuration to other auto-upstream and auto-downstream ports. Only the
configuration source may propagate configuration to other ports internally.
Auto-upstream ports that receive internally propagated information ignore
their local configuration and utilize the internally propagated information.
Peer configurations received on auto-upstream ports other than the
configuration source result in one of two possibilities.
1 If the configuration is compatible with the configuration source, then the
DCBX client becomes operationally active on the upstream port.
2 If the configuration is not compatible with the configuration source, then
a message is logged indicating an incompatible configuration, an error
counter is incremented, and the DCBX client is operationally disabled on
Data Center Bridging Commands
843
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 844 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
the port. The expectation is that the network administrator configures the
upstream devices appropriately so that all such devices advertise a
compatible configuration.
Auto-Downstream
Advertises a configuration but is not willing to accept one from the link
partner. However, the port will accept a configuration propagated internally
by the configuration source. Specifically, the willing parameter is disabled on
auto-downstream. By default, auto-downstream ports have the
recommendation TLV parameter enabled. Auto-downstream ports that
receive internally propagated information ignore their local configuration and
utilize the internally propagated information.
Configuration Source
In this role, the port has been manually selected to be the configuration
source. Configuration received over this port is propagated to the other autoconfiguration ports, however, no automatic election of a new configuration
source port is allowed. Events that cause selection of a new configuration
source are ignored. The configuration received over the configuration source
port is maintained until cleared by the operator (set the port to the manual
role). FIP snooping must be enabled to set a port to configuration source.
Configuration Source Port Selection Process
When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a configuration
from a peer, the DCBX client first checks if there is an active configuration
source. If there is a configuration source already selected, the received
configuration is checked against the local port operational values as received
from the configuration source, and if compatible, the client marks the port as
operationally enabled. If the configuration received from the peer is
determined to not be compatible, a message is logged, an error counter is
incremented and the DCBX clients become operationally disabled on the
port. The port continues to keep link up and exchanges DCBX packets. If a
compatible configuration is later received, the DCBX clients will become
operationally enabled.
If there is no configuration source, a port may elect itself as the configuration
source on a first-come, first-serve basis from the set of eligible ports. A port is
eligible to become the configuration source if:
844
Data Center Bridging Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 845 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
No other port is the configuration source.
•
The port role is auto-upstream.
•
The port is enabled with link up and DCBX enabled.
•
The port has negotiated a DCBX relationship with the partner.
•
The switch is capable of supporting the received configuration values,
either directly or by translating the values into an equivalent configuration
N.B. Whether or not the peer configuration is compatible with the
configured values is NOT considered.
The newly elected configuration source propagates DCBX client information
to the other ports and is internally marked as being the port over which
configuration has been received. Configuration changes received from the
peer over the configuration source port are propagated to the other autoconfiguration ports. Ports receiving auto-configuration information from the
configuration source ignore their current settings and utilize the
configuration source information.
When a configuration source is selected, all auto-upstream ports other than
the configuration source are marked as willing disabled.
In order to reduce flapping of configuration information, if the configuration
source port is disabled, disconnected or loses LLDP connectivity, the system
clears the selection of configuration source port (if not manually selected)
and enables the willing bit on all auto-upstream ports. The configuration on
the auto-configuration ports is not cleared (configuration holdover). If the
user wishes to clear the configuration on the system in this scenario, the user
can put the configuration source port into manual mode.
When a new port is selected as configuration source, it is marked as the
configuration source, the DCBX configuration is refreshed on all autoconfiguration ports and each port may begin configuration negotiation with
their peer again (if any information has changed).
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
datacenter-bridging
lldp dcbx port-role
lldp dcbx version
show lldp tlv-select
Data Center Bridging Commands
845
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 846 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
lldp tlv-select dcbxp
show lldp dcbx
datacenter-bridging
Use the datacenter-bridging command for an ethernet interface in order to
enter the DataCenterBridging mode. Priority-Flow-Control is configurable
from within the DataCenterBridging mode.
Syntax
datacenter-bridging
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#config
console(config)#interface range ethernet all
console(config-if)#datacenter-bridging
console(config-if-dcb)#priority-flow-control mode on
console(config-if-dcb)#priority-flow-control priority
1 no-drop
lldp dcbx version
Use the lldp dcbx version command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the administrative version for the Data Center Bridging Capability
Exchange (DCBX) protocol. This command enables the switch to support a
specific version of the DCBX protocol or to detect the peer version and match
846
Data Center Bridging Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 847 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
it. DCBX can be configured to operate in IEEE mode or CEE mode or CIN
mode. In auto mode, version detection is based on the peer device DCBX
version. The switch operates in either IEEE or one of the legacy modes on
each interface.
NOTE: CIN is Cisco Intel Nuova DCBX (version 1.0). CEE is converged enhanced
ethernet DCBX (version 1.06).
Use the no form of the command to reset the dcbx version to the default
value of auto.
Syntax
lldp dcbx version { auto | cin | cee | ieee }
no lldp dcbx version
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
auto
Automatically select the version based on the peer response.
CIN
Force the mode to Cisco-Intel-Nuova. (DCBX 1.0)
CEE
Force the mode to CEE (DCBX 1.06)
IEEE
Force the mode to IEEE 802.1Qaz
Default Configuration
The default version is auto.
Command Mode
Global Config
User Guidelines
In auto mode, the switch will attempt to jump start the exchange by sending
an IEEE frame, followed by a CEE frame followed by a CIN frame. The
switch will parse the received response and immeditely switch to the peer
version.
Data Center Bridging Commands
847
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 848 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example configures the switch to use CEE DCBX.
s1(config)#lldp dcbx version cee
lldp tlv-select dcbxp
Use the lldp tlv-select dcbxp command in Interface Configuration or Global
Configuration mode to send specific DCBX TLVs if LLDP is enabled to
transmit on the given interface. If no parameter is given, all DCBX TLVs are
enabled for transmission. The default is all DCBX TLVs are enabled for
transmission. If executed in interface mode, the interface configuration
overrides the global configuration for that interface. Entering the command
with no parameters enables transmission of all TLVs.
The no form of the command disables LLDP from sending all or individual
DCBX TLVs even if LLDP is enabled for transmission on the given interface.
Syntax
lldp tlv-select dcbxp [ pfc | application-priority]
no lldp tlv-select dcbxp [ pfc | application-priority]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
pfc
Transmit the PFC configuration TLV.
application-priority
Transmit the application priority TLV.
Default Configuration
The default value is to transmit all TLVs as enabled by the auto-configuration
port role. In manual mode, the default is to transmit all TLVs.
Command Mode
Interface Config, Global Config
848
Data Center Bridging Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 849 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Interface configuration overrides the global configuration on the designated
interface.
Example
The following example configures the port to transmit all TLVs.
console(interface-config)#no lldp tlv-select dcbxp
lldp dcbx port-role
Use the lldp dcbx port-role command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the port role to manual, auto-upstream, auto-downstream and
configuration source. The default port role is manual.
Syntax
lldp dcbx port-role {auto-up |auto-down | manual | configuration-source}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Manual
Ports operating in the ‘Manual’ role do not have their
configuration affected by peer devices or by internal
propagation of configuration. These ports will advertise their
configuration to their peer if DCBX is enabled on that port.
The willing bit is set to disabled on manual role ports.
Auto-up
Advertises a configuration, but is also willing to accept a
configuration from the link-partner and propagate it internally
to the auto-downstream ports as well as receive configuration
propagated internally by other auto-upstream ports. These
ports have the willing bit enabled. These ports should be
connected to FCFs.
Auto-down
Advertises a configuration but is not willing to accept one from
the link partner. However, the port will accept a configuration
propagated internally by the configuration source. These ports
have the willing bit set to disabled. Selection of a port based
upon compatibility of the received configuration is suppressed.
These ports should be connected to a trusted FCF.
Data Center Bridging Commands
849
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 850 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Configuration
Source
In this role, the port has been manually selected to be the
configuration source. Configuration received over this port is
propagated to the other auto-configuration ports. Selection of a
port based upon compatibility of the received configuration is
suppressed. These ports should be connected to a trusted FCF.
These ports have the willing bit enabled.
Default Configuration
The default port role is manual.
Command Mode
Interface Config
User Guidelines
In order to reduce configuration flapping, ports that obtain configuration
information from a configuration source port will maintain that configuration
for 2x the LLDP timeout, even if the configuration source port becomes
operationally disabled.
Examples
This example configures an FCF facing port:
console(config-if-Te1/1/1)#lldp dcbx port-role auto-up
This example configures an FCoE host facing port:
console(config-if-Te1/1/1)#lldp dcbx port-role auto-down
show lldp tlv-select
Use the show lldp tlv-select command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the per interface TLV configuration.
Syntax
show lldp tlv-select [interface ]
850
Data Center Bridging Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 851 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
A valid physical interface specifier.
all
All interfaces.
Default Configuration
The default is to show the per interface TLV configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
switch(config)# show lldp tlv-select interface
te1/0/1
Interface
PFC
App Priority
-------------- ---
------------
te1/0/
No
Yes
switch(config)# show lldp tlv-select
access-management
dcbx
pfc
application-priority
port-description
port-vlan
system-capabilities
Data Center Bridging Commands
851
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 852 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
system-description
system-name
switch(config)# show lldp tlv-select interface all
Interface
PFC
App Priority
-------------- ---
------------
te1/0/1
Yes
No
te1/0/2
Yes
No
show lldp dcbx
Use the show lldp dcbx command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
per interface DCBX configuration and status.
Syntax
show lldp dcbx [interface ]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
A valid physical interface specifier.
all
All interfaces.
Detail
Display detailed DCBX information.
Status
Displays a status summary.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
852
Data Center Bridging Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 853 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example 1
The following example displays DCBX status.
switch(config)# show lldp dcbx interface all status
Interface
Dscrd
Status
---------- -----------
Role
Version
DCBX
DCBX
Tx
Rx
Frame
TLV
Dscrd
-------- -------- ------ ------ ------ -
te1/0/1
0
Enabled
Auto-up
CEE 1.06
32
37
0
te1/0/2
0
Enabled
Auto-up
IEEE
32
37
0
te2/0/1
0
Enabled
Auto-dn
CIN 1.0
32
37
0
te2/0/2
0
Enabled
Auto-dn
IEEE
32
37
0
te3/0/1
0
Enabled
Auto-dn
CIN 1.0
32
37
0
te3/0/2
0
Disabled Manual
0
0
0
IEEE
The following example displays DCBX enabled – legacy device (CIN/CEE).
switch(config)# show lldp dcbx interface te1/0/1 detail
Interface te1/0/1
DCBX Admin Status:
Enabled
Configured Version:
Auto-detect
Peer DCBX Version:
CIN Version 1.0
Peer MAC: 00:23:24:A4:21:03
Peer Description:
Version 5.00
Cisco Nexus 5020 IOS
Data Center Bridging Commands
853
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 854 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Auto-configuration Port Role:
Auto-downstream
Peer Is Configuration Source:
False
Local Configuration:
Max/Oper
Type
Subtype
Version
En/Will/Adv
PFC(3) 000
000
Y/Y/Y
PG(2)
000
000
Y/Y/Y
APP(4) 000
000
Y/Y/Y
PFC Enable Vector:
7:0
0:0
1:1
2:0
3:0
4:0
5:0
6:0
Peer Configuration:
Operation version: 00
22
Max version: 00
Seq no: 23
Ack no:
Max/Oper
Type
Subtype Version
En/Will/Err
PFC(3) 000
000/000
Y/N/N
PG(2)
000
000/000
Y/N/N
APP(4) 000
000/000
Y/N/N
PFC Enable Vector:
7:0
0:0
1:1
2:0
Application Priority (TX Enabled)
854
Data Center Bridging Commands
3:0
4:0
5:1
6:0
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 855 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Type
Application
Priority
Status
--------------------------------------------------Ethernet
FC0E
3
Enabled
TCP/SCTP
860
4
Disabled
TCP/SCTP
3260
4
Disabled
Error Counters:
ETS Incompatible Configuration: 0
PFC Incompatible Configuration: 0
Disappearing Neighbor:
0
Multiple Neighbors Detected:
0
Example 3
The following example displays DCBX enabled – IEEE device (DCBX
Version Forced).
switch(config)# show lldp dcbx interface te1/0/1
Interface te1/0/1
DCBX Admin Status:
Enabled
Configured DCBX Version:
CIN 1.0
Peer DCBX Version:
CEE 1.6
Peer MAC: 00:23:24:A4:21:03
Peer Description:
Version 5.00
Cisco Nexus 5020 IOS
Auto-configuration Port Role:
Auto-upstream
Peer Is Configuration Source:
True
Error Counters:
ETS Incompatible Configuration: 7
PFC Incompatible Configuration: 0
Disappearing Neighbor:
0
Data Center Bridging Commands
855
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 856 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Multiple Neighbors Detected:
0
Example 5
The following example displays DCBX enabled—detailed view. Displays the
transmitted and received TLV information. The ETS information is
documented in IEEE 802.1az D2.4, tables D-2, D-3, and D-4. The PFC
Enable Vector information is documented in IEEE 802.1az D2.4, table D-5.
The transmitted recommendation TLV is never displayed because it is always
the same as the configured TLV. The peer description is obtained from the
LLDP System Name:
switch(config)# show lldp dcbx interface te1/0/1 detail
Interface te1/0/1
DCBX Admin Status:
Enabled
Configured Version:
Auto-detect
Auto-configuration Port Role:
Configuration Source
Peer Is Configuration Source:
True
PFC Capability (TX Enabled)
Willing: True
MBC: False
PFC Enable Vector:
Max PFC classes supported: 3
0:0 1:1 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:1 6:0 7:0
Peer DCBX Version:
CEE 1.6
Peer Description:
5.00
Cisco Nexus 5020 IOS Version
Peer MAC:
00:23:24:A4:21:03
Peer PFC Capability:
Willing: False
MBC: False
PFC Enable Vector
0:0 1:1 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:1 6:0 7:0
Peer Application Priority
856
Max PFC classes supported: 3
Data Center Bridging Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 857 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Type
Application
Priority
------------------------------------Ethernet
FC0E
3
TCP/SCTP
3260
4
Data Center Bridging Commands
857
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 858 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
858
Data Center Bridging Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 859 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
FIP Snooping Commands
40
NOTE: Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) commands are only supported on the
PCM8024-k switch. CLI commands and Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator
pages are not available for other switch models.
The FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) is used to perform the functions of
FC_BB_E device discovery, initialization and maintenance. FIP uses a
separate EtherType from FCoE to enable the distinction of discovery,
initialization, and maintenance traffic from other FCoE traffic. FIP frames
(with one exception) are the standard Ethernet size (1518 Byte 802.1q frame)
whereas FCoE frames are a maximum of 2240 bytes.
This document describes FIP snooping, which is a frame inspection method
used by FIP Snooping Bridges to monitor FIP frames and apply policies based
upon the L2 header information in those frames, following recommendations
in Annex C of FC_BB_5 Rev 2.00. This allows for:
1 Auto-configuration of Ethernet ACLs based on information in the
Ethernet headers of FIP frames.
2 Emulation of FC point-to-point links within the DCB Ethernet network.
3 Enhanced FCoE security/robustness by preventing FCoE MAC spoofing.
The FIP Snooping Bridge solution in PowerConnect 4.2 release supports
configuration-only of perimeter port role and FCF-facing port roles and is
only intended for use at the edge of the switched network.
The role of FIP Snooping-enabled ports on the switch falls under one of the
following types:
1 Perimeter or Edge port (connected directly to ENode).
2 FCF facing port (that receives traffic from FCFs targeted to the ENodes).
The default port role in an FCoE enabled VLAN is as a perimeter port. FCF
facing ports must be configured by the user.
Setting Up FIP Snooping
Three steps are required to set up FIP snooping:
1 Enable FIP snooping
FIP Snooping Commands
859
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 860 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
feature fip-snooping
2 Configure a VLAN and enable it for FIP Snooping. The example below
sets up ports 1 through 16 (CNA connected ports) and port 24 (FCF
connected port) to use VLAN 100 and enables VLAN 100 for FIP
snooping.
vlan 100
fip-snooping enable
exit
interface range te1/0/1-16,te1/0/24
switchport mode general
switchport general allowed vlan add 100 tagged
exit
3 Set up the port roles. The example below configures ports 1-16 as CNA
connected ports which will receive information from the FCF connected
port and sets the FCF connected port as the configuration source.
interface te1/0/24
lldp dcbx port-role configuration-source
fip-snooping port-mode fcf
interface range te1/0/1-16
lldp dcbx port-role auto-down
exit
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
feature fip-snooping
show fip-snooping fcf
fip-snooping enable
show fip-snooping sessions
fip-snooping fc-map
show fip-snooping statistics
fip-snooping port-mode
show fip-snooping vlan
860
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 861 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show fip-snooping
clear fip-snooping statistics
show fip-snooping enode
–
feature fip-snooping
Use the feature fip-snooping command in Global Configuration mode to
globally enable Fibre Channel over Ethernet Initialization Protocol (FIP)
snooping on the switch. Use the no form of the command to return the
settings to the default values and disable FIP snooping.
Use the no form of the command to globally disable FIP snooping. When FIP
snooping is globally disabled, received FIP frames are forwarded or flooded
using the normal multicast rules. In addition, other FIP snooping commands
are not available until the FIP snooping feature is enabled.
Syntax
feature fip-snooping
no feature fip-snooping
Default Configuration
The default mode is off (FIP snooping feature is disabled).
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
When FIP snooping is disabled, received FIP frames are forwarded or flooded
using the normal multicast rules.
When FIP snooping is enabled, FC-BB-5 Annex D ACLs are installed on the
switch and FIP frames are snooped. FIP snooping will not allow FIP or Fiber
Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames to be forwarded over a port until the
port is operationally enabled for PFC. VLAN tagging must be enabled on the
interface in order to carry the dot1p values through the network.
Example
The following example enables the FIP snooping feature.
FIP Snooping Commands
861
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 862 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
s1(config)#feature fip-snooping
fip-snooping enable
Use the fip-snooping command in VLAN Configuration mode to enable
snooping of FIP packets on the configured VLANs. FIP snooping is disabled
on VLANs by default.
Use the no form of the command to return the mode to the default (off).
Syntax
fip-snooping enable
no fip-snooping enable
Default Configuration
The default mode is off (FIP snooping is disabled.)
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration
User Guidelines
Priority Flow Control (PFC) must be operationally enabled before FIP
snooping can operate on an interface. VLAN tagging must be enabled on the
interface in order to carry the dot1p value through the network.
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
Example
The following example enables FIP snooping on VLANs 2, 3,...8.
s1(config)#vlan 2-8
s1(config-vlan)#fip-snooping enable
862
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 863 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
fip-snooping fc-map
Use the fip-snooping fc-map command in VLAN Configuration mode to
configure the FP-MAP value on a VLAN. The FC map value is used to help in
securing the switch against misconfiguration.
Syntax
fip-snooping fc-map 0x0 – 0xffffff
no fip-snooping fc-map
Parameter Description
Valid FC map values are in the range of 0x0 to 0xffffff.
Default Configuration
The default FC map value is 0x0efc00.
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration mode
User Guidelines
When configured using fabric-provided MAC addresses, FCoE devices
transmit frames containing the FC map value in the upper 24 bits. Only
frames that match the configured FC map value are passed across the VLAN.
Frames with MAC addresses that do not match the FC map value are
discarded.
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
Example
The following example configures an FC map value of 0x100 on VLAN 208.
(config)# vlan 208
(config-vlan)# fip-snooping enable
(config-vlan)# fip-snooping fc-map 0x100
FIP Snooping Commands
863
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 864 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
fip-snooping port-mode
To relay the FIP packets received from the hosts toward the Fibre Channel
Fabric (FCF), the switch needs to know the interfaces to which the FCFs are
connected. Use the fip-snooping port-mode command in Interface
Configuration mode to configure the interface that is connected towards
FCF. By default, an interface is configured to be a host-facing interface if it is
not configured to be an FCF-facing interface.
Syntax
fip-snooping port-mode fcf
no fip-snooping port-mode
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
FCF
Fibre Channel Fabric
Default Configuration
The default behavior is configuration as a host-facing interface.
Command Mode
Interface (physical interface and port channel) Configuration
User Guidelines
It is recommended that FCF-facing ports be placed into auto-upstream mode
in order to receive DCBX information and propagate it to the CNAs on the
downstream (host-facing) ports.
Interfaces enabled for PFC should be configured in trunk or general mode
and must be PFC-operationally enabled before FCoE traffic can pass over the
port.
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
864
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 865 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example configures an interface to be connected to an FCF
switch.
(config)# interface te1/0/1
(config-vlan)# fip-snooping port-mode fcf
show fip-snooping
Use the show fip-snooping sessions command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display information about the global FIP snooping
configuration and status.
Syntax
show fip-snooping
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following information is displayed.
Parameter
Description
Global Mode
FIP snooping configuration status on the switch. It displays
Enable when FIP snooping is enabled on the switch and
Disable when FIP snooping is disabled on the switch.
FCoE VLAN List
List of VLAN IDs on which FIP snooping is enabled.
FCFs
Number of FCFs discovered on the switch.
ENodes
Number of Enodes discovered on the switch.
Sessions
Total virtual sessions on the switch.
FIP Snooping Commands
865
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 866 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Max VLANs
Maximum number of VLANs that can be enabled for FIP
snooping on the switch.
Max FCFs in VLAN Maximum number of FCFs supported in a VLAN.
Max ENodes
Maximum number of ENodes supported in the switch.
Max Sessions
Maximum number of Sessions supported in the switch.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
(switch)# show fip-snooping
Global Mode:
Enable
FCoE VLAN List :
FCFs:
2,4,5-8
2
ENodes:
2
Sessions:
10
Max VLANs:
8
Max FCFs in VLAN:
Max ENodes:
Max Sessions:
866
4
312
1024
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 867 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show fip-snooping enode
Use the show fip-snooping enode command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display information about the interfaces connected to
ENodes.
Syntax
show fip-snooping enode [enode-mac]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
enode-mac
MAC address of the enode to display.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following information is displayed.
Parameter
Description
Interface
Interface to which the ENode is connected.
VLAN
ID number of the VLAN to which the ENode belongs.
NameID
Name of the ENode.
FIP-MAC
MAC address of the ENode.
FCID
Fiber channel ID number of the virtual port that was created by
FCF when the ENode logged into the network.
Sessions Established Number of successful virtual connections established.
The following additional information is displayed when the optional
argument is supplied.
FIP Snooping Commands
867
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 868 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Sessions Waiting
Number of virtual connections waiting for FCF acceptance.
Sessions Failed
Number of virtual sessions failed.
Max-FCoE-PDU
Maximum FCoE PDU size the ENode MAC intends to use for
FCoE traffic. This is equivalent to the maximum Ethernet
frame payload the ENode intends to send.
Time elapsed
Time elapsed since first successful login session snooped from
the ENode.
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
Example #1
The following example displays sample output of the command with no
optional argument supplied.
(switch)# show fip-snooping enode
Interface
Sessions
VLAN
Name-ID
ENode-MAC
FCFs
----------------------------------------------------1/0/2
1
00000000
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
1
3
1/0/5
5
100
00000000
00:0d:31:23:53:11
2
Example #2
The sample output of the command below displays with the optional
argument supplied.
(switch)# show fip-snooping enode 00:0c:29:65:82:bc
Interface
VLAN
868
1/0/2
1
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 869 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Name-ID
000000
ENode-MAC
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
FCFs Connected1
Sessions Established3
Sessions Waiting 1
Session Failed 0
Max-FCoE-PDU
2158
Time elapsed 0 days, 1 hours, 20 minutes
show fip-snooping fcf
Use the show fip-snooping fcf command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display information about the interfaces connected to FCFs.
Syntax
show fip-snooping fcf [fcf-mac]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
fcf-mac
MAC address of the FCF.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following information is displayed when no FCF mac argument is
supplied.
FIP Snooping Commands
869
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 870 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Interface
Interface to which the FCF is connected.
VLAN
ID number of the VLAN to which the FCF belongs.
No. of ENodes
Total number of ENodes that are connected to the FCF.
FPMA/SPMA
Type of the MAC address for ENode as negotiated by the FCF.
FCMAP
FCMAP value used by the FCF.
FCF-MAC
MAC address of the FCF.
Fabric Name
Name of the FCF.
Below is additional information regarding the FCF that is displayed when the
optional FCF MAC address argument is provided.
Parameter
Description
Sessions
Total number of virtual sessions accepted by FCF in the
associated VLAN.
D-bit
This reflects the value of the D-bit provided by the most
recently received Discovery Advertisement from the FCF.
When D-bit value is zero then FIP snooping bridge verifies the
periodic VN_Port FIP Keep Alive frames associated with FCF
and Discovery Advertisements sent by FCF. When D-bit is set
to 1, switch discards snooped VN_Port FIP Keep Alive frames
associated with FCF and does not timeout the FCoE sessions
established with the FCF based on FKA_VN_PERIOD*5
interval.
Available for Login
This reflects the value of the A bit provided by the most
recently received Discovery Advertisement from the FCF. This
provides the information that the transmitting FCF is available
for FIP FLOGI/FDISC from ENodes. This is informational and
shall have no effect on existing logins.
Priority
The Priority returned from the FCF in the Solicited Discovery
Advertisement. This indicates the Priority that has been
manually assigned to the FCF.
870
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 871 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
FKA-ADV
FIP keepalive interval (FKA_ADV_PERIOD) in seconds
configured on the FCF multiplied by five. For example, if the
FKA_ADV period configured on the FCF is 80 seconds, the
value of this field is 400.
FCF Expiry Time
This is timer value to monitor the status of the FCF. FCF entry
and all its associated virtual sessions will be removed when the
value reaches 0. This value is reset to Configured FKA-ADV
every time a Discovery Advertisement is received from the
FCF-MAC.
Time Elapsed
Time since FCF is Discovered.
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
Example #1
The following displays sample output of the command when no optional
argument is provided.
(config)# show fip-snooping fcf
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Interface VLAN ENodes FPMA/ FC-MAP
Name-ID
Fabric-Name
FCF-MAC
SPMA
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1/0/11
1
2
FPMA
0e:fc:00 00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80 20:65:00:0d: 20:65:00:0d:
ec:b1:9e:81
ec:97:52:c1
3/0/10
00000000
1
1
FPMA 0e:fc:00 00:0d:ec:b2:2c:81
00000000
3/0/15
00000000
100
1
FPMA 0e:fc:10 00:0c:ab:2c:eb:12
00000000
FIP Snooping Commands
871
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 872 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example #2
The following displays sample output of the command when the optional
argument is provided.
(switch)# show
fip-snooping
fcf
00:0d:ec:b2:2c:81
Interface 3/0/10
VLAN1
ENodes 1
FPMA/SPMAFPMA
FCF-MAC00:0d:ec:b2:2c:81
FC-MAP0e:fc:00
Name-ID20:65:00:0d:ec:b1:9e:81
Fabric-Name 20:65:00:0d:ec:97:52:c1
Sessions3
D-bit0
Available for Login1
Priority2
FKA-ADV(FKA_ADV_PERIOD*5)
250
FCF Expiry Time219
Time Elapsed0 days, 2 hours, 8 minutes
show fip-snooping sessions
Use the show fip-snooping sessions command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display information about the active FIP snooping sessions.
Syntax
show fip-snooping sessions [[[vlan ] | [interface ]
| [fcf [enode ]]] [detail]]
872
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 873 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Interface-id
ID of an interface on which FIP snooping has been enabled.
FCF-MAC
MAC address of the FCF that is part of the session.
ENode-MAC
MAC address of the ENode that is part of the session.
VLAN
ID number of the VLAN that contains the session.
FCoE MAC
Source MAC address of the FCoE packets that are originated
by the ENode as part of the session.
FC-ID
Fiber Channel ID of the virtual port that was created by the
FCF when the ENode VN_Port did a FLOGI/NPIV/FDISC
request.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
The following information is displayed:
Parameter
Description
FCF-MAC
MAC address of the FCF that is part of the session.
ENode-MAC
MAC address of the ENode that is part of the session.
VLAN
ID number of the VLAN that contains the session.
FCoE MAC
Source MAC address of the FCoE packets that are originated
by the ENode as part of the session.
FC-ID
Fiber Channel ID of the virtual port that was created by the
FCF when the ENode logged into the network.
FIP Snooping Commands
873
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 874 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The command output format is different when the detail option is used. The
information below is displayed.
Parameter
Description
VLAN
VLAN to which the session belongs.
FC-MAP
FCMAP value used by the FCF.
FCFs
Number of FCFs discovered.
ENodes
Number of ENodes discovered.
Sessions
Total virtual sessions in FCoE VLAN.
FCF Information
Interface
Interface on which the FCF is discovered.
MAC
MAC address of the FCF.
ENodes
Total number of ENodes that are connected to the FCF.
Sessions
Total number of virtual sessions accepted by FCF in the
associated VLAN.
ENode Information
Interface
Interface to which the ENode is connected.
MAC
MAC address of the ENode.
Sessions
Total number of virtual sessions originated from ENodes to
FCF in the VLAN.
Waiting
Total number of virtual connections waiting for FCF
acceptance in the VLAN.
Session Information
FCoE-MAC
Source MAC address of the FCoE packets that are originated
by the ENode as part of the session.
Request (FP, SP)
FIP session request type sent by ENode. This can be FLOGI or
FDESC (NPIV FDISC). Whereas FP and SP values are the FP
bit and the SP bit values in the FLOGI or NPIV FDISC request
respectively.
874
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 875 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Expiry Time
This is virtual connection/session expiry interval. This is used to
monitor the status of the session. Session entry is removed
when the value reaches 0. This value is reset to 450 secs (5*90
secs) every time an associated VN_Port FKA is received from
the ENode. This is ignored (marked as NA) if the D-bit is set to
one in the FCF Discovery Advertisements.
Mode
This is the addressing mode in use by the VN_Port at ENode. In
other words, this is the type of MAC address granted (selected
and returned) by FCF. This can be one of the addressing
modes, i.e. FPMA or SPMA.
State
This is the state of the virtual session. The state is displayed as
Tentative during the process of ENode login to FCF (using
FLOGI or FDESC). It displays Active after ENode and FCF
establish a successful virtual connection.
Session-Time
Time elapsed after this successful virtual session is established
by ENode with FCF. The value is displayed in xd, yh, zm format
where x represents number of days, y represents hours and z
represents minutes elapsed following this successful virtual
session. This field has no useful information for waiting
sessions.
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
Example #1
The following sample command output displays when no arguments are
provided.
(switch)# show fip-snooping sessions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------MAC
FCF-MAC
FC-ID
ENode-MAC
VLAN
FCoE-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------FIP Snooping Commands
875
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 876 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80
0e:fc:00:ad:00:00
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
38:0f:db
100
00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80
0e:fc:00:ad:00:01
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
38:0f:dc
100
00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80
0e:fc:00:ad:00:02
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
38:0f:dd
100
00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80
0e:fc:00:ad:00:05
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
38:0f:e1
100
00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80
0e:fc:00:ad:00:07
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
38:0f:e3
100
00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80
0e:fc:00:ad:00:10
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
38:0f:e6
100
00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80
0e:fc:00:ad:00:19
00:0c:29:65:82:bc
38:0f:ee
100
00:0e:ad:12:23:53
0e:fc:11:aa:bb:00
00:0d:29:12:22:a6
44:23:a4
200
00:0e:ad:12:23:53
0e:fc:11:aa:bb:01
00:0d:29:12:22:a6
44:02:ab
200
00:0e:ad:12:23:53
0e:fc:11:aa:bb:02
00:0d:29:23:14:22
44:35:1b
200
00:0e:ad:12:23:53
0e:fc:11:aa:bb:03
00:0d:29:23:14:22
44:35:2a
200
00:0e:ad:12:23:53
0e:fc:11:aa:bb:04
00:0d:29:23:14:22
44:36:3b
200
Example #2
The sample command output below displays when the detail option is
specified.
(switch)# show fip-snooping sessions detail
876
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 877 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
VLAN: 100
FC-MAP: 0e:fc:00
1
Sessions: 7
FCFs:
1
ENodes:
1
Interface: 3/0/15
Sessions: 7
MAC: 00:0d:ec:b2:2c:80 ENodes:
Interface: 2/0/1
MAC: 00:0c:29:65:82:bc
Sessions: 7
Waiting: 0
State
FCoE-MAC
Session-Time
Request
Expiry
(FP,SP)
Time
Mode
0e:fc:00:ad:00:00
0d, 04h, 20m
FLOGI(1,1) 200
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:00:ad:00:01
0d, 04h, 19m
FDESC(1,1) 259
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:00:ad:00:02
0d, 04h, 18m
FDESC(1,1) 215
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:00:ad:00:05
0d, 04h, 10m
FDESC(1,1) 231
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:00:ad:00:07
0d, 04h, 01m
FDESC(1,1) 189
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:00:ad:00:10
0d, 02h, 07m
FDESC(1,1) 210
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:00:ad:00:19
0d, 01h, 20m
FDESC(1,1) 222
FPMA
ACTIVE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------VLAN: 200
FC-MAP: 0e:fc:11
2
Sessions: 5
FCFs:
1
ENodes:
FIP Snooping Commands
877
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 878 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
2
Interface: 3/0/11
Sessions: 5
MAC: 00:0e:ad:12:23:53 ENodes:
Interface: 1/0/10
MAC: 00:0d:29:12:22:a6
Sessions: 2
Waiting: 0
FCoE-MAC
Session-Time
Request
Expiry Mode State
(FP,SP)
Time
0e:fc:11:ad:00:00 FLOGI(1,1) 242
0d, 02h, 30m
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:11:ad:00:01 FDESC(1,1) 245
0d, 02h, 28m
FPMA
ACTIVE
Interface: 1/0/11
MAC: 00:0d:29:23:14:22
Sessions: 3
Waiting: 1
FCoE-MAC
Session-Time
Request
Expiry Mode State
(FP,SP)
Time
0e:fc:11:ad:00:02 FLOGI(1,1) 202
0d, 02h, 20m
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:11:ad:00:03 FDESC(1,1) 228
0d, 01h, 18m
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:11:ad:00:03 FDESC(1,1) 232
0d, 01h, 02m
FPMA
ACTIVE
878
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 879 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
TENTATIVE
----------------- FDESC(1,1) --------------
FPMA
Example #3
The sample command output below displays sessions between specified FCF
and ENode.
(switch)# show fip-snooping sessions fcf
00:0e:ad:12:23:53 enode 00:0d:29:12:22:a6
----------------------------------------------------------------------------MAC
FCF-MAC
FC-ID
ENode-MAC
VLAN
FCoE-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------00:0e:ad:12:23:53
0e:fc:11:aa:bb:00
00:0d:29:12:22:a6
44:23:a4
200
00:0e:ad:12:23:53
0e:fc:11:aa:bb:01
00:0d:29:12:22:a6
44:02:ab
200
Example #4
The sample command output below displays sessions between specified FCF
and ENode with the detail option.
(switch)# show fip-snooping sessions fcf
00:0e:ad:12:23:53 enode 00:0d:29:12:22:a6 detail
VLAN: 200
FC-MAP: 0e:fc:11
2
Sessions: 5
FCFs:
1
ENodes:
FIP Snooping Commands
879
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 880 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
2
Interface: 3/0/11
Sessions: 5
MAC: 00:0e:ad:12:23:53 ENodes:
Interface: 1/0/10
MAC: 00:0d:29:12:22:a6
Sessions: 2
Waiting: 0
FCoE-MAC
Session-Time
Request
Expiry Mode State
(FP,SP)
Time
0e:fc:11:ad:00:00 FLOGI(1,1) 242
0d, 02h, 30m
FPMA
ACTIVE
0e:fc:11:ad:00:01 FDESC(1,1) 245
0d, 02h, 28m
FPMA
ACTIVE
show fip-snooping statistics
Use the show fip-snooping statistics command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display the statistics of the FIP packets snooped in the VLAN
or on an interface. If the optional (VLAN or interface) argument is not given,
this command displays the statistics for all of the FIP snooping enabled
VLANs.
Syntax
show fip-snooping statistics [vlan vlan-id] | [interface interface-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A VLAN on which FIP snooping is enabled.
interface-id
An interface belonging to a VLAN on which FIP snooping is
enabled.
880
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 881 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following table describes the packet counters per FIP Operation.
Packet Counter
Description
VR
Number of VLAN Request messages received on the VLAN.
VN
Number of VLAN Notification messages received on the
VLAN.
MDS
Number of Multicast Discovery Solicitation messages snooped
on the VLAN.
UDS
Number of Unicast Discovery Solicitation messages snooped on
the VLAN.
FLOGI
Number of Fabric Logins snooped on the VLAN.
FDISC
Number of fabric discovery logins snooped on the VLAN.
LOGO
Number of Fabric Logouts on the VLAN.
VNPort-keep-alive
Number of VN_Port keepalive messages snooped on the VLAN.
MDA
Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement messages
snooped on the VLAN.
UDA
Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement messages snooped
on the VLAN.
FLOGI_ACC
Number of Fabric Logins accepted on the VLAN.
FLOGI_RJT
Number of Fabric Logins rejected on the VLAN.
FDISC_ACC
Number of Fabric Discoveries accepted on the VLAN.
FDISC_RJT
Number of Fabric Discoveries rejected on the VLAN.
LOGO_ACC
Number of Fabric Logouts accepted on the VLAN.
LOGO_RJT
Number of Fabric Logouts rejected on the VLAN.
FIP Snooping Commands
881
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 882 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Packet Counter
Description
CVL
Number of Clear Virtual Links actions on the VLAN.
The following table describes the other interface or session-related counters.
Other Counters
Description
Number of Virtual
Session Timeouts
Number of Virtual sessions removed due to session timer expiry.
Number of FCF
Session Timeouts
Number of ACTIVE sessions timed out due to Discovery
Advertisements expiry from FCFs in the VLAN.
Number of Session
configuration
failures
Number of sessions in the VLAN that failed to be configured in
the hardware.
Number of Sessions Number of sessions that are denied to be created for the new
denied with FCF
FCF as the number of FCFs reached the maximum allowed in
limit
the VLAN.
Number of Sessions Number of session create requests that are denied for the new
denied with ENode ENode as the number of ENodes reached the maximum
limit
allowed in the system.
Number of Sessions Number of sessions that are denied to be created as the number
denied with System of sessions reached the maximum allowed in the system.
limit
When an interface is provided as an argument, interface applicable statistics
are only displayed. See Example #3 below for applicable statistics on
interface.
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
Example #1
Below is the sample command usage with no optional arguments supplied.
(switch)# show fip-snooping statistics
VLAN: 4
882
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 883 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
--------------------------------FIP-Operation
Number of Pkts
VR
2
VN
2
MDS
2
UDS
2
FLOGI
2
FDISC
2
LOGO
0
VNPort-keep-alive 200
MDA
25
UDA
2
FLOGI_ACC
2
FLOGI_RJT
0
FDISC_ACC
2
FDISC_RJT
0
LOGO_ACC
0
LOGO_RJT
0
CVL
0
---------------------------------Number of Virtual Session Timeouts:23
Number of FCF Session Timeouts:
6
Number of Session configuration failures: 10
Number of Sessions denied with FCF limit:
10
Number of Sessions denied with ENode limit:
10
Number of Sessions denied with System limit:
FIP Snooping Commands
12
883
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 884 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
VLAN: 200
------------------------------FIP-Operation
Number of Pkts
VR
2
VN
2
MDS
5
UDS
4
FLOGI
5
FDISC
5
LOGO
1
VNPort-keep-alive 310
MDA
35
UDA
3
FLOGI_ACC
4
FLOGI_RJT
0
FDISC_ACC
15
FDISC_RJT
0
LOGO_ACC
1
LOGO_RJT
0
CVL
0
--------------------------------
Number of Virtual Session Timeouts:2
Number of FCF Session Timeouts:
0
Number of Session configuration failures: 10
884
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 885 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Number of Sessions denied with FCF limit:
0
Number of Sessions denied with ENode limit:
0
Number of Sessions denied with System limit:
21
Example #2
Below is the sample command output with optional VLAN argument
supplied.
(switch)# show fip-snooping statistics vlan 200
VLAN: 200
------------------------------FIP-Operation
Number of Pkts
------------------------------VR
2
VN
2
MDS
5
UDS
4
FLOGI
5
FDISC
5
LOGO
1
VNPort-keep-alive 310
MDA
35
UDA
3
FLOGI_ACC
4
FLOGI_RJT
0
FDISC_ACC
15
FIP Snooping Commands
885
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 886 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
FDISC_RJT
0
LOGO_ACC
1
LOGO_RJT
0
CVL
0
--------------------------------
Number of Virtual Session Timeouts:2
Number of FCF Session Timeouts:
0
Number of Session configuration failures: 10
Number of Sessions denied with FCF limit:
0
Number of Sessions denied with ENode limit:
Number of Sessions denied with System limit:
0
21
Example #3
Below is the sample command output with optional interface argument
supplied.
(switch)# show fip-snooping statistics interface
1/0/5
------------------------------FIP-Operation
Number of Pkts
------------------------------VR
2
VN
2
MDS
5
UDS
1
FLOGI
2
886
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 887 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
FDISC
5
LOGO
1
VNPort-keep-alive 310
MDA
35
UDA
3
FLOGI_ACC
4
FLOGI_RJT
0
FDISC_ACC
15
FDISC_RJT
0
LOGO_ACC
1
LOGO_RJT
0
CVL
0
--------------------------------
Number of Virtual Session Timeouts:2
Number of FCF Session Timeouts:
0
Number of Session configuration failures: 10
Number of Sessions denied with FCF limit:
0
Number of Sessions denied with ENode limit:
0
Number of Sessions denied with System limit:
21
show fip-snooping vlan
Use the show fip-snooping vlan command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display the FCoE VLANs information and, additionally, the FIP
snooping port status when optional argument is specified.
Syntax
show fip-snooping vlan [vlan-id]
FIP Snooping Commands
887
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 888 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A VLAN enabled for FIP snooping.
VLAN
VLAN in which FIP snooping is enabled/operational.
FC-MAP
FCoE mapped address prefix of the FCoE forwarder for the
FCoE VLAN.
FCFs
Number of FCFs discovered.
ENodes
Number of ENodes discovered.
Sessions
Total virtual sessions in FCoE VLAN.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
Example
console#show fip-snooping vlan 200
VLAN:
200
FC-MAP:
0E:FC:00
Number of FCFs discovered:
1
Number of ENodes discovered:
Total virtual sessions in VLAN: 3
Active Ports:
Te1/0/2, Te1/0/3,Te1/0/21
888
FIP Snooping Commands
2
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 889 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Inactive Ports:
clear fip-snooping statistics
Use the clear fip-snooping statistics command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to clear the FIP Snooping statistics in the supplied VLAN or on
a supplied interface. If the optional (VLAN or interface) argument is not
given, this command clears the statistics on all FIP snooping-enabled VLANs.
Syntax
clear fip-snooping statistics [vlan vlan-id] | [interface interface-id]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A VLAN on which FIP snooping is enabled.
interface-id
An interface belonging to a VLAN on which FIP snooping is
enabled.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command can only be entered after FIP snooping is enabled using the
feature fip-snooping command. Otherwise, it does not appear in the CLI
syntax tree.
FIP Snooping Commands
889
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 890 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
890
FIP Snooping Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 891 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
41
Priority Flow Control Commands
NOTE: Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) commands are only supported on the
PCM8024-k switch. CLI commands and Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator
pages are not available for other switch models.
Priority Flow Control (PFC) provides a means of pausing frames based on
individual priorities on a single physical link. By pausing the congested
priority or priorities independently, protocols that are highly loss sensitive can
share the same link with traffic that has different loss tolerances with less
congestion spreading than standard flow control. The priorities are
differentiated by the priority field of the 802.1Q VLAN header. PFC is
standardized by the IEEE 802.1Qbb specification.
PFC uses a new control packet defined in 802.1Qbb and therefore is not
compatible with standard flow control. An interface that is configured for
PFC will be automatically disabled for 802.3x flow control. When PFC is
disabled on an interface, the flow control configuration for the interface
becomes active. Any flow control frames received on a PFC configured
interface are ignored.
Each priority is configured as either drop or no-drop. If a priority that is
designated as no-drop is congested, the priority is paused. Drop priorities do
not participate in pause. By default there are no priority classifications
configured and PFC is not enabled.
While several no-drop priorities may be configured on a supporting system,
the actual number of lossless priorities supported on a given system is a
function of the switch chips packet buffer, the maximum supported MTU
size, pause delay, the media type and the total number of ports enabled for
lossless behavior. In order to guarantee lossless behavior, the switch chip must
send a pause message prior to exhausting its available packet buffer and have
sufficient buffer to absorb the delay. In order to accomplish this, it must
reserve enough memory (headroom) to handle the max delay in processing
the pause packet.
The maximum number of lossless priorities per interface is two. The
headroom is only used for guaranteeing lossless behavior. There must be
enough dynamic memory to handle the typical work load of the switch in
Priority Flow Control Commands
891
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 892 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
addition to the headroom. With two no-drop priorities per interface and
static allocations, there is only about 30 percent of the buffer space available
for normal forwarding behavior.
The effective default behavior on an interface enabled for PFC without a nodrop priority is that no flow control (legacy or PFC) is enabled. If the user
enables PFC but does not create any no-drop priorities, the interface will not
be lossless.
Changing the drop and no-drop capabilities on an interface, either in flow
control or priority flow control, may require that all ports briefly drop link.
The priority to flow control group cannot be changed while traffic is running.
When 802.3 link flow control is enabled, all priorities are mapped to a single
flow control group. When 802.1Qbb is enabled, the priorities are each
mapped into their own flow control group, where lossless groups have
additional buffer to handle the round trip delay for flow control. In order to
minimize the impact, the link will only be dropped when changing between
802.3 and 802.1Qbb.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
priority-flow-control mode
priority-flow-control priority
clear priority-flow-control statistics
show interfaces priority-flow-control
priority-flow-control mode
Use the priority-flow-control mode on command in Datacenter-Bridging
Config mode to enable Priority-Flow-Control (PFC) on an interface. To
disable Priority-Flow-Control, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
priority-flow-control mode on
priority-flow-control mode off
no priority-flow-control mode
892
Priority Flow Control Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 893 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
on
Enable PFC on the interface.
off
Disable PFC on the interface.
Default Configuration
Priority-flow-control mode is off (disabled) by default.
Command Mode
Datacenter-Bridging Config mode
User Guidelines
PFC must be enabled before FIP snooping can operate over the interface. Use
the no form of the command to return the mode to the default (off). VLAN
tagging (trunk or general mode) must be enabled on the interface in order to
carry the dot1p value through the network. Additionally, the dot1mapping to
class-of-service must be set to one-to-one.
When PFC is enabled on an interface, the normal PAUSE control mechanism
is operationally disabled.
Example
The following example enables PFC on an interface.
s1(config)#interface te1/0/1
s1(config-if-Te1/0/1)#datacenter-bridging
s1(config-if-dcb)#priority-flow-control mode on
priority-flow-control priority
Use the priority-flow-control priority command in Datacenter-Bridging
Config mode to enable the priority group for lossless (no-drop) or lossy (drop)
behavior on the selected interface. Up to two lossless priorities can be enabled
on an interface.
Priority Flow Control Commands
893
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 894 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Use the no form of the command to return all priorities to their default lossy
behavior.
Syntax
priority-flow-control priority priority-list {drop | no-drop}
no priority-flow-control priority
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
drop
Disable lossless behavior on the selected priorities.
no-drop
Enable lossless behavior on the selected priorities.
Default Configuration
The default behavior for all priorities is drop.
Command Mode
Datacenter-Bridging Config mode
User Guidelines
The administrator must configure the same no-drop priorities across the
network in order to ensure end-to-end lossless behavior.
Example
The following example sets priority 3 to no drop behavior.
s1(config)#interface te1/0/1
s1(config-if-Te1/0/1)#datacenter-bridging
s1(config-if-dcb)#priority-flow-control mode on
s1(config-if-dcb)#priority-flow-control priority 1
no-drop
894
Priority Flow Control Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 895 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clear priority-flow-control statistics
Use the clear priority-flow-control statistics command to clear all or interface
Priority-Flow-Control statistics.
Syntax
clear priority-flow-control statistics [ethernet interface ]
•
interface — A valid Ethernet port.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example #1
console#clear priority-flow-control statistics
tengigabitethernet 1/0/1
Example #2
console#clear priority-flow-control statistics
show interfaces priority-flow-control
Use the show interfaces priority-flow-control command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display the global or interface priority flow control status and
statistics.
Syntax
show interfaces interface-id priority-flow-control
Parameter Description
This command uses an optional interface parameter.
Priority Flow Control Commands
895
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 896 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
interface-id
A valid Ethernet port identifier.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples show the priority flow control status and statistics.
s1#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/0/1 priorityflow-control
Interface Detail:
te1/0/1
PFC Configured State:
Disabled
PFC Operational State:
Enabled
Configured Drop Priorities:
2-7
Operational Drop Priorities:
2-7
Configured No-Drop Priorities:
0-1
Operational No-Drop Priorities:
0-1
Delay Allowance:
32456 bit times
Peer Configuration Compatible:
True
Compatible Configuration Count:
3
Incompatible Configuration Count:
1
Priority Received PFC Frames
-------- ----------------896
Priority Flow Control Commands
Transmitted PFC Frames
----------------------
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 897 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
0
0
console#show interfaces priority-flow-control
Port
Drop
No-Drop
Operational
Priorities
Priorities
Status
--------
---------------
---------------
----------
Te1/0/1
0-2,4-7
3
Active
Te1/0/2
0-2,4-7
3
Active
Te1/0/3
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/4
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/5
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/6
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/7
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/8
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/9
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/10
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/11
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/12
0-7
Inactive
Priority Flow Control Commands
897
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 898 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Te1/0/13
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/14
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/15
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/16
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/17
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/18
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/19
0-7
Inactive
--More-- or (q)uit
Te1/0/20
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/21
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/22
0-7
Inactive
Te1/0/23
0-2,4-7
Te1/0/24
0-7
898
Priority Flow Control Commands
3
Active
Inactive
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 899 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
42
Layer 3 Commands
The chapters that follow describe commands that conform to the OSI
model’s Network Layer (Layer 3). Layer 3 commands perform a series of
exchanges over various data links to deliver data between any two nodes in a
network. These commands define the addressing and routing structure of the
Internet.
This section of the document contains the following Layer 3 topics:
ARP Commands
IPv6 Routing Commands
DHCP Server and Relay Agent
Commands
Loopback Interface Commands
DHCPv6 Commands
Multicast Commands
DVMRP Commands
OSPF Commands
GMRP Commands
OSPFv3 Commands
IGMP Commands
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
IGMP Proxy Commands
Routing Information Protocol
Commands
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
Tunnel Interface Commands
IP Routing Commands
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
Commands
IPv6 PIM Commands
–
Layer 3 Commands
899
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 900 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
900
Layer 3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 901 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ARP Commands
43
When a host has an IP packet to send on an Ethernet network, it must
encapsulate the IP packet in an Ethernet frame. The Ethernet header requires
a destination MAC address. If the destination IP address is on the same
network as the sender, the sender uses the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
to determine the MAC address associated with destination IP address. The
network device broadcasts an ARP request, identifying the IP address for
which it wants a corresponding MAC address. The IP address is called the
target IP. If a device on the same physical network is configured with the
target IP, it sends an ARP response giving its MAC address. This MAC address
is called the target MAC.
If the destination IP address is not on the same network as the sender, the
sender generally forwards the packet to a default gateway. The default
gateway is a router that forwards the packet to its destination. The host may
be configured with a default gateway or may dynamically learn a default
gateway.
The router discovery protocol is one method that enables hosts to learn a
default gateway. If a host does not know a default gateway, it can learn the
first hop to the destination through proxy ARP. Proxy ARP (RFC 1027) is a
technique used to make a machine physically located on one network appear
to be logically part of a different physical network connected to the same
router (may also be a firewall). Typically Proxy ARP hides a machine with a
public IP address on a private network behind a router and still allows the
machine to appear to be on the public network. The router proxies ARP
requests and all network traffic to and from the hidden machine to make this
fiction possible.
Proxy ARP is implemented by making a small change to a router's processing
of ARP requests. Without proxy ARP, a router only responds to an ARP
request if the target IP address is an address configured on the interface where
the ARP request arrived. With proxy ARP, the router may also respond if it
has a route to the target IP address. The router only responds if all next hops
on its route to the destination are through interfaces other than the interface
where the ARP request was received.
ARP Commands
901
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 902 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ARP Aging
Dynamic entries in the ARP cache are aged. When an entry for a neighbor
router reaches its maximum age, the system sends an ARP request to the
neighbor router to renew the entry. Entries for neighbor routers should
remain in the ARP cache as long as the neighbor continues to respond to ARP
requests. ARP cache entries for neighbor hosts are renewed more selectively.
When an ARP cache entry for a neighbor host reaches its maximum age, the
system checks if the cache entry has been used recently to forward data
traffic. If so, the system sends an ARP request to the entry's target IP address.
If a response is received, the cache entry is retained and its age is reset to 0. By
enabling the dynamic renew option, the system administrator can configure
ARP to attempt to renew aged ARP entries regardless of their use for
forwarding.
If the system learns a new ARP entry but the hardware does not have space to
add the new ARP entry, the system attempts to remove entries that have not
been used for forwarding recently. This action may create space for new
entries in the hardware's ARP table.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
arp
clear arp-cache
arp cachesize
clear arp-cache management
arp purge
ip local-proxy-arp
arp resptime
ip proxy-arp
arp retries
show arp
arp timeout
–
arp
Use the arp command in Global Configuration mode to create an Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) entry. Use the no form of the command to remove
the entry.
902
ARP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 903 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
arp ip-address hardware-address
no arp ip-address
• ip-address — IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing
routing interface.
•
hardware-address — A unicast MAC address for that device.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example creates an ARP entry consisting of an IP address and a
MAC address.
console(config)#arp 192.168.1.2 00A2.64B3.A245
arp cachesize
Use the arp cachesize command in Global Configuration mode to configure
the maximum number of entries in the ARP cache. To return the maximum
number ARP cache entries to the default value, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
arp cachesize integer
no arp cachesize
•
integer — Maximum number of ARP entries in the cache. (Range:
256–1024)
ARP Commands
903
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 904 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default integer value is 896.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines an arp cachesize of 500.
console(config)#arp cachesize 500
arp dynamicrenew
Use the arp dynamicrenew command in Global Configuration mode to
enable the ARP component to automatically renew dynamic ARP entries
when they age out. To disable the automatic renewal of dynamic ARP entries
when they age out, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
arp dynamicrenew
no arp dynamicrenew
Default Configuration
The default state is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
When an ARP entry reaches its maximum age, the system must decide
whether to retain or delete the entry. If the entry has recently been used to
forward data packets, the system will renew the entry by sending an ARP
request to the neighbor. If the neighbor responds, the age of the ARP cache
904
ARP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 905 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
entry is reset to 0 without removing the entry from the hardware. Traffic to
the host continues to be forwarded in hardware without interruption. If the
entry is not being used to forward data packets, then the entry is deleted from
the ARP cache, unless the dynamic renew option is enabled. If the dynamic
renew option is enabled, the system sends an ARP request to renew the entry.
When an entry is not renewed, it is removed from the hardware and
subsequent data packets to the host trigger an ARP request. Traffic to the
host is lost until the router receives an ARP reply from the host. Gateway
entries, entries for a neighbor router, are always renewed. The dynamic renew
option only applies to host entries.
The disadvantage of enabling dynamic renew is that once an ARP cache entry
is created, that cache entry continues to take space in the ARP cache as long
as the neighbor continues to respond to ARP requests, even if no traffic is
being forwarded to the neighbor. In a network where the number of potential
neighbors is greater than the ARP cache capacity, enabling dynamic renew
could prevent some neighbors from communicating because the ARP cache is
full.
Example
console#configure
console(config)#arp dynamicrenew
console(config)#no arp dynamicrenew
arp purge
Use the arp purge command in Privileged EXEC mode to cause the specified
IP address to be removed from the ARP cache. Only entries of type dynamic
or gateway are affected by this command.
Syntax
arp purge ip-address
•
ip-address — The IP address to be removed from ARP cache.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
ARP Commands
905
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 906 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example removes the specified IP address from arp cache.
console#arp purge 192.168.1.10
arp resptime
Use the arp resptime command in Global Configuration mode to configure
the ARP request response timeout. To return the response timeout to the
default value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
arp resptime integer
no arp resptime
•
integer — IP ARP entry response time out. (Range: 1-10 seconds)
Default Configuration
The default value is 1 second.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines a response timeout of 5 seconds.
console(config)#arp resptime 5
906
ARP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 907 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
arp retries
Use the arp retries command in Global Configuration mode to configure the
ARP count of maximum requests for retries. To return to the default value,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
arp retries integer
no arp retries
•
integer — The maximum number of requests for retries. (Range: 0-10)
Default Configuration
The default value is 4 retries.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines 6 as the maximum number of retries.
console(config)#arp retries 6
arp timeout
Use the arp timeout command in Global Configuration mode to configure
the ARP entry ageout time. Use the no form of the command to set the
ageout time to the default.
Syntax
arp timeout integer
no arp timeout
•
integer — The IP ARP entry ageout time. (Range: 15-21600 seconds)
ARP Commands
907
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 908 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default value is 1200 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines 900 seconds as the timeout.
console(config)#arp timeout 900
clear arp-cache
Use the clear arp-cache command in Privileged EXEC mode to remove all
ARP entries of type dynamic from the ARP cache.
Syntax
clear arp-cache [gateway]
•
gateway — Removes the dynamic entries of type gateway, as well.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example clears all entries ARP of type dynamic, including
gateway, from ARP cache.
908
ARP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 909 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#clear arp-cache gateway
clear arp-cache management
Use the clear arp-cache management command to clear all entries that show
as management arp entries in the show arp command.
Syntax
clear arp-cache management
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
In the example below, out-of-band management entries are shown, i.e. those
from the service port.
console#show arp
Age Time (seconds)............................. 1200
Response Time (seconds).................... 1
Retries................................................... 4
Cache Size............................................ 6144
Dynamic Renew Mode ....................... Disable
Total Entry Count Current / Peak ...... 0 / 0
Static Entry Count Configured / Active / Max .. 0 / 0 / 128
ARP Commands
909
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 910 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IP Address
MAC Address
Interface
Type
Age
--------------- ----------------- -------------- -------- ----------10.27.20.241
001A.A0FF.F662
Management
Dynamic n/a
10.27.20.243
0019.B9D1.29A3
Management
Dynamic n/a
console#clear arp-cache management
ip local-proxy-arp
Use the ip local proxy-arp command in Interface Configuration mode to
enable proxying of ARP requests. This allows the switch to respond to ARP
requests within a subnet where routing is not enabled.
Syntax
ip local-proxy-arp
no ip local-proxy-arp
Default Configuration
Proxy arp is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
ip proxy-arp
Use the ip proxy-arp command in Interface Configuration mode to enable
proxy ARP on a router interface. Without proxy ARP, a device only responds
to an ARP request if the target IP address is an address configured on the
interface where the ARP request arrived. With proxy ARP, the device may also
respond if the target IP address is reachable. The device only responds if all
910
ARP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 911 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
next hops in its route to the destination are through interfaces other than the
interface that received the ARP request. Use the no form of the command to
disable proxy ARP on a router interface.
Syntax
ip proxy-arp
no ip proxy-arp
Default Configuration
Enabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables proxy arp for VLAN 15.
(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip proxy-arp
show arp
Use the show arp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all entries in
the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache. The displayed results are not
the total ARP entries. To view the total ARP entries, the operator should view
the show ARP results.
Syntax
show arp [brief]
•
brief — Display ARP parameters.
ARP Commands
911
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 912 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC and Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
The show arp command will display static (user-configured) ARP entries
regardless of whether they are reachable over an interface or not.
Example
The following example shows show arp command output.
console#show arp
Static ARP entries are only active
when the IP address is reachable on a local subnet
Age Time (seconds)............................. 1200
Response Time (seconds)........................ 1
Retries........................................ 4
Cache Size..................................... 6144
Dynamic Renew Mode ............................ Disable
Total Entry Count Current / Peak .............. 0 / 0
Static Entry Count Configured / Active / Max .. 1 / 0 / 128
IP Address MAC Address
Interface Type
Age
---------- --------------
--------- ------
-------
1.1.1.3
n/a
n/a
912
0000.0000.0022
ARP Commands
Static
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 913 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
44
DHCP Server and Relay Agent
Commands
DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP). It also captures the
behavior of BOOTP relay agents and DHCP participants can inter operate
with BOOTP participants.
The host RFC’s standardize the configuration parameters which can be
supplied by the DHCP server to the client. After obtaining parameters via
DHCP, a DHCP client should be able to exchange packets with any other host
in the Internet. DHCP is based on a client-server model.
DHCP consists of the following components:
•
A protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters from a
DHCP server to a host.
•
A mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.
DHCP offers the following features and benefits:
•
It supports the definition of "pools" of IP addresses that can be allocated to
clients by the server. Many implementations use the term scope instead of
pool.
•
Configuration settings like the subnet mask, default router, DNS server,
that are required to make TCP/ IP work correctly can be passed to the
client using DHCP.
•
DHCP is supported by most TCP/ IP routers this allows it to allocate an IP
address according to the subnet the original request came from. This
means that a single DHCP server can be used in multiple subnets and that
there is no need to reconfigure a client that changed subnets.
•
Addresses can be leased out for a specific duration after which they need to
be explicitly renewed. This allows DHCP to reclaim expired addresses and
put back in the unallocated pool.
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
913
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 914 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
Internet access cost is greatly reduced by using automatic assignment as
Static IP addresses are considerably more expensive to purchase than are
automatically allocated IP addresses.
•
Using DHCP a centralized management policy can be implemented as the
DHCP server keeps information about all the subnets. This allows a
system operator to update a single server when configuration changes take
place.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip dhcp pool
dns-server (IP
DHCP Pool
Config)
ip dhcp ping
packets
service dhcp
bootfile
domain-name (IP
DHCP Pool
Config)
lease
sntp
clear ip dhcp
binding
hardware-address
netbios-nameserver
show ip dhcp binding
clear ip dhcp
conflict
host
netbios-node-type show ip dhcp conflict
client-identifier
ip dhcp bootp
automatic
network
show ip dhcp global
configuration
client-name
ip dhcp conflict
logging
next-server
show ip dhcp pool
default-router
ip dhcp excludedaddress
option
show ip dhcp server
statistics
ip dhcp pool
Use the ip dhcp pool command in Global Configuration mode to define a
DHCP address pool that can be used to supply addressing information to
DHCP clients. Upon successful completion, this command puts the user into
DHCP Pool Configuration mode. Use the no form of the command to
remove an address pool definition.
914
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 915 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip dhcp pool [pool-name]
no ip dhcp pool [pool-name]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
pool-name
The name of an existing or new DHCP address pool. The pool
name can be up to 31 characters in length and can contain the
following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, ’-’, ’_’, ’ ’. Enclose the entire
pool name in quotes if an embedded blank is to appear in the
pool name.
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
PowerConnect supports dynamic, automatic, and manual address
assignment. Dynamic address assignment leases an address to the client for a
limited period of time. Automatic assignment assigns a permanent address to
a client. Manual (static) assignment simply conveys an address assigned by
the administrator to the client.
In DHCP Pool Configuration mode, the administrator can configure the
address space and other parameters to be supplied to DHCP clients. By
default, the DHCP server assumes that all addresses specified are available for
assignment to clients. Use the ip dhcp excluded-address command in Global
Configuration mode to specify addresses that should never be assigned to
DHCP clients.
To configure a dynamic DHCP address pool, configure the following pool
properties using the listed DHCP pool commands:
•
Address pool subnet and mask – network
•
Client domain name – domain-name
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
915
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 916 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
Client DNS server – dns-server
•
NetBIOS WINS Server – netbios-name-server
•
NetBIOS Node Type – netbios-node-type
•
Client default router – default-router
•
Client address lease time – lease
Administrators may also configure manual bindings for clients using the host
command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode. This is the most often used
for DHCP clients for which the administrator wishes to reserve an ip address,
for example a computer server or a printer. A DHCP pool can contain
automatic or dynamic address assignments or a single static address
assignment.
To configure a manual address binding, configure the pool properties using
the DHCP pool commands listed below. It is only necessary to configure a
DHCP client identifier or a BOOTP client MAC address for a manual
binding. To configure a manual binding, the client identifier or hardware
address must be specified before specifying the host address.
•
DHCP client identifier – client-identifier
•
BOOTP client MAC address – hardware-address
•
Host address – host
•
Client name (optional) – client-name
Examples
Example 1 – Manual Address Pool
console#ip dhcp pool “Printer LP32 R1-101”
console(config-dhcp-pool)#client-identifier
00:23:12:43:23:54
console(config-dhcp-pool)#host 10.1.1.1
255.255.255.255
console(config-dhcp-pool)#client-name
PRT_PCL_LP32_R1-101
Example 2 – Dynamic Address Pool
916
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 917 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#ip dhcp pool "Windows PCs"
console(config-dhcp-pool)#network 192.168.21.0 /24
console(config-dhcp-pool)#domain-name powerconnect.com
console(config-dhcp-pool)#dns-server 192.168.22.3
192.168.23.3
console(config-dhcp-pool)#netbios-name-server
192.168.22.2 192.168.23.2
console(config-dhcp-pool)#netbios-node-type h-node
console(config-dhcp-pool)#lease 2 12
console(config-dhcp-pool)#default-router 192.168.22.1
192.168.23.1
bootfile
Use the bootfile command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set the
name of the image for the DHCP client to load. Use the no form of the
command to remove the bootfile configuration. Use the show ip dhcp pool
command to display pool configuration parameters.
Syntax
bootfile filename
no bootfile
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
filename
The name of the file for the DHCP client to load.
Default Configuration
There is no default bootfile filename.
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
917
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 918 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#bootfile ntldr
clear ip dhcp binding
Use the clear ip dhcp binding command in Privileged EXEC mode to remove
automatic DHCP server bindings.
Syntax
clear ip dhcp binding {ip-address | *}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
*
Clear all automatic dhcp bindings.
ip-address
Clear a specific binding.
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#clear ip dhcp binding 1.2.3.4
918
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 919 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clear ip dhcp conflict
Use the clear ip dhcp conflict command in Privileged EXEC mode to remove
DHCP server address conflicts. Use the show ip dhcp conflict command to
display address conflicts detected by the DHCP server.
Syntax
clear ip dhcp conflict {ip-address | *}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
*
Clear all dhcp conflicts.
ip-address
Clear a specific address conflict.
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#clear ip dhcp conflict *
client-identifier
Use the client-identifier command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to
identify a Microsoft DHCP client to be manually assigned an address. Use the
no form of the command to remove the client identifier configuration.
Syntax
client-identifier unique-identifier
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
919
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 920 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no client-identifier
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
unique-identifier
The identifier of the Microsoft DHCP client. The client
identifier is specified as 7 bytes of the form
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX where X is a hexadecimal digit.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
For Microsoft DHCP clients, the identifier consists of the media type
followed by the MAC address of the client. The media type 01 indicates
Ethernet media.
Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration
parameters.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#client-identifier
01:03:13:18:22:33:11
console(config-dhcp-pool)#host 192.168.21.34 32
client-name
Use the client-name command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to specify
the host name of a DHCP client. Use the no form of the command to remove
the client name configuration.
Syntax
client-name name
920
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 921 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no client-name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
name
The name of the DHCP client. The client name is specified as
up to 31 printable characters.
Default Configuration
There is no default client name.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration
parameters. The client name should not include the domain name as it is
specified separately by the domain-name (IP DHCP Pool Config) command.
It is not recommended to use embedded blanks in client names.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#client-identifier
01:03:13:18:22:33:11
console(config-dhcp-pool)#host 192.168.21.34 32
console(config-dhcp-pool)#client-name
Line_Printer_Hallway
default-router
Use the default-router command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set
the IPv4 address of one or more routers for the DHCP client to use. Use the
no form of the command to remove the default router configuration. Use the
show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration parameters.
Syntax
default-router {ip-address1}[ip address2]
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
921
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 922 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no default-router
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address1
The IPv4 address of the first default router for the DHCP
client.
ip-address2
The IPv4 address of the second default router for the DHCP
client.
Default Configuration
No default router is configured.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#default-router 192.168.22.1
192.168.23.1
dns-server (IP DHCP Pool Config)
Use the dns-server command in IP DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set
the IP DNS server address which is provided to a DHCP client by the DHCP
server. DNS server address is configured for stateless server support.
Syntax
dns-server ip-address1
no dns-server
922
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 923 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address1
Valid IPv4 address.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
IP DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
domain-name (IP DHCP Pool Config)
Use the domain-name command in IP DHCP Pool Configuration mode to
set the DNS domain name which is provided to a DHCP client by the DHCP
server. The DNS name is an alphanumeric string up to 255 characters in
length. Use the no form of the command to remove the domain name.
Syntax
domain-name domain
no domain-name domain
•
domain — DHCP domain name. (Range: 1–255 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
IP DHCP Pool Configuration mode
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
923
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 924 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
hardware-address
Use the hardware-address command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to
specify the MAC address of a client to be manually assigned an address. Use
the no form of the command to remove the MAC address assignment.
Syntax
hardware-address hardware-address
no hardware-address
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
hardware-address
MAC address of the client. Either the XXXX.XXXX.XXXX or
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX form of MAC address may be used where
XX is a hexadecimal digit.
Default Configuration
There are no default MAC address manual bindings.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration
parameters. It may be necessary to use the no host command prior to
executing the no hardware-address command.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#hardware-address
00:23:12:43:23:54
console(config-dhcp-pool)#host 192.168.21.131 32
924
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 925 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
host
Use the host command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to specify a
manual binding for a DHCP client host. Use the no form of the command to
remove the manual binding.
Syntax
host ip-address [netmask|prefix-length]
no host
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IPv4 address to be manually assigned to the host identified by
the client identifier.
netmask
An IPv4 address indicating the applicable bits of the address,
typically 255.255.255.255.
prefix-length
A decimal number ranging from 1-30.
Default Configuration
The default is a 1 day lease.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use the client-identifier or hardware-address command prior to using this
command for an address pool. Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display
pool configuration parameters.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#client-identifier
00:23:12:43:23:54
console(config-dhcp-pool)#host 192.168.21.131 32
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
925
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 926 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip dhcp bootp automatic
Use the ip dhcp bootp automatic command in Global Configuration mode
to enable automatic BOOTP address assignment. By default, BOOTP clients
are not automatically assigned addresses, although they may be assigned a
static address. Use the no form of the command to disable automatic BOOTP
client address assignment. Use the show ip dhcp global configuration
command to display the automatic address assignment configuration.
Syntax
ip dhcp bootp automatic
no ip dhcp bootp automatic
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
Automatic BOOTP client address assignment is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#ip dhcp bootp automatic
ip dhcp conflict logging
Use the ip dhcp conflict logging command in Global Configuration mode to
enable DHCP address conflict detection. Use the no form of the command to
disable DHCP conflict logging.
Syntax
ip dhcp conflict logging
926
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 927 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no ip dhcp conflict logging
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
Conflict logging is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#ip dhcp conflict logging
ip dhcp excluded-address
Use the ip dhcp excluded-address command in Global Configuration mode
to exclude one or more DHCP addresses from automatic assignment. Use the
no form of the command to allow automatic address assignment for the
specified address or address range.
Syntax
ip dhcp excluded-address low-address {high-address}
no ip dhcp excluded-address low-address {high-address}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Low-address
An IPv4 address indicating the starting range for exclusion from
automatic DHCP address assignment.
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
927
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 928 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
High-address
An IPv4 address indicating the ending range for exclusion from
automatic DHCP address assignment. The high-address must
be numerically greater than the low-address.
Default Configuration
By default, no IP addresses are excluded from the lists configured by the IP
DHCP pool configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#ip dhcp excluded-address 192.168.20.1
192.168.20.3
ip dhcp ping packets
Use the ip dhcp ping packets command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the number of pings sent to detect if an address is in use prior to
assigning an address from the DHCP pool. If neither ping is answered, the
DHCP server presumes the address is not in use and assigns the selected IP
address.
Syntax
ip dhcp ping packets {0, 2-10}
no ip dhcp ping packets
928
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 929 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
count
The number of ping packets sent to detect an address in use.
The default is 2 packets. Range 0, 2-10. A value of 0 turns off
address detection. Use the no form of the command to return
the setting to the default value.
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#ip dhcp ping packets 5
lease
Use the lease command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set the period
for which a dynamically assigned DHCP address is valid. Use the infinite
parameter to indicate that addresses are to be automatically assigned. Use the
no form of the command to return the lease configuration to the default. Use
the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration parameters.
Use the show ip dhcp binding command to display the expiration time of the
leased IP address.
Syntax
lease {days[hours][minutes]|infinite}
no lease
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
929
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 930 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
days
The number of days for the lease duration. Range 0-59. Default
is 1.
hours
The number of hours for the lease duration. Range 0-23. There
is no default.
minutes
The number of minutes for the lease duration. Range 0-59.
There is no default.
infinite
The lease does not expire.
Default Configuration
The default is a 1 day lease.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#lease 1 12 59
netbios-name-server
Use the netbios-name-server command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode
to configure the IPv4 address of the Windows Internet Naming Service
(WINS) for a Microsoft DHCP client. Use the no form of the command to
remove the NetBIOS name server configuration.
Syntax
netbios-name-server ip-address [ip-address2...ip-address8]
no netbios-name-server
930
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 931 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IPv4 address
Default Configuration
There is no default name server configured.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration
parameters. Up to eight name server addresses may be specified. The
NetBIOS WINS information is conveyed in the Option 44 TLV of the DHCP
OFFER, DCHP ACK, DHCP INFORM ACK and DHCP BOOTREPLY
messages.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#netbios-name-server
192.168.21.1 192.168.22.1
netbios-node-type
Use the netbios-node-type command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to
set the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. Use the no form of
the command to remove the netbios node configuration.
Syntax
netbios-node-type type
no netbios-node-type
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
931
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 932 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
type
The NetBIOS node type can be b-node, h-node, m-node or pnode.
Default Configuration
There is no default NetBIOS node type configured.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration
parameters. The NetBIOS node type information is conveyed in the Option
46 TLV of the DHCP OFFER, DHCP ACK, DHCP INFORM ACK and
DHCP BOOTREPLY messages. Supported NetBIOS node types are:
•
broadcast (b-node)
•
peer-to-peer (p-node)
•
mixed (m-node)
•
hybrid (h-node)
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#netbios-node-type h-node
network
Use the network command in IP DHCP Pool Configuration mode to define a
pool of IPv4 addresses for distributing to clients.
Syntax
network network-number [mask | prefix-length]
932
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 933 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
network-number
A valid IPv4 address
mask
A valid IPv4 network mask with contiguous left-aligned bits.
prefix-length
An integer indicating the number of leftmost bits in the
network-number to use as a prefix for allocating cells.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
IP DHCP Pool Configuration mode
next-server
Use the next-server command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set the
IPv4 address of the TFTP server to be used during auto-install. Use the no
form of the command to remove the next server configuration.
Syntax
next-server ip-address
no next-server
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
The IPv4 address of the TFTP server to use during autoconfiguration.
Default Configuration
There is no default IPv4 next server configured.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
933
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 934 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration
parameters. The IPv4 address is conveyed in the SIADDR field of the DHCP
OFFER, DHCP ACK, DHCP INFORM ACK and DHCP BOOTREPLY
messages.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#next-server 192.168.21.2
option
Use the option command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to supply
arbitrary configuration information to a DHCP client. Use the no form of the
command to remove the option configuration. Use the show ip dhcp pool
command to display pool configuration parameters.
Syntax
option code {ascii string1|hex[string1...string8]|ip[ip-address1...ip-
address8]}
no option code
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
code
The DHCP TLV option code.
ascii string1
An ASCII character string. Strings with embedded blanks must
be wholly contained in quotes.
hex string1
A hexadecimal string containing the characters [0-9A-F]. The
string should not begin with 0x. A hex string consists of two
characters which are parsed to fill a single byte. Multiple values
are separated by blanks.
ip-address1
An IPv4 address in dotted decimal notation.
Default Configuration
There is no default option configured.
934
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 935 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The option information must match the selected option type and length.
Options cannot be longer than 255 characters in length. The option
information is conveyed in the TLV specified by the code parameter in the
DHCP OFFER, DHCP ACK, DHCP INFORM ACK and DHCP
BOOTREPLY messages.
Figure 44-1 lists the options that can be configured and their fixed length,
minimum length, and length multiple requirements.
Figure 44-1. Option Codes and Lengths
Option Code
Fixed Length
Minimum Length Multiple Of
2 (Time Offset)
4
–
–
4 (Time Server)
–
4
4
7 (Log Server)
–
4
4
8 (Cookie Server)
–
4
4
9 (LPR Server)
–
4
4
10 (Impress Server)
–
4
4
11 (Resource Location
Server)
–
4
4
12 (Host Name)
–
1
–
13 (Boot File Size)
2
–
–
14 (Merit File Dump)
–
1
–
16 (Swap Server)
4
–
–
17 (Root Path)
–
1
–
18 (Extensions Path)
–
1
–
19 (IP Forwarding
Enable)
1
–
–
20 (Non-local Source
Routing)
1
–
–
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
935
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 936 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Figure 44-1. Option Codes and Lengths (continued)
Option Code
Fixed Length
Minimum Length Multiple Of
21 (Policy Filter)
–
8
8
22 (Max Datagram
Reassembly)
2
–
–
23 (IP TTL)
1
–
–
24 (Path MTU Aging)
4
–
–
25 (Path MTU Plateau)
–
2
2
26 (Interface MTU)
2
–
–
27 (Subnets are local)
1
–
–
28 (Broadcast Address)
4
–
–
29 (Perform Mask)
1
–
–
30 (Mask Supplier)
1
–
–
31 (Perform Router
Discovery)
1
–
–
32 (Router Solicitation
Address)
4
–
–
33 (Static Router Option) –
8
8
34 (Trailer
Encapsulation)
1
–
–
35 (ARP Cache Timeout) 4
–
–
36 (Ethernet
Encapsulation)
1
–
–
37 (TCP TTL)
1
–
–
38 (TCP Keepalive
Interval)
4
–
–
39 (TCP Keepalive
Garbage)
1
–
–
40 (Network Information –
Service)
1
–
41 (Network Information –
Servers)
4
4
936
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 937 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Figure 44-1. Option Codes and Lengths (continued)
Option Code
Fixed Length
Minimum Length Multiple Of
42 (NTP Servers)
–
4
4
43 (Vendor Specific
Information)
1
–
–
45 (NetBIOS Datagram
Distribution)
–
4
4
47 (Netbois Scope)
–
1
–
48 (X-Windows Font
Server)
–
4
4
49 (X-Windows Display
Manager)
–
4
4
58 (Renewal Time T1)
4
–
–
59 (Rebinding Time T2) 4
–
–
60 (Vendor Class)
–
1
–
64 (NIS Domain)
–
1
–
65 (NIS Servers)
–
4
4
66 (TFTP Server)
–
1
–
68 (Mobile IP Home
Agent)
–
0
4
69 (SMTP Server)
–
4
4
70 (POP3 Server)
–
4
4
71 (NNTP Server)
–
4
4
72 (WWW Server)
–
4
4
73 (Finger Server)
–
4
4
74 (IRC Server)
–
4
4
75 (Streettalk Server)
–
4
4
76 (STDA Server)
–
4
4
Options 19, 20, 27, 29, 30, 31, 34, 36, and 39 only accept hex 00 or hex 01
values.
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
937
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 938 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 4 ascii
"ntpservice.com "
console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 42 ip 192.168.21.1
console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 29 hex 01
console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 59 hex 00 00 10 01
console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 25 hex 01 ff
service dhcp
Use the service dhcp command in Global Configuration mode to enable local
IPv4 DHCP server on the switch. Use the no form of the command to disable
the DHCPv4 service.
Syntax
service dhcp
no service dhcp
Default Configuration
The service is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
sntp
Use the sntp command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set the IPv4
address of the NTP server to be used for time synchronization of the client.
Use the no form of the command to remove the NTP server configuration.
938
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 939 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
sntp ip-address
no sntp
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
The IPv4 address of the NTP server to use for time services.
Default Configuration
There is no default IPv4 NTP server configured.
Command Mode
DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration
parameters. The IPv4 address of the NTP server is conveyed in the Option 42
TLV of the DHCP OFFER, DHCP ACK, DHCP INFORM ACK and DHCP
BOOTREPLY messages.
Example
console(config-dhcp-pool)#sntp 192.168.21.2
show ip dhcp binding
Use the show ip dhcp binding command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the configured DHCP bindings.
Syntax
show ip dhcp binding [address]
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
939
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 940 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
address
A valid IPv4 address
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)# show ip dhcp binding
IP address
DUID
Hardware Address
Expires
Type
---------------------------------------------------------------------
-----
10.10.10.3
00:0e:c6:88:0e:98
00:23:56
00:01:01:02:03:04:05:06:00:0e:c6:88:0e:98
Auto
client------
show ip dhcp conflict
Use the show ip dhcp conflict command in User EXEC mode to display
DHCP address conflicts for all relevant interfaces or a specified interface. If
an interface is specified, the optional statistics parameter is available to view
statistics for the specified interface.
Syntax
show ip dhcp conflict [address]
940
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 941 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
address
A valid IPv4 address for which the conflict information is
desired.
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
show ip dhcp global configuration
Use the show ip dhcp global configuration command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display the DHCP global configuration.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server statistics
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
941
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 942 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#show ip dhcp server statistics
show ip dhcp pool
Use the show ip dhcp pool command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display the configured DHCP pool or pools. If no pool name is
specified, information about all pools is displayed.
Syntax
show ip dhcp pool [all | poolname ]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
poolname
Name of the pool. (Range: 1-32 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
show ip dhcp server statistics
Use the show ip dhcp server statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the DHCP server binding and message counters.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server statistics
942
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 943 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ip dhcp server statistics
Automatic Bindings............................. 100
Expired Bindings............................... 32
Malformed Bindings............................. 0
Messages
----------
Received
----------
DHCP DISCOVER.................................. 132
DHCP REQUEST................................... 132
DHCP DECLINE................................... 0
DHCP RELEASE................................... 32
DHCP INFORM.................................... 0
Messages
Sent
----------
------
DHCP OFFER..................................... 132
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
943
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 944 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCP ACK....................................... 132
DHCP NACK...................................... 0
944
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 945 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
45
DHCPv6 Commands
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear ipv6 dhcp
service dhcpv6
dns-server (IPv6 DHCP Pool Config)
show ipv6 dhcp
domain-name (IPv6 DHCP Pool Config) show ipv6 dhcp binding
ipv6 dhcp pool
show ipv6 dhcp interface (User EXEC)
ipv6 dhcp relay
show ipv6 dhcp interface (Privileged
EXEC)
ipv6 dhcp server
show ipv6 dhcp pool
prefix-delegation
show ipv6 dhcp statistics
clear ipv6 dhcp
Use the clear ipv6 dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear
DHCPv6 statistics for all interfaces or for a specific interface.
Syntax
clear ipv6 dhcp {statistics | interface vlan vlan-id statistics}
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
•
statistics — Indicates statistics display if VLAN is specified.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
DHCPv6 Commands
945
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 946 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
The following examples clears DHCPv6 statistics for VLAN 11.
console#clear ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 11 statistics\
dns-server (IPv6 DHCP Pool Config)
Use the dns-server command in IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set
the IPv6 DNS server address which is provided to a DHCPv6 client by the
DHCPv6 server. DNS server address is configured for stateless server support.
Syntax
dns-server ipv6-address
no dns-server ipv6-address
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ipv6-address
Valid IPv6 address.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
domain-name (IPv6 DHCP Pool Config)
Use the domain-name command in IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode to
set the DNS domain name which is provided to a DHCPv6 client by the
DHCPv6 server. DNS domain name is configured for stateless server support.
946
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 947 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
domain-name domain
no domain-name domain
•
domain — DHCPv6 domain name. (Range: 1–255 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
DHCPv6 pool can have multiple number of domain names with maximum of
8.
Example
The following example sets the DNS domain name "test", which is provided
to a DHCPv6 client by the DHCPv6 server.
console(config)#ipv6 dhcp pool addrpool
console(config-dhcp6s-pool)#domain-name test
console(config-dhcp6s-pool)#no domain-name test
ipv6 dhcp pool
Use the ipv6 dhcp pool command in Global Configuration mode to enter
IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode. DHCPv6 pools are used to specify
information for DHCPv6 server to distribute to DHCPv6 clients. These pools
are shared between multiple interfaces over which DHCPv6 server
capabilities are configured.
Syntax
ipv6 dhcp pool pool-name
no ipv6 dhcp pool pool-name
DHCPv6 Commands
947
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 948 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
pool-name — DHCPv6 pool name. (Range: 1-31 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enters IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode.
console(config)#ipv6 dhcp pool addrpool
console(config-dhcp6s-pool)#
ipv6 dhcp relay
Use the ipv6 dhcp relay command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure an interface for DHCPv6 relay functionality.
Syntax
ipv6 dhcp relay {destination relay-address [interface vlan vlan-id] | interface
vlan vlan-id}[remote-id {duid-ifid | user-defined-string}]
948
•
destination — Keyword that sets the relay server IPv6 address.
•
relay-address — An IPv6 address of a DHCPv6 relay server.
•
interface — Sets the relay server interface.
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID.
•
[remote-id {duid-ifid | user-defined-string}] — The Relay Agent
Information Option “remote ID” sub-option to be added to relayed
messages. This can either be the special keyword duid-ifid, which causes
the “remote ID” to be derived from the DHCPv6 server DUID and the
relay interface number, or it can be specified as a user-defined string.
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 949 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel) mode
User Guidelines
If relay-address is an IPv6 global address, then relay-interface is not required.
If relay-address is a link-local or multicast address, then relay-interface is
required. Finally, a value for relay-address is not specified, then a value for
relay-interface must be specified and the DHCPV6-ALLAGENTS multicast
address (i.e. FF02::1:2) is used to relay DHCPv6 messages to the relay server.
An IP interface (VLAN) can be configured in DHCP relay mode or DHCP
server mode. Configuring an interface in DHCP relay mode overwrites the
DHCP server mode and vice-versa.
An IP interface configured in relay mode cannot be configured as a DHCP
client (ip address dhcp).
Example
The following example configures VLAN 15 for DHCPv6 relay functionality.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 dhcp relay destination
2020:1::1
ipv6 dhcp server
Use the ipv6 dhcp server command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure DHCPv6 server functionality on an interface. For a particular
interface DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually exclusive.
Syntax
ipv6 dhcp server pool-name [rapid-commit] [preference pref-value]
•
pool-name — The name of the DHCPv6 pool containing stateless and/or
prefix delegation parameters
DHCPv6 Commands
949
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 950 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
rapid-commit — Is an option that allows for an abbreviated exchange
between the client and server.
•
pref-value — Preference value —used by clients to determine preference
between multiple DHCPv6 servers. (Range: 0-4294967295)
Default Configuration
The default preference value is 20. Rapid commit is not enabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel) mode
User Guidelines
An IP interface (VLAN) can be configured in DHCP relay mode or DHCP
server mode. Configuring an interface in DHCP server mode overwrites the
DHCP relay mode configuration and vice-versa.
An interface in server mode cannot be configured as a DHCP client (ip
address dhcp).
Example
The following example configures DHCPv6 server functionality.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 dhcp server pool
prefix-delegation
Use the prefix-delegation command in IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode
to define multiple IPv6 prefixes within a pool for distributing to specific
DHCPv6 Prefix delegation clients.
Syntax
prefix-delegation ipv6-prefix/prefix-length client-DUID [name hostname]
[valid-lifetime {valid-lifetime | infinite}] [preferred-lifetime {preferredlifetime | infinite}]
no prefix-delegation ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
950
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 951 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
prefix/prefix-length
Delegated IPv6 prefix.
client-DUID
Client DUID (e.g. 00:01:00:09:f8:79:4e:00:04:76:73:43:76').
hostname
Client hostname used for logging and tracing. (Range: 0-31
characters.) The command allows spaces in the host name when
specified in double quotes. For example,
console(config)#snmp-server host "host name"
valid-lifetime
Valid lifetime for delegated prefix. (Range: 0-4294967295
seconds) or use the keyword infinite. Using the value 0 for the
valid-lifetime sets the value to the default.
preferred-lifetime
Preferred lifetime for delegated prefix. (Range: 0-4294967295
seconds) or use the keyword infinite. Using the value 0 for the
preferred-lifetime sets the value to the default.
Default Configuration
604800 seconds (30 days) is the default value for preferred-lifetime. 2592000
seconds (7 days) is the default value for valid-lifetime.
Command Mode
IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines a Multiple IPv6 prefix and client DUID within
a pool for distributing to specific DHCPv6 Prefix delegation clients.
console(config)#ipv6 dhcp pool addrpool
console(config-dhcp6s-pool)#prefix-delegation
2020:1::1/64 00:01:00:09:f8:79:4e:00:04:76:73:43:76
DHCPv6 Commands
951
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 952 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The following example defines a unique local address prefix with the MAC
address 00:1D:BA:06:37:64 converted to EUI-64 format and a preferred
lifetime of 5 days.
console(config-dhcp6s-pool)#prefix-delegation
fc00::/7 00:1D:BA:FF:FE:06:37:64 preferred-lifetime
43200
service dhcpv6
Use the service dhcpv6 command in Global Configuration mode to enable
local IPv6 DHCP server on the switch. Use the no form of the command to
disable the DHCPv6 service.
Syntax
service dhcpv6
no service dhcpv6
Default Configuration
The service dhcpv6 is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables DHCPv6 globally.
console#configure
console(config)#service dhcpv6
console(config)#no service dhcpv6
952
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 953 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ipv6 dhcp
Use the show ipv6 dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
DHCPv6 server name and status.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the DHCPv6 server name and status.
console#show ipv6 dhcp
DHCPv6 is disabled
Server DUID:
show ipv6 dhcp binding
Use the show ipv6 dhcp binding command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the configured DHCP pool.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp binding [ipv6-address]
•
ipv6-address — Valid IPv6 address.
DHCPv6 Commands
953
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 954 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC and User EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the configured DHCP pool based on the
entered IPv6 address.
console#show ipv6 dhcp binding 2020:1::
show ipv6 dhcp interface (User EXEC)
Use the show ipv6 dhcp interface command in User EXEC mode to display
DHCPv6 information for all relevant interfaces or for the specified interface.
If an interface is specified, the optional statistics parameter is available to
view statistics for the specified interface.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp interface [type number] [statistics ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
type number
Tunnel tunnel-id (Range: 0-7)
or
VLAN vlan-id (Valid VLAN id)
statistics
Enables statistics display if interface is specified.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
954
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 955 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
Statistics are shown depending on the interface mode (relay, server, or client).
Examples
The following examples display DHCPv6 information for VLAN 11 when
configured in relay mode.
console> show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 11
IPv6 Interface................................. vlan11
Mode........................................... Relay
Relay Address.................................. 2020:1::1
Relay Interface Number......................... Relay
Relay Remote ID................................
Option Flags...................................
console> show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 11 statistics
DHCPv6 Interface vlan11 Statistics
-----------------------------------DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Request Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received.................. 0
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received................. 0
DHCPv6 Release Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received................. 0
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Received.......... 0
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Received............ 0
DHCPv6 Commands
955
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 956 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received.............. 0
Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded.............. 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received.................. 0
DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted....... 0
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted............... 0
DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted............ 0
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Transmitted......... 0
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Transmitted....... 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted............... 0
show ipv6 dhcp interface (Privileged EXEC)
Use the show ipv6 dhcp interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display configuration and status information about an IPv6 DHCP interface
or all interfaces.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp interface [interface-id]{statistics}
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Any valid IP interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for
interface representation.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
956
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 957 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command shows the DHCP status. Information displayed depends on
the mode.
The command output provides the following information for an interface
configured in client mode. Not all fields will be shown for an inactive client.
Term
Description
Mode
Displays whether the specified interface is in Client, Relay, or
Server mode.
State
State of the DHCPv6 Client on this interface. The valid values
are:
INACTIVE, SOLICIT, REQUEST, ACTIVE, RENEW,
REBIND, RELEASE.
Server DUID
DHCPv6 Unique Identifier of the DHCPv6 Server on this
interface.
T1 Time
The T1 (in seconds) time as indicated by the DHCPv6 Server.
T1 value indicates the time interval after which the address is
requested for renewal.
T2 Time
The T2 (in seconds) time as indicated by the DHCPv6 Server.
T2 value indicates the time interval after which the Client
sends Rebind message to the Server in case there are no replies
to the Renew messages.
Interface IAID
An identifier for an identity association chosen by this Client.
Leased Address
The IPv6 address leased by the DHCPv6 Server for this
interface.
Preferred Lifetime
The preferred life time (in seconds) of the IPv6 Address leased
by the DHCPv6 Server.
Valid Lifetime
The valid life time (in seconds) of the IPv6 Address leased by
the DHCPv6 Server.
Renew Time
The time remaining (in seconds) to send a DHCPv6 Renew
request to DHCPv6 Server for the leased address.
Expiry Time
The time (in seconds) when the DHCPv6 leased address
expires.
DHCPv6 Commands
957
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 958 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example shows the output from this command when the
device has leased an IPv6 address from the DHCPv6 server on interface 1/0/1.
NOTE: Note that the interface is in client mode.
console#show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 2
IPv6 Interface................................. Vl2
Mode........................................... Client
State.......................................... ACTIVE
Server DUID....................................
00:03:00:01:00:13:c4:db:6c:00
T1 Time........................................ 0 days 12 hrs 0 mins 0 secs
T2 Time........................................ 0 days 19 hrs 12 mins 0 secs
Interface IAID................................. 20
Leased Address................................. 2017::309D:161:4EF1:DBB1/128
Preferred Lifetime............................. 1 days 0 hrs 0 mins 0 secs
Valid Lifetime................................. 2 days 0 hrs 0 mins 0 secs
Renew Time..................................... 0 days 11 hrs 55 mins 28 secs
Expiry Time.................................... 1 days 23 hrs 55 mins 28 secs
console#show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 10
IPv6 Interface................................. Vl10
Mode........................................... Relay
Relay Address.................................. 3030::3
Relay Interface Number......................... Relay
Relay Remote ID................................
Option Flags...................................
console#show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 10
IPv6 Interface................................. Vl10
Mode........................................... Server
Pool Name...................................... asd
Server Preference.............................. 20
Option Flags...................................
console#show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 10 statistics
DHCPv6 Server Interface Vl10 Statistics
958
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 959 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Request Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received.................. 0
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received................. 0
DHCPv6 Release Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received................. 0
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Received.......... 0
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Received............ 0
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received.............. 0
Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded.............. 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received.................. 0
DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted....... 0
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted............... 0
DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted............ 0
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Transmitted......... 0
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Transmitted....... 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted............... 0
console#show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 10 statistics
DHCPv6 Client Interface Vl10 Statistics
--------------------------------------------------------DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Received................. 0
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Received......................... 0
Received DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Discarded....... 0
Received DHCPv6 Reply Packets Discarded............... 0
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received..................... 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received......................... 0
DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Transmitted.................... 0
DHCPv6 Request Packets Transmitted.................... 0
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Transmitted...................... 0
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Transmitted..................... 0
DHCPv6 Release Packets Transmitted.................... 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted...................... 0
show ipv6 dhcp pool
Use the show ipv6 dhcp pool command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the configured DHCP pool.
DHCPv6 Commands
959
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 960 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp pool poolname
•
poolname — Name of the pool. (Range: 1-32 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the configured DHCP pool.
console#show ipv6 dhcp pool test
DHCPv6 Pool: test
show ipv6 dhcp statistics
Use the show ipv6 dhcp statistics command in User EXEC mode to display
the global DHCPv6 server and relay statistics.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp statistics
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
960
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 961 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the DHCPv6 server name and status.
console> show ipv6 dhcp statistics
DHCPv6 Interface Global Statistics
-----------------------------------DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Request Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received.................. 0
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received................. 0
DHCPv6 Release Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received................ 0
DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received................. 0
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Received.......... 0
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Received............ 0
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received.............. 0
Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded.............. 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received.................. 0
DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted....... 0
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted............... 0
DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted............ 0
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Transmitted......... 0
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Transmitted....... 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted............... 0
DHCPv6 Commands
961
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 962 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
962
DHCPv6 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 963 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
46
DVMRP Commands
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) is a dense mode
multicast protocol and is most appropriate for use in networks where
bandwidth is relatively plentiful and there is at least one multicast group
member in each subnet. DVMRP assumes that all hosts are part of a
multicast group until it is informed of multicast group changes. When the
dense-mode multicast router is informed of a group membership change, the
multicast delivery tree is pruned. DVMRP uses a distributed routing
algorithm to build per-source-group multicast trees. It is also called Broadcast
and Prune Multicasting protocol. It dynamically generates per-source-group
multicast trees using Reverse Path Multicasting. Trees are calculated and
updated dynamically to track membership of individual groups.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip dvmrp
show ip dvmrp neighbor
ip dvmrp metric
show ip dvmrp nexthop
show ip dvmrp
show ip dvmrp prune
show ip dvmrp interface
show ip dvmrp route
ip dvmrp
Use the ip dvmrp command to set the administrative mode of DVMRP in the
router to active. IGMP must be enabled before DVMRP can be enabled.
Syntax
ip dvmrp
no ip dvmrp
DVMRP Commands
963
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 964 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets VLAN 15’s administrative mode of DVMRP to
active.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip dvmrp
ip dvmrp metric
Use the ip dvmrp metric command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the metric for an interface. This value is used in the DVMRP
messages as the cost to reach this network.
Syntax
ip dvmrp metric metric
no ip dvmrp metric
•
metric — Cost to reach the network. (Range: 1-31)
Default Configuration
1 the default value.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
964
DVMRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 965 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a metric of 5 for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip dvmrp metric 5
show ip dvmrp
Use the show ip dvmrp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
system-wide information for DVMRP.
Syntax
show ip dvmrp
Default Configuration
This command has no default condition.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays system-wide information for DVMRP.
console(config)#show ip dvmrp
Admin Mode................................. Disable
Version.................................... 3
Total Number of Routes..................... 0
Reachable Routes .......................... 0
DVMRP Commands
965
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 966 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DVMRP INTERFACE STATUS
Interface
Interface Mode
Protocol State
---------
--------------
--------------
show ip dvmrp interface
Use the show ip dvmrp interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the interface information for DVMRP on the specified interface.
Syntax
show ip dvmrp interface vlan vlan-id
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default condition.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays interface information for VLAN 11 DVMRP.
console(config)#show ip dvmrp interface vlan 11
Interface Mode............................. Disable
show ip dvmrp neighbor
Use the show ip dvmrp neighbor command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the neighbor information for DVMRP.
Syntax
show ip dvmrp neighbor
966
DVMRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 967 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default condition.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the neighbor information for DVMRP.
console(config)#show ip dvmrp neighbor
No neighbors available.
show ip dvmrp nexthop
Use the show ip dvmrp nexthop command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the next hop information on outgoing interfaces for routing multicast
datagrams.
Syntax
show ip dvmrp nexthop
Default Configuration
This command has no default condition.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
DVMRP Commands
967
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 968 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the next hop information on outgoing
interfaces for routing multicast datagrams.
console(config)#show ip dvmrp nexthop
Next Hop
Source IP
Source Mask
Interface
Type
--------------
--------------
---------
------
show ip dvmrp prune
Use the show ip dvmrp prune command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the table that lists the router’s upstream prune information.
Syntax
show ip dvmrp prune
Default Configuration
This command has no default condition.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the table that lists the router’s upstream
prune information.
console(config)#show ip dvmrp prune
Expiry
Group
IP Source
IP Source Mask
Time(secs)
--------------
--------------
--------------
-----------
968
DVMRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 969 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip dvmrp route
Use the show ip dvmrp route command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the multicast routing information for DVMRP.
Syntax
show ip dvmrp route
Default Configuration
This command has no default condition.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the multicast routing information for
DVMRP.
console#show ip dvmrp route
Upstream
Expiry
Up Time
Source Address Neighbor Interface Metric Time(secs) (secs)
-------------- -------- ---------------- ----------
DVMRP Commands
------
969
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 970 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
970
DVMRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 971 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
44
GMRP Commands
The GARP Multicast Registration Protocol provides a mechanism that allows
networking devices to dynamically register (and de-register) Group
membership information with the MAC networking devices attached to the
same segment, and for that information to be disseminated across all
networking devices in the bridged LAN that support Extended Filtering
Services. The operation of GMRP relies upon the services provided by the
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP). GMRP is supported as
described below.
The information registered, de-registered and disseminated via GMRP is in
the following forms:
1 Group Membership information: This indicates that there exists one or
more GMRP participants which are members of a particular Group, and
carry the group MAC addresses associated with the Group.
2 Group service requirements information: This indicates that one or more
GMRP participants require Forward all Groups or Forward Unregistered to
be the default filtering behavior.
NOTE: The Group Service requirement is not supported.
Registration of group membership information allow networking devices to
be made aware that frames destined for that group MAC address concerned
should be forwarded in the direction of registered members of the group.
Forwarding of frames destined for that group MAC address occur on ports on
which such membership registration has been received.
Registration of group services requirement information allow networking
devices to be made aware that any of their ports that can forward frames in
the direction from which the group service requirement information has been
received should modify their default group behavior in accordance with the
group service requirement expressed.
NOTE: The Group Service requirement is not supported.
GMRP Commands
971
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 972 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The registration and de-registration of membership results in the multicast
table being updated with a new entry or the existing entry modified.
This ensures that the networking device receives multicast frames from all
ports but forwards them through only those ports for which GMRP has
created Group registration entry (for that multicast address). Registration
entries created by GMRP ensures that frames are not transmitted on LAN
segments which neither have registered GMRP participants nor are in the
path through the active topology between the sources of the frames and the
registered group members.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
gmrp enable
show gmrp configuration
gmrp enable
Use the gmrp enable command in Global Configuration mode to enable
GMRP globally or Interface Configuration mode to enable GMRP on a port.
Syntax
gmrp enable
no gmrp enable
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
GMRP is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration and Interface Configuration modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
972
GMRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 973 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
In this example, GMRP is globally enabled.
console(config)#gmrp enable
show gmrp configuration
Use the show gmrp configuration command in Global Configuration mode
and Interface Configuration mode to display GMRP configuration.
Syntax
show gmrp configuration
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
GMRP is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration and Interface Configuration modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show gmrp configuration
Global GMRP Mode: Disabled
Join
Interface
Leave
Timer
Timer
LeaveAll
Timer
Port
GMRP Mode
(centisecs)
(centisecs)
(centisecs)
-----------
-----------
-----------
-----------
-----------
Gi1/0/1
20
60
1000
Disabled
GMRP Commands
973
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 974 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Gi1/0/2
20
60
1000
Disabled
Gi1/0/3
20
60
1000
Disabled
Gi1/0/4
20
60
1000
Disabled
Gi1/0/5
20
60
1000
Disabled
Gi1/0/6
20
60
1000
Disabled
974
GMRP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 975 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IGMP Commands
45
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is the multicast group
membership discovery protocol used for IPv4 multicast groups. Three
versions of IGMP exist. Versions one and two are widely deployed. Since
IGMP is used between end systems (often desktops) and the multicast router,
the version of IGMP required depends on the end-user operating system
being supported. Any implementation of IGMP must support all earlier
versions.
The following list describes the basic operation of IGMP, common to all
versions. A multicast router can act as both an IGMP host and an IGMP
router and as a result can respond to its own IGMP messages. The
PowerConnect implementation of IGMPv3 supports the multicast router
portion of the protocol (that is, not the host portion). It is backward
compatible with IGMPv1 and IGMPv2.
•
One router periodically broadcasts IGMP Query messages onto the
network.
•
Hosts respond to the Query messages by sending IGMP Report messages
indicating their group memberships.
•
All routers receive the Report messages and note the memberships of hosts
on the network.
•
If a router does not receive a Report message for a particular group for a
period of time, the router assumes there are no more members of the
group on the network.
All IGMP messages are raw IP data grams and are sent to multicast group
addresses, with a time to leave (TTL) of 1. Since raw IP does not provide
reliable transport, some messages are sent multiple times to aid reliability.
IGMPv3 is a major revision of the protocol and provides improved group
membership latency. When a host joins a new multicast group on an
interface, it immediately sends an unsolicited IGMP Report message for that
group.
IGMP Commands
975
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 976 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IGMPv2 introduced a Leave Group message, which is sent by a host when it
leaves a multicast group for which it was the last host to send an IGMP
Report message. Receipt of this message causes the Querier possibly to
reduce the remaining lifetime of its state for the group, and to send a groupspecific IGMP Query message to the multicast group.The Leave Group
message is not used with IGMPv3, since the source address filtering
mechanism provides the same functionality.
IGMPv3 also allows hosts to specify the list of hosts from which they want to
receive traffic. Traffic from other hosts is blocked inside the network. It also
allows hosts to block packets for all sources sending unwanted traffic.
IGMPv3 adds the capability for a multicast router to learn which sources are
of interest to neighboring systems for packets sent to any particular multicast
address. This information gathered by IGMP is provided to the multicast
routing protocol (that is, DVMRP, PIM-DM, and PIM-SM) that is currently
active on the router in order to ensure multicast packets are delivered to all
networks where there are interested receivers.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip igmp
ip igmp version
ip igmp last-member-query-count
show ip igmp
ip igmp last-member-query-interval
show ip igmp groups
ip igmp query-interval
show ip igmp interface
ip igmp query-max-response-time
show ip igmp membership
ip igmp robustness
show ip igmp interface stats
ip igmp startup-query-count
ip igmp router-alert-optional
ip igmp startup-query-interval
ip igmp
Use the ip igmp command in Global Configuration mode to set the
administrative mode of IGMP in the system to active. IGMP only operates
over VLAN interfaces.
976
IGMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 977 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip igmp
no ip igmp
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default state.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example globally enables IGMP.
console(config)#ip igmp
ip igmp last-member-query-count
Use the ip igmp last-member-query-count command in Interface
Configuration mode to set the number of Group-Specific Queries sent before
the router assumes that there are no local members on the interface.
Syntax
ip igmp last-member-query-count Imqc
no ip igmp last-member-query-count
•
Imqc — Query count. (Range: 1-20)
Default Configuration
The default last member query count is 2.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
IGMP Commands
977
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 978 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets 10 as the number of VLAN 2 Group-Specific
Queries.
console#configure
console(config)#interface vlan 2
console(config-if-vlan2)#ip igmp last-member-querycount 10
console(config-if-vlan2)#no ip igmp last-memberquery-count
ip igmp last-member-query-interval
Use the ip igmp last-member-query-interval command in Interface
Configuration mode to configure the Maximum Response Time inserted in
Group-Specific Queries which are sent in response to Leave Group messages.
Syntax
ip igmp last-member-query-interval tenthsofseconds
no ip igmp last-member-query-interval
•
tenthsofseconds — Maximum Response Time in tenths of a second
(Range: 0-255)
Default Configuration
The default Maximum Response Time value is ten (in tenths of a second).
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
978
IGMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 979 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example configures 2 seconds as the Maximum Response Time
inserted in VLAN 15’s Group-Specific Queries.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp last-member-queryinterval 20
ip igmp query-interval
Use the ip igmp query-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the query interval for the specified interface. The query interval
determines how fast IGMP Host-Query packets are transmitted on this
interface.
Syntax
ip igmp query-interval seconds
no ip igmp query-interval
•
seconds — Query interval. (Range: 1-3600)
Default Configuration
The default query interval value is 125 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a 10-second query interval for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp query-interval 10
IGMP Commands
979
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 980 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip igmp query-max-response-time
Use the ip igmp query-max-response-time command in Internet
Configuration mode to configure the maximum response time interval for
the specified interface. It is the maximum query response time advertised in
IGMPv2 queries on this interface. The time interval is specified in seconds.
Syntax
ip igmp query-max-response-time seconds
no ip igmp query-max-response-time
•
seconds — Maximum response time. (Range: 0-25 seconds)
Default Configuration
The default maximum response time value is 10 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a maximum response time interval of one
second for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp query-max-responsetime 10
ip igmp robustness
Use the ip igmp robustness command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the robustness that allows tuning of the interface, that is, tuning for
the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to have
significant loss, the robustness variable may be increased for the interface.
980
IGMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 981 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip igmp robustness robustness
no ip igmp robustness
•
robustness — Robustness variable. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
The default robustness value is 2.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a robustness value of 10 for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp robustness 10
ip igmp startup-query-count
Use the ip igmp startup-query-count command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the number of queries sent out on startup —at intervals equal to
the startup query interval for the interface.
Syntax
ip igmp startup-query-count count
no ip igmp startup-query-count
•
count — The number of startup queries. (Range: 1-20)
Default Configuration
The default count value is 2.
IGMP Commands
981
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 982 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets for VLAN 15 the number of queries sent out on
startup at 10.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp startup-query-count
10
ip igmp startup-query-interval
Use the ip igmp startup-query-interval command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the interval between general queries sent at startup on the
interface.
Syntax
ip igmp startup-query-interval seconds
no ip igmp startup-query-interval
•
seconds — Startup query interval. (Range: 1-300 seconds)
Default Configuration
The default interval value is 31 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
982
IGMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 983 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets at 10 seconds the interval between general queries
sent at startup for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp startup-queryinterval 10
ip igmp version
Use the ip igmp version command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the version of IGMP for an interface.
Syntax
ip igmp version version
•
version — IGMP version. (Range: 1-3)
Default Configuration
The default version is 3.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures version 2 of IGMP for VLAN 15.
console#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp version 2
show ip igmp
Use the show ip igmp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display systemwide IGMP information.
IGMP Commands
983
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 984 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ip igmp
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays system-wide IGMP information.
console#show ip igmp
IGMP Admin Mode............................. Enabled
IGMP Router-Alert check..................... Disabled
IGMP INTERFACE STATUS
Interface Interface-Mode Operational-Status
--------- -------------- ---------------vlan 3
Enabled
Non-Operational
show ip igmp groups
Use the show ip igmp groups command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
modes to display the registered multicast groups on the interface. If detail is
specified, this command displays the registered multicast groups on the
interface in detail.
984
IGMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 985 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ip igmp groups [interface-type interface-number] [detail]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
interface-number
Interface type of VLAN and a valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the registered multicast groups for VLAN 1.
console#show ip igmp groups interface vlan 3 detail
REGISTERED MULTICAST GROUP DETAILS
Version1
Multicast
Last
Up
IP Address
Reporter
Time
---------------
------------ ----------
225.0.0.5
1.1.1.5
00:00:05
Expiry
Host
Time
Timer
--------00:04:15
------------
Version2
Host
Group
Compat
Timer
Mode
-------- ----00:04:15
v2
show ip igmp interface
Use the show ip igmp interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the IGMP information for the specified interface.
Syntax
show ip igmp interface [interface-type interface-number]
IGMP Commands
985
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 986 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
interface-number
Interface type of VLAN and a valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays IGMP information for VLAN 11.
console#show ip igmp vlan 11
Interface..................................... 11
IGMP Admin Mode............................... Enable
Interface Mode................................ Enable
IGMP Version.................................. 3
Query Interval (secs)......................... 125
Query Max Response Time (1/10 of a second).... 100
Robustness..................................... 2
Startup Query Interval (secs) ................. 31
Startup Query Count............................ 2
Last Member Query Interval (1/10 of a second).. 10
Last Member Query Count........................ 2
986
IGMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 987 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip igmp membership
Use the show ip igmp membership command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the list of interfaces that have registered in the multicast group. If
detail is specified, this command displays detailed information about the
listed interfaces.
Syntax
show ip igmp membership [groupaddr] [detail]
•
groupaddr — Group IP address
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples display the list of interfaces that have registered in
the multicast group at IP address 224.5.5.5, the latter in detail mode.
console#show ip igmp interface membership 224.5.5.5
console(config)#show ip igmp interface membership 224.5.5.5 detail
show ip igmp interface stats
Use the show ip igmp interface stats command in User EXEC mode to
display the IGMP statistical information for the interface. The statistics are
only displayed when the interface is enabled for IGMP.
Syntax
show ip igmp interface stats vlan vlan-id
IGMP Commands
987
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 988 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following example displays the IGMP statistical information for VLAN 7.
console#show ip igmp interface stats vlan 7
Querier Status............................... Querier
Querier IP Address........................... 7.7.7.7
Querier Up Time (secs) ...................... 55372
Querier Expiry Time (secs) .................. 0
Wrong Version Queries........................ 0
Number of Joins.............................. 7
Number of Groups............................. 1
ip igmp router-alert-optional
Use the ip igmp router-alert-optional command to set IGMP to not require
the Router-Alert field.
Syntax
ip igmp router-alert-optional
no ip igmp router-alert-optional
988
IGMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 989 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Value
The Router-Alert field is not required by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Usage Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Example
ip igmp router-alert-optional
IGMP Commands
989
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 990 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
990
IGMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 991 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IGMP Proxy Commands
46
IGMP Proxy is used by the router on IPv4 systems to enable the system to
issue IGMP host messages on behalf of hosts that the system discovered
through standard IGMP router interfaces, thus acting as proxy to all its hosts
residing on its router interfaces.
PowerConnect supports IGMP Version 3, Version 2 and Version 1. Version 3
adds support for source filtering [SSM] and needs to be interoperable with
Versions 1 and 2. Version 2 supports the group membership terminations to
be quickly reported to overcome leave latency and is designed to be
interoperable with Version 1.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip igmp-proxy
show ip igmp-proxy interface
ip igmp-proxy reset-status
show ip igmp-proxy groups
ip igmp-proxy unsolicited-report-interval show ip igmp-proxy groups detail
show ip igmp-proxy
ip igmp-proxy
Use the ip igmp-proxy command in Interface Configuration mode to enable
the IGMP Proxy on the router. To enable the IGMP Proxy on the router,
multicast forwarding must be enabled and there must be no multicast routing
protocols enabled on the router.
Syntax
ip igmp-proxy
no ip igmp-proxy
IGMP Proxy Commands
991
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 992 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables the IGMP Proxy on the VLAN 15 router.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp-proxy
ip igmp-proxy reset-status
Use the ip igmp-proxy reset-status command in Interface Configuration
mode to reset the host interface status parameters of the IGMP Proxy router.
This command is valid only when IGMP Proxy is enabled on the interface.
Syntax
ip igmp-proxy reset-status
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
992
IGMP Proxy Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 993 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example resets the host interface status parameters of the
IGMP Proxy router.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp-proxy reset-status
ip igmp-proxy unsolicited-report-interval
Use the ip igmp-proxy unsolicited-report-interval command in Interface
Configuration mode to set the unsolicited report interval for the IGMP Proxy
router. This command is valid only if IGMP Proxy on the interface is enabled.
Syntax
ip igmp-proxy unsolicited-report-interval seconds
•
seconds — Unsolicited report interval. (Range: 1-260 seconds)
Default Configuration
The default configuration is 1 second.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets 10 seconds as the unsolicited report interval for
the IGMP Proxy router.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp-proxy unsolicitedreport-interval 10
IGMP Proxy Commands
993
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 994 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip igmp-proxy
Use the show ip igmp-proxy command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a
summary of the host interface status parameters. It displays status parameters
only when IGMP Proxy is enabled.
Syntax
show ip igmp-proxy
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays a summary of the host interface status
parameters.
console#show ip igmp-proxy
Interface Index............................... vlan13
Admin Mode.................................... Enable
Operational Mode.............................. Enable
Version....................................... 3
Number of Multicast Groups.................... 0
Unsolicited Report Interval................... 1
Querier IP Address on Proxy Interface......... 0.0.0.0
Older Version 1 Querier Timeout............... 0
Older Version 2 Querier Timeout............... 0
994
IGMP Proxy Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 995 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Proxy Start Frequency........................ 1
show ip igmp-proxy interface
Use the show ip igmp-proxy interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display a detailed list of the host interface status parameters. It displays status
parameters only when IGMP Proxy is enabled.
Syntax
show ip igmp-proxy interface
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example fails to display status parameters because IGMP Proxy
is not enabled.
console#show ip igmp-proxy interface
Interface Index................................ vlan13
Ver
Query Rcvd
Report Rcvd
Report Sent
Leave Rcvd
Leave Sent
----------------------------------------------------------------1
0
0
0
-----
-----
2
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
-----
-----
IGMP Proxy Commands
995
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 996 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip igmp-proxy groups
Use the show ip igmp-proxy groups command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display a table of information about multicast groups that IGMP Proxy
reported. It displays status parameters only when IGMP Proxy is enabled.
Syntax
show ip igmp-proxy groups
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example attempts to display a table of information about
multicast groups that IGMP Proxy reported.
console#show ip igmp-proxy groups
Interface Index................................ vlan13
Group Address
Last Reporter
Up Time
Member State Filter Mode Sources
-------------
---------------
-------
------------ ----------- ------
225.0.1.1
13.13.13.1
7
DELAY-MEMBER Exclude
0
225.0.1.2
13.13.13.1
48
DELAY-MEMBER Exclude
0
show ip igmp-proxy groups detail
Use the show ip igmp-proxy groups detail command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display complete information about multicast groups that IGMP
Proxy has reported.
Syntax
show ip igmp-proxy groups detail
996
IGMP Proxy Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 997 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays complete information about multicast groups
that IGMP Proxy has reported.
console#show ip igmp-proxy groups detail
Interface Index................................ vlan13
Group Address
Last Reporter
Up Time
Member State Filter Mode Sources
-------------
---------------
-------
------------ ----------- -------
225.0.1.1
13.13.13.1
26
DELAY-MEMBER Exclude
0
225.0.1.2
13.13.13.1
67
DELAY-MEMBER Exclude
0
IGMP Proxy Commands
997
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 998 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
998
IGMP Proxy Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 999 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
47
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
The IP Helper feature provides the ability for a router to forward configured
UDP broadcast packets to a particular IP address. This allows applications to
reach servers on non-local subnets. This is possible even when the application
is designed to assume a server is always on a local subnet or when the
application uses broadcast packets to reach the server (with the limited
broadcast address 255.255.255.255, or a network directed broadcast address).
Network administrators can configure relay entries globally and on routing
interfaces. Each relay entry maps an ingress interface and destination UDP
port number to a single IPv4 address (the helper address). Multiple relay
entries may be configured for the same interface and UDP port, in which case
the relay agent relays matching packets to each server address. Interface
configuration takes priority over global configuration. If the destination UDP
port for a packet matches any entry on the ingress interface, the packet is
handled according to the interface configuration. If the packet does not
match any entry on the ingress interface, the packet is handled according to
the global IP helper configuration.
Network administrators can configure discard relay entries. Discard entries are
used to discard packets received on a specific interface when those packets
would otherwise be relayed according to a global relay entry. Discard relay
entries may be configured on interfaces, but are not configured globally.
Additionally, administrators can configure which UDP ports are forwarded.
Certain UDP port numbers can be specified by name in the UI, but network
administrators can configure a relay entry with any UDP port number.
Administrators may configure relay entries that do not specify a destination
UDP port. The relay agent assumes that these entries match packets with the
UDP destination ports listed in Table 47-1.
Table 47-1. UDP Destination Ports
Protocol
UDP Port Number
IEN-116 Name Service
42
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
999
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1000 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Protocol
UDP Port Number
DNS
53
NetBIOS Name Server
137
NetBIOS Datagram Server
138
TACACS Server
49
Time Service
37
DHCP
67
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
69
Certain preexisting configurable DHCP relay options do not apply to relay of
other protocols. These options are unchanged. The user may optionally set a
DHCP maximum hop count or minimum wait time.
The relay agent relays DHCP packets in both directions. It relays broadcast
packets from the client to one or more DHCP servers, and relays packets to
the client that the DHCP server unicasts back to the relay agent. For other
protocols, the relay agent only relays broadcast packets from the client to the
server. Packets from the server back to the client are assumed to be unicast
directly to the client. Because there is no relay in the return direction for
protocols other than DHCP, the relay agent retains the source IP address from
the original client packet. The relay agent uses a local IP address as the source
IP address of relayed DHCP client packets.
When a switch receives a broadcast UDP packet on a routing interface, the
relay agent verifies that the interface is configured to relay to the destination
UDP port. If so, the relay agent unicasts the packet to the configured server IP
addresses. Otherwise, the relay agent verifies that there is a global
configuration for the destination UDP port. If so, the relay agent unicasts the
packet to the configured server IP addresses. Otherwise the packet is not
relayed.
The relay agent only relays packets that meet the following conditions:
•
The destination MAC address must be the all-ones broadcast address
(FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF).
•
The destination IP address must be the limited broadcast address
(255.255.255.255) or a directed broadcast address for the receive interface.
•
The IP time-to-live (TTL) must be greater than 1.
1000
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1001 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
The protocol field in the IP header must be UDP (17).
•
The destination UDP port must match a configured relay entry.
DHCP relay cannot be enabled and disabled globally. IP helper can be
enabled or disabled globally. Enabling IP helper enables DHCP relay.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount
ip helper-address (global configuration)
bootpdhcprelay minwaittime
ip helper-address (interface
configuration)
clear ip helper statistics
ip helper enable
ip dhcp relay information check
show ip helper-address
ip dhcp relay information check-reply
show ip dhcp relay
ip dhcp relay information option
show ip helper statistics
ip dhcp relay information option-insert
bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount
Use the bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount command in Global Configuration
mode to configure the maximum allowable relay agent hops for BootP/DHCP
Relay on the system. Use the no form of the command to set the maximum
hop count to the default value.
Syntax
bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount integer
no bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount
•
integer — Maximum allowable relay agent hops for BootP/DHCP Relay on
the system. (Range: 1-16)
Default Configuration
The default integer configuration is 4.
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
1001
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1002 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command.
Example
The following example defines a maximum hopcount of 6.
console(config)#bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount 6
bootpdhcprelay minwaittime
Use the bootpdhcprelay minwaittime command in Global Configuration
mode to configure the minimum wait time in seconds for BootP/DHCP Relay
on the system. When the BOOTP relay agent receives a BOOTREQUEST
message, it might use the seconds-sinceclient- began-booting field of the
request as a factor in deciding whether to relay the request or not. Use the no
form of the command to set the minimum wait time to the default value.
Syntax
bootpdhcprelay minwaittime integer
no bootpdhcprelay minwaittime
•
integer — Minimum wait time for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system.
(Range: 0-100 seconds)
Default Configuration
0 is the default integer configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command.
1002
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1003 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example defines a minimum wait time of 10 seconds.
console(config)#bootpdhcprelay minwaittime 10
clear ip helper statistics
Use the clear ip helper statistics command to reset to 0 the statistics
displayed in show ip helper statistics.
Syntax
clear ip helper statistics
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#clear ip helper statistics
ip dhcp relay information check
Use the ip dhcp relay information check command to enable DHCP Relay to
check that the relay agent information option in forwarded BOOTREPLY
messages is valid. If an invalid message is received, the relay agent drops it.
This information check will take effect, though enabled, only when the relay
agent interface is enabled to insert the sub-options.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information check
no ip dhcp relay information check
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
1003
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1004 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This is enabled by default for a DHCP relay agent.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command. Interface
configuration takes precedence over global configuration. However if there is
no interface configuration then global configuration is followed.
This check is enabled by default. The administrator has to ensure that the
relay should be configured such that only it should insert option-82 fields and
no other device near the client has the facility to insert options.
Example
The following example enables relay information check globally:
console(config)#ip dhcp relay information check
ip dhcp relay information check-reply
Use the ip dhcp relay information check-reply command to enable DHCP
Relay to check that the relay agent information option in forwarded
BOOTREPLY messages is valid. If an invalid message is received, the relay
agent drops it. This information check will take effect, though enabled, only
when the relay agent interface is enabled to insert the sub-options.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information check-reply [none]
no ip dhcp relay information check-reply
1004
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1005 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
none
(Optional) Disables the command function.
Default Configuration
This check is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command. Use the global
configuration command ip dhcp relay information option command to
enable processing of DHCP circuit ID and remote agent ID options. DHCP
replies are checked by default. The network administrator should ensure that
only one switch in the path between the DHCP client and server processes
DHCP information options.
Example
The following example enables relay information check on the interface:
console(config)#interface vlan 10
console(config-if-vlan10)#ip dhcp relay information check
ip dhcp relay information option
Use the ip dhcp relay information option command in Global Configuration
mode to enable the circuit ID option and remote agent ID mode for
BootP/DHCP Relay on the system (also called option 82). Use the no form of
the command to disable the circuit ID option and remote agent ID mode for
BootP/DHCP Relay.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information option
no ip dhcp relay information option
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
1005
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1006 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command.
Example
The following example enables the circuit ID and remote agent ID options.
console(config)#ip dhcp relay information option
ip dhcp relay information option-insert
Use the ip dhcp relay information option-insert command in Interface
Configuration mode to enable the circuit ID option and remote agent ID
mode for BootP/DHCP Relay on the interface (also called option 82). Use the
no form of the command to return the option insert configuration to the
default.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information option-insert [none]
no ip dhcp relay information option-insert
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
none
Use to disable insertion of circuit id and remote agent id
options into DHCP messages.
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
1006
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1007 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command. The interface
configuration always takes precedence over global configuration. However, if
there is no interface configuration, then global configuration is followed.
Example
The following example enables the circuit ID and remote agent ID options on
vlan 10.
console(config)#interface vlan 10
console(config-if-vlan10)#ip dhcp relay information option-insert
ip helper-address (global configuration)
Use the ip helper-address (global configuration) command to configure the
relay of certain UDP broadcast packets received on any interface. To delete an
IP helper entry, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip helper-address server-address [ dest-udp-port | dhcp | domain | isakmp |
mobile-ip | nameserver | netbios-dgm | netbios-ns | ntp | pim-auto-rp | rip
| tacacs | tftp | time ]
no ip helper-address [server-address] [ dest-udp-port | dhcp | domain |
isakmp | mobile-ip | nameserver | netbios-dgm | netbios-ns | ntp | pimauto-rp | rip | tacacs | tftp | time ]
•
server-address — The IPv4 unicast or directed broadcast address to which
relayed UDP broadcast packets are sent. The server address cannot be an
IP address configured on any interface of the local router.
•
dest-udp-port — A destination UDP port number from 0 to 65535.
•
port-name — The destination UDP port may be optionally specified by its
name. Whether a port is specified by its number or its name has no effect
on behavior. The names recognized are as follows: dhcp (port 67), domain
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
1007
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1008 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
(port 53), isakmp (port 500), mobile-ip (port 434), nameserver (port 42),
netbios-dgm (port 138), netbios-ns (port 137), ntp (port 123), pim-autorp (port 496), rip (port 520), tacacs (port 49), tftp (port 69), and time
(port 37). Other ports must be specified by number.
Default Configuration
No helper addresses are configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command can be invoked multiple times, either to specify multiple
server addresses for a given port number or to specify multiple port numbers
handled by a specific server.
The command no ip helper-address with no arguments clears all global IP
helper addresses.
Example
To relay DHCP packets received on any interface to two DHCP servers,
10.1.1.1 and 10.1.2.1, use the following commands:
console#config
console(config)#ip helper-address 10.1.1.1 dhcp
console(config)#ip helper-address 10.1.2.1 dhcp
To relay UDP packets received on any interface for all default ports (see
Table 47-1) to the server at 20.1.1.1, use the following commands:
console#config
console(config)#ip helper-address 20.1.1.1
1008
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1009 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip helper-address (interface configuration)
Use the ip helper-address (interface configuration) command to configure
the relay of certain UDP broadcast packets received on a specific interface. To
delete a relay entry on an interface, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip helper-address { server-address | discard } [ dest-udp-port | dhcp |
domain | isakmp | mobile ip | nameserver | netbios-dgm | netbios-ns | ntp
| pim-auto-rp | rip | tacacs | tftp | time ]
no ip helper-address [server-address | discard ] [ dest-udp-port | dhcp |
domain | isakmp | mobile-ip | nameserver | netbios-dgm | netbios-ns | ntp
| pim-auto-rp | rip | tacacs | tftp | time ]
•
server-address — The IPv4 unicast or directed broadcast address to which
relayed UDP broadcast packets are sent. The server address cannot be an
IP address configured on any interface of the local router.
•
discard — Matching packets should be discarded rather than relayed, even
if a global ip helper-address configuration matches the packet.
•
dest-udp-port — A destination UDP port number from 0 to 65535.
•
port-name — The destination UDP port may be optionally specified by its
name. Whether a port is specified by its number or its name has no effect
on behavior. The names recognized are as follows: dhcp (port 67), domain
(port 53), isakmp (port 500), mobile-ip (port 434), nameserver (port 42),
netbios-dgm (port 138), netbios-ns (port 137), ntp (port 123), pim-autorp (port 496), rip (port 520), tacacs (port 49), tftp (port 69), and time
(port 37). Other ports must be specified by number.
Default Configuration
No helper addresses are configured.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
1009
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1010 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command can be invoked multiple times on routing interface, either to
specify multiple server addresses for a given port number or to specify
multiple port numbers handled by a specific server.
The command no ip helper-address with no arguments clears all helper
addresses on the interface.
Example
To relay DHCP packets received on vlan 5 to two DHCP
servers, 192.168.10.1 and 192.168.20.1, use the
following commands:
console#config
console(config)#interface vlan 5
console(config-if-vlan5)#ip helper-address
192.168.10.1 dhcp
console(config-if-vlan5)#ip helper-address
192.168.20.1 dhcp
To relay both DHCP and DNS packets to 192.168.30.1, use the following
commands:
console#config
console(config)#interface vlan 5
console(config-if-vlan5)#ip helper-address
192.168.30.1 dhcp
console(config-if-vlan5)#ip helper-address
192.168.30.1 dns
This command takes precedence over an ip helperaddress command given in global configuration mode.
With the following configuration, the relay agent
relays DHCP packets received on any interface other
than vlan 5 and vlan 6 to 192.168.40.1, relays DHCP
1010
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1011 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
and DNS packets received on vlan 5 to 192.168.40.2,
relays SNMP traps (port 162) received on interface
vlan 6 to 192.168.23.1, and drops DHCP packets
received on vlan 6:
console#config
console(config)#ip helper-address 192.168.40.1 dhcp
console(config)#interface vlan 5
console(config-if-vlan5)#ip helper-address
192.168.40.2 dhcp
console(config-if-vlan5)#ip helper-address
192.168.40.2 domain
console(config-if-vlan5)#exit
console(config)#interface 2/6
console(config-if-vlan6)#ip helper-address
192.168.23.1 162
console(config-if-vlan6)#ip helper-address discard
dhcp
ip helper enable
Use the ip helper enable command to enable relay of UDP packets. To
disable relay of all UDP packets, use the “no” form of this command.
Syntax
ip helper enable
no ip helper enable
Default Configuration
IP helper is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
1011
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1012 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command can be used to temporarily disable IP helper without deleting
all IP helper addresses.
This command replaces the bootpdhcprelay enable command, but affects not
only relay of DHCP packets, but also relay of any other protocols for which an
IP helper address has been configured.
Example
console(config)#ip helper enable
show ip helper-address
Use the show ip helper-address command to display the IP helper address
configuration.
Syntax
show ip helper-address [ interface ]
•
interface — Optionally specify an interface to limit the output to the
configuration of a single interface. The interface is identified as vlan vlanid.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
Field
Description
Interface
The relay configuration is applied to packets that arrive on this
interface. This field is set to “any” for global IP helper entries.
1012
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1013 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
UDP Port
The relay configuration is applied to packets whose destination
UDP port is this port. Entries whose UDP port is identified as
“any” are applied to packets with the destination UDP ports listed
in Table 47-1.
Discard
If “Yes”, packets arriving on the given interface with the given
destination UDP port are discarded rather than relayed. Discard
entries are used to override global IP helper address entries which
otherwise might apply to a packet.
Hit Count
The number of times the IP helper entry has been used to relay or
discard a packet.
Server Address
The IPv4 address of the server to which packets are relayed.
Example
show ip helper-address
IP helper is enabled
Interface
UDP Port
---------------
Discard
-----------
Hit Count
Server Address
--------
----------
---------------
vlan
100
dhcp
No
10
10.100.1.254
vlan
101
any
Yes
any
dhcp
No
10.100.2.254
2
0
10.200.1.254
show ip dhcp relay
Use the show ip dhcp relay command in User EXEC mode to display the
BootP/DHCP Relay information.
Syntax
show ip dhcp relay
Parameter Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
1013
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1014 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC and Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines the Boot/DHCP Relay information.
console#show ip dhcp relay
Maximum Hop Count.............................. 4
Minimum Wait Time(Seconds)..................... 0
Circuit Id Option Mode....................... Disable
Circuit Id Option Check Mode................. Enable
show ip helper statistics
Use the show ip helper statistics command to display the number of DHCP
and other UDP packets processed and relayed by the UDP relay agent.
Syntax
show ip helper statistics
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
1014
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1015 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Field
Description
DHCP client
messages received
The number of valid messages received from a DHCP client.
The count is only incremented if IP helper is enabled globally,
the ingress routing interface is up, and the packet passes a
number of validity checks, such as having a TTL > 1 and having
valid source and destination IP addresses.
DHCP client
messages relayed
The number of DHCP client messages relayed to a server. If a
message is relayed to multiple servers, the count is incremented
once for each server.
DHCP server
messages received
The number of DHCP responses received from the DHCP
server. This count only includes messages that the DHCP server
unicasts to the relay agent for relay to the client.
DHCP server
messages relayed
The number of DHCP server messages relayed to a client.
UDP client
messages received
The number of valid UDP packets received. This count includes
DHCP messages and all other protocols relayed. Conditions are
similar to those for the first statistic in this table.
UDP client
messages relayed
The number of UDP packets relayed. This count includes
DHCP messages relayed as well as all other protocols. The count
is incremented for each server to which a packet is sent.
DHCP message
hop count
exceeded max
The number of DHCP client messages received whose hop
count is larger than the maximum allowed. The maximum hop
count is a configurable value listed in show ip dhcp relay. A log
message is written for each such failure. The DHCP relay agent
does not relay these packets.
DHCP message
with secs field
below min
The number of DHCP client messages received with secs fields
that are less than the minimum value. The minimum secs value
is a configurable value and is displayed in show ip dhcp relay. A
log message is written for each such failure. The DHCP relay
agent does not relay these packets.
DHCP message
with giaddr set to
local address
The number of DHCP client messages received whose gateway
address, giaddr, is already set to an IP address configured on one
of the relay agent's own IP addresses. In this case, another device
is attempting to spoof the relay agent's address. The relay agent
does not relay such packets. A log message gives details for each
occurrence.
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
1015
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1016 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Packets with
expired TTL
The number of packets received with TTL of 0 or 1 that might
otherwise have been relayed.
Packets that
The number of packets ignored by the relay agent because they
matched a discard match a discard relay entry.
entry
Example
console#show ip helper statistics
DHCP client messages received.................. 8
DHCP client messages relayed................... 2
DHCP server messages received.................. 2
DHCP server messages relayed................... 2
UDP client messages received................... 8
UDP client messages relayed.................... 2
DHCP message hop count exceeded max............ 0
DHCP message with secs field below min......... 0
DHCP message with giaddr set to local address.. 0
Packets with expired TTL....................... 0
Packets that matched a discard entry........... 0
1016
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1017 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
48
IP Routing Commands
The Routing Module provides the base Layer 3 support for Local Area
Network (LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN) environments. The
PowerConnect switches allows the network operator to build a complete
Layer 3+ configuration with advanced functionality. As the PowerConnect
defaults to Layer 2 switching functionality, routing must be explicitly enabled
on the PowerConnect to perform Layer 3 forwarding. For PowerConnect
switches, routing is only supported on VLAN and Loopback interfaces for inband ports. It is not possible to route packets to for from the service port.
Static Routes/ECMP Static Routes
The operator is able to configure static and default routes with multiple next
hops to any given destination. Permitting the additional routes creates several
options for the PowerConnect network operator.
1 The operator configures multiple next hops to a given destination,
intending for the router to load share across the next hops.
2 The operator configures multiple next hops to a given destination,
intending for the router to use the primary next hops and only use the
other next hops if the primary next hops are unusable.
The operator distinguishes static routes by specifying a route preference
value. A static route with a lower preference value is a more preferred static
route. Next hops with the same preference are grouped into a single ECMP
route. A less preferred static route is used if the more preferred static route is
unusable. (The link is down or the next hop IP address cannot be resolved to a
MAC address.)
In PowerConnect, the operator deletes an individual next hop from a static
route or deletes an entire static route at once. The cost of a static route is
always 0.
IP Routing Commands
1017
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1018 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The addition of a preference option has a side benefit. The preference option
allows the operator to control the preference of individual static routes
relative to routes learned from other sources (such as OSPF). When routes
from different sources have the same preference, PowerConnect routing
prefers a static route over a dynamic route.
Static Reject Routes
To administratively control the traffic destined to a particular network so that
it is not forwarded through the router, PowerConnect enables configuring a
static reject route for that network on the router. Such traffic is discarded and
the ICMP destination unreachable message is sent back to the source. Static
reject routes are typically used to prevent routing loops.
Default Routes
PowerConnect routing provides a preference option for the configuration of
default routes. A configured default route is treated exactly like a static route.
Therefore, default routes and static routes have the same default preference.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
encapsulation
show ip brief
ip address
show ip interface
ip mtu
show ip protocols
ip netdirbcast
show ip route
ip route
show ip route configured
ip route default
show ip route summary
ip route distance
show ip traffic
ip routing
show ip vlan
routing
1018
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1019 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
encapsulation
Use the encapsulation command in Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
to configure the Link Layer encapsulation type for the packet. Routed frames
are always ethernet-encapsulated when a frame is routed to a VLAN.
Syntax
encapsulation {ethernet | snap}
•
ethernet — Specifies Ethernet encapsulation.
•
snap — Specifies SNAP encapsulation.
Default Configuration
Ethernet encapsulation is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example applies SNAP encapsulation for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#encapsulation snap
ip address
Use the ip address command in Interface Configuration mode to configure
an IP address on an interface. Also use this command to configure one or
more secondary IP addresses on the interface. The ip address none command
sets the IP address to "none". The no ip address command sets the IP address
to the default (whatever the default is). Use the show ip interface command
to display the configured IP addresses.
IP Routing Commands
1019
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1020 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip address ip-address {subnet-mask | prefix-length} [ secondary ]
no ip address ip-address {subnet-mask | prefix-length} [ secondary ]
•
ip-address — IP address of the interface.
•
subnet-mask — Subnet mask of the interface
•
prefix-length — Length of the prefix. Must be preceded by a forward slash
(/). (Range: 1-30 bits)
•
secondary — Indicates the IP address is a secondary address.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command also implicitly enables the VLAN or loopback interface for
routing (i.e. as if the user had issued the ‘routing’ interface command). By
default, configuring an IP address on a VLAN enables in-band management
for interfaces configured with that VLAN. Setting up an IP address on VLAN
1 enables switch management on all in-band interfaces except for those where
VLAN 1 is specifically excluded.
Example
The following example defines the IP address and subnet mask for VLAN 15
and enables the VLAN for routing.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip address 192.168.10.10
255.255.255.0
1020
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1021 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip mtu
Use the ip mtu command in Interface Configuration mode to set the IP
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) on a routing interface. The IP MTU is
the size of the largest IP packet that can be transmitted on the interface
without fragmentation. Packets forwarded in hardware ignore the IP MTU.
Packets forwarded in software are dropped if they exceed the IP MTU of the
outgoing interface.
Packets originated on the router, such as OSPF packets, may be fragmented
by the IP stack. The IP stack uses its default IP MTU and ignores the value set
using the ip mtu command. OSPF advertises the IP MTU in the Database
Description packets it sends to its neighbors during database exchange. If two
OSPF neighbors advertise different IP MTUs, they will not form an adjacency
(unless OSPF has been instructed to ignore differences in IP MTU with the
ip ospf mtuignore command).
Syntax
ip mtu [bytes ]
no ip mtu
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
bytes
Specifies the maximum transmission size of an IP frame.
(Range: 68-9198)
Default Configuration
1500 bytes is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
IP Routing Commands
1021
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1022 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example defines 1480 as the MTU for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip mtu 1480
ip netdirbcast
Use the ip netdirbcast command in Interface Configuration mode to enable
the forwarding of network-directed broadcasts. When enabled, network
directed broadcasts are forwarded. When disabled they are dropped. Use the
no form of the command to disable the broadcasts.
Syntax
ip netdirbcast
no ip netdirbcast
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines the IP address and subnet mask for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip netdirbcast
1022
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1023 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip route
Use the ip route command in Global Configuration mode to configure a
static route. Use the no form of the command to delete the static route. The
IP route command sets a value for the route preference. Among routes to the
same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route
entered into the forwarding database. Specifying the preference of a static
route controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from
dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static
route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same
destination.
Syntax
ip route ip addr {subnetmask | prefix length } nextHopRtr [ preference ]
no ip route ip addr {subnetmask | prefix length} nextHopRtr [ preference ]
•
ip-address — IP address of destination interface.
•
subnet-mask — Subnet mask of destination interface.
•
prefix-length — Length of prefix. Must be preceded with a forward slash
(/). (Range: 0-32 bits)
•
nextHopRtr — IP address of the next hop router.
•
preference — Specifies the preference value, a.k.a. administrative distance,
of an individual static route. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
Default value of preference is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
For the static routes to be visible, you must:
•
Enable ip routing globally.
•
Enable ip routing for the interface.
•
Confirm that the associated link is also up.
IP Routing Commands
1023
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1024 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example identifies the ip-address subnet-mask, next-hop-ip
and a preference value of 200.
console(config)#ip route 192.168.10.10 255.255.255.0
192.168.20.1 metric 200
ip route default
Use the ip route default command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the next hop address of the default route. Use the no form of the
command to delete the default route.
Syntax
ip route default next-hop-ip [ preference ]
no ip route default next-hop-ip [ preference ]
•
next-hop-ip — IP address of the next hop router.
•
preference — Specifies the preference value, a.k.a administrative distance,
of an individual static route. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
Default value of preference is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
For routed management traffic:
1 Router entries are checked for applicable destinations.
2 The globally assigned default-gateway is consulted.
If DHCP is enabled on multiple in-band interfaces and the system learns a
different default gateway on each, the system retains the first default gateway
it learns and ignores any others. If the first default gateway is lost, the system
does not revert to an alternate default gateway until it renews its IP address.
1024
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1025 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Using this command, the administrator may manually configure a single,
global default gateway. The switch installs a default route for a configured
default gateway with a preference of 253, making it more preferred than the
default gateways learned via DHCP, but less preferred than a static default
route. The preference of these routes is not configurable.
The switch installs a default route for the default gateway whether or not
routing is globally enabled. When the user displays the routing table (e.g.
show ip route), the display identifies the default gateway, if one is known.
Use the show ip route static all command to display the configured static
routes and preferences.
Example
The following example identifies the next-hop-ip and a preference value of
200.
console(config)#ip route default 192.168.10.1.200
ip route distance
Use the ip route distance command in Global Configuration mode to set the
default distance (preference) for static routes. Lower route preference values
are preferred when determining the best route. The ip route and ip route
default commands allow optional setting of the distance of an individual
static route. The default distance is used when no distance is specified in
these commands. Changing the default distance does not update the
distance of existing static routes, even if they were assigned the original
default distance. The new default distance are applied to static routes created
after invoking the ip route distance command.
Syntax
ip route distance integer
no ip route distance integer
•
integer — Specifies the distance (preference) of an individual static route.
(Range 1-255)
Default Configuration
Default value of distance is 1.
IP Routing Commands
1025
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1026 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Lower route distance values are preferred when determining the best route.
Example
The following example sets the default route metric to 80.
console(config)#ip route distance 80
ip routing
To globally enable IPv4 routing on the router, use the "ip routing" command
in Global Configuration mode. To disable IPv4 routing globally, use the no
form of this command.
NOTE: Enabling or disabling routing will cause in-band management connections to
be reset.
Syntax
ip routing
no ip routing
Default Configuration
The ip routing default configuration is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use this command to globally enable IPv4 routing.
Example
console(config)#ip routing
1026
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1027 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
routing
Use the routing command in Interface Configuration mode to enable IPv4
and IPv6 routing for an interface. View the current value for this function
with the show ip brief command. The value is labeled Routing Mode in the
output display. Use the no form of the command to disable routing for an
interface.
Syntax
routing
no routing
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables IPv4 and IPv6 routing for VLAN 15
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#routing
show ip brief
Use the show ip brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all the
summary information of the IP.
Syntax
show ip brief
IP Routing Commands
1027
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1028 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays IP summary information.
console#show ip brief
Default Time to Live....................... 30
Routing Mode............................... Disabled
IP Forwarding Mode......................... Enabled
Maximum Next Hops.......................... 2
show ip interface
Use the show ip interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about one or more IP interfaces. The output shows how each IP
address was assigned.
Syntax
show ip interface [type number]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
type
Interface type (loopback, out-of-band, or vlan)
number
Interface number. Valid only for loopback and VLAN types.
1028
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1029 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
The Method field contains one of the following values.
Field
Description
DHCP
The address is leased from a DHCP server.
Manual
The address is manually configured.
ds
The following examples display all IP information and information specific to
VLAN 2.
console#show ip interface
Default Gateway....................... 0.0.0.0
Burned In MAC Address................. 001E.C9AA.AC84
Routing Interfaces:
Interface
State
IP Address
IP Mask
----------
-----
--------------- --------------- -------
Vl1
Down
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Method
None
The Method field contains one of the following values:
•
DHCP — The address is leased from a DHCP server.
•
Manual — The address is manually configured.
IP Routing Commands
1029
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1030 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The Method field is also added to the long form.
console#show ip interface vlan2
Routing Interface Status......... Up
Primary IP Address.........192.168.75.1/255.255.255.0
Method........................... DHCP
Routing Mode..................... Enable
Administrative Mode.............. Enable
Forward Net Directed Broadcasts.... Disable
Proxy ARP.......................... Enable
Local Proxy ARP.................... Disable
Active State....................... Active
Link Speed Data Rate............... 100 Half
MAC address........................ 00:11:88:2A:3C:B3
Encapsulation Type................. Ethernet
IP MTU............................. 1500
Bandwidth.......................... 100000 kbps
Destination Unreachables........... Enabled
ICMP Redirects..................... Enabled
console#show ip interface out-of-band
IP Address............................. 10.131.11.66
Subnet Mask............................ 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway........................ 10.131.11.1
Configured IPv4 Protocol................. DHCP
1030
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1031 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Burned In MAC Address............... 001E.C9AA.AD1C
show ip protocols
Use the show ip protocols command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode
to display the parameters and current state of the active routing protocols.
Syntax
show ip protocols
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays parameters and current state of active routing
protocols.
console#show ip protocols
Routing Protocol is "rip"
Sending updates every 30 seconds
Invalid after 180 seconds, hold down 120, flushed after 300
Redistributing: RIP, Static, OSPF
Default version control: send version 1, receive version 1
Interfaces:
Interface Send Receive Key-chain
IP Routing Commands
1031
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1032 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
-------- --------- ----------- ---------176.1.1.1 1 1 flowers
176.2.1.1 passive 2
Routing Information Sources:
Gateway Last Update
176.1.1.2 0:00:17
Preference: 60
Routing Protocol is "ospf"
Redistributing: OSPF, External direct, Static, RIP
Interfaces:
Interface Metric Key-chain
-------- --------- ----------- ---------176.1.1.1 10 flowers
176.2.1.1 1
Routing Information Sources:
Gateway State
176.1.1.2 Full
External Preference: 60
Internal Preference: 20
show ip route
Use the show ip route command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
current state of the routing table. The output of the command also displays
the IPv4 address of the default gateway and the default route associated with
the gateway.
Syntax
show ip route [ip-address [mask | prefix-length] [longer-prefixes] | protocol]
1032
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1033 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
Specifies the network for which the route is to be displayed and
displays the best matching best-route for the address.
mask
Subnet mask of the IP address.
prefix-length
Length of prefix, in bits. Must be preceded with a forward slash
(/). (Range: 0-32 bits.)
longer-prefixes
Indicates that the ip-address and subnet-mask pair becomes the
prefix, and the command displays the routes to the addresses
that match that prefix.
protocol
Specifies the protocol that installed the routes. (Range:
connected, ospf, rip static)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the IPv4 address of the default gateway and
the default route associated with the gateway.
console#show ip route
Route Codes: R - RIP Derived, O - OSPF Derived, C Connected, S - Static
B - BGP Derived, IA - OSPF Inter Area
E1 - OSPF External Type 1, E2 - OSPF External Type 2
N1 - OSPF NSSA External Type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA External Type
2
IP Routing Commands
1033
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1034 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
S 0.0.0.0/0 [254/0] via 10.1.20.1
C 10.1.20.0/24 [0/1] directly connected, Vl2
C 4.4.0.0/16 [0/1] directly connected,
Lo1
C 20.1.20.0/24 [0/1] directly connected, Vl4
show ip route configured
Use the show ip route configured command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the configured routes, whether they are reachable or not.
Syntax
show ip route configured
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ip route configured
Route Codes: R - RIP Derived, O - OSPF Derived, C Connected, S - Static
B - BGP Derived, IA - OSPF Inter Area
E1 - OSPF External Type 1, E2 - OSPF External
Type 2
N1 - OSPF NSSA External Type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA
External Type 2
1034
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1035 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Gateway is not configured
S
10.0.0.0/8 [1/0] via 1.2.3.5
show ip route preferences
Use the show ip route preferences command in Privileged EXEC mode
displays detailed information about the route preferences. Route preferences
are used in determining the best route. Lower router preference values are
preferred over higher router preference values.
The user can configure a global default gateway using the ip default-gateway
command, creating a default route with a preference of 253. The show ip
route preferences command lists the new preference value. The show
command also displays the preference of default routes learned from a DHCP
server.
Syntax
show ip route preferences
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays IP route preferences.
console#show ip route preferences
IP Routing Commands
1035
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1036 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Local.......................................... 0
Static......................................... 1
OSPF Intra..................................... 110
OSPF Inter..................................... 110
OSPF External.................................. 110
RIP............................................ 120
Configured Default Gateway..................... 253
DHCP Default Gateway........................... 254
show ip route summary
Use the show ip route summary command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the routing table summary, including best and non-best routes.
Syntax
show ip route summary [best]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
best
Shows the number of best routes. To include the number of all
routes, do not use this optional parameter.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1036
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1037 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the IP route summary.
console#show ip route summary
Connected Routes............................... 0
Static Routes.................................. 0
RIP Routes..................................... 0
OSPF Routes.................................... 0
Intra Area Routes.............................. 0
Inter Area Routes.............................. 0
External Type-1 Routes......................... 0
External Type-2 Routes......................... 0
Total routes................................... 0
show ip traffic
Use the show ip traffic command in User EXEC mode to display IP statistical
information. Refer to RFC 1213 for more information about the fields that
are displayed.
Syntax
show ip traffic
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
IP Routing Commands
1037
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1038 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays IP route preferences.
console>show ip traffic
IpInReceives................................... 24002
IpInHdrErrors.................................. 1
IpInAddrErrors................................. 925
IpForwDatagrams................................ 0
IpInUnknownProtos.............................. 0
IpInDiscards................................... 0
IpInDelivers................................... 18467
IpOutRequests.................................. 295
IpOutDiscards.................................. 0
IpOutNoRoutes.................................. 0
IpReasmTimeout................................. 0
IpReasmReqds................................... 0
IpReasmOKs..................................... 0
IpReasmFails................................... 0
IpFragOKs...................................... 0
IpFragFails.................................... 0
IpFragCreates.................................. 0
IpRoutingDiscards.............................. 0
IcmpInMsgs..................................... 3
IcmpInErrors................................... 0
IcmpInDestUnreachs............................. 0
1038
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1039 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IcmpInTimeExcds................................ 0
IcmpInParmProbs................................ 0
IcmpInSrcQuenchs............................... 0
IcmpInRedirects................................ 0
IcmpInEchos.................................... 3
IcmpInEchoReps................................. 0
IcmpInTimestamps............................... 0
IcmpInTimestampReps............................ 0
IcmpInAddrMasks................................ 0
IcmpInAddrMaskReps............................. 0
IcmpOutMsgs.................................... 3
IcmpOutErrors.................................. 0
IcmpOutDestUnreachs............................ 0
IcmpOutTimeExcds............................... 0
IcmpOutParmProbs............................... 0
IcmpOutSrcQuenchs.............................. 0
IcmpOutRedirects............................... 0
IcmpOutEchos................................... 3
IcmpOutEchoReps................................ 3
IcmpOutTimestamps.............................. 0
IcmpOutTimestampReps........................... 0
IcmpOutAddrMasks............................... 0
show ip vlan
Use the show ip vlan command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
VLAN routing information for all VLANs with routing enabled.
IP Routing Commands
1039
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1040 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ip vlan
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays VLAN routing information.
console#show ip vlan
MAC Address used by Routing VLANs: 00:00:00:01:00:02
VLAN ID IP Address
Subnet Mask
------- --------------- --------------10
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
20
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
1040
IP Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1041 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IPv6 PIM Commands
49
This chapter explains the following commands:
ipv6 pim
ipv6 pim join-pruneinterval
show ipv6 pim bsr-router
ipv6 pim sparse (Global
config)
ipv6 pim register-rate-limit show ipv6 pim interface
ipv6 pim dense
ipv6 pim rp-address
show ipv6 pim neighbor
ipv6 pim bsr-border
ipv6 pim rp-candidate
show ipv6 pim rp hash
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate
ipv6 pim spt-threshold
show ipv6 pim rp mapping
ipv6 pim dr-priority
ipv6 pim ssm
ipv6 pim hello-interval
show ipv6 pimsm
ipv6 pim
Use the ipv6 pim command to administratively configure PIM mode for IPv6
Multicast routing on a VLAN interface. Use the no form of this command to
disable PIM on the interface.
Syntax
ipv6 pim
no ipv6 pim
Default Configuration
PIM is disabled on interfaces by default.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
IPv6 PIM Commands
1041
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1042 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(if-vlan-10)#ipv6 pim
ipv6 pim sparse (Global config)
Use the ipv6 pim sparse command to administratively configure PIM sparse
mode for multicast routing. Use the no form of this command to disable PIM
sparse mode.
Syntax
ipv6 pim sparse
no ipv6 pim sparse
Default Configuration
IPv6 PIM is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Only one of sparse or dense mode can be configured on a router.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pim sparse
ipv6 pim dense
Use the ipv6 pim dense command in Global configuration mode to
administratively configure PIM dense mode for IPv6 multicast routing. Use
the no form of this command to disable PIM dense mode.
Syntax
ipv6 pim dense
no ipv6 pim dense
1042
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1043 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
PIM is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Only one of sparse or dense mode can be configured on a router.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pim dense
ipv6 pim bsr-border
Use the ipv6 pim bsr-border command to administratively disable bootstrap
router (BSR) messages from being sent or received through an interface. Use
the no form of this command to return the configuration to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 pim bsr-border
no ipv6 pim bsr-border
Default Configuration
BSR messages are enabled on the interface by default.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command only has an effect if sparse mode is enabled. Lower values are
preferred.
Example
console(if-vlan-10)#ipv6 pim bsr-border
IPv6 PIM Commands
1043
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1044 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate
Use the ipv6 pim bsr-candidate command to configure the router to advertise
itself as a bootstrap router (BSR). Use the no form of this command to return
to the default configuration.
Syntax
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate vlan {vlan-id hash-mask-len bsr-priority [interval
interval]}
no ipv6 pim bsr-candidate vlan {vlan-id}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A valid VLAN identifier with multicast routing enabled.
hash-mask-len
The length of the BSR hash to be AND’ed with the multicast
group address. Range 0-32. Default 0.
bsr-priority
The advertised priority of the bsr-candidate. Range: 0–255.
Default 0.
interval
(Optional) Indicates the BSR candidate advertisement interval.
The range is from 1 to 16383 seconds. The default value is 60
seconds.
Default Configuration
None - The router does not advertise itself as an BSR candidate.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
All multicast groups with the same hash value correspond to the same RP.
Lower priority values are preferred.
1044
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1045 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pim bsr-candidate vlan 10 16 0
interval 30
ipv6 pim dr-priority
Use the ipv6 pim dr-priority command to administratively configure the
advertised designated router (DR) priority. Use the no form of this command
to return the configuration to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 pim dr-priority priority
no ipv6 pim dr-priority
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
priority
The administratively configured priority. Range: 0–2147483647.
Default Configuration
The default election priority is 1.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command only has an effect if sparse mode is enabled. Lower values are
preferred.
Example
console(if-vlan-10)#ipv6 pim dr-priority 32768
IPv6 PIM Commands
1045
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1046 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 pim hello-interval
Use the ipv6 pim hello-interval command to administratively configure the
frequency of PIM Hello messages for the specified interface. Use the no form
of this command to return the configuration to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 pim hello-interval interval
no ipv6 pim hello-interval
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interval
The number of seconds between successive hello transmissions.
Range 0-18000. Default 30.
Default Configuration
The default hello interval is 30 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(if-vlan-10)#ipv6 pim hello-interval 20
ipv6 pim join-prune-interval
Use the ipv6 pim join-prune-interval command to administratively configure
the frequency of join/prune messages on the specified interface. Use the no
form of this command to return the join/prune interval to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 pim join-prune-interval interval
1046
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1047 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no ipv6 pim join-prune-interval
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interval
The number of seconds between successive join-prune
transmissions. Range 0-18000 seconds. Default 60 seconds.
Default Configuration
The join/prune interval defaults to 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command only has an effect if sparse mode is enabled.
Example
console(if-vlan-10)#ipv6 pim join-prune-interval 30
ipv6 pim register-rate-limit
Use the ipv6 pim register-rate-limit command to set a limit on the maximum
number of PIM register messages sent per second for each (S,G) entry. Use
the no form of this command to return the limit to its default value (0).
Syntax
ipv6 pim register-rate-limit register-rate-limit
no ipv6 pim register-rate-limit
Parameter Description
Parameter
register-rate-limit
Description
The PIM register message limit in kilobytes per second. Range
0–2000 Kbps.
IPv6 PIM Commands
1047
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1048 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default threshold is 0. This indicates that the register limit is infinite.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pim register-rate-limit 10
ipv6 pim rp-address
Use the ipv6 pim rp-address command to define the address of a PIM
Rendezvous Point (RP) for a specific multicast group range. Use the no form
of this command to remove a configured RP.
Syntax
ipv6 pim rp-address {rp-address group-address group-mask [ override ]}
no ipv6 pim rp-address {rp-address group-address group-mask}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
rp-address
The valid IPv6 address for the Rendezvous Point.
group-address
A valid multicast group address to be sourced from the
Rendezvous Point.
group-mask
A mask indicating the range of multicast groups sourced from
the RP.
override
A flag indicating that a static entry should override dynamically
learned entries for the configured multicast group.
Default Configuration
None - There are no static multicast groups configured for an RP.
1048
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1049 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pim rp-address
2001:db8:85a3:0:0:8a2e:370:7334 ffe8::0 /16 override
ipv6 pim rp-candidate
Use the ipv6 pim rp-candidate command to configure the router to advertise
itself to the bootstrap router (BSR) as a PIM candidate Rendezvous Point
(RP) for a specific multicast group range. Use the no form of this command
to return to the default configuration.
Syntax
ipv6 pim rp-candidate vlan {vlan-id group-address group-mask [interval
interval]}
no ipv6 pim rp-candidate vlan {vlan-id group-address group-mask}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A valid VLAN identifier with multicast routing enabled.
group-address
A valid Multicast group address.
group-mask
A mask indicating the range of multicast groups for which the
router should advertise itself as an RP-candidate.
interval
(Optional) Indicates the RP candidate advertisement interval.
The range is from 1 to 16383 seconds. The default value is 60
seconds.
Default Configuration
None - The router does not advertise itself as an RP candidate by default.
IPv6 PIM Commands
1049
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1050 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
Console(config)# ipv6 pim rp-candidate vlan 10
239.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 interval 30
ipv6 pim spt-threshold
Use the ipv6 pim spt-threshold command to set the multicast traffic
threshold rate for the last-hop router to switch to the shortest path on the
router. Use the no form of this command to return the threshold to its default
value (0).
Syntax
ipv6 pim spt-threshold spt-threshold
no ipv6 pim spt-threshold
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
spt-threshold
The multicast traffic threshold rate in kilobytes per second.
Range: 0–2000 Kbps.
Default Configuration
The default threshold rate is 0. This indicates that the multicast router
should always switch to the multicast source tree.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
1050
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1051 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pim spt-threshold 1000
ipv6 pim ssm
Use the ipv6 pim ssm command to administratively configure PIM Source
Specific Multicast (SSM) range of addresses for IPv6 multicast routing. Use
the no form of this command to removed configured ranges of addresses from
the router.
Syntax
ipv6 pim ssm { default | group-address group-mask}
no ipv6 pim ssm { default | group-address group-mask}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
default
Defines the SSM range access list to 232/8.
group-address
An IPv6 multicast group address.
group-mask
An IPv6 mask in /prefix form.
Default Configuration
There are no group addresses configured by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
IPv6 PIM Commands
1051
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1052 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pim ssm ffe8::01::00:00:00 /96
show ipv6 pimsm
Use the show ipv6 pimsm command to display global status of IPv6 PIMSM
and its IPv6 routing interfaces.
Syntax
show ipv6 pimsm
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ipv6 pimsm
Admin Mode................................... Enabled
Data Threshold Rate (Kbps)................... 1000
Register Threshold Rate (Kbps)............... 250
SSM RANGE TABLE
Group Address/Prefix Length
---------------------------------------
1052
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1053 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
FF1E::/64
PIM-SM INTERFACE STATUS
Interface
Interface-Mode
Operational-Status
---------
--------------
----------------
vlan 3
Enabled
Operational
vlan 6
Enabled
Operational
vlan 9
Enabled
Operational
show ipv6 pim bsr-router
Use the show ipv6 pim bsr-router command to display the bootstrap router
(BSR) information.
Syntax
show ipv6 pimsm bsr
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command. Field descriptions are shown
in the following table.
Field
Description
BSR Address
Address of the BSR
BSR Priority
Configured BSR priority
BSR Hash Mask
Length
Configured hash mask length
IPv6 PIM Commands
1053
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1054 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Next Bootstrap
Message
Remaining time until a BSR message is sent
Next Candidate RP Time remaining until the next RP advertisement is sent.
Advertisement
Example
console#show ipv6 pim bsr-router candidate
BSR Address...................... 2001:0db8:0:badc::1
BSR Priority.............................. 0
BSR Hash Mask Length...................... 32
C-BSR Advertisement Interval (secs)....... 60
Next Bootstrap message (hh:mm:ss)......... 00:00:02
If no configured/elected BSR’s exist on the router, the following message is
displayed:
No BSR’s exist/learned on this router.
show ipv6 pim interface
Use the show ipv6 pim interface command to display the PIM interface
status parameters. If the interface number is not specified, this command
displays the status parameters of all the PIM-enabled interfaces.
Syntax
show ipv6 pim interface [ vlan vlan-id ]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A valid VLAN ID for which multicast routing has been enabled.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
1054
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1055 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command. Field descriptions are shown
in the table below.
Field
Description
Mode
Active PIM protocol
Interface
Interface number
Hello Interval
Hello interval value
Join-prune Interval
Join-prune interval value
DR Priority
DR priority configured on this interface
BSR Border
Whether or not this interface is configured as a BSR border
Neighbor Count
Number of PIM neighbors learned on this interface
Designated-Router
IPv6 address of the elected DR on the interface
Example
(console) #show ipv6 pim
Interface
VLAN0010
Mode
Sparse
Hello Interval (secs)
30
Join Prune Interval (secs) 60
DR Priority
1
BSR Border
Disabled
Neighbor Count
Designated Router
1
2001:db8:85a3:0:0:8a2e:370:7334
IPv6 PIM Commands
1055
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1056 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interface
VLAN0001
Mode
Sparse
Hello Interval (secs)
30
Join Prune Interval (secs)
60
DR Priority
1
BSR Border
Disabled
Neighbor Count
1
Designated Router
2001:db8:85a3:0:0:8a2e:370:7334
If none of the interfaces are enabled for PIM, the following message is
displayed:
None of the routing interfaces are enabled for PIM
show ipv6 pim neighbor
Use the show ipv6 pim neighbor command to display IPv6 PIM neighbors
discovered by PIMv2 Hello messages. If the interface number is not specified,
this command displays the neighbors discovered on all the PIM-enabled
interfaces.
Syntax
show ipv6 pim neighbor [vlan vlan-id ]
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A valid VLAN ID for which multicast routing has been enabled.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
1056
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1057 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command. Field descriptions are shown
in the table below.
Field
Description
Neighbor Addr
IPv6 address of the PIM neighbor
Interface
Interface number
Uptime
Time since the neighbor was learned
Expiry Time
Time remaining for the neighbor to expire
Example
(console) # show ipv6 pim neighbor vlan 10
Neighbor Addr
Interface
Uptime
Expiry Time
(HH:MM::SS)(HH:MM::SS)
---------------
--------- ----------- -----------
2001:db8:85a3:0:0:8a2e:370:7334 VLAN0010 00:02:55 00:01:15
(FASTPATH) #show ipv6 pim neighbor
Neighbor Addr
Interface
Uptime
Expiry Time
(HH:MM::SS)(HH:MM::SS)
---------------
--------- ----------- -----------
2001:db8:85a3:0:0:8a2e:370:7334 VLAN0001 00:02:55 00:01:15
2001:db8:85a3:0:0:8a2e:370:7334 VLAN0010 00:03:50 00:02:10
If no neighbors are learned on any of the interfaces, the following message is
displayed:
No neighbors are learned on any interface.
IPv6 PIM Commands
1057
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1058 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ipv6 pim rp hash
Use the show ipv6 pim rp hash command to display the rendezvous point
(RP) selected for the specified group address.
Syntax
show ipv6 pim rp hash {group-address}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
group-address
A valid group IP address supported by RP.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command. Field descriptions are shown
in the following table.
Field
Description
RP Address
Address of the RP
Type
Origin from where this group mapping is learned
Example
(console) # show ipv6 pim rp-hash ff1e:abcd:fed1::0
RP Address
Type
1058
2001:0db8:0:abcd::1
Static
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1059 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
If no RP Group mapping exist on the router, the following message is
displayed:
No RP-Group mappings exist/learnt on this router.
show ipv6 pim rp mapping
Use the show ipv6 pim rp mapping command to display the mappings for the
PIM group to the active Rendezvous Points (RPs).
Syntax
show ipv6 pim rp mapping [ rp-address ]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
rp-address
IP address of the RP
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command. Field descriptions are shown
in the following table.
Field
Description
RP Address
Address of the RP
Group Address
Address of the multicast group
Origin
Origin from where this group mapping is learned
Example
(console) # show ipv6 pim rp mapping candidate
IPv6 PIM Commands
1059
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1060 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
RP Address..................................................... 2001:db8:85a3:0:0:8a2e:370:7334
Group Address............................................ ff1e:abcd:def1::0
Group Mask................................................ /24
Origin......................................................... BSR
C-RP Advertisement Interval (secs)......... 60
Next Candidate RP Advertisement (hh:mm:ss)... 00:00:15
If no RP Group mapping exist on the router, the following message is
displayed:
No RP-Group mappings exist on this router.
1060
IPv6 PIM Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1061 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IPv6 Routing Commands
50
The IPv6 version of the routing table manager provides a repository for IPv6
routes learned by dynamic routing protocols or static configuration. RTO6
manages dynamic and static IPv6 routes, redistributes routes to registered
protocols, supports ECMP routes, and supports multiple routes to the same
destination, sorted by preference. IPv6 routing only operates over VLAN
interfaces.
IPv6 Limitations & Restrictions
The following limitations apply:
•
IPSec support is not available.
•
The DHCPv6 server does not support stateful address configuration.
•
Automated router renumbering is not supported.
•
IPv6 is not supported on the service port.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear ipv6
neighbors
ipv6 mld queryipv6 route
max-response-time
show ipv6 mld-proxy
groups detail
clear ipv6 statistics ipv6 mld router
ipv6 route distance show ipv6 mld-proxy
interface
ipv6 address
ipv6 mtu
ipv6 unicastrouting
show ipv6 mld traffic
ipv6 enable
ipv6 nd dad
attempts
ping ipv6
show ipv6 neighbors
ipv6 hop-limit
ipv6 nd managedconfig-flag
ping ipv6 interface show ipv6 route
ipv6 host
ipv6 nd ns-interval show ipv6 brief
show ipv6 route
preferences
IPv6 Routing Commands
1061
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1062 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 mld lastmember-querycount
ipv6 nd otherconfig-flag
show ipv6 interface show ipv6 route
summary
ipv6 mld lastmember-queryinterval
ipv6 nd prefix
show ipv6 interface show ipv6 traffic
management
statistics
ipv6 mld-proxy
ipv6 nd ra-interval show ipv6 mld
groups
show ipv6 vlan
ipv6 mld-proxy
reset-status
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime show ipv6 mld
interface
traceroute ipv6
ipv6 mld-proxy
unsolicit-rprtinterval
ipv6 nd reachable- show ipv6 mldtime
proxy
ipv6 mld queryinterval
ipv6 nd suppress-ra show ipv6 mldproxy groups
1062
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1063 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clear ipv6 neighbors
Use the clear ipv6 neighbors command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear all
entries in the IPv6 neighbor table or an entry on a specific interface.
Syntax
clear ipv6 neighbors [vlan vlan-id ]
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example clears all entries in the IPv6 neighbor table.
console(config)#clear ipv6 neighbors
clear ipv6 statistics
Use the clear ipv6 statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear IPv6
statistics for all interfaces or for a specific interface, including loopback and
tunnel interfaces. IPv6 statistics display in the output of the show ipv6 traffic
command.
Syntax
clear ipv6 statistics [vlan vlan-id | tunnel tunnel-id | loopback loopback-id]
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
•
tunnel-id — Tunnel identifier. (Range: 0-7)
•
loopback-id — Loopback identifier. (Range: 0-7)
IPv6 Routing Commands
1063
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1064 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example clears IPv6 statistics for VLAN 11.
console(config)#clear ipv6 statistics vlan 11
ipv6 address
Use the ipv6 address command in Interface Configuration mode to configure
an IPv6 address on an interface (including tunnel and loopback interfaces)
and to enable IPv6 processing on this interface. Multiple globally reachable
addresses can be assigned to an interface by using this command. There is no
need to assign a link-local address by using this command since one is
automatically created. IPv6 addresses can be expressed in eight blocks. Also
of note is that instead of a period, a colon separates each block. For
simplification, leading zeros of each 16-bit block can be omitted. One
sequence of 16-bit blocks containing only zeros can be replaced with a double
colon “::”, but not more than one at a time (otherwise it is no longer a unique
representation).
Dropping zeros: 3ffe:ffff:100:f101:0:0:0:1 becomes 3ffe:ffff:100:f101::1
Local host: 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0001 becomes ::1
Any host: 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 becomes ::
The hexadecimal letters in the IPv6 addresses are not case-sensitive. An
example of an IPv6 prefix and prefix length is 3ffe:1::1234/64.
Syntax
ipv6 address prefix/prefix-length [eui64]
no ipv6 address [prefix/prefix-length] [eui64]
1064
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1065 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
prefix — Consists of the bits of the address to be configured.
•
prefix-length — Designates how many of the high-order contiguous bits of
the address make up the prefix.
•
eui64 — The optional eui-64 field designates that IPv6 processing on the
interfaces is enabled using an EUI-64 interface ID in the low order 64 bits
of the address. If this option is used, the value of prefix_length must be 64
bits.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures an IPv6 address and enables IPv6
processing.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 address 2020:1::1/64
ipv6 enable
Use the ipv6 enable command in Interface Configuration mode to enable
IPv6 routing on an interface (including tunnel and loopback interfaces) that
has not been configured with an explicit IPv6 address. Command execution
automatically configures the interface with a link-local address. The
command is not required if an IPv6 global address is configured on the
interface.
Syntax
ipv6 enable
no ipv6 enable
IPv6 Routing Commands
1065
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1066 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables IPv6 routing, which has not been configured
with an explicit IPv6 address.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 enable
ipv6 hop-limit
Use the ipv6 hop-limit command to configure the hop limit used in IPv6
PDUs originated by the router. Use the no form of the command to return
the hop limit to the default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 hop-limit count
no ipv6 hop-limit
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
count
The number of hops before the PDU expires (Range 0-255).
Default Configuration
The default count is 64 hops.
1066
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1067 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration
ipv6 host
The ipv6 host command is used to define static host name-to- ipv6 address
mapping in the host cache.
Syntax
ipv6 host name ipv6-address
no ipv6 host name
•
name — Host name.
•
ipv6-address — IPv6 address of the host.
Default Configuration
No IPv6 hosts are defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 host Dell 2001:DB8::/32
ipv6 mld last-member-query-count
The ipv6 mld last-member-query-count command sets the number of
listener-specific queries sent before the router assumes that there are no local
members on the interface. Use the “no” form of this command to set the last
member query count to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld last-member-query-count last-member-query-count
IPv6 Routing Commands
1067
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1068 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no ipv6 mld last-member-query-count
•
last-member-query-count — Query count (Range: 1–20).
Default Configuration
The default last member query count is 2.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld last-member-querycount 5
ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval
The ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval command sets the last member
query interval for the MLD interface, which is the value of the maximum
response time parameter in the group-specific queries sent out of this
interface. Use the “no” form of this command to set the last member query
interval to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval last-member-query-interval
no ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval
•
last-member-query-interval — The last member query interval (Range:
0–65535 milliseconds).
Default Configuration
The default last member query interval is 1 second.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
1068
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1069 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld last-member-queryinterval 5000
ipv6 mld-proxy
Use the ipv6 mld-proxy command to enable MLD Proxy on the router. To
enable MLD Proxy on the router, you must also enable multicast forwarding.
Also, ensure that there are no other multicast routing protocols enabled on
the router. Use the “no” form of this command to disable MLD Proxy.
Syntax
ipv6 mld-proxy
no ipv6 mld-proxy
Default Configuration
MLD Proxy is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld-proxy
ipv6 mld-proxy reset-status
Use the ipv6 mld-proxy reset-status command to reset the host interface
status parameters of the MLD Proxy router. This command is only valid when
MLD Proxy is enabled on the interface.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1069
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1070 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 mld-proxy reset-status
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld-proxy reset-status
ipv6 mld-proxy unsolicit-rprt-interval
Use the ipv6 mld-proxy unsolicit-rprt-interval command to set the
unsolicited report interval for the MLD Proxy router. This command is only
valid when MLD Proxy is enabled on the interface. Use the “no” form of this
command to reset the MLD Proxy router's unsolicited report interval to the
default value.
Syntax
ipv6 mld-proxy unsolicited-report-interval interval
no ipv6 mld-proxy unsolicited-report-interval
•
interval — The interval between unsolicited reports (Range: 1–260
seconds).
Default Configuration
The unsolicited report interval is 1 second by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
1070
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1071 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld-proxy unsolicitrprt-interval 10
ipv6 mld query-interval
The ipv6 mld query-interval command sets the MLD router's query interval
for the interface. The query-interval is the amount of time between the
general queries sent when the router is querying on that interface. Use the
“no” form of this command to set the query interval to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld query-interval query-interval
no ipv6 mld query-interval
•
query-interval — Query interval (Range: 1–3600).
Default Configuration
The default query interval is 125 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld query-interval 130
IPv6 Routing Commands
1071
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1072 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 mld query-max-response-time
The ipv6 mld query-max-response-time command sets MLD query
maximum response time for the interface. This value is used in assigning the
maximum response time in the query messages that are sent on that
interface. Use the “no” form of this command to set the maximum query
response time to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld query-max-response-time query-max-response-time
no ipv6 mld query-max-response-time
•
query-max-response-time — Maximum query response time (Range:
1–65535 milliseconds).
Default Configuration
The default query maximum response time is 10 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld query-max-responsetime 4500
ipv6 mld router
The ipv6 mld router command is used to enable MLD in the router in global
configuration mode and for a specific interface in interface configuration
mode. Use the “no” form of this command to disable MLD.
Syntax
ipv6 mld router
1072
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1073 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no ipv6 mld router
Default Configuration
MLD is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld router
ipv6 mtu
Use the ipv6 mtu command in Interface Configuration mode to set the
maximum transmission unit (MTU) size, in bytes, of IPv6 packets on an
interface. This command replaces the default MTU with a new MTU value.
The IPv6 MTU is only observed for packets originating on the switch. Packets
forwarded by the hardware ignore the IPv6 MTU.
Syntax
ipv6 mtu
no ipv6 mtu
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
bytes
The maximum transmission size of an IPv6 frame. (Range:
1280-1500)
IPv6 Routing Commands
1073
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1074 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default MTU is 1500.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size, in
bytes, of IPv6 packets.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 mtu 1300
ipv6 nd dad attempts
Use the ipv6 nd dad attempts command in Interface Configuration mode to
set the number of duplicate address detection probes transmitted while doing
neighbor discovery. Duplicate address detection verifies that an IPv6 address
on an interface is unique.
Syntax
ipv6 nd dad attempts
no ipv6 nd dad attempts
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
value
Probes transmitted. (Range: 0-600)
Default Configuration
The default value for attempts is 1.
1074
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1075 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets at 10 the number of duplicate address detection
probes transmitted while doing neighbor discovery.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd dad attempts 10
ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
Use the ipv6 nd managed-config-flag command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the “managed address configuration” flag in router
advertisements. When the value is true,
end nodes use DHCPv6. When the value is false, end nodes automatically
configure addresses.
Syntax
ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
no ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
Default Configuration
False is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1075
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1076 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
In the following example, the end node uses DHCPv6.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
ipv6 nd ns-interval
Use the ipv6 nd ns-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to set
the interval between router advertisements for advertised neighbor
solicitations. An advertised value of 0 means the interval is unspecified.
Syntax
ipv6 nd ns-interval milliseconds
no ipv6 nd ns-interval
•
milliseconds — Interval duration. (Range: 0, 1000–4294967295)
Default Configuration
0 is the default value for milliseconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the interval between router advertisements for
advertised neighbor solicitations at 5000 ms.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd ns-interval 5000
1076
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1077 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 nd other-config-flag
Use the ipv6 nd other-config-flag command in Interface Configuration mode
to set the “other stateful configuration” flag in router advertisements sent
from the interface.
Syntax
ipv6 nd other-config-flag
no ipv6 nd other-config-flag
Default Configuration
False is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets to true the “other stateful configuration” flag in
router advertisements
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd other-config-flag
ipv6 nd prefix
Use the ipv6 nd prefix command to configure parameters associated with
prefixes that the router advertises in its router advertisements.
Syntax
ipv6 nd prefix ipv6-prefix/prefix-length [{valid-lifetime | infinite}
{preferred-lifetime | infinite}] [no-autoconfig] [off-link]
no ipv6 nd prefix ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
IPv6 Routing Commands
1077
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1078 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ipv6-prefix
IPv6 prefix.
prefix-length
IPv6 prefix length.
valid-lifetime
Valid lifetime of the router in seconds. (Range: 0–4294967295
seconds.)
infinite
Indicates lifetime value is infinite.
preferred-lifetime
Preferred-lifetime of the router in seconds. (Range:
0–4294967295 seconds.)
no-autoconfig
Do not use Prefix for autoconfiguration.
off-link
Do not use Prefix for onlink determination.
Default Configuration
604800 seconds is the default value for valid-lifetime, 2592000 seconds for
preferred lifetime.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
The router advertises its global IPv6 prefixes in its router advertisements
(RAs). An RA only includes the prefixes of the IPv6 addresses configured on
the interface where the RA is transmitted. Addresses are configured using the
ipv6 address interface configuration command. Each prefix advertisement
includes information about the prefix, such as its lifetime values and whether
hosts should use the prefix for on-link determination or address autoconfiguration. Use the ipv6 nd prefix command to configure these values.
The ipv6 nd prefix command will allow you to preconfigure RA prefix values
before you configure the associated interface address. In order for the prefix
to be included in RAs, you must configure an address that matches the prefix
using the ipv6 address command. Prefixes specified using ipv6 nd prefix
without an associated interface address will not be included in RAs and will
not be committed to the device configuration.
1078
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1079 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the IPv6 prefixes to include in the router
advertisement.
console(config)#interface vlan 11
console(config-if-vlan11)#ipv6 nd prefix 2020:1::1/64
ipv6 nd ra-interval
Use the ipv6 nd ra-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to set
the transmission interval between router advertisements.
Syntax
ipv6 nd ra-interval maximum minimum
no ipv6 nd ra-interval
•
maximum — The maximum interval duration (Range: 4–1800 seconds).
•
minimum — The minimum interval duration (Range: 3 – (0.75 *
maximum) seconds).
Default Configuration
600 is the default value for seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
The minimum interval cannot be larger than 75% of the maximum interval.
Example
The following example sets the transmission interval between router
advertisements at 1000 seconds.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd ra-interval 1000
IPv6 Routing Commands
1079
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1080 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
Use the ipv6 nd ra-lifetime command in Interface Configuration mode to set
the value that is placed in the Router Lifetime field of the router
advertisements sent from the interface.
Syntax
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime seconds
no ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
•
seconds — Lifetime duration. The value must be zero, or it must be an
integer between the value of the router advertisement transmission
interval and 9000 seconds. A value of zero means this router is not to be
used as the default router. (Range: 0-9000)
Default Configuration
1800 is the default value for seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets at 1000 seconds the value that is placed in the
Router Lifetime field of the router advertisements.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd ra-lifetime 1000
ipv6 nd reachable-time
Use the ipv6 nd reachable-time command in Interface Configuration mode
to set the router advertisement time to consider a neighbor reachable after
neighbor discovery confirmation.
1080
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1081 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 nd reachable-time milliseconds
no ipv6 nd reachable-time
•
milliseconds — Reachable-time duration. A value of zero means the time
is unspecified by the router. (Range: 0-3600000 milliseconds)
Default Configuration
The default value for neighbor discovery reachable times is 0 milliseconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the router advertisement time at 5000
milliseconds to consider a neighbor reachable after neighbor discovery
confirmation.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd reachable-time 5000
ipv6 nd suppress-ra
Use the ipv6 nd suppress-ra command in Interface Configuration mode to
suppress router advertisement transmission on an interface.
Syntax
ipv6 nd suppress-ra
no ipv6 nd suppress-ra
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1081
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1082 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example suppresses router advertisement transmission.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd suppress-ra
ipv6 route
Use the ipv6 route command in Global Configuration mode to configure an
IPv6 static route. Use the no form of the command to remove a preference,
an individual next hop, or all next hops for a route. Using the no ipv6 route
distance form causes the system to use the system default administrative
distance.
Syntax
ipv6 route distance
ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix-length {ipv6-address | interface-type ipv6address} [preference]
no ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix-length ipv6-address preference
no ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix-length interface-type ipv6-address
no ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix-length interface
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
distance
The default administrative distance for static routes. (Range 1255)
ipv6-prefix
An IPv6 prefix representing the subnet that can be reached via
the next-hop neighbor.
1082
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1083 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
prefix-length
The length of the IPv6 prefix — a decimal value (usually 0-64)
that shows how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the
address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the
address). A slash mark must separate the prefix from the prefixlength with no spaces on either side of the slash mark.
interface-type
Distinguishes direct static routes from point-to-point and
broadcast interfaces, and must be specified when using a linklocal address as the next hop. Interface-type can be Null or vlan
plus vlan-id or tunnel plus tunnel-id.
ipv6-address
The IPv6 address of the next hop neighbor.
preference
The administrative distance the router uses to compare this
route with routes from other route sources that have the same
destination. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
1 is the default value for preference.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configure an IPv6 static route.
console(config)#ipv6 route 2020:1::1/64 2030:1::2
ipv6 route distance
Use the ipv6 route distance command in Global Configuration mode to set
the default distance (preference) for static routes. Lower route preference
values are preferred when determining the best route. The ipv6 route and
ipv6 route default commands allow optional setting of the distance of an
individual static route. The default distance is used when no distance is
specified in these commands. Changing the default distance does not update
IPv6 Routing Commands
1083
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1084 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
the distance of existing static routes, even if they were assigned the original
default distance. The new default distance is applied to static routes created
after invoking the ipv6 route distance command.
Syntax
ipv6 route distance integer
no ipv6 route distance integer
•
integer — Specifies the distance (preference) of an individual static route.
(Range 1-255)
Default Configuration
Default value of integer is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Lower route distance values are preferred when determining the best route.
Example
The following example sets the default distance to 80.
console(config)#ipv6 route distance 80
ipv6 unicast-routing
Use the ipv6 unicast-routing command in Global Configuration mode to
enable forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams.
Syntax
ipv6 unicast-routing
no ipv6 unicast-routing
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
1084
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1085 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example globally enables Ipv6 unicast datagram forwarding.
console(config)#ipv6 unicast-routing
console(config)#no ipv6 unicast-routing
ping ipv6
Use ping ipv6 command in Privileged EXEC mode to determine whether
another computer is on the network. To use the command, configure the
switch for network (in-band) connection. The source and target devices must
have the ping utility enabled and running on top of TCP/IP. The switch can
be pinged from any IP workstation with which the switch is connected
through the default VLAN (VLAN 1), as long as there is a physical path
between the switch and the workstation. The terminal interface sends three
pings to the target station.
Syntax
ping ipv6 {ip-address | hostname} [size size]
•
ipv6-address — Target IPv6 address to ping.
•
hostname — Hostname to ping (contact). (Range: 1–158 characters). The
command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes.
For example, console(config)#ping ipv6 "host name"
•
size — Size of the datagram. (Range: 48–2048 bytes)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1085
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1086 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example determines whether another computer is on the
network at the IPv6 address specified.
console#ping ipv6 2030:1::1/64
Send count=3, Receive count=0 from 2030:1::1/64
Average round trip time = 0.00 ms
ping ipv6 interface
Use ping ipv6 interface command in the Privileged EXEC mode to
determine whether another computer is on the network. To use the
command, configure the switch for network (in-band) connection. The
source and target devices must have the ping utility enabled and running on
top of TCP/IP. The switch can be pinged from any IP workstation with which
the switch is connected through the default VLAN (VLAN 1), as long as there
is a physical path between the switch and the workstation. The terminal
interface sends three pings to the target station. Use the interface keyword to
ping an interface by using the link-local address or the global IPv6 address of
the interface. The source can be a loopback, tunnel, or logical interface.
Syntax
ping ipv6 interface {vlan vlan-id | tunnel tunnel-id} | loopback loopbackid} link-local-address [size datagram-size]
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
•
tunnel-id — Tunnel identifier. (Range: 0-7)
•
loopback-id — Loopback identifier. (Range: 0-7)
•
link-local-address — IPv6 address to ping.
•
datagram-size — Size of the datagram. (Range: 48-2048 bytes)
1086
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1087 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example determines whether another computer is on the
network at the IPv6 address specified.
console(config)#ping ipv6 interface loopback 1
FE80::202:BCFF:FE00:3068/128
Send count=3, Receive count=0 from
FE80::202:BCFF:FE00:3068/128
Average round trip time = 0.00 ms
show ipv6 brief
Use the show ipv6 brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
IPv6 status of forwarding mode and IPv6 unicast routing mode.
Syntax
show ipv6 brief
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1087
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1088 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the IPv6 status of forwarding mode and IPv6
unicast routing mode.
console#show ipv6 brief
IPv6 Unicast Routing Mode.................... Enable
IPv6 Hop Limit............................... Unconfigured
ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval............. 1000 msec
ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size................. 100 messages
show ipv6 interface
Use the show ipv6 interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to show the
usability status of IPv6 interfaces. The output of the command includes the
method of assignment for each IPv6 address that is either autoconfigured or
leased from a DHCP server. Global addresses with no annotation are assumed
to be manually configured.
Syntax
show ipv6 interface [brief] [loopback loopback-id | tunnel tunnel-id | vlan
vlan-id [prefix]]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
loopback-id
Valid loopback interface ID
tunnel-id
Valid tunnel interface ID
vlan-id
Valid VLAN ID
prefix
Display IPv6 Interface Prefix Information.
Default Configuration
Displays all IPv6 interfaces.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
1088
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1089 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The Method field contains one of the following values.
Field
Description
Auto
The IPv6 address is automatically generated using IPv6 auto
address configuration (RFC 2462).
Config
The IPv6 address is manually configured.
DHCP
The IPv6 address is leased from a DHCP server.
The long form of the command includes the same annotations and shows
whether address autoconfiguration or DHCP client are enabled on the
interface. When the interface acts as a host interface, the output also shows
the default gateway on the interface, if one exists.
Examples
The following example shows the method of assignment for each IPv6 address
that is either autoconfigured or leased from a DHCP server.
console#show ipv6 interface
Oper.
Interface Mode IPv6 Address/Length
---------- -------- --------------------------------Vl3
Enabled FE80::211:88FF:FE2A:3E3C/128
2033::211:88FF:FE2A:3E3C/64
Vl5
Enabled FE80::211:88FF:FE2A:3E3C/128
2017::A42A:26DB:1049:43DD/128
Vl7
Enabled FE80::211:88FF:FE2A:3E3C/128
2001::211:88FF:FE2A:3E3C/64
Vl9
Disabled FE80::211:88FF:FE2A:3E3C/128
[DHCP]
[AUTO]
[TENT]
The Method column shows one of the following values:
•
Auto – The IPv6 address was automatically generated using IPv6 auto
address configuration (RFC 2462)
•
Config – The IPv6 address was manually configured.
•
DHCP – The IPv6 address was leased from a DHCP server.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1089
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1090 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The following example displays the long form of the command, and indicates
whether address autoconfiguration or DHCP client are enabled on the
interface. When the interface acts as a host interface, the output also shows
the default gateway on the interface, if one exists.
console#show ipv6 interface vlan2
IPv6 is enabled
IPv6 Prefix is ................................
FE80::211:88FF:FE2A:3E3C/128
2017::A42A:26DB:1049:43DD/128 [DHCP]
Routing Mode................................... Enabled
Administrative Mode............................ Enabled
IPv6 Routing Operational Mode.................. Enabled
Bandwidth...................................... 100000
kbps
Interface Maximum Transmit Unit................ 1500
Router Duplicate Address Detection Transmits... 1
Address Autoconfigure Mode..................... Disabled
Address DHCP Mode.............................. Enabled
Router Advertisement NS Interval............... 0
Router Advertisement Lifetime.................. 1800
Router Advertisement Reachable Time............ 0
Router Advertisement Interval.................. 600
Router Advertisement Managed Config Flag....... Disabled
Router Advertisement Other Config Flag......... Disabled
Router Advertisement Router Preference......... medium
Router Advertisement Suppress Flag............. Disabled
IPv6 Destination Unreachables.................. Enabled
IPv6 Default Router............................
fe80::213:c4ff:fedb:6c42
show ipv6 interface management statistics
Use the show ipv6 interface management statistics command in Privileged
EXEC mode to show the DCHPv6 client statistics.
1090
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1091 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ipv6 interface management statistics
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ipv6 interface management statistics
DHCPv6 Client Statistics
------------------------DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Received.......... 0
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Received.................. 0
Received DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Discard.. 0
Received DHCPv6 Reply Packets Discarded........ 0
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received.............. 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received.................. 0
DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Transmitted............. 0
DHCPv6 Request Packets Transmitted............. 0
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Transmitted............... 0
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Transmitted.............. 0
IPv6 Routing Commands
1091
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1092 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DHCPv6 Release Packets Transmitted............. 0
Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted............... 0
show ipv6 mld groups
The show ipv6 mld groups command is used to display information about
multicast groups that MLD reported. The information is displayed only when
MLD is enabled on at least one interface. If MLD was not enabled on any
interfaces, there is no group information to be displayed.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld groups { group-address | vlan vlan-id }
•
group-address — The group address to display.
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN id.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed as a table when vlan vlan-id is specified:
Field
Description
Number of (*, G)
entries
Displays the number of groups present in the MLD Table.
Number of (S, G)
entries
Displays the number of include and exclude mode sources
present in the MLD Table.
Group Address
The address of the multicast group.
Interface
Interface through which the multicast group is reachable.
Uptime
Time elapsed in seconds since the multicast group has been
known.
1092
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1093 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Expiry Time
Time left in seconds before the entry is removed from the
MLD membership table.
If vlan vlan-id is not specified, the following fields are displayed for each
multicast group and each interface:
Field
Description
Group Address
The address of the multicast group.
Interface
Interface through which the multicast group is reachable.
Uptime
Time elapsed in seconds since the multicast group has been
known.
Expiry Time
Time left in seconds before the entry is removed from the MLD
membership table of this interface.
Last Reporter
The IP Address of the source of the last membership report
received for this multicast group address on that interface.
Filter Mode
The filter mode of the multicast group on this interface. The
values it can take are INCLUDE and EXCLUDE.
Compatibility
Mode
The compatibility mode of the multicast group on this interface.
The values it can take are MLDv1 and MLDv2.
Version 1 Host
Timer
The time remaining until the router assumes there are no longer
any MLD version-1 Hosts on the specified interface.
The following table is displayed to indicate all the sources associated with this
group:
Field
Description
Source Address
The IP address of the source.
Uptime
Time elapsed in seconds since the source has been known.
Expiry Time
Time left in seconds before the entry is removed.
Example
console#show ipv6 mld groups ff1e::5
IPv6 Routing Commands
1093
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1094 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interface..................................... vlan 6
Group Address................................ FF1E::5
Last Reporter................... FE80::200:FF:FE00:22
Up Time (hh:mm:ss).......................... 00:03:43
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)......................... ----Filter
Mode..........................................Include
Version1 Host Timer............................ ----Group compat mode.............................. v2
Source Address
-----------------
ExpiryTime
-----------
4001::6
00:03:15
4001::7
00:03:15
4001::8
00:03:15
console#show ipv6 mld groups vlan 6
Group Address................................ FF1E::1
Interface..................................... vlan 6
Up Time (hh:mm:ss).......................... 00:04:23
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)........................ ------
Group Address................................ FF1E::2
Interface..................................... vlan 6
Up Time (hh:mm:ss).......................... 00:04:23
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)........................ ------
1094
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1095 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Group Address................................ FF1E::3
Interface..................................... vlan 6
Up Time (hh:mm:ss).......................... 00:04:23
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)........................ ------
Group Address................................ FF1E::4
Interface..................................... vlan 6
Up Time (hh:mm:ss).......................... 00:04:23
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)........................ ------
show ipv6 mld interface
The show ipv6 mld interface command is used to display MLD related
information for an interface.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld interface { vlan vlan-id | all }
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN id.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The following information is displayed for the specified interface:
Field
Description
Interface
The interface number in unit/slot/port format.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1095
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1096 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
MLD Global
Admin Mode
This field displays the configured global administrative status of
MLD.
MLD Interface
Admin Mode
This field displays the configured interface administrative status
of MLD.
MLD Operational The operational status of MLD on the interface.
Mode
MLD Version
This field indicates the version of MLD configured on the
interface.
Query Interval
This field indicates the configured query interval for the
interface.
Query Max
Response Time
This field indicates the configured maximum query response
time (in seconds) advertised in MLD queries on this interface.
Robustness
This field displays the configured value for the tuning for the
expected packet loss on a subnet attached to the interface.
Startup Query
Interval
This value indicates the configured interval between General
Queries sent by a Querier on startup.
Startup Query
Count
This value indicates the configured number of Queries sent out
on startup, separated by the Startup Query Interval.
Last Member
Query Interval
This value indicates the configured Maximum Response Time
inserted into Group-Specific Queries sent in response to Leave
Group messages.
Last Member
Query Count
This value indicates the configured number of Group-Specific
Queries sent before the router assumes that there are no local
members.
The following information is displayed if the operational mode of the MLD
interface is enabled:
Field
Description
Querier Status
This value indicates whether the interface is a MLD querier or
non-querier on the subnet with which it is associated.
Querier Address
The IP address of the MLD querier on the subnet the interface
with which it is associated.
Querier Up Time
Time elapsed in seconds since the querier state has been
updated.
1096
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1097 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Querier Expiry
Time
Time left in seconds before the Querier losses its title as querier.
Wrong Version
Queries
Indicates the number of queries received whose MLD version
does not match the MLD version of the interface.
Number of Joins
The number of times a group membership has been added on
this interface.
Number of Leaves
The number of times a group membership has been removed on
this interface.
Number of Groups The current number of membership entries for this interface.
Example
console#show ipv6 mld interface vlan 2
Interface................................... vlan 2
MLD Global Admin Mode....................... Enabled
MLD Interface Admin Mode.................... Disabled
MLD Operational Mode........................ Disabled
MLD Version................................. 2
Query Interval (secs)....................... 100
Query Max Response Time(milli-secs) ........ 1111
Robustness.................................. 2
Startup Query Interval (secs) .............. 31
Startup Query Count......................... 2
Last Member Query Interval (milli-secs)..... 1111
Last Member Query Count..................... 2
show ipv6 mld-proxy
Use the show ipv6 mld-proxy command to display a summary of the host
interface status parameters.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1097
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1098 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ipv6 mld-proxy
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
User Guidelines
The command displays the following parameters only when you enable MLD
Proxy:
Field
Description
Interface Index
The interface number of the MLD Proxy interface.
Admin Mode
Indicates whether MLD Proxy is enabled or disabled. This is a
configured value.
Operational Mode Indicates whether MLD Proxy is operationally enabled or
disabled. This is a status parameter.
Version
The present MLD host version that is operational on the proxy
interface.
Number of
Multicast Groups
The number of multicast groups that are associated with the
MLD-Proxy interface.
Unsolicited Report The time interval at which the MLD-Proxy interface sends
Interval
unsolicited group membership reports.
Querier IP Address The IP address of the Querier, if any, in the network attached to
on Proxy Interface the upstream interface (MLD-Proxy interface).
Older Version 1
Querier Timeout
The interval used to timeout the older version 1 queriers.
Proxy Start
Frequency
The number of times the MLD-Proxy has been stopped and
started.
Example
console#show ipv6 mld-proxy
1098
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1099 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interface Index.............................. vlan 10
Admin Mode................................... Enabled
Operational Mode............................. Enabled
Version...................................... 3
Num of Multicast Groups...................... 0
Unsolicited Report Interval.............. 1
Querier IP Address on Proxy Interface..... fe80::1:2:5
Older Version 1 Querier Timeout.......... 00:00:00
Proxy Start Frequency.....................1
show ipv6 mld-proxy groups
Use the show ipv6 mld-proxy groups command to display information about
multicast groups that the MLD Proxy reported.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld-proxy groups
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following parameters are displayed by this command:
Field
Description
Interface
The MLD Proxy interface.
Group Address The IP address of the multicast group.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1099
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1100 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Last Reporter
The IP address of the host that last sent a membership report for the
current group on the network attached to the MLD-Proxy interface
(upstream interface).
Up Time (in
secs)
The time elapsed in seconds since last created.
Member State Possible values are:
• Idle_Member—The interface has responded to the latest group
membership query for this group.
• Delay_Member—The interface is going to send a group
membership report to respond to a group membership query for
this group.
Filter Mode
Possible values are Include or Exclude.
Sources
The number of sources attached to the multicast group.
Example
console#show ipv6 mld-proxy groups
Interface................................ vlan 10
Group Address Last Reporter
Up Time
Member State
Filter Mode
Sources
------------- -------------- ---------- ----------------- ------------ -----FF1E::1
FE80::100:2.3
00:01:40
DELAY_MEMBER
Exclude
2
FF1E::2
FE80::100:2.3
00:02:40
DELAY_MEMBER
Include
1
FF1E::3
FE80::100:2.3
00:01:40
DELAY_MEMBER
Exclude
0
FF1E::4
FE80::100:2.3
00:02:44
DELAY_MEMBER
Include
4
show ipv6 mld-proxy groups detail
Use the show ipv6 mld-proxy groups detail command to display information
about multicast groups that MLD Proxy reported.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld-proxy groups detail
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
1100
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1101 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following parameters are displayed by this command:
Field
Description
Interface
The interface number of the MLD-Proxy.
Group Address
The IP address of the multicast group.
Last Reporter
The IP address of the host that last sent a membership report for
the current group on the network attached to the MLD Proxy
interface (upstream interface).
Up Time (in
secs)
The time elapsed in seconds since last created.
Member State
Possible values are:
• Idle_Member—The interface has responded to the latest group
membership query for this group.
• Delay_Member—The interface is going to send a group
membership report to respond to a group membership query for
this group.
Filter Mode
Possible values are Include or Exclude.
Sources
The number of sources attached to the multicast group.
Group Source
List
The list of IP addresses of the sources attached to the multicast
group.
Expiry Time
The time left for a source to get deleted.
Example
console#show ipv6 igmp-proxy groups
Interface................................ vlan 10
Group Address Last Reporter
Sources
Up Time
Member State
Filter Mode
------------- ---------------- --------- ----------------- ------------- -----FF1E::1
FE80::100:2.3
244
DELAY_MEMBER
Exclude
IPv6 Routing Commands
2
1101
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1102 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Group Source List
Expiry Time
------------------
---------------
2001::1
00:02:40
2001::2
--------
FF1E::2
FE80::100:2.3
Group Source List
243
DELAY_MEMBER
Include
1
Expiry Time
------------------
---------------
3001::1
00:03:32
3002::2
00:03:32
FF1E::3
FE80::100:2.3
328
DELAY_MEMBER
Exclude
0
FF1E::4
FE80::100:2.3
255
DELAY_MEMBER
Include
4
Group Source List
Expiry Time
------------------
---------------
4001::1
00:03:40
5002::2
00:03:40
4001::2
00:03:40
5002::2
00:03:40
show ipv6 mld-proxy interface
Use the show ipv6 mld-proxy interface command to display a detailed list of
the host interface status parameters.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld-proxy interface
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
The following parameters are displayed only when MLD Proxy is enabled:
1102
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1103 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Interface
The MLD Proxy interface.
The column headings of the table associated with the interface are as follows:
Parameter
Description
Ver
The MLD version.
Query Rcvd Number of MLD queries received.
Report Rcvd Number of MLD reports received.
Report Sent Number of MLD reports sent.
Leaves Rcvd Number of MLD leaves received. Valid for version 2 only.
Leaves Sent Number of MLD leaves sent on the Proxy interface. Valid for version 2
only.
Example
console#show ipv6 mld-proxy interface
Interface................................ vlan 10
Ver Query Rcvd Report Rcvd Report Sent Leave Rcvd Leave Sent
-----------------------------------------------------------------1
2
0
0
0
2
2
3
0
4
-----
-----
show ipv6 mld traffic
The show ipv6 mld traffic command is used to display MLD statistical
information for the router.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld traffic
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1103
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1104 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
Field
Description
Valid MLD Packets
Received
The number of valid MLD packets received by the
router.
Valid MLD Packets Sent
The number of valid MLD packets sent by the router.
Queries Received
The number of valid MLD queries received by the
router.
Queries Sent
The number of valid MLD queries sent by the router.
Reports Received
The number of valid MLD reports received by the
router.
Reports Sent
The number of valid MLD reports sent by the router.
Leaves Received
The number of valid MLD leaves received by the router.
Leaves Sent
The number of valid MLD leaves sent by the router.
Bad Checksum MLD
Packets
The number of bad checksum MLD packets received by
the router.
Malformed MLD Packets
The number of malformed MLD packets received by the
router.
Example
console#show ipv6 mld traffic
Valid MLD Packets Received..................... 52
Valid MLD Packets Sent......................... 7
Queries Received............................... 0
Queries Sent................................... 7
Reports Received............................... 52
1104
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1105 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Reports Sent................................... 0
Leaves Received................................ 0
Leaves Sent.................................... 0
show ipv6 neighbors
Use the show ipv6 neighbors command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about the IPv6 neighbors.
Syntax
show ipv6 neighbors
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information about the IPv6 neighbors.
console(config)#show ipv6 neighbors
Neighbor Last
IPv6 Address
MAC Address
isRtr
State
Updated
Interface
-------------------- ----------------- -----
------- ---------
IPv6 Routing Commands
1105
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1106 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ipv6 route
Use the show ipv6 route command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode
to display the IPv6 routing table. The output of the command also displays
the IPv6 address of the default gateway and the default route associated with
the gateway.
Syntax
show ipv6 route [ipv6-address | ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | protocol |
interface-type interface-number] [best]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ipv6-address
Specifies an IPv6 address for which the best-matching route
would be displayed.
protocol
Specifies the protocol that installed the routes. Is one of the
following keywords: connected, ospf, static.
ipv6-prefix/ prefixlength
Specifies an IPv6 network for which the matching route would
be displayed.
interface-type
interface-number
Valid IPv6 interface. Specifies that the routes with next-hops on
the selected interface be displayed. Supported interface types
are VLAN, Tunnel, and Loopback.
best
Specifies that only the best routes are displayed. If the
connected keyword is selected for protocol, the best option is
not available because there are no best or non-best connected
routes.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1106
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1107 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the IPv6 address of the default gateway and
the default route associated with the gateway.
console(config)#show ipv6 route
IPv6 Routing Table - 0 entries
Route Codes: C - connected, S - static
O - OSPF Intra, OI - OSPF Inter, OE1 - OSPF Ext 1, OE2
- OSPF Ext 2
ON1 - OSPF NSSA Ext Type 1, ON2 - OSPF NSSA Ext Type 2
Default gateway is 10.1.20.1
S
0.0.0.0/0 [254/0] via 10.1.20.1
C
10.1.20.0/24 [0/1] directly connected,
vlan2
C
20.1.20.0/24 [0/1] directly connected,
vlan4
show ipv6 route preferences
Use the show ipv6 route preferences command in Privileged EXEC mode to
show the preference value associated with the type of route. Lower numbers
have a greater preference.
Syntax
show ipv6 route preferences
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
IPv6 Routing Commands
1107
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1108 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows the preference value associated with the type of
route.
console#show ipv6 route preferences
Local.......................................... 0
Static......................................... 1
OSPF Intra-area routes......................... 110
OSPF Inter-area routes......................... 110
OSPF External routes........................... 110
show ipv6 route summary
Use the show ipv6 route summary command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display a summary of the routing table for all routes, including best and nonbest routes. Use best to display the count summary for only best routes.
Syntax
show ipv6 route summary [best]
•
best — Displays the count summary for only best routes.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1108
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1109 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays a summary of the routing table.
console#show ipv6 route summary
IPv6 Routing Table Summary - 0 entries
Connected Routes............................. 0
Static Routes................................ 0
OSPF Routes.................................. 0
Intra Area Routes............................ 0
Inter Area Routes............................ 0
External Type-1 Routes....................... 0
External Type-2 Routes....................... 0
Total routes................................. 0
Number of Prefixes:
show ipv6 traffic
Use the show ipv6 traffic command in User EXEC mode to show traffic and
statistics for IPv6 and ICMPv6.
Syntax
show ipv6 traffic [vlan vlan-id | tunnel tunnel-id | loopback loopback-id]
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID, shows information about traffic on a specific
interface or, without the optional parameter, shows information about
traffic on all interfaces.
•
tunnel — Tunnel identifier. (Range: 0-7)
•
loopback — Loopback identifier. (Range: 0-7)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
IPv6 Routing Commands
1109
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1110 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples show traffic and statistics for IPv6 and ICMPv6, first
for all interfaces and an individual VLAN.
console> show ipv6 traffic
IPv6 STATISTICS
Total Datagrams
Received........................................... 0
Received Datagrams Locally
Delivered.......................................... 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Header Errors.. 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To MTU............ 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To No Route....... 0
Received Datagrams With Unknown Protocol........... 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Invalid Address.0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Truncated Data. 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Other................. 0
Received Datagrams Reassembly Required............. 0
Datagrams Successfully Reassembled................. 0
Datagrams Failed To Reassemble..................... 0
Datagrams Forwarded................................ 0
Datagrams Locally Transmitted...................... 0
Datagrams Transmit Failed.......................... 0
Datagrams Successfully Fragmented.................. 0
1110
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1111 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Datagrams Failed To Fragment....................... 0
Fragments Created.................................. 0
Multicast Datagrams Received....................... 0
Multicast Datagrams Transmitted.................... 0
console> show ipv6 traffic vlan 11
Interface ........................................ 11
IPv6 STATISTICS
Total Datagrams Received........................... 0
Received Datagrams Locally Delivered............... 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Header Errors.. 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To MTU............ 0
Red Datagrams Discarded Due To No Route............ 0
Received Datagrams With Unknown Protocol........... 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Invalid Address 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Truncated Data. 0
Received Datagrams Discarded Other................. 0
Received Datagrams Reassembly Required............. 0
Datagrams Successfully Reassembled................. 0
Datagrams Failed To Reassemble..................... 0
Datagrams Forwarded................................ 0
Datagrams Locally Transmitted...................... 0
Datagrams Transmit Failed.......................... 0
Datagrams Successfully Fragmented.................. 0
Datagrams Failed To Fragment....................... 0
Fragments Created.................................. 0
IPv6 Routing Commands
1111
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1112 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Multicast Datagrams Received....................... 0
Multicast Datagrams Transmitted.................... 0
show ipv6 vlan
Use the show ipv6 vlan command in Privileged EXEC mode to display IPv6
VLAN routing interface addresses.
Syntax
show ipv6 vlan
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays IPv6 VLAN routing interface addresses.
console#show ipv6 vlan
MAC Address used by Routing VLANs: 00:02:BC:00:30:68
VLAN ID
IPv6 Address/Prefix Length
-------
---------------------------------------
1
traceroute ipv6
Use the traceroute ipv6 command in Privileged EXEC mode to discover the
routes that packets actually take when traveling to their destination through
the network on a hop-by-hop basis.
1112
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1113 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
traceroute ipv6 {ip-address | hostname} [port]
•
ipv6-address — Destination IPv6 address.
•
hostname — Hostname to ping (contact). (Range: 1–158 characters). The
command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes.
For example, console(config)#traceroute "host name"
•
port — UDP port used as the destination of packets sent as part of the
traceroute. This port should be an unused port on the destination system.
(Range: 0–65535)
Default Configuration
33434 is the default port value.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example discovers the packet routes on a hop-by-hop basis.
console#traceroute ipv6 2020:1::1
Tracing route over a maximum of 20 hops
1 * N * N * N
IPv6 Routing Commands
1113
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1114 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1114
IPv6 Routing Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1115 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
51
Loopback Interface Commands
PowerConnect provides for the creation, deletion, and management of
loopback interfaces. They are dynamic interfaces that are created and deleted
by user configuration.
A loopback interface is always expected to be up. As such, it provides a means
to configure a stable IP address on the device which may be referred to by
other switches in the network. This interface never transmits data but may
receive data. It is typically expected to be used by routing protocols.
Support for the internal loopback address, if present, is limited to testing the
IP stack.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
interface loopback
show interfaces loopback
interface loopback
Use the interface loopback command in Global Configuration mode to enter
the Interface Loopback configuration mode.
Syntax
interface loopback loopback-id
no interface loopback loopback-id
•
loopback-id — Loopback identifier. (Range: 0-7)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
Loopback Interface Commands
1115
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1116 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enters the Interface Loopback 1 configuration mode.
console(config)#interface loopback 1
console(config-if-loopback0)#ip address 192.168.22.1
255.255.255.255
console(config-if-loopback0)#exit
console(config)#ex
console#ping 192.168.22.1
Pinging 192.168.22.1 with 0 bytes of data:
Reply From 192.168.22.1: icmp_seq = 0. time <10 msec.
Reply From 192.168.22.1: icmp_seq = 1. time <10 msec.
Reply From 192.168.22.1: icmp_seq = 2. time <10 msec.
Reply From 192.168.22.1: icmp_seq = 3. time <10 msec.
show interfaces loopback
Use the show interfaces loopback command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display information about one or all configured loopback interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces loopback [loopback-id]
•
loopback-id — Loopback identifier. (Range: 0-7)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1116
Loopback Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1117 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples display information about configured loopback
interfaces.
console# show interfaces loopback
Loopback Id
Interface
IP Address
Received Packets
Sent Packets
-----------
---------
----------
----------------
------------
1
loopback
1 0.0.0.0
0
0
console# show interfaces loopback 1
Interface Link Status.......................... Up
IP Address..................................... 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
MTU size....................................... 1500 bytes
Loopback Interface Commands
1117
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1118 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1118
Loopback Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1119 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Multicast Commands
52
The PowerConnect Multicast component is best suited for video and audio
traffic requiring multicast packet control for optimal operation. The
Multicast component includes support for IGMPv2, IGMPv3, PIM-DM,
PIM-SM, and DVMRP. Communication from point to multipoint is called
Multicasting. The source host (point) transmits a message to a group of zero
or more hosts (multipoint) that are identified by a single IP destination
address. Although the task may be accomplished by sending unicast (pointto-point) messages to each of the destination hosts, multicasting is the more
desirable method for this type of transmission. A multicast message is
delivered to all members of its destination host group with the same bestefforts reliability as regular unicast IP messages. The message is not
guaranteed to arrive intact at all members of the destination group or in the
same order relative to other messages. The advantages of multicasting are
explained below:
•
Network Load Decrease: A number of applications are required to transmit
packets to hundreds of stations. The packets transmitted to these stations
share a group of links on their paths to their destinations. Multicast
transmission can conserve much needed network bandwidth, since
multicasting transmission requires the transmission of only a single packet
by the source and replicates this packet only if it is necessary (at forks of
the multicast delivery tree).
•
Discovery of resources: A number of applications require a host to find out
whether a certain type of service is available. Internet protocols such as
Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
protocol are among these applications. Using multicast messages and
sending the query to those hosts which are potentially capable of providing
this service speeds the gathering of this information considerably.
Although a group of hosts residing on the same network are the intended
target for the majority of multicast packets, this limitation is not
mandatory. Discovering the local domain-name server is the intended use
of multicast messages on remote networks when there is less than one
server per network.
Multicast Commands
1119
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1120 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
Applications used for datacasting: Since multimedia transmission has
become increasingly popular, multicast transmission use has increased.
Multicast transmission may be used to efficiently accommodate this type
of communication. For instance, the audio and video signals are captured,
compressed and transmitted to a group of receiving stations. Instead of
using a set of point-to-point connections between the participating nodes,
multicasting can be used for distribution of the multimedia data to the
receivers. The participating stations are free to join or leave an audio-cast
or a video-cast as needed. The variable membership maintenance is
managed efficiently through multicasting.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip mcast boundary ip pim dr-priority
ip pim sptthreshold
show ip mcast mroute
static
ip mroute
ip pim hellointerval
show bridge
multicast addresstable count
show ip pim bsr-router
ip multicast
ip pim join-prune- show ip multicast
interval
show ip pim interface
ip multicast ttlthreshold
ip pim registerrate-limit
show ip mcast
boundary
show ip pim neighbor
ip pim
ip pim rp-address
show ip multicast
interface
show ip pim rp hash
ip pim bsr-border
ip pim rpcandidate
show ip mcast
mroute
show ip pim rp
mapping
ip pim bsrcandidate
ip pim sparse
show ip mcast
mroute group
ip pim dense
ip pim ssm
show ip mcast
mroute source
1120
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1121 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip mcast boundary
Use the ip mcast boundary command in Interface Configuration mode to
add an administrative scope multicast boundary specified by groupipaddr and
mask for which this multicast administrative boundary is applicable.
groupipaddr is a group IP address and mask is a group IP mask.
Syntax
ip mcast boundary groupipaddr mask
no ip mcast boundary groupipaddr mask
•
groupipaddr — IP address of multicast group. Valid range is 239.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.255.
•
mask — IP mask of multicast group.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example adds an administrative scope multicast boundary.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip mcast boundary 239.5.5.5
255.255.255.255
ip mroute
Use the ip mroute command to create a static multicast route for a source
range. Use the no form of this command to delete a static multicast route.
Multicast Commands
1121
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1122 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip mroute source-address mask rpf-address preference
no ip mroute source-address mask
•
source-address — The IP address of the multicast data source.
•
mask — The IP subnet mask of the multicast data source.
•
rpf-address — The IP address of the next hop towards the source.
•
preference — The cost of the route (Range: 1 - 255).
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Usage Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#
console(config)#ip mroute 1.1.1.1 255.255.0.0
192.168.20.1 34
ip multicast
Use the ip multicast command in Global Configuration mode to set the
administrative mode of the IP multicast forwarder in the router to active. For
multicast routing to become operational, IGMP must be currently enabled.
An error message is displayed on the CLI if multicast routing is enabled while
IGMP is disabled. However, the IP multicast mode configuration is stored in
the multicast configuration file and is automatically enabled once IGMP is
enabled.
Syntax
ip multicast
1122
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1123 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no ip multicast
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables IP multicast on the router.
console#configure
console(config)#ip multicast
console(config)#no ip multicast
ip multicast ttl-threshold
Use the ip multicast ttl-threshold command in Interface Configuration
mode to apply a ttlvalue to a routing interface. ttlvalue is the TTL threshold
which is applied to the multicast Data packets forwarded through the
interface.
Syntax
ip multicast ttl-threshold ttlvalue
no ip multicast ttl-threshold
•
ttlvalue — Specifies TTL threshold. (Range: 0-255)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
Multicast Commands
1123
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1124 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example applies a ttlvalue of 5 to the VLAN 15 routing
interface.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip multicast ttl-threshold
5
ip pim
Use the ip pimdm command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode to
administratively configure PIM mode for IP multicast routing on a VLAN
interface. Use the no form of the command to disable PIM on the interface.
Syntax
ip pim
no ip pim
Default Configuration
PIM is not enabled on interfaces by default.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
PIM requires that routing, multicast, and IGMP be enabled.
Example
console(config)#ip routing
console(config)#ip igmp
console(config)#ip multicast
1124
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1125 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface vlan 10
console(if-vlan-10)#ip pim
ip pim bsr-border
The ip pim bsr-border command is used in Interface (VLAN) Configuration
mode to administratively disable bootstrap router (BSR) messages on the
interface. Use the no form of this command to return the configuration to the
default.
Syntax
ip pim bsr-border
no ip pim bsr-border
Default Configuration
BSR messages are enabled on the interface by default.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command only has an effect if sparse mode is enabled. Lower values are
preferred.
Example
console(if-vlan-10)#ip pim bsr-border
ip pim bsr-candidate
The ip pim bsr-candidate command is used to configure the router to
advertise itself as a bootstrap router (BSR). Use the no form of this command
to return to the default configuration. This command replaces the ip pimsm
bsr-candidate, ip pimsm cbsrhaskmasklength and ip pimsm cbsrpreference
commands.
Multicast Commands
1125
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1126 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip pim bsr-candidate vlan {vlan-id hash-mask-length bsr-priority [interval
interval]}
no ip pim bsr-candidate vlan {vlan-id}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A valid VLAN identifier with multicast routing enabled.
hash-mask-length
Length of the BSR hash to be ANDed with the multicast
bsr-priority
The advertised priority of the BSR candidate. Range 0-255.
Default 0.
interval
(Optional) Indicates the RP candidate advertisement interval.
The range is from 1 to 16383 seconds. The default value is 60
seconds.
group address. (Range 0–32 bits). Default 0.
Default Configuration
None - the router does not advertise itself as a BSR candidate.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
All multicast groups with the same hash value correspond to the same RP.
Lower priority values are preferred.
Example
console(config)#ip pim bsr-candidate vlan 10 16 0
interval 30
1126
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1127 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip pim dense
Use the ip pim dense command in Global Configuration mode to
administratively configure PIM dense mode for IP multicast routing. Use the
no form of this command to disable PIM dense mode. This command
replaces the ip pimsm command.
Syntax
ip pim dense
no ip pim dense
Default Configuration
PIM is not enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Only one of sparse or dense mode can be configured on a router.
Example
console(config)#ip pim dense
ip pim dr-priority
The ip pim dr-priority command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
to administratively configure the advertised designated router (DR) priority
value. Use the no form of this command to return the configuration to the
default.
Syntax
ip pim dr-priority priority
no ip pim dr-priority
•
priority — The administratively configured priority (Range:
0–2147483647).
Multicast Commands
1127
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1128 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default election priority is 1.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command only has an effect if sparse mode is enabled. Lower values are
preferred.
Example
console(if-vlan10)#ip pim dr-priority 32768
ip pim hello-interval
The ip pim hello-interval command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration
mode to administratively configure the frequency of PIM Hello messages on
the specified interface. Use the no form of this command to return the
configuration to the default. This command deprecates the ip pimsm queryinterval, the ip pimsm hello-interval and the ip pimdm hello-interval
commands.
Syntax
ip pim hello-interval interval
no ip pim hello-interval
•
interval — The number of seconds between successive hello transmissions.
Range: 0–18000 seconds. Default is 30.
Default Configuration
The default hello interval is 30 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
1128
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1129 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan10)#ip pim hello-interval 20
ip pim join-prune-interval
The ip pim join-prune-interval command in Interface (VLAN)
Configuration mode to administratively configure the frequency of
join/prune messages on the specified interface. Use the no form of this
command to return the configuration to the default. This command
deprecates the ip pimsm message-interval and ip pimsm join-prune-interval
commands.
Syntax
ip pim join-prune-interval interval
no ip pim join-prune-interval
•
interval — The number of seconds between successive join-prune
transmissions. Range: 0–18000 seconds. Default is 60.
Default Configuration
The default join/prune interval is 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command only has an effect if sparse mode is enabled.
Example
console(if-vlan10)#ip pim join-prune-interval 30
Multicast Commands
1129
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1130 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip pim register-rate-limit
Use the ip pim register-rate-limit command in Global Configuration mode
to set a limit on the maximum number of PIM register messages sent per
second for each (S,G) entry. Use the no form of this command to return the
limit to its default value (0). This command replaces the ip pimsm sptthreshold command.
Syntax
ip pim register-rate-limit 0-2000
no ip pim register-rate-limit
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
register-rate-limit
The PIM register message limit in kilobytes per second. Range
0-2000.
Default Configuration
The default threshold is 0. This indicates that the register limit is infinite.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#ip pim register-rate-limit 10
ip pim rp-address
Use the ip pim rp-address command in Global Configuration mode to define
the address of a PIM Rendezvous point (RP) for a specific multicast group
range. Use the no form of this command to remove a configured RP. This
command replaces the ip pimsm rp-address command.
1130
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1131 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip pim rp-address {rp-address group-address group-mask [ override ]}
no ip pim rp-address {rp-address group-address group-mask}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
rp-address
The valid IPv4 address for the rendezvous point.
group-address
A valid multicast group address to be sourced from the
rendezvous point.
group-mask
A mask indicating the range of multicast groups sourced from
the RP
override
A flag indicating that the static entry should override
dynamically learned entries for the configured multicast group.
Default Configuration
None —no static multicast groups are configured for an RP.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip pim rp-address 192.168.21.1
239.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 override
ip pim rp-candidate
Use the ip pim rp-candidate command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the router to advertise itself to the bootstrap router (BSR) router as
a PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP) for a specific multicast group range.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration. This
command replaces the ip pimsm rp-candidate command.
Multicast Commands
1131
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1132 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip pim rp-candidate vlan {vlanid group-address group-mask [interval
interval]}
no ip pim rp-candidate vlan vlanid group-address group-mask}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
vlan-id
A valid VLAN identifier with multicast routing enabled.
group-address
A valid multicast group address.
group-mask
A mask indicating the range of multicast groups for which the
router should advertise itself as an RP-candidate.
interval
(Optional) Indicates the RP candidate advertisement interval.
The range is from 1 to 16383 seconds. The default value is 60
seconds.
Default Configuration
None - the router does not advertise itself as an RP candidate by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip pimsm rp-candidate vlan 10
239.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 interval 30
ip pim sparse
Use the ip pim sparse command in Global Configuration mode to
administratively configure PIM sparse mode for IP multicast routing. Use the
no form of this command to disable PIM sparse mode. This command
replaces the ip pimsm command.
1132
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1133 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip pim sparse
no ip pim sparse
Default Configuration
PIM not enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Only one of sparse or dense mode can be configured on a router.
Example
console(config)#ip pim sparse
ip pim ssm
Use the ip pim ssm command in Global Configuration mode to
administratively configure PIM source specific multicast range of addresses
for IP multicast routing. Use the no form of this command to remove
configured ranges of addresses from the router.
Syntax
ip pim ssm {default | group-address group-mask }
no ip pim ssm {default | group-address group-mask }
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
default
Defines the SSM range access list to 232/8.
group-address
An IP multicast group address.
group-mask
An IPv4 mask in a.b.c.d form where a, b, c and d range from 0255.
Multicast Commands
1133
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1134 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There are no group addresses configured by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip pim ssm 239.0.10.0 255.255.255.0
ip pim spt-threshold
Use the ip pim spt-threshold command in Global Configuration mode to set
the multicast traffic threshold rate for the last-hop router to switch to the
shortest path on the router. Use the no form of this command to return the
threshold to its default value (0).
Syntax
ip pim spt-threshold spt-threshold
no ip pim spt-threshold
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
spt-threshold
The multicast traffic threshold rate in kilobytes per second.
Range: 0–2000 Kbps).
Default Configuration
The default threshold is 0. This indicates that the multicast router should
always switch to the multicast source tree.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
1134
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1135 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ip pim spt-threshold 100
show bridge multicast address-table count
Use the show bridge multicast address-table count command to view
statistical information about the entries in the multicast address table.
Syntax
show bridge multicast address-table count
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following command shows information about the entries in the multicast
address table.
console#show bridge multicast address-table count
Capacity: 1024
Used: 4
Static addresses: 2
Dynamic addresses: 1
Multicast Commands
1135
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1136 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Forbidden addresses: 1
The following table shows the information the command displays:
Field
Description
Capacity
The maximum number of addresses that can be stored in the
multicast address table.
Used
The total number of addresses in the multicast address table.
Static addresses The number of addresses in the multicast address table that are
static IP addresses.
Dynamic
addresses
The number of addresses in the multicast address table that were
learned dynamically.
Forbidden
addresses
The number of addresses in the multicast address table that are
forbidden IP addresses.
show ip multicast
Use the show ip multicast command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
system-wide multicast information.
Syntax
show ip multicast
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1136
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1137 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays system-wide multicast information.
console#show ip multicast
Admin Mode........................... Enabled
Protocol State....................... Non-Operational
Table Max Size .......................... 256
Protocol................................. PIMDM
Multicast Forwarding Cache Entry Count .. 0
show ip mcast boundary
Use the show ip mcast boundary command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display all the configured administrative scoped multicast boundaries.
Syntax
show ip mcast boundary {vlan vlan-id | all}
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays all the configured administrative scoped
multicast boundaries.
console#show ip mcast boundary all
MULTICAST BOUNDARY
Multicast Commands
1137
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1138 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interface
--------
Group
------
Ip Mask
---------------
show ip multicast interface
Use the show ip multicast interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the multicast information for the specified interface.
Syntax
show ip multicast interface [type number]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
type number
Interface type and number for which to display IP multicast
information. VLAN Vlan-ID is the only supported type and
number
Default Configuration
Show information for all multicast interfaces.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the multicast information for VLAN 15.
console#show ip mcast interface vlan 15
Interface
TTL
---------
-----
1138
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1139 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip mcast mroute
Use the show ip mcast mroute command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
a summary or all the details of the multicast table.
Syntax
show ip mcast mroute {detail | summary}
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays a summary or all the details of the multicast
table.
console#show ip mcast mroute summary
console#show ip mcast mroute detail
show ip mcast mroute group
Use the show ip mcast mroute group command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the multicast configuration settings such as flags, timer settings,
incoming and outgoing interfaces, RPF neighboring routers, and expiration
times of all the entries in the multicast mroute table containing the
groupipaddr value.
Syntax
show ip mcast mroute group groupipaddr {detail | summary}
•
groupipaddr — IP address of the multicast group.
Multicast Commands
1139
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1140 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the multicast configuration settings such as
flags, timer settings, incoming and outgoing interfaces.
console#show ip mcast mroute group 224.5.5.5 summary
console#show ip mcast mroute group 224.5.5.5 detail
show ip mcast mroute source
Use the show ip mcast mroute source command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the multicast configuration settings such as flags, timer settings,
incoming and outgoing interfaces, RPF neighboring routers, and expiration
times of all the entries in the multicast mroute table containing the
sourceipaddr or sourceipaddr | groupipaddr pair value(s).
Syntax
show ip mcast mroute source sourceipaddr {summary | groupipaddr}
•
sourceipaddr — IP address of source.
•
groupipaddr — IP address of multicast group.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
1140
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1141 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays multicast configuration settings.
console#show ip mcast mroute source 10.1.1.1 summary
console#show ip mcast mroute source 10.1.1.1 224.5.5.5
show ip mcast mroute static
Use the show ip mcast mroute static command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display all the static routes configured in the static mcast table if it is
specified or display the static route associated with the particular
sourceipaddr.
Syntax
show ip mcast mroute static [sourceipaddr ]
•
sourceipaddr — IP address of source.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the static routes configured in the static
mcast table.
console#show ip mcast mroute static
Multicast Commands
1141
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1142 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
MULTICAST STATIC ROUTES
Source IP
Source Mask
RPF Address
Preference
--------------- --------------- --------------- ---------1.1.1.1
255.255.255.0
2.2.2.2
23
show ip pim bsr-router
The show ip pim bsr-router command displays information about a bootstrap
router (BSR). This command deprecates the show ip pimsm componenttable
and show ip pimsm bsr commands.
Syntax
show ip pim bsr-router
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The following information is displayed:
Field
Description
BSR address
IP address of the BSR.
BSR Priority
The configured BSR priority.
BSR Hash Mask Length The configured hash mask length (32 bits maximum).
Next Bootstrap Message Time remaining (in hours, minutes, and seconds) until a
in
BSR message is sent.
Next Candidate RP
Advertisement
1142
Time remaining (in hours, minutes, and seconds) until the
next RP advertisement is sent.
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1143 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#show ip pim bsr-router candidate
BSR Address............................. 192.168.10.1
BSR Priority............................ 0
BSR Hash Mask Length.................... 30
C-BSR Advertisement Interval (secs)........60
Next Bootstrap message(hh:mm:ss).......... NA
If no configured/elected BSRs exist on the router, the following message is
displayed.
No BSR’s exist/learned on this router.
show ip pim interface
The show ip pim interface command displays the PIM interface status
parameters. If the interface number is not is specified, the command displays
the status parameters of all the PIM-enabled interfaces. This command
deprecates the show ip pimsm interface stats, show ip pimsm interface and
show ip pimdm interface commands.
Syntax
show ip pimsm interface [ vlan vlan-id ]
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID for which multicast routing has been enabled.
Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Mode
Active PIM Protocol
Interface
Interface number
Hello Interval
Hello interval value
Join-prune Interval
Join-prune interval value
DR Priority
DR Priority configured on this interface
Multicast Commands
1143
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1144 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
BSR Border
Whether or not this interface is configured as a BSR Border
Neighbor Count
Number of PIM Neighbors learnt on this interface
Designated-Router
IP address of the elected DR on the interface
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC and Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
(console) #show ip pim
Interface
VLAN0010
Mode
Sparse
Hello Interval (secs)
30
Join Prune Interval (secs) 60
DR Priority
1
BSR Border
Disabled
Neighbor Count1
Designated Router
Interface
1144
192.168.10.1
VLAN0001
Mode
Sparse
Hello Interval (secs)
30
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1145 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Join Prune Interval (secs) 60
DR Priority
1
BSR Border
Disabled
Neighbor Count
1
Designated Router
192.168.10.1
If none of the interfaces are enabled for PIM, the following message is
displayed:
None of the routing interfaces are enabled for PIM
show ip pim neighbor
Use the show ip pim neighbor command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
modes to display PIM neighbors discovered by PIMv2 Hello messages. If the
interface number is not specified, this command displays the neighbors
discovered on all the PIM-enabled interfaces.
Syntax
show ip pim neighbor [ vlan vlan-id ]
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID for which multicast routing has been enabled.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Neighbor Addr
IP address of the PIM neighbor
Multicast Commands
1145
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1146 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Interface
Interface number
Uptime
Time since the neighbor is learned
Expiry Time
Time remaining for the neighbor to expire
Example
(console)#show ip pim neighbor vlan 10
Neighbor Addr
Interface
Up Time
Expiry Time
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
--------------- ---------- --------- ----------192.168.10.2
VLAN0010
00:02:55
00:01:15
(FASTPATH) #show ip pim neighbor
Neighbor Addr
Interface
Uptime
Expiry Time
(HH:MM::SS) (HH:MM::SS)
--------------- ---------
----------- -----------
192.168.10.2
VLAN0001
00:02:55
00:01:15
192.168.20.2
VLAN0010
00:03:50
00:02:10
If no neighbors are learned on any of the interfaces, the following message is
displayed.
No neighbors are learned on any interface.
show ip pim rp hash
The show ip pim rp hash command displays the rendezvous point (RP)
selected for the specified group address.
Syntax
show ip pim rp hash group-address
1146
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1147 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
group-address — A valid multicast address supported by RP.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
Field
Description
RP Address
Address of the RP
Type
Origin from where this group mapping was learned.
Example
console#show ip pimsm rp hash 224.1.2.0
RP Address
192.168.10.1
Type
Static
If no RP Group mapping exists on the router, the following message is
displayed:
No RP-Group mappings exist/learned on this router.ny
interface.
show ip pim rp mapping
The show ip pim rp mapping command is used in User EXEC and Privileged
EXEC modes to display the mappings for the PIM group to the active
rendezvous points. This command deprecates the show ip pimsm rp
candidate, show ip pimsm staticrp, show ip pimsm rp mapping commands.
Syntax
show ip pim rp mapping [ rp-address ]
Multicast Commands
1147
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1148 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
rp-address — An RP address.
Default configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Field Descriptions
Field
Description
RP Address
Address of the RP
Group Address
Address of the multicast group.
Group Mask
Mask for the group address.
Origin
Origin from where this group mapping is learned.
Example
console#show ip pim rp mapping candidate
RP Address.................................... 192.168.10.1
Group Address.............................. 224.1.2.1
Group Mask................................. 255.255.0.0
Origin..................................... BSR
C-RP Advertisement Interval (secs)......... 60
Next Candidate RP Advertisement (hh:mm:ss). 00:00:15
If no RP Group mapping exists on the router, the following message is
displayed:
No RP-Group mappings exist on this router.
1148
Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1149 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IPv6 Multicast Commands
53
This chapter explains the following commands:
ipv6 pimsm (Global config)
ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate
ipv6 pimsm (VLAN Interface config)
ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold
ipv6 pimsm bsr-border
ipv6 pimsm ssm
ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate
show ipv6 pimsm
ipv6 pimsm dr-priority
show ipv6 pimsm bsr
ipv6 pimsm hello-interval
show ipv6 pimsm interface
ipv6 pimsm join-prune-interval
show ipv6 pimsm neighbor
ipv6 pimsm register-threshold
show ipv6 pimsm rphash
ipv6 pimsm rp-address
show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping
ipv6 pimsm (Global config)
Use the ipv6 pimsm command to administratively enable PIMSM for IPv6
multicast routing. Use the "no" form of this command to disable PIMSM for
IPv6.
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm
no ipv6 pimsm
Default Configuration
IPv6 PIMSM is disabled on the router by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
IPv6 Multicast Commands
1149
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1150 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pimsm
ipv6 pimsm (VLAN Interface config)
Use the ipv6 pimsm command in VLAN Interface configuration mode to
administratively enable PIM-SM multicast routing mode on a particular IPv6
router interface. Use the "no" form of this command to disable PIM SM on an
interface.
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm
no ipv6 pimsm
Default Configuration
PIM-SM is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 pimsm
ipv6 pimsm bsr-border
Use the ipv6 pimsm bsr-border command to prevent bootstrap router (BSR)
messages from being sent or received through an interface. Use the "no" form
of this command to disable the interface from being the BSR border.
1150
IPv6 Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1151 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm bsr-border
no ipv6 pimsm bsr-border
Default Configuration
BSR-border is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 pimsm bsr-border
ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate
Use the ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate command to configure the router to
announce its candidacy as a bootstrap router (BSR). Use the "no" form of this
command to stop the router from announcing its candidacy as a bootstrap
router.
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate vlan vlan-id hash-mask-len [ priority ]
no ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate vlan vlan-id
•
vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID value.
•
hash-mask-len —The length of a mask that is to be ANDed with the group
address before the hash function is called. All groups with the same seed
hash correspond to the same RP. For example, if this value is 24, only the
first 24 bits of the group addresses matter. This allows you to get one RP
for multiple groups. (Range 0–128 bits).
IPv6 Multicast Commands
1151
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1152 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
priority —The priority of the candidate BSR. The BSR with the higher
priority is preferred. If the priority values are the same, the router with the
higher IP address is the BSR. (Range: 0–255).
Default Configuration
The router will not announce its candidacy by default.
The default hash mask length is 126 bits.
The default priority is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate vlan 9 10 34
ipv6 pimsm dr-priority
Use the ipv6 pimsm dr-priority command to set the priority value for which a
router is elected as the designated router (DR). Use the "no" form of this
command to set the priority to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm dr-priority priority
no ipv6 pimsm dr-priority
•
priority —The election priority (Range: 0–2147483647).
Default Configuration
The default election priority is 1.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
1152
IPv6 Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1153 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 pimsm dr-priority
10
ipv6 pimsm hello-interval
Use the ipv6 pimsm hello-interval command to configure the PIM-SM Hello
Interval for the specified interface. Use the "no" form of this command to set
the hello interval to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm hello-interval interval
no ipv6 pimsm hello-interval
•
interval— The hello interval (Range: 0–65535 seconds).
Default Configuration
The default hello interval is 30 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 pimsm hello-interval 45
ipv6 pimsm join-prune-interval
Use the ipv6 pimsm join-prune-interval command to configure the interface
join/prune interval for the PIM-SM router. Use the "no" form of this
command to set the join/prune interval to the default.
IPv6 Multicast Commands
1153
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1154 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm join-prune-interval interval
no ipv6 pimsm join-prune-interval
•
interval— The join/prune interval (Range: 0–18000 seconds).
Default Configuration
The default join/prune interval is 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 pimsm join-pruneinterval 90
ipv6 pimsm register-threshold
Use the ipv6 pimsm register-threshold command to configure the Register
Threshold rate for the RP router to switch to the shortest path. Use the "no"
form of this command to set the register threshold rate to the default.
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm register-threshold threshold
no ipv6 pimsm register-threshold
•
threshold—The threshold rate (Range: 0–2000 Kbps).
Default Configuration
The default threshold rate is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
1154
IPv6 Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1155 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pimsm register-threshold 250
ipv6 pimsm rp-address
Use the ipv6 pimsm rp-address command to statically configure the RP
address for one or more multicast groups. The optional keyword override
indicates that if there is a conflict, the RP configured with this command
prevails over the RP learned by BSR. Use the "no" form of this command to
remove the RP address for one or more multicast groups.
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm rp-address rp-address group-address/prefixlength [ override ]
no ipv6 pimsm rp-address
•
rp-address — An RP address.
•
group-address —The group address to display.
•
prefixlength —This parameter specifies the prefix length of the IP address
for the media gateway. (Range: 1–32)
Default Configuration
There are no static RP addresses configured by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pimsm rp-address 2001::1
ff1e::/64
IPv6 Multicast Commands
1155
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1156 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate
Use the ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate command to configure the router to
advertise itself as a PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP) to the bootstrap
router (BSR). Use the "no" form of this command to disable the router from
advertising itself as a PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP) to the bootstrap
router (BSR).
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate vlan vlan-id group-address/prefixlength
no ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate vlan vlan-id
•
vlan-id— A valid VLAN ID value.
•
group-address—The group address to display.
•
prefixlength—This parameter specifies the prefix length of the IP address
for the media gateway. (Range: 1–32)
Default Configuration
The router does not advertise itself as a PIM candidate rendezvous point by
default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate vlan 6
ff1e::/64
ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold
Use the ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold command to configure the Data
Threshold rate for the last-hop router to switch to the shortest path. Use the
"no" form of this command to set the data threshold to the default.
1156
IPv6 Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1157 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold threshold
no ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold
•
threshold —The threshold rate (Range: 0–2000 Kbps).
Default Configuration
The default threshold rate is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold 1000
ipv6 pimsm ssm
Use the ipv6 pimsm ssm command to define the Source Specific Multicast
(SSM) range of multicast addresses.
Syntax
ipv6 pimsm ssm { default | group-address/prefixlength }
•
default—Defines the SSM range access list to 232/8.
•
group-address—Group IP address supported by RP.
•
prefixlength—This parameter specifies the prefix length of the IP address
for the media gateway. (Range: 1–32)
Default Configuration
There is no SSM range defined by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
IPv6 Multicast Commands
1157
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1158 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 pimsm ssm ff1e::/64
show ipv6 pimsm
Use the show ipv6 pimsm command to display global status of IPv6 PIMSM
and its IPv6 routing interfaces.
Syntax
show ipv6 pimsm
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ipv6 pimsm
Admin Mode.....................................
Enabled
Data Threshold Rate (Kbps)..................... 1000
Register Threshold Rate (Kbps)................. 250
SSM RANGE TABLE
1158
IPv6 Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1159 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Group Address/Prefix Length
---------------------------------------
FF1E::/64
PIM-SM INTERFACE STATUS
Interface
Interface-Mode
Operational-Status
---------
--------------
----------------
vlan 3
Enabled
Operational
vlan 6
Enabled
Operational
vlan 9
Enabled
Operational
show ipv6 pimsm bsr
Use the show ipv6 pimsm bsr command to display the bootstrap router (BSR)
information. The output includes elected BSR information and information
about the locally configured candidate rendezvous point (RP) advertisement.
Syntax
show ipv6 pimsm bsr
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ipv6 pimsm bsr
IPv6 Multicast Commands
1159
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1160 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
BSR Address....................................
3001::1
BSR Priority................................... 23
BSR Hash Mask Length...........................
10
Next bootstrap message(hh:mm:ss)...............
00:00:11
Next Candidate RP advertisement(hh:mm:ss)......
00:00:12
show ipv6 pimsm interface
Use the show ipv6 pimsm interface command to display interface config
parameters. If no interface is specified, all interfaces are displayed.
Syntax
show ipv6 pimsm interface [ vlan vlan-id ]
•
vlan-id— A valid VLAN ID value.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ipv6 pimsm interface vlan 6
Slot/Port...................................... vlan
6
1160
IPv6 Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1161 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IP Address.....................................
FE80::2FF:EDFF:FED0:2/128
Hello Interval (secs).......................... 30
Join Prune Interval (secs)..................... 60
Neighbor Count ................................ 0
Designated Router..............................
FE80::2FF:EDFF:FED0:2
DR Priority.................................... 1
BSR Border.....................................
Disabled
show ipv6 pimsm neighbor
Use the show ipv6 pimsm neighbor command to display IPv6 PIMSM
neighbors learned on the routing interfaces.
Syntax
show ipv6 pimsm neighbor [ all | interface vlan vlan-id ]
•
vlan-id —A valid VLAN ID value.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ipv6 pimsm neighbor all
Slot/Port...................................... vlan
6
IPv6 Multicast Commands
1161
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1162 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Neighbor Address...............................
FE80::200:FF:FE00:33
Up Time (hh:mm:ss).............................
00:00:12
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss).........................
00:01:34
DR Priority.................................... 0
show ipv6 pimsm rphash
Use the show ipv6 pimsm rphash command to display which rendezvous
point (RP) is being selected for a specified group.
Syntax
show ipv6 pimsm rphash group-address
group-address — Group IP address supported by RP.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ipv6 pimsm rphash ff1e::/64
RP
Type
Address
------------------------ -----
1162
IPv6 Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1163 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
3001::1
BSR
show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping
Use the show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping command to display all group-to-RP
mappings of which the router is aware (either configured or learned from the
bootstrap router (BSR). If no RP is specified, all active RPs are displayed
Syntax
show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping [ rp-address ]
•
rp-address — IP address of RP.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping
Group Address..................................
FF1E::/64
RP Address.....................................
2001::1
origin.........................................
Static
Group Address..................................
FF1E::/64
IPv6 Multicast Commands
1163
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1164 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
RP Address.....................................
3001::1
origin......................................... BSR
1164
IPv6 Multicast Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1165 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
OSPF Commands
54
OSPF is a link-state protocol. PowerConnect OSPF supports variable-length
subnet masks. PowerConnect OSPF only operates over VLAN interfaces.
OSPF operates within a hierarchy. The largest entity within the hierarchy is
the autonomous system (AS), a collection of networks under a common
administration sharing a common routing strategy. This is sometimes called a
routing domain. An AS can be divided into a number of areas or groups of
contiguous networks and attached hosts. Routers within the same area share
the same information, so they have identical topological databases.
Information is sent in the form of link-state advertisements (LSAs) to all
other routers within the same hierarchical area. An area's topology is not
visible to routers outside the area.
Two different types of OSPF routing occur as a result of area partitioning:
Intra-area and Inter-area. Intra-area routing occurs if a source and destination
are in the same area. Inter-area routing occurs when a source and destination
are in different areas. An OSPF backbone distributes information between
areas.
For IPv4 networks, PowerConnect routing supports OSPF version 2 in
accordance with RFC 2328. The PowerConnect routing also provides a
compatibility mode for the RFC 1583 OSPF specification, which allows
interoperability with OSPF version 2 routers using the older implementation.
The PowerConnect OSFPv2 implementation supports point-to-point
operation on Ethernet interfaces. The user can configure an OSPFv2
interface to run in broadcast or point-to-point mode. When there are only
two routers attached to the link, OSPFv2 point-to-point mode has the
advantage of not requiring designated router election or origination of a
network LSA for the LAN. This makes the protocol more efficient.
PowerConnect also supports OSPFv3 for use with IPv6 networks.
The PowerConnect routing OSPF NSSA feature supports RFC 3101, The
OSPF Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) Option.
OSPF Commands
1165
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1166 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Route Preferences
Normally, OSPF select routes in the following order:
•
Local
•
Static
•
Intra-area
•
Inter-area
•
External
•
RIP
PowerConnect OSPF allows the administrator to change the preference for
selecting intra, inter, and external routes according to the following rules:
a
External route preferences apply to all ospf external routes like type1,
type2, nssa-type1, nssa-type2 equally.
b
Multiple route types may be configured with equal preference values.
c
Configuring a route preference of 255 makes the route ineligible to be
selected as the best route to its destination. That is, a route type with
a preference of 255 shall never be used for forwarding.
The RIP preference is not used in IPv6 routing.
OSPF Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP)
A device running the IP routing protocol OSPF maintains multiple equal-cost
routes to all destinations. The multiple routes are of the same type (intraarea, inter-area, type 1 external or type 2 external), cost, and have the same
associated area. However, each route is defined by a separate advertising
router and next hop.
With ECMP, a device forwards traffic to a specified destination through
multiple paths thereby taking advantage of the bandwidth of both links.
ECMP routes are configured statically or learned dynamically as follows:
•
1166
Configured Statically: If an operator configures multiple static routes to
the exact same destination but with different next hops, those routes are
treated as a single route with two next hops.
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1167 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
Learned Dynamically: Routing protocols can learn ECMP routes. For
example, if OSPF is configured on both links connecting Router A to
Router B with interface addresses 10.1.1.2 and 10.1.2.2 respectively, and
Router B advertises its connection to 20.0.0.0/ 8, then Router A computes
an OSPF route to 20.0.0.0/8 with next hops of 10.1.1.2 and 10.1.2.2.
PowerConnect routing stores static and dynamic routes in a single combined
routing table. RTO accepts ECMP routes, but it is important to understand
that RTO does not combine routes from different sources to create ECMP
routes. Referring to the above configuration, assume OSPF is only configured
on the 10.1.1.2 Router B interface connecting Router A and Router B. Then
on Router A, OSPF reports to RTO a route to 20.0.0.0/8 with a next hop of
10.1.1.2. If the user configures a static route to 20.0.0.0/8 with a single next
hop of 10.1.2.2, RTO does NOT combine the OSPF and static route into a
single route to 20.0.0.0/8 with two next hops. All next hops within an ECMP
route must be provided by the same source.
On StrataXGS® IV platforms, the ECMP hashing support is extended to
Enhanced hashing mode, which provides improved load-balancing
performance. ECMP hashing on these platforms has the following features:
•
MODULO-N operation based on the number N of next hops in the route.
•
Packet attributes selection based on the packet type. For IP packets, the
following fields are used: Source IP address, Destination IP address,
TCP/UDP port, IPv4 Protocol, IPv6 next header.
Forwarding of OSPF Opaque LSAs Enabled by
Default
PowerConnect supports the flooding capability of opaque LSAs.
PowerConnect cannot originate or process opaque LSAs. In the past, the
capability to flood opaque LSAs was disabled by default.
Passive Interfaces
The passive interface feature is used to disable sending OSPF routing updates
on an interface. An OSPF adjacency will not be formed on such an interface.
On a passive interface, subnet prefixes for IP addresses configured on the
interface will continue to be advertised as stub networks.
OSPF Commands
1167
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1168 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Graceful Restart
The PowerConnect implementation of OSPFv2 supports graceful restart as
specified in RFC 3623. Graceful restart works in concert with PowerConnect
nonstop forwarding to enable the hardware to continue forwarding IPv4
packets using OSPFv2 routes while a backup unit takes over management
unit responsibility. When OSPF executes a graceful restart, it informs its
neighbors that the OSPF control plane is restarting, but that it will be back
shortly. Helpful neighbors continue to advertise to the rest of the network
that they have full adjacencies with the restarting router, avoiding
announcement of a topology change and everything that goes with that (i.e.,
flooding of LSAs, SPF runs). Helpful neighbors continue to forward packets
through the restarting router. The restarting router relearns the network
topology from its helpful neighbors.
PowerConnect implements both the restarting router and helpful neighbor
features described in RFC 3623.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
area default-cost
(Router OSPF)
bandwidth
ip ospf network
show ip ospf area
area nssa (Router
OSPF)
capability opaque
ip ospf priority
show ip ospf asbr
area nssa defaultinfo-originate
clear ip ospf
ip ospf retransmit- show ip ospf database
interval
area nssa noredistribute
compatible rfc1583 ip ospf transmitdelay
show ip ospf database
database-summary
area nssa nosummary
defaultinformation
originate
maximum-paths
show ip ospf interface
area nssa
translator-role
default-metric
network area
show ip ospf interface
brief
nsf
show ip ospf interface
stats
area nssa
distance ospf
translator-stab-intv
1168
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1169 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
area range (Router distribute-list out
OSPF)
nsf helper
show ip ospf neighbor
area stub
enable
nsf helper strictlsa-checking
show ip ospf range
area stub nosummary
exit-overflowinterval
nsf restart-interval show ip ospf statistics
area virtual-link
external-lsdb-limit passive-interface
default
show ip ospf stub table
area virtual-link
authentication
ip ospf area
passive-interface
show ip ospf virtuallink
area virtual-link
dead-interval
ip ospf
authentication
redistribute
show ip ospf virtuallinks brief
area virtual-link
hello-interval
ip ospf cost
router-id
timers spf
area virtual-link
ip ospf deadretransmit-interval interval
router ospf
area virtual-link
transmit-delay
ip ospf hellointerval
show ip ospf
auto-cost
ip ospf mtu-ignore show ip ospf abr
area default-cost (Router OSPF)
Use the area default-cost command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
configure the advertised default cost for the stub area. Use the no form of the
command to return the cost to the default value.
Syntax
area area-id default-cost integer
no area area-id default-cost
• area-id — Identifies the OSPF stub area to configure. (Range: IP address
or decimal from 0-4294967295)
•
integer — The default cost for the stub area. (Range: 1–16777215)
OSPF Commands
1169
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1170 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
10 is the default configuration for integer.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example identifies a stub area of 10 and default cost of 100.
console(config)#router ospf
console(config-router)#area 10 default-cost 100
area nssa (Router OSPF)
Use the area nssa command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
configure the specified area ID to function as an NSSA. If the area has not
been previously created, this command creates the area and then applies the
NSSA distinction. If the area already exists, the NSSA distinction is added or
modified. Use the no form of the command to remove the NSSA distinction
from the specified area ID.
Syntax
area area-id nssa [no-redistribution] [default-information-originate [metric
metric-value] [metric-type metric-type-value]] [no-summary] [translator-
role role] [translator-stab-intv interval]
no area area-id nssa [no-redistribution] [default-information-originate] [nosummary] [translator-role] [translator-stab-intv]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
area-id
Identifies the OSPF stub area to configure. (Range: IP address
or decimal from 0–4294967295)
1170
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1171 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
metric-value
Specifies the metric of the default route advertised to the
NSSA. (Range: 1–16777214)
metric-type-value
The metric type can be one of the following :
1 A metric type of nssa-external 1
2 A metric type of nssa-external 2 (default)
role
The translator role where role is one of the following :
• always - The router assumes the role of the translator when it
becomes a border router.
• candidate - The router to participate in the translator election
process when it attains border router status.
interval
The period of time that an elected translator continues to
perform its duties after it determines that its translator status
has been deposed by another router. (Range: 0–3600)
Default Configuration
If no metric is defined, 10 is the default configuration.
The default role is candidate. The default metric is type 2.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
Specifying a metric with no metric type is equivalent to specifying a metric
with a metric type of 2.
Example
The following example configures not-so-stubby-area 10 as an NSSA.
console(config)#router ospf
console(config-router)#area 10 nssa
The following example configures the metric value and type for the default
route advertised into the NSSA and configures the NSSA so that summary
LSAs are not advertised into the NSSA.
OSPF Commands
1171
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1172 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-router)#area 20 nssa default-infooriginate metric 250 metric-type 2 no-summary
area nssa default-info-originate
Use the area nssa default-info-originate command in Router OSPF
Configuration mode to configure the metric value and type for the default
route advertised into the NSSA. The metric type can be comparable (nssaexternal 1) or non-comparable (nssa-external 2). Use the no form of the
command to return the metric value and type to the default value.
Syntax
area area-id nssa default-info-originate [integer] [ comparable | noncomparable ]
no area area-id nssa default-info-originate
•
area-id — Identifies the OSPF NSSA to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
•
integer — Specifies the metric of the default route advertised to the
NSSA. (Range: 1–16777214)
•
comparable — A metric type of nssa-external 1
•
non-comparable — A metric type of nssa-external 2
Default Configuration
If no metric is defined, 10 is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the metric value and type for the default
route advertised into the NSSA.
1172
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1173 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-router)#area 20 nssa default-infooriginate 250 non-comparable
area nssa no-redistribute
Use the area nssa no-redistribute command in Router OSPF Configuration
mode to configure the NSSA Area Border router (ABR) so that learned
external routes are not redistributed to the NSSA.
Syntax
area area-id nssa no-redistribute
no area area-id nssa no-redistribute
• area-id — Identifies the OSPF NSSA to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the NSSA ABR.
console(config-router)#area 20 nssa no-redistribute
area nssa no-summary
Use the area nssa no-summary command in Router OSPF Configuration
mode to configure the NSSA so that summary LSAs are not advertised into
the NSSA.
OSPF Commands
1173
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1174 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
area area-id nssa no-summary
no area area-id nssa no-summary
• area-id — Identifies the OSPF NSSA to configure. (Range: 0–4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the NSSA so that summary LSAs are not
advertised into the NSSA.
console(config-router)#area 20 nssa no-summary
area nssa translator-role
Use the area nssa translator-role command in Router OSPF Configuration
mode to configure the translator role of the NSSA.
Syntax
area area-id nssa translator-role {always | candidate}
no area area-id nssa translator-role
• area-id — Identifies the OSPF NSSA to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
•
always — The router assumes the role of the translator when it becomes a
border router.
•
candidate — The router to participate in the translator election process
when it attains border router status.
1174
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1175 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default role is candidate.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the translator role of the NSSA.
console(config-router)#area 20 nssa translator-role
always
area nssa translator-stab-intv
Use the area nssa translator-stab-intv command in Router OSPF
Configuration mode to configure the translator stability interval of the NSSA.
Syntax
area area-id nssa translator-stab-intv integer
no area area-id nssa translator-stab-intv
• area-id — Identifies the OSPF NSSA to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
•
integer — The period of time that an elected translator continues to
perform its duties after it determines that its translator status has been
deposed by another router. (Range: 0–3600)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
OSPF Commands
1175
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1176 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the translator stability interval of the area
20 NSSA.
console(config-router)#area 20 nssa translator-stabintv 2000
area range (Router OSPF)
Use the area range command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
configure a summary prefix for routes learned in a given area. There are two
types of area ranges. An area range can be configured to summarize intra-area
routes. An ABR advertises the range rather than the specific intra-area route
as a type 3 summary LSA. Also, an area range can be configured at the edge of
an NSSA to summarize external routes reachable within the NSSA. The range
is advertised as a type 5 external LSA.
Syntax
area area-id range ip-address subnet-mask {summarylink | nssaexternallink}
[advertise | not-advertise]
no area area-id range ip-address subnet-mask {summarylink |
nssaexternallink}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
area-id
Identifies the OSPF NSSA to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
ip-address
IP address.
subnet-mask
Subnet mask associated with IP address.
summarylink
Specifies a summary link LSDB type.
nssaexternallink
Specifies an NSSA external link LSDB type.
advertise
Advertisement of the area range.
1176
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1177 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
not-advertise
Suppresses advertisement of the area range.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
Use this command with Area Border Routers (ABRs).
Example
The following example defines an area range for the area 20.
console(config-router)#area 20 range 192.168.6.0
255.255.255.0 summarylink advertise
area stub
Use the area stub command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to create a
stub area for the specified area ID. A stub area is characterized by the fact
that AS External LSAs are not propagated into the area. Removing AS
External LSAs and Summary LSAs can significantly reduce the link state
database of routers within the stub area. Use the no form of the command to
remove the stub area.
Syntax
area area-id stub
no area area-id stub
• area-id — Identifies the area identifier of the OSPF stub. (Range: IP
address or decimal from 0–4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
OSPF Commands
1177
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1178 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples define area 3 for the stub and then removes the stub
area.
console(config-router)#area 3 stub
console(config-router)#no area 3 stub
area stub no-summary
Use the area stub no-summary command in Router OSPF Configuration
mode to prevent Summary LSAs from being advertised into the NSSA. Use
the no form of the command to return the Summary LSA mode to the
default value.
Syntax
area area-id stub no-summary
no area area-id stub no-summary
• area-id — Identifies the OSPF area to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1178
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1179 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example prevents the Summary LSA from being advertised
into the area 3 NSSA.
console(config-router)#area 3 stub no-summary
area virtual-link
Use the area virtual-link command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
create the OSPF virtual interface for the specified area-id and neighbor
router. To remove the link, use the no form of the command. Use the optional
parameters to configure authentication, dead-interval, hello-interval,
retransmit-interval and transmit-delay. If the area has not been previously
created, it is created by this command. If the area already exists, the virtuallink information is added or modified.
Syntax
area area-id virtual-link router-id [authentication [message-digest | null]]
[hello-interval seconds] [retransmit-interval seconds] [transmit-delay
seconds] [dead-interval seconds] [[authentication-key key] | [messagedigest-key key-id md5 key]]
no area area-id virtual-link router-id [authentication [message-digest | null]]
[hello-interval] [retransmit-interval] [transmit-delay] [dead-interval]
[[authentication-key] | [message-digest-key]]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
area-id
Identifies the OSPF stub area to configure. (Range: IP address
or decimal from 0-4294967295)
router-id
Valid IP address.
authentication
Specifies authentication type.
message-digest
Specifies that message-digest authentication is used.
null
No authentication is used. Overrides password or messagedigest authentication if configured for the area.
OSPF Commands
1179
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1180 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
hello-interval
seconds
Number of seconds to wait before sending hello packets to the
OSPF virtual interface. (Range: 1–65535)
dead-interval
seconds
Number of seconds to wait before the OSPF virtual interface on
the virtual interface is assumed to be dead. (Range: 1–65535)
retransmit-interval
seconds
The number of seconds to wait between retransmitting LSAs if
no acknowledgement is received. (Range: 0–3600)
transmit-delay
seconds
Number of seconds to increment the age of the LSA before
sending, based on the estimated time it takes to transmit from
the interface. (Range: 0–3600)
md5
Use MD5 Encryption for an OSPF Virtual Link.
key
Authentication key for the specified interface. (Range: 8 bytes
or less if the authentication type is simple and 16 bytes or less if
the type is encrypt.)
key-id
Authentication key identifier for the authentication type
encrypt. (Range: 0–255)
Default Configuration
Parameter
Default
area-id
No area ID is predefined.
router-id
No router ID is predefined.
hello-interval
seconds
10 seconds
retransmit-interval
seconds
5 seconds
transmit-delay
seconds
1 second
dead-interval
seconds
40 seconds
authentication-key
key
No key is predefined.
message-digest-key
key-id md5 key
No key is predefined.
1180
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1181 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
Unauthenticated interfaces cannot be configured with an authentication key.
Use the area virtual-link authentication command on page 1181 to enable
configuration of an authentication key.
Example
The following example establishes a virtual link with a 40-second transmitdelay interval and default values for all other optional parameters:
router ospf
network 10.50.50.0 0.0.0.255 area 10
area 10 virtual-link 192.168.2.2 transmit-delay 40
The following example establishes a virtual link with MD5 authentication:
router ospf
network 10.50.50.0 0.0.0.255 area 10
area 10.0.0.0 virtual-link 10.3.4.5 message-digest-key 100
md5 test123
area virtual-link authentication
Use the area virtual-link authentication command in Router OSPF
Configuration mode to configure the authentication type and key for the
OSPF virtual interface identified by the area ID and neighbor ID. Use the no
form of the command to return the authentication type to the default value.
Syntax
area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id authentication [none | simple key |
encrypt key key-id]
no area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id authentication
•
area-id — Identifies the OSPF area to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
OSPF Commands
1181
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1182 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
neighbor-id — Identifies the Router identifier of the neighbor.
•
encrypt — Use MD5 Encryption for an OSPF Virtual Link.
•
key — Authentication key for the specified interface. (Range: 8 bytes or
less if the authentication type is simple and 16 bytes or less if the type is
encrypt.)
•
key-id — Authentication key identifier for the authentication type
encrypt. (Range: 0–255)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
Unauthenticated interfaces cannot be configured with an authentication key.
If no parameters are specified after the authentication keyword, then plaintext password authentication is used.
Example
The following example configures the authentication type and key for the
area 10 OSPF virtual interface and neighbor ID.
console(config-router)#area 10 virtual-link
192.168.2.7 authentication
console(config-router)#area 10 virtual-link
192.168.2.7 authentication encrypt test123 1001010
area virtual-link dead-interval
Use the area virtual-link dead-interval command in Router OSPF
Configuration mode to configure the dead interval for the OSPF virtual
interface on the virtual interface identified by area-id and neighbor router.
Use the no form of the command to return the dead interval to the default
value.
1182
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1183 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id dead-interval seconds
no area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id dead-interval
• area-id — Identifies the OSPF area to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
•
neighbor-id — Identifies the Router ID of the neighbor.
•
seconds — Number of seconds to wait before the OSPF virtual interface
on the virtual interface is assumed to be dead. (Range: 1–2147483647)
Default Configuration
40 seconds is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the dead interval for the area 10 OSPF
virtual interface on the virtual interface and neighbor router.
console(config-router)#area 10 virtual-link
192.168.2.2 dead-interval 655555
area virtual-link hello-interval
Use the area virtual-link hello-interval command in Router OSPF
Configuration mode to configure the hello interval for the OSPF virtual
interface on the virtual interface identified by the area ID and neighbor ID.
Use the no form of the command to return the hello interval to the default
value.
Syntax
area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id hello-interval seconds
OSPF Commands
1183
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1184 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id hello-interval
•
area-id — Identifies the OSPF area to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
•
neighbor-id — Identifies the Router ID of the neighbor.
•
seconds — Number of seconds to wait before sending hello packets to the
OSPF virtual interface. (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
10 seconds is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a 50-second wait interval.
console(config-router)#area 10 virtual-link
192.168.2.2 hello-interval 50
area virtual-link retransmit-interval
Use the area virtual-link retransmit-interval command in Router OSPF
Configuration mode to configure the retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual
interface on the virtual interface identified by the area ID and neighbor ID.
Use the no form of the command to return the retransmit interval to the
default value.
Syntax
area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id retransmit-interval seconds
no area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id retransmit-interval
•
1184
area-id — Identifies the OSPF area to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1185 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
neighbor-id — Identifies the Router ID of the neighbor.
•
seconds — The number of seconds to wait between retransmitting LSAs if
no acknowledgement is received. (Range: 0–3600)
Default Configuration
The default configuration is 5 seconds.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a 500-second retransmit wait interval.
console(config-router)#area 10 virtual-link
192.168.2.2 retransmit-interval 500
area virtual-link transmit-delay
Use the area virtual-link transmit-delay command in Router OSPF
Configuration mode to configure the transmit delay for the OSPF virtual
interface identified by the area ID and neighbor ID. Use the no form of the
command to return the transmit delay to the default value.
Syntax
area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id transmit-delay seconds
no area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id transmit-delay
• area-id — Identifies the OSPF area to configure. (Range: IP address or
decimal from 0–4294967295)
•
neighbor-id — Identifies the Router ID of the neighbor.
•
seconds — Number of seconds to increment the age of the LSA before
sending, based on the estimated time it takes to transmit from the
interface. (Range: 0–3600)
OSPF Commands
1185
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1186 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
1 second is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a 40-second transmit-delay interval.
console(config-router)#area 10 virtual-link
192.168.2.2 transmit-delay 40
auto-cost
By default, OSPF computes the link cost of each interface from the interface
bandwidth. The link cost is computed as the ratio of a “reference bandwidth”
to the interface bandwidth (ref_bw / interface bandwidth), where interface
bandwidth is defined by the “bandwidth” command. Because the default
reference bandwidth is 100 Mbps, OSPF uses the same default link cost for all
interfaces whose bandwidth is 100 Mbps or greater. To change the reference
bandwidth, use the auto-cost command, specifying the reference bandwidth
in megabits per second. The different reference bandwidth can be
independently configured for OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Syntax
auto-cost reference-bandwidth ref_bw
•
ref_bw — The reference bandwidth in Mbps (Range: 1–4294967).
Default Configuration
The default reference bandwidth is 100 Mbps.
Command Mode
OSPFv2 or OSPFv3 Router Configuration mode.
1186
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1187 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures a reference bandwidth of 500 Mbps.
console(config-router)#auto-cost reference-bandwidth 500
bandwidth
By default, OSPF computes the link cost of an interface as the ratio of the
reference bandwidth to the interface bandwidth. Reference bandwidth is
specified with the auto-cost command. For the purpose of the OSPF link cost
calculation, the bandwidth command specifies the interface bandwidth. The
bandwidth is specified in kilobits per second. If no bandwidth is configured,
the bandwidth defaults to the actual interface bandwidth for port-based
routing interfaces and to 10 Mbps for VLAN routing interfaces. This
command does not affect the actual speed of an interface.
Syntax
bandwidth bw
•
bw — Interface bandwidth in Kbps (Range: 1–10000000).
Default Configuration
The default reference bandwidth is 10 Mbps
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example configures the interface bandwidth to 500000 Kbps.
console(config-if-vlan1)#bandwidth 500000
OSPF Commands
1187
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1188 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
capability opaque
Use the capability opaque command to enable Opaque Capability on the
router. Use the “no” form of this command to disable Opaque Capability.
Syntax
capability opaque
no capability opaque
Default Configuration
Opaque Capability is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Router Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-router)#capability opaque
clear ip ospf
Use the clear ip ospf command to reset specific OSPF states. If no
parameters are specified, OSPF is disabled and then re-enabled.
Syntax
clear ip ospf [ { configuration | redistribution | counters | neighbor [
interface vlan vlan id [ neighbor id ] ] } ]
•
configuration — Reset the OSPF configuration to factory defaults.
•
redistribution — Flush all self-originated external LSAs. Reapply the
redistribution configuration and re originate prefixes as necessary.
•
counters — Reset global and interface statistics.
1188
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1189 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
neighbor — Drop the adjacency with all OSPF neighbors. On each
neighbor's interface, send a one-way hello. Adjacencies may then be
reestablished.
•
interface vlan vlan-id — Drop adjacency with all neighbors on a specific
interface.
•
neighbor-id — Drop adjacency with a specific router ID on a specific
interface.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example shows the options for the clear ip ospf command.
console#clear ip ospf ?
Press enter to execute the command.
configuration
Restore OSPF configuration to defaults
counters
Clear OSPF counters
neighbor
Bounce all OSPF neighbors
redistribution Flush and reoriginate external LSAs
compatible rfc1583
Use the compatible rfc1583 command in Router OSPF Configuration mode
to enable OSPF 1583 compatibility. Use the no form of the command to
disable it.
OSPF Commands
1189
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1190 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
compatible rfc1583
no compatible rfc1583
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
Compatible with RFC 1583.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
If all OSPF routers in the routing domain are capable of operating according
to RFC 2328, OSPF 1583 compatibility mode should be disabled.
Example
The following example enables 1583 compatibility.
console(config-router)#compatible rfc1583
default-information originate
Use the default-information originate command in Router OSPF
Configuration mode to control the advertisement of default routes. Use the
no form of the command to return the default route advertisement settings
to the default value.
Syntax
default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [metric-type
type-value]
no default-information originate [metric] [metric-type]
1190
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1191 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
always
Always advertise default routes.
metric-value
The metric (or preference) value of the default route. (Range:
1–16777214)
type-value
1 External type-1 route.
2 External type-2 route.
Default Configuration
The default metric is none and the default type is 2.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example always advertises default routes.
console(config-router)#default-information originate
always metric 100 metric-type 1
default-metric
Use the default-metric command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to set
a default for the metric of distributed routes. Use the no form of the
command to remove the metric from the distributed routes. If the area has
not been previously created, it is created by this command. If the area already
exists, the default-metric information is added or modified.
Syntax
default-metric metric-value
no default-metric
OSPF Commands
1191
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1192 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
metric-value — The metric (or preference) value of the default route.
(Range: 1–16777214)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets a value of 50 for the default metric.
console(config-router)#default-metric 50
distance ospf
The distance ospf command sets the preference values of OSPF route types
in the router. Lower route preference values are preferred when determining
the best route. The type of OSPF route can be intra, inter, external. All the
external type routes are given the same preference value. Use the no form of
this command to reset the preference values to the default.
Syntax
distance ospf {[intra-area dist1] [inter-area dist2] [external dist3]}
no distance ospf { intra-area | inter-area | external }
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
intra-area dist1
Used to select the best path within an area when there are two
or more routes to the same destination from two different
routing protocols (Range: 1–255).
1192
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1193 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
inter-area dist2
Used to select the best path from one area to another area when
there are two or more routes to the same destination from two
different routing protocols (Range: 1–255).
external dist3
Used to select the best path for routes from other routing
domains, learned by redistribution when there are two or more
routes to the same destination from two different routing
protocols (Range: 1–255).
Default Configuration
The default preference value is 110 for dist1, dist2 and dist3.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following examples set route preference values of OSPF in the router.
console(config-router)#distance ospf intra 4
console(config-router)#distance ospf type1 19
distribute-list out
Use the distribute-list out command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
specify the access list to filter routes received from the source protocol. Use
the no form of the command to remove the specified source protocol from
the access list.
Syntax
distribute-list name out {rip | static \ connected}
no distribute-list name out {rip | static \ connected}
OSPF Commands
1193
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1194 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
name
The name used to identify an existing ACL. The range is 1–31
characters.
rip
Apply the specified access list when RIP is the source protocol.
static
Apply the specified access list when packets come through the
static route.
connected
Apply the specified access list when packets come from a
directly connected route.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example specifies the access list to filter routes received from
the RIP source protocol.
console(config-router)#distribute-list ACL40 out rip
enable
Use the enable command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to reset the
default administrative mode of OSPF in the router (active). Use the no form
of the command to disable the administrative mode for OSPF.
Syntax
enable
1194
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1195 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no enable
Default Configuration
Enabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables OSPF router mode.
console(config-router)#enable
exit-overflow-interval
Use the exit-overflow-interval command in Router OSPF Configuration
mode to configure the exit overflow interval for OSPF. When a router leaves
the overflow state it can originate non-default AS-external-LSAs. When set to
0, the router will not leave Overflow State until restarted. Use the no form of
the command to return the interval to the default value.
Syntax
exit-overflow-interval seconds
no exit-overflow-interval
•
seconds — Number of seconds after entering overflow state that a router
will wait before attempting to leave the overflow state. (Range:
0–2147483647)
Default Configuration
0 seconds is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
OSPF Commands
1195
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1196 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the exit overflow interval for OSPF at 10 seconds.
console(config-router)#exit-overflow-interval 10
external-lsdb-limit
Use the external-lsdb-limit command in Router OSPF Configuration mode
to configure the external LSDB limit for OSPF. If the value is -1, then there is
no limit. When the number of non-default AS-external-LSAs in a router's
link-state database reaches the external LSDB limit, the router enters
overflow state. The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit
non-default AS-external-LSAs in it database. Use the no form of the
command to return the limit to the default value.
Syntax
external-lsdb-limit integer
no external-lsdb-limit
•
integer — Maximum number of non-default AS-external-LSAs allowed in
the router's link-state database. (Range: –1 to 2147483647)
Default Configuration
-1 is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
The external LSDB limit MUST be set identically in all routers attached to
the OSPF backbone and/or any regular OSPF area.
1196
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1197 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example configures the external LSDB limit for OSPF with the
number of non-default AS-external-LSAs set at 20.
console(config-router)#external-lsdb-limit 20
ip ospf area
The ip ospf area command enables OSPFv2 and sets the area ID of an
interface. This command supersedes the effects of network area command. It
can also configure the advertisability of the secondary addresses on this
interface into OSPFv2 domain. Use the “no” form of this command to
disable OSPFv2 on an interface.
Syntax
ip ospf area area-id [secondaries none]
no ip ospf area [secondaries none]
•
area-id — The ID of the area (Range: IP address or decimal from 0
–4294967295).
Default Configuration
OSPFv2 is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan1)#ip ospf area 192.168.1.10
console(config-if-vlan1)#ip ospf area 3232235786
OSPF Commands
1197
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1198 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip ospf authentication
Use the ip ospf authentication command in the Interface Configuration
mode to set the OSPF Authentication Type and Key for the specified
interface. Use the no form of the command to return the authentication type
to the default value.
Syntax
ip ospf authentication {none | {simple key} | {encrypt key key-id}}
no ip ospf authentication
•
encrypt — MD5 encrypted authentication key.
•
key — Authentication key for the specified interface. (Range: 8 bytes or
less if the authentication type is simple and 16 bytes or less if the type is
encrypt.)
•
key-id — Authentication key identifier for the authentication type
encrypt. (Range: 0–25)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
Unauthenticated interfaces do not need an authentication key or
authentication key ID.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF Authentication Type and Key for VLAN
15.
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf authentication
encrypt test123 100
1198
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1199 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip ospf cost
Use the ip ospf cost command in Interface Configuration mode to configure
the cost on an OSPF interface. Use the no form of the command to return
the cost to the default value.
Syntax
ip ospf cost interface-cost
no ip ospf cost
•
interface-cost — Specifies the cost (link-state metric) of the OSPF
interface. (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
10 is the default link-state metric configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the cost on the OSPF interface at 5.
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf cost 5
ip ospf dead-interval
Use the ip ospf dead-interval command in Interface Configuration to set the
OSPF dead interval for the specified interface. Use the no form of the
command to return the interval to the default value.
Syntax
ip ospf dead-interval seconds
no ip ospf dead-interval
OSPF Commands
1199
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1200 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
seconds — Number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been
seen before its neighbor routers declare that the router is down. (Range:
1–65535)
Default Configuration
40 is the default number of seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
The value for the length of time must be the same for all routers attached to a
common network. This value should be some multiple of the Hello Interval
(i.e. 4).
Example
The following example sets the dead interval at 30 seconds.
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf dead-interval 30
ip ospf hello-interval
Use the ip ospf hello-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to
set the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface. Use the no form of the
command to return the interval to the default value.
Syntax
ip ospf hello-interval seconds
no ip ospf hello-interval
•
seconds — Number of seconds to wait before sending Hello packets from
the interface. (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
10 is the default number of seconds.
1200
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1201 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
The value for the length of time must be the same for all routers attached to a
network.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF hello interval at 30 seconds.
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf hello-interval 30
ip ospf mtu-ignore
Use the ip ospf mtu-ignore command in Interface Configuration mode to
disable OSPF maximum transmission unit (MTU) mismatch detection.
OSPF Database Description packets specify the size of the largest IP packet
that can be sent without fragmentation on the interface. When a router
receives a Database Description packet, it examines the MTU advertised by
the neighbor. By default, if the MTU is larger than the router can accept, the
Database Description packet is rejected and the OSPF adjacency is not
established. Use the no form of the command to enable OSPF maximum
transmission unit (MTU) mismatch detection.
Syntax
ip ospf mtu-ignore
no ip ospf mtu-ignore
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
OSPF Commands
1201
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1202 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example disables OSPF MTU mismatch detection on VLAN
interface 15.
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf mtu-ignore
ip ospf network
Use the ip ospf network command to configure OSPF to treat an interface as
a point-to-point rather than broadcast interface. To return to the default
value, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip ospf network { broadcast | point-to-point }
no ip ospf network
•
broadcast — Set the network type to broadcast.
•
point-to-point — Set the network type to point-to-point
Default Configuration
Interfaces operate in broadcast mode by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
Usage Guidelines
OSPF treats interfaces as broadcast interfaces by default. Loopback interfaces
have a special loopback network type, which cannot be changed. When there
are only two routers on the network, OSPF can operate more efficiently by
treating the network as a point-to-point network. For point-to-point
networks, OSPF does not elect a designated router or generate a network link
state advertisement (LSA). Both endpoints of the link must be configured to
operate in point-to-point mode.
Example
The following example shows the options for the ip ospf network command.
console(config-if-vlan1)#ip ospf network ?
1202
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1203 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
broadcast
Set the OSPF network type to Broadcast
point-to-point Set the OSPF network type to Point-to-Point
ip ospf priority
Use the ip ospf priority command in Interface Configuration mode to set the
OSPF priority for the specified router interface. Use the no form of the
command to return the priority to the default value.
Syntax
ip ospf priority number-value
no ip ospf priority
•
number-value — Specifies the OSPF priority for the specified router
interface. (Range: 0–255)
Default Configuration
1 is the default integer value.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
A value of 1 is the highest router priority. A value of 0 indicates that the
interface is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF priority for the VLAN 15 router at 100.
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf priority 100
ip ospf retransmit-interval
Use the ip ospf retransmit-interval command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the OSPF retransmit Interval for the specified interface. Use the
no form of the command to return the interval to the default value.
OSPF Commands
1203
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1204 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds
no ip ospf retransmit-interval
•
seconds — Number of seconds between link-state advertisement
retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This
value is also used when retransmitting database description and link-state
request packets. (Range: 0–3600 seconds)
Default Configuration
5 is the default number of seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
A value of 1 is the highest router priority. A value of 0 indicates that the
interface is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF retransmit Interval for VLAN 15 at 50
seconds.
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf retransmit-interval
50
ip ospf transmit-delay
Use the ip ospf transmit-delay command in Interface Configuration mode to
set the OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface. Use the no form of the
command to return the delay to the default value.
Syntax
ip ospf transmit-delay seconds
no ip ospf transmit-delay
1204
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1205 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
seconds — Sets the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link
state update packet over this interface. (Range: 1–3600 seconds)
Default Configuration
1 is the default number of seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF Transit Delay for VLAN 15 at 20
seconds.
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf transmit-delay 20
maximum-paths
Use the maximum-paths command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
set the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination. Use the
no form of the command to reset the number to the default value.
Syntax
maximum-paths integer
no maximum-paths
•
integer — Number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination.
(Range: 1–4.)
Default Configuration
4 is the integer default value.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
OSPF Commands
1205
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1206 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
OSPF is only enabled on an interface if the primary IPv4 address on the
interface matches a network area range. Any individual interface can only be
attached to a single area. If an interface address matches multiple network
area ranges, the interface is assigned to the area for the first matching range.
If the ip ospf area command is given for an interface, it overrides any
matching network area command.
OSPF only advertises IP subnets for secondary IP addresses if the secondary
address is within the range of a network area command for the same area as
the primary address on the same interface.
When a network area command is deleted, matching interfaces are
reevaluated against all remaining network area commands.
Example
The following example sets the number of paths at 2 that OSPF can report
for a given destination.
console(config-router)#maximum-paths 2
network area
The network area command enables OSPFv2 on an interface and sets its area
ID if the ip-address of an interface is covered by this network command. Use
the “no” form of this command to disable OSPFv2 on an interface.
Syntax
network ip-address wildcard-mask area area-id
no network ip-address wildcard-mask area area-id
•
ip-address — Base IPv4 address of the network area.
•
wildcard-mask — The network mask indicating the subnet.
•
area-id — The ID of the area (Range: IP address or decimal from
0–4294967295).
Default Configuration
OSPFv2 is disabled
1206
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1207 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
OSPF is only enabled on an interface if the primary IPv4 address on the
interface matches a network area range. Any individual interface can only be
attached to a single area. If an interface address matches multiple network
area ranges, the interface is assigned to the area for the first matching range.
If the ip ospf area command is given for an interface, it overrides any
matching network area command.
OSPF only advertises IP subnets for secondary IP addresses if the secondary
address is within the range of a network area command for the same area as
the primary address on the same interface.
When a network area command is deleted, matching interfaces are
reevaluated against all remaining network area commands.
Example
console(config-router)#network 10.50.50.0 0.0.0.255
area 4
nsf
Use this command to enable OSPF graceful restart. Use the no form of this
command to disable graceful restart.
Syntax
nsf [ ietf ] [ planned-only ]
no nsf [ietf]
ietf — This keyword is used to distinguish the IETF standard
implementation of graceful restart from other implementations. Since the
IETF implementation is the only one supported, this keyword is optional.
planned-only — This keyword indicates that OSPF should only perform a
graceful restart when the restart is planned (i.e., when the restart is a result of
the initiate failover command).
OSPF Commands
1207
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1208 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Graceful restart is disabled by default
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Graceful restart works in concert with nonstop forwarding to enable the
hardware to continue forwarding IPv4 packets using OSPFv2 routes while a
backup unit takes over management unit responsibility. When OSPF
executes a graceful restart, it informs its neighbors that the OSPF control
plane is restarting, but that it will be back shortly. Helpful neighbors continue
to advertise to the rest of the network that they have full adjacencies with the
restarting router, avoiding announcement of a topology change and
everything that goes with that (i.e., flooding of LSAs, SPF runs). Helpful
neighbors continue to forward packets through the restarting router. The
restarting router relearns the network topology from its helpful neighbors.
This implementation of graceful restart restarting router behavior is only
useful with a router stack. Graceful restart does not work on a standalone,
single-unit router.
nsf helper
Use the nsf-helper to allow OSPF to act as a helpful neighbor for a restarting
router. Use the “no” form of this command to prevent OSPF from acting as a
helpful neighbor.
Syntax
nsf helper[ planned-only ]
no nsf helper
•
planned-only — This keyword indicates that OSPF should only help a
restarting router performing a planned restart.
Default Configuration
OSPF may act as a helpful neighbor for both planned and unplanned restarts
1208
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1209 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The grace LSA announcing the graceful restart includes a restart reason.
Reasons 1 (software restart) and 2 (software reload/upgrade) are considered
planned restarts. Reasons 0 (unknown) and 3 (switch to redundant control
processor) are considered unplanned restarts.
nsf ietf helper disable is functionally equivalent to no nsf helper and is
supported solely for IS CLI compatibility.
nsf helper strict-lsa-checking
Use the nsf-helper strict-lsa-checking command to require that an OSPF
helpful neighbor exit helper mode whenever a topology change occurs. Use
the “no” form of this command to allow OSPF to continue as a helpful
neighbor in spite of topology changes.
Syntax
nsf [ietf ] helper strict-lsa-checking
no nsf [ietf ] helper strict-lsa-checking
•
ietf —This keyword is used to distinguish the IETF standard
implementation of graceful restart from other implementations. Since the
IETF implementation is the only one supported, this keyword is optional.
Default Configuration
A helpful neighbor exits helper mode when a topology change occurs.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The restarting router is unable to react to topology changes. In particular, the
restarting router will not immediately update its forwarding table; therefore, a
topology change may introduce forwarding loops or black holes that persist
OSPF Commands
1209
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1210 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
until the graceful restart completes. By exiting the graceful restart on a
topology change, a router tries to eliminate the loops or black holes as quickly
as possible by routing around the restarting router.
A helpful neighbor considers a link down with the restarting router to be a
topology change, regardless of the strict LSA checking configuration.
nsf restart-interval
Use the nsf restart-interval command to configure the length of the grace
period on the restarting router. Use the “no” form of this command to revert
the grace period to its default.
Syntax
nsf [ietf ] restart-interval seconds
no nsf [ietf] restart-interval
•
ietf — This keyword is used to distinguish the IETF standard
implementation of graceful restart from other implementations. Since the
IETF implementation is the only one supported, this keyword is optional.
•
seconds — The number of seconds that the restarting router asks its
neighbors to wait before exiting helper mode. The restarting router
includes the restart interval in its grace LSAs (range 1–1800 seconds).
Default Configuration
The default restart interval is 120 seconds.
Command Mode
Router OSPF
User Guidelines
The grace period must be set long enough to allow the restarting router to
reestablish all of its adjacencies and complete a full database exchange with
each of those neighbors.
Example
console(config-router)#nsf restart-interval 180
1210
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1211 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
passive-interface default
The passive-interface default command enables the global passive mode by
default for all interfaces. It overrides any interface level passive mode. Use the
“no” form of this command to disable the global passive mode by default for
all interfaces. Any interface previously configured to be passive reverts to nonpassive mode.
Syntax
passive-interface default
no passive-interface default
Default Configuration
Global passive mode is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-router)#passive-interface
passive-interface
Use the passive-interface command to set the interface as passive. It
overrides the global passive mode that is currently effective on the interface.
Use the “no” form of this command to set the interface as non-passive.
Syntax
passive-interface vlan vlan-id
no passive-interface vlan vlan-id
•
vlan-id — The vlan number
OSPF Commands
1211
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1212 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Passive interface mode is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-router)#passive-interface vlan 1
redistribute
Use the redistribute command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
configure OSPF protocol to allow redistribution of routes from the specified
source protocol/routers. Use the no version of the command to disable
redistribution from the selected source or to reset options to their default
values.
Syntax
redistribute protocol [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value] [tag
tag-value] [subnets]
no redistribute protocol [metric] [metric-type] [tag] [subnets]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
protocol
rip - Specifies RIP as the source protocol.
static - Specifies that the source is a static route.
connected - Specifies that the source is a directly connected
route.
static
Specifies that the source is a static route.
connected
Specifies that the source is a directly connected route.
1212
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1213 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
metric-value
Specifies the metric to use when redistributing the route.
(Range: 0–16777214)
type-value
Type 1 external route.
Type 2 external route.
tag-value
Value attached to each external route, which might be used to
communicate information between ASBRs. (Range:
0–4294967295)
subnets
Specifies whether to redistribute the routes to subnets.
Default Configuration
0 is the tag-value default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures OSPF protocol to allow redistribution of
routes from the specified source protocol/routers.
console(config-router)#redistribute rip metric 90
metric-type 1 tag 555 subnets
router-id
Use the router-id command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to set a 4digit dotted-decimal number uniquely identifying the router OSPF ID.
Syntax
router-id ip-address
•
ip-address — IP address that uniquely identifies the router OSPF ID.
OSPF Commands
1213
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1214 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines the router OSPF ID as 5.5.5.5.
console(config)#router ospf
console(config-router)#router-id 5.5.5.5
router ospf
Use the router ospf command in Global Configuration mode to enter Router
OSPF mode.
Syntax
router ospf
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
The command prompt changes when the router ospf command executes.
1214
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1215 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example enters into router OSPF mode.
console(config)#router ospf
console(config-router)#
show ip ospf
Use the show ip ospf command to display information relevant to the OSPF
router. This command has been modified to show additional fields.
Syntax
show ip ospf
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes.
User Guidelines
Some of the information below displays only if you enable OSPF and
configure certain features. The following fields may be displayed:
Field
Description
Router ID
A 32-bit integer in dotted decimal format identifying the router
about which information is displayed. This is a configured value.
OSPF Admin
Mode
Shows whether OSPF is administratively enabled or disabled.
OSPF Commands
1215
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1216 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
RFC 1583
Compatibility
This configuration option controls the preference rules used
when choosing among multiple external LSAs advertising the
same destination. When enabled, the preference rules remain
those specified by RFC 1583. When disabled, the preference
rules are those stated in Section 16.4.1 of RFC 2328. These rules
prevent routing loops when external LSAs for the same
destination have been originated from different areas.
External LSDB
Limit
Shows the maximum number of non-default external LSAs
entries that can be stored in the link-state database.
Exit Overflow
Interval
Shows the number of seconds that, after entering
OverflowState, as defined by RFC 1765, a router will attempt to
leave OverflowState.
Spf Delay Time
The number of seconds to wait before running a routing table
calculation after a topology change.
Spf Hold Time
The minimum number of seconds between routing table
calculations.
Opaque Capability Shows whether router is capable of sending Opaque LSAs.
AutoCost Ref BW The configured autocost reference bandwidth. This value is used
to determine the OSPF metric on its interfaces. The reference
bandwidth is divided by the interface speed to compute the
metric.
Default Passive
Setting
When enabled, OSPF interfaces are passive by default.
Maximum Paths
Shows the maximum number of paths that OSPF can report for
a given destination.
Default Metric
Default metric for redistributed routes.
Default Route
Advertise
When enabled, OSPF originates a type 5 LSA advertising a
default route.
Always
When this option is configured, OSPF only originates a default
route when the router has learned a default route from another
source.
Metric
Shows the metric for the advertised default routes. If the metric
is not configured, this field is not configured.
Metric Type
Shows whether the metric for the default route is advertised as
External Type 1 or External Type 2.
1216
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1217 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Number of Active
Areas
The number of OSPF areas to which the router is attached on
interfaces that are up.
ABR Status
Shows whether the router is an OSPF Area Border Router.
ASBR Status
Indicates whether the router is an autonomous system border
router. Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is
configured to redistribute routes learned from another protocol.
The possible values for the ASBR status is enabled (if the router
is configured to re-distribute routes learned by other protocols)
or disabled (if the router is not configured for the same).
Stub Router
OSPF enters stub router mode, as described in RFC 3137, when
it encounters a resource limitation that prevents it from
computing a complete routing table. In this state, OSPF sets the
link metrics of non-stub links in its own router LSAs to the
largest possible value, discouraging other routers from
computing paths through the stub router, but allowing other
routers to compute routes to destinations attached to the stub
router. To restore OSPF to normal operation, resolve the
condition that caused the resource overload, then disable and reenable OSPF globally.
External LSDB
Overflow
OSPF enters this state when the number of external LSAs
exceeds a configured limit, as described in RFC 1765.
External LSA
Count
Shows the number of external (LS type 5) link-state
advertisements in the link-state database.
External LSA
Checksum
Shows the sum of the LS checksums of external link-state
advertisements contained in the link-state database.
AS_OPAQUE LSA Shows the number of AS Opaque LSAs received.
Count
AS_OPAQUE LSA Sum of the checksums of all AS Opaque LSAs in the link state
Checksum
database.
New LSAs
Originated
Shows the number of link-state advertisements that have been
originated.
LSAs Received
Shows the number of link-state advertisements received
determined to be new instantiations.
LSA Count
The number of LSAs in the link state database.
Maximum Number The limit on the number of LSAs that the router can store in its
of LSAs
link state database.
OSPF Commands
1217
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1218 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
LSA High Water
Mark
The maximum number of LSAs that have been in the link state
database since OSPF began operation.
Retransmit List
Entries
The current number of entries on all neighbors’ retransmit lists.
Maximum Number The maximum number of entries that can be on neighbors’
of Retransmit
retransmit lists at any given time. This is the sum for all
Entries
neighbors. When OSPF receives an LSA and cannot allocate a
new retransmit list entry, the router does not acknowledge the
LSA, expecting the sender to retransmit.
Retransmit Entries The maximum number of retransmit list entries that have been
High Water Mark on all neighbors’ retransmit lists at one time.
NSF Support
Whether graceful restart is administratively enabled. Possible
values are Support Always, Disabled, or Planned.
NSF Restart
Interval
The number of seconds a helpful neighbor allows a restarting
router to complete its graceful restart.
NSF Restart Status Whether the router is currently performing a graceful restart.
NSF Restart Age
The number of seconds until a graceful restart expires. Only
non-zero when the router is in graceful restart.
NSF Restart Exit
Reason
The reason the previous graceful restart ended. Possible values
are Not attempted, In progress, Completed, Timed out,
Topology change, and Manual clear.
NSF Helper
Support
Whether this router is configured to act as a graceful restart
helpful neighbor. Possible values are: Helper Support Always,
Disabled, or Planned.
NSF Helper Strict As a graceful restart helpful neighbor, whether to terminate the
LSA Checking
helper relationship if a topology change occurs during a
neighbor's graceful restart.
Redistributing
This field is a heading and appears only if you configure the
system to take routes learned from a non-OSPF source and
advertise them to its peers.
Source
Shows source protocol/routes that are being redistributed.
Possible values are static, connected, or RIP.
Tag
Shows the decimal value attached to each external route.
Subnets
When this option is not configured, OSPF will only redistribute
classful prefixes.
1218
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1219 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Distribute-List
Shows the access list used to filter redistributed routes.
Example
The following example displays OSPF router information.
console#show ip ospf
Router ID................................ 1.1.1.1
OSPF Admin Mode.......................... Enable
RFC 1583 Compatibility................... Enable
External LSDB Limit...................... No Limit
Exit Overflow Interval................... 0
Spf Delay Time........................... 5
Spf Hold Time............................ 10
Opaque Capability........................ Disable
AutoCost Ref BW.......................... 100 Mbps
Default Passive Setting.................. Disabled
Maximum Paths........................ 4
Default Metric....................... Not configured
Default Route Advertise.............. Disabled
Always............................... FALSE
Metric............................... Not configured
Metric Type.......................... External Type 2
Number of Active Areas... 1 (1 normal, 0 stub, 0 nssa)
ABR Status........................... Disable
OSPF Commands
1219
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1220 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ASBR Status.......................... Disable
Stub Router.......................... FALSE
External LSDB Overflow............... FALSE
External LSA Count................... 0
External LSA Checksum................ 0
AS_OPAQUE LSA Count.................. 0
AS_OPAQUE LSA Checksum............... 0
New LSAs Originated.................. 25
LSAs Received........................ 7
LSA Count............................ 4
Maximum Number of LSAs............... 18200
LSA High Water Mark.................. 4
Retransmit List Entries.............. 0
Maximum Number of Retransmit Entries..72800
Retransmit Entries High Water Mark... 2
NSF Support........................... Disabled
NSF Restart Interval.................. 120
NSF Restart Status.................... Not Restarting
NSF Restart Age....................... 0 seconds
NSF Restart Exit Reason............... Not Attempted
NSF Helper Support.................... Always
NSF Helper Strict LSA Checking........ Enabled
show ip ospf abr
The show ip ospf abr command displays the internal OSPF routing table
entries to Area Border Routers (ABR). This command takes no options.
1220
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1221 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ip ospf abr
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show ip ospf abr
Type
Router Id
Cost
Area ID
Next Hop
Next Hop
Intf
----- ---------
----- --------------- ---------
--------
INTRA 3.3.3.3
1
0.0.0.1
10.1.23.3
vlan11
INTRA 4.4.4.4
10
0.0.0.1
10.1.24.4
vlan12
show ip ospf area
Use the show ip ospf area command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about the identified OSPF area.
Syntax
show ip ospf area area-id
•
area-id — Identifies the OSPF area whose ranges are being displayed.
(Range: 0–4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
OSPF Commands
1221
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1222 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays OSPF router information.
console#show ip ospf area 10
AreaID......................................... 0.0.0.10
External Routing............................... Import
External LSAs
Spf Runs....................................... 0
Area Border Router Count....................... 0
Area LSA Count................................. 0
Area LSA Checksum.............................. 0
Import Summary LSAs............................ Enable
console#show ip ospf area 20
AreaID......................................... 0.0.0.20
External Routing............................... Import
NSSAs
Spf Runs....................................... 0
Area Border Router Count....................... 0
Area LSA Count................................. 0
Area LSA Checksum.............................. 0
OSPF NSSA Specific Information.
Import Summary LSAs............................ Enable
Redistribute into NSSA......................... Enable
Default Information Originate.................. TRUE
Default Metric................................. 250
1222
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1223 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Metric Type............................ NonComparable
Translator Role................................ Candidate
Translator Stability Interval.................. 2000
Translator State............................... Disabled
show ip ospf asbr
The show ip ospf asbr command displays the internal OSPF routing table
entries to Autonomous System Boundary Routes (ASBR). This command
takes no options.
Syntax
show ip ospf asbr
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ip ospf asbr
Type
Router Id
Cost
Area ID
Next Hop
Next Hop
Intf
-----
----------
----
--------
-----------
INTRA
1.1.1.1
1
0.0.0.1
10.1.12.1
vlan10
INTRA
4.4.4.4
10
0.0.0.1
10.1.24.4
vlan12
-----------
OSPF Commands
1223
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1224 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip ospf database
Use the show ip ospf database command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about the link state database when OSPF is enabled. If
parameters are entered, the command displays the LSA headers. Use the
optional parameters to specify the type of link state advertisements to display.
Syntax
show ip ospf [area-id] database [{asbr-summary | external | network | nssaexternal | router | summary}][ls-id] [adv-router [ip-address] | self-originate]
•
area-id — Identifies a specific OSPF area for which link state database
information will be displayed.
•
asbr-summary — Display the autonomous system boundary router (ASBR)
summary LSAs.
•
external — Display the external LSAs.
•
network — Display the network LSAs.
•
nssa-external — Display NSSA external LSAs.
•
router — Display router LSAs.
•
summary — Display the LSA database summary information.
•
ls-id — Specifies the link state ID (LSID). (Range: IP address or an integer
in the range of 0–4294967295)
•
adv-router — Display the LSAs that are restricted by the advertising
router. To specify a router, enter the IP address of the router.
•
self-originate — Display the LSAs in that are self-originated.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
Information is only displayed if OSPF is enabled.
1224
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1225 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays information about the link state database
when OSPF is enabled.
console#show ip ospf database
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link Id
Adv Router
Age
Sequence Chksm
Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----5.2.0.0
0.0.0.0
1360
80000006 3a1f
------
-----
5.2.0.0
5.2.0.0
1360
80000009 a47e
------
---E-
20.20.20.20
20.20.20.20
1165
8000000b 0f80
-E----
-----
Network Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link Id
Adv Router
Age
Sequence Chksm
Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----2.2.2.2
20.20.20.20
1165
80000005 f86d
-E--O-
Network Summary States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link Id
Adv Router
Age
Sequence Chksm
Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----5.2.0.0
0.0.0.0
1360
80000007 242e
------
Summary ASBR States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link Id
Adv Router
Age
Sequence Chksm
Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- -----
OSPF Commands
1225
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1226 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
5.2.0.0
0.0.0.0
1361
80000006 183a
------
Link Opaque States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link Id
Adv Router
Age
Sequence Chksm
Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----5.2.0.0
0.0.0.0
1361
80000005 ef59
------
Area Opaque States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link Id
Adv Router
Age
Sequence Chksm
Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----5.2.0.0
0.0.0.0
1362
80000005 e166
------
AS External States
Link Id
Adv Router
Age
Sequence Chksm
Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----6.0.0.0
5.2.0.0
1364
80000008 e35d
AS Opaque States
Link Id
Adv Router
Age
Sequence Chksm
Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----5.2.0.0
1226
0.0.0.0
OSPF Commands
1364
80000005 d373
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1227 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip ospf database database-summary
Use the show ip ospf database database-summary command to display the
number of each type of LSA in the database for each area and for the router.
The command also displays the total number of LSAs in the database. This
command has been modified.
Syntax
show ip ospf database database-summary
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
Field
Description
Router
Shows Total number of router LSAs in the OSPF link state database.
Network
Shows Total number of network LSAs in the OSPF link state
database.
Summary Net Shows Total number of summary network LSAs in the database.
Summary
ASBR
Shows Number of summary ASBR LSAs in the database.
Type-7 Ext
Shows Total number of Type-7 external LSAs in the database.
SelfOriginated
Type-7
Shows Total number of self originated AS external LSAs in the
OSPFv3 link state database.
Opaque Link
Shows Number of opaque link LSAs in the database.
Opaque Area
Shows Number of opaque area LSAs in the database.
Subtotal
Shows Number of entries for the identified area.
Opaque AS
Shows Number of opaque AS LSAs in the database.
OSPF Commands
1227
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1228 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Total
Shows Number of entries for all areas.
Example
The following example displays the number of each type of LSA in the
database for each area and for the router.
console#show ip ospf database database-summary
OSPF Router with ID (5.5.5.5)
Area 0.0.0.0 database summary
Router......................................... 0
Network........................................ 0
Summary Net.................................... 0
Summary ASBR................................... 0
Type-7 Ext..................................... 0
Self Originated Type-7......................... 0
Opaque Link.................................... 0
Opaque Area.................................... 0
Subtotal....................................... 0
Area 0.0.0.10 database summary
Router......................................... 0
Network........................................ 0
Summary Net.................................... 0
Summary ASBR................................... 0
Type-7 Ext..................................... 0
Self Originated Type-7......................... 0
Opaque Link.................................... 0
Opaque Area.................................... 0
Subtotal....................................... 0
1228
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1229 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Router database summary
Router......................................... 0
Network........................................ 0
Summary Net.................................... 0
Summary ASBR................................... 0
Type-7 Ext..................................... 0
Opaque Link.................................... 0
Opaque Area.................................... 0
Type-5 Ext..................................... 0
Self-Originated Type-5 Ext..................... 0
Opaque AS...................................... 0
Total.......................................... 0
show ip ospf interface
Use the show ip ospf interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the information for the VLAN or loopback interface.
Syntax
show ip ospf interface [interface-type interface-number]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Vlan or loopback
interface-number
Valid VLAN ID or loopback interface number (Range: 0–7).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
OSPF Commands
1229
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1230 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the information for the IFO object or virtual
interface tables associated with VLAN 3.
console#show ip ospf interface vlan 10
IP Address..................................... 1.1.1.1
Subnet Mask................................. 255.255.255.0
Secondary IP Address(es).......................
OSPF Admin Mode................................ Enable
OSPF Area ID................................... 0.0.0.0
OSPF Network Type.............................. Broadcast
Router Priority................................ 1
Retransmit Interval............................ 5
Hello Interval................................. 10
Dead Interval.................................. 40
LSA Ack Interval............................... 1
Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 1
Authentication Type............................ None
Metric Cost.................................... 10
(computed)
Passive Status................................. Non-passive
interface
OSPF Mtu-ignore................................ Disable
State.......................................... designated-router
Designated Router.............................. 1.1.1.1
Backup Designated Router....................... 0.0.0.0
Number of Link Events.......................... 2
1230
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1231 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip ospf interface brief
Use the show ip ospf interface brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display brief information for the IFO object or virtual interface tables.
Syntax
show ip ospf interface brief
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays brief information for the IFO object or virtual
interface tables.
console#show ip ospf interface brief
Router Hello Dead Retrax Retrax LSAAck
Interface AdminMode Area ID Priority Intval Intval Intval Delay Intval
--------- --------- ------- -------- ------ ------ ------ ----- -----vlan1
Enable
0.0.0.10 1
10
40
5
1
1
vlan2
Disable
0.0.0.0
1
10
40
5
1
1
vlan3
Disable
0.0.0.0
1
10
40
5
1
1
loopback2 Disable
0.0.0.0
1
10
40
5
1
1
show ip ospf interface stats
Use the show ip ospf interface stats command in User EXEC mode to display
the statistics for a specific interface. The information is only displayed if
OSPF is enabled.
Syntax
show ip ospf interface stats vlan vlan-id
OSPF Commands
1231
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1232 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the ospf statistics for VLAN 15.
console>show ip ospf interface stats vlan15
OSPF Area ID....................................... 0.0.0.0
Area Border Router Count................................. 0
AS Border Router Count................................... 0
Area LSA Count........................................... 1
IP Address......................................... 2.2.2.2
OSPF Interface Events.................................... 1
Virtual Events........................................... 0
Neighbor Events.......................................... 0
External LSA Count....................................... 0
show ip ospf neighbor
Use the show ip ospf neighbor command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about OSPF neighbors. The information below only displays if
OSPF is enabled and the interface has a neighbor.
Syntax
show ip ospf neighbor [interface-type interface-number] [neighbor-id]
1232
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1233 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Interface type – only supported type is vlan.
interface-number
A valid interface number.
neighbor-id
Valid IP address of the neighbor.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following examples display information about OSPF neighbors on the
specified Ethernet and IP interfaces.
console#show ip ospf neighbor
99.9.9.9
Interface.................................... Vl12
Neighbor IP Address.......................... 5.5.5.5
Interface Index.............................. 723
Area Id...................................... 0.0.0.0
Options...................................... 0x42
Router Priority.............................. 1
Dead timer due in (secs)..................... 31
Up Time......................... 0 days 0 hrs 2 mins 17 secs
State........................................ Full/DR
Events....................................... 5
Retransmission Queue Length.................. 0
OSPF Commands
1233
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1234 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Restart Helper Status........................ Not helping
Restart Helper Exit Reason................... Not attempted
Field Description
Field
Description
Interface
The name of the interface on which the adjacency is formed.
Neighbor IP Address The IPv4 address on the neighbor's interface used to form the
adjacency.
Interface Index
The SNMP interface index.
Area Id
The OSPF area in which the adjacency is formed.
Options
The options advertised by the neighbor.
Router Priority
The router priority advertised by the neighbor.
Dead timer
The number of seconds until the dead timer expires.
Up Time
How long this adjacency has been in FULL state.
State
The current state of the adjacency.
Events
Incremented for the following events:
• A DD is received from the neighbor with an MTU mismatch.
• The neighbor sent an ACK for an LSA not on the neighbor's
retransmit list.
• The state of the adjacency changed.
Retransmission
Queue Length
The number of LSAs on the neighbor's retransmit queue
waiting for the neighbor to acknowledge.
Restart Helper
Status
One of two values:
• Helping — This router is acting as a helpful neighbor to this
neighbor. A helpful neighbor does not report an adjacency
change during graceful restart, but continues to advertise the
restarting router as a FULL adjacency. A helpful neighbor
continues to forward data packets to the restarting router,
trusting that the restarting router's forwarding table is
maintained during the restart.
• Not Helping — This router is not a helpful neighbor at
this time.
1234
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1235 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Restart Helper
Exit Reason
One of the following values:
• Restart Reason — When the router is in helpful neighbor
mode, the output includes the restart reason the restarting
router sent in its grace LSA. The Restart Reason is the value in
the Graceful Restart Reason TLV in the grace LSA sent by the
restarting router. Possible values for the Restart Reason are
defined in RFC 3623 as follows:
– Unknown (0)
– Software restart (1)
– Software reload/upgrade (2)
– Switch to redundant control processor (3)
– Unrecognized - a value not defined in RFC 3623
When the switch sends a grace LSA, it sets the Restart Reason
to Software Restart on a planned warm restart (when the
initiate failover command is invoked), and to Unknown on an
unplanned warm restart.
• Remaining Grace Time — The number of seconds remaining
in the current graceful restart interval. This row is only
included if the router is currently acting as a restart helper for
the neighbor.
• Restart Exit Reason — One of the following:
– None — graceful restart has not been attempted
– In Progress — restart is in progress
– Completed — the previous graceful restart completed
successfully
– Timed Out — the previous graceful restart timed out
– Topology Changed — The previous graceful restart
terminated prematurely because of a topology change. A
helpful neighbor declares a topology change when it
forwards a changed LSA to the restarting router. An LSA is
considered changed if its contents are changed, not if it is
simply a periodic refresh.
show ip ospf range
Use the show ip ospf range command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about the area ranges for the specified area-id.
OSPF Commands
1235
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1236 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ip ospf range area-id
•
area-id — Identifies the OSPF area whose ranges are being displayed.
(Range: IP address or decimal from 0–4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information about the area ranges for the
specified area-id.
console#show ip ospf range 20
Area ID
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Lsdb Type
Advertisement
-------
----------
---------
---------
-------------
0.0.0.20 192.168.6.0 255.255.255.0 Summary Link Enabled
show ip ospf statistics
This command displays information about recent Shortest Path First (SPF)
calculations. The SPF is the OSPF routing table calculation. The output lists
the number of times the SPF has run for each OSPF area. A table follows this
information. For each of the 15 most recent SPF runs, the table lists how long
ago the SPF ran, how long the SPF took, and the reasons why the SPF was
scheduled.
Syntax
show ip ospf statistics
1236
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1237 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console>show ip ospf statistics
Area 0.0.0.0: SPF algorithm executed 0 times
Delta T
SPF Duration (msec)
Reason
--------
-------------------
26:01:45
0
23:15:05
0
R
23:14:22
0
R, N
23:14:12
0
R
23:10:04
0
---------------
show ip ospf stub table
Use the show ip ospf stub table command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the OSPF stub table. The information below will only be displayed if
OSPF is initialized on the switch.
Syntax
show ip ospf stub table
OSPF Commands
1237
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1238 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the OSPF stub table.
console(config)#show ip ospf stub table
AreaId
TypeofService
Metric Val Import SummaryLSA
------------- -------------
---------- -----------------
0.0.0.1
Normal
1
Enable
show ip ospf virtual-link
Use the show ip ospf virtual-link command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the OSPF Virtual Interface information for a specific area and
neighbor or for all.
Syntax
show ip ospf virtual-link [area-id neighbor-id]
•
area-id — Identifies the OSPF area whose ranges are being displayed.
(Range: IP address or decimal from 0–4294967295)
•
neighbor-id — Identifies the neighbor’s router ID. (Range: Valid IP
address)
Default Configuration
Show information for all OSPF Virtual Interfaces.
1238
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1239 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for
area 10 and its neighbor.
console#show ip ospf virtual-link 10 192.168.2.2
Area ID........................................ 10
Neighbor Router ID............................. 192.168.2.2
Hello Interval................................. 10
Dead Interval.................................. 655555
Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 1
Retransmit Interval............................ 5
State.......................................... down
Metric......................................... 0
Neighbor State................................. down
Authentication Type............................ MD5
Authentication Key............................. "test123"
Authentication Key ID.......................... 100
show ip ospf virtual-links brief
Use the show ip ospf virtual-link brief command in Privileged EXEC mode
to display the OSPF Virtual Interface information for all areas in the system
in table format.Syntax
show ip ospf virtual-link brief
OSPF Commands
1239
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1240 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information in
the system.
console#show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief
Hello
Dead
Retransmit
Transit
Area ID
Neighbor
Interval Interval Interval
Delay
-------
--------
-------- -------- ----------
-------
0.0.0.2
5.5.5.5
10
40
5
1
timers spf
Use the timers spf command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
configure the SPF delay and hold time. Use the no form of the command to
reset the numbers to the default value.
Syntax
timers spf delay-time hold-time
no timers spf
•
delay-time — SPF delay time. (Range: 0–65535 seconds)
•
hold-time — SPF hold time. (Range: 0–65535 seconds)
1240
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1241 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
The default value for delay-time is 5. The default value for hold-time is 10.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the SPF delay and hold time.
console(config-router)#timers spf 20 30
OSPF Commands
1241
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1242 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1242
OSPF Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1243 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
55
OSPFv3 Commands
This chapter explains the following commands:
area default-cost
(Router OSPFv3)
area virtual-link
transmit-delay
ipv6 ospf priority
show ipv6 ospf abr
area nssa (Router
OSPFv3)
defaultinformation
originate
ipv6 ospf
show ipv6 ospf area
retransmit-interval
area nssa defaultinfo-originate
default-metric
ipv6 ospf transmit- show ipv6 ospf asbr
delay
area nssa noredistribute
distance ospf
ipv6 router ospf
show ipv6 ospf
database
area nssa nosummary
enable
maximum-paths
show ipv6 ospf
database databasesummary
area nssa
translator-role
exit-overflowinterval
nsf
show ipv6 ospf
interface
area nssa
external-lsdb-limit nsf helper
translator-stab-intv
show ipv6 ospf
interface brief
area range (Router ipv6 ospf
OSPFv3)
nsf helper strictlsa-checking
show ipv6 ospf
interface stats
area stub
ipv6 ospf area
nsf restart-interval show ipv6 ospf
interface vlan
area stub nosummary
ipv6 ospf cost
passive-interface
show ipv6 ospf
neighbor
area virtual-link
ipv6 ospf deadinterval
passive-interface
default
show ipv6 ospf range
area virtual-link
dead-interval
ipv6 ospf hellointerval
redistribute
show ipv6 ospf stub
table
area virtual-link
hello-interval
ipv6 ospf mtuignore
router-id
show ipv6 ospf virtuallinks
OSPFv3 Commands
1243
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1244 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
area virtual-link
ipv6 ospf network
retransmit-interval
show ipv6 ospf
show ipv6 ospf virtuallink brief
area default-cost (Router OSPFv3)
Use the area default-cost command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
to configure the monetary default cost for the stub area. The operator must
specify the area id and an integer value between 1-16777215. Use the no form
of the command to return the cost to the default value. If the area has not
been previously created, this command creates the area and then applies the
default-cost.
Syntax
area area-id default-cost cost
no area area-id default-cost
• areaid — Valid area identifier.
• cost — Default cost. (Range: 1-16777215)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the monetary default cost at 100 for stub
area 1.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 default-cost 100
1244
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1245 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
area nssa (Router OSPFv3)
Use the area nssa command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
configure the specified area ID to function as an NSSA. If the area has not
been previously created, this command creates the area and then applies the
NSSA distinction. If the area already exists, the NSSA distinction is added or
modified. Use the no form of the command to remove the NSSA distinction
from the area.
Syntax
area area-id nssa [no-redistribution] [default-information-originate [metric
metric-value] [metric-type metric-type-value]] [no-summary] [translatorrole role] [translator-stab-intv interval]
no area area-id nssa [no-redistribution] [default-information-originate] [nosummary] [translator-role] [translator-stab-intv]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
area-id
Identifies the OSPFv3 stub area to configure. (Range: IP
address or decimal from 0–4294967295)
metric-value
Specifies the metric of the default route advertised to the
NSSA. (Range: 1–16777214)
metric-type-value
The metric type can be one of the following :
1 A metric type of nssa-external 1 (comparable)
2 A metric type of nssa-external 2 (non-comparable)
role
The translator role where role is one of the following :
• always - The router assumes the role of the translator when it
becomes a border router.
• candidate - The router to participate in the translator election
process when it attains border router status.
interval
The period of time that an elected translator continues to
perform its duties after it determines that its translator status
has been deposed by another router. (Range: 0–3600)
OSPFv3 Commands
1245
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1246 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
If no metric is defined, 10 is the default configuration.
The default role is candidate.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures not-so-stubby-area 10 as an NSSA.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-router)#area 10 nssa
The following example configures the metric value and type for the default
route advertised into the NSSA and configures the NSSA so that summary
LSAs are not advertised into the NSSA.
console(config-router)#area 20 nssa default-infooriginate metric 250 metric-type 2 no-summary
area nssa default-info-originate
Use the area nssa default-info-originate command in Router OSPFv3
Configuration mode to configure the metric value and type for the default
route advertised into the NSSA. The optional metric parameter specifies the
metric of the default route. The metric type can be comparable (nssa-external
1) or noncomparable (nssa-external 2). Use the no form of the command to
return the metric value and type to the default value
Syntax
area areaid nssa default-info-originate [metric [comparable | noncomparable]]
no area areaid nssa default-info-originate
•
1246
areaid — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1247 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
metric — Metric value for default route. (Range: 1-16777214)
•
comparable — Metric Type (nssa-external 1).
•
non-comparable — Metric Type (nssa-external 2).
Default Configuration
If no metric is defined, 10 is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the default metric value for the default
route advertised into the NSSA.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 nssa default-infooriginate
area nssa no-redistribute
Use the area nssa no-redistribute command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration
mode to configure the NSSA ABR so that learned external routes will not be
redistributed to the NSSA. Use the no form of the command to remove the
configuration.
Syntax
area areaid nssa no-redistribute
no area areaid nssa no-redistribute
• areaid — Valid OSPF area identifier.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
OSPFv3 Commands
1247
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1248 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the area 1 NSSA ABR so that learned
external routes will not be redistributed to the NSSA.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 nssa no-redistribute
area nssa no-summary
Use the area nssa no-summary command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration
mode to configure the NSSA so that summary LSAs are not advertised into
the NSSA. Use the no form of the command to remove the configuration.
Syntax
area areaid nssa no-summary
no area area-id nssa no-summary
• areaid — Valid OSPF area identifier.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1248
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1249 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example configures the area 1 NSSA so that summary LSAs are
not advertised into the NSSA.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 nssa no-summary
area nssa translator-role
Use the area nssa translator-role command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration
mode to configure the translator role of the NSSA. Use the no form of the
command to remove the configuration.
Syntax
area areaid nssa translator-role {always | candidate}
no area areaid nssa translator-role
• areaid — Valid OSPF area identifier.
•
always — Causes the router to assume the role of the translator the instant
it becomes a border router.
•
candidate — Causes the router to participate in the translator election
process when it attains border router status.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the always translator role of the area 1
NSSA.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
OSPFv3 Commands
1249
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1250 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-rtr)#area 1 nssa translator-role
always
area nssa translator-stab-intv
Use the area nssa translator-stab-intv command in Router OSPFv3
Configuration mode to configure the translator stability interval of the NSSA.
The stability interval is the period of time that an elected translator continues
to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status has been
deposed by another router.
Syntax
area areaid nssa translator-stab-intv seconds
no area areaid nssa translator-stab-intv
• areaid — Valid OSPF area identifier.
• seconds — Translator stability interval of the NSSA. (Range: 0-3600
seconds)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a translator stability interval of 100 seconds
for the area 1 NSSA.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 nssa translator-stab-intv
100
1250
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1251 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
area range (Router OSPFv3)
Use the area range command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to
configure a summary prefix for routes learned in a given area. If the area has
not been previously created, this command creates the area and then applies
the range parameters. There are two types of area ranges. An area range can be
configured to summarize intra-area routes. An ABR advertises the range
rather than the specific intra-area route as a type 3 summary LSA. Also, an
area range can be configured at the edge of an NSSA to summarize external
routes reachable within the NSSA. The range is advertised as a type 5
external LSA. Use the no form of the command to remove the summary
prefix configuration for routes learned in the specified area.
Syntax
area area-id range ipv6-prefix/prefix-length {summarylink |
nssaexternallink} [advertise | not-advertise]
no area area-id range ipv6-prefix/prefix-length {summarylink |
nssaexternallink}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
areaid
Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
ipv6-prefix/prefixlength
Valid route prefix.
summarylink
LSDB type
nssaexternallink
LSDB type.
advertise
Allows area range to be advertised.
not-advertise
Suppresses area range from being advertised.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
OSPFv3 Commands
1251
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1252 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The LSDB type must be specified by either summarylink or nssaexternallink,
and the advertising of the area range can be allowed or suppressed.
Example
The following example creates an area range for the area 1 NSSA.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 range 2020:1::1/64
summarylink
area stub
Use the area stub command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to create
a stub area for the specified area ID. If the area has not been previously
created, this command creates the area and then applies the stub distinction.
A stub area is characterized by the fact that AS External LSAs are not
propagated into the area. Removing AS External LSAs and Summary LSAs
can significantly reduce the size of the link state database of routers within
the stub area.
Syntax
area area-id stub [no summary]
no area area-id stub [no summary]
• area-id — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
area-id
Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
no-summary
Disable the import of Summary LSAs for the stub area
identified by area-id.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1252
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1253 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example creates a stub area for area 1.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 stub
area stub no-summary
Use the area stub no-summary command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration
mode disable the import of Summary LSAs for the stub area identified by
area-id .
Syntax
area area-id stub no-summary
no area area-id stub no-summary
• area-id — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
•
so-summary — Disable the import of Summary LSAs for the stub area
identified by area-id.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
OSPFv3 Commands
1253
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1254 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example prevents Summary LSAs from being advertised into
the area 1 NSSA.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 stub no-summary
area virtual-link
Use the area virtual-link command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
to create the OSPF virtual interface for the specified area-id and neighbor
router. If the area has not been previously created, this command creates the
area and then applies the virtual-link parameters. To remove the link, use the
no form of the command. Use the optional parameters to configure deadinterval, hello-interval, retransmit-interval and transmit-delay.
Syntax
area area-id virtual-link router-id [hello-interval seconds] [retransmitinterval seconds] [transmit-delay seconds] [dead-interval seconds]
no area area-id virtual-link router-id id [hello-interval] [retransmit-interval]
[transmit-delay] [dead-interval]
Parameter
Description
area-id
Valid OSPFv3 area identifier (or decimal value in the range of
0-4294967295).
router-id
Identifies the Router ID or valid IP address of the neighbor.
hello-interval
seconds
Number of seconds to wait before sending hello packets to the
OSPF virtual interface. (Range: 1–65535)
dead-interval
seconds
Number of seconds to wait before the OSPF virtual interface on
the virtual interface is assumed to be dead. (Range: 1–65535)
retransmit-interval
seconds
The number of seconds to wait between retransmitting LSAs if
no acknowledgement is received. (Range: 0–3600)
transmit-delay
seconds
Number of seconds to increment the age of the LSA before
sending, based on the estimated time it takes to transmit from
the interface. (Range: 0–3600)
1254
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1255 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Parameter
Default
area-id
No area ID is predefined.
router-id
No router ID is predefined.
hello-interval
seconds
10 seconds
retransmit-interval
seconds
5 seconds
transmit-delay
seconds
1 second
dead-interval
seconds
40 seconds
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example creates the OSPF virtual interface for area 1 and its
neighbor router.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 virtual-link 2
The following example configures a 20-second dead interval, a hello interval
of 20 seconds, a retransmit interval of 20 seconds, and a 20-second transmit
delay for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by area
1 and its neighbor.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 virtual-link 2 deadinterval 20 hello-interval 20 retransmit-interval 20
transmit-delay 20
OSPFv3 Commands
1255
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1256 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
area virtual-link dead-interval
Use the area virtual-link dead-interval command in Router OSPFv3
Configuration mode to configure the dead interval for the OSPF virtual
interface on the virtual interface identified by areaid and neighbor.
Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighbor dead-interval seconds
no area areaid virtual-link neighbor dead-interval
• areaid — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
• neighbor — Router ID of neighbor.
• seconds — Dead interval. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Configuration
40 is the default value for seconds.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a 20-second dead interval for the OSPF
virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by area 1 and its neighbor.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 virtual-link 2 deadinterval 20
area virtual-link hello-interval
Use the area virtual-link hello-interval command in Router OSPFv3
Configuration mode to configure the hello interval for the OSPF virtual
interface on the virtual interface identified by areaid and neighbor.
1256
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1257 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighbor hello-interval seconds
no area areaid virtual-link neighbor hello-interval
• areaid — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
• neighbor — Router ID of neighbor.
• seconds — Hello interval. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Configuration
10 is the default value for seconds.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a hello interval of 20 seconds for the OSPF
virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by area 1 and its neighbor.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 virtual-link 2 hellointerval 20
area virtual-link retransmit-interval
Use the area virtual-link retransmit-interval command in Router OSPFv3
Configuration mode to configure the retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual
interface on the virtual interface identified by areaid and neighbor.
Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighbor retransmit-interval seconds
no area areaid virtual-link neighbor retransmit-interval
•
areaid — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
OSPFv3 Commands
1257
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1258 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
neighbor — Router ID of neighbor.
•
seconds — Retransmit interval. (Range: 0-3600)
Default Configuration
5 is the default value for seconds.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the retransmit interval of 20 seconds for
the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by area 1 and its
neighbor.
(config)#ipv6 router ospf
(config-rtr)#area 1 virtual-link 2 retransmitinterval 20
area virtual-link transmit-delay
Use the area virtual-link transmit-delay command in Router OSPFv3
Configuration mode to configure the transmit delay for the OSPF virtual
interface on the virtual interface identified by areaid and neighbor.
Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighbor transmit-delay seconds
no area areaid virtual-link neighbor transmit-delay
• areaid — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier.
• neighbor — Router ID of neighbor.
• seconds — Transmit delay interval. (Range: 0-3600)
1258
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1259 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
1 is the default value for seconds.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a 20-second transmit delay for the OSPF
virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by area 1 and its neighbor.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#area 1 virtual-link 2 transmitdelay 20
default-information originate
Use the default-information originate command in Router OSPFv3
Configuration mode to control the advertisement of default routes. Use the
no form of the command to return the default route advertisement settings
to the default value.
Syntax
default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [metric-type
type-value]
no default-information originate [metric] [metric-type]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
always
Always advertise default routes.
metric-value
The metric (or preference) value of the default route. (Range:
1–16777214)
OSPFv3 Commands
1259
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1260 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
type-value
Description
1 External type-1 route.
2 External type-2 route.
Default Configuration
The default metric is none and the default type is 2.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example controls the advertisement of default routes by
defining a metric value of 100 and metric type 2.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#default-information originate
metric 100 metric-type 2
default-metric
Use the default-metric command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to
set a default for the metric of distributed routes. Use the no form of the
command to remove the metric from the distributed routes.
Syntax
default-metric metric-value
no default-metric
•
metric-value — The metric (or preference) value of the default route.
(Range: 1–16777214)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1260
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1261 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets a default of 100 for the metric of distributed
routes.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#default-metric 100
distance ospf
The distance ospf command sets the preference values of OSPF route types
in the router. Lower route preference values are preferred when determining
the best route. The type of OSPF route can be intra, inter, external. All the
external type routes are given the same preference value. Use the “no” form of
this command to reset the preference values to the default.
Syntax
distance ospf {external | inter-area | intra-area } distance
no distance ospf {external | inter-area | intra-area } distance
•
distance— Used to select the best path when there are two or more routes
to the same destination from two different routing protocols (Range:
1–255).
Default Configuration
The default preference value is 110.
Command Mode
Router OSPF Configuration mode.
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
OSPFv3 Commands
1261
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1262 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example sets a route preference value of 100 for intra OSPF in
the router.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#distance ospf intra 100
enable
Use the enable command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to enable
administrative mode of OSPF in the router (active).
Syntax
enable
no enable
Default Configuration
Enabled is the default state.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables administrative mode of OSPF in the router
(active).
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#enable
1262
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1263 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
exit-overflow-interval
Use the exit-overflow-interval command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration
mode to configure the exit overflow interval for OSPF. It describes the
number of seconds after entering Overflow state that a router will wait before
attempting to leave the Overflow State. This allows the router to originate
non-default AS-external-LSAs again. When set to 0, the router will not leave
Overflow State until restarted.
Syntax
exit-overflow-interval seconds
no exit-overflow-interval
•
seconds — Exit overflow interval for OSPF (Range: 0-2147483647)
Default Configuration
0 is the default value for seconds.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the exit overflow interval for OSPF at 100
seconds.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#exit-overflow-interval 100
external-lsdb-limit
Use the external-lsdb-limit command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration
mode to configure the external LSDB limit for OSPF. If the value is -1, then
there is no limit. When the number of non-default AS-external-LSAs in a
router's link-state database reaches the external LSDB limit, the router enters
OSPFv3 Commands
1263
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1264 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
overflow state. The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit
non-default AS-external- LSAs in it database. The external LSDB limit
MUST be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and/or
any regular OSPF area.
Syntax
external-lsdb-limit limit
no external-lsdb-limit
•
limit — External LSDB limit for OSPF (Range: -1-2147483647)
Default Configuration
-1 is the default value for limit.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the external LSDB limit at 100 for OSPF.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#external-lsdb-limit 100
ipv6 ospf
Use the ipv6 ospf command in Interface Configuration mode to enable
OSPF on a router interface or loopback interface.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf
no ipv6 ospf
1264
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1265 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables OSPF on VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf
ipv6 ospf area
Use the ipv6 ospf area areaid command in Interface Configuration mode to
set the OSPF area to which the specified router interface belongs.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf area areaid
no ipv6 ospf area areaid
•
areaid — Is a 32-bit integer, formatted as a 4-digit dotted-decimal number
or a decimal value. It uniquely identifies the area to which the interface
connects. Assigning an area id which does not exist on an interface causes
the area to be created with default values. (Range: 0-4294967295).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
OSPFv3 Commands
1265
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1266 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines the OSPF area to which VLAN 15 belongs.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf area 100
ipv6 ospf cost
Use the ipv6 ospf cost command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the cost on an OSPF interface. Use the no form of the command to
return the cost to the default value.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf cost interface-cost
no ipv6 ospf cost
•
interface-cost — Specifies the cost (link-state metric) of the OSPF
interface. (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
10 is the default link-state metric configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures a cost of 100.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf cost 100
1266
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1267 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 ospf dead-interval
Use the ipv6 ospf dead-interval command in Interface Configuration mode
to set the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds
no ipv6 ospf dead-interval
•
seconds — A valid positive integer, which represents the length of time in
seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen before its
neighbor routers declare that the router is down. The value for the length
of time must be the same for all routers attached to a common network.
This value should be some multiple of the Hello Interval (i.e. 4).
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Configuration
40 seconds is the default value of seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF dead interval at 100 seconds.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf dead-interval 100
ipv6 ospf hello-interval
Use the ipv6 ospf hello-interval command in Interface Configuration mode
to set the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface.
OSPFv3 Commands
1267
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1268 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 ospf hello-interval seconds
no ipv6 ospf hello-interval
•
seconds — A valid positive integer which represents the length of time of
the OSPF hello interval. The value must be the same for all routers
attached to a network. (Range: 1-65535 seconds)
Default Configuration
10 seconds is the default value of seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF hello interval at 15 seconds.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf hello-interval 15
ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore
Use the ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore command in Interface Configuration mode to
disable OSPF maximum transmission unit (MTU) mismatch detection. Use
the no form of the command to reset mismatch detection to the default
value.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore
no ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore
Default Configuration
The default state is Disabled.
1268
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1269 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
User Guidelines
OSPF Database Description packets specify the size of the largest IP packet
that can be sent without fragmentation on the interface. When a router
receives a Database Description packet, it examines the MTU advertised by
the neighbor. By default, if the MTU is larger than the router can accept, the
Database Description packet is rejected and the OSPF adjacency is not
established.
Example
The following example disables OSPF maximum transmission unit (MTU)
mismatch detection.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore
ipv6 ospf network
Use the ipv6 ospf network command in Interface Configuration mode to
change the default OSPF network type for the interface. Use the no form of
the command to return the network setting to the default value.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf network { broadcast | point-to-point }
no ipv6 ospf network
•
broadcast — The network type is broadcast.
•
point-to-point — The network type is point-to-point.
Default Configuration
The default state is point-to-point.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode
OSPFv3 Commands
1269
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1270 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Normally, the network type is determined from the physical IP network type.
By default all Ethernet networks are OSPF-type broadcast. Similarly, tunnel
interfaces default to point-to-point. When an Ethernet port is used as a single
large bandwidth IP network between two routers, the network type can be
point-to-point since there are only two routers. Using point-to-point as the
network type eliminates the overhead of the OSPF designated router
election. It is normally not useful to set a tunnel to OSPF network type
broadcast.
Example
The following example changes the default OSPF network type to point-topoint.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf network point-topoint
ipv6 ospf priority
Use the ipv6 ospf priority command in Interface Configuration mode to set
the OSPF priority for the specified router interface. Use the no form of the
command to return the priority to the default value.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf priority number-value
no ipv6 ospf priority
•
number-value — Specifies the OSPF priority for the specified router
interface. (Range: 0–255) A value of 0 indicates that the router is not
eligible to become the designated router on this network.
Default Configuration
1, the highest router priority, is the default value.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
1270
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1271 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF priority at 50 for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf priority 50
ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval
Use the ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval command in Interface Configuration
mode to set the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval seconds
no ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval
•
seconds — The number of seconds between link-state advertisement
retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This
value is also used when retransmitting database description and link-state
request packets. (Range: 0 to 3600 seconds)
Default Configuration
5 seconds is the default value.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF retransmit interval at 100 seconds.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
OSPFv3 Commands
1271
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1272 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf retransmitinterval 100
ipv6 ospf transmit-delay
Use the ipv6 ospf transmit-delay command in Interface Configuration mode
to set the OSPF Transmit Delay for the specified interface.
Syntax
ipv6 ospf transmit-delay seconds
no ipv6 ospf transmit-delay
•
seconds — OSPF transmit delay for the specified interface. In addition, it
sets the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state
update packet over this interface. (Range: 1 to 3600 seconds)
Default Configuration
No default value.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the OSPF Transmit Delay at 100 seconds for
VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf transmit-delay
100
ipv6 router ospf
Use the ipv6 router ospf command in Global Configuration mode to enter
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
1272
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1273 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ipv6 router ospf
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
Use the following command to enable OSPFv3.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
maximum-paths
Use the maximum-paths command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
to set the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination.
Syntax
maximum-paths maxpaths
no maximum-paths
•
maxpaths — Number of paths that can be reported. (Range: 1-2)
Default Configuration
2 is the default value for maxpaths.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
OSPFv3 Commands
1273
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1274 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the number of paths that OSPF can report for a
destination to 1.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#maximum-paths 1
nsf
Use this command to enable OSPF graceful restart. Use the “no” form of this
command to disable graceful restart.
Syntax
nsf [ietf] [planned-only]
no nsf [ietf]
ietf — This keyword is used to distinguish the IETF standard
implementation of graceful restart from other implementations. Since the
IETF implementation is the only one supported, this keyword is optional.
planned-only — This keyword indicates that OSPF should only perform a
graceful restart when the restart is planned (i.e., when the restart is a result of
the initiate failover command).
Default Configuration
Graceful restart is disabled by default
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Graceful restart works in concert with nonstop forwarding to enable the
hardware to continue forwarding IPv6 packets using OSPFv3 routes while a
backup unit takes over management unit responsibility. When OSPF
executes a graceful restart, it informs its neighbors that the OSPF control
plane is restarting, but that it will be back shortly. Helpful neighbors continue
to advertise to the rest of the network that they have full adjacencies with the
restarting router, avoiding announcement of a topology change and
1274
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1275 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
everything that goes with that (i.e., flooding of LSAs, SPF runs). Helpful
neighbors continue to forward packets through the restarting router. The
restarting router relearns the network topology from its helpful neighbors.
This implementation of graceful restart restarting router behavior is only
useful with a router stack. Graceful restart does not work on a standalone,
single-unit router.
nsf helper
Use the nsf-helper to allow OSPF to act as a helpful neighbor for a restarting
router. Use the “no” form of this command to prevent OSPF from acting as a
helpful neighbor.
Syntax
nsf helper[ planned-only ]
no nsf helper
•
planned-only — This keyword indicates that OSPF should only help a
restarting router performing a planned restart.
Default Configuration
OSPF may act as a helpful neighbor for both planned and unplanned restarts
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The grace LSA announcing the graceful restart includes a restart reason.
Reasons 1 (software restart) and 2 (software reload/upgrade) are considered
planned restarts. Reasons 0 (unknown) and 3 (switch to redundant control
processor) are considered unplanned restarts.
nsf ietf helper disable is functionally equivalent to no nsf helper and is
supported solely for IS CLI compatibility.
OSPFv3 Commands
1275
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1276 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
nsf helper strict-lsa-checking
Use the nsf-helper strict-lsa-checking command to require that an OSPF
helpful neighbor exit helper mode whenever a topology change occurs. Use
the “no” form of this command to allow OSPF to continue as a helpful
neighbor in spite of topology changes.
Syntax
nsf [ietf ] helper strict-lsa-checking
no nsf [ietf ] helper strict-lsa-checking
•
ietf —This keyword is used to distinguish the IETF standard
implementation of graceful restart from other implementations. Since the
IETF implementation is the only one supported, this keyword is optional.
Default Configuration
A helpful neighbor exits helper mode when a topology change occurs.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The restarting router is unable to react to topology changes. In particular, the
restarting router will not immediately update its forwarding table; therefore, a
topology change may introduce forwarding loops or black holes that persist
until the graceful restart completes. By exiting the graceful restart on a
topology change, a router tries to eliminate the loops or black holes as quickly
as possible by routing around the restarting router.
A helpful neighbor considers a link down with the restarting router to be a
topology change, regardless of the strict LSA checking configuration.
nsf restart-interval
Use the nsf restart-interval command to configure the length of the grace
period on the restarting router. Use the “no” form of this command to revert
the grace period to its default.
1276
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1277 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
nsf [ietf ] restart-interval seconds
no nsf [ietf] restart-interval
•
ietf — This keyword is used to distinguish the IETF standard
implementation of graceful restart from other implementations. Since the
IETF implementation is the only one supported, this keyword is optional.
•
seconds — The number of seconds that the restarting router asks its
neighbors to wait before exiting helper mode. The restarting router
includes the restart interval in its grace LSAs (range 1–1800 seconds).
Default Configuration
The default restart interval is 120 seconds.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The grace period must be set long enough to allow the restarting router to
reestablish all of its adjacencies and complete a full database exchange with
each of those neighbors.
passive-interface
Use the passive-interface command to set the interface or tunnel as passive.
It overrides the global passive mode that is currently effective on the interface
or tunnel. Use the “no” form of this command to set the interface or tunnel
as non-passive.
Syntax
passive-interface {vlan vlan-id | tunnel tunnel-id }
no passive-interface {vlan vlan-id | tunnel tunnel-id }
•
vlan-id — The vlan number
•
tunnel-id — Tunnel identifier. (Range: 0–7)
OSPFv3 Commands
1277
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1278 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Passive interface mode is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-router)#passive-interface vlan 1
passive-interface default
The passive-interface default command enables the global passive mode by
default for all interfaces. It overrides any interface level passive mode. Use the
“no” form of this command to disable the global passive mode by default for
all interfaces. Any interface previously configured to be passive reverts to nonpassive mode.
Syntax
passive-interface default
no passive-interface default
Default Configuration
Global passive mode is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-rtr)#passive-interface default
1278
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1279 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
redistribute
Use the redistribute command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to
configure the OSPFv3 protocol to allow redistribution of routes from the
specified source protocol/routers.
Syntax
redistribute {static | connected} [metric metric] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [tag
tag ]
no redistribute {static | connected} [metric] [metric-type] [tag]
•
metric — Metric value used for default routes. (Range: 0-16777214)
•
tag — Tag. (Range: 0-4294967295)
Default Configuration
2 is the default value for metric-type, 0 for tag.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the OSPFv3 protocol to allow
redistribution of routes from the specified source protocol/routers.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#redistribute connected
router-id
Use the router-id command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to set a
4-digit dotted-decimal number uniquely identifying the Router OSPF ID.
OSPFv3 Commands
1279
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1280 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
router-id router-id
•
router-id — Router OSPF identifier. (Range: 0-4294967295)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets a 4-digit dotted-decimal number identifying the
Router OSPF ID as 2.3.4.5.
console(config)#ipv6 router ospf
console(config-rtr)#router-id 2.3.4.5
show ipv6 ospf
Use the show ipv6 ospf command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information relevant to the OSPF router.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf [area-id ]
area-id — Identifier for the OSPF area being displayed.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
1280
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1281 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Some of the information below displays only if you enable OSPF and
configure certain features. The following fields may be displayed:
Field
Description
Router ID
A 32-bit integer in dotted decimal format identifying the router
about which information is displayed. This is a configured value.
OSPF Admin
Mode
Shows whether OSPF is administratively enabled or disabled.
External LSDB
Limit
Shows the maximum number of non-default external LSAs
entries that can be stored in the link-state database.
Exit Overflow
Interval
Shows the number of seconds that, after entering
OverflowState, as defined by RFC 1765, a router will attempt to
leave OverflowState.
AutoCost Ref BW The configured autocost reference bandwidth. This value is used
to determine the OSPF metric on its interfaces. The reference
bandwidth is divided by the interface speed to compute the
metric.
Default Passive
Setting
When enabled, OSPF interfaces are passive by default.
Maximum Paths
Shows the maximum number of paths that OSPF can report for
a given destination.
Default Metric
Default metric for redistributed routes.
Default Route
Advertise
When enabled, OSPF originates a type 5 LSA advertising a
default route.
Always
When this option is configured, OSPF only originates a default
route when the router has learned a default route from another
source.
Metric
Shows the metric for the advertised default routes. If the metric
is not configured, this field is not configured.
Metric Type
Shows whether the metric for the default route is advertised as
External Type 1 or External Type 2.
Number of Active
Areas
The number of OSPF areas to which the router is attached on
interfaces that are up.
OSPFv3 Commands
1281
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1282 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ABR Status
Shows whether the router is an OSPF Area Border Router.
ASBR Status
Indicates whether the router is an autonomous system border
router. Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is
configured to redistribute routes learned from another protocol.
The possible values for the ASBR status is enabled (if the router
is configured to re-distribute routes learned by other protocols)
or disabled (if the router is not configured for the same).
Stub Router
OSPF enters stub router mode, as described in RFC 3137, when
it encounters a resource limitation that prevents it from
computing a complete routing table. In this state, OSPF sets the
link metrics of non-stub links in its own router LSAs to the
largest possible value, discouraging other routers from
computing paths through the stub router, but allowing other
routers to compute routes to destinations attached to the stub
router. To restore OSPF to normal operation, resolve the
condition that caused the resource overload, then disable and reenable OSPF globally.
External LSDB
Overflow
OSPF enters this state when the number of external LSAs
exceeds a configured limit, as described in RFC 1765.
External LSA
Count
Shows the number of external (LS type 5) link-state
advertisements in the link-state database.
External LSA
Checksum
Shows the sum of the LS checksums of external link-state
advertisements contained in the link-state database.
New LSAs
Originated
Shows the number of link-state advertisements that have been
originated.
LSAs Received
Shows the number of link-state advertisements received
determined to be new instantiations.
LSA Count
The number of LSAs in the link state database.
Maximum Number The limit on the number of LSAs that the router can store in its
of LSAs
link state database.
LSA High Water
Mark
The maximum number of LSAs that have been in the link state
database since OSPF began operation.
Retransmit List
Entries
The current number of entries on all neighbors’ retransmit lists.
1282
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1283 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Maximum Number The maximum number of entries that can be on neighbors’
of Retransmit
retransmit lists at any given time. This is the sum for all
Entries
neighbors. When OSPF receives an LSA and cannot allocate a
new retransmit list entry, the router does not acknowledge the
LSA, expecting the sender to retransmit.
Retransmit Entries The maximum number of retransmit list entries that have been
High Water Mark on all neighbors’ retransmit lists at one time.
NSF Support
Whether graceful restart is administratively enabled. Possible
values are Support Always, Disabled, or Planned.
NSF Restart
Interval
The number of seconds a helpful neighbor allows a restarting
router to complete its graceful restart.
NSF Restart Status Whether the router is currently performing a graceful restart.
NSF Restart Age
The number of seconds until a graceful restart expires. Only
non-zero when the router is in graceful restart.
NSF Restart Exit
Reason
The reason the previous graceful restart ended. Possible values
are Not attempted, In progress, Completed, Timed out,
Topology change, and Manual clear.
NSF Helper
Support
Whether this router is configured to act as a graceful restart
helpful neighbor. Possible values are: Helper Support Always,
Disabled, or Planned.
NSF Helper Strict As a graceful restart helpful neighbor, whether to terminate the
LSA Checking
helper relationship if a topology change occurs during a
neighbor's graceful restart.
Redistributing
This field is a heading and appears only if you configure the
system to take routes learned from a non-OSPF source and
advertise them to its peers.
Source
Shows source protocol/routes that are being redistributed.
Possible values are static, connected, or RIP.
Tag
Shows the decimal value attached to each external route.
Subnets
When this option is not configured, OSPF will only redistribute
classful prefixes.
Distribute-List
Shows the access list used to filter redistributed routes.
Example
The following example enables OSPF traps.
OSPFv3 Commands
1283
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1284 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show ipv6 ospf
Router ID...................................... 0.0.0.2
OSPF Admin Mode................................ Enable
ASBR Mode...................................... Disable
ABR Status..................................... Disable
Exit Overflow Interval......................... 0
External LSA Count............................. 0
External LSA Checksum.......................... 0
New LSAs Originated............................ 0
LSAs Received.................................. 0
External LSDB Limit............................ No Limit
Default Metric................................. Not Configured
Maximum Paths.................................. 2
Default Route Advertise........................ Disabled
Always......................................... FALSE
Metric.........................................
Metric Type.................................... External Type 2
NSF Support.................................... Disabled
NSF Restart Interval........................... 120 seconds
NSF Helper Support............................. Always
NSF Helper Strict LSA Checking................. Enabled
show ipv6 ospf abr
This command displays the internal OSPFv3 routes to reach Area Border
Routers (ABR). This command takes no options.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf abr
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1284
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1285 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ipv6 ospf abr
Type
Router Id
----
--------
Cost
----
Area ID
Next Hop
--------
Next Hop
Intf
-----------------------
-----
INTRA
3.3.3.3
10
0.0.0.1
FE80::211:88FF:FE2A:3CB3
vlan11
INTRA
4.4.4.4
10
0.0.0.1
FE80::210:18FF:FE82:8E1
vlan12
show ipv6 ospf area
Use the show ipv6 ospf area command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about the area.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf area areaid
•
areaid — Identifier for the OSPF area being displayed.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
OSPFv3 Commands
1285
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1286 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays information about area 1.
console#show ipv6 ospf area 1
AreaID........................................ 0.0.0.1
External Routing.............................. Import External LSAs
Spf Runs...................................... 0
Area Border Router Count...................... 0
Area LSA Count................................ 0
Area LSA Checksum............................. 0
Stub Mode..................................... Disable
Import Summary LSAs........................... Enable
show ipv6 ospf asbr
The show ipv6 ospf asbr command displays the internal OSPFv3 routes to
reach Autonomous System Boundary Routes (ASBR). This command takes
no options.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf asbr
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show ipv6 ospf asbr
Type
Router Id
Cost
Area ID
Next Hop
----
---------
----
--------
-----------------------
INTRA
1.1.1.1
10
Next Hop
Intf
1286
0.0.0.1
OSPFv3 Commands
FE80::213:C4FF:FEDB:6C41
------vlan10
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1287 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
INTRA
4.4.4.4
10
0.0.0.1
FE80::210:18FF:FE82:8E1
vlan12
show ipv6 ospf border-routers
Use the show ipv6 ospf command to display internal OSPFv3 routes to reach
Area Border Routers (ABR) and Autonomous System Boundary Routers
(ASBR). This command takes no options.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf border-routers
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
show ipv6 ospf database
Use the show ipv6 ospf database command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display information about the link state database when OSPFv3 is enabled. If
no parameters are entered, the command displays the LSA headers. Optional
parameters specify the type of link state advertisements to display.
The information below is only displayed if OSPF is enabled.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf [area-id] database [{external | inter-area {prefix | router} |
link | network | nssaexternal | prefix | router | unknown [area | as | link]}]
[link-state-id] [adv-router [router-id] | self-originate]
•
area-id — Identifies a specific OSPF area for which link state database
information will be displayed.
•
external — Displays the external LSAs.
•
inter-area — Displays the inter-area LSAs.
•
link — Displays the link LSAs.
•
network — Displays the network LSAs.
OSPFv3 Commands
1287
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1288 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
nssa-external — Displays NSSA external LSAs.
•
prefix — Displays intra-area Prefix LSA.
•
router — Displays router LSAs.
•
unknown — Displays unknown area, AS or link-scope LSAs.
•
link-state-id — Specifies a valid link state identifier (LSID).
•
adv-router — Shows the LSAs that are restricted by the advertising router.
•
router-id — Specifies a valid router identifier.
•
self-originate — Displays the LSAs in that are self originated.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information about the link state database
when OSPFv3 is enabled.
console#show ipv6 ospf database
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
0
4
80000034 54BD V6E--R- ----B
2.2.2.2
0
2
80000044 95A5 V6E--R- ----B
Network Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------2.2.2.2
1288
636
OSPFv3 Commands
636
80000001 8B0D V6E--R-
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1289 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Inter Network States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
1
323
80000001 3970
2.2.2.2
1
322
80000001 1B8A
1.1.1.1
2
293
80000001 3529
2.2.2.2
2
375
80000001 FC5E
Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
634
700
80000008 2D89 V6E--R-
2.2.2.2
634
689
8000000A 6F82 V6E--R-
2.2.2.2
635
590
80000001 7782 V6E--R-
Intra Prefix
Adv Router
States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
0
1
8000003C 9F31
2.2.2.2
0
2
8000004D 9126
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
0
1
8000002E 35AD V6E--R- --V-B
2.2.2.2
0
0
8000004A D2F3 V6E--R- ----B
Network Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
634
621
80000001 B9E2 V6E--R-
OSPFv3 Commands
1289
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1290 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Inter Network States (Area 0.0.0.1)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
16
4
80000001 CA7C
2.2.2.2
18
3
80000001 B28D
Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
634
441
80000003 B877 V6E--R-
2.2.2.2
634
433
80000003 FE6E V6E--R-
Intra Prefix
Adv Router
States (Area 0.0.0.1)
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
-------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1
0
2.2.2.2
0
1.1.1.1
10634
6
8000003A 37C4
1
8000004F 439A
434
80000002 440A
show ipv6 ospf database database-summary
Use the show ipv6 ospf database database-summary command in Privileged
EXEC mode to display the number of each type of LSA in the database and
the total number of LSAs in the database.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf database database-summary
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1290
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1291 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the number of each type of LSA in the
database and the total number of LSAs in the database.
console#show ipv6 ospf database database-summary
OSPF Router with ID (0.0.0.2)
Router database summary
Router......................................... 0
Network........................................ 0
Inter-area Prefix.............................. 0
Inter-area Router.............................. 0
Type-7 Ext..................................... 0
Link........................................... 0
Intra-area Prefix.............................. 0
Link Unknown................................... 0
Area Unknown................................... 0
AS Unknown..................................... 0
Type-5 Ext..................................... 0
Self-Originated Type-5 Ext..................... 0
Total.......................................... 0
show ipv6 ospf interface
Use the show ipv6 ospf interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the information for the IFO object or virtual interface tables.
OSPFv3 Commands
1291
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1292 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf interface [interface-type interface-number]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
The interface type, VLAN, tunnel or loopback
interface-number
The valid interface number, a valid VLAN ID, tunnel identifier
(Range: 0–7) or loopback identifier (Range: 0–7).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the information in VLAN 11’s virtual
interface tables.
console#show ipv6 ospf interface vlan 11
IP Address..................................... Err
ifIndex........................................ 1
OSPF Admin Mode................................ Enable
OSPF Area ID................................... 0.0.0.0
Router Priority................................ 1
Retransmit Interval............................ 5
Hello Interval................................. 10
Dead Interval.................................. 40
LSA Ack Interval............................... 1
1292
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1293 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 1
Authentication Type............................ None
Metric Cost.................................... 10
(computed)
OSPF Mtu-ignore................................ Disable
OSPF cannot be initialized on this interface.
show ipv6 ospf interface brief
Use the show ipv6 ospf interface brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display brief information for the IFO object or virtual interface tables.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf interface brief
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays brief ospf interface information.
console#show ipv6 ospf interface brief
Admin
Interface
Mode
Hello Dead
Retrax
Int.
Int.
Int.
Retrax Ack
Prior. Cost Val.
Val.
Val.
Delay
Router
Area ID
--------- -------- --------
LSA
Intval
------ ----- ----- ----- ------ ------ -----
OSPFv3 Commands
1293
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1294 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ipv6 ospf interface stats
Use the show ipv6 ospf interface stats command in User EXEC mode to
display the statistics for a specific interface. The command only displays
information if OSPF is enabled.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf interface stats vlan vlan-id
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the interface statistics for VLAN 5.
console>show
ipv6
ospf interface stats
vlan
5
OSPFv3 Area ID................................. 0.0.0.1
Spf Runs....................................... 265
Area Border Router Count....................... 1
AS Border Router Count......................... 0
Area LSA Count................................. 6
IPv6 Address...................................
FE80::202:BCFF:FE00:3146/1283FFE::2/64
OSPF Interface Events.......................... 53
Virtual Events................................. 13
Neighbor Events................................ 6
External LSA Count............................. 0
1294
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1295 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
LSAs Received.................................. 660
Originate New LSAs............................. 853
Sent Packets................................... 1013
Received Packets............................... 893
Discards....................................... 48
Bad Version.................................... 0
Virtual Link Not Found......................... 9
Area Mismatch.................................. 39
Invalid Destination Address.................... 0
No Neighbor at Source Address.................. 0
Invalid OSPF Packet Type....................... 0
Packet Type
Sent
Received
--------------------
----------
----------
Hello
295
Database Description
10
LS Request
4
LS Update
521
398
LS Acknowledgement
209
282
219
14
4
show ipv6 ospf interface vlan
Use the show ipv6 ospf interface vlan command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display OSPFv3 configuration and status information for a specific vlan.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf interface vlan {vlan-id | brief }
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID. Range is 1-4093.
•
brief — Displays a snapshot of configured interfaces.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
OSPFv3 Commands
1295
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1296 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays ospf interface vlan information.
console#show ipv6 ospf interface vlan 10
IPv6 Address.............................
FE80::2FC:E3FF:FE90:44
ifIndex.................................. 634
OSPF Admin Mode.......................... Enable
OSPF Area ID............................. 0.0.0.1
Router Priority.......................... 1
Retransmit Interval...................... 5
Hello Interval........................... 10
Dead Interval............................ 40
LSA Ack Interval......................... 1
Iftransit Delay Interval................. 1
Authentication Type...................... None
Metric Cost.............................. 10
(computed)
OSPF Mtu-ignore.......................... Disable
OSPF Interface Type...................... broadcast
State.................................... backupdesignated-router
Designated Router........................ 1.1.1.1
Backup Designated Router................. 2.2.2.2
Number of Link Events.................... 46
1296
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1297 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ipv6 ospf neighbor
Use the show ipv6 ospf neighbor command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display information about OSPF neighbors. If a neighbor IP address is not
specified, the output displays summary information in a table. If an interface
or tunnel is specified, only the information for that interface or tunnel
displays. The information below only displays if OSPF is enabled and the
interface has a neighbor.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf neighbor [interface-type interface-number] [neighbor-id]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Interface type, vlan or tunnel.
interface-number
A valid interface number, a valid VLAN ID or tunnel identifier.
(Range is 0-7).
neighbor-id
Valid IP address of the neighbor about which information is
displayed.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples display information about OSPF neighbors, in the
first case in a summary table, and in the second in a table specific to tunnel 1.
console#show ipv6 ospf neighbor
Router ID Priority Intf Interface
State
OSPFv3 Commands
Dead
1297
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1298 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ID
--------- -------- ---- -----------
Time
------------- ----
console#show ipv6 ospf neighbor interface tunnel 1
IP Address..................................... Err
ifIndex........................................ 619
OSPF Admin Mode................................ Enable
OSPF Area ID................................... 0.0.0.0
Router Priority................................ 1
Retransmit Interval............................ 5
Hello Interval................................. 10
Dead Interval.................................. 40
LSA Ack Interval............................... 1
Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 1
Authentication Type............................ None
Metric Cost.................................... 1
(computed)
OSPF Mtu-ignore................................ Disable
OSPF cannot be initialized on this interface.
show ipv6 ospf range
Use the show ipv6 ospf range command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about the area ranges for the specified area identifier.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf range areaid
•
areaid — Identifies the OSPF area whose ranges are being displayed.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1298
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1299 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information about the area ranges for area 1.
console#show ipv6 ospf range 1
Area ID
IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length
--------- -------------------------
Lsdb Type
Advertisement
--------------- -------------
show ipv6 ospf stub table
Use the show ipv6 ospf stub table command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the OSPF stub table. The information below will only be displayed if
OSPF is initialized on the switch.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf stub table
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the OSPF stub table.
console#show ipv6 ospf stub table
AreaId
TypeofService
Metric Val
Import SummaryLSA
OSPFv3 Commands
1299
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1300 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
------------ ------------0.0.0.10
----------
Normal
-----------------
1
Enable
show ipv6 ospf virtual-links
Use the show ipv6 ospf virtual-links command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the OSPF Virtual Interface information for a specific area and
neighbor or for all areas in the system. Syntax
show ipv6 ospf virtual-link [area-id neighbor-id | brief]
•
area-id — Identifies the OSPF area whose virtual interface information is
being displayed.
•
neighbor-id — Router ID of neighbor.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for
area 1 and its neighbor.
console#show ipv6 ospf virtual-link 1 1.1.1.1
Area ID........................................ 1
Neighbor Router ID............................. 1.1.1.1
Hello Interval................................. 10
Dead Interval.................................. 40
Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 1
Retransmit Interval............................ 5
State.......................................... point-to-point
1300
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1301 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Metric......................................... 10
Neighbor State................................. Full
show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief
Use the show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief command in Privileged EXEC mode
to display the OSPFV3 Virtual Interface information for all areas in the
system.
Syntax
show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the OSPF stub table.
console(config)#show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief
Area ID
Neighbor
Hello
Dead
Retransmit Transit
Interval
Interval
Interval
Delay
----------- ----------- ---------- ---------- ---------- --------
OSPFv3 Commands
1301
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1302 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1302
OSPFv3 Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1303 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Router Discovery Protocol
Commands
56
Routers can be configured to periodically send router discovery messages to
announce their presence to locally attached hosts. The router discovery
message advertises one or more IP addresses on the router that hosts can use
as their default gateway. Hosts can send a router solicitation message asking
any router that receives the message to immediately send a router
advertisement, so that the host does not have to wait for the next periodic
message.
Router discovery enables hosts to select from among multiple default
gateways and switch to a different default gateway if an initially designated
gateway goes down.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip irdp
ip irdp minadvertinterval
ip irdp address
ip irdp multicast
ip irdp holdtime
ip irdp preference
ip irdp maxadvertinterval
show ip irdp
ip irdp
Use the ip irdp command in Interface Configuration mode to enable Router
Discovery on an interface. Use the no form of the command to disable Router
Discovery.
Syntax
ip irdp [multicast | holdtime seconds | maxadvertinterval seconds |
minadvertinterval seconds | preference number | address address]
no ip irdp holdtime
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
1303
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1304 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
multicast
Configure the address that the interface uses to send the
router discovery advertisements to be 224.0.0.1, the all-hosts
IP multicast address. Use the no form of the command to
use 255.255.255.255, the limited broadcast address.
holdtime seconds
Integer value in seconds of the the holdtime field of the
router advertisement sent from this interface. (Range: 49000 seconds)
maxadvertinterval
seconds
Maximum time in seconds allowed between sending router
advertisements from the interface. (Range: 4 or the
minimum advertisement interval, whichever is greater, and
1800 seconds).
minadvertinterval
seconds
Minimum time in seconds allowed between sending router
advertisements from the interface. (Range: 3 to value of
maximum advertisement interval in seconds)
preference number
Preference of the address as a default router address, relative
to other router addresses on the same subnet.
(Range: -2147483648 to 2147483647)
address address
IP address for router discovery advertisements. (Range:
224.0.0.1 [all-hosts IP multicast address] or 255.255.255.255
[limited broadcast address])
Default Configuration
•
Router discovery is disabled by default.
•
1800 seconds is the default value for holdtime.
•
600 seconds is the default value for maxadvertinterval.
•
The minadvertinterval default value is 450.
•
The preference default value is 0.
•
IP address 224.0.0.1 is the default configuration for address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
1304
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1305 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables router discovery on the selected interface.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp
ip irdp address
Use the ip irdp address command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the address that the interface uses to send the router discovery
advertisements. Use the no form of the command to return the address to the
default.
Syntax
ip irdp address ip-address
no ip irdp address
•
ip-address — IP address for router discovery advertisements. (Range:
224.0.0.1 [all-hosts IP multicast address] or 255.255.255.255 [limited
broadcast address])
Default Configuration
IP address 224.0.0.1 is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines. This command is deprecated in favor
of the ip irdp multicast command. If you issue this command, the
configuration will show the ip irdp multicast command instead.
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
1305
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1306 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the limited broadcast address as the IP address for
router discovery advertisements.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp address
255.255.255.255
ip irdp holdtime
Use the ip irdp holdtime command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the value, in seconds, of the holdtime field of the router
advertisement sent from this interface. Use the no form of the command to
set the time to the default value.
Syntax
ip irdp holdtime integer
no ip irdp holdtime
•
integer — Integer value in seconds of the the holdtime field of the router
advertisement sent from this interface. The holdtime must be no less than
the maximum advertisement interval and cannot be greater than 9000
seconds.
Default Configuration
The holdtime defaults to 3 times the maximum advertisement interval.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
The holdtime is the length of time that a host considers the router
advertisement valid. After the holdtime expires, a host will no longer use the
router as its default gateway.
Example
The following example sets hold time at 2000 seconds for VLAN 15.
1306
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1307 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp holdtime 2000
ip irdp maxadvertinterval
Use the ip irdp maxadvertinterval command in Interface Configuration
mode to configure the maximum time, in seconds, allowed between sending
router advertisements from the interface. Use the no form of the command to
set the time to the default value.
Syntax
ip irdp maxadvertinterval integer
no ip irdp maxadvertinterval
•
integer — Maximum time in seconds allowed between sending router
advertisements from the interface. (Range: 4 or the minimum
advertisement interval, whichever is greater, and 1800 seconds)
Default Configuration
600 seconds is the default value.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
The default values of the minimum advertisement interval and the holdtime
depend on the value of the maximum advertisement interval. Setting the
maximum advertisement interval changes the minimum advertisement
interval and holdtime if those values are at their defaults; so, the maximum
advertisement interval should always be set first. If the minimum
advertisement interval has been configured to a non-default value, the
maximum advertisement interval cannot be configured to a lower value than
the minimum advertisement interval. If the holdtime has been configured to
a non-default value, the maximum advertisement interval cannot be
configured to a value larger than the holdtime.
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
1307
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1308 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets maximum advertisement interval at 600 seconds
for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp maxadvertinterval
600
ip irdp minadvertinterval
Use the ip irdp minadvertinterval command in Interface Configuration
mode to configure the minimum time, in seconds, allowed between sending
router advertisements from the interface. Use the no form of the command to
set the time to the default value.
Syntax
ip irdp minadvertinterval integer
no ip irdp minadvertinterval
•
integer — Minimum time in seconds allowed between sending router
advertisements from the interface. (Range: 3 to value of maximum
advertisement interval in seconds)
Default Configuration
The default value is 0.75 times the maximum advertisement interval.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets minimum advertisement interval at 100 seconds
for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
1308
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1309 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp minadvertinterval
100
ip irdp multicast
To send router advertisements as IP multicast packets, use the ip irdp
multicast command in Interface Configuration mode. To send router
advertisements to the limited broadcast address (255.255.255.255), use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
ip irdp multicast
no ip irdp multicast
Default Configuration
Router discovery packets are sent to the all hosts IP multicast address
(224.0.0.1) by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
If a subnet includes any hosts that do not accept IP multicast packets, send
router advertisements to the limited broadcast address.
Example
The following example configures router discovery to send to the limited
broadcast address:
console(config)#interface vlan 15804 Router Discovery
Protocol Commands www. d e l l . c om | s u p p o r t .
d e l l .com console(config-if-vlan15)#no ip irdp
multicast
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
1309
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1310 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip irdp preference
Use the ip irdp preference command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the preference of the address as a default router address relative to
other router addresses on the same subnet. Use the no form of the command
to set the preference to the default value.
Syntax
ip irdp preference integer
no ip irdp preference
•
integer — Preference of the address as a default router address, relative to
other router addresses on the same subnet. (Range: -2147483648 to
2147483647)
Default Configuration
0 is the default value.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the ip irdp preference to 1000 for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp preference 1000
show ip irdp
Use the show ip irdp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
router discovery information for all interfaces, or for a specified interface.
Syntax
show ip irdp [vlan vlan-id ]
1310
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1311 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows router discovery information for VLAN 15.
console#show ip irdp vlan 15
Interface
Ad Mode
---------
-------
vlan15
Enable
Advertise Address Max Int Min Int Hold Time Preference
----------------- ------- ------- -------- ---------224.0.0.1
600
450
1800
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
0
1311
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1312 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1312
Router Discovery Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1313 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Routing Information Protocol
Commands
57
The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) has been a long-standing protocol
used by routers for exchanging route information. RIP is a distance vector
protocol whereby each route is characterized by the number of gateways, or
hops, a packet must traverse to reach its intended destination. Categorized as
an interior gateway protocol, RIP operates within the scope of an autonomous
system. RIP is a simple protocol. Its usefulness is limited to moderately sized
networks whose physical interconnections are of similar type and speed.
PowerConnect routing supports RIPv2 as specified in RFC 2453.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
auto-summary
hostroutesaccept
router rip
default-information
originate
ip rip
show ip rip
default-metric
ip rip authentication
show ip rip interface
distance rip
ip rip receive version
show ip rip interface brief
distribute-list out
ip rip send version
split-horizon
enable
redistribute
auto-summary
Use the auto-summary command in Router RIP Configuration mode to
enable the RIP auto-summarization mode. Use the no form of the command
to disable auto-summarization mode.
Syntax
auto-summary
Routing Information Protocol Commands
1313
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1314 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no auto-summary
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-router)#auto-summary
default-information originate
Use the default-information originate command in Router RIP
Configuration mode to control the advertisement of default routes.
Syntax
default-information originate
no default-information originate
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-router)#default-information originate
1314
Routing Information Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1315 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
default-metric
Use the default-metric command in Router RIP Configuration mode to set a
default for the metric of distributed routes. Use the no form of the command
to return the metric to the default value.
Syntax
default-metric number-value
no default-metric
•
number-value — Metric for the distributed routes. (Range: 1-15)
Default Configuration
Default metric is not configured by default.
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets a default of 12 for the metric of distributed
routes.
console(config-router)#default-metric 12
distance rip
Use the distance rip command in Router RIP Configuration mode to set the
route preference value of RIP in the router. Lower route preference values are
preferred when determining the best route. Use the no form of the command
to return the preference to the default value.
Syntax
distance rip integer
no distance rip
Routing Information Protocol Commands
1315
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1316 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
integer — RIP route preference. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
15 is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the route preference value of RIP in the router at
100.
console(config-router)#distance rip 100
distribute-list out
Use the distribute-list out command in Router RIP Configuration mode to
specify the access list to filter routes received from the source protocol. Use
the no form of the command to remove the access list from the specified
source protocol.
Syntax
distribute-list accesslistname out {ospf | static | connected}
no distribute-list accesslistname out {ospf | static | connected}
•
accesslistname — The name used to identify the existing ACL. The range
is 1-31 characters.
•
ospf — Apply the specific access list when OSPF is the source protocol.
•
static — Apply the specified access list when packets come through a static
route.
•
connected — Apply the specified access list when packets come from a
directly connected route.
1316
Routing Information Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1317 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example elects access list ACL40 to filter routes received from
the source protocol.
console(config-router)#distribute-list ACL40 out
static
enable
Use the enable command in Router RIP Configuration mode to reset the
default administrative mode of RIP in the router (active). Use the no form of
the command to disable the administrative mode for RIP.
Syntax
enable
no enable
Default Configuration
Enabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Routing Information Protocol Commands
1317
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1318 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-router)#enable
hostroutesaccept
Use the hostroutesaccept command in Router RIP Configuration mode to
enable the RIP hostroutesaccept mode. Use the no form of the command to
disable the RIP hostroutesaccept mode.
Syntax
hostroutesaccept
no hostroutesaccept
Default Configuration
Enabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-router)#hostroutesaccept
ip rip
Use the ip rip command in Interface Configuration mode to enable RIP on a
router interface. Use the no form of the command to disable RIP on the
interface.
Syntax
ip rip
no ip rip
1318
Routing Information Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1319 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-vlan2)#ip rip
console(config-if-vlan2)#no ip rip
ip rip authentication
Use the ip rip authentication command in Interface Configuration Mode to
set the RIP Version 2 Authentication Type and Key for the specified VLAN.
Use the no form of the command to return the authentication to the default
value.
Syntax
ip rip authentication {none | {simple key} | {encrypt key key-id}}
no ip rip authentication
•
none—Do not use RIP authentication on the VLAN.
•
simple—Use simple authentication on the VLAN.
•
key — Authentication key for the VLAN. (Range: 16 bytes or less)
•
encrypt — Use MD5 encryption for the RIP interface.
•
key-id — Authentication key identifier for authentication type encrypt.
(Range: 0-255)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Routing Information Protocol Commands
1319
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1320 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the RIP Version 2 Authentication Type and Key
for VLAN 11.
console(config-if-vlan11)#ip rip authentication
encrypt pass123 35
ip rip receive version
Use the ip rip receive version command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified version(s)
to be received. Use the no form of the command to return the version to the
default value.
Syntax
ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none}
no ip rip receive version
•
rip1 — Receive only RIP version 1 formatted packets.
•
rip2 — Receive only RIP version 2 formatted packets.
•
both — Receive packets from either format.
•
none — Do not allow any RIP control packets to be received.
Default Configuration
Both is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
1320
Routing Information Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1321 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example allows no RIP control packets to be received by VLAN
11.
console(config-if-vlan11)#ip rip receive version none
ip rip send version
Use the ip rip sent version command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified version to
be sent. Use the no form of the command to return the version to the default
value.
Syntax
ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none}
no ip rip send version
•
rip1 — Send RIP version 1 formatted packets.
•
rip1c — Send RIP version 1 compatibility mode, which sends RIP version
2 formatted packets via broadcast.
•
rip2 — Send RIP version 2 using multicast.
•
none — Do not allow any RIP control packets to be sent.
Default Configuration
RIP2 is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Routing Information Protocol Commands
1321
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1322 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example allows no RIP control packets to be sent by VLAN 11.
console(config-if-vlan11)#ip rip send version none
redistribute
The redistribute command configures RIP protocol to redistribute routes
from the specified source protocol/routers. If the source protocol is OSPF,
there are five possible match options.
Syntax
redistribute ospf [metric integer] [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2]
[nssa-external 1] [nssa-external 2]]
no redistribute ospf
redistribute { static | connected} [metric integer]
•
metric integer — Specifies the metric to use when redistributing the route.
Range: 0-15.
•
match internal — Adds internal matches to any match types presently
being redistributed.
•
match external 1 — Adds routes imported into OSPF as Type-1 external
routes into any match types presently being redistributed.
•
match external 2 — Adds routes imported into OSPF as Type-2 external
routes into any match types presently being redistributed.
•
match nssa-external 1 — Adds routes imported into OSPF as NSSA Type1 external routes into any match types presently being redistributed.
•
match nssa-external 2 — Adds routes imported into OSPF as NSSA Type2 external routes into any match types presently being redistributed.
•
static — Redistributes static routes.
•
connected — Redistributes directly-connected routes.
Default Configuration
metric integer — not configured
match — internal
1322
Routing Information Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1323 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-router)#redistribute ospf metric 10
match nssa-external 1
console(config-router)#redistribute connected metric
1
router rip
Use the router rip command in Global Configuration mode to enter Router
RIP mode.
Syntax
router rip
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enters Router RIP mode.
console(config)#router rip
console(config-router)#
Routing Information Protocol Commands
1323
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1324 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip rip
Use the show ip rip command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information relevant to the RIP router.
Syntax
show ip rip
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information relevant to the RIP router.
console#show ip rip
RIP Admin Mode................................. Enable
Split Horizon Mode............................. Simple
Auto Summary Mode.............................. Enable
Host Routes Accept Mode........................ Enable
Global route changes........................... 0
Global queries................................. 0
Default Metric................................. 12
Default Route Advertise........................ 0
Redistributing.................................
Source......................................... Connected
Metric......................................... 2
Distribute List................................ Not configured
Redistributing.................................
Source......................................... ospf
1324
Routing Information Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1325 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Metric......................................... 10
Match Value.................................... 'nssa-external 1'
Distribute List................................ Not configured
show ip rip interface
Use the show ip rip interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information related to a particular RIP interface.
Syntax
show ip rip interface vlan vlan-id
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays information related to the VLAN 15 RIP
interface.
console#show ip rip interface vlan 15
Interface...................................... 15
IP Address..................................... ----Send version................................... RIP-2
Receive version................................ Both
RIP Admin Mode................................. Disable
Link State..................................... ----Authentication Type............................ MD5
Routing Information Protocol Commands
1325
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1326 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Authentication Key............................. "pass123"
Authentication Key ID.......................... 35
Bad Packets Received........................... ----Bad Routes Received............................ ----Updates Sent................................... -----
show ip rip interface brief
Use the show ip rip interface brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display general information for each RIP interface. For this command to
display successful results routing must be enabled per interface (i.e. ip rip).
Syntax
show ip rip interface brief
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays general information for each RIP interface.
console#show ip rip interface brief
Interface
IP Address
Send
Receive
RIP
Version
Version
Mode
Link
State
---------- ----------
-------- ----------- --------- ----------
vlan1
0.0.0.0
RIP-2
Both
Disable
Down
vlan2
0.0.0.0
RIP-2
Both
Disable
Down
1326
Routing Information Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1327 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
split-horizon
Use the split-horizon command in Router RIP Configuration mode to set the
RIP split horizon mode. Use the no form of the command to return the mode
to the default value.
Syntax
split-horizon {none | simple | poison}
no split-horizon
•
none — RIP does not use split horizon to avoid routing loops.
•
simple — RIP uses split horizon to avoid routing loops.
•
poison — RIP uses split horizon with poison reverse (increases routing
packet update size).
Default Configuration
Simple is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Router RIP Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example does not use split horizon.
console(config-router)#split-horizon none
Routing Information Protocol Commands
1327
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1328 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1328
Routing Information Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1329 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Tunnel Interface Commands
58
PowerConnect provides for the creation, deletion, and management of tunnel
interfaces. They are dynamic interfaces that are created and deleted by user
configuration.
Tunnel interfaces are used for the following purposes.
•
IPv4 tunnels
•
IPv6 tunnels
Each router interface (port or VLAN interface) may have associated tunnel
interfaces. Each interface can have multiple tunnel interfaces. There is no set
limit to the number of tunnel interfaces associated with a router interface.
There is a compile platform limitation to the number of tunnel interfaces
available to the entire system.
To support IPv4 to IPv6 transition, PowerConnect supports configured
tunnels (RFC 4213) and automatic 6to4 tunnels (RFC 3056). 6to4 tunnels
are automatically formed for IPv4 tunnels carrying IPv6 traffic. The
automatic tunnels IPv4 destination address is derived from the 6to4 IPv6
address of the tunnel’s next hop. PowerConnect can act as a 6to4 border
router that connects a 6to4 site to a 6to4 domain. The border router sends
and receives tunneled traffic from routers in the 6to4 domain that include
other 6to4 border routers and 6to4 relay routers.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
interface tunnel
tunnel mode ipv6ip
show interfaces tunnel
tunnel source
tunnel destination
Tunnel Interface Commands
1329
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1330 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
interface tunnel
Use the interface tunnel command in Global Configuration mode to enter
the interface configuration mode for a tunnel.
Syntax
interface tunnel tunnel-id
no interface tunnel tunnel-id
•
tunnel-id — Tunnel identifier. (Range: 0–7)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables the interface configuration mode for tunnel 1.
console(config)#interface tunnel 1
console(config-if-tunnel1)#
show interfaces tunnel
Use the show interfaces tunnel command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the parameters related to tunnel such as tunnel mode, tunnel source
address and tunnel destination address.
Syntax
show interfaces tunnel [tunnel-id ]
•
1330
tunnel-id — Tunnel identifier. (Range: 0–7)
Tunnel Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1331 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples show the parameters related to an individual tunnel
and to all tunnel interfaces.
console#show interfaces tunnel 1
Interface Link Status.......................... down
MTU size....................................... 1480 bytes
console#show interfaces tunnel
TunnelId
Interface
TunnelMode
SourceAddress
--------
---------
----------
-------------
1
tunnel 1
IPv6OVER4
10.254.25.14
2
tunnel 2
IPv6OVER4
DestinationAddress
---------------10.254.25.10
10.254.20.10
tunnel destination
Use the tunnel destination command in Interface Configuration mode to
specify the destination transport address of the tunnel.
Syntax
tunnel destination ip-address
no tunnel destination
•
ip-address — Valid IPv4 address.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Tunnel Interface Commands
1331
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1332 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Tunnel) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example specifies the destination transport address of tunnel 1.
console(config)#interface tunnel 1
console(config-if-tunnel1)#tunnel destination
10.1.1.1
tunnel mode ipv6ip
Use the tunnel mode ipv6ip command in Interface Configuration mode to
specify the mode of the tunnel.
Syntax
tunnel mode ipv6ip [6to4]
no tunnel mode
•
6to4 — Sets the tunnel mode to automatic.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Tunnel) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example specifies ipv6ip mode for tunnel 1.
1332
Tunnel Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1333 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface tunnel 1
console(config-if-tunnel1)#tunnel mode ipv6ip
console(config-if-tunnel1)#tunnel mode ipv6ip 6to4
tunnel source
Use the tunnel source command in Interface Configuration mode to specify
the source transport address of the tunnel, either explicitly or by reference to
an interface.
Syntax
tunnel source {ip-address | interface-type interface-number}
no tunnel source
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
Valid IPv4 address.
interface-type
Valid interface type. VLAN is the only type supported.
interface-number
Valid interface number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Tunnel) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example specifies VLAN 11 as the source transport address of
the tunnel.
Tunnel Interface Commands
1333
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1334 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface tunnel 1
console(config-if-tunnel1)#tunnel source vlan 11
1334
Tunnel Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1335 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
59
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
Commands
An end station running IP needs to know the address of its first hop router.
While some network administrators choose to install dynamic router
discovery protocols such as DHCP, others prefer to statically allocate router
addresses. If the router identified by such a statically allocated address goes
down, the end station loses connectivity. The Virtual Router Redundancy
Protocol (VRRP) is designed to provide backup for the failing router without
requiring any action on the part of the end station. It is based on the concept
of having more than one router recognize the same IP address. One of the
routers is elected the master router and handles all traffic sent to the specified
virtual router IP address. If the master router fails, one of the backup routers
is elected in its place and starts handling traffic sent to the address. This
change is transparent to end stations.
VRRP increases the availability of the default path without requiring
configuration of dynamic routing or router discovery protocols on every end
station.
Multiple virtual routers can be defined on a single router interface.
Pingable VRRP Interface
RFC 3768 specifies that a router may only accept IP packets sent to the
virtual router’s IP address if the router is the address owner. In practice, this
restriction makes it more difficult to troubleshoot network connectivity
problems. When a host cannot communicate, it is common to ping (send an
ICMP Echo Request) the host’s default gateway to determine whether the
problem is in the first hop of the path to the destination. When the default
gateway is a virtual router that does not respond to pings, the operator cannot
use this troubleshooting technique. Because of this, it has been common for
VRRP implementations to respond to pings, in spite of the prohibition in the
RFC. The IETF has recognized the issue, and a draft revision of the VRRP
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1335
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1336 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
RFC defines a new configuration option that allows the router to accept any
packet sent to a VRRP address, regardless of whether the VRRP Master is the
address owner.
The Pingable VRRP Interface feature, when enabled, allows the VRRP master
to respond to both fragmented and unfragmented ICMP echo requests
packets destined to a VRRP address (or addresses). A virtual router in backup
state discards these. For any packet destined to a VRRP address (or
addresses), the VRRP master responds with VRRP address as the source IPv4
address and VRMAC as the source MAC address. A configuration option
controls whether the router responds to Echo Requests sent to a VRRP IP
address.
PowerConnect 4.0 includes a separate configuration option that controls
whether the router responds to ICMP Echo Requests. When Echo Replies are
disabled using that option, the VRRP master does not respond to Echo
Requests, even if this new option is enabled.
VRRP Route/Interface Tracking
The VRRP Route/Interface Tracking feature extends the capability of the
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) to allow tracking of specific
route/interface IP states, within the router, that can alter the priority level of a
virtual router for a VRRP group. Exception to this is, if that VRRP group is
the IP address owner, and, in that case, its priority is fixed at 255 and cannot
be reduced through the tracking process.
VRRP Route/Interface Tracking provides a way to ensure the best VRRP
router is master for the group by altering VRRP priorities to the status of
tracked objects, such as IP interface or IP route states. In the process of
altering the VRRP priorities the priority must not go below 1 or above the
configured priority.
NOTE: Note that the mastership only switches on a priority change if preempt is
enabled.
1336
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1337 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interface Tracking
For interface tracking, VRRP is a routing event client. When a routing
interface goes up or down (or routing is disabled globally, implying all routing
interfaces are down), VRRP checks if the interface is tracked. If so, it adjusts
the priority. Interface tracking is useful for tracking interfaces that are not
configured for VRRP. Only IP interfaces are tracked.
Route Tracking
The network operator may perform this task to track the reachability of an IP
route. A tracked route is considered up when a routing table entry exists for
the route and the route is accessible. For route tracking, make VRRP a best
route client of RTO. When a tracked route is added or deleted, change the
priority. For simplicity, routes are not distinguished with the next hop
interface that has VRRP enabled. So VRRP Route Tracking can ignore route
modifications.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
ip vrrp
vrrp timers advertise
vrrp accept-mode
vrrp timers learn
vrrp authentication
vrrp track interface
vrrp description
vrrp track ip route
vrrp ip
show vrrp
vrrp mode
show vrrp interface
vrrp preempt
show vrrp interface brief
vrrp priority
show vrrp interface stats
Pingable VRRP Commands
ip vrrp accept-mode
show ip vrrp interface
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1337
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1338 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
ip vrrp
Use the ip vrrp command in Global Configuration mode to enable the
administrative mode of VRRP for the router. Use the no form of the
command to disable the administrative mode of VRRP for the router.
Syntax
ip vrrp
no ip vrrp
Default Configuration
VRRP is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables VRRP protocol on the router.
console(config)#ip vrrp
vrrp accept-mode
Use the vrrp accept-mode command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration
mode to enable the VRRP Master to accept ping packets sent to one of the
virtual router’s IP addresses. Use the no form of the command to disable
responding to ping packets.
Syntax
vrrp vrid accept-mode
no vrrp vrid accept-mode
1338
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1339 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
vrid — Virtual router identification. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
The default configuration is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
vrrp authentication
Use the vrrp authentication command in Interface Configuration mode to
set the authentication details value for the virtual router configured on a
specified interface. Use the no form of the command to return the
authentication type to the default value.
Syntax
vrrp group authentication {none | simple key}
no vrrp group authentication
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
group
The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
none
Indicates authentication type is none.
simple
Authentication type is a simple text password.
key
The key for simple authentication. (Range: String values)
Default Configuration
None is the default configuration.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1339
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1340 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the authorization details value for VRRP router
group 5 on VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 2 authentication
simple test123
vrrp description
Use the vrrp description command in Interface Configuration mode to assign
a description to the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) group. To
remove the description, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
vrrp group description text
no vrrp group description
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
group
The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
text
Description for the virtual router group up to 80 characters.
Default Configuration
No description is present.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
1340
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1341 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Descriptions containing spaces must be wrapped with quotes.
Example
The following example creates virtual router group 5 on VLAN 15 and
configures its description.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 5
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 5 description “Sales
and Marketing”
vrrp ip
Use the vrrp ip command in Interface Configuration mode to enable VRRP
and set the virtual router IP address value for an interface. Use the no form of
the command remove the secondary IP address. It is not possible to remove
the primary IP address once assigned. Remove the VRRP group instead.
Syntax
vrrp group ip ip-address [secondary]
no vrrp group ip ip-address vlan secondary
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
group
The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
ip-address
The IP address of the virtual router.
secondary
Designates the virtual router IP address as a secondary IP
address on an interface.
Default Configuration
VRRP is not configured on the interface.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1341
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1342 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
The virtual router IP addresses must be on the local subnet configured on the
VLAN. To configure vrrp, perform the following steps:
1 Enable ip routing in global configuration mode.
2 Enable ip vrrp globally.
3 Set an IP address on the desired interface where VRRP is to be configured.
4 Configure the VRRP group ID on the selected interface.
5 Set the virtual router ID and address on the selected interface.
6 Enable VRRP on the interface using the vrrp mode command.
Example
The following example configures VRRP on VLAN 15.
console#configure
console(config)#ip routing
console(config)#ip vrrp
console(config)#vlan database
console(config-vlan)#vlan 15
console(config-vlan)#vlan routing 15
console(config-vlan)#exit
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#ip address 192.168.5.1 255.255.255.0
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 20
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 20 ip 192.168.5.20
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 20 mode
vrrp mode
Use the vrrp mode command in Interface Configuration mode to enable the
virtual router configured on an interface. Enabling the status field starts a
virtual router. Use the no form of the command to disable the virtual router.
1342
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1343 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
vrrp vr-id mode
no vrrp vr-id mode
• vr-id — The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
Disabled is the default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables the virtual router for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 5 mode
vrrp preempt
Use the vrrp preempt command in Interface Configuration mode to set the
preemption mode value for the virtual router configured on a specified
interface. Use the no form of the command to disable preemption mode.
Syntax
vrrp group preempt [delay seconds]
no vrrp group preempt
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
group
The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1343
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1344 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
seconds
The number of seconds the VRRP router will wait before
issuing an advertisement claiming master ownership.
Default Configuration
Enabled is the default configuration. Delay defaults to 0 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
As per the VRRP RFC, when preemption is enabled, the backup router
discards the advertisements until the masterdowntimer starts. This feature
requires immediate sending of advertisements when the preemption case
occurs and the delay is 0. This is a violation according to the RFC 3768.
Delay, if configured, will cause the VRRP router to wait the specified number
of seconds before issuing an advertisement claiming master ownership.
Example
The following example sets the preemption mode value for the virtual router
for VLAN 15.
console(config)#interface vlan 15
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 5 preempt
vrrp priority
Use the vrrp priority command in Interface Configuration mode to set the
priority value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface. Use
the no form of the command to return the priority to the default value.
Syntax
vrrp group priority level
no vrrp group priority level
• group — The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
1344
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1345 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
level — Priority value for the interface. (Range: 1-254)
Default Configuration
Priority has a default value of 100.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the priority value for the virtual router 5 on VLAN
15.
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 5 priority 20
vrrp timers advertise
Use the vrrp timers advertise command in Interface Configuration mode to
set the frequency, in seconds, that an interface on the specified virtual router
sends a virtual router advertisement. Use the no form of the command to
return the advertisement frequency to the default value.
Syntax
vrrp group timers advertise interval
no vrrp group timers advertise interval
• group — The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
• interval — The frequency at which an interface on the specified virtual
router sends a virtual router advertisement. (Range: 1-255 seconds)
Default Configuration
Interval has a default value of 1.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1345
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1346 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the frequency at which the VLAN 15 virtual
router 5 sends a virtual router advertisement.
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 5 timers advertise 10
vrrp timers learn
Use the vrrp timers learn command in Interface Configuration mode to
configure the router, when it is acting as backup virtual router for a Virtual
Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) group, to learn the advertisement
interval used by the master virtual router. Use the no form of the command to
prevent the router from learning the advertisement interval from the master
virtual router.
Syntax
vrrp group timers learn
no vrrp group timers learn
• group — The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
Timer learning is disabled by default and the router uses the configured
advertisement.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1346
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1347 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following configures VLAN 15 virtual router to learn the advertisement
interval used by the master virtual router.
console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 5 timers learn
vrrp track interface
Use the vrrp track interface command in Interface Configuration mode to
alter the priority of the VRRP router based on the availability of its interfaces.
It is useful for tracking interfaces that are not configured for VRRP. Only
routing interfaces may be tracked. A tracked interface is up if routing on that
interface is up. Otherwise, the tracked interface is down.
When the tracked interface is down, or the interface has been removed from
the router, the priority of the VRRP router will be decremented by the value
specified in the priority argument. When the interface is up for the IP
protocol, the priority will be incremented by the priority value.
A VRRP configured interface can track more than one interface. When a
tracked interface goes down, then the priority of the router will be decreased
by 10 (default priority decrement) for each downed interface. The default
priority decrement is changed using the priority argument. The default
priority of the virtual router is 100, and the default decrement priority is 10.
By default, no interfaces are tracked. If you specify, just the interface to be
tracked without giving the priority, which is optional, then the default priority
will be set.
Use the no form of this command to remove the interface from the tracked
list or to restore the priority decrement to its default. When removing an
interface from the tracked list, the priority is incremented by the decrement
value if that interface is down.
Syntax
vrrp group track interface vlan vlan-id [decrement priority]
no vrrp group track interface vlan vlan-id
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1347
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1348 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
group
The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
vlan vlan-id
Valid VLAN ID.
Priority decrement value for the tracked interface. (Range: 1-
priority
254)
Default Configuration
No interfaces are tracked. The default decrement priority is 10.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example adds VLAN 2 to the virtual router tracked list (with a
priority decrement value of 20.)
(config-if-vlan10)#vrrp 1 track interface vlan 2
decrement 20
vrrp track ip route
Use the vrrp track ip route command to track the route reachability. When
the tracked route is deleted, the priority of the VRRP router is decremented
by the value specified in the priority argument. When the tracked route is
added, the priority is incremented by the same. A VRRP configured interface
can track more than one route. When a tracked route goes down, the priority
of the router is decreased by 10 (default priority decrement) for each downed
route. By default no routes are tracked. If we specify just the route to be
tracked without specifying the optional parameter, then the default priority
will be set.
1348
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1349 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Use the no form of this command to remove the route from the tracked list or
to restore the priority decrement to its default. When removing a tracked IP
route from the tracked list, priority should be incremented by the decrement
value if the route is not reachable.
Syntax
vrrp group track ip route ip-address/prefix-length [ decrement priority ]
no vrrp group track ip route ip-address/prefix-length
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
group
The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1–255).
ip-address/prefix-length
Specifies the route to be tracked.
priority
Priority decrement value for the tracked route. (Range:
1–254).
Default Configuration
There are no routes tracked by default.
The default decrement priority is 10.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example adds the route 2.2.2.0/24 to the virtual router tracked
list (with a priority decrement value of 20).
console(config-if-vlan10)#vrrp 1 track ip route
2.2.2.0/24 decrement 20
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1349
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1350 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show vrrp
Use the show vrrp command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to
display the global VRRP configuration and status as well as the brief or
detailed status of one or all VRRP groups.
Syntax
show vrrp [brief | group]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
group
The virtual router group identifier. Range 1-255.
brief
Provide a summary view of the VRRP group information.
Default Configuration
Show information on all VRRP groups.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays detailed VRRP status.
console# show vrrp
Admin Mode.....................................
Enable
Router Checksum Errors......................... 0
Router Version Errors.......................... 0
Router VRID Errors............................. 0
1350
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1351 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Vlan 7 – Group 1
Primary IP Address.............................
192.168.5.55
VMAC Address...................................
0000.5E00.0101
Authentication Type............................ None
Priority....................................... 60
Configured Priority............................ 100
Advertisement Interval (secs).................. 10
Accept Mode....................................
Enable
Pre-empt Mode..................................
Enable
Pre-empt Delay..................................
Enable
Administrative Mode............................
Enable
State..........................................
Initialized
Timers Learn Mode................................
Enable
Description .....................................
Track Interface................................ vlan
3
Track Interface State ......................... Down
Track Interface DecrementPriority ............. 20
Track Route (pfx/len) .........................
10.10.10.0/24
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1351
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1352 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Track Route Reachable ......................... False
Track Route DecrementPriority ................. 20
Vlan 7 – Group 2
Primary IP Address.............................
192.168.5.65
VMAC Address...................................
0000.5E00.0202
Authentication Type............................ None
Priority....................................... 60
Configured Priority............................ 100
Advertisement Interval (secs).................. 10
Accept Mode ...................................
Enable
Pre-empt Mode..................................
Enable
Pre-empt Delay................................. 0
Administrative Mode............................
Enable
State..........................................
Initialized
Timers Learn Mode............................ Disable
Description .....................................
Track Interface................................ vlan
3
Track Interface State ......................... Down
Track Interface DecrementPriority ............. 20
1352
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1353 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Track Route (pfx/len) .........................
10.10.10.0/24
Track Route Reachable ......................... False
Track Route DecrementPriority ................. 20
console#show vrrp brief
Interface Grp Prio IP Address
Mode
State
--------- --- ---- -------------- ------
------------
V1 1
2
60 0.0.0.0
Disable Initialize
V1 2
5
70 192.168.5.55
Enable
Initialize
show vrrp interface
Use the show vrrp interface command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display all configuration information and VRRP router statistics of a
virtual router configured on a specific interface.
Syntax
show vrrp interface [brief | vlan vlan-id {stats}]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
brief
Display summary information about each virtual router
configured on the switch.
stats
Display the statistical information about each virtual router
configured on the VLAN.
vlan-id
Display information about each virtual router configured on the
VLAN. Valid interface type (VLAN) and interface number
(vlan-id).
Default Configuration
Show information for each group in the specified interface.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1353
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1354 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays all configuration information about the
VLAN 15 virtual router.
console#show vrrp interface vlan 7
Vlan 7 – Group 1
Primary IP Address........................... 192.168.5.55
VMAC Address................................ 0000.5E00.0101
Authentication Type............................ None
Priority....................................... 100
Configured Priority............................ 100
Advertisement Interval (secs).................. 10
Accept Mode.................................... Disable
Pre-empt Mode.................................. Enable
Pre-empt Delay................................. 0
Administrative Mode............................ Enable
State.......................................... Initialized
Timers Learn Mode.............................. Disable
Description.................................... GoodStuff
The following example displays all configuration information about the
virtual router on the selected interface.
console#show vrrp interface brief
Interface VRID IP Address
Mode
--------- ---- -------------- -----vlan1
1354
2
0.0.0.0
State
------------
Disable Initialize
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1355 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
vlan2
5
192.168.5.55
Enable
Initialize
The following example displays all statistical information about the VLAN 15
virtual router.
console#show vrrp interface vlan 15 stats
Vlan 15 – Group 5
UpTime........................... 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins 0 secs
Protocol....................................... IP
State Transitioned to Master................... 0
Advertisement Received......................... 0
Advertisement Interval Errors.................. 0
Authentication Failure......................... 0
IP TTL Errors.................................. 0
Zero Priority Packets Received................. 0
Zero Priority Packets Sent..................... 0
Invalid Type Packets Received.................. 0
Address List Errors ........................... 0
Invalid Authentication Type.................... 0
Authentication Type Mismatch................... 0
Packet Length Errors........................... 0
show vrrp interface brief
Use the show vrrp interface brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display information about each virtual router configured on the switch. It
displays information about each virtual router.
Syntax
show vrrp interface brief
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1355
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1356 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays all configuration information about the
virtual router on the selected interface.
console#show vrrp interface brief
Interface VRID IP Address
Mode
--------- ---- -------------- ------
State
------------
vlan1
2
0.0.0.0
Disable Initialize
vlan2
5
192.168.5.55
Enable
Initialize
show vrrp interface stats
Use the show vrrp interface stats command in User EXEC mode to display
the statistical information about each virtual router configured on the switch.
Syntax
show vrrp interface stats vlan vlan-id vr-id
•
vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
•
vr-id — The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1356
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1357 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays all statistical information about the VLAN 15
virtual router.
console#show vrrp interface stats vlan 15 5
UpTime..................... 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins 0 secs
Protocol....................................... IP
State Transitioned to Master................... 0
Advertisement Received......................... 0
Advertisement Interval Errors.................. 0
Authentication Failure......................... 0
IP TTL Errors.................................. 0
Zero Priority Packets Received................. 0
Zero Priority Packets Sent..................... 0
Invalid Type Packets Received.................. 0
Address List Errors ........................... 0
Invalid Authentication Type.................... 0
Authentication Type Mismatch................... 0
Packet Length Errors........................... 0
Pingable VRRP Commands
ip vrrp accept-mode
Use the ip vrrp accept-mode command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration
mode to enable the VRRP Master to accept ping packets sent to one of the
virtual router’s IP addresses. Use the no form of the command to disable
responding to ping packets.
Syntax
ip vrrp vrid accept-mode
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1357
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1358 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no vrrp vrid accept-mode
•
vrid — Virtual router identification. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
The default configuration is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
show ip vrrp interface
Use the show ip vrrp interface command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display the configured value for Accept Mode.
Syntax
show ip vrrp interface interface-id vrid
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
interface-id
Any valid routing interface. See Interface Naming Conventions
for interface representation.
vrid
The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255)
Default Configuration
The command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
1358
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1359 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays all configuration information about the
VLAN 15 virtual router.
console#show ip vrrp interface vlan2 1
Primary IP Address........................... 10.10.10.1
VMAC Address............................. 00:00:5E:00:01:01
Authentication Type............................ None
Priority....................................... 100
Configured Priority............................ 100
Advertisement Interval (secs).................. 1
Pre-empt Mode.................................. Enable
Administrative Mode............................ Disable
Accept Mode.................................... Enable
State.......................................... Initialized
Track Interface State Decrement Priority
--------------- ------------- -----------No interfaces are tracked for this vrid and interface
combination.
Track Route(pfx/len) Reachable Decrement Priority
--------------- ------------- -----------No routes are tracked for this vrid and interface
combination.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
1359
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1360 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1360
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1361 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
60
Utility Commands
This section of the document contains the following Utility command topics:
Auto-Install
Commands
Line Commands
Captive Portal
Commands
Management ACL Serviceability
Commands
Tracing Packet
Commands
Terminal Length
Commands
CLI Macro
Commands
Mode Commands Sflow Commands
Time Ranges
Commands
Clock Commands Password
Management
Commands
Command Line
Configuration
Scripting
Commands
PHY Diagnostics
Commands
SDM Templates
Commands
Telnet Server
Commands
SNMP Commands –
SSH Commands
User Interface
Commands
Configuration and –
Image File
Commands
Syslog Commands Web Server
Commands
Denial of Service
Commands
System
Management
Commands
RMON
Commands
–
Utility Commands
1361
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1362 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1362
Utility Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1363 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Auto-Install Commands
61
Auto-Install provides automatic update of the image and configuration of
PowerConnect devices on boot up from a TFTP server as controlled by
received DHCP options. It plays a critical role in the PowerConnect offering
of touchless or low-touch provisioning, in which configuration and imaging of
a device is greatly simplified. This is highly desirable as device can be setup
with minimum interaction from a skilled technician.
In PowerConnect devices, Auto-Install provides for network-based autoconfiguration and auto-imaging. Other aspects provide support for autoconfiguration and auto-imaging from attached devices.
Auto-Install is available on Dell PowerConnect devices as per the
specification listed below.
Auto-Install features in this release include:
1 Support download of image from TFTP server using DHCP option 125.
The image update can result in a downgrade or upgrade of the firmware on
the switch or stack of switches.
2 Support for automatic download of a configuration file from a TFTP
server when the device is booted with no saved configuration file located in
designated storage. This release extends the designated storage to USB
flash drives. In previous releases, the only supported storage was the
device’s embedded flash or non-volatile memory.
3 Support for automatic download of an image from a TFTP server in the
following situations:
a
When the device is booted with no saved configuration found in the
designated storage areas.
b
When the device is booted with a saved configuration that has AutoInstall enabled.
Auto-Install Commands
1363
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1364 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
4 Support for the Auto-Install process from a TFTP server operationally
enabling the DHCP client on designated management interfaces during
the Auto-Install process. The end user configuration remains unchanged.
Management interfaces include the service port or routing interfaces in a
saved config.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
boot auto-copy-sw
boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade
boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade
boot host autoreboot
boot host autoreboot
boot host autosave
boot host autosave
boot host dhcp
boot host dhcp
boot host retrycount
boot host retrycount
show auto-copy-sw
boot auto-copy-sw
show boot
boot auto-copy-sw
Use the boot auto-copy-sw command in Privileged EXEC mode to enable or
disable Stack Firmware Synchronization.
Use the no form of the command to disable Stack Firmware Synchronization.
Syntax
boot auto-copy-sw
no boot auto-copy-sw
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
Stack firmware synchronization is disabled by default.
1364
Auto-Install Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1365 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Config
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade
Use the boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade command in Privileged EXEC
mode to enable downgrading the firmware version on the stack member if the
firmware version on the manager is older than the firmware version on the
member.
Use the no form of the command to disable downgrading the image.
Syntax
boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade
no boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is Enable.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Auto-Install Commands
1365
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1366 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
boot host autoreboot
Use the boot host autoreboot command in Global Configuration mode to
enable rebooting the device (no administrative intervention) when the autoimage is successfully downloaded. Use the no form of this command to
disable rebooting the device (no administrative intervention) when the autoimage is successfully downloaded.
Syntax
boot host autoreboot
no boot host autoreboot
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines
Example
console#
console#configure
console(config)#boot host autoreboot
console(config)#no boot host autoreboot
1366
Auto-Install Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1367 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
boot host autosave
Use the boot host autosave command in Global Configuration mode to
enable automatically saving the downloaded configuration on the switch. Use
the no form of this command to disable automatically saving the downloaded
configuration on the switch.
Syntax
boot host autosave
no boot host autosave
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines
Example
console#
console#configure
console(config)#boot host auto-save
console(config)#no boot host auto-save
boot host dhcp
Use the boot host dhcp command in Global Configuration mode to enable
Auto-Install and Auto Configuration on the switch. When a switch boots
with a saved startup configuration that includes this command, the Auto-
Auto-Install Commands
1367
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1368 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Install process is triggered. Use the no form of this command to disable AutoInstall on the next reboot if the reboot occurs with a saved startup
configuration. If you give this command while the Auto-Install process is
running, the Auto-Install process terminates. The Auto-Install process has an
internal timer that retries failed installations for ten minutes.
Syntax
boot host dhcp
no boot host dhcp
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is Enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines
Example
console#
console#configure
console(config)#boot host dhcp
console(config)#no boot host dhcp
boot host retrycount
The boot host retrycount command sets the number of attempts to
download a configuration. Use the no form of this command to reset the
number of attempts to download a configuration to the default.
1368
Auto-Install Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1369 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
boot host retrycount count
no boot host retrycount
•
count —The number of attempts to download a configuration (Range:
1–6).
Default Configuration
The default number of configuration download attempts is three.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines
Example
console#
console#configure
console(config)#boot host retrycount 5
console(config)#no boot host retrycount
show auto-copy-sw
Use the show auto-copy-sw command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
Stack Firmware Synchronization configuration status.
Syntax
show auto-copy-sw
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Auto-Install Commands
1369
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1370 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The show switch command also displays the switch firmware synchronization
status.
Example
console#show auto-copy-sw
Stack Firmware Synchronization
Synchronization:
Enabled
SNMP Trap status:
Enabled
Allow Downgrade:
Enabled
show boot
Use the show boot command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the auto
install configuration and the status.
Syntax
show boot
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1370
Auto-Install Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1371 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show boot
AutoInstall Mode………………………… Started
AutoSave Mode………………………………… Enabled
AutoReboot Mode…………………………… Enabled
AutoInstall Retry Count……… 3
AutoInstall State……………………… Waiting for boot options
Auto-Install Commands
1371
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1372 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1372
Auto-Install Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1373 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Captive Portal Commands
62
The Captive Portal feature is a software implementation that blocks both
wired and wireless clients from accessing the network until user verification
has been established. Verification can be configured to allow access for both
guest and authenticated users. Authenticated users must be validated against
a database of authorized Captive Portal users before access is granted.
The Authentication server supports both HTTP and HTTPS web
connections. In addition, Captive Portal can be configured to use an optional
HTTP port (in support of HTTP Proxy networks) or an optional HTTPS port.
If configured, this additional port or ports are then used exclusively by
Captive Portal.
NOTE: This optional HTTP port is in addition to the standard HTTP port 80 which is
currently being used for all other web traffic, and the optional HTTPS port is in
addition to the standard HTTPS port 443 used for secure web traffic.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
Captive Portal Global Commands
authentication timeout
https port
captive-portal
show captive-portal
enable
show captive-portal status
http port
Captive Portal Configuration Commands
block
name (Captive Portal)
configuration
protocol
enable
redirect
group
redirect-url
Captive Portal Commands
1373
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1374 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
interface
session-timeout
locale
verification
Captive Portal Client Connection Commands
captive-portal client deauthenticate
show captive-portal interface client status
show captive-portal client status
show captive-portal interface
configuration status
show captive-portal configuration client
status
Captive Portal Local User Commands
clear captive-portal users
user-logout
no user
user name
show captive-portal user
user password
user group
user session-timeout
Captive Portal Status Commands
show captive-portal configuration
show captive-portal configuration locales
show captive-portal configuration
interface
show captive-portal configuration status
Captive Portal User Group Commands
user group
user group moveusers
1374
Captive Portal Commands
user group name
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1375 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Captive Portal Global Commands
authentication timeout
Use the authentication timeout command to configure the authentication
timeout. If the user does not enter valid credentials within this time limit, the
authentication page needs to be served again in order for the client to gain
access to the network. Use the “no” form of this command to reset the
authentication timeout to the default.
Syntax
authentication timeout timeout
no authentication timeout
•
timeout —The authentication timeout (Range: 60–600 seconds).
Default Configuration
The default authentication timeout is 300 seconds.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#authentication timeout 600
console(config-CP)#no authentication timeout
captive-portal
Use the captive-portal command to enter the captive portal configuration
mode.
Captive Portal Commands
1375
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1376 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
captive-portal
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#captive-portal
console(config-CP)#
enable
Use the enable command to globally enable captive portal. Use the “no” form
of this command to globally disable captive portal.
Syntax
enable
no enable
Default Configuration
Captive Portal is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
1376
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1377 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-CP)#enable
http port
Use the http port command to configure an additional HTTP port for captive
portal to monitor. Use the “no” form of this command to remove the
additional HTTP port from monitoring.
Syntax
http port port-num
no http port
•
port-num —The port number to monitor (Range: 1–65535).
Default Configuration
Captive portal only monitors port 80 by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#http port 81
console(config-CP)#no http port
https port
Use the https port command to configure an additional HTTPS port for
captive portal to monitor. Use the “no” form of this command to remove the
additional HTTPS port from monitoring.
Syntax
https port port-num
Captive Portal Commands
1377
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1378 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no https port
•
port-num —The port number to monitor (Range: 1–65535).
Default Configuration
Captive portal only monitors port 443 by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#https port 1443
console(config-CP)#no https port
show captive-portal
Use the show captive-portal command to display the status of the captive
portal feature.
Syntax
show captive-portal
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
1378
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1379 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#show captive-portal
Administrative Mode....................... Disabled
Operational Status........................ Disabled
Disable Reason................ Administrator Disabled
Captive Portal IP Address................. 1.2.3.4
show captive-portal status
Use the show captive-portal status command to report the status of all
captive portal instances in the system.
Syntax
show captive-portal status
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal status
Additional HTTP Port........................... 81
Additional HTTP Secure Port.................... 1443
Authentication Timeout......................... 300
Supported Captive Portals...................... 10
Captive Portal Commands
1379
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1380 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Configured Captive Portals..................... 1
Active Captive Portals......................... 0
Local Supported Users.......................... 128
Configured Local Users......................... 3
System Supported Users......................... 1024
Authenticated Users............................ 0
Captive Portal Configuration Commands
The commands in this section are related to captive portal configurations.
block
Use the block command to block all traffic for a captive portal configuration.
Use the “no” form of this command to unblock traffic.
Syntax
block
no block
Default Configuration
Traffic is not blocked by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#block
1380
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1381 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
configuration
Use the configuration command to enter the captive portal instance mode.
The captive portal configuration identified by CP ID 1 is the default CP
configuration. The system supports a total of ten CP configurations. Use the
“no” form of this command to delete a configuration. The default
configuration (1) cannot be deleted.
Syntax
configuration cp-id
no configuration cp-id
•
cp-id —Captive Portal ID (Range: 1–10).
Default Configuration
Configuration 1 is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#configuration 2
console(config-CP 2)#
enable
Use the enable command to enable a captive portal configuration. Use the
“no” form of this command to disable a configuration.
Syntax
enable
no enable
Captive Portal Commands
1381
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1382 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Configurations are enabled by default
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#no enable
group
Use the group command to configure the group number for a captive portal
configuration. If a group number is configured, the user entry (Local or
RADIUS) must be configured with the same name and the group to
authenticate to this captive portal instance. Use the “no” form of this
command to reset the group number to the default.
Syntax
group group-number
no group
•
group-number — The number of the group to associate with this
configuration (Range: 1–10).
Default Configuration
The default group number is 1.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
1382
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1383 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config-CP 2)#group 2
interface
Use the interface command to associate an interface with a captive portal
configuration. Use the “no” form of this command to remove an association.
Syntax
interface interface
no interface interface
interface —An interface or range of interfaces.
Default Configuration
No interfaces are associated with a configuration by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance Config mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#interface 1/0/2
locale
The locale command is not intended to be a user command. The
administrator must use the Web UI to create and customize captive portal
web content. This command is primarily used by the show running-config
command and process as it provides the ability to save and restore
configurations using a text based format.
Syntax
locale web-id
Captive Portal Commands
1383
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1384 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
web-id — The locale number (Range: Only locale 1 is supported)
Default Configuration
Locale 1 is configured by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
name (Captive Portal)
Use the name command to configure the name for a captive portal
configuration. Use the “no” form of this command to remove a configuration
name.
Syntax
name cp-name
no name
•
cp-name — CP configuration name (Range: 1–32 characters).
Default Configuration
Configuration 1 has the name “Default” by default. All other configurations
have no name by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#name cp2
1384
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1385 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
protocol
Use the protocol command to configure the protocol mode for a captive
portal configuration.
Syntax
protocol { http | https }
Default Configuration
The default protocols mode is https.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#protocol http
redirect
Use the redirect command to enable the redirect mode for a captive portal
configuration. Use the “no” form of this command to disable redirect mode.
Syntax
redirect
no redirect
Default Configuration
Redirect mode is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
Captive Portal Commands
1385
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1386 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#redirect
redirect-url
Use the redirect-url command to configure the redirect URL for a captive
portal configuration.
Syntax
redirect-url url
•
url —The URL for redirection (Range: 1–512 characters).
Default Configuration
There is no redirect URL configured by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#redirect-url www.dell.com
session-timeout
Use the session-timeout command to configure the session timeout for a
captive portal configuration. Use the “no” form of this command to reset the
session timeout to the default.
Syntax
session-timeout timeout
1386
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1387 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no session-timeout
•
timeout —Session timeout. 0 indicates timeout not enforced (Range:
0–86400 seconds).
Default Configuration
There is no session timeout by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#session-timeout 86400
console(config-CP 2)#no session-timeout
verification
Use the verification command to configure the verification mode for a
captive portal configuration.
Syntax
verification { guest | local | radius }
•
guest—Allows access for unauthenticated users (users that do not have
assigned user names and passwords).
•
local—Authenticates users against a local user database.
•
radius—Authenticates users against a remote RADIUS database.
Default Configuration
The default verification mode is guest.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Instance mode.
Captive Portal Commands
1387
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1388 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP 2)#verification local
Captive Portal Client Connection Commands
captive-portal client deauthenticate
Use the captive-portal client deauthenticate command to deauthenticate a
specific captive portal client.
Syntax
captive-portal client deauthenticate macaddr
•
macaddr — Client MAC address.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#captive-portal client deauthenticate 0002.BC00.1290
show captive-portal client status
Use the show captive-portal client status command to display client
connection details or a connection summary for connected captive portal
users.
1388
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1389 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show captive-portal client [ macaddr ] status
•
macaddr — Client MAC address.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal client status
Client MAC Address Client IP Address Protocol Verification Session Time
------------------ ----------------- -------- ------------ -----------0002.BC00.1290
10.254.96.47
https
Local
0d:00:01:20
0002.BC00.1291
10.254.96.48
https
Local
0d:00:05:20
0002.BC00.1292
10.254.96.49
https
Radius
0d:00:00:20
console#show captive-portal client 0002.BC00.1290 status
Client MAC Address........................ 0002.BC00.1290
Client IP Address......................... 10.254.96.47
Protocol Mode............................. https
Verification Mode......................... Local
CP ID..................................... 1
CP Name................................... cp1
Interface................................. 1/0/1
Interface Description..................... Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit Level
User Name................................. user123
Session Time.............................. 0d:00:00:13
show captive-portal configuration client status
Use the show captive-portal configuration client status command to display
the clients authenticated to all captive portal configurations or a to specific
configuration.
Captive Portal Commands
1389
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1390 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show captive-portal configuration [ cp-id ] client status
cp-id —Captive Portal ID.
•
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal configuration client status
CP ID
CP Name
Client MAC Address Client IP Address Interface
----- --------------- ------------------ ----------------- --------1
cp1
0002.BC00.1290
10.254.96.47
0002.BC00.1291
10.254.96.48
1/0/1
1/0/2
2
cp2
0002.BC00.1292
10.254.96.49
1/0/3
3
cp3
0002.BC00.1293
10.254.96.50
1/0/4
console#show captive-portal configuration 1 client status
CP ID..................................... 1
CP Name................................... cp1
Client
Client
MAC Address
IP Address
Interface
Interface Description
-------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------------0002.BC00.1290 10.254.96.47
1/0/1
Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit
0002.BC00.1291 10.254.96.48
1/0/2
Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 2 Gigabit
show captive-portal interface client status
Use the show captive-portal interface client status command to display
information about clients authenticated on all interfaces or a specific
interface.
1390
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1391 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show captive-portal interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port} client status
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal interface client status
Client
Intf
Intf Description
Client
MAC Address
IP Address
------ ----------------------------------- ----------------- --------------1/0/1
Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit
0002.BC00.1290
0002.BC00.1291
10.254.96.47
10.254.96.48
1/0/2
Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 2 Gigabit
0002.BC00.1292
10.254.96.49
1/0/3
Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 3 Gigabit
0002.BC00.1293
10.254.96.50
console#show captive-portal interface 1/0/1 client status
Interface................................. 1/0/1
Interface Description..................... Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit
Client
MAC Address
Client
IP Address
CP ID
CP Name
Protocol Verification
----------------- --------------- ----- ----------------- -------- --------0002.BC00.1290
10.254.96.47
1
cp1
http
local
0002.BC00.1291
10.254.96.48
2
cp2
http
Captive Portal Commands
local
1391
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1392 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Captive Portal Interface Commands
show captive-portal interface configuration
status
Use the show captive-portal interface configuration status command to
display the interface to configuration assignments for all captive portal
configurations or for a specific configuration.
Syntax
show captive-portal interface configuration [ cp-id ] status
•
cp-id —Captive Portal ID.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal interface configuration status
CP ID
CP Name
Interface
Interface Description
Type
----- ------------------ --------- ----------------------------------- ------1
Default
1/0/1
Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit .. Physical
console#show captive-portal interface configuration 1 status
CP ID..................................... 1
CP Name................................... cp1
Interface
Interface Description
Type
--------- ----------------------------------- -------1/0/1
1392
Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit ... Physical
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1393 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Captive Portal Local User Commands
clear captive-portal users
Use the clear captive-portal users command to delete all captive portal user
entries.
Syntax
clear captive-portal users
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#clear captive-portal users
no user
Use the no user command to delete a user from the local user database. If the
user has an existing session, it is disconnected.
Syntax
no user user-id
•
user-id — User ID (Range: 1–128).
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Captive Portal Commands
1393
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1394 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#no user 1
show captive-portal user
Use the show captive-portal user command to display all configured users or a
specific user in the captive portal local user database.
Syntax
show captive-portal user [ user-id ]
•
user-id — User ID (Range: 1–128).
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal user
Session
User ID
Name
User Name
Timeout
Group ID
Group
------- --------------------- ------- ------------ -----------
1394
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1395 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1
user123
14400
1
Default
2
user234
0
1
Default
2
group2
console#show captive-portal user 1
User ID........................................ 1
User Name...................................... user123
Password Configured............................ Yes
Session Timeout................................ 0
Group ID
Group Name
-------- -------------------------------1
Default
2
group2
user group
Use the user group command to associate a group with a captive portal user.
Use the “no” form of this command to disassociate a group and user. A user
must be associated with at least one group so the last group cannot be
disassociated.
Syntax
user user-id group group-id
• user-id — User ID (Range: 1–128).
• group-id —Group ID (Range: 1–10).
Default Configuration
A user is associated with group 1 by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
Captive Portal Commands
1395
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1396 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#user 1 group 3
user-logout
Use the user-logout command in Captive Portal Instance mode to enable
captive portal users to log out of the portal (versus having the session time
out). Use the no form of the command to return the user logout
configuration to the default.
Syntax
user-logout
no user-logout
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
User-logout is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Captive-portal Instance mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
In this example, all classes of entries in the mac address-table are displayed.
console(config)#captive-portal
console(config-CP)#user 1 name asd
console(config-CP)#configuration 1
1396
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1397 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-CP 1)#user-logout
console(config-CP 1)#no user-logout
user name
Use the user name command to modify the user name for a local captive
portal user.
Syntax
user user-id name name
• user-id — User ID (Range: 1–128).
• name — user name (Range: 1–32 characters).
Default Configuration
There is no name for a user by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-CP)#user 1 name johnsmith
user password
Use the user password command to create a local user or change the password
for an existing user.
Syntax
user user-id password { password | encrypted enc-password }
•
user-id — User ID (Range: 1–128).
•
password —User password (Range: 8–64 characters).
Captive Portal Commands
1397
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1398 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
enc-password —User password in encrypted form.
Default Configuration
There are no users configured by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(Config-CP)#user 1 password
Enter password (8 to 64 characters): ********
Re-enter password: ********
user session-timeout
Use the user session-timeout command to set the session timeout value for a
captive portal user. Use the “no” form of this command to reset the session
timeout to the default.
Syntax
user user-id session-timeout timeout
no user user-id session-timeout
• user-id — User ID (Range: 1–128).
• timeout —Session timeout. 0 indicates use global configuration (Range:
0–86400 seconds).
Default Configuration
The global session timeout is used by default.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
1398
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1399 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#user 1 session-timeout 86400
console(config-CP)#no user 1 session-timeout
Captive Portal Status Commands
show captive-portal configuration
Use the show captive-portal configuration command to display the
operational status of each captive portal configuration.
Syntax
show captive-portal configuration cp-id
cp-id —Captive Portal ID.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal configuration 1
CP ID..................................... 1
CP Name................................... cp1
Operational Status........................ Disabled
Disable Reason............................ Administrator Disabled
Blocked Status............................ Not Blocked
Captive Portal Commands
1399
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1400 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Configured Locales........................ 1
Authenticated Users....................... 0
show captive-portal configuration interface
Use the show captive-portal configuration interface command to display
information about all interfaces assigned to a captive portal configuration or
about a specific interface assigned to a captive portal configuration.
Syntax
show captive-portal configuration cp-id interface [{gigabitethernet
unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}]
•
cp-id —Captive Portal ID.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal configuration 1 interface
CP ID..................................... 1
CP Name................................... cp1
Operational
Interface
Status
Interface Description
Block
Status
--------- ---------------------------------------- ------------ -------1/0/1
Blocked
1400
Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit - Level
Captive Portal Commands
Disabled
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1401 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show captive-portal configuration 1 interface 1/0/1
CP ID..................................... 1
CP Name................................... cp1
Interface................................. 1/0/1
Interface Description..................... Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1
Gigab...
Operational Status........................ Disabled
Disable Reason............................ Interface Not Attached
Block Status.............................. Not Blocked
Authenticated Users....................... 0
show captive-portal configuration locales
Use the show captive-portal configuration locales command to display
locales associated with a specific captive portal configuration.
Syntax
show captive-portal configuration cp-id locales
•
cp-id —Captive Portal Configuration ID.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal configuration 1 locales
Locale Code
--------------en
Captive Portal Commands
1401
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1402 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show captive-portal configuration status
Use the show captive-portal configuration status command to display
information about all configured captive portal configurations or about a
specific captive portal configuration.
Syntax
show captive-portal configuration [ cp-id ] status
•
cp-id —Captive Portal ID.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show captive-portal configuration status
CP ID
CP Name
Mode
Protocol
Verification
-----
---------------
--------
--------
------------
1
cp1
Enable
https
Guest
2
cp2
Enable
http
Local
3
cp3
Disable
https
Guest
console#show captive-portal configuration 1 status
CP ID.......................................... 1
CP Name........................................ cp1
Mode........................................... Enabled
Protocol Mode.................................. https
Verification Mode.............................. Guest
1402
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1403 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Group Name..................................... group123
Redirect URL Mode.............................. Enabled
Redirect URL................................... www.cnn.com
Session Timeout (seconds)...................... 86400
Captive Portal User Group Commands
user group
Use the user group command to create a user group. Use the “no” form of
this command to delete a user group. The default user group (1) cannot be
deleted.
Syntax
user group group-id
no user group group-id
group-id —Group ID (Range: 1–10).
Default Configuration
User group 1 is created by default and cannot be deleted.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#user group 2
console(config-CP)#no user group 2
Captive Portal Commands
1403
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1404 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
user group moveusers
Use the user group moveusers command to move a group's users to a different
group.
Syntax
user group group-id moveusers new-group-id
•
group-id — Group ID (Range: 1–10).
•
new-group-id —Group ID (Range: 1–10).
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The new group-id must already exist.
Example
console(config-CP)#user group 2 moveusers 3
user group name
Use the user group name command to configure a group name.
Syntax
user group group-id name name
•
group-id — Group ID (Range: 1–10).
•
name — Group name (Range: 1–32 characters).
Default Configuration
User groups have no names by default.
1404
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1405 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Captive Portal Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-CP)#user group 2 name group2
Captive Portal Commands
1405
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1406 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1406
Captive Portal Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1407 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
CLI Macro Commands
63
CLI Macros provides a convenient way to save and distribute common
configurations. A CLI macro is a set of the CLI commands having a unique
name. When a CLI macro is applied, the CLI commands contained within
the macro are executed and added to the Running Configuration File. When
the macro is applied to an interface, the existing configuration is not lost; the
new commands are added configuration.
A CLI Macro may have keywords (variables) which are replaced by values
provided when the macro is applied (up to 3 keywords per macro). Macros can
be applied to specific interfaces, a range of interfaces, or the global
configuration.
There are two types of Macros:
•
Built-In Macros, or Default Macros – the predefined macros which cannot
be changed or deleted.
•
User-Defined Macros, or Custom Macros – the macros which allow the
operator to bundle some pre-requisites or global configurations as a macro
and then apply them to one or more interfaces at a time, which can then
be copied or used by other switches. Up to 50 user-defined macros are
supported.
The software includes 6 built-in macros:
•
profile-global, the global configuration, used to enable RSTP and loop
guard.
•
profile-desktop, the interface configuration, for increased network security
and reliability when connecting a desktop device, such as a PC, to a switch
port.
•
profile-phone, the interface configuration, used when connecting a
desktop device such as a PC with an IP Phone to a switch port.
•
profile-switch, the interface configuration, used when connecting an
access switch and a distribution switch or between access switches.
•
profile-router, the interface configuration, used when connecting the
switch and a WAN router.
CLI Macro Commands
1407
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1408 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
profile-wireless, the interface configuration, used when connecting the
switch and a wireless access point.
•
profile-compellent-nas, the interface configuration, used when connecting
the switch to a Dell Compellent NAS.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
macro name
macro apply
macro global apply
macro trace
macro global trace
macro description
macro global description
show parser macro
macro name
Use the macro name command in Global Configuration mode to create a
user-defined macro. Use the no form of the command to delete a macro.
Syntax
macro name name
no macro name name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
name
The name of the macro. A macro name can consist of any
printable characters, including blanks. A macro name may be
up to 31 characters in length. Embed the name in quotes if a
blank is desired in the name. Use the no form of the command
to delete a macro.
Default Configuration
The following macros are defined by default and may not be deleted or
altered:
1408
CLI Macro Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1409 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Macro
Default Definition
default global
:profile-global
default interface
:profile-desktop
default interface
:profile-phone
default interface
:profile-switch
default interface
:profile-router
default interface
:profile-wireless
default global
:profile-compellent-nas
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Macros consist of text commands with one command per line. Enter the
commands and terminate macro input mode by entering a single at sign (@)
on a line by itself.
A macro may utilize up to 3 parameters. Parameters are text strings that begin
with a dollar sign ($). Parameters are substituted by specifying the parameter
on the command line when the macro is applied.
Macros may be applied to a specific interface, a range of interfaces, or to the
global configuration. Up to 50 user-defined macros may be configured.
macro global apply
Use the macro global apply command in Global Configuration mode to
apply a macro.
Syntax
macro global apply macro-name [parameter value] [parameter
value][parameter value]
CLI Macro Commands
1409
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1410 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
macro-name
The name of the macro.
parameter
The name of the parameter recognized by the macro. The
parameter must begin with a dollar sign ($).
value
The string to be substituted within the macro for the specified
parameter name.
Default Configuration
No parameters are substituted unless supplied on the command line.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Commands applied are additive in nature. That is, they do not remove
existing configuration information by default.
macro global trace
Use the macro global trace command in Global Configuration mode to apply
and trace a macro. The trace command will display each line of the macro as
it is executed and list any errors encountered.
Syntax
macro global trace macro-name [parameter value] [parameter
value][parameter value]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
macro-name
The name of the macro.
parameter
The name of the parameter recognized by the macro. The
parameter must begin with a dollar sign ($).
1410
CLI Macro Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1411 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
value
The string to be substituted within the macro for the specified
parameter name.
Default Configuration
No parameters are substituted unless supplied on the command line.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The line number of the first error encountered is printed. The script is
aborted after the first error.
Commands applied are additive in nature. That is, they do not remove
existing configuration information by default.
macro global description
Use the macro global description command in Global Configuration mode
to append a line to the global macro description. Use the no form of the
command to clear the description.
Syntax
macro global description line
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
line
The macro description. All text up to the new line is included in
the description.
Default Configuration
There is no description by default.
CLI Macro Commands
1411
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1412 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command is intended to give the administrator an easy way to remember
which macros have been applied globally. All text up to the new line is
included in the description. The line is appended to the global description.
macro apply
Use the macro apply command in Interface Configuration mode to apply a
macro.
Syntax
macro apply macro-name [parameter value] [parameter value][parameter
value]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
macro-name
The name of the macro.
parameter
The name of the parameter recognized by the macro. The
parameter must begin with a dollar sign ($).
value
The string to be substituted within the macro for the specified
parameter name.
Default Configuration
No parameters are substituted unless supplied on the command line.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Commands applied are additive in nature. That is, they do not remove
existing configuration information by default.
1412
CLI Macro Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1413 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
macro trace
Use the macro trace command in Interface Configuration mode to apply and
trace a macro. The command will display each line of the macro as it is
executed and list any errors encountered.
Syntax
macro trace macro-name [parameter value] [parameter value][parameter
value]
no macro name name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
macro-name
The name of the macro.
parameter
The name of the parameter recognized by the macro. The
parameter must begin with a dollar sign ($).
value
The string to be substituted within the macro for the specified
parameter name.
Default Configuration
No parameters are substituted unless supplied on the command line.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The line number of the first error encountered is printed. The script is
aborted after the first error.
Commands applied are additive in nature. That is, they do not remove
existing configuration information by default.
CLI Macro Commands
1413
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1414 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
macro description
Use the macro description command in Interface Configuration mode to
append a line to the macro description. Use the no form of the command to
clear the description.
Syntax
macro description line
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
line
The macro description. All text up to the new line is included in
the description.
Default Configuration
There is no description by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command is intended to give the administrator an easy way to remember
which macros have been applied to an interface. All text up to the new line is
included in the description. The line is appended to the interface description.
show parser macro
Use the show parser macro command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about defined macros.
Syntax
show parser macro [brief | description [interface interface-id] | name macro
1414
CLI Macro Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1415 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
brief
Shows the list of defined macros and their type.
description
Shows the macro descriptions.
name
Shows an individual macro, including its contents.
macro
The name of the macro to display.
interface-id
The interface for which to show the macro description.
Default Configuration
No parameters are substituted unless supplied on the command line.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
CLI Macro Commands
1415
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1416 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1416
CLI Macro Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1417 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
64
Clock Commands
Real-time Clock
The PowerConnect supports a real-time clock that maintains the system time
across reboots. The system time is used to timestamp messages in the logging
subsystem as well as for the application of time based ACLs. The
administrator has the ability to configure and view the current time, time
zone, and summer time settings.
The earliest date that can be configured is Jan 1, 2010.
Simple Network Time Protocol
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is widely used for synchronizing
network resources. SNTP Version 4 is described in RFC 2030. SNTP is an
adaptation of the Network Time Protocol (RFC 1305) useful for situations
where the full performance of NTP is not justified. SNTP can operate in
unicast mode (point-to-point) or broadcast mode (point-to-multipoint).
Various NTP implementations can operate as either a client or a server. To an
NTP or SNTP server, NTP and SNTP clients are indistinguishable. Likewise,
to an NTP or SNTP client, NTP and SNTP servers are indistinguishable.
Furthermore, any version of NTP is compatible with any other version of NTP.
PowerConnect SNTP implements the client side of SNTP.
Support for IPv6 address configuration is provided to the existing SNTP
client. The end user can configure either an IPv4 or IPv6 address or a host
name for an SNTP server among the list of servers. In unicast mode, one of
the servers from the list is selected as the active server to be used for polling
based on priority and configured order. The servers are treated alike
independent of IPv4 or IPv6 or hostname address formats.At any given point
of time, the client operates in unicast or broadcast mode.In broadcast mode,
SNTP client listens for server packets from IPv4 and IPv6 networks at the
same time on port number 123.On IPv6 networks, the SNTP client listens to
Clock Commands
1417
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1418 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
the link-local scoped IANA multicast address ff02::101 (reserved for SNTP)
for server packets.The client logic to handle packet contents doesn’t change
with support for IPv6 networks.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
show sntp configuration
sntp trusted-key
show sntp server
sntp unicast client enable
show sntp status
clock timezone hours-offset
sntp authenticate
no clock timezone
sntp authentication-key
clock summer-time recurring
sntp broadcast client enable
clock summer-time date
sntp client poll timer
no clock summer-time
sntp server
show clock
show sntp configuration
Use the show sntp configuration command in Privileged EXEC mode to
show the configuration of the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).
Syntax
show sntp configuration
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1418
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1419 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the current SNTP configuration of the
device.
console#show sntp configuration
Polling interval: 64 seconds
MD5 Authentication keys:
Authentication is not required for synchronization.
Trusted keys:
No trusted keys.
Unicast clients: Disable
Unicast servers:
Server
Key
Polling
Priority
---------
-----------
-----------
----------
10.27.128.21
Disabled
Enabled
1
show sntp server
Use the show sntp server command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
pre-configured SNTP servers. The configured servers can be either IPv4 or
IPv6 format.
Syntax
show sntp server
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Clock Commands
1419
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1420 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
console#show sntp server
Server Host Address:
2001::01
Server Type:
IPv6
Server Stratum:
2
Server Reference Id:
158.108.96.32
NTP Srv:
Server Mode:
Server
Server Maximum Entries:
3
Server Current Entries:
2
SNTP Servers
------------
Host Address: 2001::01
Address Type: IPv6
Priority: 1
Version: 4
Port: 123
Last Update Time: Dec 22 11:10:00 2009
Last Attempt Time: Dec 22 11:10:00 2009
1420
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1421 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Last Update Status: Success
Total Unicast Requests: 955
Failed Unicast Requests: 1
--More-- or (q)uit
Host Address: 3.north-america.pool.ntp.org
Address Type: DNS
Priority: 1
Version: 4
Port: 123
Last Update Time: Dec 22 07:30:31 2009
Last Attempt Time: Dec 22 07:32:41 2009
Last Update Status: Server Unsynchronized
Total Unicast Requests: 157
Failed Unicast Requests: 2
show sntp status
Use the show sntp status command in Privileged EXEC mode to show the
status of the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).
Syntax
show sntp status
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Clock Commands
1421
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1422 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following example shows the status of the SNTP.
console#show sntp status
Client Mode:
Unicast
Last Update Time:
MAR 30 21:21:20 2009
Unicast servers:
Server
Status
Last response
---------
-----------
--------------------------
192.168.0.1
Up
21:21:20 Mar 30 2009
sntp authenticate
Use the sntp authenticate command in Global Configuration mode to
require server authentication for received Network Time Protocol (NTP)
traffic. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp authenticate
no sntp authenticate
Default Configuration
No authentication.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The command is relevant for both Unicast and Broadcast.
1422
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1423 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example, after defining the authentication key for SNTP, grants
authentication.
console(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkKey
console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8
console(config)# sntp authenticate
sntp authentication-key
Use the sntp authentication-key command in Global Configuration mode to
define an authentication key for Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). To
remove the authentication key for SNTP, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp authentication-key key-number md5 value
no sntp authentication-key number
•
key-number — number (Range: 1–4294967295)
•
value — value (Range: 1-8 characters)
Default value
No authentication is defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following examples define the authentication key for SNTP.
console(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkKey
console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8
Clock Commands
1423
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1424 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)# sntp authenticate
sntp broadcast client enable
Use the sntp broadcast client enable command in Global Configuration
mode to enable a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Broadcast client. To
disable an SNTP Broadcast client, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp broadcast client enable
no sntp broadcast client enable
Default Configuration
The SNTP Broadcast client is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
Broadcast client.
console(config)# sntp broadcast client enable
sntp client poll timer
Use the sntp client poll timer command in Global Configuration mode to set
the polling time for the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client. To
return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp client poll timer seconds
no sntp client poll timer
1424
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1425 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
seconds — Polling interval. (Range: 64-1024 seconds, in powers of 2)
Default Configuration
The polling interval is 64 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If a user enters a value which is not an exact power of two, the nearest powerof-two value is applied.
Example
The following example sets the polling time for the Simple Network Time
Protocol (SNTP) client to 1024 seconds.
console(config)# sntp client poll timer 1024
sntp server
Use the sntp server command in Global Configuration mode to configure an
SNTP server address or a host name. The server address can be either an IPv4
address or an IPv6 address. Use the no form of this command to unconfigure
an SNTP server address or a host name.
Syntax
sntp server {ip-address | ipv6-address | hostname}
no sntp server {ip-address | ipv6-address | hostname}
•
ip-address — IP address of the server.
•
hostname — Hostname of the server. (Range: 1-158 characters)
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Clock Commands
1425
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1426 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the device to accept Simple Network Time
Protocol (SNTP) traffic from the server at IP address 192.1.1.1.
console(config)# sntp server 192.1.1.1
sntp trusted-key
Use the sntp trusted-key command in Global Configuration mode to
authenticate the identity of a system to which Simple Network Time Protocol
(SNTP) will synchronize. To disable authentication of the identity of the
system, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sntp trusted-key key-number
no sntp trusted-key key-number
•
key-number — Key number of authentication key to be trusted. (Range:
1–4294967295)
Default Configuration
No keys are trusted.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
1426
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1427 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command is relevant for both received Unicast and Broadcast.
Example
The following defines SNTP trusted-key.
console(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkKey
console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8
console(config)# sntp authenticate
sntp unicast client enable
Use the sntp unicast client enable command in Global Configuration mode
to enable a client to use Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) predefined
Unicast clients. To disable an SNTP Unicast client, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
sntp unicast client enable
no sntp unicast client enable
Default Configuration
The SNTP Unicast client is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use the sntp server command to define SNTP servers.
Examples
The following example enables the device to use Simple Network Time
Protocol (SNTP) to request and accept SNTP traffic from servers.
console(config)# sntp unicast client enable
Clock Commands
1427
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1428 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clock timezone hours-offset
Use the clock timezone [ hours-offset ] [minutes minutes-offset] [zone
acronym] command to set the offset to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
If the optional parameters are not specified, they will be read as either '0' or
'\0, as appropriate.
Syntax
clock timezone hours-offset [minutes minutes-offset] [zone acronym]
•
hours-offset — Hours difference from UTC. (Range: –12 to +13)
•
minutes-offset — Minutes difference from UTC. (Range: 0–59)
•
acronym — The acronym for the time zone. (Range: Up to four
characters)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Default Value
No default setting
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Example
console(config)#clock timezone -5 minutes 30 zone IST
no clock timezone
Use the no clock timezone command to reset the time zone settings.
Syntax
no clock timezone
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1428
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1429 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no specific user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#no clock timezone
clock summer-time recurring
Use the clock summer-time recurring {usa | eu | {week day month hh:mm
week day month hh:mm}} [offset offset] [zone acronym] command to set
the summertime offset to UTC recursively every year. If the optional
parameters are not specified, they are read as either '0' or '\0', as appropriate.
Syntax
clock summer-time recurring {usa | eu | {week day month hh:mm week day
month hh:mm}} [offset offset] [zone acronym]
•
week — Week of the month. (Range: 1–5, first, last)
•
day — Day of the week. (Range: The first three letters by name; sun, for
example.)
•
month — Month. (Range: The first three letters by name; jan, for
example.)
•
hh:mm — Time in 24-hour format in hours and minutes. (Range: hh:
0–23, mm: 0–59)
•
offset — Number of minutes to add during the summertime.
(Range:1–1440)
•
acronym — The acronym for the time zone to be displayed when
summertime is in effect. (Range: Up to four characters)
Default Value
No default setting
Clock Commands
1429
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1430 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Examples
console(config)# clock summer-time recurring 1 sun jan
00:10 2 mon mar 10:00 offset 1 zone ABC
clock summer-time date
Use the clock summer-time date {date | month} {month | date} year
hh:mm {date | month} {month | date} year hh:mm [offset offset] [zone
acronym] command to set the summertime offset to UTC. If the optional
parameters are not specified, they are read as either '0' or '\0', as appropriate.
Syntax
clock summer-time date {date | month} {month | date} year hh:mm {date
| month} {month | date} year hh:mm [offset offset] [zone acronym]
•
date — Day of the month. (Range: 1–31)
•
month — Month. (Range: The first three letters by name; jan, for
example.)
•
year — Year. (Range: 2000–2097)
•
hh:mm — Time in 24-hour format in hours and minutes. (Range: hh:
0–23, mm: 0–59)
•
offset — Number of minutes to add during the summertime. (Range:
1–1440)
•
acronym — The acronym for the time zone to be displayed when
summertime is in effect. (Range: Up to four characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1430
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1431 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Examples
console(config)# clock summer-time date 1 Apr 2007
02:00 28 Oct 2007 offset 90 zone EST
or
console(config)# clock summer-time date Apr 1 2007
02:00 Oct 28 2007 offset 90 zone EST
no clock summer-time
Use the no clock summer-time command to reset the summertime
configuration.
Syntax Description
no clock summer-time
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines
Example
console(config)#no clock summer-time
Clock Commands
1431
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1432 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show clock
Use the show clock command in Privileged EXEC or User EXEC mode to
display the time and date from the system clock. Use the show clock detail
command to show the time zone and summertime configuration.
Syntax Description
show clock [detail]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows the time and date only.
console# show clock
15:29:03 PDT(UTC-7) Jun 17 2005
Time source is SNTP
The following example shows the time, date, timezone, and summertime
configuration.
console# show clock detail
15:29:03 PDT(UTC-7) Jun 17 2005
Time source is SNTP
Time zone:
Acronym is PST
Offset is UTC-7
Summertime:
1432
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1433 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Acronym is PDT
Recurring every year.
Begins at first Sunday of April at 2:00.
Ends at last Sunday of October at 2:00.
Offset is 60 minutes.
The following example displays the time and date from the system clock
console>show clock
15:29:03 Jun 17 2002
Time source is SNTP
Clock Commands
1433
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1434 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1434
Clock Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1435 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Line Configuration
Scripting Commands
65
The Configuration Scripting feature allows the user to generate textformatted files representing the current system configuration. These
configuration script files can be uploaded to a computer and edited, then
downloaded to the system and applied to the system. This feature allows the
flexibility of creating command configuration scripts that can be applied to
several switches with minor or no modifications.
Commands applied from a script are additive in nature. That is, they modify,
but do not automatically replace the current configuration. Any valid
command can be placed in a script, including show commands.
Scripts execute in Privileged EXEC mode. The script author must add a
command (configure) in order to enter Global Configuration mode.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
script apply
script show
script delete
script validate
script list
script apply
Use the script apply command in Privileged EXEC mode to apply the
commands in the script to the switch.
Syntax
script apply scriptname
•
scriptname — Name of the script file to apply. (Range 1–31 characters)
Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands
1435
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1436 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example applies the config.scr script to the switch.
console#script apply config.scr
script delete
Use the script delete command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete a
specified script.
Syntax
script delete {scriptname | all}
•
scriptname — Script name of the file being deleted. (Range 1-31
characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example deletes all scripts from the switch.
1436
Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1437 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#script delete all
script list
Use the script list command in Privileged EXEC mode to list all scripts
present on the switch as well as the remaining available space.
Syntax
script list
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays all scripts present on the switch.
console#script list
Configuration Script Name Size(Bytes)
-------------------------------- ----------0 configuration script(s) found.
2048 Kbytes free.
script show
Use the script show command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
contents of a script file.
Syntax
script show scriptname
Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands
1437
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1438 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
scriptname — Name of the script file to be displayed. (Range: 1-31
characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the contents of the script file config.scr.
console#script show config.scr
interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
ip address 176.242.100.100 255.255.255.0
exit
script validate
Use the script validate command in Privileged EXEC mode to validate a
script file by parsing each line in the script file.The validate option is
intended for use as a tool in script development. Validation identifies
potential problems though it may not identify all problems with a given
script.
Syntax
script validate scriptname
•
scriptname — Name of the script file being validated. (Range: 1-31
characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1438
Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1439 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example validates the contents of the script file config.scr.
console#script validate config.scr
Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands
1439
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1440 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1440
Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1441 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Configuration and Image File
Commands
66
File System Commands
CLI commands allow the user to show the contents of the current directory in
the flash file system (dir command). These files may also be deleted from the
flash using the delete command or renamed with the rename command.
Also, the syntax of the copy command has been changed slightly to add
additional flash targets and sources for the above commands.
Command Line Interface Scripting
The configuration scripting feature allows the user to save the current
PowerConnect configuration in text format. To modify the configuration
script file, follow these procedures:
1 Upload the file to a personal computer.
2 Edit the file.
3 Download the file to a PowerConnect switch.
4 Apply it to the PowerConnect system. With this feature in place, the
PowerConnect administrator has the flexibility of creating configuration
scripts and then applying the scripts to several devices.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
boot system
filedescr
clear config
rename
copy
show backup-config
delete
show bootvar
Configuration and Image File Commands
1441
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1442 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
delete backup-config
show running-config
delete backup-image
show startup-config
delete startup-config
dir
write
erase
boot system
Use the boot system command in Privileged EXEC mode to specify the
system image that the device loads at startup.
Syntax
boot system [unit-id][image1 | image2]
•
image1 | image2 — Image file.
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
image1
Marks the given image as active for subsequent reboots.
image2
Marks the given image as active for subsequent reboots.
unit
Unit to be used for this operation. If absent, command executes
on this node.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
Use the show bootvar command to find out which image is the active image.
1442
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1443 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example loads system image image1 for the next device
startup.
console# boot system image1
clear config
Use the clear config command in Privileged EXEC mode to restore the
switch to the default configuration.
Syntax
clear config
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example restores the switch to its default configuration.
console#clear config
copy
Use the copy command in Privileged EXEC mode to copy files within the
switch and to upload and download files from and to the switch.
Syntax
copy source-url destination-url
Configuration and Image File Commands
1443
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1444 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
source-url
The location URL or or reserved keyword of the source file being
copied. (Range: 1-160 characters.)
List of valid source parameters for uploading from the switch:
backup-config
Uploads Backup Config file.
image
Uploads code file by xmodem or tftp.
operational-log
Uploads Operational Log file.
running-config
Copies system config file.
script
Uploads Configuration Script file.
startup-config
Uploads Startup Config file.
startup-log
Uploads Startup Log file.
Valid source URLs for downloading to the switch:
xmodem
tftp://{ipaddress | hostname}/filepath/filename
scp://{user@ipaddresss | hostname}/filepath/filename
sftp://{user@ipaddress | hostname}/filepath/filename
ftp://{user@ipaddress | hostname}/filepath/filename
flash://filename
usb://filepath/filename
1444
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1445 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
destinationurl
The URL or reserved keyword of the destination file. (Range: 1-160
characters.
List of valid destination parameters for downloading to the switch:
backup-config
Downloads config file using xmodem,
sftp, or tftp.
image
Downloads code file by xmodem, ftp,
sftp, or tftp.
script
Downloads configuration script by
xmodem, sftp, or tftp.
startup-config
Downloads config file using xmodem or
tftp.
ias-users
Downloads the ias-users database file.
Valid destination URLs for uploading from the switch:
xmodem
tftp://{ipaddress | hostname}/filepath/filename
scp://{user@ipaddresss | hostname}/filepath/filename
sftp://{user@ipaddress | hostname}/filepath/filename
flash://filename
usb://filename/filename
The following list describes syntax keywords.
•
source-url — The location URL or reserved keyword of the source file
being copied. (Range: 1–160 characters.)
•
destination-url — The URL or reserved keyword of the destination file.
(Range: 1–160 characters.)
•
ipaddr — The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the server.
•
hostname — Hostname of the server. (Range: 1–158 characters). The
command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes.
•
filepath — The path to the file on the server.
•
filename — The name of the file on the server.
•
username — The user name for logging into the remote server via SSH.
Configuration and Image File Commands
1445
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1446 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The following table lists and describes reserved keywords.
Reserved
Keyword
Description
running-config
Represents the current running configuration file.
startup-config
Represents the startup configuration file.
startup-log
Represents the startup syslog file. This can only be the source of a
copy operation.
operational-log
Represents the operational syslog file. This can only be the source
of a copy operation.
script scriptname Represents a CLI script file.
image
Represents the software image file. When "image" is the target of a
copy command, it refers to the backup image. When "image" is
the source of a copy command, it refers to the active image. If this
is destination, the file will be distributed to all units in the stack.
ftp:
Source or destination URL for an FTP network server. The syntax
for this alias is ftp://ipaddr/filepath/filename image.
tftp:
Source or destination URL for a TFTP network server. The syntax
for this alias is tftp:[[//location]/directory]/filename. An out-ofband IP address can be specified as described in the User
Guidelines.
xmodem:
Source for the file from a serial connection that uses the Xmodem
protocol.
usb:
Source or destination URL for a file on a mounted USB file
system. Sub-directories are not supported on USB devices.
flash:
Source or destination URL for the switch flash-based file system.
backup-config
Represents the backup configuration file.
unit
Indicates which unit in the stack is the target of the copy
command.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1446
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1447 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
When copying files from the switch, match a source parameter with a
destination URL. When copying to the switch, match a source URL to a
destination parameter. FTP is only supported for image download to the
switch. URLs may not exceed 160 characters in length, including filename,
file path, hostname, ip address, user, and reserved keywords.
Examples
Example – Backing up the running-config
console#copy running-config backup-config
This operation may take a few minutes.
Management interfaces will not be available during
this time.
Are you sure you want to save? (y/n) y
Configuration saved!
Example – Downloading new code to the switch
console#copy tftp://10.27.65.61/PC7000v20100911_2.stk image
Transfer Mode.................................. TFTP
Server IP Address.............................. 10.27.65.61
File Path...................................... ./
File Name.................................. PCM7000v20100911_2.stk
Data Type...................................... Code
Local Filename................................. image
Management access will be blocked for the duration of the transfer
Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y
Configuration and Image File Commands
1447
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1448 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
TFTP code transfer starting
9392640 bytes transferred...
File contents are valid.
File transfer operation completed successfully.
console#show bootvar
Image Descriptions
image1 : default image
image2 :
Images currently available on Flash
-----------------------------------------------------------------unit
image1
image2
current-active
next-active
------------------------------------------------------------------
1
M.9.11.2
M.9.11.3 image1
image1
After the file transfer completes, use the boot system command to
select the new image to run.
Example – Downloading and applying ias users file
console#copy tftp://10.131.17.104/aaa_users.txt ias-users
Transfer Mode.................................. TFTP
Server IP Address.............................. 10.131.17.104
File Path...................................... ./
File Name...................................... aaa_users.txt
Data Type...................................... IAS Users
1448
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1449 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Management access will be blocked for the duration of the transfer
Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y
File transfer operation completed successfully.
Validating and updating the users to the IAS users database.
Updated IAS users database successfully.
Example – USB copy operations
console#copy usb://start-config startup-config
console#copy operational-log usb://olog.txt
console#copy usb://backup-config.txt backup-config
console#copy image usb://image1.stk
console#copy flash://crashdump.0 usb://crashdump.0
delete
Use the delete command to delete files from flash.
Syntax
delete file
• file — Name of the file to be deleted.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Configuration and Image File Commands
1449
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1450 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#delete file1.scr
Delete file1.scr (Y/N)?y
delete backup-config
Use the delete backup-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete
the backup-config file.
Syntax
delete backup-config
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example deletes the backup-config file.
console#delete backup-config
Delete backup-config (Y/N)?y
delete backup-image
Use the delete backup-image command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete a
file from a flash memory device.
Syntax
delete backup-image
1450
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1451 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
NOTE: The active image cannote be deleted.
Example
The following example deletes test file in Flash memory.
console#delete backup-image
Delete: image2 (y/n)?
delete startup-config
Use the delete startup-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete
the startup-config file.
Syntax
delete startup-config
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
If the startup-config file is not present when system reboots, it reboots with
default settings.
Example
The following example deletes the startup-config file.
Configuration and Image File Commands
1451
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1452 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console# delete startup-config
Delete startup-config (y/n)?
dir
Use the dir command to print the contents of the flash file system.
Syntax
dir
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#dir
0
drwx
2048 Jan 13 2031 17:19:54 .
0
drwx
2048 Jan 10 2031 15:58:10 ..
0
-rwx
0
-rwx
16380 Jan 10 2031 15:58:18 log2.bin
0
-rwx
72 Jan 10 2031 15:58:14 boot.dim
0
-rwx
0
-rwx
0
-rwx
0
-rwx
256 Jan 22 2005 08:00:48 vpd.bin
0 Jan 10 2031 15:58:18 slog2.txt
53205 Jan 22 2005 09:45:04 rc.soc
148 Jan 10 2031 15:58:22 hpc_broad.cfg
11224 Jan 22 2005 09:45:04 helixmem.soc
--More-- or (q)uit
console#
1452
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1453 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
erase
Use the erase command to erase the startup configuration, the backup
configuration, or the backup image.
Syntax
erase {startup-config | backup-image | backup-config}
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
startup-config
Erases the contents of the startup configuration file.
backup-image
Erase the backup image.
backup-config
Erases the backup configuration.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
filedescr
Use the filedescr command in Privileged EXEC mode to add a description to
a file. Use the no version of this command to remove the description from the
filename.
Syntax
filedescr {image 1 | image2} description
no filedescr {image 1 | image2}
•
image1 | image2 — Image file.
•
description — Block of descriptive text. (Range: 0-128 characters)
Configuration and Image File Commands
1453
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1454 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
No description is attached to the file.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The description accepts any printable characters except a double quote or
question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within
the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the description.
The CLI does not filter illegal combinations of characters on entry and may
accept entries up to the first illegal character or reject the entry entirely.
Example
The following example attaches a file description to image2.
console#filedescr image2 "backedup on 03-22-05"
rename
Use the rename command in Privileged EXEC mode to rename a file present
in flash.
Syntax
rename source dest
•
source — Source file name
•
dest — Destination file name
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
1454
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1455 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#rename file1.scr file2.scr
show backup-config
Use the show backup-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the contents of the backup configuration file.
Syntax
show backup-config
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows backup-config data.
console#show backup-config
software version 1.1
hostname device
interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
ip address 176.242.100.100 255.255.255.0
duplex full
speed 1000
Configuration and Image File Commands
1455
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1456 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
exit
interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
ip address 176.243.100.100 255.255.255.0
duplex full
speed 1000
exit
show bootvar
Use the show bootvar command in User EXEC mode to display the active
system image file that the device loads at startup.
Syntax
show bootvar [unit ]
•
unit —Unit number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the active system image file that the device
loads at startup.
console>show bootvar
Image Descriptions
image1 : default image
image2 :
1456
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1457 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Images currently available on Flash
-----------------------------------------------------------------unit
image1
image2
current-active
next-active
-----------------------------------------------------------------1
0.31.0.0
0.31.0.0
image2
image2
show running-config
Use the show running-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the contents of the currently running configuration file, including banner
configuration. The command only displays the configurations that are nondefault.
NOTE: All non-default configurations for the Captve Portal branding images and
encoded Unicode are not displayed via the standard show running-config
command. If desired, you can view this data in the script files or by using the all
mode for the show running-config command. In addition, please note that this nonreadable data is contained and displayed at the end of the script files.
Syntax
show running-config [all | scriptname]
•
all-—To display or capture the commands with settings and
configuration that are equal to the default value, include the all
option.
•
scriptname-—If the optional scriptname is provided, the output is
redirected to a script file.
NOTE: If you issue the show running-config command from a serial connection,
access to the switch through remote connections (such as Telnet) is suspended
while the output is being generated and displayed.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Configuration and Image File Commands
1457
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1458 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console# show running-config
...
line ssh
no exec-banner
exit
line telnet
no login-banner
exit
banner exec "===exec====="
banner login "===login====="
banner motd "===motd====="
exit
show startup-config
Use the show startup-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the startup configuration file contents.
Syntax
show startup-config
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
1458
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1459 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the contents of the startup-config file.
console#show startup-config
1 : !Current Configuration:
2 : !System Description "PowerConnect M8024, 1.0.0.0,
VxWorks6.5"
3 : !System Software Version 1.0.0.0
4 : !
5 : configure
6 : vlan database
7 : vlan 3,1000-1001
8 : exit
9 : stack
10 : member 1 1
11 : exit
12 : ip address dhcp
13 : ip address vlan 1001
14 : interface vlan 3
15 : routing
16 : exit
17 : username "lvl7" password
fb3604df5a109405b2d79ecb06c47ab5 level 15 encrypted
18 : !
19 : interface gigabitethernet 1/0/17
20 : switchport mode general
21 : switchport general pvid 1001
Configuration and Image File Commands
1459
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1460 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
22 : no switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only
23 : switchport general allowed vlan add 1000-1001
24 : switchport general allowed vlan remove 1
25 : exit
26 : !
27 : interface gigabitethernet 1/0/3
28 : channel-group 1 mode auto
29 : exit
30 : !
31 : interface gigabitethernet 1/0/4
32 : channel-group 1 mode auto
33 : exit
34 : snmp-server community public rw
35 : exit
update bootcode
Use the update bootcode command in Privileged EXEC mode to update the
bootcode on one or more switches. For each switch, the bootcode is extracted
from the active image and programmed to flash.
Syntax
update bootcode [unit ]
•
unit —Unit number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1460
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1461 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
If unit is not specified, all units are updated.
Example
The following example updates the bootcode on unit 2.
console#update bootcode 2
write
Use the write command to copy the running configuration image to the
startup configuration.
Syntax
write
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Usage Guidelines
This command is equivalent to the copy running-config startup-config
command functionally.
Example
console#write
console#
Configuration and Image File Commands
1461
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1462 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1462
Configuration and Image File Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1463 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Denial of Service Commands
67
The following list shows the DoS attack detection PowerConnect supports.
Some platforms do not support detection for all of the DoS attack types in
the list.
•
SIP=DIP:
–
•
First Fragment:
–
•
•
–
TCP Flag SYN set and Source Port < 1024 or TCP Control Flags = 0
and
–
TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set
and
–
TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags SYN and FIN set.
L4 Port:
Source TCP Port = Destination TCP Port.
UDP Port:
–
•
Source MAC address = Destination MAC address.
TCP Port:
–
•
Limiting the size of ICMP Ping packets.
SMAC=DMAC:
–
•
Source TCP/UDP Port = Destination TCP/UDP Port.
ICMP:
–
•
IP Fragment Offset = 1.
TCP Flag:
–
•
TCP Header size smaller then configured value.
TCP Fragment:
–
•
Source IP address = Destination IP address.
Source UDP Port = Destination UDP Port.
TCP Flag & Sequence:
Denial of Service Commands
1463
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1464 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
–
TCP Flag SYN set and Source Port < 1024 or TCP Control Flags = 0
and
–
TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set
and
–
TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags SYN and FIN set.
TCP Offset:
–
•
TCP SYN:
–
•
TCP Flags FIN and URG and PSH set and TCP Sequence Number =
0.
ICMP V6:
–
•
TCP Flags SYN and FIN set.
TCP FIN & URG & PSH:
–
•
TCP Flag SYN set.
TCP SYN & FIN:
–
•
Checks for TCP header offset =1.
Limiting the size of ICMPv6 Ping packets.
ICMP Fragment:
–
Checks for fragmented ICMP packets.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
dos-control firstfrag
ip icmp error-interval
dos-control icmp
ip unreachables
dos-control l4port
ip redirects
dos-control sipdip
ipv6 icmp error-interval
dos-control tcpflag
ipv6 unreachables
dos-control tcpfrag
show dos-control
ip icmp echo-reply
1464
Denial of Service Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1465 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
dos-control firstfrag
Use the dos-control firstfrag command in Global Configuration mode to
enable Minimum TCP Header Size Denial of Service protection. If the mode
is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If
packets ingress having a TCP Header Size smaller than the configured value,
the packets are dropped.
Syntax
dos-control firstfrag [size]
no dos-control firstfrag
•
size —TCP header size. (Range: 0-255). The default TCP header size is 20.
ICMP packet size is 512.
Default Configuration
Denial of Service is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example defines a minimum TCP header size of 20. Packets
entering with a smaller header size are dropped.
console(config)#dos-control firstfrag 20
dos-control icmp
Use the dos-control icmp command in Global Configuration mode to enable
Maximum ICMP Packet Size Denial of Service protections. If the mode is
enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If ICMP
Echo Request (PING) packets ingress having a size greater than the
configured value, the packets are dropped.
Denial of Service Commands
1465
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1466 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
dos-control icmp [size ]
no dos-control icmp
•
size — Maximum ICMP packet size. (Range: 0-16376). If size is
unspecified, the value is 512.
Default Configuration
Denial of Service is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example activates the Maximum ICMP Packet Denial of
Service protection with a maximum packet size of 1023.
console(config)#dos-control icmp 1023
dos-control l4port
Use the dos-control l4port command in Global Configuration mode to
enable L4 Port Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of
Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having
Source TCP/UDP Port Number equal to Destination TCP/UDP Port
Number, the packets are dropped.
Syntax
dos-control l4port
no dos-control l4port
Default Configuration
Denial of Service is disabled.
1466
Denial of Service Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1467 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example activates L4 Port Denial of Service protection.
console(config)#dos-control l4port
dos-control sipdip
Use the dos-control sipdip command in Global Configuration mode to
enable Source IP Address = Destination IP Address (SIP=DIP) Denial of
Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is
active for this type of attack. If packets ingress with SIP=DIP, the packets is
dropped if the mode is enabled.
Syntax
dos-control sipdip
no dos-control sipdip
Default Configuration
Denial of Service is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example activates SIP=DIP Denial of Service protection.
console(config)#dos-control sipdip
Denial of Service Commands
1467
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1468 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
dos-control tcpflag
Use the dos-control tcpflag command in Global Configuration mode to
enable TCP Flag Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial
of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having
TCP Flag SYN set and a source port less than 1024, having TCP Control
Flags set to 0 and TCP Sequence Number set to 0, having TCP Flags FIN,
URG, and PSH set and TCP Sequence Number set to 0, or having TCP Flags
SYN and FIN both set, the packets are dropped.
Syntax
dos-control tcpflag
no dos-control tcpflag
Default Configuration
Denial of Service is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example activates TCP Flag Denial of Service protections.
console(config)#dos-control tcpflag
dos-control tcpfrag
Use the dos-control tcpfrag command in Global Configuration mode to
enable TCP Fragment Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled,
Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress
having IP Fragment Offset equal to one (1), the packets are dropped.
Syntax
dos-control tcpfrag
1468
Denial of Service Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1469 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no dos-control tcpfrag
Default Configuration
Denial of Service is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example activates TCP Fragment Denial of Service protection.
console(config)#dos-control tcpfrag
ip icmp echo-reply
Use the ip icmp echo-reply command to enable or disable the generation of
ICMP Echo Reply messages. Use the no form of this command to prevent the
generation of ICMP Echo Replies.
Syntax
ip icmp echo-reply
no ip icmp echo-reply
Default Configuration
ICMP Echo Reply messages are enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Denial of Service Commands
1469
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1470 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)#ip icmp echo-reply
ip icmp error-interval
Use the ip icmp error-interval command to limit the rate at which IPv4
ICMP error messages are sent. The rate limit is configured as a token bucket
with two configurable parameters: Burst-size and burst-interval.
To disable ICMP rate limiting, set burst-interval to zero. Use the no form of
this command to return burst-interval and burst-size to their default values.
Syntax
ip icmp error-interval burst-interval [ burst-size ]
no ip icmp error-interval
•
burst-interval — How often the token bucket is initialized (Range:
0–2147483647 milliseconds).
•
burst-size — The maximum number of messages that can be sent during a
burst interval (Range: 1–200).
Default Configuration
Rate limiting is enabled by default.
The default burst-interval is 1000 milliseconds.
The default burst-size is 100 messages.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command
Example
console(config)#ip icmp error-interval 1000 20
1470
Denial of Service Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1471 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip unreachables
Use the ip unreachables command to enable the generation of ICMP
Destination Unreachable messages. Use the no form of this command to
prevent the generation of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages.
Syntax
ip unreachables
no ip unreachables
Default Configuration
ICMP Destination Unreachable messages are enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan10)#ip icmp unreachables
ip redirects
Use the ip redirects command to enable the generation of ICMP Redirect
messages. Use the no form of this command to prevent the sending of ICMP
Redirect Messages. In global configuration mode, this command affects all
interfaces. In interface configuration mode, it only affects that interface.
Syntax
ip redirects
no ip redirects
Default Configuration
ICMP Redirect messages are enabled by default.
Denial of Service Commands
1471
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1472 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan10)#ip redirects
ipv6 icmp error-interval
Use the icmp error-interval command to limit the rate at which ICMP error
messages are sent. The rate limit is configured as a token bucket with two
configurable parameters: Burst-size and burst interval. Use the no form of this
command to return burst-interval and burst-size to their default values. To
disable ICMP rate limiting, set burst-interval to zero.
Syntax
ipv6 icmp error-interval burst-interval [ burst-size ]
no ipv6 icmp error-interval
•
burst-interval — How often the token bucket is initialized (Range:
0–2147483647 milliseconds).
•
burst-size — The maximum number of messages that can be sent during a
burst interval (Range: 1–200).
Default Configuration
Rate limiting is enabled by default.
The default burst-interval is 1000 milliseconds.
The default burst-size is 100 messages.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
1472
Denial of Service Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1473 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config)#ipv6 icmp error-interval 2000 20
ipv6 unreachables
Use the ipv6 unreachables command to enable the generation of ICMPv6
Destination Unreachable messages. Use the no form of this command to
prevent the generation of ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable messages.
Syntax
ipv6 unreachables
no ipv6 unreachables
Default Configuration
ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable messages are enabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console(config-if-vlan10)#ipv6 unreachables
show dos-control
Use the show dos-control command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
Denial of Service configuration information.
Syntax
show dos-control
Denial of Service Commands
1473
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1474 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays Denial of Service configuration information.
console#show dos-control
SIPDIP Mode...............................Disable
First Fragment Mode.......................Disable
Min TCP Hdr Size..........................20
TCP Fragment Mode........................ Disable
TCP Flag Mode.............................Disable
L4 Port Mode..............................Disable
ICMP Mode.................................Disable
Max ICMP Pkt Size.........................512
1474
Denial of Service Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1475 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
68
Line Commands
This chapter explains the following commands:
exec-timeout
line
history
show line
history size
speed
Authentication commands related to line configuration mode are in AAA
Commands.
exec-timeout
Use the exec-timeout command in Line Configuration mode to set the
interval that the system waits for user input before timeout. The exectimeout command is also used by the web for timing out web sessions. To
restore the default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
exec-timeout minutes [seconds]
no exec-timeout
•
minutes — Integer that specifies the number of minutes. (Range:
0–65535)
•
seconds — Additional time intervals in seconds. (Range: 0–59)
Default Configuration
The default configuration is 10 minutes.
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
Line Commands
1475
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1476 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
To specify no timeout, enter the exec-timeout 0 command.
Example
The following example configures the interval that the system waits until user
input is detected to 20 minutes.
console(config)#line console
console(config-line)#exec-timeout 20
history
Use the history command in Line Configuration mode to enable the
command history function. To disable the command history function, use the
no form of this command.
Syntax
history
no history
Default Configuration
The default value for this command is enabled.
Command Mode
Line Interface mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example disables the command history function for the current
terminal session.
console(config-line)# no history
1476
Line Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1477 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
history size
Use the history size command in Line Configuration mode to change the
command history buffer size for a particular line. To reset the command
history buffer size to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
history size number-of-commands
no history size
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
number-ofcommands
Specifies the number of commands the system may record in its
command history buffer. (Range: 0-216)
Default Configuration
The default command history buffer size is 10.
Command Mode
Line Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the command history buffer size to 20
commands for the current terminal session.
console(config-line)#history size 20
line
Use the line command in Global Configuration mode to identify a specific
line for configuration and enter the line configuration command mode.
Line Commands
1477
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1478 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
line {console | telnet | ssh}
•
console — Console terminal line.
•
telnet — Virtual terminal for remote console access (Telnet).
•
ssh — Virtual terminal for secured remote console access (SSH).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The default authentication list for telnet and SSH is enableNetList. The
enableNetList uses a single method: enable. This implies that users accessing
the switch via telnet or SSH must have an enable password defined in order to
access privileged mode. Alternatively, the administrator can set the telnet and
ssh lists to enableList, which has the enable and none methods defined.
Examples
The following example sets the telnet authentication list to enableList:
console(config)#line telnet
console(config-telnet)#enable authentication
enableList
The following example enters Line Configuration mode to configure Telnet.
console(config)#line telnet
console(config-line)#
show line
Use the show line command in User EXEC mode to display line parameters.
1478
Line Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1479 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show line [console | telnet | ssh]
•
console — Console terminal line.
•
telnet — Virtual terminal for remote console access (Telnet).
•
ssh — Virtual terminal for secured remote console access (SSH).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the line configuration.
console>show line
Console configuration:
Interactive timeout: Disabled
History: 10
Baudrate: 9600
Databits: 8
Parity: none
Stopbits: 1
Telnet configuration:
Interactive timeout: 10 minutes 10 seconds
History: 10
SSH configuration:
Line Commands
1479
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1480 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interactive timeout: 10 minutes 10 seconds
History: 10
speed
Use the speed command in Line Configuration mode to set the line baud
rate. Use the no form of the command to restore the default settings.
Syntax
speed {bps}
no speed
•
bps — Baud rate in bits per second (bps). The options are 2400, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200.
Default Configuration
This default speed is 9600.
Command Mode
Line Interface (console) mode
User Guidelines
This configuration applies only to the current session.
Example
The following example configures the console baud rate to 9600.
console(config-line)#speed 9600
1480
Line Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1481 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Management ACL Commands
69
In order to ensure the security of the switch management features, the
administrator may elect to configure a management access control list. The
Management Access Control and Administration List (ACAL) component is
used to ensure that only known and trusted devices are allowed to remotely
manage the switch via TCP/IP. Management ACLs are only configurable on
IP (in-band) interfaces, not on the service port.
When a Management ACAL is enabled, incoming TCP packets initiating a
connection (TCP SYN) and all UDP packets will be filtered based on their
source IP address and destination port. Additionally, other attributes such as
incoming port (or port-channel) and VLAN ID can be used to determine if
the traffic should be allowed to the management interface. When the
component is disabled, incoming TCP/UDP packets are not filtered and are
processed normally.
There is also an option to restrict all the above packets from the network
interface. This is done by specifying “console only” in the MACAL
component. If this is enabled, the systems management interface is only
accessible via the serial port. All TCP SYN packets and UDP packets are
dropped except UDP packets sent to the DHCP Server or DHCP Client
ports.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
deny (management)
permit (management)
management access-class
show management access-class
management access-list
show management access-list
Management ACL Commands
1481
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1482 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
deny (management)
Use the deny command in Management Access-List Configuration mode to
set conditions for the management access list.
Syntax
deny [gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | vlan vlan-id | port-channel portchannel-number| tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port] [service service] [priority
priority]
deny ip-source ip-address [mask mask | prefix-length] [gigabitethernet
unit/slot/port | vlan vlan-id | port-channel port-channel-number |
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port] [service service] [priority priority]
•
gigabitethernet unit/slot/port — A valid 1-gigabit Ethernet-routed port
number.
•
vlan vlan-id — A valid VLAN number.
•
port-channel port-channel-number — A valid routed port-channel
number.
•
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port — A valid 10-gigabit Ethernet-routed
port number.
•
ip-address — Source IP address.
•
mask mask — Specifies the network mask of the source IP address.
•
mask prefix-length — Specifies the number of bits that comprise the
source IP address prefix. The prefix length must be preceded by a forward
slash (/). (Range: 0–32)
•
service service — Indicates service type. Can be one of the following:
telnet, ssh, http, https, tftp, snmp, sntp, or any. The any keyword indicates
that the service match for the ACL is effectively "don’t care".
•
priority priority — Priority for the rule. (Range: 1–64)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Management Access-list Configuration mode
1482
Management ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1483 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Rules with gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, vlan, and port-channel
parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate
interface. Ensure that each rule has a unique priority.
Example
The following example shows how all ports are denied in the access-list called
mlist.
console(config)# management access-list mlist
console(config-macal)# deny
management access-class
Use the management access-class command in Global Configuration mode
to restrict management connections. To disable restriction, use the no form
of this command.
Syntax
management access-class {console-only | name}
no management access-class
•
name — A valid access-list name. (Range: 1–32 characters)
•
console-only — The switch can be managed only from the console.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Management ACL Commands
1483
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1484 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example configures an access-list called mlist as the
management access-list.
console(config)# management access-class mlist
management access-list
Use the management access-list command in Global Configuration mode to
define an access list for management, and enter the access-list for
configuration. Once in the access-list configuration mode, the denied or
permitted access conditions are configured with the deny and permit
commands. To remove an access list, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
management access-list name
no management access-list name
•
name — The access list name. (Range: 1–32 printable characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command enters the access-list configuration mode, where the denied or
permitted access conditions with the deny and permit commands must be
defined.
If no match criteria are defined the default is deny.
If reentering to an access-list context, the new rules are entered at the end of
the access-list.
Use the management access-class command to select the active access-list.
The active management list cannot be updated or removed.
1484
Management ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1485 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Management access list names can consist of any printable character,
including blanks. Enclose the name in quotes to embed blanks in the name.
Examples
The following example shows how to configure two management interfaces,
gigabit Ethernet 1/0/1 and gigabit Ethernet 2/0/9.
console(config)#management access-list mlist
console(config-macal)# permit gigabitethernet 1/0/1 priority 1
console(config-macal)# permit gigabitethernet 2/0/9 priority 1
console(config-macal)# exit
console(config)#management access-class mlist
The following example shows how to configure all the interfaces to be
management interfaces except for two interfaces, gigabit Ethernet 1/0/1 and
gigabit Ethernet 2/0/9.
console(config)# management access-list mlist
console(config-macal)# deny gigabitethernet 1/0/1 priority 1
console(config-macal)# deny gigabitethernet 2/0/9 priority 2
console(config-macal)# permit priority 2
console(config-macal)# exit
console(config) # management access-class mlist
permit (management)
Use the permit command in Management Access-List configuration mode to
set conditions for the management access list.
Syntax
permit ip-source ip-address [mask mask | prefix-length] [gigabitethernet
unit/slot/port | vlan vlan-id | port-channel port-channel-number |
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port] [ service service ] [ priority priority-value ]
permit {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | vlan vlan-id | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port} [service service]
[priority priority-value]
permit service service [priority priority-value]
permit priority priority-value
Management ACL Commands
1485
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1486 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
gigabitethernet unit/slot/port — A valid 1-gigabit Ethernet-routed port
number.
•
vlan vlan-id — A valid VLAN number.
•
port-channel port-channel-number — A valid port channel number.
•
tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port — A valid 10-gigabit Ethernet-routed
port number.
•
ip-address — Source IP address.
•
mask mask — Specifies the network mask of the source IP address.
•
mask prefix-length — Specifies the number of bits that comprise the
source IP address prefix. The prefix length must be preceded by a forward
slash (/). (Range: 0–32)
•
service service — Indicates service type. Can be one of the following:
telnet, ssh, http, https, tftp, snmp, sntp, or any. The any keyword indicates
that the service match for the ACL is effectively "don’t care".
•
priority priority-value — Priority for the rule. (Range: 1 – 64)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Management Access-list Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Rules with gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, vlan, and port-channel
parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate
interface. Ensure that each rule has a unique priority.
Examples
The following example shows how to configure two management interfaces,
gigabit Ethernet 1/0/1 and gigabit Ethernet 2/0/9.
console(config)#management access-list mlist
console(config-macal)# permit gigabitethernet 1/0/1 priority 1
console(config-macal)# permit gigabitethernet 2/0/9 priority 1
console(config-macal)# exit
1486
Management ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1487 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)# management access-class mlist
The following example shows how to configure all the interfaces to be
management interfaces except for two interfaces, gigabit Ethernet 1/0/1 and
2/0/9.
console(config)# management access-list mlist
console(config-macal)# deny gigabitethernet 1/0/1 priority 1
console(config-macal)# deny gigabitethernet 2/0/9 priority 2
console(config-macal)# permit priority 2
console(config-macal)# exit
console(config)# management access-class mlist
show management access-class
Use the show management access-class command in Privileged EXEC mode
to display information about the active management access list.
Syntax
show management access-class
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the management access-list information.
console# show management access-class
Management access-class is enabled, using access list mlist
Management ACL Commands
1487
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1488 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show management access-list
Use the show management access-list command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display management access-lists.
Syntax
show management access-list [name]
•
name — A valid access list name. (Range: 1–32 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the active management access-list.
console# show management access-list
mlist
----permit priority 1 gigabitethernet 1/0/1
permit priority 2 gigabitethernet 2/0/1
! (Note: all other access implicitly denied)
1488
Management ACL Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1489 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
70
Mode Commands
This chapter explains the following commands:
configure terminal
do
configure terminal
Use the configure terminal command to get to the configure line. This
command is equivalent to the configure command.
Syntax
configure terminal
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Example
console#conf t
console(config)#
console#configure terminal
console(config)#
do
Use the do command to execute commands available in Privileged EXEC
mode from Global Configuration and other modes. Command completion
using the space bar is not available when using this command. When in
Mode Commands
1489
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1490 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
modes other than Global Configuration mode, the do command will not
appear in the list of commands shown in the help, nor will prompting be
available.
Syntax
do line
• line — Command to be executed. It should be an unambiguous command
from the Privileged EXEC mode. Commands such as configure, devshell,
and hidden commands are forbidden.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
All except Privileged EXEC and User EXEC modes.
Example
console(config)#do show ip interface
Default Gateway................................ 192.168.21.0
Burned In MAC Address.......................... 001E.C9AA.AF51
Routing Interfaces:
Interface
State
IP Address
----------
-----
--------------- --------------- -------
Vl1
Down
192.168.21.1
1490
Mode Commands
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
Method
None
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1491 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
71
Password Management Commands
The Password Management component supports the features below.
Passwords are masked when entered by the user and in the running config.
Configurable Minimum Password Length
The administrator has the option of requiring user passwords to be a
minimum length. The administrator can choose to have the switch enforce a
minimum length between 8 and 64 characters. The default minimum length
is 8 although there is no default password (zero length string).
Password History
Keeping a history of previous passwords ensures that users cannot reuse
passwords often. The administrator can configure the switch to store up to 10
of the last passwords for each user. The default operation is that no history is
stored.
Password Aging
The switch can implement an aging process on passwords and require users to
change them when they expire. The administrator can configure the switch to
force a password change between 1 and 365 days. By default, password aging
is disabled. When a password expires, the user must enter a new password
before continuing.
User Lockout
The administrator may choose to strengthen the security of the switch by
enabling the user lockout feature. A lockout count between 1 and 5 attempts
can be configured. When a lockout count is configured, then a user that is
logging in must enter the correct password within that count. Otherwise, that
user is locked out form further remote switch access. Only an administrator
with read/write access can reactivate that user. The user lockout feature is
disabled by default. The user lockout feature applies to all users on all ports.
Password Management Commands
1491
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1492 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The administrator can access the serial port even if he/she is locked out and
reset the password or clear the config to regain control of the switch. This
ensures that if a hacker tries to log in as admin and causes the account to be
locked out, then the administrator with physical access to the switch can still
log in and reactivate the admin account.
Password Strength
Password Strength is a measure of the effectiveness of a password in resisting
guessing and brute-force attacks. The strength of a password is a function of
length, complexity and randomness. Using strong passwords lowers overall
risk of a security breach. The scope of this feature is to enforce a baseline
Password Strength for all locally administered users.
The feature doesn’t affect users with an existing password until their
password ages out. Password Strength is only enforced when a user is
configuring a new password or changing their existing password. The default
action is Disabled in FP and is independent of any platform. The network
operator has to take care that the Password Strength check is Disabled before
downloading scripts containing old users to avoid password configuration
failure for such users.
Password Strength Definition:
The feature ensures that any password configured on the switch for local
administration purpose is a Strong password and it must conform to each of
the following characteristics:
•
Minimum number of uppercase letters.
•
Minimum number of lowercase letters.
•
Minimum number of numeric characters.
•
Minimum number of special characters from the set (`! " ? $ ? % ^ & * ( )
_ - + = { [ } ] : ; @ ' ~ # | \ < , > . ? / ).
•
Does not contain the associated login name.
•
Maximum number of consecutive characters (such as abcd).
•
Maximum number of consecutive numbers (such as 1234).
•
Maximum number of repetition of characters or numbers (such as 1111 or
aaaa).
1492
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1493 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Configuring minimum value of 0 for the above parameters means no
restriction on that set of characters and configuring maximum of 0 means
disabling the restriction (or no limit on the maximum number of course
limited by minimum password length).
The Password strength feature applies to all login passwords (user, line and
enable).
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands for viewing and configuring
properties of passwords:
passwords aging
passwords strength minimum specialcharacters
passwords history
passwords strength max-limit
consecutive-characters
passwords lock-out
passwords strength max-limit repeatedcharacters
passwords min-length
passwords strength minimum characterclasses
passwords strength-check
passwords strength exclude-keyword
passwords strength minimum uppercase- enable password encrypted
letters
passwords strength minimum lowercaseletters
show passwords configuration
passwords strength minimum numericcharacters
show passwords result
NOTE: To change a password, use the passwords command, which is described in
AAA Commands.
Password Management Commands
1493
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1494 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
passwords aging
Use the passwords aging command in Global Configuration mode to
implement aging on passwords for local users. When a user’s password
expires, the user is prompted to change it before logging in again. Use the no
form of this command to set the password aging to the default value.
Syntax
passwords aging 1-365
no passwords aging
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
A value of 0 days disables password aging.
Example
The following example sets the password age limit to 100 days.
console(config)#passwords aging 100
passwords history
As administrator, use the passwords history command in Global
Configuration mode to set the number of previous passwords that are stored
for each user account. When a local user changes his or her password, the user
is not able to reuse any password stored in password history. This setting
ensures that users do not reuse their passwords often. The default is 0. Use
the no form of this command to set the password history to the default value
of 0.
1494
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1495 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
passwords history 0-10
no passwords history
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
The default value is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the number of previous passwords remembered by
the system at 10.
console(config)#passwords history 10
passwords lock-out
Use the passwords lock-out command in Global Configuration mode to
strengthen the security of the switch by locking user accounts that have failed
login due to wrong passwords. When a lockout count is configured, a user
who is logging in must enter the correct password within that count.
Otherwise that user is locked out from further switch access. Only a user with
read/write access can reactivate a locked user account. Password lockout does
not apply to logins from the serial console. Use the no form of this command
to set the password lockout count to the default value.
Syntax
passwords lock-out 1-5
no passwords lock-out
Password Management Commands
1495
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1496 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Behavior
The default value is 0 or no lockout count is enforced.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
Password lockout only applies to users with authentication configured to
local. RADIUS or TACACS authenticated users will use policies configured
on the respective RADIUS/TACACS servers.
Example
The following example sets the number of user attempts before lockout at 2.
console(config)#passwords lock-out 2
passwords min-length
Use the passwords min-length command in Global Configuration mode to
enforce a minimum length password length for local users. The value also
applies to the enable password. The valid range is 8–64. The default is 8. Use
the no version of this command to set the minimum password length to 8.
Syntax
passwords min-length length
no passwords min-length
•
length — The minimum length of the password (Range: 8–64 characters)
Default Configuration
By default, the minimum password length is 8 characters.
1496
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1497 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures user bob with password xxxyymmmm and
user level 15.
(config)# username bob password xxxyyymmm level 15
passwords strength-check
Use the passwords strength-check command in Global Configuration mode
to enable the Password Strength feature. The command is used to enable the
checking of password strength during user configuration. Use the no form of
the command to disable the Password Strength feature.
Syntax
passwords strength-check
no passwords strength-check
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
The password strength feature is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command enables/disables enforcement of password strength checking
policy as configured by the following commands:
Password Management Commands
1497
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1498 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
passwords strength minimum uppercase-letters
passwords strength minimum lowercase-letters
passwords strength minimum special-characters
passwords strength minimum numeric-characters
passwords strength max-limit consecutive-characters
passwords strength max-limit repeated-characters
passwords strength minimum character-classes
passwords strength minimum uppercase-letters
Use this command to enforce a minimum number of uppercase letters that a
password must contain. The valid range is 0–16. The default is 1. A minimum
of 0 means no restriction on that set of characters. Use the no form of the
command to reset the minimum uppercase letters to the default value.
Syntax
passwords strength minimum uppercase-letters 0–16
no passwords strength minimum uppercase-letters
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
The default value is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1498
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1499 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)#passwords strength minimum uppercaseletters 6
passwords strength minimum lowercase-letters
Use this command to enforce a minimum number of lowercase letters that a
password must contain. The valid range is 0–16. The default is 1. A setting of
0 means no restriction. Use the no form of this command to reset the
minimum lowercase letters to the default value.
Syntax
passwords strength minimum lowercase-letters 0–16
no passwords strength minimum lowercase-letters
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
The default value is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#passwords strength minimum lowercaseletters 6
Password Management Commands
1499
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1500 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
passwords strength minimum numericcharacters
Use this command to enforce a minimum number of numeric numbers that a
password should contain. The valid range is 0–16. The default is 1. A
minimum of 0 means no restriction on that set of characters. Use the no form
of this command to reset the minimum numeric characters to the default
value.
Syntax
passwords strength minimum numeric–characters 0–16
no passwords strength minimum numeric–characters
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
The default value is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#passwords strength minimum
numeric–characters 6
1500
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1501 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
passwords strength minimum special-characters
Use this command to enforce a minimum number of special characters that a
password may contain. The valid range is 0–16. The default is 1. A setting of 0
means no restriction. Special characters are one of the following characters (`!
$ % ^ & * ( ) _ - + = { [ } ] : ; @ ' ~ # | \ < , > . / ) Use the no form of this
command to reset the minimum special characters to the default value.
Syntax
passwords strength minimum special–characters 0–16
no passwords strength minimum special–characters
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
The default value is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#passwords strength minimum
special–characters 6
passwords strength max-limit consecutivecharacters
Use this command to enforce a maximum number of consecutive characters
that a password can contain. If a user enters a password that has more
consecutive characters than the configured limit, the system rejects the
password. The valid range of consecutive characters is 0–15. The default is 0.
Password Management Commands
1501
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1502 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
A maximum of 0 means there is no restriction on consecutive characters.
Examples of consecutive characters are ABCDEF or 123456 or !”#$%&’().
Use the no form of this command to reset the maximum consecutive
characters accepted to the default value.
Syntax
passwords strength max-limit consecutive–characters 0–15
no passwords strength max-limit consecutive-characters
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
The default value is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#passwords strength max-limit consecutive-characters 3
passwords strength max-limit repeatedcharacters
Use this command to enforce a maximum repeated characters that a
password should contain. If password has repetition of characters more than
the configured max-limit, it fails to configure. The valid range is 0-15. The
default is 0. A maximum of 0 means again disabling the restriction. Use the
no form of this command to reset the maximum repeated characters to the
default value.
1502
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1503 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
passwords strength max-limit repeated-characters 0-15
no passwords strength max-limit repeated-characters
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
The default value is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)# passwords strength max-limit repeated-characters 3
passwords strength minimum character-classes
Use this command to enforce a minimum number of character classes that a
password should contain. Character classes are uppercase letters, lowercase
letters, numeric characters and special characters. The valid range is 0-4. The
default is 0. If a value of 0 is configured then no character class checking is
performed, i.e. for special characters, uppercase characters, lower-case
characters, etc. Use the no form of this command to reset the minimum
character-classes to the default value.
Syntax
passwords strength minimum character-classes 0-4
no passwords strength minimum character–classes
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Password Management Commands
1503
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1504 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Behavior
The default value is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#passwords strength minimum characterclasses 4
passwords strength exclude-keyword
Use this command to exclude the keyword while configuring the password.
The password does not accept the keyword in any form (inbetween the string,
case insensitive and reverse) as a substring. You can configure up to a
maximum of three keywords. Use the no form of this command to reset the
restriction for a given string or all the strings configured.
Syntax
passwords strength exclude–keyword string
no passwords strength exclude–keyword [string]
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
1504
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1505 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#passwords strength exclude-keyword
brcm
enable password encrypted
This command is used by an Administrator to transfer the enable password
between devices without having to know the password. The password
parameter must be exactly 128 hexadecimal characters.
Syntax
enable password encrypted password
Parameter Description
This command does not require parameter descriptions.
Default Behavior
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
show passwords configuration
Use the show passwords configuration command in Privileged EXEC mode
to display the configured password management settings.
Syntax
show passwords configuration
Password Management Commands
1505
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1506 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
The following fields are displayed by this command.
Parameter
Description
Minimum Password Length
Minimum number of characters required
when changing passwords.
Password History
Number of passwords to store for reuse
prevention.
Password Aging
Length in days that a password is valid.
Lockout Attempts
Number of failed password login attempts
before lockout.
Minimum Password Uppercase Letters
Minimum number of uppercase
characters required when configuring
passwords.
Minimum Password Lowercase Letters
Minimum number of uppercase
characters required when configuring
passwords.
Minimum Password Numeric Characters Minimum number of numeric characters
required when configuring passwords.
Maximum Password Consecutive
Characters
Maximum number of consecutive
characters required that the password
should contain when configuring
passwords.
Maximum Password Repeated Characters Maximum number of repetition of
characters that the password should
contain when configuring passwords.
Minimum Password Character Classes
Minimum number of character classes
(uppercase, lowercase, numeric and
special) required when configuring
passwords.
Password Exclude-Keywords
Minimum number of character classes
(uppercase, lowercase, numeric and
special) required when configuring
passwords.
1506
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1507 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the command output.
console#show passwords configuration
Passwords Configuration
----------------------Minimum Password Length........................ 8
Password History............................... 0
Password Aging (days).......................... 0
Lockout Attempts............................... 0
Password Strength Check........................ Enable
Minimum Password Uppercase Letters............. 4
Minimum Password Lowercase Letters............. 4
Minimum Password Numeric Characters............ 3
Minimum Password Special Characters............ 3
Maximum Password Consecutive Characters........ 3
Maximum Password Repeated Characters........... 3
Minimum Password Character Classes............. 4
Password Exclude Keywords...................... brcm, brcm1,brcm2
show passwords result
Use the show passwords result command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the last password set result information.
Password Management Commands
1507
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1508 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show passwords result
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the command output.
console#show passwords result
Last User whose password is set ......................
brcm
Password strength check ........................... Enable
Last Password Set Result:
Reason for failure: Could not set user password! Password
should contain at least 4 uppercase letters.
1508
Password Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1509 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
PHY Diagnostics Commands
72
This chapter explains the following commands:
show copper-ports tdr
test copper-port tdr
show fiber-ports optical-transceiver
show copper-ports tdr
Use the show copper-ports tdr command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the stored information regarding cable lengths.
Syntax
show copper-ports tdr [interface]
•
interface — A valid Ethernet port. The full syntax is unit / port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The copper-related commands do not apply to the stacking, CX-4, or
10GBaseT ports associated with these plug-in modules.
The maximum length of the cable for the Time Domain Reflectometry
(TDR) test is 120 meters. Disable green-mode on the port in order to obtain
accurate results.
PHY Diagnostics Commands
1509
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1510 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the last TDR tests on all ports.
console#show copper-ports tdr
Port
Result
Length [meters]
----
--------
---------------
Date
1/0/1
OK
1/0/2
Short
1/0/3
Test has not been performed
1/0/4
Open
128
1/0/5
Fiber
-
50
---------------
13:32:00 23 July 2004
13:32:08 23 July 2004
-
show fiber-ports optical-transceiver
Use the show fiber-ports optical-transceiver command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display the optical transceiver diagnostics.
Syntax
show fiber-ports optical-transceiver [interface]
•
interface — A valid Ethernet port. The full syntax is unit / port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The show fiber ports command is only applicable to the SFP combo ports and
XFP ports (not the ports on the SFP+ plug-in module).
1510
PHY Diagnostics Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1511 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
The following examples display the optical transceiver diagnostics.
console#show fiber-ports optical-transceiver
Port
Temp
----------1/0/3
1/0/4
1/0/1
Voltage
------ ------w
OK
OK
OK
Copper
Current
Output
Input
TX
Power
Power
Fault
----OK
OK
----OK
E
------E
OK
-----OK
OK
LOS
--OK
OK
Temp - Internally measured transceiver temperature
Voltage - Internally measured supply voltage
Current - Measured TX bias current
Output Power - Measured TX output power in milliWatts
Input Power - Measured RX received power in milliWatts
TX Fault - Transmitter fault
LOS - Loss of signal
test copper-port tdr
Use the test copper-port tdr command in Privileged EXEC mode to diagnose
with Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology the quality and
characteristics of a copper cable attached to a port.
Syntax
test copper-port tdr interface
•
interface — A valid Ethernet port. The full syntax is unit / port.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines.
During the test, shut down the port under test unless it is a combo port with
an active fiber port.
PHY Diagnostics Commands
1511
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1512 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
NOTE: The maximum distance VCT can function is 120 meters.
Examples
The following example results in a report on the cable attached to port 1/0/3.
console#test copper-port tdr 1/0/3
Cable is open at 64 meters
The following example results in a failure to report on the cable attached to
port 2/0/3.
console#test copper-port tdr 2/0/3
Can’t perform the test on fiber ports
1512
PHY Diagnostics Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1513 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
73
RMON Commands
The PowerConnect SNMP component includes an RMON (remote
monitoring) agent. RMON is a base technology used by network
management applications to manage a network. Troubleshooting and
network planning can be accomplished through the network management
applications. The network monitor monitors traffic on a network and records
selected portions of the network traffic and statistics. The collected traffic
and statistics are retrieved using SNMP. The data collected is defined in the
RMON MIB, RFC 2819. A device that supports gathering and reporting the
RMON data is referred to as an RMON probe or RMON Agent. An RMON
probe provides RMON data to an RMON Manager for analysis and
presentation to the user. An RMON probe may be embedded in an existing
network device or stand-alone.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
rmon alarm
show rmon collection history
rmon collection history
show rmon events
rmon event
show rmon history
show rmon alarm
show rmon log
show rmon alarms
show rmon statistics
rmon alarm
Use the rmon alarm command in Global Configuration mode to configure
alarm conditions. To remove an alarm, use the no form of this command. See
also the related show rmon alarm command.
RMON Commands
1513
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1514 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold
value [event-number] falling-threshold value [event-number] [owner string]
[startup direction]
no rmon alarm number
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
number
The alarm index. (Range: 1–65535)
variable
A fully qualified SNMP object identifier that resolves to a
particular instance of a MIB object.
interval
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and
compared with the rising and falling thresholds. (Range: 1–
2147483647)
rising-threshold
value
Rising Threshold value. (Range: -2147483648 – 2147483647)
falling-threshold
value
Falling Threshold value. (Range: -2147483648 – 2147483647)
event-number
The index of the Event that is used when a rising or falling
threshold is crossed. (Range: 1- 65535)
delta
The sampling method for the selected variable and calculating
the value to be compared against the thresholds. If the method
is delta, the selected variable value at the last sample is
subtracted from the current value, and the difference compared
with the thresholds.
absolute
The sampling method for the selected variable and calculating
the value to be compared against the thresholds. If the method
is absolute, the value of the selected variable is compared
directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval.
1514
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1515 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
startup direction
The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.
If the first sample (after this entry becomes valid) is greater
than or equal to the rising-threshold, and direction is equal to
rising or rising-falling, then a single rising alarm is generated. If
the first sample (after this entry becomes valid) is less than or
equal to the falling-threshold, and direction is equal to falling
or rising-falling, then a single falling alarm is generated.
owner string
Enter a name that specifies who configured this alarm. If
unspecified, the name is an empty string.
Default Configuration
No alarms are configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the following alarm conditions:
•
Alarm index — 1
•
Variable identifier — 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.5
•
Sample interval — 10 seconds
•
Rising threshold — 500000
•
Falling threshold — 10
•
Rising threshold event index — 1
•
Falling threshold event index — 1
console(config)#rmon alarm 1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.10.5 10
50000 10 1 1
RMON Commands
1515
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1516 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
rmon collection history
Use the rmon collection history command in Interface Configuration mode
to enable a Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB history statistics group on an
interface. To remove a specified RMON history statistics group, use the no
form of this command. Also see the show rmon collection history command.
Syntax
rmon collection history index [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number]
[interval seconds]
no rmon collection history index
•
index — The requested statistics index group. (Range: 1–65535)
•
owner ownername — Records the RMON statistics group owner name. If
unspecified, the name is an empty string.
•
buckets bucket-number — A value associated with the number of buckets
specified for the RMON collection history group of statistics. If
unspecified, defaults to 50. (Range: 1 - 65535)
•
interval seconds — The number of seconds in each polling cycle. If
unspecified, defaults to 1800. (Range: 1–3600)
Default Configuration
The buckets configuration is 50. The interval configuration is 1800 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet)
mode.
User Guidelines
This command cannot be executed on multiple ports using the interface
range command.
Example
The following example enables a Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB history
statistics group on port 1/0/8 with the index number "1" and a polling interval
period of 2400 seconds.
1516
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1517 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8
console(config-if-1/0/8)#rmon collection history 1
interval 2400
rmon event
Use the rmon event command in Global Configuration mode to configure an
event. To remove an event, use the no form of this command. See also the
show rmon events command.
Syntax
rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner
string]
no rmon event number
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
number
The event index. (Range: 1–65535)
log
An entry is made in the log table for each event.
trap
An SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations.
community
If an SNMP trap is to be sent, it is sent to the SNMP
community specified by this octet string. (Range: 0-127
characters)
description string
A comment describing this event. (Range 0-127 characters)
owner string
Enter a name that specifies who configured this event. If
unspecified, the name is an empty string.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
RMON Commands
1517
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1518 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures an event with the trap index of 10.
console(config)#rmon event 10 log
show rmon alarm
Use the show rmon alarm command in User EXEC mode to display alarm
configuration. Also see the rmon alarm command.
Syntax
show rmon alarm number
•
number — Alarm index. (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays RMON 1 alarms.
console> show rmon alarm 1
Alarm 1
------OID: 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
Last sample Value: 878128
1518
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1519 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Interval: 30
Sample Type: delta
Startup Alarm: rising
Rising Threshold: 8700000
Falling Threshold: 78
Rising Event: 1
Falling Event: 1
Owner: CLI
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Alarm
Alarm index.
OID
Monitored variable OID.
Last Sample
Value
The statistic value during the last sampling period. For example,
if the sample type is delta, this value is the difference between the
samples at the beginning and end of the period. If the sample
type is absolute, this value is the sampled value at the end of the
period.
Interval
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and
compared with the rising and falling thresholds.
Sample Type
The method of sampling the variable and calculating the value
compared against the thresholds. If the value is absolute, the
value of the variable is compared directly with the thresholds at
the end of the sampling interval. If the value is delta, the value of
the variable at the last sample is subtracted from the current
value, and the difference compared with the thresholds.
Startup Alarm
The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set. If the first
sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold, and startup
alarm is equal to rising or rising and falling, then a single rising
alarm is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the
falling threshold, and startup alarm is equal falling or rising and
falling, then a single falling alarm is generated.
RMON Commands
1519
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1520 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Rising Threshold A sampled statistic threshold. When the current sampled value is
greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last
sampling interval is less than this threshold, a single event is
generated.
Falling Threshold A sampled statistic threshold. When the current sampled value is
less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last
sampling interval is greater than this threshold, a single event is
generated.
Rising Event
The event index used when a rising threshold is crossed.
Falling Event
The event index used when a falling threshold is crossed.
Owner
The entity that configured this entry.
show rmon alarms
Use the show rmon alarms command in User EXEC mode to display the
alarms summary table.
Syntax
show rmon alarms
Default Configuration
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the alarms summary table:
console> show rmon alarms
Index
1520
OID
RMON Commands
Owner
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1521 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
-----
----------------------
-------
1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
CLI
2
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
Manager
3
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.9
CLI
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Index
An index that uniquely identifies the entry.
OID
Monitored variable OID.
Owner
The entity that configured this entry.
show rmon collection history
Use the show rmon collection history command in User EXEC mode to
display the requested group of statistics. Also see the rmon collection history
command.
Syntax
show rmon collection history [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel
port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays all RMON group statistics.
RMON Commands
1521
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1522 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console> show rmon collection history
Index
ner
Interface
Interval
Requested
Granted
Samples
Samples
Ow
--------------------------------------------------------1
LI
1/0/1
30
50
50
C
2
anager
1/0/1
1800
50
50
M
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Index
An index that uniquely identifies the entry.
Interface
The sampled Ethernet interface.
Interval
The interval in seconds between samples.
Requested Samples The requested number of samples to be saved.
Granted Samples
The granted number of samples to be saved.
Owner
The entity that configured this entry.
show rmon events
Use the show rmon events command in User EXEC mode to display the
RMON event table. Also see the rmon event command.
Syntax
show rmon events
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1522
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1523 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the RMON event table.
console> show rmon events
Index Description
-----
-----------
Type
---Log
Community
Owner
Last time sent
---------
------
-------------------
1
Errors
2
High Broadcast Log-Trap
CLI
switch
Jan 18 2005
23:58:17
Manager Jan 18 2005
23:59:48
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Index
An index that uniquely identifies the event.
Description
A comment describing this event.
Type
The type of notification that the device generates about this event.
Can have the following values: none, log, trap, log-trap. In the case
of log, an entry is made in the log table for each event. In the case of
trap, an SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations.
Community
If an SNMP trap is to be sent, it is sent to the SNMP community
specified by this octet string.
Owner
The entity that configured this event.
Last time sent
The time this entry last generated an event. If this entry has not
generated any events, this value is zero.
show rmon history
Use the show rmon history command in User EXEC mode to display RMON
Ethernet Statistics history. Also see the rmon collection history command.
RMON Commands
1523
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1524 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show rmon history index [throughput | errors | other] [period seconds]
•
index — The requested set of samples. (Range: 1–65535)
•
throughput — Displays throughput counters.
•
errors — Displays error counters.
•
other — Displays drop and collision counters.
•
period seconds — Specifies the requested period time to display. (Range:
0–2147483647)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for
"throughput" on index number 1.
console> show rmon history 1 throughput
Sample Set: 1 Owner: CLI
Interface:
1/0/1 interval: 1800
Requested samples: 50
Granted samples: 50
Maximum table size: 270
Time
Octets
-------------------- ---------
Packets
Broadcast
----------- ------
Multicast
%
-------- --
09-Mar-2005
18:29:32 303595962
357568
3289
7287
19
09-Mar-2005
18:29:42 287696304
275686
2789
5878
20
The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for errors
on index number 1.
1524
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1525 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console> show rmon history 1 errors
Sample Set: 1
Owner: Me
Interface:
interval: 1800
1/0/1
Requested samples: 50
Granted samples: 50
Maximum table size: 500 (800 after reset)
Time
CRC Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabbers
Align
----------------------------------------------------09-Mar-2005 1
1
0
49
0
1
0
27
0
18:29:32
09-Mar-2005 1
18:29:42
The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for "other"
on index number 1.
console> show rmon history 1 other
Sample Set: 1
Interface:
Owner: Me
1/0/1 Interval: 1800
Requested samples: 50
Granted samples: 50
Maximum table size: 270
Time
Dropped
Collisions
-------------------
----------- -----------
10-Mar-2005
22:06:00
3
0
10-Mar-2005
22:06:20
3
0
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
RMON Commands
1525
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1526 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Time
Date and Time the entry is recorded.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this
sampling interval.
Broadcast
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that
were directed to the Broadcast address.
Multicast
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that
were directed to a Multicast address. This number does not include
packets addressed to the Broadcast address.
%
The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this
interface during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.
CRC Align The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64
and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with
a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were
less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were
longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that
were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets) had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (AlignmentError). It is normal for
etherHistoryFragments to increment because it counts both runts
(which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
1526
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1527 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Jabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were
longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).
Dropped
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe
due to lack of resources during this sampling interval. This number is
not necessarily the number of packets dropped. It is just the number of
times this condition has been detected.
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet
segment during this sampling interval.
show rmon log
Use the show rmon log command in User EXEC mode to display the RMON
logging table.
Syntax
show rmon log [event]
•
event — Event index. (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following examples display the RMON logging table.
console> show rmon log
Maximum table size: 100
RMON Commands
1527
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1528 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Event Description
Time
----- -----------
--------------------
1
Errors
Jan 18 2005
23:48:19
1
Errors
Jan 18 2005
23:58:17
2
High Broadcast
Jan 18 2005
23:59:48
console> show rmon log
Maximum table size: 100 (100 after reset)
Event Description
Time
----- -----------
--------------------
1
Errors
Jan 18 2005
23:48:19
1
Errors
Jan 18 2005
23:58:17
2
High Broadcast
Jan 18 2005
23:59:48
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Event
An index that uniquely identifies the event.
Description
A comment describing this event.
Time
The time this entry was created.
show rmon statistics
Use the show rmon statistics command in User EXEC mode to display
RMON Ethernet Statistics.
Syntax
show rmon statistics {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }
1528
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1529 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics for port 1/0/1.
console> show rmon statistics gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Port 1/0/1
Dropped: 8
Octets: 878128 Packets: 978
Broadcast: 7 Multicast: 1
CRC Align Errors: 0 Collisions: 0
Undersize Pkts: 0 Oversize Pkts: 0
Fragments: 0 Jabbers: 0
64 Octets: 98 65 to 127 Octets: 0
128 to 255 Octets: 0 256 to 511 Octets: 0
512 to 1023 Octets: 491 1024 to 1518 Octets: 389
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display:
Field
Description
Dropped
The total number of events in which packets are dropped by the
probe due to lack of resources. This number is not always the
number of packets dropped; it is the number of times this
condition has been detected.
RMON Commands
1529
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1530 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad
packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, Broadcast
packets, and Multicast packets) received.
Broadcast
The total number of good packets received and directed to the
Broadcast address. This does not include Multicast packets.
Multicast
The total number of good packets received and directed to a
Multicast address. This number does not include packets
directed to the Broadcast address.
CRC Align Errors
The total number of packets received with a length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518
octets, inclusive, but with either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Pkts
The total number of packets received less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and
otherwise well formed.
Oversize Pkts
The total number of packets received longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and
otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of
octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this
Ethernet segment.
64 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that are 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
1530
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1531 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Field
Description
65 to 127 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that are between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
128 to 255 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that are between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
256 to 511 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that are between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
512 to 1023 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that are between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
1024 to 1518
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that are between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
RMON Commands
1531
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1532 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1532
RMON Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1533 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
SDM Templates Commands
74
On PowerConnect devices, the total available H/W route entries are divided
statically (at compile-time) among IPV4 and IPv6 routes. If a switch is
deployed in network environments where no IPv6 routes are needed, then
H/W resources allocated for IPv6 routes are unused.
The Switch Performance Optimization feature enables the operator to
optimize resources for IPv4 only routing environments depending on the how
the switch is used in the network at runtime. The operator can choose
between Ipv4-only (where all the routing table entries are reserved for IPv4
Routes) or IPv4/IPv6 (Default) mode.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
sdm prefer
show sdm prefer
sdm prefer
Use the sdm prefer command in Global Config mode to change the template
that will be active after the next reboot. To revert to the default template
after the next reboot, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
sdm prefer {dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default|ipv4-routing {default|datacenter}}
SDM Templates Commands
1533
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1534 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
dual-ipv4-and-ipv6
This keyword filters subsequent template choices to those that
support both IPv4 and IPv6. There is only one such template. It
is selected using the keyword default.
ipv4-routing
This keyword filters subsequent template choices to those that
support IPv4 and not IPv6. The default IPv4-only template
maximizes the number of IPv4 unicast routes, while limiting
the number of ECMP next hops in each route to 4. The datacenter template supports increases the number of ECMP next
hops to 16 and reduces the number of routes.
Default Configuration
The system defaults to the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template.
Command Mode
Global Config
User Guidelines
SDM templates enable you to reallocate system resources to support a
different mix of features. After setting the template, you must reboot in order
for the configuration change to take effect.
If you attach a unit to a stack and its template does not match the stack’s
template, then the new unit will automatically reboot using the template
used by other stack members. To avoid the automatic reboot, you may first
set the template to the template used by existing members of the stack. Then
power off the new unit, attach it to the stack, and power it on.
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful
Completion
Message
Changes to the running SDM preferences have been stored, but
cannot take effect until the next reload. Use the show sdm
prefer command below to see what SDM preference is currently
active.
1534
SDM Templates Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1535 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Message Type
Message Description
Error Completion
Message
None
show sdm prefer
Use the show sdm prefer command in Privileged EXEC mode to view the
currently active SDM template and its scaling parameters, or to view the
scaling parameters for an inactive template.
Syntax
show sdm prefer [dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default|ipv4-routing {default|datacenter}]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
dual-ipv4-and-ipv6
default
List the scaling parameters for the template supporting IPv4
and IPv6.
ipv4-routing default List the scaling parameters for the IPv4-only template
maximizing the number of unicast routes.
ipv4-routing datacenter
List the scaling parameters for the IPv4-only template
supporting more ECMP next hops.
The following table explains the output parameters.
Parameter
Description
ARP Entries
The maximum number of entries in the IPv4 Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache for routing interfaces.
IPv4 Unicast Routes The maximum number of IPv4 unicast forwarding table entries.
IPv6 NDP Entries
The maximum number of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol
(NDP) cache entries.
IPv6 Unicast Routes The maximum number of IPv6 unicast forwarding table entries.
ECMP Next Hops
The maximum number of next hops that can be installed in the
IPv4 and IPv6 unicast forwarding tables.
SDM Templates Commands
1535
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1536 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
IPv4 Multicast
Routes
The maximum number of IPv4 multicast forwarding table
entries.
IPv6 Multicast
Routes
The maximum number of IPv6 multicast forwarding table
entries.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
When invoked with no optional keywords, this command lists the currently
active template, and the template that will become active on the next reboot,
if it is different from the currently active template. If the system boots with a
non-default template, and you clear the template configuration, either using
the no sdm prefer command or by deleting the startup configuration, the
show sdm prefer command lists the default template as the next active
template. To list the scaling parameters of a specific template, use that
template’s keyword as an argument to the command.
The following table lists the completion messages.
Message Type
Message Description
Successful
Completion
Message
Changes to the running SDM preferences have been stored, but
cannot take effect until the next reload.
Error Completion
Message
None
Use the show sdm prefer command to see what SDM
preference is currently active.
Examples
This example shows the current SDM template. The user has not changed
the next active SDM template.
1536
SDM Templates Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1537 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console# show sdm prefer
The current template is the Dual IPv4 and IPv6
template.
ARP Entries..................................6144
IPv4 Unicast Routes..........................8160
IPv6 NDP Entries.............................2560
IPv6 Unicast Routes..........................4096
ECMP Next Hops...............................4
IPv4 Multicast Routes........................1536
IPv6 Multicast Routes........................512
Now the user sets the next active SDM template for optimal performance for
IPv4 routing.
console# configure
console(config)#sdm prefer ipv4-routing default
Changes to the running SDM preferences have been
stored, but cannot take effect until the next reload.
Use 'show sdm prefer' to see what SDM preference is
currently active.
config# show sdm prefer
The current template is the Dual IPv4 and IPv6
template.
SDM Templates Commands
1537
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1538 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ARP Entries..................................6144
IPv4 Unicast Routes..........................8160
IPv6 NDP Entries.............................2560
IPv6 Unicast Routes..........................4096
ECMP Next Hops...............................4
IPv4 Multicast Routes........................1536
IPv6 Multicast Routes........................512
On the next reload, the template will be the IPv4routing Default template.
To list the scaling parameters for the data center template, invoke the
command with the ipv4-routing data-center keywords.
config# show sdm prefer ipv4-routing data-center
Scaling parameters for the IPv4 data center template:
ARP Entries..................................6144
IPv4 Unicast Routes..........................8160
IPv6 NDP Entries.............................0
IPv6 Unicast Routes..........................0
ECMP Next Hops...............................16
IPv4 Multicast Routes........................2048
IPv6 Multicast Routes........................0
1538
SDM Templates Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1539 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
75
Serviceability Tracing Packet
Commands
Debug commands cause the output of the enabled trace to display on a serial
port or telnet console. Note that the output resulting from enabling a debug
trace always displays on the serial port. The output resulting from enabling a
debug trace displays on all login sessions for which any debug trace has been
enabled. The configuration of a debug command remains in effect the whole
login session.
The output of a debug command is always submitted to the syslog utility at a
DEBUG severity level. As such, it can be forwarded to a syslog server, stored in
the buffer log, or otherwise processed in accordance with the configuration of
the syslog utility. Configuration of console logging in the syslog utility is not
required in order to view the output of debug traces.
Debug commands are provided in the normal CLI tree. Debug settings are
not persistent and are not visible in the running configuration. To view the
current debug settings, use the show debug command.
The output of debug commands can be large and may adversely affect system
performance.
Enabling debug for all IP packets can cause a serious impact on the system
performance; therefore, it is limited by ACLs. This means debug can be
enabled for IP packets that conform to the configured ACL. This also limits
the feature availability to only when the QoS component is available. Debug
for VRRP and ARP are available on routing builds.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
debug arp
debug ip igmp
debug ipv6 pimdm debug rip
debug auto-voip
debug ip mcache
debug ipv6 pimsm debug sflow
debug clear
debug ip pimdm
packet
debug isdp
debug spanning-tree
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1539
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1540 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
debug console
debug ip pimsm
packet
debug lacp
debug vrrp
debug dot1x
debug ip vrrp
debug
mldsnooping
show debugging
debug
igmpsnooping
debug ipv6 dhcp
debug ospf
debug ip acl
debug ipv6 mcache debug ospfv3
debug ip dvmrp
debug ipv6 mld
debug ping
NOTE: Debug commands are not persistent across resets.
debug arp
Use the debug arp command to enable tracing of ARP packets. Use the “no”
form of this command to disable tracing of ARP packets.
Syntax
debug arp
no debug arp
Default Configuration
ARP packet tracing is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug arp
1540
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1541 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
debug auto-voip
Use the debug auto-voip command to enable Auto VOIP debug messages.
Use the optional parameters to trace H323, SCCP, or SIP packets respectively.
Use the “no” form of this command to disable Auto VOIP debug messages.
Syntax
debug auto-voip [ H323 | SCCP | SIP ]
no debug auto-voip [ H323 | SCCP | SIP ]
Default Configuration
Auto VOIP tracing is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug auto-voip
debug clear
Use the debug clear command to disable all debug traces.
Syntax
debug clear
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1541
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1542 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug clear
debug console
Use the debug console to enable the display of “debug” trace output on the
login session in which it is executed. Debug console display must be enabled
in order to view any trace output. The output of debug trace commands
appears on all login sessions for which debug console has been enabled. The
configuration of this command remains in effect for the life of the login
session. The effect of this command is not persistent across resets.
Syntax
debug console
Default Configuration
Display of debug traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug console
debug dot1x
Use the debug dot1x command to enable dot1x packet tracing. Use the “no”
form of this command to disable dot1x packet tracing.
1542
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1543 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
debug dot1x packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug dot1x packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of dot1x traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug dot1x packet
debug igmpsnooping
Use the debug igmpsnooping to enable tracing of IGMP Snooping packets
transmitted and/or received by the switch. IGMP Snooping should be enabled
on the device and the interface in order to monitor packets for a particular
interface.
Syntax
debug igmpsnooping packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug igmpsnooping packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of IGMP Snooping traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1543
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1544 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug igmpsnooping packet
debug ip acl
Use the debug ip acl command to enable debug of IP Protocol packets
matching the ACL criteria. Use the “no” form of this command to disable IP
ACL debugging.
Syntax
debug ip acl acl
no debug ip acl acl
•
acl — The number of the IP ACL to debug.
Default Configuration
Display of IP ACL traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ip
acl 1
debug ip dvmrp
Use the debug ip dvmrp to trace DVMRP packet reception and transmission.
The receive option traces only received DVMRP packets and the transmit
option traces only transmitted DVMRP packets. When neither keyword is
used in the command, all DVMRP packet traces are dumped. Vital
1544
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1545 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
information such as source address, destination address, control packet type,
packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or
transmitted is displayed on the console.
Syntax
debug ip dvmrp packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug ip dvmrp packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of DVMRP traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ip
dvmrp packet
debug ip igmp
Use the debug ip igmp command to trace IGMP packet reception and
transmission. The receive option traces only received IGMP packets and the
transmit option traces only transmitted IGMP packets. When neither
keyword is used in the command, then all IGMP packet traces are dumped.
Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet
type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or
transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the “no” form of this command
to disable IGMP traces.
Syntax
debug ip igmp packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug ip igmp packet [ receive | transmit ]
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1545
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1546 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Display of IGMP traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ip igmp packet
debug ip mcache
Use the debug ip mcache command for tracing MDATA packet reception and
transmission. The receive option traces only received data packets and the
transmit option traces only transmitted data packets. When neither keyword
is used in the command, then all data packet traces are dumped. Vital
information such as source address, destination address, packet length, and
the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on
the console. Use the “no” form of this command to disable MDATA tracing.
Syntax
debug ip mcache packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug ip mcache packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of MDATA traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
1546
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1547 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#debug ip mcache packet
debug ip pimdm packet
Use the debug ip pimdm packet command to trace PIMDM packet reception
and transmission. The receive option traces only received PIMDM packets
and the transmit option traces only transmitted PIMDM packets. When
neither keyword is used in the command, then all PIMDM packet traces are
dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address,
control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is
received or transmitted is displayed on the console.
Use the no form of this command to disable debug tracing of PIMDM packet
reception and transmission.
Syntax
debug ip pimdm packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug ip pimdm packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of PIMDM traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ip pimdm packet
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1547
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1548 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
debug ip pimsm packet
Use the debug ip pimsm command to trace PIMSM packet reception and
transmission. The receive option traces only received PIMSM packets and the
transmit option traces only transmitted PIMSM packets. When neither
keyword is used in the command, then all PIMSM packet traces are dumped.
Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet
type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or
transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the no form of this command to
disable debug tracing of PIMSM packet reception and transmission.
Syntax
debug ip pimsm packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug ip pimsm packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of PIMSM traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ip pimsm packet
debug ip vrrp
Use the debug ip vrrp command to enable VRRP debug protocol messages.
Use the “no” form of this command to disable VRRP debug protocol
messages.
Syntax
debug ip vrrp
no debug ip vrrp
1548
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1549 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Display of VRRP traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#debug ip vrrp
debug ipv6 dhcp
Use the debug ipv6 dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
debug information about DHCPv6 client activities and to trace DHCPv6
packets to and from the local DHCPv6 client. To disable debugging, use the
no form of the command.
Syntax
debug ipv6 dhcp
no debug ipv6 dhcp
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
Debugging for the DHCP for IPv6 is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
DHCPv6 client already has packet tracing. This command turns the packet
tracing on.
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1549
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1550 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
console#debug ipv6 dhcp
debug ipv6 mcache
Use the debug ipv6 mcache command to trace MDATAv6 packet reception
and transmission. The receive option traces only received data packets and
the transmit option traces only transmitted data packets. When neither
keyword is used in the command, then all data packet traces are dumped.
Vital information such as source address, destination address, packet length,
and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed
on the console.
Syntax
debug ipv6 mcache packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug ipv6 mcache packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of MDATA traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#debug ipv6 mcache packet
debug ipv6 mld
Use the debug ipv6 mld command to trace MLD packet reception and
transmission. The receive option traces only received MLD packets and the
transmit option traces only transmitted MLD packets. When neither keyword
1550
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1551 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
is used in the command, then all MLD packet traces are dumped. Vital
information such as source address, destination address, control packet type,
packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or
transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the “no” form of this command
to disable MLD tracing.
Syntax
debug ipv6 mld packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug ipv6 mld packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of MLD traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ipv6 mld packet
debug ipv6 pimdm
Use the debug ipv6 pimdm command to trace PIMDMv6 packet reception
and transmission. The receive option traces only received PIMDMv6 packets
and the transmit option traces only transmitted PIMDMv6 packets. When
neither keyword is used in the command, then all PIMDMv6 packet traces are
dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address,
control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is
received or transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the “no” form of this
command to disable PIMDMv6 tracing.
Syntax
debug ipv6 pimdm packet [ receive | transmit ]
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1551
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1552 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no debug ipv6 pimdm packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of PIMDMv6 traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ipv6 pimdm packet
debug ipv6 pimsm
Use the debug ipv6 pimsm command to trace PIMSMv6 packet reception
and transmission. The receive option traces only received PIMSMv6 packets
and the transmit option traces only transmitted PIMSMv6 packets. When
neither keyword is used in the command, then all PIMSMv6 packet traces are
dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address,
control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is
received or transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the “no” form of this
command to disable PIMSMv6 tracing.
Syntax
debug ipv6 pimsm packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug ipv6 pimsm packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of PIMSMv6 traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
1552
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1553 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ipv6 pimsm packet
debug isdp
Use the debug isdp command to trace ISDP packet reception and
transmission. The receive option traces only received ISDP packets and the
transmit option traces only transmitted ISDP packets. When neither keyword
is used in the command, then all ISDP packet traces are dumped. Vital
information such as source address, destination address, control packet type,
packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or
transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the “no” form of this command
to disable ISDP tracing.
Syntax
debug isdp packet [ receive | transmit ]
no debug isdp packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of ISDP traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug isdp packet
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1553
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1554 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
debug lacp
Use the debug lacp command to enable tracing of LACP packets received and
transmitted by the switch. Use the “no” form of this command to disable
tracing of LACP packets.
Syntax
debug lacp packet
no debug lacp packet
Default Configuration
Display of LACP traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug lacp packet
debug mldsnooping
Use the debug mldsnooping command to trace MLD snooping packet
reception and transmission. The receive option traces only received MLD
snooping packets and the transmit option traces only transmitted MLD
snooping packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all
MLD snooping packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source
address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the
interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the
console. Use the “no” form of this command to disable tracing of MLD
Snooping packets.
Syntax
debug mldsnooping packet [ receive | transmit ]
1554
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1555 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no debug mldsnooping packet [ receive | transmit ]
Default Configuration
Display of MLD Snooping traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug mldsnooping
debug ospf
Use the debug ospf command to enable tracing of OSPF packets received and
transmitted by the switch. Use the “no” form of this command to disable
tracing of OSPF packets.
Syntax
debug ospf packet
no debug ospf packet
Default Configuration
Display of OSPF traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ospf packet
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1555
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1556 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
debug ospfv3
Use the debug ospfv3 command to enable tracing of OSPFv3 packets
received and transmitted by the switch. Use the “no” form of this command
to disable tracing of OSPFv3 packets.
Syntax
debug ospfv3 packet
no debug ospfv3 packet
Default Configuration
Display of OSPFv3 traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug ospfv3 packet
debug ping
Use the debug ping command to enable tracing of ICMP echo requests and
responses. This command traces pings on the network port and on the
routing interfaces. Use the “no” form of this command to disable tracing of
ICMP echo requests and responses.
Syntax
debug ping packet
no debug ping packet
Default Configuration
Display of ICMP echo traces is disabled by default.
1556
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1557 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays.
console#debug ping packet
debug rip
Use the debug rip command to enable tracing of RIP requests and responses.
Use the “no” form of this command to disable tracing of RIP requests and
responses.
Syntax
debug rip packet
no debug rip packet
Default Configuration
Display of RIP traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug rip packet
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1557
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1558 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
debug sflow
Use the debug sflow command to enable sFlow debug packet trace. Use the
“no” form of this command to disable sFlow packet tracing.
Syntax
debug sflow packet
no debug sflow packet
Default Configuration
Display of sFlow traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug sflow packet
debug spanning-tree
Use the debug spanning-tree command to trace spanning tree BPDU packet
reception and transmission. The receive option traces only received spanning
tree BPDUs and the transmit option traces only transmitted BPDUs. When
neither keyword is used in the command, all spanning tree BPDU traces are
dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address,
control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is
received or transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the “no” form of this
command to disable tracing of spanning tree BPDUs.
Syntax
debug spanning-tree bpdu [ receive | transmit ]
no debug spanning-tree bpdu [ receive | transmit ]
1558
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1559 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
Display of spanning tree BPDU traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
There are no usage guidelines for this command.
Example
console#debug spanning-tree bpdu
debug vrrp
Use the debug vrrp command in Privileged EXEC mode to enable VRRP
debug protocol messages. Use the no form of this command to disable VRRP
debug protocol messages.
Syntax
debug vrrp all
no debug vrrp all
Default Configuration
The display of VRRP traces is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
show debugging
Use the show debugging command to display packet tracing configurations.
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
1559
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1560 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show debugging
no show debugging
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
Enabled packet tracing configurations are displayed.
Example
console #debug arp
Arp packet tracing enabled.
console #show debugging
Arp packet tracing enabled.
1560
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1561 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
76
Sflow Commands
sFlow® is the standard for monitoring high-speed switched and routed
networks. sFlow technology is built into network equipment and gives
complete visibility into network activity, enabling effective management and
control of network resources.
The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow Agent (embedded in a
switch or router or in a stand-alone probe) and a central sFlow Collector. The
sFlow Agent uses sampling technology to capture traffic statistics from the
device it is monitoring. sFlow datagrams are used to forward the sampled
traffic statistics immediately to an sFlow Collector for analysis.
The sFlow Agent supports two forms of sampling: statistical packet-based
sampling of switched or routed Packet Flows and time-based sampling of
counters.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
sflow destination
show sflow agent
sflow polling
show sflow destination
sflow polling (Interface Mode)
show sflow polling
sflow sampling
show sflow polling
sflow sampling (Interface Mode)
sflow destination
Use the sflow destination command to configure the sFlow collector
parameters (owner string, receiver timeout, maxdatagram, ip address and
port). Use the “no” form of this command to set receiver parameters to the
default or remove a receiver.
Sflow Commands
1561
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1562 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
sflow rcvr_index destination { ip-address [ port ] | maxdatagram size | owner
"owner_string" timeout rcvr_timeout}
no sflow rcvr_index destination [ip-address | maxdatagram | owner ]
• rcvr_index — The index of this sFlow Receiver (Range: 1–8).
• ip-address — The sFlow receiver IP address. If set to 0.0.0.0, no sFlow
datagrams will be sent.
•
size —The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single
sample datagram. The management entity should set this value to avoid
fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams. (Range: 200–9116 bytes).
•
owner_string —The identity string for the receiver, the entity making use
of this sFlowRcvrTable entry. The default is an empty string. The empty
string indicates that the entry is currently unclaimed and the receiver
configuration is reset to the default values. An entity wishing to claim an
sFlowRcvrTable entry must ensure that the entry is unclaimed before
trying to claim it. The entry is claimed by setting the owner string to a
non-null value. The entry must be claimed before assigning a receiver to a
sampler or poller. (Range: 1–127 characters).
•
rcvr_timeout — The time, in seconds, remaining before the sampler or
poller is released and stops sending samples to the receiver. A
management entity wanting to maintain control of the sampler is
responsible for setting a new value before the old one expires. (Range:
0–4294967295 seconds).
•
port — The destination Layer4 UDP port for sFlow datagrams. (Range:
1–65535).
Default Configuration
No receivers are configured by default.
The default IP address is 0.0.0.0
The default maximum datagram size is 1400.
The default owner string is the empty string.
The default receiver timeout is 0.
The default port is 6343.
1562
Sflow Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1563 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
An sflow destination entry must have an owner name defined in order for
polling or sampling to be configured. The last set of command parameters are
optional in the no form of the command.
Example
console(config)#sflow 1 destination owner 1 timeout
2000
console(config)#sflow 1 destination maxdatagram 500
console(config)#sflow 1 destination 30.30.30.1 560
sflow polling
Use the sflow polling command to enable a new sflow poller instance for this
data source if rcvr_idx is valid. Use the “no” form of this command to reset
poller parameters to the defaults.
Syntax
sflow rcvr-index polling {gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet} interface-list
poll-interval
no sflow rcvr-index polling {gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet} interfaces
• rcvr-index — The sFlow Receiver associated with the poller (Range: 1–8).
• interface-list — The list of interfaces to poll in unit/slot/port format.
• poll-interval — The sFlow instance polling interval. A poll interval of 0
disables counter sampling. A value of n means once in n seconds a counter
sample is generated. (Range: 0–86400).
Sflow Commands
1563
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1564 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
There are no pollers configured by default.
The default poll interval is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#sflow 1 polling gigabitethernet
1/0/1-10 200
sflow polling (Interface Mode)
Use the sflow polling command in Interface Mode to enable a new sflow
poller instance for this data source if rcvr_idx is valid. Use the "no" form of
this command to reset poller parameters to the defaults.
Syntax
sflow rcvr-index polling poll-interval
no sflow rcvr-index polling
• rcvr-index — The sFlow Receiver associated with the poller (Range: 1 - 8).
• poll-interval — The sFlow instance polling interval. A poll interval of 0
disables counter sampling. A value of n means once in n seconds a counter
sample is generated. (Range: 0 - 86400).
Default Configuration
There are no pollers configured by default.
The default poll interval is 0.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
1564
Sflow Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1565 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/2)#sflow 1 polling 6055
sflow sampling
Use the sflow sampling command to enable a new sflow sampler instance for
this data source if rcvr_idx is valid. Use the “no” form of this command to
reset sampler parameters to the default.
Syntax
sflow rcvr-index sampling {gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet} interfaclist sampling-rate [size]
no sflow rcvr-index sampling {gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet}
interface-list
• rcvr-index — The sFlow Receiver for this sFlow sampler to which flow
samples are to be sent. If no receiver is configured, then no packets will be
sampled. Only active receivers can be set. If a receiver expires, then all
samplers associated with the receiver will also expire. (Range: 1–8).
•
interface-list — The list of interfaces to poll in unit/slot/port format.
•
sampling-rate — The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling from this
source. A sampling rate of 1 counts all packets. A rate of 0 disables
sampling. A value of n means that out of n incoming packets, 1 packet will
be sampled. (Range: 1024–65536).
•
size —The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from the
sampler packet (Range: 20–256 bytes).
Default Configuration
There are no samplers configured by default.
The default sampling rate is 0.
The default maximum header size is 128.
Sflow Commands
1565
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1566 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)#sflow 1 sampling gigabitethernet
1/0/2 1500 50
sflow sampling (Interface Mode)
Use the sflow sampling command in Interface Mode to enable a new sflow
sampler instance for this data source if rcvr_idx is valid. Use the "no" form of
this command to reset sampler parameters to the default.
Syntax
sflow rcvr-index sampling sampling-rate [ size ]
no sflow rcvr-index sampling
• rcvr-index — The sFlow Receiver for this sFlow sampler to which flow
samples are to be sent. If no receiver is configured, then no packets will be
sampled. Only active receivers can be set. If a receiver expires, then all
samplers associated with the receiver will also expire. (Range: 1 - 8).
•
sampling-rate — The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling from
this source. A sampling rate of 1 counts all packets. A rate of 0 disables
sampling. A value of n means that out of n incoming packets, 1 packet will
be sampled. (Range: 1024 - 65536).
•
size — The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from the
sampler packet (Range: 20 - 256 bytes).
Default Configuration
There are no samplers configured by default.
The default sampling rate is 0.
The default maximum header size is 128.
1566
Sflow Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1567 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-if-1/0/15)#sflow 1 sampler 1500 50
show sflow agent
Use the show sflow agent command to display the sflow agent information.
Syntax
show sflow agent
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
sFlow Version
Uniquely identifies the version and implementation of this
MIB. The version string must have the following structure: MIB
Version; Organization; Software Revision where:
MIB Version: 1.3, the version of this MIB.
Organization: Dell Corp.
Revision: 1.0
IP Address
The IP address associated with this agent.
Sflow Commands
1567
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1568 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#show sflow agent
sFlow Version.......................... 1.3;Dell Corp.;10.23.18.28
IP Address............................. 0.0.0.0
show sflow destination
Use the show sflow destination command to display all the configuration
information related to the sFlow receivers.
Syntax
show sflow rcvr-index destination
•
rcvr index — The index of the sFlow Receiver to display (Range: 1–8).
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
Receiver Index
The sFlow Receiver associated with the sampler/poller.
Owner String
The identity string for receiver, the entity making use of this
sFlowRcvrTable entry.
Time Out
The time (in seconds) remaining before the receiver is released
and stops sending samples to sFlow receiver.
Max Datagram
Size
The maximum number of bytes that can be sent in a single sFlow
datagram.
Port
The destination Layer4 UDP port for sFlow datagrams.
Example
console# show sflow 2 destination
1568
Sflow Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1569 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Receiver Owner
Index
Time out
Max Datagram Port
String
IP Address
Size
-------- -------- ---------- ------------ ----- -------------------------2
0
1400
6343
0.0.0.0
show sflow polling
Use the show sflow polling command to display the sFlow polling instances
created on the switch.
Syntax
show sflow rcvr-index polling [{gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet}
interface-list]
•
rcvr-index — The sFlow Receiver associated with the poller (Range: 1–8).
•
interface-list — The list of interfaces to poll, in unit/slot/port format.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
Poller Data
Source
The sFlowDataSource (unit/slot/port) for this sFlow sampler. This
agent will support Physical ports only.
Receiver Index
The sFlowReceiver associated with this sFlow counter poller.
Poller Interval
The number of seconds between successive samples of the counters
associated with this data source.
Example
console# show sflow 1 polling
Sflow Commands
1569
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1570 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Poller
Receiver
Poller
Data Source
Index
Interval
-----------
-------
-------
1/0/1
1
0
show sflow sampling
Use the show sflow sampling command to display the sFlow sampling
instances created on the switch.
Syntax
show sflow rcvr-index sampling [{gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet}
interface-list]
•
rcvr-index — The sFlow Receiver associated with the poller (Range: 1–8).
•
interface-list — The list of interfaces on which data is sampled.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
The following fields are displayed:
Sampler Data
Source
The sFlowDataSource (unit/slot/port) for this sFlow sampler.
This agent will support Physical ports only.
Receiver Index
The sFlowReceiver configured for this sFlow sampler.
Packet Sampling
Rate
The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling from this
source.
Max Header Size
The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a
sampled packet to form a flow sample.
1570
Sflow Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1571 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console# #show sflow 1 sampling
Sampler
Receiver
Packet
Max Header
Data Source
Index
Sampling Rate
Size
-----------
-------
-------------
----------
1
0
128
1/0/1
Sflow Commands
1571
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1572 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1572
Sflow Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1573 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
77
SNMP Commands
The SNMP component provides a machine-to-machine interface for the
PowerConnect product family. This includes the ability to configure the
network device, view settings and statistics, and upload or download code or
configuration images. The agent includes a get-bulk command to reduce
network management traffic when retrieving a sequence of Management
Information Base (MIB) variables and an elaborate set of error codes for
improved reporting to the network control station. The extensible and
advanced design of the PowerConnect SNMP makes adding remote
manageability to networked devices undemanding. The agent allows a
network control station to retrieve reports from the networked device. These
reports are based upon the defined objects in the MIB. The agent queries,
reports, and sets MIB variables based upon directions from the network
control station or upon preset conditions.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
show snmp
snmp-server communitygroup
snmp-server user
show snmp engineID
snmp-server contact
snmp-server view
show snmp filters
snmp-server enable traps
snmp-server v3-host
show snmp group
snmp-server engineID local –
show snmp user
snmp-server filter
–
show snmp views
snmp-server group
–
show trapflags
snmp-server host
–
snmp-server community
snmp-server location
–
show snmp
Use the show snmp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the SNMP
communications status.
SNMP Commands
1573
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1574 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show snmp
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the SNMP communications status.
Console # show snmp
Community-String Community-Access View name
IP address
---------------- ---------------- ----------
----------
public
private
private
All
172.16.1.1
172.17.1.1
read only
read write
su
user-view
Default
DefaultSuper
Community-String Group name
IP address
---------------- ---------
----------
public
user-group
All
Traps are enabled.
Authentication trap is enabled.
Version 1,2 notifications
Target Address
Type
-------------- ------
1574
SNMP Commands
Community
Version UDP Filter TO
Port name
Sec
--------- -------
Retries
---- ------ --- -----
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1575 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
192.122.173.42
192.122.173.42
Trap
Inform
public
public
2
2
162 filt1
15
3
162 filt2
15
3
Version 3 notifications
Target Address
Type
Username
-------------- ----- -------192.122.173.42 Inform
Bob
Security UDP Filter TO
Level
Port name
Sec
Retries
-------- ---- ------ --- -----Priv
162
filt31 15
3
System Contact: Robert
System Location: Marketing
show snmp engineID
Use the show snmp engineID command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the ID of the local Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) engine.
Syntax
show snmp engineID
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the SNMP engine ID.
console# show snmp engineID
Local SNMP engineID: 08009009020C0B099C075878
SNMP Commands
1575
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1576 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show snmp filters
Use the show snmp filters command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
configuration of filters.
Syntax
show snmp filters filtername
•
filtername — Specifies the name of the filter. (Range: 1-30)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following examples display the configuration of filters with and without a
filter name specification.
console # show snmp filters
Name
OID Tree
Type
------------------- ---------------------------------user-filter1
1.3.6.1.2.1.1
Included
user-filter1
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.7
Excluded
user-filter2
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.*.1
Included
console # show snmp filters user-filter1
Name
OID Tree
Type
------------------- ----------------------------------
1576
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1577 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
user-filter1
1.3.6.1.2.1.1
Included
user-filter1
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.7
Excluded
show snmp group
Use the show snmp group command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
configuration of groups.
Syntax
show snmp group [groupname]
•
groupname — Specifies the name of the group. (Range: 1-30)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The group name accepts any printable characters except a double quote or
question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within
the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name. The CLI
does not filter illegal characters and may accept entries up to the first illegal
character or reject the entry entirely.
Example
The following examples display the configuration of views.
console# show snmp group
Name
Security
Model
----------------- -------user-group
V3
Level
-----Auth-Priv
Views
Read
Write
Notify
-------- -------- -Default
""
SNMP Commands
""
1577
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1578 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
managers-group
V3
NoAuth-priv
Default
managers-group
V3
NoAuth-priv
Default
Default
""
""
""
console# show snmp groups user-group
Name
Security
Model
Level
Views
Read
Write
Notify
----------------- ---------user-group
V3
-----Auth-Priv
-------- -------- -Default
""
""
The following table contains field descriptions.
Field
Description
Name
Name of the group
Security
Model
SNMP model in use (v1, v2 or v3)
Security
Level
Authentication of a packet with encryption. Applicable only to SNMP
Version 3 security model.
Views
• Read–A string that is the name of the view that enables you only to
view the contents of the agent. If unspecified, all the objects except
the community-table and SNMPv3 user and access tables are
available.
• Write–A string that is the name of the view that enables you to enter
data and manage the contents of the agent.
• Notify–A string that is the name of the view that enables you to
specify an inform or a trap.
show snmp user
Use the show snmp user command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
configuration of users.
1578
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1579 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show snmp user [username]
•
username — Specifies the name of the user. (Range: 1-30)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The user name accepts any printable characters except a double quote or
question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within
the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name. The CLI
does not filter illegal characters and may accept entries up to the first illegal
character or reject the entry entirely.
Example
The following example displays the configuration of users with the user name
specified.
Console # show snmp user
Name
Group Name
Auth Priv
Meth Meth
Remote Engine ID
--------------- --------------- ---- ---- ------------------bob
user-group
MD5
DES
800002a20300fce3900106
john
user-group
SHA
DES
800002a20300fce3900106
Console # show snmp users bob
Name
Group Name
Auth Priv
Meth Meth
Remote Engine ID
--------------- --------------- ---- ---- ------------------bob
user-group
MD5
DES
800002a20300fce3900106
SNMP Commands
1579
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1580 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show snmp views
Use the show snmp views command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
configuration of views.
Syntax
show snmp views [viewname]
•
viewname — Specifies the name of the view. (Range: 1-30)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following examples display the configuration of views with and without a
view name specified.
console# show snmp views
Name
OID Tree
Type
-----------
-----------------------
---------
user-view1
1.3.6.1.2.1.1
Included
user-view1
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.7
Excluded
user-view2
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.*.1
Included
1580
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1581 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show trapflags
Use the show trapflags command in Privileged EXEC mode to display SNMP
traps globally or to display specific SNMP traps.
Syntax
show trapflags [acl | auto-copy-sw | captive-portal cp-type | dot1q | dvrmp |
link | maclock | multiple-users | ospf ospftype| ospfv3 ospfv3type| pim |
poe | snmp authentication | spanning-tree |stack | vrrp]
Syntax Description
Show trapflags with no other arguments shows the trap status for all
components. Use the more specific form to display the trap status for an
individual component. Only one component argument may be given.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for this command.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show trapflags
Authentication Flag.................Enable
Link Up/Down Flag...................Enable
Multiple Users Flag.................Enable
Spanning Tree Flag..................Enable
ACL ................................Enable
Dot1q.............................. Enable
VRRP .............................. Enable
SNMP Commands
1581
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1582 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Power Over Ethernet ............... Enable
MAC Locking ....................... Enable
DVMRP Traps........................ Disable
OSPFv2 Traps....................... Disable
PIM Traps.......................... Disable
OSPFv3 Traps....................... Disable
CP Traps........................... Disable
console#show trapflags ospf
OSPF Traps:
errors:
all..............................Disabled
authentication failure...........Enabled
bad packet.......................Enabled
config error.....................Enabled
virt authentication failure .....Disabled
virt bad packet..................Disabled
virt config error................Disabled
if-rx: if-rxpacket...............Disabled
lsa: lsamaxage...................Disabled
lsaoriginate.....................Disabled
overflow: lsdboverflow...........Enabled
lsdb-approaching-overflow........Enabled
retransmit:
packets..........................Disabled
virtpackets......................Disabled
1582
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1583 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
rtb: rtb-entryinfo...............Disabled
state-change:
all..............................Disabled
if state change..................Enabled
neighbor state change............Enabled
virtif state change..............Disabled
virtneighbor state change........Disabled
snmp-server community
Use the snmp-server community command in Global Configuration mode to
set up the community access string to permit access to the SNMP protocol.
To remove the specified community string, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
snmp-server community string {ro | rw | su} [view view-name][ipaddress
ipaddress]
no snmp-server community string
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
string
Permits access to the SNMP protocol. (Range: 1-20 characters)
ro
Indicates read-only access.
rw
Indicates read-write access.
su
Indicates SNMP administrator access.
ipaddress
Specifies the IP address of the management station. If no IP
address is specified, all management stations are permitted.
view-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined view. For
information on views, see the User Guidelines below. (Range: 130 characters)
SNMP Commands
1583
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1584 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
No community is defined. Default to read–only access if not specified.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
You can not specify viewname for su, which has an access to the whole MIB.
You can use the view name to restrict the access rights of a community string.
When it is specified:
•
An internal security name is generated.
•
The internal security name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models is
mapped to an internal group name.
•
The internal group name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models is
mapped to a view name. If ro is specified, then read-view and notify-view
are mapped. If rw is specified, then read-view, notify-view, and write-view
are mapped.
The community name may include any printable characters except a double
quote or question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces
within the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name.
The CLI does not filter illegal characters and may accept entries up to the
first illegal character or reject the entry entirely.
Example
The following example configures community access string public to permit
administrative access to SNMP at an administrative station with IP address
192.168.1.20.
console(config)# snmp-server community public su
ipaddress 192.168.1.20
1584
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1585 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
snmp-server community-group
Use the snmp-server community-group command in Global Configuration
mode to map the internal security name for SNMP v1 and SNMP v2 security
models to the group name. To remove the specified community string, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
snmp-server community-group community-string group-name [ipaddress ipaddress]
•
community-string — Community string that acts like a password and
permits access to the SNMP protocol. (Range: 1-20 characters)
•
group-name — Name of a previously defined group. The group defines the
objects available to the community. (Range: 1-30 characters)
•
ip-address — Management station IP address. Default is all IP addresses.
Default Configuration
No community group is defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The group-name parameter can be used to restrict the access rights of a
community string. When it is specified, the software:
•
Generates an internal security-name.
•
Maps the internal security-name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security
models to the group-name.
Example
The following example maps a community access string dell_community to
group dell_group.
console(config)# snmp-server community-group
dell_community dell_group 192.168.29.1
SNMP Commands
1585
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1586 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
snmp-server contact
Use the snmp-server contact command in Global Configuration mode to set
up a system contact (sysContact) string. To remove the system contact
information, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
snmp-server contact text
no snmp-server contact
•
text — Character string, 0 to 160 characters, describing the system contact
information.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays setting up the system contact point as
"Dell_Technical_Support".
console(config)# snmp-server contact
Dell_Technical_Support
snmp-server enable traps
Use the snmp-server enable traps command in Global Configuration mode to
enable sending SNMP traps globally or to enable sending individual SNMP
traps. Use the no form of this command to disable sending SNMP traps
individually or globally.
1586
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1587 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
snmp-server enable traps [acl | all | boot auto-copy-sw | captive-portal cptype | dot1q | dvrmp | link | maclock | multiple-users | ospf ospftype |
ospfv3 ospfv3type |pim |poe | snmp authentication | spanning-tree | stack
|vrrp]
no snmp-server enable traps [acl | all| boot auto-copy-sw | captive-portal
cp-type | dot1q | dvrmp | link | maclock| multiple-users | ospf ospftype |
ospfv3 ospfv3type | pim | poe | snmp authentication | spanning-tree
|stack|vrrp ]
•
cp-type - { all, client-auth-failure, client-connect, client-db-full,
client-disconnect }
•
ospftype - { all | errors { all | authentication failure | bad packet |
config error | virt authentication failure | virt bad packet | virt config
error } | lsa { all | lsa-maxage | lsa-originate } | overflow { all | lsdboverflow | lsdbapproaching- overflow } | retransmit {all | packets |
virt-packets } | state-change { all | if state change | neighbor state
change | virtifstate change | virtneighbor state change }}
•
ospfv3type - {all | errors { all | bad packet | config error | virt bad
packet | virt config error } | lsa { all | lsa-maxage | lsa-originate } |
overflow { all | lsdb-overflow | lsdb-approaching-overflow } |
retransmit {all | packets | virt-packets } | state-change { all | if state
change | neighbor state change | virtif state change | virtneighbor
state change }}
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
acl
Enable traps on ACL match events.
all
Enable all traps (not recommended).
boot auto-copy-sw
Enable traps on automatic download of switch software.
captive-portal
Enable captive-portal traps.
dot1q
Enable traps on VLAN configuration failures.
dvmrp
Enable dvmrp traps.
maclock
Enable traps on MAC locking violations.
SNMP Commands
1587
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1588 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
ospf
Enable OSPF event traps.
ospfv3
Enable OSPFv3 event traps.
pim
Enable pim traps (pim-sm and pim-dm).
poe
Enable poe traps.
port-aggregator lagfailover
Enable traps for LAG failover on port-aggregator links.
snmp authentication Enable snmp authentication traps.
spanning-tree
Enable traps on topology changes.
stack
Enable stack firmware synchronization traps.
vrrp
Enable vrrp traps.
Default Configuration
SNMP authentication, link, multiple-user, spanning-tree, dot1q, mac lock
violation, and ACL traps are enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example displays the options for the snmp-server enable traps
command.
console(config)#snmp-server enable traps ?
Press enter to execute the command.
acl
acl
all
Enable/Disable all Traps.
authentication
traps when
To enable the device to send SNMP
1588
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1589 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
authentication fails.
dvmrp
dvmrp
link
Up/Down trap flag.
Enable/Disable switch level Link
multiple-users
multiple logins
Enable/Disable sending traps when
active.
ospf
Enable/Disable OSPF Traps.
ospfv3
Enable/Disable OSPF Traps.
pim
pim
spanning-tree
Tree traps.
Enable/Disable sending Spanning
snmp-server engineID local
Use the snmpserver engineID local command in Global Configuration mode
to specify the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) engine ID on
the local device.
To remove the configured engine ID, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
snmp-server engineID local {engineid-string | default }
no snmp-server engineID local
•
engineid-string — The character string that identifies the engine ID. The
engine ID is a concatenated hexadecimal string. Each byte in hexadecimal
character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by
a period or colon. (Range: 6-32 characters)
•
default — The engineID is created automatically, based on the device
MAC address.
Default Configuration
The engineID is not configured.
SNMP Commands
1589
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1590 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If you want to use SNMPv3, you need to specify an engine ID for the device.
You can specify your own ID or use a default string that is generated using the
MAC address of the device. If the SNMPv3 engine ID is deleted, or the
configuration file is erased, then SNMPv3 cannot be used. Since the
EngineID should be unique within an administrative domain, the following
guidelines are recommended:
1 For standalone devices use the default keyword to configure the Engine
ID.
2 For stackable systems, configure your own EngineID, and verify that is
unique within your administrative domain.
Changing the value of snmpEngineID has important side-effects. A user's
password (entered on the command line) is converted to an MD5 or SHA
security digest. This digest is based on both the password and the local engine
ID. The command line password is then destroyed, as required by RFC 2274.
Because of this deletion, if the local value of engineID changes, the security
digests of SNMPv3 users will be invalid, and the users will have to be
reconfigured.
Example
The following example configures the Engine ID automatically.
console(config)# snmp-server engineID local default
snmp-server filter
Use the snmp-server filter command in Global Configuration mode to create
or update a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) server filter
entry. To remove the specified SNMP server filter entry, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
snmp-server filter filter-name oid-tree {included | excluded}
1590
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1591 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no snmp-server filter filter-name [oid-tree]
•
filter-name — Specifies the label for the filter record that is being updated
or created. The name is used to reference the record. (Range: 1-30
characters.)
•
oid-tree — Specifies the object identifier of the ASN.1 subtree to be
included or excluded from the view. To identify the subtree, specify a text
string consisting of numbers, such as 1.3.6.2.4, or a word, such as
system. Replace a single subidentifier with the asterisk (*) wildcard to
specify a subtree family; for example, 1.3.*.4.
•
included — Indicates that the filter type is included.
•
excluded — Indicates that the filter type is excluded.
Default Configuration
No filter entry exists.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command can be entered multiple times for the same filter record. Later
lines take precedence when an object identifier is included in two or more
lines.
The filter name may include any printable characters except a double quote
or question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces
within the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name.
The CLI does not filter illegal characters and may accept entries up to the
first illegal character or reject the entry entirely.
Examples
The following example creates a filter that includes all objects in the MIB-II
system group except for sysServices (System 7) and all objects for interface 1
in the MIB-II interfaces group.
console(config)# snmp-server filter user-filter
system included
SNMP Commands
1591
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1592 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)# snmp-server filter user-filter
system.7 excluded
console(config)# snmp-server filter user-filter
ifEntry.*.1 included
snmp-server group
Use the snmp-server group command in Global Configuration mode to
configure a new Simple Management Protocol (SNMP) group or a table that
maps SNMP users to SNMP views. To remove a specified SNMP group, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
snmp-server group groupname { v1 | v2 | v3 { noauth | auth | priv } [
notify notifyview ] } [ context contextname ] [ read readview ] [ write
writeview ]
no snmp-server group groupname { v1 | v2 | v3 { noauth | auth | priv } } [
context contextname ]
•
groupname — Specifies the name of the group. (Range: 1-30 characters.)
•
v1 — Indicates the SNMP Version 1 security model.
•
v2 — Indicates the SNMP Version 2 security model.
•
v3 — Indicates the SNMP Version 3 security model.
•
noauth — Indicates no authentication of a packet. Applicable only to the
SNMP Version 3 security model.
•
auth — Indicates authentication of a packet without encrypting it.
Applicable only to the SNMP Version 3 security model.
•
priv — Indicates authentication of a packet with encryption. Applicable
only to the SNMP Version 3 security model.
•
contextname — Provides different views of the system and provides the
user a way of specifying that context.
•
notifyview — Defines a string that is the name of the view that enables
specifying an inform or a trap. If unspecified, nothing is defined for the
notify view. (Range: 1-30 characters.)
1592
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1593 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
readview — A string that is the name of the view that enables the you to
view only the contents of the agent. If unspecified, all the objects except
for the community-table and SNMPv3 user and access tables are available.
(Range: 1-30 characters.)
•
writeview — A string that is the name of the view that enables the user to
enter data and configure the contents of the agent. If unspecified, nothing
is defined for the write view. (Range: 1-30 characters.)
Default Configuration
No group entry exists. There will be some default groups for
Read/Write/Super users. These groups cannot be deleted or modified by the
user. This command is used only to configure the user-defined groups.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
User Guidelines
View-name should be an existing view created using the snmp-server view
command. If there are multiple records with the same view-name, then the
argument specified in this command points to first view-name in the table.
Example
The following example attaches a group called user-group to SNMPv3 and
assigns to the group the privacy security level and read access rights to a view
called user-view.
console(config)# snmp-server group user-group v3 priv
read user-view
snmp-server host
Use the snmp-server host command in Global Configuration mode to specify
the recipient of Simple Network Management Protocol notifications. To
remove the specified host, use the no form of this command. This command
enters the user into SNMP-host configuration mode.
SNMP Commands
1593
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1594 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
snmp-server host host-addr [informs [timeout seconds] [retries retries] |
traps version {1 | 2 }]] community-string [udp-port port] [filter filtername]
no snmp-server host host-addr { traps | informs }
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
host-addr
Specifies the IP address of the host (targeted recipient) or the
name of the host. (Range:1-158 characters)
community-string
Specifies a password-like community string sent with the
notification operation. (Range: 1-20 characters)
traps
Indicates that SNMP traps are sent to this host.
version 1
Indicates that SNMPv1 traps will be used.
version 2
Indicates that SNMPv2 traps will be used.
informs
Indicates that SNMPv2 informs are sent to this host.
seconds
Number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before
resending informs. The default is 15 seconds. (Range: 1-300
characters.)
retries
Maximum number of times to resend an inform request. The
default is 3 attempts. (Range: 0-255 characters.)
port
UDP port of the host to use. The default is 162. (Range: 165535 characters.)
filtername
A string that is the name of the filter that defines the filter for
this host. If unspecified, does not filter anything (Range: 1-30
characters.)
Default Configuration
The default configuration is 3 retries, and 15 seconds timeout. This
command is disabled by default. No notifications are sent.
If you enter this command with no keywords, the default is to send all trap
types to the host. No informs are sent to this host. If no version keyword is
present, the default is Version 1.
1594
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1595 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If a DNS host name is entered instead of an IP address, the switch attempts
to resolve the host name immediately using DNS. Use the ip domain-lookup
command on page 496 and the ip name-server command on page 499 to
enable resolution of DNS host names.
Example
The following example enables SNMP traps for host 192.16.12.143.
console(config)# snmp-server host 192.16.12.143
Dell_powerconnect traps v2
snmp-server location
Use the snmp-server location command in Global Configuration mode to set
the system location string. To remove the location string, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
snmp-server location text
no snmp-server location
•
text — Character string describing the system location. (Range: 1 to 255
characters.)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
SNMP Commands
1595
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1596 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example sets the device location as "New_York".
console(config)# snmp-server location New_York
snmp-server user
Use the snmp-server user command in Global Configuration mode to
configure a new SNMP Version 3 user. To delete a user, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
snmp-server user username groupname [remote engineid-string] [ { authmd5 password | auth-sha password | auth-md5-key md5-key | auth-sha-key
sha-key } [priv-des password | priv-des-key des-key] ]
no snmp-server user username
•
username — Specifies the name of the user on the host that connects to
the agent. (Range: 1-30 characters.)
•
groupname — Specifies the name of the group to which the user belongs.
(Range: 1-30 characters.)
•
engineid-string — Specifies the engine ID of the remote SNMP entity to
which the user belongs. The engine ID is a concatenated hexadecimal
string. Each byte in the hexadecimal character string is two hexadecimal
digits. The remote engine id designates the remote management station,
and should be defined to enable the device to receive acknowledgements
to "informs." (Range: 5-32 characters.)
•
auth-md5 — The HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level.
•
auth-sha — The HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level.
•
password — A password. (Range: 1 to 32 characters.)
•
auth-md5-key — The HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level. Enter a
pregenerated MD5 key.
•
auth-sha-key — The HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level. Enter a
pregenerated SHA key.
•
md5-key — Character string —length 32 hex characters.
•
sha-key — Character string —length 48 characters.
1596
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1597 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
priv-des — The CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption privacy level. Enter a
password.
•
priv-des-key — The CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption privacy level. The
user should enter a pregenerated MD5 or SHA key depending on the
authentication level selected.
•
des-key — The pregenerated DES encryption key. Length is determined by
authentication method selected —32 hex characters if MD5
Authentication is selected, 48 hex characters if SHA Authentication is
selected.
Default Configuration
No user entry exists.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
If the SNMP local engine ID is changed, configured users will no longer be
able to connect and will need to be reconfigured.
Example
The following example configures an SNMPv3 user "John" in group "usergroup".
console(config)# snmp-server user John user-group
snmp-server view
Use the snmp-server view command in Global Configuration mode to create
or update a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) server view entry.
To delete a specified SNMP server view entry, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
snmp-server view view-name oid-tree { included | excluded }
no snmp-server view view-name [oid-tree ]
SNMP Commands
1597
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1598 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
view-name — Specifies the label for the view record that is being created
or updated. The name is used to reference the record. (Range: 1-30
characters.)
•
oid-tree — Specifies the object identifier of the ASN.1 subtree to be
included or excluded from the view. To identify the subtree, specify a text
string consisting of numbers, such as 1.3.6.2.4, or a word, such as
system. Replace a single subidentifier with the asterisk (*) wildcard to
specify a subtree family; for example 1.3.*.4.
•
included — Indicates that the view type is included.
•
excluded — Indicates that the view type is excluded.
Default Configuration
A view entry does not exist.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command can be entered multiple times for the same view record.
The view name accepts any printable characters except a double quote or
question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within
the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name. The CLI
does not filter illegal combinations of characters on entry and may accept
entries up to the first illegal character or reject the entry entirely.
Examples
The following example creates a view that includes all objects in the MIB-II
system group except for sysServices (System 7) and all objects for interface 1
in the MIB-II interface group.
console(config)# snmp-server view user-view system
included
console(config)# snmp-server view user-view system.7
excluded
1598
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1599 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config)# snmp-server view user-view
ifEntry.*.1 included
console(config)#snmp-server view "A beautiful view!"
1.1.2.1 included
snmp-server v3-host
Use the snmp-server v3-host command in Global Configuration mode to
specify the recipient of Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3
(SNMPv3) notifications. To remove the specified host, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
snmp-server v3-host {ip-address | hostname} username {traps | informs}
[noauth | auth | priv] [timeout seconds] [retries retries] [udpport port]
[filter filtername]
no snmp-server v3-host ip-address {traps | informs}
•
ip-address — Specifies the IPv4 address of the host (targeted recipient).
•
hostname — Specifies the name of the host. (Range: 1-158 characters.)
The command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double
quotes. For example, #snmp-server v3-host “host name”.
•
username — Specifies user name used to generate the notification.
(Range: 1-30 characters.)
•
traps — Indicates that SNMP traps are sent to this host.
•
informs — Indicates that SNMPv2 informs are sent to this host.
•
noauth — Specifies sending of a packet without authentication.
•
auth — Specifies authentication of a packet without encrypting it
•
priv — Specifies authentication and encryption of a packet.
•
seconds — Number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before
resending informs. This is not allowed for hosts configured to send traps.
The default is 15 seconds. (Range: 1-300 seconds.)
•
retries — Maximum number of times to resend an inform request. This is
not allowed for hosts configured to send traps. The default is 3 attempts.
(Range: 0-255 retries.)
SNMP Commands
1599
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1600 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
port — UDP port of the host to use. The default is 162. (Range: 1-65535.)
•
filtername — A string that is the name of the filter that define the filter for
this host. If unspecified, does not filter anything. (Range: 1-30 characters.)
Default Configuration
Default configuration is 3 retries and 15 seconds timeout.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The username can include any printable characters except a double quote or
question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within
the key. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the key. The CLI does
not filter illegal characters but may accept entries up to the first illegal
character or reject the entry entirely.
Example
The following example identifies an SNMPv3 host.
console(config)# snmp-server v3-host 192.168.0.20
The following example shows the syntax of the no snmp-server host ipaddress command.
console(config)#no snmp-server host 1.2.3.4 ?
informs
Sends SNMP informs to this host.
traps
Sends SNMP traps to this host.
1600
SNMP Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1601 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
78
SSH Commands
Management access to the switch is supported via telnet, SSH, or the serial
console. The PowerConnect supports secure shell (SSH) and secure sockets
layer (SSL) to help ensure the security of network transactions.
Keys and certificates can be generated externally (that is, offline) and
downloaded to the target or generated directly by the PowerConnect.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
crypto key generate dsa
key-string
crypto key generate rsa
show crypto key mypubkey
crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
ip ssh port
show ip ssh
ip ssh pubkey-auth
user-key
ip ssh server
crypto key generate dsa
Use the crypto key generate dsa command in Global Configuration mode to
generate DSA key pairs for your switch. A key pair is one public DSA key and
one private DSA key. Use the no form of the command to remove the
generated key from the local file system.
Syntax
crypto key generate dsa
no crypto key generate dsa
Default Configuration
DSA key pairs do not exist.
SSH Commands
1601
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1602 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
DSA keys are generated in pairs: one public DSA key and one private DSA
key. If your switch already has DSA keys when you issue this command, you
are warned and prompted to replace the existing keys. The keys are not saved
in the switch configuration; they are saved in the file system and the private
key is never displayed to the user. DSA keys, along with other switch
credentials, are distributed to all units in a stack on a configuration save.
Example
The following example generates DSA key pairs.
console(config)#crypto key generate dsa
crypto key generate rsa
Use the crypto key generate rsa command in Global Configuration mode to
generate RSA key pairs. Use the no form of the command to delete the key
from the local file system.
Syntax
crypto key generate rsa
no crypto key generate rsa
Default Configuration
RSA key pairs do not exist.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
RSA keys are generated in pairs: one public RSA key and one private RSA key.
If your switch already has RSA keys when you issue this command, you are
warned and prompted to replace the existing keys. The keys are not saved in
1602
SSH Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1603 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
the switch configuration; they are saved in the file system and the private key
is never displayed to the user. RSA keys, along with other switch credentials,
are distributed to all units in a stack on a configuration save.
Example
The following example generates RSA key pairs.
console(config)#crypto key generate rsa
crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
Use the crypto key pubkey-chain ssh command in Global Configuration
mode to enter public key configuration mode in order to manually specify
public keys such as SSH client public keys.
Syntax
crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
Default Configuration
By default, this command has no public keys configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enters the SSH Public Key-chain configuration mode.
console#configure
console(config)#crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
console(config-pubkey-chain)#user-key bob rsa
console(config-pubkey-key)#key-String
SSH Commands
1603
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1604 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCvTnRwPWlAl4kpqIw9GBRon
ZQZxjHKcqKL6rMlQ+ZNXfZSkvHG+QusIZ/76ILmFT34v7u7ChFAE+
Vu4GRfpSwoQUvV35LqJJk67IOU/zfwOl1gkTwml75QR9gHujS6KwG
N2QWXgh3ub8gDjTSqMuSn/Wd05iDX2IExQWu08licglk02LYciz+Z
4TrEU/9FJxwPiVQOjc+KBXuR0juNg5nFYsY0ZCk0N/W9a/tnkm1sh
RE7Di71+w3fNiOA6w9o44t6+AINEICBCCA4YcF6zMzaT1wefWwX6f
+Rmt5nhhqdAtN/4oJfce166DqVX1gWmNzNR4DYDvSzg0lDnwCAC8Q
h
console(config-pubkey-key)#exit
ip ssh port
Use the ip ssh port command in Global Configuration mode to specify the
TCP port to be used by the SSH server. To use the default port, use the no
form of this command.
Syntax
ip ssh port port-number
no ip ssh port
•
port-number — Port number for use by the SSH server. (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
The default value is 22.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example specifies the port to be used by the SSH server as
8080.
console(config)#ip ssh port 8080
1604
SSH Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1605 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip ssh pubkey-auth
Use the ip ssh pubkey-auth command in Global Configuration mode to
enable public key authentication for incoming SSH sessions. To disable this
function, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip ssh pubkey-auth
no ip ssh pubkey-auth
Default Configuration
The function is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
AAA authentication is independent from this configuration.
Example
The following example enables public key authentication for incoming SSH
sessions.
console(config)#ip ssh pubkey-auth
ip ssh server
Use the ip ssh server command in Global Configuration mode to enable the
switch to be configured from SSH. To disable this function, use the no form
of this command.
Syntax
ip ssh server
no ip ssh server
SSH Commands
1605
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1606 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
To generate SSH server keys, use the commands crypto key generate rsa, and
crypto key generate dsa.
Example
The following example enables the switch to be configured using SSH.
console(config)#ip ssh server
key-string
Use the key-string SSH Public Key Configuration mode to specify an SSH
public key manually.
Syntax
key-string key-string
key-string row key-string
•
row — To specify the SSH public key row by row.
•
key-string — The UU-encoded DER format is the same format as the
authorized keys file used by OpenSSH.
Default Configuration
By default, the key-string is empty.
Command Mode
SSH Public Key Configuration mode
1606
SSH Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1607 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
Use the key-string row command to specify which SSH public key you will
configure interactively next. To complete the interactive command, you must
enter key-string row with no characters.
Examples
The following example shows how to enter a public key string for a user called
"bob."
console(config)#crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
console(config-pubkey-chain)#user-key bob rsa
console(config-pubkey-key)#key-string
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCvTnRwPWl
Al4kpqIw9GBRonZQZxjHKcqKL6rMlQ+
ZNXfZSkvHG+QusIZ/76ILmFT34v7u7ChFAE+
Vu4GRfpSwoQUvV35LqJJk67IOU/zfwOl1g
kTwml75QR9gHujS6KwGN2QWXgh3ub8gDjTSq
muSn/Wd05iDX2IExQWu08licglk02LYciz
+Z4TrEU/9FJxwPiVQOjc+KBXuR0juNg5nFYsY
0ZCk0N/W9a/tnkm1shRE7Di71+w3fNiOA
6w9o44t6+AINEICBCCA4YcF6zMzaT1wefWwX6f+
Rmt5nhhqdAtN/4oJfce166DqVX1gWmN
zNR4DYDvSzg0lDnwCAC8Qh
Fingerprint:
a4:16:46:23:5a:8d:1d:b5:37:59:eb:44:13:b9:33:e9
console(config)#crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
console(config-pubkey-chain)#user-key bob rsa
console(config-pubkey-key)#key-string row AAAAB3Nza
SSH Commands
1607
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1608 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-pubkey-key)#key-string row C1yc2
show crypto key mypubkey
Use the show crypto key mypubkey command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the SSH public keys of the switch.
Syntax
show crypto key mypubkey [rsa | dsa]
•
rsa — RSA key.
•
dsa — DSA key.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the SSH public keys on the switch.
console#show crypto key mypubkey rsa
rsa key data:
ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAQEAu7WHtjQDUygjSQXHVgyqdUby
dxUXEAiDHXcWHVr0R/ak1HDQitBzeEv1vVEToEn5ddLmRhtIgRdKU
JHgBHJV
R2VaSN/WC0IK53j9re4B11AE+O3qAxwJs0KD7cTkvF9I+YdiXeOM8
VE4skkw
AiyLDNVWXgNQ6iat8+8Mjth+PIo5t3HykYUCkD8B1v93nzi/sr4hH
HJCdx7w
1608
SSH Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1609 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
wRW3QtgXaGwYt2rdlr3x8ViAF6B7AKYd8xGVVjyJTD6TjrCRRwQHg
B/BHsFr
z/Rl1SYa0vFjel/7/0qaIDSHfHqWhajYkMa4xPOtIye7oqzAOm1b7
6l28uTB
luBEoLQ+PKOKMiK8sQ==
Fingerprint(hex):
58:7f:5c:af:ba:d3:60:88:42:00:b0:2f:f1:5a:a8:fc
Fingerprint(bubbleBabble): xodob-liboh-heret-tiverdyrib-godac-pynah-muzyt-mofim-bihog-cuxyx
show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
Use the show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh command in Privileged EXEC
mode to display SSH public keys stored on the switch.
Syntax
show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh [username username] [fingerprint bubblebabble | hex]
•
username — Specifies the remote SSH client username. (Range: 1–48
characters)
•
bubble-babble — Fingerprints in Bubble Babble format.
•
hex — Fingerprint in Hex format. If fingerprint is unspecified, it defaults
to Hex format.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
SSH Commands
1609
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1610 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays all SSH public keys stored on the switch.
console#show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
Username
Fingerprint
----------
-------------------------------------------------
bob
9A:CC:01:C5:78:39:27:86:79:CC:23:C5:98:59:F1:86
john
98:F7:6E:28:F2:79:87:C8:18:F8:88:CC:F8:89:87:C8
The following example displays the SSH public called "dana."
console#show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh username dana
Username: dana
rsa key data:
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAywqRKTRnexccxVUVTeMl+Gkh
imyUDhcTkgEfssLPMsgoXlTwzCE5+97UIIsSRKQQWR+pBNl45tCYd75LUofV
4LP6Lj1Q5Q0w5lBgiqC2MZ/iBHGSsHMAE0lpYtelZprDu4uiZHMuWezmdQp9
a1PU4jwQ22TlcfaUq3sqC3FMUoU=
Fingerprint: 2f:09:e7:6f:c9:bf:ab:04:d4:6f:a0:eb:e8:df:7a:11
show ip ssh
Use the show ip ssh command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the SSH
server configuration.
Syntax
show ip ssh
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
1610
SSH Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1611 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the SSH server configuration.
console#show ip ssh
SSH server enabled. Port: 22
RSA key was generated.
DSA key was generated.
SSH Public Key Authentication is enabled.
Active incoming sessions:
IP Address
Idle Time
SessionTime
------------- --------------------
User Name
--------------
--------------
10.240.1.122
00:00:00
00:00:08
John
user-key
Use the user-key command in SSH Public Key Chain Configuration mode to
specify which SSH public key you are configuring manually. To remove a SSH
public key, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
user-key username {rsa | dsa}
no user-key username
•
username — Specifies the remote SSH client username. (Range: 1–48
characters)
•
rsa — RSA key
•
dsa — DSA key
Default Configuration
By default, there are no keys.
Command Mode
SSH Public Key Chain Configuration mode
SSH Commands
1611
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1612 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example enables a SSH public key to be manually configured
for the SSH public key chain called "bob."
console(config)#crypto key pubkey-chain ssh
console(config-pubkey-chain)#user-key bob rsa
console(config-pubkey-key)#
1612
SSH Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1613 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
79
Syslog Commands
The PowerConnect supports a centralized logging subsystem with support for
local in memory logs, crash dump logs, and forwarding messages to syslog
servers. All switch components use the logging subsystem. Components log
messages to the logging component using one of the following severity levels:
•
Emergency (0): system is unusable
•
Alert (1): action must be taken immediately
•
Critical (2): critical conditions
•
Error (3): error conditions
•
Warning (4): warning conditions
•
Notice(5): normal but significant conditions
•
Informational(6): informational messages
•
Debug(7): debug-level messages
CLI Logged to Local File and Syslog Server
The PowerConnect Command Logging component logs all command line
interface commands issued on the system. The command log messages are
stored with the other system logs and provide the system operators with a
detailed log of the commands executed.
CLI command logging is configured through any of the PowerConnect
management interfaces. When the feature is enabled, all CLI commands are
logged using the existing logging subsystems. By default, the feature is
disabled.
The CLI command logging severity is set to SEVERITY_NOTICE. The
logging severity is not modifiable by the administrator.
For example, the CLI log message for the user admin is:
<189> JAN 10 18:59:09 10.27.21.22-2
CMDLOGGER[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(83) 367 %%
CLI:EIA-232:----:configure
Syslog Commands
1613
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1614 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
<190> JAN 10 18:59:17 10.27.21.22-2
CLI_WEB[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(260) 369 %%
[CLI:----:EIA-232] Access level of user admin has been
set to 15
If enabled, the CLI command logger subsystem begins to log commands
immediately after the user is authenticated. After authentication, the CLI
generates an explicit message and invokes the command logger. The format of
the message at login is:
<189> JAN 10 18:58:56 10.27.21.22-2
CMDLOGGER[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(83) 361 %%
CLI:10.27.21.22:admin:User admin logged in
<190> JAN 10 18:58:56 10.27.21.22-2
CLI_WEB[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(260) 362 %%
[CLI:admin:10.27.21.22] User has successfully logged
in
The CLI command log subsystem also logs all user log out instances. The
format of the log message is:
<190> JAN 10 19:01:04 10.27.21.22-2
CLI_WEB[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(260) 382 %%
[CLI:admin:10.27.21.22] User has logged out
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
clear logging
logging file
clear logging file
logging on
description
logging snmp
level
logging web-session
logging cli-command
port
logging
show logging
logging audit
show logging file
logging buffered
show syslog-servers
1614
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1615 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
logging console
clear logging
Use the clear logging command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear messages
from the internal logging buffer.
Syntax
clear logging
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example clears messages from the internal syslog message
logging buffer.
console#clear logging
Clear logging buffer [y/n]
clear logging file
Use the clear logging file command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear
messages from the logging file.
Syntax
clear logging file
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration for the command.
Syslog Commands
1615
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1616 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example shows the clear logging file command and
confirmation response.
console#clear logging file
Clear logging file [y/n]
description
Use the description command in Logging mode to describe the syslog server.
Syntax
description description
•
description — Sets the description of the syslog server. (Range: 1-64
characters.)
Default Configuration
This command has no default value.
Command Mode
Logging mode
User Guidelines
After entering the view corresponding to a specific syslog server, the
command can be executed to set the description of the server.
Example
The following example sets the syslog server description.
console(config-logging)#description "syslog server 1"
1616
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1617 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
level
Use the level command in Logging mode to specify the severity level of syslog
messages. To reset to the default value, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
level level
no level
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
level
The severity level for syslog messages. (Range: emergency, alert,
critical, error, warning, notice, info, debug)
Default Configuration
The default value for level is info.
Command Mode
Logging mode
User Guidelines
After entering the view corresponding to a specific syslog server, the
command can be executed to set the severity level for syslog messages.
Example
The following example sets the syslog message severity level to alert.
console(config-logging)#level alert
logging cli-command
Use the logging cli-command in Global Configuration mode to enable CLI
command logging.
Syslog Commands
1617
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1618 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
logging cli-command
no logging cli-command
Default Configuration
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
See the CLI commands by using the show logging command.
Example
console(config)#logging cli-command
console(config)#do show logging
Logging is enabled
Console Logging: level warnings. Console Messages: 384 Dropped.
Buffer Logging: level informational. Buffer Messages: 71 Logged,
File Logging: level notActive. File Messages: 385 Dropped.
CLI Command Logging : enabled
Switch Auditing : enabled
Web Session Logging : disabled
SNMP Set Command Logging : disabled
Syslog server
hostname logging: informational. Messages: 0 dropped
Syslog server
a12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
logging: informational. Messages: 0 dropped
170 Messages dropped due to lack of resources.
Buffer Log:
<189> JAN 10 18:59:09 10.27.21.22-2 CMDLOGGER[209809328]:
cmd_logger_api.c(83) 367 %% CLI:EIA-232:----:configure
1618
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1619 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
<190> JAN 10 18:59:17 10.27.21.22-2 CLI_WEB[209809328]:
cmd_logger_api.c(260) 369 %% [CLI:----:EIA-232] Access level of
user admin has been set to 15
<189> JAN 10 18:59:19 10.27.21.22-2 CMDLOGGER[209809328]:
cmd_logger_api.c(83) 370 %% CLI:EIA-232:----:exit
<189> JAN 10 18:59:22 10.27.21.22-2 CMDLOGGER[209809328]:
cmd_logger_api.c(83) 371 %% CLI:EIA-232:----:telnet 10.27.21.22
<189> JAN 10 18:59:27 10.27.21.22-2 TRAPMGR[209809328]:
traputil.c(614) 372 %% Multiple Users: Unit: 0 Slot: 5 Port: 1
<189> JAN 10 18:59:27 10.27.21.22-2 CMDLOGGER[209809328]:
cmd_logger_api.c(83) 373 %% CLI:10.27.21.22:admin:User admin logged
in
<190> JAN 10 18:59:27 10.27.21.22-2 CLI_WEB[209809328]:
cmd_logger_api.c(260) 374 %% [CLI:admin:10.27.21.22] User has
successfully logged in
<190> JAN 10 18:59:28 10.27.21.22-2 CLI_WEB[209809328]:
cmd_logger_api.c(260) 375 %% [CLI:admin:10.27.21.22] User admin
logged in to enable mode.
logging
Use the logging command in Global Configuration mode to log messages to a
syslog server. To delete the syslog server with the specified address from the
list of syslogs, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging {ip-address | hostname}
no logging {ip-address | hostname}
•
ip-address — IP address of the host to be used as a syslog server.
•
hostname — Hostname of the host to be used as a syslog server. (Range: 163 characters) The command allows spaces in the host name when
specified in double quotes. For example, #snmp-server v3-host “host
name”.
Default Configuration
No syslog servers defined.
Syslog Commands
1619
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1620 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Up to eight syslog servers can be used.
The Dell PowerConnect always uses the local7(23) facility in the syslog
message. Syslog messages will not exceed 96 bytes in length. Syslog messages
use the following format:
<130> JAN 01 00:00:06 0.0.0.0-1 UNKN[0x800023]: bootos.c(386) 4 %% Event(0xaaaaaaaa)
|
|
|
||
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
| |
Message
|
|
|
||
|
|
| |
|
|
|
||
|
|
| Sequence Number
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
Line Number
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
File Name
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
||
Thread ID
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
| Component Name
|
|
|
|
Stack ID
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Host IP Address
|
Timestamp
PRI
PRI
This consists of the facility code (see RFC 3164) multiplied by
8 and added to the severity. See below for more information on
severity.
Timestamp
The system up time. For systems that use SNTP, this is UTC.
When time zones are enabled, local time will be used.
Host IP Address
The IP address of the local system.
Stack ID
The assigned stack ID. 1 is used for systems without stacking
capability. The top of stack is used to collect messages for the
entire stack.
1620
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1621 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Component Name
Component name for the logging component. Components
must use the new APIs in order to enable identification of the
logging component. Component UNKN is substituted for
components that do not use the new logging APIs.
Thread ID
The thread ID of the logging component.
File Name
The name of the file containing the invoking macro.
Line Number
The line number which contains the invoking macro.
Sequence Number
The message sequence number for this stack component.
Sequence numbers may be skipped because of filtering but are
always monotonically increasing on a per stack member basis.
Message
An informative message regarding the event.
Example
The following example places the designated server in logging configuration
mode.
console(config)#logging 192.168.15.1
logging audit
Use the logging audit command to enable switch auditing. Use the no form
of the command to disable switch auditing.
Syntax
logging audit
no logging audit
Default Configuration
The command default is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
console(config)#logging audit
Syslog Commands
1621
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1622 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
logging buffered
Use the logging buffered command in Global Configuration mode to limit
syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on severity. To cancel
the buffer use, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging buffered [severity–level]
no logging buffered
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
severity–level
(Optional) The number or name of the desired severity level.
Range:
[0 | emergencies]
[1 | alerts]
[2 | critical]
[3 | errors]
[4 | warnings]
[5 | notifications]
[6 | informational]
[7 | debugging]
Default Configuration
The default value for level is info.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
All the syslog messages are logged to the internal buffer. This command limits
the commands displayed to the user.
1622
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1623 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example limits syslog messages displayed from an internal
buffer based on the severity level "error."
console(config)#logging buffered error
logging console
Use the logging console command in Global Configuration mode to limit
messages logged to the console based on severity. To disable logging to the
console terminal, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging console [severity–level]
no logging console
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
severity–level
(Optional) The number or name of the desired severity level.
Range:
[0 | emergencies]
[1 | alerts]
[2 | critical]
[3 | errors]
[4 | warnings]
[5 | notifications]
[6 | informational]
[7 | debugging]
Default Configuration
The default value for level is warnings.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
Syslog Commands
1623
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1624 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example limits messages logged to the console based on
severity level "alert".
console(config)#logging console alert
logging file
Use the logging file command in Global Configuration mode to limit syslog
messages sent to the logging file based on severity. To cancel the buffer, use
the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging file [severity–level-number | type]
no logging file
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
severity–level–number
(Optional) The number or name of the desired severity
level. Range:
[0 | emergencies]
[1 | alerts]
[2 | critical]
[3 | errors]
[4 | warnings]
[5 | notifications]
[6 | informational]
[7 | debugging]
Default Configuration
The default severity level is error.
1624
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1625 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example limits syslog messages sent to the logging file based on
the severity level "warning."
console(config)#logging file warning
logging on
Use the logging on command in Global Configuration mode to control error
messages logging. This command globally enables the sending of logging
messages to the currently configured locations. To disable the sending of log
messages, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging on
no logging on
Default Configuration
Logging is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The logging process controls the distribution of logging messages to the
various destinations, such as the logging buffer, logging file, or syslog server.
Logging on and off for these destinations can be individually configured using
the logging buffered, logging file, and logging server global configuration
Syslog Commands
1625
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1626 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
commands. However, if the logging on command is disabled, no messages are
sent to these destinations. In this case, only the console will continue to
receive logging messages.
Example
The following example shows how logging is enabled.
console(config)#logging on
logging snmp
Use the logging snmp command in Global Configuration mode to enable
SNMP Set command logging. To disable, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
logging snmp
no logging snmp
Default Configuration
Disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
To see SNMP Set command logs use the show logging command.
Example
console(config)#logging snmp
logging web-session
Use the logging web-session command in Global Configuration mode to
enable web session logging. To disable, use the no form of this command.
1626
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1627 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
logging web-session
no logging web-session
Default Configuration
Disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
To see web session logs use the show logging command.
Example
console(config)#logging web-session
<133> MAR 24 07:46:07 10.131.7.165-2 UNKN[83102768]:
cmd_logger_api.c(140) 764 %%
WEB:10.131.7.67:<>:EwaSessionLookup :
session[0] created
<133> MAR 24 07:46:07 10.131.7.165-2 UNKN[83102768]:
cmd_logger_api.c(140) 765 %%
WEB:10.131.7.67:admin:User admin logged in
port
Use the port command in Logging mode to specify the port number of syslog
messages. To reset to the default value, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
port port
no port
Syslog Commands
1627
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1628 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
port
The port number for syslog messages. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Configuration
The default port number is 514.
Command Mode
Logging mode
User Guidelines
After entering the view corresponding to a specific syslog server, the
command can be executed to set the port number for the server.
Example
The following example sets the syslog message port to 300.
console(config-logging)#port 300
show logging
Use the show logging command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all
logging information, including auditing status.
Syntax
show logging
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1628
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1629 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the state of logging and the syslog messages
stored in the internal buffer.
console#show logging
Logging is enabled.
Console Logging: level warnings. Console Messages: 1778
Dropped.
Buffer Logging: level informational. Buffer Messages: 983
Logged,
File Logging: level notActive. File Messages: 1783 Dropped.
CLI Command Logging : disabled
Switch Auditing : disabled
Web Session Logging : disabled
SNMP Set Command Logging : disabled
1141 Messages dropped due to lack of resources.
Buffer Log:
<190> JAN 10 16:26:53 0.0.0.0-1 NIM[177745344]:
nim_intf_map_api.c(381) 985 %% nimCheckIfNumber: incorrect
phase for operation
<190> JAN 10 16:26:53 0.0.0.0-1 NIM[177745344]:
nim_intf_map_api.c(381) 986 %% nimCheckIfNumber: incorrect
phase for operation
show logging file
Use the show logging file command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the
state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the logging file.
Syntax
show logging file
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Syslog Commands
1629
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1630 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the state of logging and syslog messages
sorted in the logging file.
console#show logging file
Persistent Logging : enabled
Persistent Log Count : 1
<186> JAN 01 00:00:05 0.0.0.0-1 UNKN[268434928]:
bootos.c(382) 3 %% Event(0xaaaaaaaa)
show syslog-servers
Use the show syslog-servers command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
the syslog servers settings.
Syntax
show syslog-servers
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
1630
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1631 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays the syslog server settings.
console#show syslog-servers
IP
address
Port
Severity
Facility
Description
--------------------------------------------------------192.180.2.275
14
Info
local7
7
192.180.2.285
14
Warning
local7
7
Syslog Commands
1631
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1632 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1632
Syslog Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1633 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
80
System Management Commands
This chapter explains the following commands:
asset-tag
login-banner
show interfaces
show system
advanced firmware
banner exec
–
–
show system id
banner login
member
show ip interface
out-of-band
show system
temperature
banner motd
motd-banner
show memory cpu show tech-support
banner motd
acknowledge
nsf
show nsf
clear checkpoint
statistics
reload
show power-usage- show version
history
cut-through
mode–
set description
show process cpu
stack
exec-banner
slot
show sessions
stack-port
hostname
show banner
show slot
standby
ip address
show boot-version
show supported
cardtype
switch renumber
ip address none
show checkpoint
statistics
show supported
switchtype
telnet
ip address
{dhcp/bootp}
show cut-through
mode
show switch
traceroute
–
–
–
–
show users
asset-tag
Use the asset-tag command in Global Configuration mode to specify the
switch asset tag. To remove the existing asset tag, use the no form of the
command.
System Management Commands
1633
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1634 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
asset-tag [unit] tag
no asset-tag [unit]
•
unit — Switch number. (Range: 1–12)
•
tag — The switch asset tag.
Default Configuration
No asset tag is defined by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The asset-tag command accepts any printable characters for a tag name
except a double quote or question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes
to include spaces within the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as
part of the name. The CLI does not filter illegal characters and may accept
entries up to the first illegal character or reject the entry entirely.
Example
The following example specifies the switch asset tag as 1qwepot. Because the
unit parameter is not specified, the command defaults to the master switch
number.
console(config)# asset-tag 1qwepot
banner exec
Use the banner exec command to set the message that is displayed after a
successful login. Use the no form of the command to remove the set message.
Syntax
banner exec MESSAGE
no banner exec
•
1634
MESSAGE — Quoted text
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1635 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
The exec message may consist of multiple lines. Enter a quote to complete
the message and return to configuration mode. Up to 2000 characters may be
entered into a banner. Each line entered will consume an extra two characters
to account for the carriage return and line feed.
Example
console(config)# banner exec "banner text"
banner login
Use the banner login command to set the message that is displayed just
before the login prompt. Use no banner login command to remove the
message.
Syntax
banner login MESSAGE
no banner login
•
MESSAGE — Quoted text
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
System Management Commands
1635
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1636 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The login banner can consist of multiple lines. Enter a quote to end the
banner text and return to the configuration prompt. Up to 2000 characters
may be entered into a banner. Each line entered will consume an extra two
characters to account for the carriage return and line feed.
Example
console(config)# banner login "banner text"
banner motd
Use the banner motd command to set the message that is displayed on
logging into the switch. Use no banner motd command to remove the
message.
Syntax
banner motd MESSAGE
no banner motd
•
MESSAGE — Quoted text
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
The motd banner can consist of multiple lines. Enter a quote to end the
banner text and return to the configuration prompt. Up to 2000 characters
may be entered into a banner. Each line entered will consume an extra two
characters to account for the carriage return and line feed.
1636
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1637 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)# banner motd “IMPORTANT: There is a
power shutdown at 23:00hrs today, duration 1 hr 30
minutes.”
When the MOTD banner is executed, the following displays:
IMPORTANT: There is a power shutdown at 23:00hrs today, duration 1 hr 30
minutes.
banner motd acknowledge
The banner displayed on the console must be acknowledged if banner motd
acknowledge is executed. Enter "y" or "n" to continue to the login prompt. If
"n" is entered, the session is terminated and no further communication is
allowed on that session. However, serial connection will not get terminated if
‘y’ is not entered. Use the no banner motd acknowledge command to disable
banner acknowledge.
Syntax
banner motd acknowledge
no banner motd acknowledge
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config)# banner motd “There is a power
shutdown at 23:00hrs today, duration 1 hr 30 minutes.”
console(config)# banner motd acknowledge
System Management Commands
1637
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1638 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
When the MOTD banner is executed, the following displays:
IMPORTANT: There is a power shutdown at 23:00hrs
today, duration 1 hr 30 minutes.
Press ‘y’ to continue
If ‘y’ is entered, the following displays:
console >
If ‘n’ is entered, the session will get disconnected, unless it is a serial
connection.
clear checkpoint statistics
Use the clear checkpoint statistics command to clear the statistics for the
checkpointing process.
Syntax
clear checkpoint statistics
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
When nonstop forwarding is enabled on a stack, the stack's management unit
checkpoints operational data to the backup unit. If the backup unit takes over
as the management unit, the control plane on the new management unit uses
the checkpoint data when initializing its state. Checkpoint statistics track the
amount of data checkpointed from the management unit to the backup unit.
Example
console#clear checkpoint statistics
1638
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1639 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
cut-through mode
Use the cut-through mode command to enable the cut-through mode on the
switch. The mode takes effect on all ports on next reload of the switch. To
disable the cut-through mode on the switch, use the no form of this
command.
Syntax
cut-through mode
no cut-through mode
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console(config)#cut-through mode
The mode (enable) is effective from the next reload of
Switch/Stack.
exec-banner
Use the exec-banner command to enable exec banner on the console, telnet
or SSH connection. To disable, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
exec-banner
no exec-banner
•
MESSAGE — Quoted text
System Management Commands
1639
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1640 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
User Guidelines
The exec banner can consist of multiple lines. Enter a quote to complete the
message and return to configuration mode.
Example
console(config-telnet)# no exec-banner
hostname
Use the hostname command in Global Configuration mode to specify or
modify the switch host name. To restore the default host name, use the no
form of the command.
Syntax
hostname name
no hostname
•
name — The name of the host. (Range: 1–255 characters) The command
allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes. For
example, #snmp-server v3-host “host name”.
Default Configuration
Host name not configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
1640
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1641 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The hostname may include any printable characters except a double quote or
question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within
the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name. The CLI
does not filter illegal characters and may truncate entries at the first illegal
character or reject the entry entirely.
Example
The following example specifies the switch host name.
console(config)# hostname Dell
initiate failover
To manually force a failover from the management unit to the backup unit in
a stack, use the initiate failover command in Stack Configuration mode.
Syntax
This command has no user guidelines.
Default Configuration
There is no default configuration.
Command Mode
Stack Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command forces a warm restart of the stack. The backup unit takes over
as the new management unit without clearing the hardware state on any of
the stack members. The original management unit reboots. If the system is
not ready for a warm restart, for example because no backup unit has been
elected or one or more members of the stack do not support nonstop
forwarding, the command fails with a warning message.
Example
console(config-stack)#initiate failover ?
System Management Commands
1641
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1642 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Press enter to execute the command.
console(config-stack)#initiate failover
Management unit will be reloaded.
Are you sure you want to failover to the backup unit?
(y/n) y
ip address
Use the ip address command to set a static OOB port IP address.
Syntax
ip address addr mask gw
•
addr — IP address to be set for the OOB port. (Range: Valid IP address)
•
mask — Subnet mask. (Range: Valid mask)
•
gw — Gateway IP address. (Range: Valid gateway IP address)
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (out-of-band)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console(config-if)#ip address 10.240.4.115
255.255.255.0 10.240.4.1
ip address none
Use the ip address none command to disable DHCP/BOOTP on the OOB
port.
1642
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1643 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip address none
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (out-of-band)
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console(config)#interface out-of-band
console(config-if)#ip address none
ip address {dhcp/bootp}
Use the ip address command to enable DHCP/BOOTP on the OOB port.
Syntax
ip address {dhcp/bootp}
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (out-of-band)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console(config)#interface out-of-band
System Management Commands
1643
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1644 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
login-banner
Use the login-banner command to enable login banner on the console, telnet
or SSH connection. To disable, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
login-banner
no login-banner
•
MESSAGE — Quoted text
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-telnet)# no login-banner
member
Use the member command in Stack Global Configuration mode to preconfigure a switch stack member. Execute this command on the Management
Switch. To remove a stack-member configuration from the stack, use the no
form of the command.
NOTE: The "no" form of the command may not be used if the member is present in
the stack.
Syntax
member unit switchindex
1644
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1645 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
no member unit
•
unit — The switch identifier of the switch to be added or removed from
the stack. (Range: 1–12)
•
switchindex — The index into the database of the supported switch types,
indicating the type of the switch being preconfigured. The switch index is
a 32-bit integer obtained from the show supported switchtype command.
Default configuration
This command has no defaults.
Command Mode
Stack Global Configuration
User Guidelines
The switch index (SID) can be obtained by executing the show supported
switchtype command in User Exec mode. When removing a unit from a
stack, use the no member command to remove the stack member
configuration after physically removing the unit.
Example
The following example displays how to add to stack switch number 2 with
index 1.
console(config)# stack
console(config-stack)# member 2 1
motd-banner
Use the motd-banner command to enable motd on the console, telnet or
SSH connection. To disable, use the no form of the command.
Syntax
motd-banner
no motd-banner
•
MESSAGE — Quoted text
System Management Commands
1645
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1646 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console(config-telnet)# motd-banner
nsf
Use this command to enable non-stop forwarding. The “no” form of the
command will disable NSF.
Syntax
nsf
no nsf
Default Configuration
Non-stop forwarding is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Stack Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Nonstop forwarding allows the forwarding plane of stack units to continue to
forward packets while the control and management planes restart as a result
of a power failure, hardware failure, or software fault on the stack
management unit.
Example
console(config)#nsf
1646
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1647 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ping
Use the ping command in User EXEC mode to check the accessibility of the
desired node on the network.
Syntax
ping [ ip | ipv6 ] ipaddress | hostname [ repeat count ] [ timeout interval ] [
size size ]
•
ipaddress — IP address to ping (contact).
•
hostname — Hostname to ping (contact). (Range: 1–158 characters). The
command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes,
even though host names may only consist of letters, numbers and the
hyphen character.
•
count — Number of packets to send (Range: 1–15 packets).
•
interval — The time between Echo Requests, in seconds (Range: 1–60
seconds).
•
size — Number of data bytes in a packet (Range: 0–65507 bytes).
Default Configuration
The default count is 4.
The default interval is 3 seconds.
The default size is 0 data bytes.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example displays a ping to IP address 10.27.65.60
console#ping 10.27.65.60
System Management Commands
1647
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1648 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Pinging 10.27.65.60 with 0 bytes of data:
Reply From 10.27.65.60: icmp_seq = 0. time <10 msec.
Reply From 10.27.65.60: icmp_seq = 1. time <10 msec.
Reply From 10.27.65.60: icmp_seq = 2. time <10 msec.
Reply From 10.27.65.60: icmp_seq = 3. time <10 msec.
----10.27.65.60 PING statistics---4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip (msec) min/avg/max = <10/<10/<10
console#
The following example displays a ping to yahoo.com.
console#ping yahoo.com
Pinging yahoo.com [66,217,71,198] with 64 bytes of
data;
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=0. time=11 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=1. time=8 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=2. time=8 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=3. time=7 ms
----10.1.1.1 PING Statistics---4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet
loss
round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 7/8/11
reload
Use the reload command in Privileged EXEC mode to reload stack members.
1648
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1649 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
reload [stack–member–number]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
stack–member–number
The stack member to be reloaded.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
If no unit is specified, all units are reloaded.
Example
The following example displays how to reload the stack.
console#reload 1
Management switch has unsaved changes.
Would you like to save them now? (y/n)n
Configuration Not Saved!
Are you sure you want to reload the switch? (y/n) y
Reloading management switch 1.
set description
Use the set description command in Stack Global Configuration mode to
associate a text description with a switch in the stack.
Syntax
set description unit description
System Management Commands
1649
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1650 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
unit — The switch identifier. (Range: 1–12)
•
description — The text description. (Range: 1–80 alphanumeric
characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Stack Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays
console(config)#stack
console(config-stack)#set description 1 “unit 1"
slot
NOTE: The slot command is only available to be used on PCM6348 when it is a
master switch in a mixed stack of PCM6348/PC7000 switches to configure the slot on a
slave PC7000 switch.
Use the slot command to configure a slot in the system. The unit/slot is the
slot identifier of the slot located in the specified unit. The cardindex is the
index to the database of the supported card types (see the command show
supported cardtype) indicating the type of card being preconfigured in the
specified slot. The card index is a 32-bit integer. If a card is currently present
in the slot that is unconfigured, the configured information will be deleted
and the slot will be reconfigured with default information for the card. The
supported card types are:
•
PowerConnect 7024
•
PowerConnect 7024P
•
PowerConnect 7024F
1650
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1651 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
PowerConnect 7048
•
PowerConnect 7048P
•
PowerConnect 7048R
•
PowerConnect 7048R-RA
•
CX4 Expansion Card
•
10GBaseT Expansion Card
•
SFP+ Expansion Card
Use the no form of the command to return the unit/slot configuration to the
default value.
Syntax
slot unit/slot cardindex
no slot unit/slot
• unit/slot — The slot identifier of the slot.
• cardindex — The index into the database of the supported card types
(see show supported cardtype) indicating the type of card being
preconfigured in the specified slot. The card index is a 32-bit integer.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
The card index (CID) can be obtained by executing the show supported
cardtype command in User EXEC mode.
show banner
Use the show banner command to display banner information.
System Management Commands
1651
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1652 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show banner
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
console#show banner
Banner:Exec
Line Console...................... Enable
Line SSH.......................... Disable
Line Telnet....................... Enable
===exec=====
Banner:Login
Line Console...................... Enable
Line SSH.......................... Enable
Line Telnet....................... Disable
===login=====
Banner:MOTD
Line Console...................... Enable
1652
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1653 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Line SSH.......................... Enable
Line Telnet....................... Enable
===motd=====
show boot-version
Use the show boot-version command to display the boot image version
details. The details available to the user include the build date and time.
Syntax
show boot-version [ unit ]
•
unit — The switch identifier. (Range: 1–12)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console#show boot-version
unit
Boot Image Version
1
Thu Aug 30 12:01:04 2007
show checkpoint statistics
Use the show checkpoint statistics command to display the statistics for the
checkpointing process.
Syntax
show checkpoint statistics
System Management Commands
1653
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1654 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
When nonstop forwarding is enabled on a stack, the stack's management unit
checkpoints operational data to the backup unit. If the backup unit takes over
as the management unit, the control plane on the new management unit uses
the checkpointed data when initializing its state. Checkpoint statistics track
the amount of data checkpointed from the management unit to the backup
unit.
Example
console#show checkpoint statistics
Messages Checkpointed.....................6708
Bytes Checkpointed........................894305
Time Since Counters Cleared...............3d 01:05:09
Checkpoint Message Rate...................0.025 msg/sec
Last 10-second Message Rate...............0 msg/sec
Highest 10-second Message Rate............8 msg/sec
show cut-through mode
Use the show cut-through mode command to show the cut-through mode on
the switch.
Syntax
show cut-through mode
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
1654
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1655 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
Console#show cut-through mode
Current mode
: Enable
Configured mode : Disable (This mode is effective on
next reload)
show interfaces advanced firmware
Use the show interfaces advanced firmware command to display the firmware
revision of the PHY for a port.
Syntax
show interfaces advanced firmware interface
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
interface
A 10G non-stacking physical interface.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command is only applicable to 10G non-stacking interfaces.
System Management Commands
1655
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1656 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console#show interfaces advanced firmware
Port Revision Part number
-------- ----------- ----------Te1/0/1 0x411 BCM8727
Te1/0/2 0x411 BCM8727
Te1/0/3 0x411 BCM8727
Te1/0/4 0x411 BCM8727
Te1/0/5 0x411 BCM8727
show ip interface out-of-band
Use the show ip interface out-of-band command to disable DHCP/BOOTP
on the OOB port.
Syntax
show ip interface out-of-band
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console#show ip interface out-of-band
IP Address............................ 10.240.4.115
1656
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1657 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Subnet Mask........................... 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway....................... 10.240.4.1
IPv6 Prefix is .......................
FE80::20A:1EFF:FE11:1100/64
ServPort Configured Protocol Current...None
Burned In MAC Address..................0006.2932.814C
show memory cpu
Use the show memory cpu command to check the total and available RAM
space on the switch.
Syntax
show memory cpu
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console#show memory cpu
Total Memory........................... 262144 KBytes
Available Memory Space................. 121181 KBytes
show nsf
Use the show nsf command to show the status of non-stop forwarding.
System Management Commands
1657
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1658 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show nsf
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show nsf
Administrative Status.......................... Enable
Operational Status............................. Enable
Last Startup Reason............................ Warm Auto-Restart
Time Since Last Restart........................ 0 days 16 hrs 52
mins 55 secs
Restart In Progress............................ No
Warm Restart Ready............................. Yes
Copy of Running Configuration to Backup Unit:
Status...................................... Stale
Time Since Last Copy........................ 0 days 4 hrs 53
mins 22 secs
Time Until Next Copy........................ 28 seconds
1658
Unit
NSF Support
----
-----------
1
Yes
2
Yes
3
Yes
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1659 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show power-usage-history
Use the show power-usage-history command in Privileged EXEC mode to
display the history of unit power consumption for the unit specified in the
command and total stack power consumption. Historical samples are not
saved across switch reboots/reloads.
Syntax
show power-usage-history unit-id
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
unit-id
Stack unit for which to display the power history. Range 1-12.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
console#show power-usage-history unit 1
Sampling Interval (sec)........................ 30
Total No. of Samples to Keep................... 168
Current Power Consumption (mWatts)............. 56172
Sample
No.
Time Since
Power
Power
The Sample
Consumption
Consumption
System Management Commands
1659
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1660 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Was Recorded
------ --------------------
On This Unit
Per Stack
(mWatts)
(mWatts)
-----------
-----------
3
0d:00:00:13
56172
56172
2
0d:00:00:43
56172
56172
1
0d:00:01:12
54360
54360
show process cpu
Use the show process cpu command to check the CPU utilization for each
process currently running on the switch.
Syntax
show process cpu
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console#show process cpu
Memory Utilization Report
status
bytes
------ ---------free
1660
64022608
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1661 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
alloc
151568112
CPU Utilization:
PID
Name
5 Sec
1 Min
5 Min
--------------------------------------------------------328bb20 tTffsPTask
0.00%
0.00%
0.02%
3291820 tNetTask
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
3295410 tXbdService
0.00%
0.00%
0.03%
347dcd0 ipnetd
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
348a440 osapiTimer
1.20%
1.43%
1.21%
358ee70 bcmL2X.0
0.40%
0.30%
0.12%
359d2e0 bcmCNTR.0
0.80%
0.42%
0.50%
3b5b750 bcmRX
0.00%
0.13%
0.12%
3d3f6d0 MAC Send Task
0.00%
0.07%
0.10%
3d48bd0 MAC Age Task
0.00%
0.00%
0.03%
40fdbf0 bcmLINK.0
0.00%
0.14%
0.46%
4884e70 tL7Timer0
0.00%
0.06%
0.02%
48a1250 osapiMonTask
0.00%
0.32%
0.17%
4969790 BootP
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
4d71610 dtlTask
0.00%
0.06%
0.05%
4ed00e0 hapiRxTask
0.00%
0.06%
0.03%
562e810 DHCP snoop
0.00%
0.00%
0.06%
58e9bc0 Dynamic ARP Inspection
0.00%
0.06%
0.03%
62038a0 dot1s_timer_task
0.00%
0.00%
0.03%
687f360 dot1xTimerTask
0.00%
0.06%
0.07%
6e23370 radius_task
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
6e2c870 radius_rx_task
0.00%
0.06%
0.03%
--More-- or (q)uit
System Management Commands
1661
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1662 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
7bc9030 spmTask
0.00%
0.09%
0.01%
7c58730 ipMapForwardingTask
0.00%
0.06%
0.03%
7f6eee0 tRtrDiscProcessingTask
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
b1516d0 dnsRxTask
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
b194d60 tCptvPrtl
0.00%
0.06%
0.03%
b585770 isdpTask
0.00%
0.00%
0.02%
bda6210 RMONTask
0.00%
0.11%
0.11%
bdb24b0 boxs Req
0.00%
0.13%
0.10%
c2d6db0 sshd
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
----------------------------------------------------------More-- or (q)uit
Total CPU Utilization
2.40%
3.62%
3.45%
show sessions
Use the show sessions command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a list of
the open telnet sessions to remote hosts.
Syntax
show sessions
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays a list of open telnet sessions to remote hosts.
console#show sessions
1662
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1663 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Name Connection from
Idle
Session
Session
Time
Time
Type
--------- --------------- -------- --------- --------------
EIA-232
00:00:00 00:07:37
Serial
admin
192.168.1.248
00:00:17 00:00:26
Telnet
admin
192.168.1.248
00:00:16 00:00:32
HTTP
console#
The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display.
Field
Description
Connection
Connection number
Host
Remote host to which the switch is connected
through a Telnet session
Address
IP address of the remote host
Port
Telnet TCP port number
show slot
Use the show slot command in User EXEC mode to display information
about all the slots in the system or for a specific slot.
Syntax
show slot [slot/port]
The following table explains the output parameters.
Parameter
Description
Slot
The slot identifier in a slot/port format.
Slot Status
The slot is empty, full, or has encountered
an error.
Admin State
The slot administrative mode is enabled
or disabled.
System Management Commands
1663
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1664 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Power State
The slot power mode is enabled or
disabled.
Configured Card Model Identifier
The model identifier of the card
preconfigured in the slot. Model identifier
is a 32-character field used to identify a
card.
Pluggable
Cards are pluggable or non-pluggable in
the slot.
If you supply a value for slot/port, the following additional information
appears as shown in the table below.
Parameter
Description
Inserted Card Model Identifier
The model identifier of the card inserted
in the slot. Model identifier is a 32character field used to identify a card.
This field is displayed only if the slot is
full.
Inserted Card Description
The card description. This field is
displayed only if the slot is full.
Configured Card Description
The description of the card preconfigured
in the slot.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC
User Guidelines
The command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays sample output of the show slot command.
1664
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1665 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#show slot
Slot
Status
Admin
Power
State
State
Configured Card
Model ID
Pluggable
----- ------ ------- ------- ------------------------- -----------1/0
Full
Enable
Enable
PCM8024-k
No
1/1
Full
Enable
Enable
DELL Ten-Gig SFP+ Card
Yes
show supported cardtype
Use the show supported cardtype command in User EXEC mode to display
information about all card types supported in the system. If a card index is
entered, then the command displays information about specific card types
supported in the system. Card index values are specific to each family of
products. Use the generic form (without specifying an index) to display all the
card types for a product family.
Syntax
show supported cardtype [cardindex]
•
cardindex — Displays the index into the database of the supported card
types. This index is used when preconfiguring a slot.
The following table explains the output parameters.
Parameter
Description
Card Index (CID)
The index into the database of the
supported card types. This index is used
when preconfiguring a slot.
Card Model Identifier
The model identifier for the supported
card type.
If you supply a value for cardindex, the following additional information
appears as shown in the table below.
System Management Commands
1665
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1666 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Card Type
The 32-bit numeric card type for the
supported card.
Model Identifier
The model identifier for the supported
card type.
Card Description
The description for the supported card
type.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC
User Guidelines
The CID information is used when pre-configuring cards using the slot
command.
show supported switchtype
Use the show supported switchtype command in User EXEC mode to display
information about all supported switch types.
Syntax
show supported switchtype [switchindex]
•
switchindex — Specifies the index into the database of the supported
switch types, indicating the type of the switch being preconfigured. The
switch index is a 32-bit integer. (Range: 0–65535)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
1666
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1667 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The switch SID is used when pre-configuring switches in a stack using the
member command in config-stack mode.
Example
The following example displays the information for supported switch types.
console>show supported switchtype
SID
Switch Model ID
Mgmt
Code
Pref
Type
---------------------------------------------------------1
PCM8024
0x100b000
The following table describes the fields in the example.
Field
Description
Switch Index (SID)
This field displays the index into the database of
supported switch types. This index is used when
preconfiguring a member to be added to the
stack.
Model Identifier
This field displays the model identifier for the
supported switch type.
Management Preference
This field indicates the management preference
value of the switch type.
Code Version
This field displays the code load target identifier
of the switch type.
The following example displays the format of the show supported switchtype
[switchindex] command.
console#show supported switchtype 1
Switch Type....................... 0x73950001
Model Identifier.................. PCM8024
Switch Description................ PowerConnect M8024
Management Preference............. 1
System Management Commands
1667
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1668 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Expected Code Type................ 0x100b000
Supported Cards:
Slot....................... 0
Card Index (CID)........... 3
Model Identifier............ PCM8024
console#
The following table describes the fields in the example.
Field
Description
Switch Type
This field displays the 32-bit numeric
switch type for the supported switch.
Model Identifier
This field displays the model identifier for
the supported switch type.
Switch Description
This field displays the description for the
supported switch type.
show switch
NOTE: The show switch stack-port command in Stack Configuration mode is not
supported by the PCM8024 and PCM8024-k switches.
Use the show switch command in User EXEC mode to display information
about units in the stack.
The show switch command shows the configuration and status of the
stacking units, including the active and standby stack management units, the
pre-configured model identifier, the plugged in model identifier, the switch
status and the current code version. If there is a stack firmware
synchronization (SFS) operation in progress, the switch status will show as
Updating Code. Both the pre-configured switch type (as set by the member
command in stack mode) and the actual connected switch type are shown.
The show switch unitid command shows details of the switch configuration
including the SFS last attempt status for the specified unit.
1668
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1669 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The show switch command may show an SDM Mismatch value in the Switch
Status field. This value indicates that the unit joined the stack, but is running
a different SDM template than the management unit. This status should be
temporary; the stack unit should automatically reload using the template
running on the stack manager.
Use the show supported switchtype command to display switch SIDs.
Use the show stack-ports command to display details regarding stacking links.
Use the show slot command to display details regarding slot configuration.
Use the show sdm prefer command to display the SDM template
configuration.
Syntax
show switch [chassis-mgmt | stack–member–number | stack–ports[counters
| diag] | stack–standby]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
unitid
The unit number.
chassis-mgmt
Display chassis management.
stack–member–number The stack member number.
stack–ports
Display summary stack-port information for all interfaces.
counters
Display summary data counter information for all interfaces.
diag
Display front panel stacking diagnostics for each port.
stack–standby
Display the configured or automatically selected standby
unit number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
System Management Commands
1669
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1670 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
Example – Stack Status for the Switch
The following example displays stack status information for the switch.
console>show switch 1
Switch............................ 1
Management Status................. Management Switch
Admin Management Preference....... 4
Switch Type....................... 0x73950001
Preconfigured Model Identifier.... PCM8024
Plugged-in Model Identifier....... PCM8024
Switch Status..................... OK
Switch Description................ PCM8024
Expected Code Type................ 0x100b000
Detected Code Version............. I.12.21.1
Detected Code in Flash............ I.12.21.1
Boot Code Version................. I.12.1
Up Time.................. 1 days 0 hrs 16 mins 37 secs
The following table describes the fields in the example.
Unit
Description
Switch
This field displays the unit identifier assigned to
the switch.
1670
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1671 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Unit
Description
Management Status
This field indicates whether the switch is the
Management Switch, a stack member, or the
status is unassigned.
Admin Management Preference
This field indicates the administrative
management preference value assigned to the
switch. This preference value indicates how
likely the switch is to be chosen as the
Management Switch.
Switch Type
This field displays the 32-bit numeric switch
type.
Model Identifier
This field displays the model identifier for this
switch. Model Identifier is a 32-character field
assigned by the switch manufacturer to identify
the switch.
Switch Status
This field displays the switch status. Possible
values are OK, Unsupported, Code Mismatch,
Config Mismatch, or Not Present.
Switch Description
This field displays the switch description.
Expected Code Version
This field indicates the expected code version.
Detected Code Version
This field displays the version of code running
on this switch. If the switch is not present and
the data is from preconfiguration, the code
version is "None."
Detected Code in Flash
This field displays the version of code that is
currently stored in FLASH memory on the
switch. This code will execute after the switch is
reset. If the switch is not present and the data is
from pre-configuration, then the code version is
"None."
Boot Code Version
This field displays the version of the boot
strapping code.
Up Time
This field displays the system up time.
Example – All Units in the Stack
This example displays information about all units in the stack.
System Management Commands
1671
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1672 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console>show switch
Switch
Management
Status
Preconfig
Model ID
Plugged-in
Switch
Code
Model ID
Status
Version
------------------------------------------------------------1
Mgmt Switch
PCM8024
PCM8024
1.0.0.0
Different fields in the display are explained as follows:
Unit
Description
Switch
This field displays the unit identifier assigned to
the switch.
Management Status
This field indicates whether the switch is the
Management Switch, a stack member, or the
status is unassigned.
Preconfigured Model Identifier
This field displays the model identifier of a
preconfigured switch ready to join the stack.
The Model Identifier is a 32-character field
assigned by the switch manufacturer to identify
the switch.
Plugged-In Model Identifier
This field displays the model identifier of the
switch in the stack. Model Identifier is a 32character field assigned by the switch
manufacturer to identify the switch.
Switch Status
This field indicates the switch status. Possible
values for this state are: OK, Unsupported,
CodeMismatch, ConfigMismatch, or
NotPresent
Code Version
This field indicates the detected version of code
on this switch.
Example – Status Parameters for NSF
The show switch command is used to display which unit is the management
unit and which is the backup unit. Global Status Parameters for NSF are
explained as follows:
1672
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1673 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
NSF
Administrative
Status
Whether nonstop forwarding is
Enabled
administratively enabled or disabled Disabled
Enabled
NSF Operational
Status
Indicates whether NSF is enabled
on the stack.
Enabled
Disabled
None
Last Startup
Reason
The type of activation that caused
the software to start the last time.
There are four options. “Power-On”
means that the switch rebooted.
This could have been caused by a
power cycle or an administrative
“Reload” command. “Administrative
Move” means that the administrator
issued a command for the stand-by
manager to take over. “Warm-AutoRestart” means that the primary
management card restarted due to a
failure, and the system executed a
nonstop forwarding failover. “ColdAuto-Restart” means that the
system switched from the active
manager to the backup manager and
was unable to maintain user data
traffic. This is usually caused by
multiple failures occurring close
together.
Power-On
None
Time Since Last
Restart
Range
Warm Restart
Ready
AdministrativeMove
Warm-AutoRestart
Cold-AutoRestart
Time since the current management Time Stamp
card became the active management
card. For the backup manager, the
value is set to 0d 00:00:00
Restart in progress Whether a restart is in progress. A
restart is not considered complete
until all hardware tables have been
fully reconciled.
Default
0d
00:00:00
Yes or No
Whether the initial full checkpoint Yes or No
has finished
System Management Commands
1673
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1674 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter
Description
Range
Status
Whether the running configuration Current or Stale
on the backup unit includes all
changes made on the management
unit.
Time Since Last
Copy
When the running configuration
was last copied from the
management unit to the backup
unit.
Time Stamp
Time Until Next
Copy
The number of seconds until the
running configuration will be copied
to the backup unit. This line only
appears when the running
configuration on the backup unit is
Stale.
0L7_UNITMGR_
CONFIG_COPY
_HOLDDOWN
Default
(nsf-stack) #show nsf
Administrative Status..........................
Enable
Operational Status.............................
Enable
Last Startup Reason............................ Warm
Auto-Restart
Time Since Last Restart........................ 0
days 16 hrs 52 mins 55 secs
Restart In Progress............................ No
Warm Restart Ready............................. Yes
Copy of Running Configuration to Backup Unit:
Status...................................... Stale
Time Since Last Copy........................ 0 days
4 hrs 53 mins 22 secs
1674
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1675 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Time Until Next Copy........................ 28
seconds
Unit
NSF Support
----
-----------
1
Yes
2
Yes
3
Yes
Per Unit Status Parameters are explained as follows:
Parameter
Description
Range
Default
NSF Support
Whether a unit
supports NSF
Yes or No
—
Example – Switch Firmware Stack Status
The following example displays the Switch Firmware stack status information
for the switch.
console#show switch
Management
SW
Switch
Standby
Preconfig
Plugged-in
Switch
Code
Status
Model ID
Model ID
Status
Version
--- ---------- --------- ------------- ------------- ------------- --------1
Mgmt Sw
ANFirebolt-48 ANFirebolt-48 OK
2
Stack Mbr
ANFirebolt-24 ANFirebolt-24 Updating Code 13.4.8.42
4.12.17.37
console#show switch 1
Switch............................ 1
Management Status................. Management Switch
Hardware Management Preference.... Unassigned
Admin Management Preference....... Unassigned
Switch Type....................... 0xb6340001
Preconfigured Model Identifier.... PCT7048
Plugged-in Model Identifier....... PCT7048
System Management Commands
1675
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1676 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Switch Status..................... OK
Switch Description................ PowerConnect 7048
Expected Code Type................ 0x100b000
Detected Code Version............. 5.31.1.46
Detected Code in Flash............ 5.31.1.46
CPLD Version...................... 5
SFS Last Attempt Status........... None
Serial Number..................... none
Up Time........................... 0 days 2 hrs 14 mins 54 secs
console#
Example – SDM Templates
This example shows the SDM Mismatch value in the Switch Status field.
console#show switch
Management
SW Switch
Standby Preconfig
Plugged-in
Switch
Code
Status
Model ID
Status
Version
Model ID
-- ---------- ------ ------------- ------------- ----------1
Mgmt Sw
ANFirebolt-48
ANFirebolt-48
OK
2
2.24.17.48
ANFirebolt-48
ANFirebolt-48
SDM Mismatch
2.24.17.48
show system
Use the show system command in User EXEC mode command to display
system information.
Syntax
show system [unit]
•
unit — The unit number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
1676
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1677 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays system information.
console#show system
System Description: Dell Ethernet Switch
System Up Time: 0 days, 22h:27m:32s
System Contact:
System Name:
System Location:
Burned In MAC Address: 0006.2932.8120
System Object ID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3041
System Model ID: PCM8024-k
Machine Type: PowerConnect M8024-k
Temperature Sensors:
Unit
Description
Temperature
Status
(Celsius)
----
-----------
-----------
------
1
System
63
Good
Power Supplies:
Unit
Description
Status
----
-----------
-----------
1
Main
OK
System Management Commands
1677
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1678 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console#
show system id
Use the show system id command in User EXEC mode to display the system
identity information.
Syntax
show system id [unit]
•
unit — The unit number.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
The tag information is on a switch by switch basis.
Example
The following example displays the system service tag information.
console>show system id
Service Tag: 89788978
Serial number: 8936589782
Asset tag: 7843678957
Unit
Service tag
Serial number
Asset tag
-----
------------
--------------
-----------
1
89788978
8936589782
7843678957
2
4254675
3216523877
5621987728
1678
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1679 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show system power
Use the show system power command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display information about the system level power consumption.
Syntax
show system power
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
console#show system power
console>show system power
Power Supplies:
Unit
Description
---1
1
1
----------System
Main
Secondary
Status
Source
----------- -----OK
AC
OK
AC
Not present DC
Average
Power
(Watts)
---------206710688
44896
Current
Since
Power
Date/Time
(Watts)
------- ----------------81540
81540 01/10/2031 15:58:46
System Management Commands
1679
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1680 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show system temperature
Use the show system temperature command in User EXEC or Privileged
EXEC mode to display information about the system temperature and fan
status.
Syntax
show system temperature
Parameter Description
This command does not require a parameter description.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
Temperature status is indicated as per the following table:
Status
Degrees Celsius
Good
0-50
Medium
51-74
High
75-200
Examples
console>show system temperature
Temperature Sensors:
Unit
1680
Description
Temperature
System Management Commands
Status
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1681 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
(Celsius)
----
-----------
-----------
------
1
MAC
33
Good
1
PHY
24
Good
Fans:
Unit
Description
Status
----
-----------
------
1
Fan 1
OK
1
Fan 2
OK
1
Fan 3
OK
show tech-support
Use the show tech-support command to display system and configuration
information for use in debugging or contacting technical support. The output
of the show tech-support command combines the output of the following
commands:
•
show version
•
show sysinfo
•
show port all
•
show isdp neighbors
•
show logging
•
show event log
•
show logging buffered
•
show running config
•
show debugging
System Management Commands
1681
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1682 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show tech-support
Parameter Ranges
Not applicable
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
Not applicable
Default Value
Not applicable
Example
console#show tech-support
***************** Show Version ******************
Switch: 2
System Description............................. PowerConnect 6248P,
1.23.0.33
VxWorks 6.5
Machine Type................................... PowerConnect 6248P
Machine Model.................................. PCT6248P
Serial Number..................................
CN0PK4632829881C0067
FRU Number..................................... 1
Part Number.................................... BCM56314
Maintenance Level.............................. A
Manufacturer................................... 0xbc00
Burned In MAC Address.......................... 00:1E:4F:04:5D:F4
1682
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1683 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Software Version............................... 1.23.0.33
Operating System............................... VxWorks 6.5
Network Processing Device...................... BCM56314_A0
Additional Packages............................
QOS
Multicast
Stacking
Routing
***************** Show SysInfo ******************
System Location................................
System Contact.................................
System Object ID...............................
1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3013
System Up Time................................. 0 days 0 hrs 11
mins 47 secs
10/100 Ethernet/802.3 interface(s)............. 4
Gig Ethernet/802.3 interface(s)................ 1
10Gig Ethernet/802.3 interface(s).............. 0
Virtual Ethernet/802.3 interface(s)............ 0
MIBs Supported:
--More-- or (q)uit
Selecting More (m) continues the display of output for the show tech-support
command.
show users
Use the show users command in Privileged EXEC mode to display
information about the active users.
System Management Commands
1683
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1684 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show users [ long ]
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays a list of active users and the information
about them.
console#show users
Username
Protocol
Location
--------
--------
------------
Bob
Serial
John
SSH
172.16.0.1
Robert
HTTP
172.16.0.8
Betty
Telnet
172.16.1.7
show version
Use the show version command in User EXEC mode to displays the system
version information.
Syntax
show version [unit ]
•
1684
unit — The unit number.
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1685 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays a system version (this version number is only
for demonstration purposes).
console>show version
Image Descriptions
image1 : default image
image2 :
Images currently available on Flash
-----------------------------------------------------------------unit
image1
image2
current-active
next-active
----------------------------------------------------------------1
K.3.9.1
0.0.0.0
image1
image1
2
K.3.9.1
0.0.0.0
image1
image1
stack
Stack commands are supported by PCM6220 and PCM6348 switches.
Use the stack command in Global Configuration mode to set the mode to
Stack Global Config.
Syntax
stack
Default Configuration
This command has no default mode.
System Management Commands
1685
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1686 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example sets the mode to Stack Global Config.
console(config)#stack
console(config-stack)#
stack-port
NOTE: All of the stack-port commands in Stack Configuration mode are not
supported by the PCM8024 and PCM8024-k switches.
Use the stack-port command in Stack Configuration mode to configure Stack
ports as either Stacking ports or as Ethernet ports. This command is used to
configure CX-4 ports to be either stacking or Ethernet ports. By default, CX-4
ports are Ethernet ports.
Syntax
stack-port tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port {ethernet | stack}
Default Configuration
By default, these ports are configured as stacking ports.
Command Mode
Stack Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The clear config command will not change the stacking port mode. Only the
stack-port command can change the operating mode of the stacking port and
it only takes effect after a reboot when changing between stacking and
Ethernet mode. If this command is used with a CX-4 module, the ports will
be forced to Ethernet mode upon reboot.
1686
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1687 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Use the show switch stack-port command to display configuration and status
of stacking ports.
NOTE: The show switch stack-port command in Stack Configuration mode is not
supported by the PCM8024 and PCM8024-k switches.Use the show switch command
to display information regarding the switches in a stack.
Example
console(config-stack)#stack-port tengigabitethernet
1/0/3 stack
console(config-stack)#
standby
Use the standby command to configure the standby in the stack. This unit
comes up as the master when the stack failover occurs. Use the no form of
this command to reset to default, in which case, a standby is automatically
selected from the existing stack units if there no preconfiguration.
Syntax
standby unit
no standby
•
unit — Valid unit number in the stack. (Range: 1–12 maximum. The range
is limited to the number of units available on the stack.)
Default Configuration
The default configuration is to allow the software to automatically select a
standby unit.
Command Mode
Stack Global Configuration
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
System Management Commands
1687
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1688 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Examples
console(config)#stack
console(config-stack)#standby 2
switch renumber
Use the switch renumber command in Global Configuration mode to change
the identifier for a switch in the stack. Upon execution, the switch is
configured with the configuration information for the new switch, if any is
available. The old switch configuration information is retained; however, the
old switch will be operationally unplugged.
Syntax
switch oldunit renumber newunit
• oldunit — The current switch identifier. (Range: 1–12)
• newunit — The updated value of the switch identifier. (Range: 1–12)
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command is executed on the Management Switch.
Example
The following example displays how to reconfigure switch number “1” to an
identifier of “2.”
console(config)#switch 1 renumber 2
telnet
Use the telnet command in Privileged EXEC mode to log into a host that
supports Telnet.
Syntax
telnet {ip-address | hostname} [port] [keyword1......]
1688
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1689 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
Valid IP address of the destination host.
hostname
Hostname of the destination host. (Range: 1–158 characters).
The command allows spaces in the host name when
specified in double quotes. For example,
console(config)#snmp-server host "host name"
port
A decimal TCP port number, or one of the keywords from the
port table in the usage guidelines (see Port Table below).
keyword
One or more keywords from the keywords table in the user
guidelines (see Keywords Table below).
Keywords Table
Options
Description
/debug
Enable telnet debugging mode.
/line
Enable telnet linemode.
/localecho
Enable telnet localecho.
Press ENTER to execute the command.
port
Enter the port number. Refer to the following table.
Port Table
Keyword
Description
Port Number
bgp
Border Gateway Protocol
179
chargen
Character generator
19
cmd
Remote commands
514
daytime
Daytime
13
discard
Discard
9
domain
Domain Name Service
53
echo
Echo
7
exec
Exec
512
System Management Commands
1689
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1690 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Keyword
Description
Port Number
finger
Finger
79
ftp
File Transfer Protocol
21
ftp-data
FTP data connections
20
gopher
Gopher
70
hostname
NIC hostname server
101
ident
Ident Protocol
113
irc
Internet Relay Chat
194
klogin
Kerberos login
543
kshell
Kerberos shell
544
login
Login
513
lpd
Printer service
515
nntp
Network News Transport Protocol
119
pim-auto-rp
PIM Auto-RP
496
pop2
Post Office Protocol v2
109
pop3
Post Office Protocol v3
110
smtp
Simple Mail Transport Protocol
25
sunrpc
Sun Remote Procedure Call
111
syslog
Syslog
514
tacacs
TAC Access Control System
49
talk
Talk
517
telnet
Telnet
23
time
Time
37
uucp
Unix-to-Unix Copy Program
540
whois
Nickname
43
www
World Wide Web
80
Default Configuration
port — Telnet port (decimal 23) on the host.
1690
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1691 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
Following is an example of using the telnet command to connect to
176.213.10.50.
console#telnet 176.213.10.50
Esc U sends telnet EL
traceroute
Use the traceroute command in Privileged EXEC mode to discover the IP
routes that packets actually take when traveling to their destinations.
You can use traceroute command in either of two formats:
•
You can specify the IP address and hostname in the command. The
traceroute {ipaddress | hostname} command sets the parameters to their
default values.
•
You can enter traceroute to without specifying the IP address and
hostname, and specify values for the traceroute parameters.
Syntax
traceroute [ ip | ipv6 ] ipaddress | hostname [ initTtl initTtl ] [ maxTtl
maxTtl ] [ maxFail maxFail ] [ interval interval ] [ count count ] [ port port ]
[ size size ]
•
ipaddress — Valid IP address of the destination host.
•
hostname — Hostname of the destination host. (Range: 1–158
characters). The command allows spaces in the host name when specified
in double quotes. For example, console(config)#snmp-server host
"host name"
•
initTtl — The initial time-to-live (TTL); the maximum number of router
hops between the local and remote system (Range: 0–255).
System Management Commands
1691
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1692 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
maxTtl — The largest TTL value that can be used (Range:1–255).
•
maxFail — Terminate the traceroute after failing to receive a response for
this number of consecutive probes (Range: 0–255).
•
interval — The timeout period. If a response is not received within this
period of time, then traceroute considers that probe a failure (printing *)
and sends the next probe. If traceroute does receive a response to a probe,
then it sends the next probe immediately. (Range: 1–60 seconds).
•
count — The number of probes to be sent at each TTL level
(Range:1–10).
•
port — The destination UDP port of the probe. This should be an unused
port on the remote destination system (Range: 1–65535).
•
size — The size, in bytes, of the payload of the Echo Requests sent
(Range: 0–65507 bytes).
Default Configuration
The default count is 3 probes.
The default interval is 3 seconds.
The default size is 0 data bytes.
The default port is 33434.
The default initTtl is 1 hop.
The default maxTtl is 30 hops.
The default maxFail is 5 probes.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Examples
The following example discovers the routes that packets will actually take
when traveling to the destination specified in the command.
console#traceroute 192.168.77.171
1692
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1693 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Tracing route over a maximum of 20 hops
1
192.168.21.1
30 ms
10 ms
10 ms
2
*
*
*
3
*
*
*
4
*
*
*
5
*
*
*
The following example uses the iterative process to obtain command
parameters, and displays the routes that packets actually take when traveling
to their destination.
console#traceroute
traceroute# Enter the ip-address | hostname :
192.168.77.171
traceroute# Packet size (default: 40 bytes): 30
traceroute# Max ttl value (default: 20):
10
traceroute# Number of probes to send at each level
(default 3):
traceroute# Timeout (default: 3 seconds): 6
traceroute# Source ip-address (default to select best
interface address):
traceroute# Type of Service byte (default):
Tracing route over a maximum of 20 hops
1 192.168.21.1
30 ms
10 ms
10 ms
2
*
*
*
3
*
*
*
4
*
*
*
5
*
*
*
System Management Commands
1693
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1694 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1694
System Management Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1695 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Telnet Server Commands
81
The Telnet protocol (outlined in RFC 854) allows users (clients) to connect
to multiuser computers (servers) on the network. Telnet is often employed
when a user communicates with a remote login service.
Telnet is the terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP suite. Telnet uses
TCP as the transport protocol to initiate a connection between server and
client. After connecting, the telnet server and client enter a period of option
negotiation that determines the options each side is capable of supporting for
the connection. The connected systems can negotiate new options or
renegotiate old options at any time. In general, each end of the Telnet
connection attempts to implement all options that maximize performance
for the systems involved.
When a Telnet connection is initiated, each side of the connection is
assumed to originate and terminate at a Network Virtual Terminal, or NVT.
Therefore, the server and user hosts do not maintain information about the
characteristics of each other's terminals and terminal-handling conventions.
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
ip telnet server disable
show ip telnet
ip telnet port
ip telnet server disable
The ip telnet server disable command is used to enable/disable the Telnet
service on the switch.
Syntax
ip telnet server disable
no ip telnet server disable
Telnet Server Commands
1695
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1696 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Ranges
Not applicable
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Usage Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Default Value
This feature is enabled by default.
Example
console#configure
console(config)#ip telnet server disable
console(config)# no ip telnet server disable
ip telnet port
The ip telnet port command is used to configure the Telnet service port
number on the switch.
Syntax
ip telnet port port number
•
port number — Telnet service port number (Range: 1–65535)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Usage Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
1696
Telnet Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1697 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
console(config)#ip telnet port 45
console(config)#no ip telnet port
show ip telnet
The show ip telnet command displays the status of the Telnet server and the
Telnet service port number.
Syntax
show ip telnet
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Example
(console)#show ip telnet
Telnet Server is Enabled. Port:23
Telnet Server Commands
1697
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1698 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1698
Telnet Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1699 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Terminal Length Commands
82
This chapter provides information about terminal length commands.
terminal length
Use the terminal length command to set the terminal length. Use the no
form of the command to reset the terminal length to the default.
Syntax
terminal length value
no terminal length
•
value — The length in number of lines. Range: 0–512
Default Configuration
This default value is 24.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
Setting the terminal length to 0 disables paging altogether. It is
recommended that the terminal length either be set to 0 or a value larger than
4 as terminal lengths in the range of 1 to 4 may give odd output due to
prompting. The terminal length command is specific to the current session.
Logging out, rebooting or otherwise ending the current session will require
that the command be re-entered. Likewise, because the terminal length
setting is specific to a session, it is never saved in the config.
Example
console#terminal length 50
Terminal Length Commands
1699
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1700 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1700
Terminal Length Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1701 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Time Ranges Commands
83
Time ranges are used with time-based ACLs to restrict their application due
to specific time slots.
This chapter explains the following commands:
time-range
periodic
absolute
show time-range
time-range
Use the time-range command in Global Configuration mode to create a time
range identified by name, consisting of one absolute time entry and/or one or
more periodic time entries.
If a time range by this name already exists, this command enters Time-Range
Configuration mode to allow updating the time range entries.
Use the no form of this command to delete a time-range identified by name.
Syntax
time-range name
no time-range name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
name
A case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters
uniquely identifying the time range. An alpha-numeric string is
defined as consisting of only alphabetic, numeric, dash,
underscore, or space characters.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Time Ranges Commands
1701
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1702 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
Global Configuration
User Guidelines
The CLI mode changes to Time-Range Configuration mode when you
successfully execute this command.
Example
console(config)#time-range timeRange_1
absolute
Use the absolute command in Time Range Configuration mode to add an
absolute time entry to a time range.
Use the no form of this command to delete the absolute time entry in the
time range.
Syntax
absolute {[start time date] [end time date]}
no absolute
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Start time date
Time and date at which the configuration that referenced the
time range is in effect. The time is expressed in a 24-hour clock,
in the form of hours:minutes. For example, 8:00 is 8:00 am and
20:00 is 8:00 pm. The date is expressed in the format day
month year. If no start time and date are specified, the
configuration statement is in effect immediately.
End time date
Time and date at which the configuration that referenced the
time range is no longer in effect. Same time and date format as
described for the start. The end time and date must be after the
start time and date. If no end time and date are specified, the
configuration statement is in effect indefinitely.
1702
Time Ranges Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1703 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Time Range Configuration
User Guidelines
Only one absolute time entry is allowed per time-range. The time parameter
is referenced to the currently configured time zone.
Example
console#time-range timeRange_1
console(Config-time-range)#absolute end 12:00 16 Dec
2010
periodic
Use the periodic command to add a periodic time entry to a time range. The
time parameter is based off of the currently configured time zone. Use the no
form of this command to delete a periodic time entry from a time-range.
Syntax
periodic {days-of-the-week time} to {[days-of-the-week] time}
no periodic
Time Ranges Commands
1703
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1704 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
days-of-the-week
The first occurrence of this argument is the starting day or days
from which the configuration that referenced the time range
starts going into effect. The second occurrence is the ending
day or days from which the configuration that referenced the
time range is no longer in effect. If the end days-of-the-week are
the same as the start, they can be omitted.
This argument can be any single day or combinations of days:
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday,
Sunday.
Other possible values are:
• daily -- Monday through Sunday
• weekdays -- Monday through Friday
• weekend -- Saturday and Sunday
If the ending days of the week are the same as the starting days
of the week, they can be omitted.
time
The first occurrence of this argument is the starting
hours:minutes which the configuration that referenced the
time range starts going into effect. The second occurrence is
the ending hours:minutes at which the configuration that
referenced the time range is no longer in effect.
The hours:minutes are expressed in a 24-hour clock. For
example, 8:00 is 8:00 am and 20:00 is 8:00 pm.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Time Range Configuration
User Guidelines
Multiple periodic entries can exist in a time range, but periodic time entries
cannot overlap each other. Periodic time entries can also coexist with an
absolute time entry in a time range.
1704
Time Ranges Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1705 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
When both periodic and absolute time entries are specified within a time
range, the periodic time entries limit the time range to only those times
specified within the periodic time range and bounded by the absolute time
range. In this case, the absolute time entry specifies the absolute start and
end dates/times and the periodic entries specify the start/stop times within
the limits of the absolute time entry dates and times.
If a periodic time entry is added to an active time-range with an existing
absolute time entry, the absolute time entry immediately becomes inactive.
For example, an administrator applies a absolute time-range configured for a
week's work hours ( 08/09-08/13 9am to 6pm) and later adds multiple
periodic entries for same days configured individually (Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday) but with after-work hours (9pm to 11pm) .
The administrator wants to permit/deny HTTP traffic for this time-range, but
the entire time-range is invalid due to conflicting entries. The absolute entry
is forced to inactive because the periodic entry time is not yet in effect.
Examples
console#time-range timeRange_2
console(Config-time-range)#periodic monday 00:00 to
tuesday 12:30
console(Config-time-range)#periodic tuesday 13:00 to
wednesday 12:00
console(Config-time-range)#periodic wednesday 12:30
to thursday 20:00
console(Config-time-range)#periodic weekend 18:00 to
20:00
show time-range
Use the show time-range command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a
time range and all the absolute/periodic time entries that are defined for the
time range. The [name] parameter is used to identify a specific time range to
display. When the [name] parameter is not specified, all the time ranges
defined in the system are displayed.
Time Ranges Commands
1705
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1706 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
show time-range [name]
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
Number of Time
Ranges
Number of time ranges configured in the system.
Time Range Name
Name of the time range.
Time Range Status
Status of the time range(active/inactive).
Absolute start
Start time and day for absolute time entry.
Absolute end
End time and day for absolute time entry.
Periodic Entries
Number of periodic entries in a time-range.
Periodic start
Start time and day for periodic entry.
Periodic end
End time and day for periodic entry.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Examples
console#show time-range timeRange_1
Time Range Name................................ timeRange_1
Time Range Status.............................. Inactive
Entry Number: 1
1706
Time Ranges Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1707 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Absolute End Time.............................. 12:00 16
Dec 2010
Periodic Entries: 4
Entry Number: 2
Periodic Start Time............................ MON 00:00
Periodic End Time.............................. TUE 12:30
Entry Number: 3
Periodic Start Time............................ TUE 13:00
Periodic End Time.............................. WED 12:00
Entry Number: 4
Periodic Start Time............................ WED 12:30
Periodic End Time.............................. THU 20:00
Entry Number: 5
Periodic Start Time............................ SUN SAT
18:00
--More-- or (q)uit
Periodic End Time.............................. SUN SAT
20:00
console#show time-range
Current number of all Time Ranges: 5
Time Ranges: 100
Maximum number of all
Time Ranges Commands
1707
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1708 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Periodic
Time Range Name Status
Entry count Absolute Entry
------------------------------
-------- ----------- ------
timeRange_1
Inactive
4
Exists
timeRange_2
Inactive
4
Exists
timeRange_3
Inactive
4
Exists
timeRange_4
Inactive
4
Exists
timeRange_5
Inactive
4
Exists
1708
Time Ranges Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1709 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Interface Commands
84
This chapter explains the following commands:
enable
mode simple
end
mode-change confirm
exit
quit
enable
Use the enable command in User EXEC mode to enter the Privileged EXEC
mode.
Syntax
enable
Default Configuration
The default privilege level is 15.
Command Mode
User EXEC mode
User Guidelines
If there is no authentication method defined for enable, then a level 1 user is
not allowed to execute this command.
Example
The following example shows how to enter privileged mode.
console>enable
console#
User Interface Commands
1709
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1710 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
end
Use the end command to get the CLI user control back to the privileged
execution mode or user execution mode.
Syntax
end
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
All command modes
User Guidelines
No specific guidelines.
Example
console(config)#end
console#end
console>
exit
Use the exit command to go to the next lower command prompt or, in User
EXEC mode, to close an active terminal session by logging off the switch.
Syntax
exit
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
1710
User Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1711 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Command Mode
All command modes. In User EXEC mode, this command behaves identically
with the quit command.
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example changes the configuration mode from Interface
Configuration mode to User EXEC mode to the login prompt.
console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)# exit
console(config)# exit
console#exit
console>exit
User:
mode simple
NOTE: The PCM8024-k switch defaults from the factory in Simple Mode of operation.
Use the mode simple command to select the Simple Mode as the start up
mode. To select Normal Mode as the operational mode, use the no form of
this command.
Syntax
mode simple
no mode simple
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Interface Commands
1711
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1712 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
The selected mode is valid if mode-change confirm is executed within 60
seconds. The selected mode is applied as operational mode on resetting the
configuration to factory defaults.
Example
console(config)#mode simple
Warning: Confirm mode selection within 60 seconds
using “mode-change confirm” command.
mode-change confirm
Use the mode-change confirm command to confirm the mode selection.
Syntax
mode-change confirm
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command must be executed within 60 seconds of executing the mode
simple or no mode simple command. The selected mode is applied as
operational mode.
Example
console(config)#mode-change confirm
quit
Use the quit command in User EXEC mode to close an active terminal
session by logging off the switch.
1712
User Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1713 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
quit
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC command mode
User Guidelines
There are no user guidelines for this command.
Example
The following example closes an active terminal session.
console>quit
User Interface Commands
1713
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1714 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1714
User Interface Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1715 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Web Server Commands
85
If enabled, the PowerConnect is manageable via industry standard web
browsers. User privilege levels are the same as for the CLI. Over 95% of the
management functions are available via the web interface, including
configuration and firmware upgrades.
Web Sessions
The HTTP protocol does not provide support for persistent connections.
Connections are constantly made and broken so there is no way to know who
is accessing the web interface or for how long they are doing so. Additionally,
with the use of basic authentication the user authorization is handled by the
client browser. This means that once entered, the user name and password are
cached in the browser and given to the server on request. Effectively, once a
user logs in to the switch, they have access until the browser closes, even
across reboots of the switch. This poses a security threat.
The Web Sessions feature makes use of cookies to control web connections,
sessions. Cookies must be enabled on the browser. The Set-Cookie directive is
sent only once at initiation of the session. With the introduction of Web
Sessions the client connections can be monitored and controlled. Web
Sessions put the authentication control in the PowerConnect instead of the
client browser resulting in a more efficient implementation that allows web
access while using Radius or TACACS+ for authentication.
The web login is implemented in the login page itself instead of a client
browser popup. Additionally, there is a logout button, always present on the
web interface. There are various commands that have been modified or added
to support Web Sessions. Similarly there are modifications to some of the
web pages. Support of SNMP configuration for Web Sessions is also available.
When the authentication method set for web login authentication is set to
TACACS+, the exec shell configuration on the TACACS+ server is used to
determine user permissions (read-only or read/ write). If the configured value
on the server is 15, the user is given read-write permissions. Any other value is
read-only. If exec shell feature is not enabled on the server, the user is given
read-only permissions.
Web Server Commands
1715
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1716 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Commands in this Chapter
This chapter explains the following commands:
common-name
ip http secure-port
country
ip http secure-server
crypto certificate generate
key-generate
crypto certificate import
location
crypto certificate request
organization-unit
duration
show crypto certificate mycertificate
ip http port
show ip http server status
ip http server
show ip http server secure status
ip http secure-certificate
state
common-name
Use the common-name command in Crypto Certificate Generation or
Crypto Certificate Request mode to specify the common-name for the
switch.
Syntax
common-name common-name
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
common-name
Specifies the fully qualified URL or IP address of the switch. If
left unspecified, this parameter defaults to the lowest IP
address of the switch (when the certificate is generated).
(Range: 1–64)
1716
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1717 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Crypto Certification mode
User Guidelines
This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate request or crypto
certificate generate command.
Example
The following example displays how to specify the name of "router.gm.com."
console(config-crypto-cert)#common-name router.gm.com
country
Use the country command in Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto
Certificate Request mode to specify the country.
Syntax
country country
•
country — Specifies the country name. (Range: 2 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto Certificate Request mode
User Guidelines
This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate request or crypto
certificate generate command.
Web Server Commands
1717
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1718 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example displays how to specify the country as "us."
console(config-crypto-cert)#country us
crypto certificate generate
Use the crypto certificate generate command in Global Configuration mode
to generate a self-signed HTTPS certificate.
Syntax
crypto certificate number generate
•
number — Specifies the certificate number. (Range: 1–2)
•
generate — Regenerates the SSL RSA key.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command is not saved in the router switch configuration; however, the
certificate and keys generated by this command are saved in the private
configuration. This saved information is never displayed to the user or backed
up to another switch. If the RSA keys do not exist, the generate parameter
must be used. To save the generated certificate and keys on the local switch
and distribute the certificate across a stack, save the configuration.
Otherwise, the certificate and keys will not be available after the next reboot.
Example
The following example generates a self-signed HTTPS certificate.
console(config-crypto-cert)#common-name DELL
console(config-crypto-cert)#country USA
console(config-crypto-cert)#Duration 3650
1718
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1719 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
console(config-crypto-cert)#email no-reply@dell.com
console(config-crypto-cert)#location Round Rock
console(config)#crypto certificate 1 generate
console(config-crypto-cert)#organization-unit
"PowerConnect Networking"
console(config-crypto-cert)#organization-name "Dell,
Inc."
console(config-crypto-cert)#state TX
console(config-crypto-cert)#key-generate
console(config-crypto-cert)#ex
console(config)#ex
crypto certificate import
Use the crypto certificate import command in Global Configuration mode to
import a certificate signed by the Certification Authority for HTTPS.
Syntax
crypto certificate number import
•
number — Specifies the certificate number. (Range: 1–2)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
Use this command to enter an external certificate (signed by the Certification
Authority) to the switch. To end the session, add a period (.) on a separate
line after the input, and press ENTER.
Web Server Commands
1719
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1720 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
The imported certificate must be based on a certificate request created by the
crypto certificate request Privileged EXEC command.
If the public key found in the certificate does not match the switch's SSL RSA
key, the command fails.
This command is not saved in the router configuration; however, the
certificate imported by this command is saved in the private configuration
(which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another switch).
Example
The following example imports a certificate sighed by the Certification
Authority for HTTPS.
console(config)#crypto certificate 1 import
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----dHmUgUm9vdCBDZXJ0aWZpZXIwXDANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAANLADBI
AkEAp4HS
nnH/xQSGA2ffkRBwU2XIxb7n8VPsTm1xyJ1t11a1GaqchfMqqe0km
fhcoHSWr
yf1FpD0MWOTgDAwIDAQABo4IBojCCAZ4wEwYJKwYBBAGCNxQCBAYe
BABDAEEw
CwR0PBAQDAgFGMA8GA1UdEwEB/wQFMAMBAf8wHQYDVR0OBBYEFAf4
MT9BRD47
ZvKBAEL9Ggp+6MIIBNgYDVR0fBIIBLTCCASkwgdKggc+ggcyGgcls
ZGFwOi8v
L0VByb3h5JTIwU29mdHdhcmUlMjBSb290JTIwQ2VydGlmaWVyLENO
PXNlcnZl
-----END CERTIFICATE----Certificate imported successfully.
Issued to: router.gm.com
Issued by: www.verisign.com
Valid from: 8/9/2005
to 8/9/2005
Subject: CN= router.gm.com, 0= General Motors, C= US
1720
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1721 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Finger print: DC789788 DC88A988 127897BC BB789788
crypto certificate request
Use the crypto certificate request command in Privileged EXEC mode to
generate and display a certificate request for HTTPS. This command takes
you to Crypto Certificate Request mode.
Syntax
crypto certificate number request
•
number — Specifies the certificate number. (Range: 1–2)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
User Guidelines
Use this command to export a certificate request to a Certification Authority.
The certificate request is generated in Base64-encoded X.509 format.
Before generating a certificate request, you must first generate a self-signed
certificate using the crypto certificate generate command in Global
Configuration mode in order to generate the keys. Make sure to re-enter
values in the certificate fields.
After receiving the certificate from the Certification Authority, use the crypto
certificate import command in Global Configuration mode to import the
certificate into the switch. This certificate replaces the self-signed certificate.
Example
The following example generates and displays a certificate request for
HTTPS.
console#crypto certificate 1 request
console(config-crypto-cert)#
Web Server Commands
1721
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1722 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
duration
Use the duration command in Crypto Certificate Generation mode to specify
the duration.
Syntax
duration days
•
days — Specifies the number of days a certification would be valid. If left
unspecified, the parameter defaults to 365 days. (Range: 30–3650 days)
Default Configuration
This command defaults to 365 days.
Command Mode
Crypto Certificate Generation mode
User Guidelines
This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate generate
command.
Example
The following example displays how specify a duration of 50 days that a
certification is valid.
console(config-crypto-cert)#duration 50
ip http port
Use the ip http port command in Global Configuration mode to specify the
TCP port for use by a web browser to configure the switch. To use the default
TCP port, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip http port port-number
no ip http port
1722
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1723 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
•
port-number — Port number for use by the HTTP server. (Range:
1–65535)
Default Configuration
This default port number is 80.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines. However, specifying 0 as the port
number effectively disables HTTP access to the switch.
Example
The following example shows how the http port number is configured to 100.
console(config)#ip http port 100
ip http server
Use the ip http server command in Global Configuration mode to enable the
switch to be configured, monitored, or modified from a browser. To disable
this function use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip http server
no ip http server
Default Configuration
The default mode is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Web Server Commands
1723
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1724 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example enables the switch to be configured from a browser.
console(config)#ip http server
ip http secure-certificate
Use the ip http secure-certificate command in Global Configuration mode to
configure the active certificate for HTTPS. To return to the default setting,
use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip http secure-certificate number
no ip http secure-certificate
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
number
Specifies the certificate number. (Range: 1–2)
Default Configuration
The default value of the certificate number is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
The HTTPS certificate is generated using the crypto certificate generate
command in Global Configuration mode.
Example
The following example configures the active certificate for HTTPS.
console(config)#ip http secure-certificate 1
1724
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1725 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip http secure-port
Use the ip http secure-port command in Global Configuration mode to
configure a TCP port for use by a secure web browser to configure the switch.
To use the default port, use the no form of this command.
Syntax
ip http secure-port port-number
no ip http secure-port
Parameter Description
Parameter
Description
port-number
Port number for use by the secure HTTP server. (Range:
1–65535)
Default Configuration
This default port number is 443.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example configures the https port number to 100.
console(config)#ip http secure–port 2
ip http secure-server
Use the ip http secure-server command in Global Configuration mode to
enable the switch to be configured, monitored, or modified securely from a
browser. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
Web Server Commands
1725
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1726 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Syntax
ip http secure-server
no ip http secure-server
Default Configuration
The default for the switch is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode
User Guidelines
You must import a certificate using the crypto certificate import command,
followed by the crypto certificate generate command.
Example
The following example enables the switch to be configured from a browser.
console(config)#ip http secure-server
key-generate
Use the key-generate command in Crypto Certificate Generation mode to
specify the key-generate.
Syntax
key-generate [length]
•
length — Specifies the length of the SSL RSA key. If left unspecified, this
parameter defaults to 1024. (Range: 512–2048)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Crypto Certificate Generation mode
1726
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1727 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
User Guidelines
This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate request
command.
Example
The following example displays how to specify that you want to regenerate
the SSL RSA key 1024 byes in length.
console(config-crypto-cert)#key-generate 1024
location
Use the location command in Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto
Certificate Request mode to specify the location or city name.
Syntax
location location
•
location — Specifies the location or city name. (Range: 1–64 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto Certificate Request mode
User Guidelines
This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate request or crypto
certificate generate command.
Example
The following example displays how to specify the city location of "austin."
console(config-crypto-cert)#location austin
Web Server Commands
1727
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1728 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
organization-unit
Use the organization-unit command in Crypto Certificate Generation or
Crypto Certificate Request mode to specify the organization unit.
Syntax
organization-unit organization-unit
•
organization-unit — Specifies the organization-unit or department name.
(Range: 1–64 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto Certificate Request mode
User Guidelines
This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate request or crypto
certificate generate command.
Example
The following example displays how to specify the "generalmotors"
organization-unit.
console(config-crypto-cert)#organization-unit
generalmotors
show crypto certificate mycertificate
Use the show crypto certificate mycertificate command in Privileged EXEC
mode to view the SSL certificates of your switch.
Syntax
show crypto certificate mycertificate [number]
•
1728
number — Specifies the certificate number. (Range: 1–2 digits)
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1729 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Example
The following example displays the SSL certificate of a sample switch.
console#show crypto certificate mycertificate 1
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----dHmUgUm9vdCBDZXJ0aWZpZXIwXDANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAANLADBI
AkEAp4HS
NnH/xQSGA2ffkRBwU2XIxb7n8VPsTm1xyJ1t11a1GaqchfMqqe0km
fhcoHSWr
yf1FpD0MWOTgDAwIDAQABo4IBojCCAZ4wEwYJKwYBBAGCNxQCBAYe
BABDAEEw
CwR0PBAQDAgFGMA8GA1UdEwEB/wQFMAMBAf8wHQYDVR0OBBYEFAf4
MT9BRD47
ZvKBAEL9Ggp+6MIIBNgYDVR0fBIIBLTCCASkwgdKggc+ggcyGgcls
ZGFwOi8v
L0VByb3h5JTIwU29mdHdhcmUlMjBSb290JTIwQ2VydGlmaWVyLENO
PXNlcnZl
-----END CERTIFICATE----Issued by: www.verisign.com
Valid from: 8/9/2003 to 8/9/2004
Subject: CN= router.gm.com, 0= General Motors, C= US
Finger print: DC789788 DC88A988 127897BC BB789788
Web Server Commands
1729
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1730 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip http server status
Use the show ip http server command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC
mode to display the HTTP server status information.
Syntax
show ip http server status
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays the HTTP server configuration.
console#show ip http server status
HTTP server enabled. Port: 80
show ip http server secure status
Use the show ip http server secure status command in User EXEC or
Privileged EXEC mode to display the HTTP secure server status information.
Syntax
show ip http server secure status
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
1730
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1731 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes
User Guidelines
This command has no user guidelines.
Example
The following example displays an HTTPS server configuration with DH Key
exchange enabled.
console#show ip https
HTTPS server enabled. Port: 443
DH Key exchange enabled.
Certificate 1 is active
Issued by: www.verisign.com
Valid from: 8/9/2003 to 8/9/2004
Subject: CN= router.gm.com, 0= General Motors, C= US
Finger print: DC789788 DC88A988 127897BC BB789788
Certificate 2 is inactive
Issued by: self-signed
Valid from: 8/9/2003 to 8/9/2004
Subject: CN= router.gm.com, 0= General Motors, C= US
Finger print: 1873B936 88DC3411 BC8932EF 782134BA
The following example displays the HTTPS server configuration with DH Key
exchange disabled.
console#show ip https
HTTPS server enabled. Port: 443
Web Server Commands
1731
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1732 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
DH Key exchange disabled, parameters are being
generated.
Certificate 1 is active
Issued by: www.verisign.com
Valid from: 8/9/2003 to 8/9/2004
Subject: CN= router.gm.com, 0= General Motors, C= US
Finger print: DC789788 DC88A988 127897BC BB789788
Certificate 2 is inactive
Issued by: self-signed
Valid from: 8/9/2003 to 8/9/2004
Subject: CN= router.gm.com, 0= General Motors, C= US
Finger print: 1873B936 88DC3411 BC8932EF 782134BA
state
Use the state command in Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto
Certificate Request mode to specify the state or province name.
Syntax
state state
• state — Specifies the state or province name. (Range: 1–64 characters)
Default Configuration
This command has no default configuration.
Command Mode
Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto Certificate Request mode
User Guidelines
This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate request or crypto
certificate generate command.
1732
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1733 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Example
The following example shows how to specify the state of "texas."
console(config-crypto-cert)#state texas
Web Server Commands
1733
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1734 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1734
Web Server Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1735 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Appendix A: List of Commands
{deny | permit} (IPv6 ACL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
802.1x Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
802.1x Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
802.1x Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
802.1x Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
802.1x Option 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
aaa accounting network default start-stop group radius. . . . . 695
aaa authentication dot1x default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
aaa authentication enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
aaa authentication login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
aaa authorization network default radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
AAA Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
aaa ias-user username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
aaa new-model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
acct-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
ACL Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
add ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
add gigabitethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
add port-channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
add tengigabitethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Address Table Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Appendix A: List of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735
area default-cost (Router OSPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
area default-cost (Router OSPFv3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
area nssa (Router OSPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
area nssa (Router OSPFv3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Appendix A: List of Commands
1735
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1736 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
area nssa default-info-originate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
area nssa default-info-originate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
area nssa no-redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
area nssa no-redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
area nssa no-summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
area nssa no-summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
area nssa translator-role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
area nssa translator-role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
area nssa translator-stab-intv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
area nssa translator-stab-intv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
area range (Router OSPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
area range (Router OSPFv3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
area stub no-summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
area stub no-summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
area stub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
area stub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
area virtual-link authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
area virtual-link dead-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
area virtual-link dead-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
area virtual-link hello-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
area virtual-link hello-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
area virtual-link retransmit-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
area virtual-link retransmit-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
area virtual-link transmit-delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
area virtual-link transmit-delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
area virtual-link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
area virtual-link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
arp access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
ARP Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
arp cachesize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
ARP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
arp dynamicrenew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
arp purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
1736
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1737 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
arp resptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
arp retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
arp timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
asset-tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
assign-queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
authentication timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
auth-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
auto-cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Auto-Install Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
auto-summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
Auto-VoIP Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
bandwidth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
banner exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
banner login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
banner motd acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
banner motd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
boot auto-copy-sw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
boot host autoreboot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
boot host autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
boot host dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
boot host retrycount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
boot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
bootfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
bootpdhcprelay minwaittime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
capability opaque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
Captive Portal Client Connection Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
Captive Portal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Captive Portal Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Captive Portal Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
Appendix A: List of Commands
1737
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1738 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Captive Portal Local User Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Captive Portal Status Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
Captive Portal User Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
captive-portal client deauthenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
captive-portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
CDP Interoperability Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Class of Service (CoS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
class-map rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
class-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
classofservice dot1p-mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
classofservice ip-dscp-mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
classofservice trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
clear (IAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
clear arp-cache management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
clear arp-cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
clear captive-portal users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
clear checkpoint statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
clear config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
clear counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
clear dhcp l2relay statistics interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
clear dot1x authentication–history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
clear fip-snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
clear gvrp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
clear host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
clear ip address-conflict-detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
clear ip arp inspection statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
clear ip dhcp binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
clear ip dhcp conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
clear ip dhcp snooping binding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
clear ip dhcp snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
clear ip helper statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
1738
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1739 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
clear ip ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
clear ipv6 dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
clear ipv6 neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
clear ipv6 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
clear isdp counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
clear isdp table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
clear lldp remote-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
clear lldp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
clear logging email statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
clear logging file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
clear logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
clear mac address-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
clear priority-flow-control statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
CLI Command Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
CLI Logged to Local File and Syslog Server . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
CLI Macro Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
client-identifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
client-name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Clock Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
clock summer-time date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
clock summer-time recurring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
clock timezone hours-offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
Command Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Command Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands . . . . . 1435
Command Line Interface Scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
common-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
compatible rfc1583 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Configurable Minimum Password Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
Configuration and Image File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
configure terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
Appendix A: List of Commands
1739
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1740 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
conform-color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
cos-queue min-bandwidth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
cos-queue random-detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
cos-queue strict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717
crypto certificate generate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
crypto certificate import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719
crypto certificate request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
crypto key generate dsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
crypto key generate rsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
crypto key pubkey-chain ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
cut-through mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
Data Center Bridging Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Data Center Technology Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Data Center Technology Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
datacenter-bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
deadtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
debug arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
debug auto-voip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
debug cfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
debug clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
debug console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
debug dhcp packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
debug dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
debug igmpsnooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
debug ip acl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
debug ip dvmrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
debug ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
debug ip mcache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
debug ip pimdm packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547
debug ip pimsm packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1548
1740
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1741 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
debug ip vrrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1548
debug ipv6 dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
debug ipv6 mcache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550
debug ipv6 mld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550
debug ipv6 pimdm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
debug ipv6 pimsm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552
debug isdp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553
debug lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
debug mldsnooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
debug ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
debug ospfv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556
debug ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556
debug rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
debug sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
debug spanning-tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
debug vrrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Default Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
default-information originate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
default-information originate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
default-information originate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
default-metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
default-metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260
default-metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
default-router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
delete backup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
delete backup-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
delete startup-config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
Denial of Service Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
deny (management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
deny | permit (IP ACL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
deny | permit (Mac-Access-List-Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . 276
depends-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Appendix A: List of Commands
1741
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1742 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
dhcp l2relay (Global Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
dhcp l2relay (Interface Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
dhcp l2relay circuit-id. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
dhcp l2relay remote-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
dhcp l2relay trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
dhcp l2relay vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
DHCP Management Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
DHCP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
DHCPv6 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
diffserv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
distance ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
distance ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
distance rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
distribute-list out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
distribute-list out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
dns-server (IP DHCP Pool Config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
dns-server (IPv6 DHCP Pool Config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
domain-name (IP DHCP Pool Config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
domain-name (IPv6 DHCP Pool Config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
dos-control firstfrag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
dos-control icmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
dos-control l4port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
dos-control sipdip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
dos-control tcpflag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468
dos-control tcpfrag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468
dot1x dynamic-vlan enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
dot1x guest-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
1742
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1743 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
dot1x initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
dot1x mac-auth-bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
dot1x max-req . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
dot1x max-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
dot1x port-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
dot1x re-authenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
dot1x reauthentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
dot1x system-auth-control monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
dot1x timeout quiet-period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
dot1x timeout re-authperiod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
dot1x timeout server-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
dot1x timeout supp-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
dot1x timeout tx-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
dot1x unauth-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Double VLAN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
duplex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
duplex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
dvlan-tunnel ethertype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
DVMRP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Email Alerting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
enable authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
enable password encrypted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
enable password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
Appendix A: List of Commands
1743
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1744 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
end. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
Enhanced LAG Hashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Entering and Editing CLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
ethernet cfm cc level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Ethernet CFM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
ethernet cfm domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
ethernet cfm mep active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
ethernet cfm mep enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
ethernet cfm mep level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
ethernet cfm mip level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Ethernet Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
exec-banner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
exec-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
exit (mst). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
exit-overflow-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
exit-overflow-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
external-lsdb-limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
external-lsdb-limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
feature fip-snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
File System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
filedescr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
FIP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
fip-snooping enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
fip-snooping fc-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
fip-snooping port-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Flexible Assignment of Ports to LAGs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
flowcontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Forwarding of OSPF Opaque LSAs Enabled by Default . . . 1167
garp timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
1744
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1745 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
GMRP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
gmrp enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Graceful Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
Guest VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
GVRP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
gvrp enable (global) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
gvrp enable (interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
gvrp registration-forbid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
gvrp vlan-creation-forbid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
hardware-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
hashing-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
history size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
hostroutesaccept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
http port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
https port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
IGMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
IGMP Proxy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
IGMP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
IGMP Snooping Querier Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Independent VLAN Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
initiate failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
instance (mst) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
interface loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
interface out-of-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
interface port-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
interface range port-channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
interface range vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
interface range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Interface Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Appendix A: List of Commands
1745
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1746 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
interface tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
interface vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Interoperability with IEEE DCBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ip access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
ip address (Out-of-Band) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
ip address {dhcp/bootp} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
ip address dhcp (Interface Config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
ip address none . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
ip address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
ip address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
ip address-conflict-detect run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
IP Addressing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
ip arp inspection filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
ip arp inspection limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
ip arp inspection trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
ip arp inspection validate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
ip arp inspection vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
ip default-gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
ip dhcp bootp automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
ip dhcp conflict logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
ip dhcp excluded-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
ip dhcp ping packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
ip dhcp pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
ip dhcp relay information check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
ip dhcp relay information check-reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
ip dhcp relay information option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
ip dhcp relay information option-insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
ip dhcp snooping binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
ip dhcp snooping database write-delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
1746
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1747 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip dhcp snooping database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
ip dhcp snooping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
ip dhcp snooping log-invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
ip dhcp snooping trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
ip dhcp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
ip domain-lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
ip domain-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
ip dvmrp metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
ip dvmrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
ip helper enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
ip helper-address (global configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
ip helper-address (interface configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
ip host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
ip http authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
ip http port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
ip http secure-certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724
ip http secure-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725
ip http secure-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725
ip http server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
ip https authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
ip icmp echo-reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
ip icmp error-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
ip igmp last-member-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
ip igmp last-member-query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
ip igmp query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
ip igmp query-max-response-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
ip igmp robustness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
ip igmp router-alert-optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
ip igmp snooping (global) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
ip igmp snooping (interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
ip igmp snooping (VLAN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Appendix A: List of Commands
1747
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1748 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip igmp snooping fast-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
ip igmp snooping groupmembership-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
ip igmp snooping host-time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
ip igmp snooping leave-time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
ip igmp snooping maxresponse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
ip igmp snooping mcrtrexpiretime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
ip igmp snooping querier election participate . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
ip igmp snooping querier query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
ip igmp snooping querier version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
ip igmp snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
ip igmp startup-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
ip igmp startup-query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
ip igmp version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
ip igmp-proxy reset-status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
ip igmp-proxy unsolicited-report-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
ip igmp-proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
ip irdp address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
ip irdp holdtime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
ip irdp maxadvertinterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
ip irdp minadvertinterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
ip irdp multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
ip irdp preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
ip irdp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
ip local-proxy-arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
ip mcast boundary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
ip mroute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
ip mtu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
ip multicast ttl-threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
ip multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
ip name-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
1748
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1749 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ip netdirbcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
ip ospf area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
ip ospf authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198
ip ospf cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
ip ospf dead-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
ip ospf hello-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
ip ospf mtu-ignore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
ip ospf network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
ip ospf priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
ip ospf retransmit-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
ip ospf transmit-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
ip pim bsr-border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
ip pim bsr-candidate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
ip pim dense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
ip pim dr-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
ip pim hello-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
ip pim join-prune-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
ip pim register-rate-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
ip pim rp-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
ip pim rp-candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
ip pim sparse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
ip pim spt-threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
ip pim ssm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
ip pim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
ip proxy-arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
ip redirects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
ip rip authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
ip rip receive version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
ip rip send version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
ip rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
ip route default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
ip route distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
ip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
Appendix A: List of Commands
1749
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1750 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
IP Routing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
ip routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
IP Source Guard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
ip ssh port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
ip ssh pubkey-auth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
ip ssh server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
IP Subnet Based VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
ip telnet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
ip telnet server disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695
ip unreachables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
ip verify binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
ip verify source port-security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
ip verify source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
ip vrrp accept-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
ip vrrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
IPv6 Access List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
ipv6 access-list rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
ipv6 access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
ipv6 address (Interface Config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
ipv6 address (OOB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
ipv6 address dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
ipv6 address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
ipv6 dhcp pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
ipv6 dhcp relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
ipv6 dhcp server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
ipv6 enable (Interface Config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
ipv6 enable (OOB Config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
ipv6 enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
ipv6 gateway (OOB Config). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
ipv6 hop-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
ipv6 host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
ipv6 icmp error-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
IPv6 Limitations & Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
1750
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1751 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 mld last-member-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
ipv6 mld query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
ipv6 mld query-max-response-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
ipv6 mld router. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
ipv6 mld snooping (Global) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
ipv6 mld snooping (Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
ipv6 mld snooping (VLAN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
ipv6 mld snooping groupmembership-interval . . . . . . . . . . . 525
ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
ipv6 mld snooping mcrtexpiretime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
ipv6 mld snooping querier (VLAN mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
ipv6 mld snooping querier address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
ipv6 mld snooping querier election participate . . . . . . . . . . . 538
ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
ipv6 mld snooping querier timer expiry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
ipv6 mld snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
ipv6 mld-proxy reset-status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
ipv6 mld-proxy unsolicit-rprt-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
ipv6 mld-proxy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
ipv6 mtu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
IPv6 Multicast Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
ipv6 nd dad attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
ipv6 nd managed-config-flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
ipv6 nd ns-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
ipv6 nd other-config-flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
ipv6 nd prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
ipv6 nd ra-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
ipv6 nd reachable-time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
Appendix A: List of Commands
1751
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1752 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 nd suppress-ra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf dead-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf hello-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf transmit-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim bsr-border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 PIM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim dense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim dr-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim hello-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim join-prune-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim register-rate-limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim rp-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim rp-candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim sparse (Global config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim spt-threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim ssm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pimsm (Global config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pimsm (VLAN Interface config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pimsm bsr-border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pimsm dr-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pimsm hello-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pimsm join-prune-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ipv6 pimsm register-threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1752
Appendix A: List of Commands
1081
1265
1266
1267
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1264
1043
1044
1041
1042
1045
1046
1046
1047
1048
1049
1042
1050
1051
1041
1149
1150
1150
1151
1152
1153
1153
1154
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1753 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
ipv6 pimsm rp-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
ipv6 pimsm ssm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
ipv6 route distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
ipv6 router ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272
IPv6 Routing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
ipv6 traffic-filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
ipv6 unicast-routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
ipv6 unreachables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
iscsi aging time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
iscsi cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
iscsi enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
iSCSI Optimization Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
iscsi target port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
isdp advertise-v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
isdp enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
isdp holdtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
isdp timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
key-generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726
key-string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
lacp auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
lacp off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
lacp port-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
lacp static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
lacp system-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
lacp timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
LAG Hashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
LAG Thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Layer 2 ACLs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Appendix A: List of Commands
1753
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1754 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Layer 2 Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Layer 2 Switching Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Layer 3 Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Layer 3 Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Layer 3/4 IPv4 ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
lease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
Link Dependency Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
link-dependency group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
LLDP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
lldp dcbx port-role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
lldp dcbx version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
lldp notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
lldp notification-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
lldp receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
lldp timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
lldp tlv-select dcbxp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
lldp transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
lldp transmit-mgmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
lldp transmit-tlv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Local 802.1X Authentication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
logging audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
logging buffered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
logging cli-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
logging console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
logging email from-addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
logging email logtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
logging email message-type subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
logging email message-type to-addr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
1754
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1755 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
logging email test message-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
logging email urgent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
logging email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
logging file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
logging snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
logging traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
logging web-session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
login authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
login-banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
Loopback Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
mac access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
mac access-list extended rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
mac access-list extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
mac address-table aging-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
mac address-table multicast filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
mac address-table multicast forbidden address . . . . . . . . . . . 291
mac address-table multicast forbidden forward-unregistered 292
mac address-table multicast forward-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
mac address-table multicast forward-unregistered . . . . . . . . 294
mac address-table multicast static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
mac address-table static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
MAC Authentication Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
MAC-Based VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
macro apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
macro description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
macro global apply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
macro global description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
macro global trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
macro name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
macro trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
mail-server ip-address | hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Appendix A: List of Commands
1755
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1756 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
management access-class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
management access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Management ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Manual Aggregation of LAGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Manual Aggregation of LAGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
mark cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
mark ip-dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
mark ip-precedence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
match class-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
match cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
match destination-address mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
match dstip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
match dstip6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
match dstl4port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
match ethertype. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
match ip dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
match ip precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
match ip tos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
match ip6flowlbl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
match protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
match source-address mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
match srcip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
match srcip6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
match srcl4port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
match vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
maximum-paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
maximum-paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
minimum active uplinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
mode dvlan-tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
mode simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
1756
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1757 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Mode Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
mode-change confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
monitor session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
motd-banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
msgauth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
mtu disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
mtu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Multicast Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
mvr group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
mvr immediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
mvr mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
mvr querytime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
mvr type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
mvr vlan group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
mvr vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
mvr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
name (Captive Portal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
name (mst) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
name (RADIUS server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
name (VLAN Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
netbios-name-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
netbios-node-type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
network area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
next-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
no clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
no clock timezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
no lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
no user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
nsf helper strict-lsa-checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Appendix A: List of Commands
1757
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1758 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
nsf helper strict-lsa-checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
nsf helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
nsf helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
nsf restart-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
nsf restart-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
nsf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
nsf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
nsf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
organization-unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
OSPF Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
OSPF Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
OSPFv3 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
Passive Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
passive-interface default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
passive-interface default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278
passive-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
passive-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
password (aaa IAS User Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
password (Line Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
password (Mail Server Configuration Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
password (User EXEC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Password Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
Password History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
Password Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
Password Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492
passwords aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
passwords history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
passwords lock-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
passwords min-length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
passwords strength exclude-keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504
passwords strength max-limit consecutive-characters . . . . . 1501
passwords strength max-limit repeated-characters . . . . . . . . 1502
1758
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1759 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
passwords strength minimum character-classes . . . . . . . . . 1503
passwords strength minimum lowercase-letters . . . . . . . . . 1499
passwords strength minimum numeric-characters. . . . . . . . 1500
passwords strength minimum special-characters. . . . . . . . . 1501
passwords strength minimum uppercase-letters . . . . . . . . . 1498
passwords strength-check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
PCM6220 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703
permit (management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
permit ip host mac host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
PHY Diagnostics Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
ping ethernet cfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
ping ipv6 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
ping ipv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
Pingable VRRP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Pingable VRRP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
police-simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
policy-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
port (Mail Server Configuration Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Port Aggregator Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Port Channel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Port Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Port Monitor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Port Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
port security max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
port security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
port-aggregator group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
port-channel min-links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
prefix-delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
primary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Appendix A: List of Commands
1759
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1760 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Priority Flow Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
priority-flow-control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
priority-flow-control priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Protocol Based VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
protocol group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
protocol vlan group all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
protocol vlan group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
QoS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Queue Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
RADIUS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
RADIUS-based Dynamic VLAN Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
radius-server attribute 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
radius-server deadtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
radius-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
radius-server key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
radius-server retransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
radius-server source-ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
radius-server timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Real-time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
redirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
redirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
redirect-url . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
release dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
rename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
renew dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
1760
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1761 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
retransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
revision (mst) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
rmon alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513
rmon collection history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516
RMON Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513
rmon event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517
Route Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Route Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Router Discovery Protocol Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
router ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
router rip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
router-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
router-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
Routing Information Protocol Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
script apply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
script delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
script list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
script show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
script validate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
sdm prefer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
SDM Templates Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
service dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
service dhcpv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
service-acl input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
service-policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
session-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
set description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
Setting Up FIP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Sflow Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Appendix A: List of Commands
1761
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1762 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
sflow destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
sflow polling (Interface Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1564
sflow polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563
sflow sampling (Interface Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
sflow sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
show aaa ias-users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
show aaa servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
show arp access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
show arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
show authentication methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
show auto-copy-sw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
show backup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
show banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651
show boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
show bootvar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
show boot-version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
show bridge address-table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
show bridge multicast address-table count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
show captive-portal client status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
show captive-portal configuration client status . . . . . . . . . . 1389
show captive-portal configuration interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
show captive-portal configuration locales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
show captive-portal configuration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
show captive-portal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
show captive-portal interface client status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
show captive-portal interface configuration status . . . . . . . . 1392
show captive-portal status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
show captive-portal user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
show captive-portal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
show checkpoint statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
show class-map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
show classofservice dot1p-mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
1762
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1763 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show classofservice trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
show clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
show copper-ports tdr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
show crypto certificate mycertificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
show crypto key mypubkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608
show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
show cut-through mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
show debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
show dhcp l2relay agent-option vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
show dhcp l2relay all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
show dhcp l2relay circuit-id vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
show dhcp l2relay interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
show dhcp l2relay remote-id vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
show dhcp l2relay stats interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
show dhcp l2relay subscription interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
show dhcp l2relay vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
show dhcp lease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
show diffserv service brief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
show diffserv service interface port-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
show diffserv service interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
show diffserv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
show dos-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
show dot1x advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
show dot1x authentication-history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
show dot1x clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
show dot1x interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
show dot1x statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
show dot1x users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
show dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
show dvlan-tunnel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
show dvlan-tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
show ethernet cfm domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
show ethernet cfm errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Appendix A: List of Commands
1763
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1764 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote . . . . . . . . . . . 450
show ethernet cfm statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
show fiber-ports optical-transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
show fip-snooping enode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
show fip-snooping fcf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
show fip-snooping sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
show fip-snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
show fip-snooping vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
show fip-snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
show gmrp configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
show gvrp configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
show gvrp error-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
show gvrp statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
show hosts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
show interfaces advanced firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
show interfaces advertise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
show interfaces configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
show interfaces cos-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
show interfaces counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
show interfaces description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
show interfaces detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
show interfaces loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
show interfaces port-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
show interfaces priority-flow-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
show interfaces random-detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
show interfaces status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
show interfaces switchport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
show interfaces tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
show ip access-lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
show ip address-conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
show ip arp inspection vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
show ip arp inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
1764
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1765 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
show ip dhcp binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
show ip dhcp conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
show ip dhcp global configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
show ip dhcp pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
show ip dhcp relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
show ip dhcp server statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
show ip dhcp snooping binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
show ip dhcp snooping database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
show ip dhcp snooping interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
show ip dhcp snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
show ip dhcp snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
show ip dvmrp interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
show ip dvmrp neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
show ip dvmrp nexthop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
show ip dvmrp prune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
show ip dvmrp route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
show ip dvmrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
show ip helper statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
show ip helper-address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
show ip helper-address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
show ip http server secure status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
show ip http server status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
show ip igmp groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
show ip igmp interface stats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
show ip igmp interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
show ip igmp membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
show ip igmp snooping groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
show ip igmp snooping interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
show ip igmp snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
show ip igmp snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
show ip igmp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
show ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Appendix A: List of Commands
1765
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1766 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip igmp-proxy groups detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
show ip igmp-proxy groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
show ip igmp-proxy interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
show ip igmp-proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
show ip interface out-of-band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
show ip interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
show ip irdp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
show ip mcast boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
show ip mcast mroute group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
show ip mcast mroute source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
show ip mcast mroute static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
show ip mcast mroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
show ip multicast interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
show ip multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
show ip ospf abr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
show ip ospf area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
show ip ospf asbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
show ip ospf database database-summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
show ip ospf database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
show ip ospf interface brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
show ip ospf interface stats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
show ip ospf interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
show ip ospf neighbor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
show ip ospf range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
show ip ospf statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
show ip ospf stub table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
show ip ospf virtual-link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
show ip ospf virtual-links brief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
show ip ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
show ip pim bsr-router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
show ip pim interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143
show ip pim neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
show ip pim rp hash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
1766
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1767 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ip pim rp mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
show ip protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
show ip rip interface brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
show ip rip interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
show ip rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
show ip route configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
show ip route preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
show ip route summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
show ip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
show ip source binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
show ip ssh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
show ip telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697
show ip traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
show ip verify interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
show ip verify source interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
show ip vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
show ip vrrp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
show ipv6 access-lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
show ipv6 brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
show ipv6 dhcp binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
show ipv6 dhcp interface (Privileged EXEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
show ipv6 dhcp interface (User EXEC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
show ipv6 dhcp interface out-of-band statistics. . . . . . . . . . . 509
show ipv6 dhcp pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
show ipv6 dhcp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
show ipv6 dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
show ipv6 interface management statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
show ipv6 interface out-of-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
show ipv6 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
show ipv6 mld groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
show ipv6 mld interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
show ipv6 mld snooping groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
show ipv6 mld snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Appendix A: List of Commands
1767
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1768 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ipv6 mld snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
show ipv6 mld traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
show ipv6 mld-proxy groups detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
show ipv6 mld-proxy groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
show ipv6 mld-proxy interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
show ipv6 mld-proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
show ipv6 neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
show ipv6 ospf abr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
show ipv6 ospf area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
show ipv6 ospf asbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
show ipv6 ospf border-routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
show ipv6 ospf database database-summary . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290
show ipv6 ospf database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
show ipv6 ospf interface brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
show ipv6 ospf interface stats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
show ipv6 ospf interface vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
show ipv6 ospf interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
show ipv6 ospf neighbor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
show ipv6 ospf range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
show ipv6 ospf stub table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
show ipv6 ospf virtual-links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
show ipv6 ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
show ipv6 pim bsr-router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
show ipv6 pim interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
show ipv6 pim neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
show ipv6 pim rp hash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
show ipv6 pim rp mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
show ipv6 pimsm bsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
show ipv6 pimsm interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
show ipv6 pimsm neighbor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163
show ipv6 pimsm rphash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
1768
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1769 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show ipv6 pimsm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
show ipv6 pimsm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
show ipv6 route preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
show ipv6 route summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
show ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
show ipv6 traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
show ipv6 vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
show iscsi sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
show iscsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
show isdp entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
show isdp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
show isdp neighbors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
show isdp traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
show isdp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
show lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
show line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478
show link-dependency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
show lldp dcbx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
show lldp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
show lldp local-device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
show lldp remote-device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
show lldp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
show lldp tlv-select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
show lldp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
show logging email statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
show logging file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
show logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
show mac access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
show mac address-table address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
show mac address-table count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
show mac address-table dynamic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
show mac address-table filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
show mac address-table interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Appendix A: List of Commands
1769
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1770 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show mac address-table multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
show mac address-table static. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
show mac address-table vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
show mac address-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
show mail-server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
show management access-class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487
show management access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
show memory cpu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657
show monitor session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
show mvr interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
show mvr members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
show mvr traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
show mvr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
show parser macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
show passwords configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
show passwords result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507
show policy-map interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
show policy-map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
show port protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
show ports security addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
show ports security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
show power-usage-history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
show process cpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1660
show radius statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
show rmon alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
show rmon alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520
show rmon collection history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
show rmon events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
show rmon history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
show rmon log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
show rmon statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
show running-config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
show sdm prefer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535
1770
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1771 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show service-acl interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
show service-policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
show sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
show sflow agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
show sflow destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568
show sflow polling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
show sflow sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570
show slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
show snmp engineID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
show snmp filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576
show snmp group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
show snmp user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578
show snmp views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
show snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
show sntp configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
show sntp server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
show sntp status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
show spanning-tree summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
show spanning-tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
show startup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
show statistics port-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
show statistics switchport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
show statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
show storm-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
show supported cardtype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
show supported switchtype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
show switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668
show switchport protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
show switchport voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
show syslog-servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
show system id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
show system power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
show system temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680
Appendix A: List of Commands
1771
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1772 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
show system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676
show tacacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
show tech-support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681
show time-range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705
show trapflags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1581
show users accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
show users login-history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
show users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1683
show version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684
show vlan association mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
show vlan association subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
show vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
show voice vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
show vrrp interface brief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
show vrrp interface stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
show vrrp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
show vrrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350
shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Simple Network Time Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
SNMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
snmp-server community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
snmp-server community-group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
snmp-server contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586
snmp-server enable traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586
snmp-server engineID local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
snmp-server filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590
snmp-server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
snmp-server host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
snmp-server location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
snmp-server user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596
snmp-server v3-host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
snmp-server view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
1772
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1773 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
sntp authenticate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
sntp authentication-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
sntp broadcast client enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
sntp client poll timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
sntp server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
sntp trusted-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
sntp unicast client enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
sntp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
source-ip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Spanning Tree Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
spanning-tree auto-portfast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
spanning-tree bpdu flooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
spanning-tree bpdu-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
spanning-tree cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
spanning-tree disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
spanning-tree forward-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
spanning-tree guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
spanning-tree loopguard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
spanning-tree max-age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
spanning-tree max-hops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
spanning-tree mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
spanning-tree mst configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
spanning-tree mst cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
spanning-tree mst port-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
spanning-tree mst priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
spanning-tree portfast default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
spanning-tree portfast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
spanning-tree port-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
spanning-tree priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
spanning-tree tcnguard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
spanning-tree transmit hold-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
spanning-tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Appendix A: List of Commands
1773
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1774 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
split-horizon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
SSH Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685
stack-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687
Starting the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1732
Static LAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Static Reject Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
Static Routes/ECMP Static Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
storm-control broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
storm-control multicast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
storm-control unicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
switchport access vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
switchport forbidden vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only . . . . . 782
switchport general allowed vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
switchport general ingress-filtering disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
switchport general pvid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
switchport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
switchport protected name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
switchport protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
switchport trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
switchport voice detect auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Syslog Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
System Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
TACACS+ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
tacacs-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
tacacs-server key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
tacacs-server timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
1774
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1775 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Telnet Server Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695
telnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688
Terminal Length Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
terminal length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
test copper-port tdr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
Time Ranges Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
time-range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
timers spf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
traceroute ethernet cfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
traceroute ipv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
traffic-shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
tunnel destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
Tunnel Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
tunnel mode ipv6ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
tunnel source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
update bootcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
user group moveusers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
user group name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
user group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
user group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
User Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
User Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
user name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
user password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
user session-timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
user-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
user-logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396
username (Mail Server Configuration Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
username password encrypted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Appendix A: List of Commands
1775
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1776 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
username unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Using CLI Functions and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Utility Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
Utility Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands . . . . . . . . 1335
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands . . . . . . . . 1338
vlan (Global Config). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
vlan association mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
vlan association subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
vlan database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
vlan makestatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
vlan protocol group add protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
vlan protocol group name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
vlan protocol group remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
vlan protocol group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
vlan routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
VLANs and LAGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
voice vlan (Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
Voice VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
voice vlan data priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
voice vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
vrrp accept-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
vrrp authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
vrrp description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
vrrp ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
vrrp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
vrrp preempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
vrrp priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
1776
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1777 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
VRRP Route/Interface Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vrrp timers advertise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vrrp timers learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vrrp track interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vrrp track ip route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A: List of Commands
1336
1345
1346
1347
1348
1715
1715
1461
1777
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1778 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
1778
Appendix A: List of Commands
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1783 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM201.book Page 1784 Monday, October 3, 2011 2:21 PM
Printed in the U.S.A.
w w w. del l . co m | s upp ort . del l . c om
.